29 CFR Part 1926 — Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

PART 1926—SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3704; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; and Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), or 8-2020 (85 FR 58393), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911, unless otherwise noted Sections 1926.58, 1926.59, 1926.60, and 1926.65 also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553 and 29 CFR part 1911. Section 1926.61 also issued under 49 U.S.C. 1801-1819 and 5 U.S.C. 553. Section 1926.62 also issued under sec. 1031, Public Law 102-550, 106 Stat. 3672 (42 U.S.C. 4853). Section 1926.65 also issued under sec. 126, Public Law 99-499, 100 Stat. 1614 (reprinted at 29 U.S.C.A. 655 Note) and 5 U.S.C. 553. Source: 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, unless otherwise noted. Editorial Notes: Nomenclature changes to part 1926 appear at 84 FR 21597, May 14, 2019. Subpart A—General Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; § 1926.1 Purpose and scope. (a) This part sets forth the safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor under section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The standards are published in subpart C of this part and following subparts. (b) Subpart B of this part contains statements of general policy and interpretations of section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act having general applicability. § 1926.2 Variances from safety and health standards. (a) Variances from standards which are, or may be, published in this part may be granted under the same circumstances whereunder variances may be granted under section 6(b)(A) or 6(d) of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 65). The procedures for the granting of variances and for related relief under this part are those published in part 1905 of this title. (b) Any requests for variances under this section shall also be considered requests for variances under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and any requests for variances under Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act with respect to construction safety or health standards shall be considered to be also variances under the Construction Safety Act. Any variance from a construction safety or health standard which is contained in this part and which is incorporated by reference in part 1910 of this title shall be deemed a variance from the standard under both the Construction Safety Act and the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. § 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry. (a) It shall be a condition of each contract which is subject to section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act that the Secretary of Labor or any authorized representative shall have a right of entry to any site of contract performance for the following purposes: (1) To inspect or investigate the matter of compliance with the safety and health standards contained in subpart C of this part and following subparts; and (2) To carry out the duties of the Secretary under section 107(b) of the Act. (b) For the purpose of carrying out his investigative duties under the Act, the Secretary of Labor may, by agreement, use with or without reimbursement the services, personnel, and facilities of any State or Federal agency. Any agreements with States under this section shall be similar to those provided for under the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act under 41 CFR part 50-205. § 1926.4 Rules of practice for administrative adjudications for enforcement of safety and health standards. (a) The rules of practice for administrative adjudications for the enforcement of the safety and health standards contained in subpart C of this part and the following subparts shall be the same as those published in part 6 of this title with respect to safety and health violations of the Service Contract Act of 1965 (69 Stat. 1035), except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section. (b) In the case of debarment, the findings required by section 107(d) of the Act shall be made by the hearing examiner or the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health, as the case may be. Whenever, as provided in section 107(d)(2), a contractor requests termination of debarment before the end of the 3-year period prescribed in that section, the request shall be filed in writing with the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health who shall publish a notice in the Federal Register § 1926.5 OMB control numbers under the Paperwork Reduction Act. The following sections or paragraphs each contain a collection of information requirement which has been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under the control number listed. 29 CFR citation OMB control No. 1926.33 1218-0065 1926.50 1218-0093 1926.52 1218-0048 1926.53 1218-0103 1926.59 1218-0072 1926.60 1218-0183 1926.62 1218-0189 1926.64 1218-0200 1926.65 1218-0202 1926.103 1218-0099 1926.200 1218-0132 1926.250 1218-0093 1926.251 1218-0233 1926.403 1218-0130 1926.404 1218-0130 1926.405 1218-0130 1926.407 1218-0130 1926.408 1218-0130 1926.453(a)(2) 1218-0216 1926.502 1218-0197 1926.503 1218-0197 1926.550(a)(1) 1218-0115 1926.550(a)(2) 1218-0115 1926.550(a)(4) 1218-0115 1926.550(a)(6) 1218-0113 1926.550(a)(11) 1218-0054 1926.550(a)(16) 1218-0115 1926.550(b)(2) 1218-0232 1926.550(g) 1218-0151 1926.552 1218-0231 1926.652 1218-0137 1926.703 1218-0095 1926.800 1218-0067 1926.803 1218-0067 1926.900 1218-0217 1926.903 1218-0227 1926.1080 1218-0069 1926.1081 1218-0069 1926.1083 1218-0069 1926.1090 1218-0069 1926.1091 1218-0069 1926.1101 1218-0134 1926.1103 1218-0085 1926.1104 1218-0084 1926.1106 1218-0086 1926.1107 1218-0083 1926.1108 1218-0087 1926.1109 1218-0089 1926.1110 1218-0082 1926.1111 1218-0090 1926.1112 1218-0080 1926.1113 1218-0079 1926.1114 1218-0088 1926.1115 1218-0044 1926.1116 1218-0081 1926.1117 1218-0010 1926.1118 1218-0104 1926.1124 1218-0267 1926.1126 1218-0252 1926.1127 1218-0186 1926.1128 1218-0129 1926.1129 1218-0128 1926.1144 1218-0101 1926.1145 1218-0126 1926.1147 1218-0108 1926.1148 1218-0145 1926.1153 1218-0266 1926.1203 1218-0258 1926.1204 1218-0258 1926.1205 1218-0258 1926.1206 1218-0258 1926.1207 1218-0258 1926.1208 1218-0258 1926.1209 1218-0258 1926.1210 1218-0258 1926.1211 1218-0258 1926.1212 1218-0258 1926.1213 1218-0258 1926.1402 1218-0261 1926.1403 1218-0261 1926.1404 1218-0261 1926.1406 1218-0261 1926.1407 1218-0261 1926.1408 1218-0261 1926.1409 1218-0261 1926.1410 1218-0261 1926.1411 1218-0261 1926.1412 1218-0261 1926.1413 1218-0261 1926.1414 1218-0261 1926.1417 1218-0261 1926.1423 1218-0261 1926.1424 1218-0261 1926.1427 1218-0270 1926.1428 1218-0261 1926.1431 1218-0261 1926.1433 1218-0261 1926.1434 1218-0261 1926.1435 1218-0261 1926.1436 1218-0261 1926.1437 1218-0261 1926.1441 1218-0261 [61 FR 5509, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 63 FR 3814, Jan. 27, 1998; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, 1998; 63 FR 17094, Apr. 8, 1998; 64 FR 18810, Apr. 16, 1999; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006; 75 FR 68430, Nov. 8, 2010; 81 FR 48710, July 26, 2016; 81 FR 53268, Aug. 12, 2016; 83 FR 9703, Mar. 7, 2018; 84 FR 34785, July 19, 2019] § 1926.6 Incorporation by reference. (a) The standards of agencies of the U.S. Government, and organizations which are not agencies of the U.S. Government which are incorporated by reference in this part, have the same force and effect as other standards in this part. Only the mandatory provisions ( i.e., (b) The standards listed in this section are incorporated by reference into this part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, OSHA must publish a document in the Federal Register (c) Copies of standards listed in this section and issued by private standards organizations are available for purchase from the issuing organizations at the addresses or through the other contact information listed below for these private standards organizations. In addition, the standards are available for inspection at any Regional Office of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), or at the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW, Room N-3508, Washington, DC 20210; telephone: 202-693-2350 (TTY number: 877-889-5627). These standards are also available for inspection at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of these standards at NARA, telephone: 202-741-6030, or go to www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. (d) The following material is available for purchase from the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 1330 Kemper Meadow Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45240; telephone: 513-742-6163; fax: 513-742-3355; e-mail: [email protected] http://www.acgih.org (1) Threshold Limit Values of Airborne Contaminants for 1970, 1970, IBR approved for § 1926.55(a) and appendix A of § 1926.55. (2) [Reserved] (e) The following material is available for purchase from the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, Fourth Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: 212-642-4900; fax: 212-302-1286; e-mail: [email protected]; http://www.ansi.org/. (1) ANSI A10.3-1970, Safety Requirements for Explosive-Actuated Fastening Tools, IBR approved for § 1926.302(e). (2) ANSI A10.4-1963, Safety Requirements for Workmen's Hoists, IBR approved for § 1926.552(c). (3) ANSI A10.5-1969, Safety Requirements for Material Hoists, IBR approved for § 1926.552(b). (4) ANSI A11.1-1965 (R1970), Practice for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for § 1926.56(b). (5) ANSI A17.1-1965, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). (6) ANSI A17.1a-1967, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks Supplement, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). (7) ANSI A17.1b-1968, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks Supplement, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). (8) ANSI A17.1c-1969, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks Supplement, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). (9) ANSI A17.1d-1970, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks Supplement, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). (10) ANSI A17.2-1960, Practice for the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector's Manual), IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). (11) ANSI A17.2a-1965, Practice for the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector's Manual) Supplement, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). (12) ANSI A17.2b-1967, Practice for the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector's Manual) Supplement, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). (13) ANSI A92.2-1969, Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms, IBR approved for §§ 1926.453(a) and 1926.453(b). (14) ANSI B7.1-1970, Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, IBR approved for §§ 1926.57(g), 1926.303(b), 1926.303(c), and 1926.303(d). (15) ANSI B20.1-1957, Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related Equipment, IBR approved for § 1926.555(a). (16) ANSI B56.1-1969, Safety Standards for Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR approved for § 1926.602(c). (17)-(22) [Reserved] (23) ANSI O1.1-1961, Safety Code for Woodworking Machinery, IBR approved for § 1926.304(f). (24) ANSI Z35.1-1968, Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs; IBR approved for § 1926.200(b), (c), and 1 (i). Copies available for purchase from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1-877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com. (25) ANSI Z35.2-1968, Specifications for Accident Prevention Tags, IBR approved for § 1926.200(i). (26) ANSI Z49.1-1967, Safety in Welding and Cutting, IBR approved for § 1926.350(j). (27) USA Z53.1-1967 (also referred to as ANSI Z53.1-1967), Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI approved October 9, 1967; IBR approved for § 1926.200(c). Copies available for purchase from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1-877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com. (28) ANSI Z535.1-2006 (R2011), Safety Colors, reaffirmed July 19, 2011; IBR approved for § 1926.200(c). Copies available for purchase from the: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: 212-642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: 877-699-9277; Web site: www.techstreet.com. (29) ANSI Z535.2-2011, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs, published September 15, 2011; IBR approved for § 1926.200(b), (c), and (i). Copies available for purchase from the: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: 212-642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: 877-699-9277; Web site: www.techstreet.com. (30) ANSI Z535.5-2011, Safety Tags and Barricade Tapes (for Temporary Hazards), published September 15, 2011, including Errata, November 14, 2011; IBR approved for § 1926.200(h) and (i). Copies available for purchase from the: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: 212-642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: 877-699-9277; Web site: www.techstreet.com. (31) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1-2010, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, Approved April 3, 2010; IBR approved for § 1926.102(b). Copies are available for purchase from: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: (212) 642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site: http://global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (877) 699-9277; Web site: http://techstreet.com. (32) ANSI Z87.1-2003, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, Approved June 19, 2003; IBR approved for § 1926.102(b). Copies available for purchase from the: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: (212) 642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site: http://global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (877) 699-9277; Web site: http://techstreet.com. (33) ANSI Z87.1-1989 (R-1998), Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection, Reaffirmation approved January 4, 1999; IBR approved for § 1926.102(b). Copies are available for purchase from: (i) American National Standards Institute's e-Standards Store, 25 W 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: (212) 642-4980; Web site: http://webstore.ansi.org/; (ii) IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site: http://global.ihs.com; (iii) TechStreet Store, 3916 Ranchero Dr., Ann Arbor, MI 48108; telephone: (877) 699-9277; Web site: http://techstreet.com. (34) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2009, American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection, approved January 26, 2009; IBR approved for § 1926.100(b)(1)(i). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-2009 are available for purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. (35) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2003, American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection; IBR approved for § 1926.100(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-2003 are available for purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. (36) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-1997, American National Standard for Personnel Protection—Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers—Requirements; IBR approved for § 1926.100(b)(1)(iii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-1997 are available for purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. (f) The following material is available for purchase from standards resellers such as the Document Center Inc., 111 Industrial Road, Suite 9, Belmont, CA 94002; telephone: 650-591-7600; fax: 650-591-7617; e-mail: [email protected] http://www.document-center.com/ (1) ANSI B15.1-1953 (R1958), Safety Code for Mechanical Power-Transmission Apparatus, revised 1958, IBR approved for § 1926.300(b)(2). (2) ANSI B30.5-1968, Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes, approved Dec. 16, 1968, IBR approved for § 1926.1433(a). (g) The following material is available for purchase from the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959; telephone: 610-832-9585; fax: 610-832-9555; e-mail: [email protected]; http://www.astm.org/: (1) ASTM A370-1968, Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing and Steel Products, IBR approved for § 1926.1001(f). (2) [Reserved] (3) ASTM D56-1969, Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by the Tag Closed Tester, IBR approved for § 1926.155(i). (4) ASTM D93-1969, Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by the Pensky Martens Closed Tester, IBR approved for § 1926.155(i). (5) ASTM D323-1958 (R1968), Standard Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid Method), IBR approved for § 1926.155(m). (h) The following material is available for purchase from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016; telephone: 1-800-843-2763; fax: 973-882-1717; e-mail: [email protected]; http://www.asme.org/: (1) ASME B30.2-2005, Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running Trolley Hoist), issued Dec. 30, 2005 (“ASME B30.2-2005”), IBR approved for § 1926.1438(b). (2) ASME B30.5-2004, Mobile and Locomotive Cranes, issued Sept. 27, 2004 (“ASME B30.5-2004”), IBR approved for §§ 1926.1414(b); 1926.1414(e); 1926.1433(b). (3) ASME B30.7-2001, Base-Mounted Drum Hoists, issued Jan. 21, 2002 (“ASME B30.7-2001”), IBR approved for § 1926.1436(e). (4) ASME B30.14-2004, Side Boom Tractors, issued Sept. 20, 2004 (“ASME B30.14-2004”), IBR approved for § 1926.1440(c). (5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, 1968, IBR approved for §§ 1926.152(i), 1926.306(a), and 1926.603(a). (6) ASME Power Boilers, Section I, 1968, IBR approved for § 1926.603(a). (i) The following material is available for purchase from the American Society of Agricultural and Biological Engineers (ASABE), 2950 Niles Road, St. Joseph, MI 49085; telephone: 269-429-0300; fax: 269-429-3852; e-mail: [email protected]; http://www.asabe.org/: (1) ASAE R313.1-1971, Soil Cone Penetrometer, reaffirmed 1975, IBR approved for § 1926.1002(e). (2) [Reserved] (j) The following material is available for purchase from the American Welding Society (AWS), 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126; telephone: 1-800-443-9353; Web site: http://www.aws.org/: (1) AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002, Structural Welding Code—Steel, 18th ed., ANSI approved Aug. 31, 2001 (“AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002”), IBR approved for § 1926.1436(c). (2) ANSI/AWS D14.3-94, Specification for Welding Earthmoving and Construction Equipment, ANSI approved Jun. 11, 1993 (“ANSI/AWS D14.3-94”), IBR approved for § 1926.1436(c). (k) The following material is available for purchase from the British Standards Institution (BSI), 389 Chiswick High Road, London, W4 4AL, United Kingdom; telephone: + 44 20 8996 9001; fax: + 44 20 8996 7001; e-mail: [email protected]; http://www.bsigroup.com/: (1) BS EN 13000:2004, Cranes—Mobile Cranes, published Jan. 4, 2006 (“BS EN 13000:2004”), IBR approved for § 1926.1433(c). (2) BS EN 14439:2006, Cranes—Safety—Tower Cranes, published Jan. 31, 2007 (“BS EN 14439:2006”), IBR approved for § 1926.1433(c). (l) The following material is available for purchase from the Bureau of Reclamation, United States Department of the Interior, 1849 C Street, NW., Washington DC 20240; telephone: 202-208-4501; Web site: http://www.usbr.gov/: (1) Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Part II, Sept. 1971, IBR approved for § 1926.1000(f). (2) [Reserved] (m) The following material is available for purchase from the California Department of Industrial Relations, 455 Golden Gate Avenue, San Francisco CA 94102; telephone: (415) 703-5070; e-mail: [email protected]; http://www.dir.ca.gov/: (1) Construction Safety Orders, IBR approved for § 1926.1000(f). (2) [Reserved] (n) The following material is available from the Federal Highway Administration, United States Department of Transportation, 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE, Washington, DC 20590; telephone: 202-366-4000; website: www.fhwa.dot.gov/: (1) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, 2009 Edition, December 2009 (including Revision 1 dated May 2012 and Revision 2 dated May 2012), (“MUTCD”) IBR approved for §§ 1926.200(g) and 1926.201(a). (2) [Reserved] (o) The following material is available for purchase from the General Services Administration (GSA), 1800 F Street, NW., Washington, DC 20405; telephone: (202) 501-0800; Web site: http://www.gsa.gov/: (1) QQ-P-416, Federal Specification Plating Cadmium (Electrodeposited), IBR approved for § 1926.104(e). (2) [Reserved] (p) The following material is available for purchase from the Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME), 1120 19th Street, NW., Suite 310, Washington, DC 20036; telephone: 202-429-9280; fax: 202-429-9280; e-mail: [email protected]; http://www.ime.org/: (1) IME Pub. No. 2, American Table of Distances for Storage of Explosives, Jun. 5, 1964, IBR approved for § 1926.914(a). (2) IME Pub. No. 20, Radio Frequency Energy—A Potential Hazard in the Use of Electric Blasting Caps, Mar. 1968, IBR approved for § 1926.900(k). (q) The following material is available from the International Labour Organization (ILO), 4 route des Morillons, CH-1211 Genève 22, Switzerland; telephone: +41 (0) 22 799 6111; fax: +41 (0) 22 798 8685; website: //www.ilo.org/: (1) Guidelines for the Use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses, Revised Edition 2011, Occupational safety and health series; 22 (Rev.2011), IBR approved for § 1926.1101. (2) [Reserved] (r) The following material is available for purchase from the International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse, Case postale 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland; telephone: + 41 22 749 01 11; fax: + 41 22 733 34 30; Web site: http://www.iso.org/: (1) ISO 3471:2008(E), Earth-moving machinery—Roll-over protective structures—Laboratory tests and performance requirements, Fourth Edition, Aug. 8, 2008 (“ISO 3471:2008”), IBR approved for §§ 1926.1001(c) and 1926.1002(c). (2) ISO 5700:2013(E), Tractors for agriculture and forestry—Roll-over protective structures—Static test method and acceptance conditions, Fifth Edition, May 1, 2013 (“ISO 5700:2013”), IBR approved for § 1926.1002(c). (3) ISO 27850:2013(E), Tractors for agriculture and forestry—Falling object protective structures—Test procedures and performance requirements, First Edition, May.01, 2013 (“ISO 27850:2013”), IBR approved for § 1926.1003(c). (4) ISO 11660-1:2008(E), Cranes—Access, guards and restraints—Part 1: General, 2d ed., Feb. 15, 2008 (“ISO 11660-1:2008(E)”), IBR approved for § 1926.1423(c). (5) ISO 11660-2:1994(E), Cranes—Access, guards and restraints—Part 2: Mobile cranes, 1994 (“ISO 11660-2:1994(E)”), IBR approved for § 1926.1423(c). (6) ISO 11660-3:2008(E), Cranes—Access, guards and restraints—Part 3: Tower cranes, 2d ed., Feb. 15, 2008 (“ISO 11660-3:2008(E)”), IBR approved for § 1926.1423(c). (s) The following material is available for purchase from the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169; telephone: 617-770-3000; fax: 617-770-0700; Web site: http://www.nfpa.org/: (1) NFPA 10A-1970, Maintenance and Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers, IBR approved for § 1926.150(c). (2) NFPA 13-1969, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, IBR approved for § 1926.152(d). (3) NFPA 30-1969, The Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, IBR approved for § 1926.152(c). (4) NFPA 80-1970, Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, Class E or F Openings, IBR approved for § 1926.152(b). (5) NFPA 251-1969, Standard Methods of Fire Test of Building Construction and Material, IBR approved for §§ 1926.152(b) and 1926.155(f). (6) NFPA 385-1966, Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for § 1926.152(g). (t) The following material is available for purchase from the Power Crane and Shovel Association (PCSA), 6737 W. Washington Street, Suite 2400, Milwaukee, WI 53214; telephone: 1-800-369-2310; fax: 414-272-1170; Web site: http://www.aem.org/CBC/ProdSpec/PCSA/: (1) PCSA Std. No. 1, Mobile Crane and Excavator Standards, 1968, IBR approved for § 1926.602(b). (2) PCSA Std. No. 2, Mobile Hydraulic Crane Standards, 1968 (“PCSA Std. No. 2 (1968)”), IBR approved for §§ 1926.602(b) and 1926.1433(a). (3) PCSA Std. No. 3, Mobile Hydraulic Excavator Standards, 1969, IBR approved for § 1926.602(b). (u) The following material is available from the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096; telephone: 1-877-606-7323; fax: 724-776-0790; website: www.sae.org/: (1) SAE 1970 Handbook, IBR approved for § 1926.602(b). (2) SAE J166-1971, Trucks and Wagons, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). (3) SAE J167, Protective Frame with Overhead Protection-Test Procedures and Performance Requirements, approved July 1970, IBR approved for § 1926.1003(b). (4) SAE J168, Protective Enclosures-Test Procedures and Performance Requirements, approved July 1970, IBR approved for § 1926.1002(b). (5) SAE J185 (reaf. May 2003), Access Systems for Off-Road Machines, reaffirmed May 2003 (“SAE J185 (May 1993)”), IBR approved for § 1926.1423(c). (6) SAE J236-1971, Self-Propelled Graders, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). (7) SAE J237-1971, Front End Loaders and Dozers, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). (8) SAE J319b-1971, Self-Propelled Scrapers, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). (9) SAE J320a, Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over Protective Structure for Rubber-Tired, Self-Propelled Scrapers, revised July 1969 (editorial change July 1970), IBR approved for § 1926.1001(b). (10) SAE J321a-1970, Fenders for Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage Equipment, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). (11) SAE J333a-1970, Operator Protection for Agricultural and Light Industrial Tractors, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). (12) SAE J334a, Protective Frame Test Procedures and Performance Requirements, revised July 1970, IBR approved for § 1926.1002(b). (13) SAE J386-1969, Seat Belts for Construction Equipment, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). (14) SAE J394, Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over Protective Structure for Rubber-Tired Front End Loaders and Rubber-Tired Dozers, approved July 1969 (editorial change July 1970), IBR approved for § 1926.1001(b). (15) SAE J395, Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over Protective Structure for Crawler Tractors and Crawler-Type Loaders, approved July 1969 (editorial change July 1970), IBR approved for § 1926.1001(b). (16) SAE J396, Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over Protective Structure for Motor Graders, approved July 1969 (editorial change July 1970), IBR approved for § 1926.1001(b). (17) SAE J397, Critical Zone Characteristics and Dimensions for Operators of Construction and Industrial Machinery, approved July 1969, IBR approved for § 1926.1001(b). (18) SAE J987 (rev. Jun. 2003), Lattice Boom Cranes—Method of Test, revised Jun. 2003 (“SAE J987 (Jun. 2003)”), IBR approved for § 1926.1433(c). (19) SAE J1063 (rev. Nov. 1993), Cantilevered Boom Crane Structures—Method of Test, revised Nov. 1993 (“SAE J1063 (Nov. 1993)”), IBR approved for § 1926.1433(c). (v) The following material is available for purchase from the United States Army Corps of Engineers, 441 G Street, NW., Washington, DC 20314; telephone: 202-761-0011; e-mail: [email protected]; http://www.usace.army.mil/: (1) EM-385-1-1, General Safety Requirements, Mar. 1967, IBR approved for § 1926.1000(f). (2) [Reserved] [75 FR 48130, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 77 FR 37600, June 22, 2012; 78 FR 35566, June 13, 2013; 78 FR 66641, Nov. 6, 2013; 79 FR 20692, Apr. 11, 2014; 81 FR 16092, Mar. 25, 2016; 84 FR 21574, May 14, 2019] Subpart B—General Interpretations Authority: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333). § 1926.10 Scope of subpart. (a) This subpart contains the general rules of the Secretary of Labor interpreting and applying the construction safety and health provisions of section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (83 Stat. 96). Section 107 requires as a condition of each contract which is entered into under legislation subject to Reorganization Plan Number 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), and which is for construction, alteration, and/or repair, including painting and decorating, that no contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work shall require any laborer or mechanic employed in the performance of the contract to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health or safety, as determined under construction safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary by regulation. § 1926.11 Coverage under section 103 of the act distinguished. (a) Coverage under section 103. (b) Coverage under section 107. § 1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950. (a) General provisions. (b) The Plan. (2) Federal-Aid Highway Acts. (3) National Housing Act (12 U.S.C. 1713, 1715a, 1715e, 1715k, 1715l(d)(3) and (4), 1715v, 1715w, 1715x, 1743, 1747, 1748, 1748h-2, 1750g, 1715l(h)(1), 1715z(j)(1), 1715z-1, 1715y(d), Subchapter 1x-A and 1x-B, 1715z-7). (i) Rental Housing—Section 1713 provides mortgage and insurance on rental housing of eight or more units and on mobile-home courts. (ii) Section 1715a—Repealed. (iii) Cooperative Housing—Section 1715e authorizes mortgage insurance on cooperative housing of five or more units as well as supplementary loans for improvement of repair or resale of memberships. (iv) Urban Renewal Housing—Section 1715k provides mortgage insurance on single family or multifamily housing in approved urban renewal areas. (v) Low or Moderate Income Housing—Section 1715L(d) (3) and (4) insures mortgages on low-cost single family or multifamily housing. (vi) Housing for Elderly—Section 1715v provides mortgage insurance on rental housing for elderly or handicapped persons. (vii) Nursing Homes—Section 1715w authorizes mortgage insurance on nursing home facilities and major equipment. (viii) Experimental Housing—Section 1715x provides mortgage insurance on single family or multifamily housing with experimental design of materials. (ix) War Housing Insurance—Section 1743 not active. (x) Yield Insurance—Section 1747 insures investment returns on multifamily housing. (xi) Armed Services Housing—Section 1748b to assist in relieving acute shortage and urgent need for family housing at or in areas adjacent to military installations. (xii) Defense Housing for Impacted Areas—Section 1748h-2 provides mortgage insurance on single family or multifamily housing for sale or rent primarily to military or civilian personnel of the Armed Services, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, or Atomic Energy Commission. (xiii) Defense Rental Housing—Section 1750g provides for mortgage insurance in critical defense housing areas. (xiv) Rehabilitation—Section 1715L (h)(1) provides mortgage insurance for nonprofit organizations to finance the purchase and rehabilitation of deteriorating or substandard housing for subsequent resale to low-income home purchasers. There must be located on the property five or more single family dwellings of detached, semidetached, or row construction. (xv) Homeowner Assistance—Section 1715Z(j)(1) authorizes mortgage insurance to nonprofit organizations or public bodies or agencies executed to finance sale of individual dwellings to lower income individuals or families. Also includes the rehabilitation of such housing if it is deteriorating or substandard for subsequent resale to lower income home purchasers. (xvi) Rental Housing Assistance—Section 1715Z-1 authorizes mortgage insurance and interest reduction payments on behalf of owners of rental housing projects designed for occupancy by lower income families. Payments are also authorized for certain State or locally aided projects. (xvii) Condominium Housing—Section 1715y(d) provides mortgage insurance on property purchased for the development of building sites. This includes waterlines and water supply installations, sewer lines and sewage disposal installations, steam, gas, and electrical lines and installations, roads, streets, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, storm drainage facilities, and other installations or work. (xviii) Group Medical Practice Facilities—Subchapter LX-B authorizes mortgage insurance for the financing of construction and equipment, of facilities for group practice of medicine, optometry, or dentistry. (xix) Nonprofit Hospitals—1715z-7 authorizes mortgage insurance to cover new and rehabilitated hospitals, including initial equipment. (4) Hospital Survey and Construction Act, as amended by the Hospital and Medical Facilities Amendments of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 291e). (5) Federal Airport Act (49 U.S.C. 1114(b)). (6) Housing Act of 1949 (42 U.S.C. 1459). (7) School Survey and Construction Act of 1950 (20 U.S.C. 636). (8) Defense Housing & Community Facilities & Services Act of 1951 (42 U.S.C. 1592i). (9) United States Housing Act of 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1416). (10) Federal Civil Defense Act of 1950 (50 U.S.C. App. 2281). (11) Delaware River Basin Compact (sec. 15.1, 75 Stat. 714). (12) Cooperative Research Act (20 U.S.C. 332a(c)). (13) Health Professions Educational Assistance Act of 1963 (42 U.S.C. 292d (c)(4), 293a(c)(5)). (14) Mental Retardation Facilities Construction Act (42 U.S.C. 295(a)(2)(D), 2662(5), 2675(a)(5)). (15) Community Mental Health Centers Act (42 U.S.C. 2685(a)(5)). (16) Higher Education Facilities Act of 1963 (20 U.S.C. 753). (17) Vocational Educational Act of 1963 (20 U.S.C. 35f). (18) Library Services and Construction Act (20 U.S.C. 355e(a)(4)). (19) Urban Mass Transportation Act of 1954 (49 U.S.C. 1609). (20) Economic Opportunity Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 2947). (i) Authorizes Federal assistance for construction of projects, buildings and works which will provide young men and women in rural and urban residential centers with education, vocational training, and useful work experience (Title I). (ii) Authorizes financial assistance for construction work planned and carried out at the community level for antipoverty programs (Title II): ( a ( b ( c (iii) Authorizes loans or guarantees loans to small businesses for construction work (Title IV). (iv) Authorizes the payment of the cost of experimental, pilot, or demonstration projects to foster State programs providing construction work experience or training for unemployed fathers and needy people (Title V). (21) Housing Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 1486(f); 42 U.S.C. 1452b(e)). (22) The Commercial Fisheries Research and Development Act of 1964 (16 U.S.C. 779e(b)). (23) The Nurse Training Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 296a(b)(5)). (24) Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 241i, 848). (25) Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended by the Water Quality Act of 1965 (3 U.S.C. 466e(g)). (26) Appalachian Regional Development Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. App. 402). (27) National Technical Institute for the Deaf Act (20 U.S.C. 684(b)(5)). (28) Housing Act of 1959 (12 U.S.C. 1701(q)(c)(3)). (29) College Housing Act of 1950, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1749a(f)). (30) Housing and Urban Development Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 1500c-3, 3107). (i) Grants to States and local public bodies to assist in any construction work to be carried out under the open-space land and urban beautification provisions contained therein. It provides for parks and recreation areas, conservation of land and other natural resources, and historical and scenic purposes. (ii) Grants to local public bodies and agencies to finance specific projects for basic public water facilities (including works for the storage, treatment, purification, and distribution of water), and for basic public sewer facilities (other than “treatment works” as defined in the Federal Water Pollution Control Act). (iii) Grants to any local public body or agency to assist in financing neighborhood facilities. These facilities must be necessary for carrying out a program of health, recreational, social, or similar community service and located so as to be available for the use of the area's low or moderate income residents. (31) National Foundation on the Arts and the Humanities Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 954(k)). (32) Public Works and Economic Development Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3222). (i) Grants for the acquisition or development of land or improvements for public works or development facility usage in redevelopment areas. It authorizes loans to assist in financing the purchase or development of land for public works which will assist in the creation of long-term employment opportunities in the area. (ii) Loans for the purchase or development of land and facilities (including machinery and equipment) for industrial or commercial usage within redevelopment areas; guarantee of loans for working capital made to private borrowers by private lending institutions in connection with direct loan projects; and to contract to pay to, or on behalf of, business entities locating in redevelopment areas, a portion of the interest costs which they incur in financing their expansions from private sources. (iii) Loans and grants to create economic development centers within designated county economic development districts. (33) High-Speed Ground Transportation Study (40 U.S.C. 1636(b)). (34) Heart Disease, Cancer and Stroke Amendments of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 299(b)(4)). (35) Mental Retardation Facilities and Community Mental Health Centers Construction Act Amendments of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 618(g)). (36) Vocational Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1965 (29 U.S.C. 41a(b)(4)). (37) Clean Air and Solid Waste Disposal Acts (42 U.S.C. 3256). (38) Medical Library Assistance Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 280b-3(b)(3)). (39) Veterans Nursing Home Care Act (38 U.S.C. 5035(a)(8)). (40) National Capital Transportation Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. 682(b)(4)). (41) Alaska Centennial—1967 (80 Stat. 82). (42) Model Secondary School for the Deaf Act (80 Stat. 1028). (43) Allied Health Professions Personnel Training Act of 1966 (42 U.S.C. 295h(b)(2)(E)). (44) Demonstration Cities and Metropolitan Development Act of 1966 (42 U.S.C. 3310; 12 U.S.C. 1715c; 42 U.S.C. 1416). (i) Grants to assist in the construction, rehabilitation, alteration, or repair of residential property only if such residential property is designed for residential use for eight or more families to enable city demonstration agencies to carry out comprehensive city demonstration programs (42 U.S.C. 3310). (ii) Amends the National Housing Act (12 U.S.C. 1715c) and the Housing Act of 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1416). See these acts for coverage. (45) Air Quality Act of 1967 (42 U.S.C. 1857j-3). (46) Elementary and Secondary Education Amendments of 1967 (Title VII—Bilingual Education Act) (20 U.S.C. 880b-6). (47) Vocational Rehabilitation Amendments of 1967 (29 U.S.C. 42a(c)(3)). (48) National Visitor Center Facilities Act of 1968 (40 U.S.C. 808). (49) Juvenile Delinquency Prevention and Control Act of 1968 (42 U.S.C. 3843). (50) Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968 (including New Communities Act of 1968) (42 U.S.C. 3909). (i) Guarantees, and commitments to guarantee, the bonds, debentures, notes, and other obligations issued by new community developers to help finance new community development projects. (ii) Amends section 212(a) of the National Housing Act, adding section 236 for “Rental Housing for Lower Income Families” and section 242 “Mortgage Insurance for Nonprofit Hospitals” thereto. (51) Public Health Service Act Amendment (Alcoholic and Narcotic Addict Rehabilitation Amendments of 1968) (42 U.S.C. 2681, et seq.). (52) Vocational Education Amendments of 1968 (20 U.S.C. 1246). (53) Postal Reorganization Act (39 U.S.C. 410(d)(2)). (54) Airport and Airway Development Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91-258, section 52(b)(7)). (55)(i) Public Law 91-230. (ii) Education of the Handicapped Act (20 U.S.C. 12326, 1404(a)). (56) Housing and Urban Development Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91-609, section 707(b)). (57) Developmental Disabilities Services and Facilities Construction Amendments of 1970 (Pub. L. 91-517, section 135(a)(5)). (58) Rail Passenger Service Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91-518, section 405(d)). (c) VA and FHA housing. § 1926.13 Interpretation of statutory terms. (a) The terms construction, alteration, repair contractor subcontractor (b) It should be noted that section 1 of the Davis-Bacon Act limits minimum wage protection to laborers and mechanics “employed directly” upon the “site of the work.” There is no comparable limitation in section 107 of the Act. Section 107 expressly requires as a self-executing condition of each covered contract that no contractor or subcontractor shall require “any laborer or mechanic employed in the performance of the contract to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health or safety” as these health and safety standards are applied in the rules of the Secretary of Labor. (c) The term subcontractor § 1926.14 Federal contract for “mixed” types of performance. (a) It is the intent of the Congress to provide safety and health protection of Federal, federally financed, or federally assisted construction. See, for example, H. Report No. 91-241, 91st Cong., first session, p. 1 (1969). Thus, it is clear that when a Federal contract calls for mixed types of performance, such as both manufacturing and construction, section 107 would apply to the construction. By its express terms, section 107 applies to a contract which is “for construction, alteration, and/or repair.” Such a contract is not required to be exclusively for such services. The application of the section is not limited to contracts which permit an overall characterization as “construction contracts.” The text of section 107 is not so limited. (b) When the mixed types of performances include both construction and manufacturing, see also § 1926.15(b) concerning the relationship between the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act and section 107. § 1926.15 Relationship to the Service Contract Act; Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act. (a) A contract for “construction” is one for nonpersonal service. See, e.g., 41 CFR 1-1.208. Section 2(e) of the Service Contract Act of 1965 requires as a condition of every Federal contract (and bid specification therefor) exceeding $2,500, the “principal purpose” of which is to furnish services to the United States through the use of “service employees,” that certain safety and health standards be met. See 29 CFR part 1925, which contains the Department rules concerning these standards. Section 7 of the Service Contract Act provides that the Act shall not apply to “any contract of the United States or District of Columbia for construction, alteration, and/or repair, including painting and decorating of public buildings or public works.” It is clear from the legislative history of section 107 that no gaps in coverage between the two statutes are intended. (b) The Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act requires that contracts entered into by any Federal agency for the manufacture or furnishing of materials, supplies, articles, and equipment in any amount exceeding $10,000 must contain, among other provisions, a requirement that “no part of such contract will be performed nor will any of the materials, supplies, articles or equipment to be manufactured or furnished under said contract be manufactured or fabricated in any plants, factories, buildings, or surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary or hazardous or dangerous to the health and safety of employees engaged in the performance of said contract.” The rules of the Secretary concerning these standards are published in 41 CFR part 50-204, and express the Secretary of Labor's interpretation and application of section 1(e) of the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act to certain particular working conditions. None of the described working conditions are intended to deal with construction activities, although such activities may conceivably be a part of a contract which is subject to the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act. Nevertheless, such activities remain subject to the general statutory duty prescribed by section 1(e). Section 103(b) of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act provides, among other things, that the Act shall not apply to any work required to be done in accordance with the provisions of the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act. § 1926.16 Rules of construction. (a) The prime contractor and any subcontractors may make their own arrangements with respect to obligations which might be more appropriately treated on a jobsite basis rather than individually. Thus, for example, the prime contractor and his subcontractors may wish to make an express agreement that the prime contractor or one of the subcontractors will provide all required first-aid or toilet facilities, thus relieving the subcontractors from the actual, but not any legal, responsibility (or, as the case may be, relieving the other subcontractors from this responsibility). In no case shall the prime contractor be relieved of overall responsibility for compliance with the requirements of this part for all work to be performed under the contract. (b) By contracting for full performance of a contract subject to section 107 of the Act, the prime contractor assumes all obligations prescribed as employer obligations under the standards contained in this part, whether or not he subcontracts any part of the work. (c) To the extent that a subcontractor of any tier agrees to perform any part of the contract, he also assumes responsibility for complying with the standards in this part with respect to that part. Thus, the prime contractor assumes the entire responsibility under the contract and the subcontractor assumes responsibility with respect to his portion of the work. With respect to subcontracted work, the prime contractor and any subcontractor or subcontractors shall be deemed to have joint responsibility. (d) Where joint responsibility exists, both the prime contractor and his subcontractor or subcontractors, regardless of tier, shall be considered subject to the enforcement provisions of the Act. Subpart C—General Safety and Health Provisions Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; § 1926.20 General safety and health provisions. (a) Contractor requirements. (b) Accident prevention responsibilities. (2) Such programs shall provide for frequent and regular inspections of the job sites, materials, and equipment to be made by competent persons designated by the employers. (3) The use of any machinery, tool, material, or equipment which is not in compliance with any applicable requirement of this part is prohibited. Such machine, tool, material, or equipment shall either be identified as unsafe by tagging or locking the controls to render them inoperable or shall be physically removed from its place of operation. (4) The employer shall permit only those employees qualified by training or experience to operate equipment and machinery. (c) The standards contained in this part shall apply with respect to employments performed in a workplace in a State, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Wake Island, Outer Continental Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, and Johnston Island. (d) (1) If a particular standard is specifically applicable to a condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process, it shall prevail over any different general standard which might otherwise be applicable to the same condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process. (2) On the other hand, any standard shall apply according to its terms to any employment and place of employment in any industry, even though particular standards are also prescribed for the industry to the extent that none of such particular standards applies. (e) In the event a standard protects on its face a class of persons larger than employees, the standard shall be applicable under this part only to employees and their employment and places of employment. (f) Compliance duties owed to each employee Personal protective equipment. (2) Training. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008; 85 FR 8735, Feb. 18, 2020; 85 FR 8735, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1926.21 Safety training and education. (a) General requirements. (b) Employer responsibility. (2) The employer shall instruct each employee in the recognition and avoidance of unsafe conditions and the regulations applicable to his work environment to control or eliminate any hazards or other exposure to illness or injury. (3) Employees required to handle or use poisons, caustics, and other harmful substances shall be instructed regarding the safe handling and use, and be made aware of the potential hazards, personal hygiene, and personal protective measures required. (4) In job site areas where harmful plants or animals are present, employees who may be exposed shall be instructed regarding the potential hazards, and how to avoid injury, and the first aid procedures to be used in the event of injury. (5) Employees required to handle or use flammable liquids, gases, or toxic materials shall be instructed in the safe handling and use of these materials and made aware of the specific requirements contained in subparts D, F, and other applicable subparts of this part. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 80 FR 25518, May 4, 2015] § 1926.22 Recording and reporting of injuries. [Reserved] § 1926.23 First aid and medical attention. First aid services and provisions for medical care shall be made available by the employer for every employee covered by these regulations. Regulations prescribing specific requirements for first aid, medical attention, and emergency facilities are contained in subpart D of this part. § 1926.24 Fire protection and prevention. The employer shall be responsible for the development and maintenance of an effective fire protection and prevention program at the job site throughout all phases of the construction, repair, alteration, or demolition work. The employer shall ensure the availability of the fire protection and suppression equipment required by subpart F of this part. § 1926.25 Housekeeping. (a) During the course of construction, alteration, or repairs, form and scrap lumber with protruding nails, and all other debris, shall be kept cleared from work areas, passageways, and stairs, in and around buildings or other structures. (b) Combustible scrap and debris shall be removed at regular intervals during the course of construction. Safe means shall be provided to facilitate such removal. (c) Containers shall be provided for the collection and separation of waste, trash, oily and used rags, and other refuse. Containers used for garbage and other oily, flammable, or hazardous wastes, such as caustics, acids, harmful dusts, etc. shall be equipped with covers. Garbage and other waste shall be disposed of at frequent and regular intervals. § 1926.26 Illumination. Construction areas, aisles, stairs, ramps, runways, corridors, offices, shops, and storage areas where work is in progress shall be lighted with either natural or artificial illumination. The minimum illumination requirements for work areas are contained in subpart D of this part. § 1926.27 Sanitation. Health and sanitation requirements for drinking water are contained in subpart D of this part. § 1926.28 Personal protective equipment. (a) The employer is responsible for requiring the wearing of appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is an exposure to hazardous conditions or where this part indicates the need for using such equipment to reduce the hazards to the employees. (b) Regulations governing the use, selection, and maintenance of personal protective and lifesaving equipment are described under subpart E of this part. § 1926.29 Acceptable certifications. (a) Pressure vessels. (b) Boilers. (c) Other requirements. § 1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repairing. (a) General. (b) Applicable safety and health standards. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 61 FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1926.32 Definitions. The following definitions shall apply in the application of the regulations in this part: (a) Act (b) ANSI (c) Approved (d) Authorized person (e) Administration (f) Competent person (g) Construction work. Construction work (h) Defect (i) Designated person (j) Employee Laborer mechanic (k) Employer (l) Hazardous substance (m) Qualified (n) Safety factor (o) Secretary (p) SAE (q) Shall (r) Should (s) Suitable [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993] § 1926.33 Access to employee exposure and medical records. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1020 of this chapter. [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] § 1926.34 Means of egress. (a) General. (b) Exit marking. (c) Maintenance and workmanship. [58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993] § 1926.35 Employee emergency action plans. (a) Scope and application. (b) Elements. (1) Emergency escape procedures and emergency escape route assignments; (2) Procedures to be followed by employees who remain to operate critical plant operations before they evacuate; (3) Procedures to account for all employees after emergency evacuation has been completed; (4) Rescue and medical duties for those employees who are to perform them; (5) The preferred means of reporting fires and other emergencies; and (6) Names or regular job titles of persons or departments who can be contacted for further information or explanation of duties under the plan. (c) Alarm system. (2) If the employee alarm system is used for alerting fire brigade members, or for other purposes, a distinctive signal for each purpose shall be used. (d) Evacuation. (e) Training. (2) The employer shall review the plan with each employee covered by the plan at the following times: (i) Initially when the plan is developed, (ii) Whenever the employee's responsibilities or designated actions under the plan change, and (iii) Whenever the plan is changed. (3) The employer shall review with each employee upon initial assignment those parts of the plan which the employee must know to protect the employee in the event of an emergency. The written plan shall be kept at the workplace and made available for employee review. For those employers with 10 or fewer employees the plan may be communicated orally to employees and the employer need not maintain a written plan. [58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993] Subpart D—Occupational Health and Environmental Controls Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3704; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; and Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), or 8-2020 (85 FR 58393), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Sections 1926.59, 1926.60, and 1926.65 also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553 and 29 CFR part 1911. Section 1926.61 also issued under 49 U.S.C. 1801-1819 and 5 U.S.C. 553. Section 1926.62 also issued under sec. 1031, Public Law 102-550, 106 Stat. 3672 (42 U.S.C. 4853). Section 1926.65 also issued under sec. 126, Public Law 99-499, 100 Stat. 1614 (reprinted at 29 U.S.C.A. 655 Note) and 5 U.S.C. 553. § 1926.50 Medical services and first aid. (a) The employer shall insure the availability of medical personnel for advice and consultation on matters of occupational health. (b) Provisions shall be made prior to commencement of the project for prompt medical attention in case of serious injury. (c) In the absence of an infirmary, clinic, hospital, or physician, that is reasonably accessible in terms of time and distance to the worksite, which is available for the treatment of injured employees, a person who has a valid certificate in first-aid training from the U.S. Bureau of Mines, the American Red Cross, or equivalent training that can be verified by documentary evidence, shall be available at the worksite to render first aid. (d)(1) First aid supplies shall be easily accessible when required. (2) The contents of the first aid kit shall be placed in a weatherproof container with individual sealed packages for each type of item, and shall be checked by the employer before being sent out on each job and at least weekly on each job to ensure that the expended items are replaced. (e) Proper equipment for prompt transportation of the injured person to a physician or hospital, or a communication system for contacting necessary ambulance service, shall be provided. (f)(1) In areas where 911 emergency dispatch services are not available, the telephone numbers of the physicians, hospitals, or ambulances shall be conspicuously posted. (2) In areas where 911 emergency dispatch services are available and an employer uses a communication system for contacting necessary emergency-medical service, the employer must: (i) Ensure that the communication system is effective in contacting the emergency-medical service; and (ii)(A) When using a communication system in an area that does not automatically supply the caller's latitude and longitude information to the 911 emergency dispatcher, the employer must post in a conspicuous location at the worksite either: (1) The latitude and longitude of the worksite; or (2) Other location-identification information that communicates effectively to employees the location of the worksite. (B) The requirement specified in paragraph (f)(2)(ii)(A) of this section does not apply to worksites with readily available telephone land lines that have 911 emergency service that automatically identifies the location of the caller. (g) Where the eyes or body of any person may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes and body shall be provided within the work area for immediate emergency use. Appendix A to § 1926.50—First aid Kits (Non-Mandatory) First aid supplies are required to be easily accessible under paragraph § 1926.50(d)(1). An example of the minimal contents of a generic first aid kit is described in American National Standard (ANSI) Z308.1-1978 “Minimum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type First-aid Kits”. The contents of the kit listed in the ANSI standard should be adequate for small work sites. When larger operations or multiple operations are being conducted at the same location, employers should determine the need for additional first aid kits at the worksite, additional types of first aid equipment and supplies and additional quantities and types of supplies and equipment in the first aid kits. In a similar fashion, employers who have unique or changing first-aid needs in their workplace may need to enhance their first-aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 300 log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to identify these unique problems. Consultation from the local fire/rescue department, appropriate medical professional, or local emergency room may be helpful to employers in these circumstances. By assessing the specific needs of their workplace, employers can ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies are available. Employers should assess the specific needs of their worksite periodically and augment the first aid kit appropriately. If it is reasonably anticipated employees will be exposed to blood or other potentially infectious materials while using first-aid supplies, employers should provide personal protective equipment (PPE). Appropriate PPE includes gloves, gowns, face shields, masks and eye protection (see “Occupational Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens”, 29 CFR 1910.1030(d)(3)) (56 FR 64175). [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998; 76 FR 80740, Dec. 27, 2011; 84 FR 21575, May 14, 2019] § 1926.51 Sanitation. (a) Potable water. (2) Portable containers used to dispense drinking water shall be capable of being tightly closed, and equipped with a tap. Water shall not be dipped from containers. (3) Any container used to distribute drinking water shall be clearly marked as to the nature of its contents and not used for any other purpose. (4) The common drinking cup is prohibited. (5) Where single service cups (to be used but once) are supplied, both a sanitary container for the unused cups and a receptacle for disposing of the used cups shall be provided. (6) Potable water (b) Nonpotable water. (2) There shall be no cross-connection, open or potential, between a system furnishing potable water and a system furnishing nonpotable water. (c) Toilets at construction jobsites. Table D-1 Number of employees Minimum number of facilities 20 or less 1. 20 or more 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 40 workers. 200 or more 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 50 workers. (2) Under temporary field conditions, provisions shall be made to assure not less than one toilet facility is available. (3) Job sites, not provided with a sanitary sewer, shall be provided with one of the following toilet facilities unless prohibited by local codes: (i) Privies (where their use will not contaminate ground or surface water); (ii) Chemical toilets; (iii) Recirculating toilets; (iv) Combustion toilets. (4) The requirements of this paragraph (c) for sanitation facilities shall not apply to mobile crews having transportation readily available to nearby toilet facilities. (d) Food handling. (2) All employee food service facilities and operations shall be carried out in accordance with sound hygienic principles. In all places of employment where all or part of the food service is provided, the food dispensed shall be wholesome, free from spoilage, and shall be processed, prepared, handled, and stored in such a manner as to be protected against contamination. (e) Temporary sleeping quarters. (f) Washing facilities. (2) General. (3) Lavatories. (ii) Each lavatory shall be provided with hot and cold running water, or tepid running water. (iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing agents shall be provided. (iv) Individual hand towels or sections thereof, of cloth or paper, air blowers or clean individual sections of continuous cloth toweling, convenient to the lavatories, shall be provided. (4) Showers. (ii) One shower shall be provided for each 10 employees of each sex, or numerical fraction thereof, who are required to shower during the same shift. (iii) Body soap or other appropriate cleansing agents convenient to the showers shall be provided as specified in paragraph (f)(3)(iii) of this section. (iv) Showers shall be provided with hot and cold water feeding a common discharge line. (v) Employees who use showers shall be provided with individual clean towels. (g) Eating and drinking areas. (h) Vermin control. (i) Change rooms. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011] § 1926.52 Occupational noise exposure. (a) Protection against the effects of noise exposure shall be provided when the sound levels exceed those shown in Table D-2 of this section when measured on the A-scale of a standard sound level meter at slow response. (b) When employees are subjected to sound levels exceeding those listed in Table D-2 of this section, feasible administrative or engineering controls shall be utilized. If such controls fail to reduce sound levels within the levels of the table, personal protective equipment as required in subpart E, shall be provided and used to reduce sound levels within the levels of the table. (c) If the variations in noise level involve maxima at intervals of 1 second or less, it is to be considered continuous. (d)(1) In all cases where the sound levels exceed the values shown herein, a continuing, effective hearing conservation program shall be administered. Table D-2—Permissible Noise Exposures Duration per day, hours Sound level dBA slow response 8 90 6 92 4 95 3 97 2 100 1 1 2 102 1 105 1 2 110 1 4 115 (2)(i) When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of noise exposure of different levels, their combined effect should be considered, rather than the individual effect of each. Exposure to different levels for various periods of time shall be computed according to the formula set forth in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section. (ii) F e T 1 L 1 T 2 L 2 T n L n Where: F e T L If the value of F e (iii) A sample computation showing an application of the formula in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section is as follows. An employee is exposed at these levels for these periods: 110 db A 1/4 100 db A 1/2 90 db A 1 1/2 F e 1/4 1/2 1/2 1/2 F e F e Since the value of F e (e) Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed 140 dB peak sound pressure level. § 1926.53 Ionizing radiation. (a) In construction and related activities involving the use of sources of ionizing radiation, the pertinent provisions of the Nuclear Regulatory Commission's Standards for Protection Against Radiation (10 CFR part 20), relating to protection against occupational radiation exposure, shall apply. (b) Any activity which involves the use of radioactive materials or X-rays, whether or not under license from the Nuclear Regulatory Commission, shall be performed by competent persons specially trained in the proper and safe operation of such equipment. In the case of materials used under Commission license, only persons actually licensed, or competent persons under direction and supervision of the licensee, shall perform such work. (c)-(r) [Reserved] Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under paragraphs (c) through (r) of this section are identical to those set forth at paragraphs (a) through (p) of § 1910.1096 of this chapter. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] § 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. (a) Only qualified and trained employees shall be assigned to install, adjust, and operate laser equipment. (b) Proof of qualification of the laser equipment operator shall be available and in possession of the operator at all times. (c) Employees, when working in areas in which a potential exposure to direct or reflected laser light greater than 0.005 watts (5 milliwatts) exists, shall be provided with antilaser eye protection devices as specified in subpart E of this part. (d) Areas in which lasers are used shall be posted with standard laser warning placards. (e) Beam shutters or caps shall be utilized, or the laser turned off, when laser transmission is not actually required. When the laser is left unattended for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour, overnight, or at change of shifts, the laser shall be turned off. (f) Only mechanical or electronic means shall be used as a detector for guiding the internal alignment of the laser. (g) The laser beam shall not be directed at employees. (h) When it is raining or snowing, or when there is dust or fog in the air, the operation of laser systems shall be prohibited where practicable; in any event, employees shall be kept out of range of the area of source and target during such weather conditions. (i) Laser equipment shall bear a label to indicate maximum output. (j) Employees shall not be exposed to light intensities above: (1) Direct staring: 1 micro-watt per square centimeter; (2) Incidental observing: 1 milliwatt per square centimeter; (3) Diffused reflected light: 2 1/2 (k) Laser unit in operation should be set up above the heads of the employees, when possible. (l) Employees shall not be exposed to microwave power densities in excess of 10 milliwatts per square centimeter. § 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and mists. (a) Employers must limit an employee's exposure to any substance listed in Table 1 or 2 of this section in accordance with the following: (1) Substances with limits preceded by (C)—Ceiling Values. (2) Other substances—8-hour Time Weighted Averages. (b) To achieve compliance with paragraph (a) of this section, administrative or engineering controls must first be implemented whenever feasible. When such controls are not feasible to achieve full compliance, protective equipment or other protective measures shall be used to keep the exposure of employees to air contaminants within the limits prescribed in this section. Any equipment and technical measures used for this purpose must first be approved for each particular use by a competent industrial hygienist or other technically qualified person. Whenever respirators are used, their use shall comply with § 1926.103. (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply to the exposure of employees to airborne asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, or actinolite dust. Whenever any employee is exposed to airborne asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, or actinolite dust, the requirements of § 1926.1101 shall apply. (d) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply to the exposure of employees to formaldehyde. Whenever any employee is exposed to formaldehyde, the requirements of § 1910.1048 of this title shall apply. Table 1 to § 1926.55—Permissible Exposure Limits for Airborne Contaminants Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3 b Skin Abate; see Temephos Acetaldehyde 75-07-0 200 360 — Acetic acid 64-19-7 10 25 — Acetic anhydride 108-24-7 5 20 — Acetone 67-64-1 1000 2400 — Acetonitrile 75-05-8 40 70 — 2-Acetylaminofluorine; see § 1926.1114 53-96-3 Acetylene 74-86-2 E Acetylene dichloride; see 1,2-Dichloroethylene Acetylene tetrabromide 79-27-6 1 14 — Acrolein 107-02-8 0.1 0.25 — Acrylamide 79-06-1 — 0.3 X Acrylonitrile; see § 1926.1145 107-13-1 Aldrin 309-00-2 — 0.25 X Allyl alcohol 107-18-6 2 5 X Allyl chloride 107-05-1 1 3 — Allyl glycidyl ether (AGE) 106-92-3 (C)10 (C)45 — Allyl propyl disulfide 2179-59-1 2 12 — alpha-Alumina 1344-28-1 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Alundum; see alpha-Alumina 4-Aminodiphenyl; see § 1926.1111 92-67-1 2-Aminoethanol; see Ethanolamine 2-Aminopyridine 504-29-0 0.5 2 — Ammonia 7664-41-7 50 35 — Ammonium sulfamate 7773-06-0 Total dust — 15 — Respirable fraction — 5 — n-Amyl acetate 628-63-7 100 525 — sec-Amyl acetate 626-38-0 125 650 — Aniline and homologs 62-53-3 5 19 X Anisidine (o-, p-isomers) 29191-52-4 — 0.5 X Antimony and compounds (as Sb) 7440-36-0 — 0.5 — ANTU (alpha Naphthylthiourea) 86-88-4 — 0.3 — Argon 7440-37-1 E Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As); see § 1926.1118 7440-38-2 — — — Arsenic, organic compounds (as As) 7440-38-2 — 0.5 — Arsine 7784-42-1 0.05 0.2 — Asbestos; see § 1926.1101 Azinphos-methyl 86-50-0 — 0.2 X Barium, soluble compounds (as Ba) 7440-39-3 — 0.5 — Benzene g 71-43-2 Benzidine; see § 1926.1110 92-87-5 p-Benzoquinone; see Quinone Benzo(a)pyrene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles Benzoyl peroxide 94-36-0 — 5 — Benzyl chloride 100-44-7 1 5 — Beryllium and beryllium compounds (as Be); see 1926.1124 (q) 7440-41-7 — 0.002 — Biphenyl; see Diphenyl Bisphenol A; see Diglycidyl ether Boron oxide 1303-86-2 Total dust — 15 — Boron tribromide 10294-33-4 1 10 — Boron trifluoride 7637-07-2 (C)1 (C)3 — Bromine 7726-95-6 0.1 0.7 — Bromine pentafluoride 7789-30-2 0.1 0.7 — Bromoform 75-25-2 0.5 5 X Butadiene (1,3-Butadiene); see 29 CFR 1910.1051; 29 CFR 1910.19(l) 106-99-0 STEL 1 ppm/5 ppm — Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan 2-Butanone (Methyl ethyl ketone) 78-93-3 200 590 — 2-Butoxyethanol 111-76-2 50 240 X n-Butyl-acetate 123-86-4 150 710 — sec-Butyl acetate 105-46-4 200 950 — tert-Butyl acetate 540-88-5 200 950 — n-Butyl alcohol 71-36-3 100 300 — sec-Butyl alcohol 78-92-2 150 450 — tert-Butyl alcohol 75-65-0 100 300 — Butylamine 109-73-9 (C)5 (C)15 X tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO 3 n 1189-85-1 n-Butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) 2426-08-6 50 270 — Butyl mercaptan 109-79-5 0.5 1.5 — p-tert-Butyltoluene 98-51-1 10 60 — Cadmium (as Cd); see 1926.1127 7440-43-9 Calcium carbonate 1317-65-3 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Calcium oxide 1305-78-8 — 5 — Calcium sulfate 7778-18-9 Total dust — 15 — Respirable fraction — 5 — Camphor, synthetic 76-22-2 — 2 — Carbaryl (Sevin) 63-25-2 — 5 — Carbon black 1333-86-4 — 3.5 — Carbon dioxide 124-38-9 5000 9000 — Carbon disulfide 75-15-0 20 60 X Carbon monoxide 630-08-0 50 55 — Carbon tetrachloride 56-23-5 10 65 X Cellulose 9004-34-6 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Chlordane 57-74-9 — 0.5 X Chlorinated camphene 8001-35-2 — 0.5 X Chlorinated diphenyl oxide 55720-99-5 — 0.5 — Chlorine 7782-50-5 1 3 — Chlorine dioxide 10049-04-4 0.1 0.3 Chlorine trifluoride 7790-91-2 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 — Chloroacetaldehyde 107-20-0 (C)1 (C)3 — a-Chloroacetophenone (Phenacyl chloride) 532-27-4 0.05 0.3 — Chlorobenzene 108-90-7 75 350 — o-Chlorobenzylidene malononitrile 2698-41-1 0.05 0.4 — Chlorobromomethane 74-97-5 200 1050 — 2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene; see beta-Chloroprene Chlorodiphenyl (42% Chlorine) (PCB) 53469-21-9 — 1 X Chlorodiphenyl (54% Chlorine) (PCB) 11097-69-1 — 0.5 X 1-Chloro,2,3-epoxypropane; see Epichlorohydrin 2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene chlorohydrin Chloroethylene; see Vinyl chloride Chloroform (Trichloromethane) 67-66-3 (C)50 (C)240 — bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see § 1926.1108 542-88-1 Chloromethyl methyl ether; see § 1926.1106 107-30-2 1-Chloro-1-nitropropane 600-25-9 20 100 — Chloropicrin 76-06-2 0.1 0.7 — beta-Chloroprene 126-99-8 25 90 X Chromium (II) compounds (as Cr) 7440-47-3 — 0.5 — Chromium (III) compounds (as Cr) 7440-47-3 — 0.5 — Chromium (VI) compounds; See 1926.1126 o Chromium metal and insol. salts (as Cr) 7440-47-3 — 1 — Chrysene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles Coal tar pitch volatiles (benzene soluble fraction), anthracene, BaP, phenanthrene, acridine, chrysene, pyrene 65996-93-2 — 0.2 — Cobalt metal, dust, and fume (as Co) 7440-48-4 — 0.1 — Copper 7440-50-8 Fume (as Cu) — 0.1 — Dusts and mists (as Cu) — 1 — Corundum; see Emery Cotton dust (raw) — 1 Crag herbicide (Sesone) 136-78-7 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Cresol, all isomers 1319-77-3 5 22 X Crotonaldehyde 123-73-9; 2 6 4170-30-3 Cumene 98-82-8 50 245 X Cyanides (as CN) Varies with Compound — 5 X Cyanogen 460-19-5 10 — — Cyclohexane 110-82-7 300 1050 — Cyclohexanol 108-93-0 50 200 — Cyclohexanone 108-94-1 50 200 — Cyclohexene 110-83-8 300 1015 — Cyclonite 121-82-4 — 1.5 X Cyclopentadiene 542-92-7 75 200 — DDT, see Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane DDVP, see Dichlorvos 2,4-D (Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) 94-75-7 — 10 — Decaborane 17702-41-9 0.05 0.3 X Demeton (Systox) 8065-48-3 — 0.1 X Diacetone alcohol (4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone) 123-42-2 50 240 — 1,2-Diaminoethane; see Ethylenediamine Diazomethane 334-88-3 0.2 0.4 — Diborane 19287-45-7 0.1 0.1 — 1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (DBCP); see § 1926.1144 96-12-8 — 1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene dibromide Dibutyl phosphate 107-66-4 1 5 — Dibutyl phthalate 84-74-2 — 5 — Dichloroacetylene 7572-29-4 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 — o-Dichlorobenzene 95-50-1 (C)50 (C)300 — p-Dichlorobenzene 106-46-7 75 450 — 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidine; see § 1926.1107 91-94-1 Dichlorodifluoromethane 75-71-8 1000 4950 — 1,3-Dichloro-5,5-dimethyl hydantoin 118-52-5 — 0.2 — Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT) 50-29-3 — 1 X 1,1-Dichloroethane 75-34-3 100 400 — 1,2-Dichloroethane; see Ethylene dichloride 1,2-Dichloroethylene 540-59-0 200 790 — Dichloroethyl ether 111-44-4 (C)15 (C)90 X Dichloromethane; see Methylene chloride Dichloromonofluoromethane 75-43-4 1000 4200 — 1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroethane 594-72-9 (C)10 (C)60 — 1,2-Dichloropropane; see Propylene dichloride Dichlorotetrafluoroethane 76-14-2 1000 7000 — Dichlorvos (DDVP) 62-73-7 — 1 X Dieldrin 60-57-1 — 0.25 X Diethylamine 109-89-7 25 75 — 2-Diethylaminoethanol 100-37-8 10 50 X Diethylene triamine 111-40-0 (C)10 (C)42 X Diethyl ether; see Ethyl ether Difluorodibromomethane 75-61-6 100 860 — Diglycidyl ether (DGE) 2238-07-5 (C)0.5 (C)2.8 — Dihydroxybenzene; see Hydroquinone Diisobutyl ketone 108-83-8 50 290 — Diisopropylamine 108-18-9 5 20 X 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene; see § 1926.1115 60-11-7 Dimethoxymethane; see Methylal Dimethyl acetamide 127-19-5 10 35 X Dimethylamine 124-40-3 10 18 — Dimethylaminobenzene; see Xylidine Dimethylaniline (N,N-Dimethylaniline) 121-69-7 5 25 X Dimethylbenzene; see Xylene Dimethyl-1,2-dibromo- 2,2-dichloroethyl phosphate 300-76-5 — 3 — Dimethylformamide 68-12-2 10 30 X 2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone; see Diisobutyl ketone 1,1-Dimethylhydrazine 57-14-7 0.5 1 X Dimethylphthalate 131-11-3 — 5 — Dimethyl sulfate 77-78-3 1 5 X Dinitrobenzene (all isomers) 1 X (ortho) 528-29-0 (meta) 99-65-0 (para) 100-25-4 Dinitro-o-cresol 534-52-1 — 0.2 X Dinitrotoluene 25321-14-6 — 1.5 X Dioxane (Diethylene dioxide) 123-91-1 100 360 X Diphenyl (Biphenyl) 92-52-4 0.2 1 — Diphenylamine 122-39-4 — 10 — Diphenylmethane diisocyanate; see Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate Dipropylene glycol methyl ether 34590-94-8 100 600 X Di-sec octyl phthalate (Di-(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate) 117-81-7 — 5 — Emery 12415-34-8 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Endosulfan 115-29-7 — 0.1 X Endrin 72-20-8 — 0.1 X Epichlorohydrin 106-89-8 5 19 X EPN 2104-64-5 — 0.5 X 1,2-Epoxypropane; see Propylene oxide 2,3-Epoxy-1-propanol; see Glycidol Ethane 74-84-0 E Ethanethiol; see Ethyl mercaptan Ethanolamine 141-43-5 3 6 — 2-Ethoxyethanol (Cellosolve) 110-80-5 200 740 X 2-Ethoxyethyl acetate (Cellosolve acetate) 111-15-9 100 540 X Ethyl acetate 141-78-6 400 1400 — Ethyl acrylate 140-88-5 25 100 X Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol) 64-17-5 1000 1900 — Ethylamine 75-04-7 10 18 — Ethyl amyl ketone (5-Methyl-3-heptanone) 541-85-5 25 130 — Ethyl benzene 100-41-4 100 435 — Ethyl bromide 74-96-4 200 890 — Ethyl butyl ketone (3-Heptanone) 106-35-4 50 230 — Ethyl chloride 75-00-3 1000 2600 — Ethyl ether 60-29-7 400 1200 — Ethyl formate 109-94-4 100 300 — Ethyl mercaptan 75-08-1 0.5 1 — Ethyl silicate 78-10-4 100 850 — Ethylene 74-85-1 E Ethylene chlorohydrin 107-07-3 5 16 X Ethylenediamine 107-15-3 10 25 — Ethylene dibromide 106-93-4 (C)25 (C)190 X Ethylene dichloride (1,2-Dichloroethane) 107-06-2 50 200 — Ethylene glycol dinitrate 628-96-6 (C)0.2 (C)1 X Ethylene glycol methyl acetate; see Methyl cellosolve acetate Ethyleneimine; see § 1926.1112 151-56-4 Ethylene oxide; see § 1926.1147 75-21-8 Ethylidene chloride; see 1,1-Dichloroethane N-Ethylmorpholine 100-74-3 20 94 X Ferbam 14484-64-1 Total dust — 15 — Ferrovanadium dust 12604-58-9 — 1 — Fibrous Glass Total dust — Respirable fraction — — Fluorides (as F) Varies with compound — 2.5 — Fluorine 7782-41-4 0.1 0.2 — Fluorotrichloromethane (Trichlorofluoromethane) 75-69-4 1000 5600 — Formaldehyde; see § 1926.1148 50-00-0 Formic acid 64-18-6 5 9 — Furfural 98-01-1 5 20 X Furfuryl alcohol 98-00-0 50 200 — Gasoline 8006-61-9 A 3 — Glycerin (mist) 56-81-5 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Glycidol 556-52-5 50 150 — Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2-Ethoxyethanol Graphite, natural, respirable dust 7782-42-5 ( 2 ( 2 ( 2 Graphite, synthetic Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Guthion; see Azinphos methyl Gypsum 13397-24-5 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Hafnium 7440-58-6 — 0.5 — Helium 7440-59-7 E Heptachlor 76-44-8 — 0.5 X Heptane (n-Heptane) 142-82-5 500 2000 — Hexachloroethane 67-72-1 1 10 X Hexachloronaphthalene 1335-87-1 — 0.2 X n-Hexane 110-54-3 500 1800 — 2-Hexanone (Methyl n-butyl ketone) 591-78-6 100 410 — Hexone (Methyl isobutyl ketone) 108-10-1 100 410 — sec-Hexyl acetate 108-84-9 50 300 — Hydrazine 302-01-2 1 1.3 X Hydrogen 1333-74-0 E Hydrogen bromide 10035-10-6 3 10 — Hydrogen chloride 7647-01-0 (C)5 (C)7 — Hydrogen cyanide 74-90-8 10 11 X Hydrogen fluoride (as F) 7664-39-3 3 2 — Hydrogen peroxide 7722-84-1 1 1.4 — Hydrogen selenide (as Se) 7783-07-5 0.05 .02 — Hydrogen sulfide 7783-06-4 10 15 — Hydroquinone 123-31-9 — 2 — Indene 95-13-6 10 45 — Indium and compounds (as In) 7440-74-6 — 0.1 — Iodine 7553-56-2 (C)0.1 (C)1 — Iron oxide fume 1309-37-1 — 10 — Iron salts (soluble) (as Fe) Varies with compound — 1 — Isoamyl acetate 123-92-2 100 525 — Isoamyl alcohol (primary and secondary) 123-51-3 100 360 — Isobutyl acetate 110-19-0 150 700 — Isobutyl alcohol 78-83-1 100 300 — Isophorone 78-59-1 25 140 — Isopropyl acetate 108-21-4 250 950 — Isopropyl alcohol 67-63-0 400 980 — Isopropylamine 75-31-0 5 12 — Isopropyl ether 108-20-3 500 2100 — Isopropyl glycidyl ether (IGE) 4016-14-2 50 240 — Kaolin 1332-58-7 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Ketene 463-51-4 0.5 0.9 — Lead, inorganic (as Pb); see 1926.62 7439-92-1 Limestone 1317-65-3 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Lindane 58-89-9 — 0.5 X Lithium hydride 7580-67-8 — 0.025 — L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas) 68476-85-7 1000 1800 Magnesite 546-93-0 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Magnesium oxide fume 1309-48-4 Total particulate 15 — — Malathion 121-75-5 Total dust — 15 X Maleic anhydride 108-31-6 0.25 Manganese compounds (as Mn) 7439-96-5 — (C)5 — Manganese fume (as Mn) 7439-96-5 — (C)5 — Marble 1317-65-3 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Mercury (aryl and inorganic)(as Hg) 7439-97-6 0.1 X Mercury (organo) alkyl compounds (as Hg) 7439-97-6 — 0.01 X Mercury (vapor) (as Hg) 7439-97-6 — 0.1 X Mesityl oxide 141-79-7 25 100 — Methane 74-82-8 E Methanethiol; see Methyl mercaptan Methoxychlor 72-43-5 Total dust — 15 — 2-Methoxyethanol (Methyl cellosolve) 109-86-4 25 80 X 2-Methoxyethyl acetate (Methyl cellosolve acetate) 110-49-6 25 120 X Methyl acetate 79-20-9 200 610 — Methyl acetylene (Propyne) 74-99-7 1000 1650 — Methyl acetylene-propadiene mixture (MAPP) 1000 1800 — Methyl acrylate 96-33-3 10 35 X Methylal (Dimethoxy-methane) 109-87-5 1000 3100 — Methyl alcohol 67-56-1 200 260 — Methylamine 74-89-5 10 12 — Methyl amyl alcohol; see Methyl isobutyl carbinol Methyl n-amyl ketone 110-43-0 100 465 — Methyl bromide 74-83-9 (C)20 (C)80 X Methyl butyl ketone; see 2-Hexanone Methyl cellosolve; see 2-Methoxyethanol Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2-Methoxyethyl acetate Methylene chloride; see § 1910.1052 Methyl chloroform (1,1,1-Trichloroethane) 71-55-6 350 1900 — Methylcyclohexane 108-87-2 500 2000 — Methylcyclohexanol 25639-42-3 100 470 — o-Methylcyclohexanone 583-60-8 100 460 X Methylene chloride 75-09-2 500 1740 — Methylenedianiline (MDA) 101-77-9 Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK); see 2-Butanone Methyl formate 107-31-3 100 250 — Methyl hydrazine (Monomethyl hydrazine) 60-34-4 (C)0.2 (C)0.35 X Methyl iodide 74-88-4 5 28 X Methyl isoamyl ketone 110-12-3 100 475 — Methyl isobutyl carbinol 108-11-2 25 100 X Methyl isobutyl ketone; see Hexone Methyl isocyanate 624-83-9 0.02 0.05 X Methyl mercaptan 74-93-1 0.5 1 — Methyl methacrylate 80-62-6 100 410 — Methyl propyl ketone; see 2-Pentanone Methyl silicate 681-84-5 (C)5 (C)30 — alpha-Methyl styrene 98-83-9 (C)100 (C)480 — Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate (MDI) 101-68-8 (C)0.02 (C)0.2 — Mica; see Silicates Molybdenum (as Mo) 7439-98-7 Soluble compounds — 5 — Insoluble compounds Total dust — 15 — Monomethyl aniline 100-61-8 2 9 X Monomethyl hydrazine; see Methyl hydrazine Morpholine 110-91-8 20 70 X Naphtha (Coal tar) 8030-30-6 100 400 — Naphthalene 91-20-3 10 50 — alpha-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1104 134-32-7 beta-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1109 91-59-8 — Neon 7440-01-9 E Nickel carbonyl (as Ni) 13463-39-3 0.001 0.007 — Nickel, metal and insoluble compounds (as Ni) 7440-02-0 — 1 — Nickel, soluble compounds (as Ni) 7440-02-0 — 1 — Nicotine 54-11-5 — 0.5 X Nitric acid 7697-37-2 2 5 — Nitric oxide 10102-43-9 25 30 — p-Nitroaniline 100-01-6 1 6 X Nitrobenzene 98-95-3 1 5 X p-Nitrochlorobenzene 100-00-5 — 1 X 4-Nitrodiphenyl; see § 1926.1103 92-93-3 Nitroethane 79-24-3 100 310 — Nitrogen 7727-37-9 E Nitrogen dioxide 10102-44-0 (C)5 (C)9 — Nitrogen trifluoride 7783-54-2 10 29 — Nitroglycerin 55-63-0 (C)0.2 (C)2 X Nitromethane 75-52-5 100 250 — 1-Nitropropane 108-03-2 25 90 — 2-Nitropropane 79-46-9 25 90 — N-Nitrosodimethylamine; see § 1926.1116 62-79-9 — Nitrotoluene (all isomers) 5 30 X o-isomer 88-72-2; m-isomer 99-08-1; p-isomer 99-99-0 Nitrotrichloromethane; see Chloropicrin Nitrous oxide 10024-97-2 E Octachloronaphthalene 2234-13-1 — 0.1 X Octane 111-65-9 400 1900 — Oil mist, mineral 8012-95-1 — 5 — Osmium tetroxide (as Os) 20816-12-0 — 0.002 — Oxalic acid 144-62-7 — 1 — Oxygen difluoride 7783-41-7 0.05 0.1 — Ozone 10028-15-6 0.1 0.2 — Paraquat, respirable dust 4685-14-7; — 0.5 X 1910-42-5; 2074-50-2 Parathion 56-38-2 — 0.1 X Particulates not otherwise regulated Total dust organic and inorganic — 15 — PCB; see Chlorodiphenyl (42% and 54% chlorine) Pentaborane 19624-22-7 0.005 0.01 — Pentachloronaphthalene 1321-64-8 — 0.5 X Pentachlorophenol 87-86-5 — 0.5 X Pentaerythritol 115-77-5 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Pentane 109-66-0 500 1500 — 2-Pentanone (Methyl propyl ketone) 107-87-9 200 700 — Perchloroethylene (Tetrachloroethylene) 127-18-4 100 670 — Perchloromethyl mercaptan 594-42-3 0.1 0.8 — Perchloryl fluoride 7616-94-6 3 13.5 — Petroleum distillates (Naphtha)(Rubber Solvent) A 3 — Phenol 108-95-2 5 19 X p-Phenylene diamine 106-50-3 — 0.1 X Phenyl ether, vapor 101-84-8 1 7 — Phenyl ether-biphenyl mixture, vapor 1 7 — Phenylethylene; see Styrene Phenyl glycidyl ether (PGE) 122-60-1 10 60 — Phenylhydrazine 100-63-0 5 22 X Phosdrin (Mevinphos) 7786-34-7 — 0.1 X Phosgene (Carbonyl chloride) 75-44-5 0.1 0.4 — Phosphine 7803-51-2 0.3 0.4 — Phosphoric acid 7664-38-2 — 1 — Phosphorus (yellow) 7723-14-0 — 0.1 — Phosphorus pentachloride 10026-13-8 — 1 — Phosphorus pentasulfide 1314-80-3 — 1 — Phosphorus trichloride 7719-12-2 0.5 3 — Phthalic anhydride 85-44-9 2 12 — Picric acid 88-89-1 — 0.1 X Pindone (2-Pivalyl-1,3-indandione) 83-26-1 — 0.1 — Plaster of Paris 26499-65-0 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Platinum (as Pt) 7440-06-4 Metal — — — Soluble salts — 0.002 — Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products A 2 Portland cement 65997-15-1 Total dust — 15 — Respirable fraction 5 — Propane 74-98-6 E Propargyl alcohol 107-19-7 1 — X beta-Propriolactone; see § 1926.1113 57-57-8 n-Propyl acetate 109-60-4 200 840 — n-Propyl alcohol 71-23-8 200 500 — n-Propyl nitrate 627-13-4 25 110 — Propylene dichloride 78-87-5 75 350 — Propylene imine 75-55-8 2 5 X Propylene oxide 75-56-9 100 240 — Propyne; see Methyl acetylene Pyrethrum 8003-34-7 — 5 — Pyridine 110-86-1 5 15 — Quinone 106-51-4 0.1 0.4 — RDX; see Cyclonite Rhodium (as Rh), metal fume and insoluble compounds 7440-16-6 — 0.1 — Rhodium (as Rh), soluble compounds 7440-16-6 — 0.001 — Ronnel 299-84-3 — 10 — Rotenone 83-79-4 — 5 — Rouge Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Selenium compounds (as Se) 7782-49-2 — 0.2 — Selenium hexafluoride (as Se) 7783-79-1 0.05 0.4 — Silica, amorphous, precipitated and gel 112926-00-8 ( 2 ( 2 ( 2 Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth, containing less than 1% crystalline silica 61790-53-2 ( 2 ( 2 ( 2 Silica, crystalline, respirable dust Cristobalite; see 1926.1153 14464-46-1 Quartz; see 1926.1153 5 14808-60-7 Tripoli (as quartz); see 1926.1153 5 1317-95-9 Tridymite; see 1926.1153 15468-32-3 Silica, fused, respirable dust 60676-86-0 ( 2 ( 2 ( 2 Silicates (less than 1% crystalline silica) Mica (respirable dust) 12001-26-2 ( 2 ( 2 ( 2 Soapstone, total dust ( 2 ( 2 ( 2 Soapstone, respirable dust ( 2 ( 2 ( 2 Talc (containing asbestos); use asbestos limit; see § 1926.1101 Talc (containing no asbestos), respirable dust 14807-96-6 ( 2 ( 2 ( 2 Tremolite, asbestiform; see § 1926.1101 Silicon carbide 409-21-2 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Silver, metal and soluble compounds (as Ag) 7440-22-4 — 0.01 — Soapstone; see Silicates Sodium fluoroacetate 62-74-8 — 0.05 X Sodium hydroxide 1310-73-2 — 2 — Starch 9005-25-8 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Stibine 7803-52-3 0.1 0.5 — Stoddard solvent 8052-41-3 200 1150 — Strychnine 57-24-9 — 0.15 — Styrene 100-42-5 (C)100 (C)420 — Sucrose 57-50-1 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Sulfur dioxide 7446-09-5 5 13 — Sulfur hexafluoride 2551-62-4 1000 6000 — Sulfuric acid 7664-93-9 — 1 — Sulfur monochloride 10025-67-9 1 6 — Sulfur pentafluoride 5714-22-7 0.025 0.25 — Sulfuryl fluoride 2699-79-8 5 20 — Systox, see Demeton 2,4,5-T (2,4,5-trichlorophenoxyacetic acid) 93-76-5 — 10 — Talc; see Silicates— Tantalum, metal and oxide dust 7440-25-7 — 5 — TEDP (Sulfotep) 3689-24-5 — 0.2 X Teflon decomposition products A2 Tellurium and compounds (as Te) 13494-80-9 — 0.1 — Tellurium hexafluoride (as Te) 7783-80-4 0.02 0.2 — Temephos 3383-96-8 Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — TEPP (Tetraethyl pyrophosphate) 107-49-3 — 0.05 X Terphenyls 26140-60-3 (C)1 (C)9 — 1,1,1,2-Tetrachloro-2,2-difluoroethane 76-11-9 500 4170 — 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloro-1,2-difluoroethane 76-12-0 500 4170 — 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane 79-34-5 5 35 X Tetrachloroethylene; see Perchloroethylene Tetrachloromethane; see Carbon tetrachloride Tetrachloronaphthalene 1335-88-2 — 2 X Tetraethyl lead (as Pb) 78-00-2 — 0.1 X Tetrahydrofuran 109-99-9 200 590 — Tetramethyl lead, (as Pb) 75-74-1 — 0.15 X Tetramethyl succinonitrile 3333-52-6 0.5 3 X Tetranitromethane 509-14-8 1 8 — Tetryl (2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine) 479-45-8 — 1.5 X Thallium, soluble compounds (as Tl) 7440-28-0 — 0.1 X Thiram 137-26-8 — 5 — Tin, inorganic compounds (except oxides) (as Sn) 7440-31-5 — 2 — Tin, organic compounds (as Sn) 7440-31-5 — 0.1 — Tin oxide (as Sn) 21651-19-4 — — — Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Titanium dioxide 13463-67-7 Total dust — — Toluene 108-88-3 200 750 — Toluene-2,4-diisocyanate (TDI) 584-84-9 (C)0.02 (C)0.14 — o-Toluidine 95-53-4 5 22 X Toxaphene; see Chlorinated camphene Tremolite; see Silicates Tributyl phosphate 126-73-8 — 5 — 1,1,1-Trichloroethane; see Methyl chloroform 1,1,2-Trichloroethane 79-00-5 10 45 X Trichloroethylene 79-01-6 100 535 — Trichloromethane; see Chloroform Trichloronaphthalene 1321-65-9 — 5 X 1,2,3-Trichloropropane 96-18-4 50 300 — 1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane 76-13-1 1000 7600 — Triethylamine 121-44-8 25 100 — Trifluorobromomethane 75-63-8 1000 6100 — Trimethyl benzene 25551-13-7 25 120 — 2,4,6-Trinitrophenol; see Picric acid 2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine; see Tetryl 2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT) 118-96-7 — 1.5 X Triorthocresyl phosphate 78-30-8 — 0.1 — Triphenyl phosphate 115-86-6 — 3 — Tungsten (as W) 7440-33-7 Insoluble compounds — 5 — Soluble compounds — 1 — Turpentine 8006-64-2 100 560 — Uranium (as U) 7440-61-1 Soluble compounds — 0.2 — Insoluble compounds — 0.2 — Vanadium 1314-62-1 Respirable dust (as V 2 5 — (C)0.5 — Fume (as V 2 5 — (C)0.1 — Vegetable oil mist Total dust — — Respirable fraction — — Vinyl benzene; see Styrene Vinyl chloride; see § 1926.1117 75-01-4 Vinyl cyanide; see Acrylonitrile Vinyl toluene 25013-15-4 100 480 — Warfarin 81-81-2 — 0.1 — Xylenes (o-, m-, p-isomers) 1330-20-7 100 435 — Xylidine 1300-73-8 5 25 X Yttrium 7440-65-5 — 1 — Zinc chloride fume 7646-85-7 — 1 — Zinc oxide fume 1314-13-2 — 5 — Zinc oxide 1314-13-2 Total dust — 15 — Respirable fraction — 5 — Zirconium compounds (as Zr) 7440-67-7 — 5 Table 2 to § 1926.55—Mineral Dusts Substance mppcf (j) SILICA: Crystalline 250 (k) Quartz. Threshold Limit calculated from the formula (p) % SiO 2 Cristobalite Amorphous, including natural diatomaceous earth 20 SILICATES (less than 1% crystalline silica) Mica 20 Portland cement 50 Soapstone 20 Talc (non-asbestiform) 20 Talc (fibrous), use asbestos limit — Graphite (natural) 15 Inert or Nuisance Particulates: (m) 50 (or 15 mg/m 3 2 [Inert or Nuisance Dusts includes all mineral, inorganic, and organic dusts as indicated by examples in TLV's appendix D] Conversion factors mppcf × 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles per c.c. Footnotes to Tables 1 and 2 of this section: 1 2 3 4 5 * An “X” designation in the “Skin Designation” column indicates that the substance is a dermal hazard. a b c d e-f g h-i j k l m n 3 o 3 3 p q The 1970 TLV uses letter designations instead of a numerical value as follows: A 1 A 2 A 3 E Simple asphyxiants. The limiting factor is the available oxygen which shall be at least 19.5% and be within the requirements addressing explosion in part 1926. [39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 51 FR 37007, Oct. 17, 1986; 52 FR 46312, Dec. 4, 1987; 58 FR 35089, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9249, 9250, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 56856, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997; 71 FR 10381, Feb. 28, 2006; 71 FR 36009, June 23, 2006; 81 FR 16875, Mar. 25, 2016; 81 FR 31168, May 18, 2016; 81 FR 60273, Sept. 1, 2016; 82 FR 2750, Jan. 9, 2017; 84 FR 21576, May 14, 2019] § 1926.56 Illumination. (a) General. Table D-3—Minimum Illumination Intensities in Foot-Candles Foot-candles Area or operation 5 General construction area lighting. 3 General construction areas, concrete placement, excavation and waste areas, accessways, active storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and field maintenance areas. 5 Indoors: warehouses, corridors, hallways, and exitways. 5 Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work areas: (Exception: minimum of 10 foot-candles is required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling, mucking, and scaling. Bureau of Mines approved cap lights shall be acceptable for use in the tunnel heading.) 10 General construction plant and shops (e.g., batch plants, screening plants, mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, carpenter shops, rigging lofts and active storerooms, barracks or living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, mess halls, and indoor toilets and workrooms). 30 First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. (b) Other areas. § 1926.57 Ventilation. (a) General. (b) Local exhaust ventilation. (c) Design and operation. (d) Duration of operations. (2) Since dust capable of causing disability is, according to the best medical opinion, of microscopic size, tending to remain for hours in suspension in still air, it is essential that the exhaust system be continued in operation for a time after the work process or equipment served by the same shall have ceased, in order to ensure the removal of the harmful elements to the required extent. For the same reason, employees wearing respiratory equipment should not remove same immediately until the atmosphere seems clear. (e) Disposal of exhaust materials. (f) Abrasive blasting Definitions applicable to this paragraph Abrasive. (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. (iii) Blast cleaning barrel. (iv) Blast cleaning room. (v) Blasting cabinet. (vi) Clean air. (vii) Dust collector. (viii) Exhaust ventilation system. (ix) Particulate-filter respirator. (x) Respirable dust. (xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. (xii) Abrasive blasting. (2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting. (ii) The concentration of respirable dust or fume in the breathing zone of the abrasive-blasting operator or any other worker shall be kept below the levels specified in § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of this part. (iii) Organic abrasives which are combustible shall be used only in automatic systems. Where flammable or explosive dust mixtures may be present, the construction of the equipment, including the exhaust system and all electric wiring, shall conform to the requirements of American National Standard Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1-1961 (NFPA 91-1961), and subpart S of this part. The blast nozzle shall be bonded and grounded to prevent the build up of static charges. Where flammable or explosive dust mixtures may be present, the abrasive blasting enclosure, the ducts, and the dust collector shall be constructed with loose panels or explosion venting areas, located on sides away from any occupied area, to provide for pressure relief in case of explosion, following the principles set forth in the National Fire Protection Association Explosion Venting Guide. NFPA 68-1954. (3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (A) All air inlets and access openings shall be baffled or so arranged that by the combination of inward air flow and baffling the escape of abrasive or dust particles into an adjacent work area will be minimized and visible spurts of dust will not be observed. (B) The rate of exhaust shall be sufficient to provide prompt clearance of the dust-laden air within the enclosure after the cessation of blasting. (C) Before the enclosure is opened, the blast shall be turned off and the exhaust system shall be run for a sufficient period of time to remove the dusty air within the enclosure. (D) Safety glass protected by screening shall be used in observation windows, where hard deep-cutting abrasives are used. (E) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles shall be installed in multiple sets at all small access openings where dust might escape, and shall be inspected regularly and replaced when needed. ( 1 ( 2 (4) Exhaust ventilation systems. ( a ( b (ii) In installations where the abrasive is recirculated, the exhaust ventilation system for the blasting enclosure shall not be relied upon for the removal of fines from the spent abrasive instead of an abrasive separator. An abrasive separator shall be provided for the purpose. (iii) The air exhausted from blast-cleaning equipment shall be discharged through dust collecting equipment. Dust collectors shall be set up so that the accumulated dust can be emptied and removed without contaminating other working areas. (5) Personal protective equipment. (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting operators: (A) When working inside of blast-cleaning rooms, or (B) When using silica sand in manual blasting operations where the nozzle and blast are not physically separated from the operator in an exhaust ventilated enclosure, or (C) Where concentrations of toxic dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting may exceed the limits set in § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of this part and the nozzle and blast are not physically separated from the operator in an exhaust-ventilated enclosure. (iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter respirators, commonly referred to as dust-filter respirators, may be used for short, intermittent, or occasional dust exposures such as cleanup, dumping of dust collectors, or unloading shipments of sand at a receiving point when it is not feasible to control the dust by enclosure, exhaust ventilation, or other means. The respirators used must be approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for protection against the specific type of dust encountered. (iv) A respiratory protection program as defined and described in § 1926.103, shall be established wherever it is necessary to use respiratory protective equipment. (v) Operators shall be equipped with heavy canvas or leather gloves and aprons or equivalent protection to protect them from the impact of abrasives. Safety shoes shall be worn to protect against foot injury where heavy pieces of work are handled. (A) Safety shoes shall conform to the requirements of American National Standard for Men's Safety-Toe Footwear, Z41.1-1967. (B) Equipment for protection of the eyes and face shall be supplied to the operator when the respirator design does not provide such protection and to any other personnel working in the vicinity of abrasive blasting operations. This equipment shall conform to the requirements of § 1926.102. (6) Air supply and air compressors. (7) Operational procedures and general safety. (8) Scope. (g) Grinding, polishing, and buffing operations. (i) Abrasive cutting-off wheels. (ii) Belts. (iii) Branch pipe. (iv) Cradle. (v) Disc wheels. (vi) Entry loss. (vii) Exhaust system. (viii) Grinding wheels. (ix) Header pipe (main pipe). (x) Hoods and enclosures. (xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc grinder. (xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc grinder. A grinding machine carrying an abrasive disc wheel upon one or both ends of a power-driven, rotatable single horizontal spindle. (xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. (xiv) Portable grinder. (xv) Scratch brush wheels. (xvi) Swing-frame grinder. (xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). (xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. (2) Application. (3) Hood and branch pipe requirements. (ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands, pedestals, benches, and special-purpose grinding machines and abrasive cutting-off wheels shall have not less than the minimum exhaust volumes shown in Table D-57.1 with a recommended minimum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per minute in the main. The entry losses from all hoods except the vertical-spindle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65 velocity pressure for a straight takeoff and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical-spindle disc grinder hood is shown in figure D-57.1 (following paragraph (g) of this section). Table D-57.1—Grinding and Abrasive Cutting-Off Wheels Wheel diameter, inches (cm) Wheel width, inches (cm) Minimum exhaust volume (feet 3 To 9 (22.86) 1 1 2 220 Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) 2 (5.08) 390 Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) 3 (7.62) 500 Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) 4 (10.16) 610 Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) 5 (12.7) 880 Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) 6 (15.24) 1,200 For any wheel wider than wheel diameters shown in Table D-57.1, increase the exhaust volume by the ratio of the new width to the width shown. Example: If wheel width = 4 1/2 then 4.5 ÷ 4 × 610 = 686 (rounded to 690). (iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all buffing and polishing wheels mounted on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or special-purpose machines shall have not less than the minimum exhaust volume shown in Table D-57.2. Table D-57.2—Buffing and Polishing Wheels Wheel diameter, inches (cm) Wheel width, inches cm) Minimum exhaust volume (feet 3 To 9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 300 Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) 3 (7.62) 500 Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) 4 (10.16) 610 Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) 5 (12.7) 740 Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) 6 (15.24) 1,040 Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) 6 (15.24) 1,200 (iv) Grinding wheels or discs for horizontal single-spindle disc grinders shall be hooded to collect the dust or dirt generated by the grinding operation and the hoods shall be connected to branch pipes having exhaust volumes as shown in Table D-57.3. Table D-57.3—Horizontal Single-Spindle Disc Grinder Disc diameter, inches (cm) Exhaust volume (ft. 3 Up to 12 (30.48) 220 Over 12 to 19 (30.48 to 48.26) 390 Over 19 to 30 (48.26 to 76.2) 610 Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) 880 (v) Grinding wheels or discs for horizontal double-spindle disc grinders shall have a hood enclosing the grinding chamber and the hood shall be connected to one or more branch pipes having exhaust volumes as shown in Table D-57.4. Table D-57.4—Horizontal Double-Spindle Disc Grinder Disc diameter, inches (cm) Exhaust volume (ft. 3 Up to 19 (48.26) 610 Over 19 to 25 (48.26 to 63.5) 880 Over 25 to 30 (63.5 to 76.2) 1,200 Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to 134.62) 1,770 Over 53 to 72 (134.62 to 182.88) 6,280 (vi) Grinding wheels or discs for vertical single-spindle disc grinders shall be encircled with hoods to remove the dust generated in the operation. The hoods shall be connected to one or more branch pipes having exhaust volumes as shown in Table D-57.5. Table D-57.5—Vertical Spindle Disc Grinder Disc diameter, inches (cm) One-half or more of disc covered Disc not covered Number 1 Exhaust foot 3 Number 1 Exhaust foot 3 Up to 20 (50.8) 1 500 2 780 Over 20 to 30 (50.8 to 76.2) 2 780 2 1,480 Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to 134.62) 2 1,770 4 3,530 Over 53 to 72 (134.62 to 182.88) 2 3,140 5 6,010 1 (vii) Grinding and polishing belts shall be provided with hoods to remove dust and dirt generated in the operations and the hoods shall be connected to branch pipes having exhaust volumes as shown in Table D-57.6. Table D-57.6—Grinding and Polishing Belts Belts width, inches (cm) Exhaust volume (ft. 3 Up to 3 (7.62) 220 Over 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) 300 Over 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) 390 Over 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) 500 Over 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) 610 Over 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) 740 (viii) Cradles and swing-frame grinders. Where cradles are used for handling the parts to be ground, polished, or buffed, requiring large partial enclosures to house the complete operation, a minimum average air velocity of 150 feet per minute shall be maintained over the entire opening of the enclosure. Swing-frame grinders shall also be exhausted in the same manner as provided for cradles. (See fig. D-57.3) (ix) Where the work is outside the hood, air volumes must be increased as shown in American Standard Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960 (section 4, exhaust hoods). (4) Exhaust systems. (ii) Exhaust systems for grinding, polishing, and buffing operations shall be tested in the manner described in American Standard Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960. (iii) All exhaust systems shall be provided with suitable dust collectors. (5) Hood and enclosure design. (B) Due to the variety of work and types of grinding machines employed, it is necessary to develop hoods adaptable to the particular machine in question, and such hoods shall be located as close as possible to the operation. (ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands, pedestals, and bench grinders shall be designed in accordance with figure D-57.2. The adjustable tongue shown in the figure shall be kept in working order and shall be adjusted within one-fourth inch (0.635 cm) of the wheel periphery at all times. (iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be provided with exhaust booths as indicated in figure D-57.3. (iv) Portable grinding operations, whenever the nature of the work permits, shall be conducted within a partial enclosure. The opening in the enclosure shall be no larger than is actually required in the operation and an average face air velocity of not less than 200 feet per minute shall be maintained. (v) Hoods for polishing and buffing and scratch-brush wheels shall be constructed to conform as closely to figure D-57.4 as the nature of the work will permit. (vi) Cradle grinding and polishing operations shall be performed within a partial enclosure similar to figure D-57.5. The operator shall be positioned outside the working face of the opening of the enclosure. The face opening of the enclosure should not be any greater in area than that actually required for the performance of the operation and the average air velocity into the working face of the enclosure shall not be less than 150 feet per minute. (vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spindle disc grinders shall be constructed to conform as closely as possible to the hood shown in figure D-57.6. It is essential that there be a space between the back of the wheel and the hood, and a space around the periphery of the wheel of at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in order to permit the suction to act around the wheel periphery. The opening on the side of the disc shall be no larger than is required for the grinding operation, but must never be less than twice the area of the branch outlet. (viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc grinders shall have a hood encircling the wheels and grinding chamber similar to that illustrated in figure D-57.7. The openings for passing the work into the grinding chamber should be kept as small as possible, but must never be less than twice the area of the branch outlets. (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders shall be encircled with a hood so constructed that the heavy dust is drawn off a surface of the disc and the lighter dust exhausted through a continuous slot at the top of the hood as shown in figure D-57.1. (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods shall be constructed as close to the operation as possible. The hood should extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch (2.54 cm) wide openings should be provided on either side. Figure D-57.8 shows a typical hood for a belt operation. Figure D-57.1—Vertical Spindle Disc Grinder Exhaust Hood and Branch Pipe Connections Dia. D Exhaust E Volume Exhausted at 4,500 ft/min ft 3 Note Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. 20 (50.8) 1 4 1 4 500 When one-half or more of the disc can be hooded, use exhaust ducts as shown at the left. Over 20 (50.8) 30 (76.2) 2 4 (10.16) 780 Over 30 (76.2) 72 (182.88) 2 6 (15.24) 1,770 Over 53 (134.62) 72 (182.88) 2 8 (20.32) 3,140 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 When no hood can be used over disc, use exhaust ducts as shown at left. Over 20 (50.8) 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 Over 30 (76.2) 30 (76.2) 2 5 1 2 1,480 Over 53 (134.62) 53 (134.62) 4 6 (15.24) 3,530 72 (182.88) 5 7 (17.78) 6,010 Entry loss = 1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure. Minimum slot velocity = 2,000 ft/min— 1 2 Figure D-57.2—Standard Grinder Hood Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Exhaust outlet, inches (centimeters) E Volume of air at 4,500 ft/min Diameter Width, Max Min= d Max= D 9 (22.86) 1 1 2 3 220 Over 9 (22.86) 16 (40.64) 2 (5.08) 4 390 Over 16 (40.64) 19 (48.26) 3 (7.62) 4 1 2 500 Over 19 (48.26) 24 (60.96) 4 (10.16) 5 610 Over 24 (60.96) 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 6 880 Over 30 (76.2) 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1,200 Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. Figure D-57.3—A Method of Applying an Exhaust Enclosure to Swing-Frame Grinders Note: Baffle to reduce front opening as much as possible Figure D-57.4 Standard Buffing and Polishing Hood Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Exhaust outlet, inches E Volume of air at 4,500 ft/min Diameter Width, Max Min= d Max= D 9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 3 1 2 300 Over 9 (22.86) 16 (40.64) 3 (5.08) 4 500 Over 16 (40.64) 19 (48.26) 4 (11.43) 5 610 Over 19 (48.26) 24 (60.96) 5 (12.7) 5 1 2 740 Over 24 (60.96) 30 (76.2) 6 (15.24) 6 1 2 1.040 Over 30 (76.2) 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1.200 Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. Figure D-57.5—Cradle Polishing or Grinding Enclosure Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff Figure D-57.6—Horizontal Single-Spindle Disc Grinder Exhaust Hood and Branch Pipe Connections Dia D, Exhaust E, Volume exhausted at 4,500 ft/min ft 3 Min. Max. 12 (30.48) 3 (7.6) 220 Over 12 (30.48) 19 (48.26) 4 (10.16) 390 Over 19 (48.26) 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 610 Over 30 (76.2) 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 880 Note: Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff. Figure D-57.7—Horizontal Double-Spindle Disc Grinder Exhaust Hood and Branch Pipe Connections Disc dia. inches (centimeters) Exhaust E Volume exhaust at 4,500 ft/min. ft 3 Note Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. 19 (48.26) 1 5 610 Over 19 (48.26) 25 (63.5) 1 6 880 When width “W” permits, exhaust ducts should be as near heaviest grinding as possible. Over 25 (63.5) 30 (76.2) 1 7 1,200 Over 30 (76.2) 53 (134.62) 2 6 1,770 Over 53 (134.62) 72 (182.88) 4 8 6,280 Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff. Figure D-57.8—A Typical Hood for a Belt Operation Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff Belt width W. inches (centimeters) Exhaust volume. ft. 1 Up to 3 (7.62) 220 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) 300 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) 390 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) 500 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) 610 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) 740 Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min main. Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. (6) Scope. (h) Spray finishing operations Definitions applicable to this paragraph Spray-finishing operations. (ii) Spray booth. (iii) Spray room. (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. (2) Location and application. (3) Design and construction of spray booths. (A) Lights, motors, electrical equipment, and other sources of ignition shall conform to the requirements of § 1926.66(b)(10) and (c). (See section 310 and chapter 4 of the Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Materials NFPA No. 33-1969.) (B) In no case shall combustible material be used in the construction of a spray booth and supply or exhaust duct connected to it. (ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not be less than 6 1/2 (iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and dry-type overspray collectors shall conform to the requirements of § 1926.66(b) (4) and (5). (See sections 304 and 305 of the Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33-1969.) (A) Overspray filters shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the requirements of § 1926.66(b)(5), (see section 305 of the Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33-1969), and shall only be in a location easily accessible for inspection, cleaning, or replacement. (B) Where effective means, independent of the overspray filters, are installed which will result in design air distribution across the booth cross section, it is permissible to operate the booth without the filters in place. (iv) (A) For wet or water-wash spray booths, the water-chamber enclosure, within which intimate contact of contaminated air and cleaning water or other cleaning medium is maintained, if made of steel, shall be 18 gage or heavier and adequately protected against corrosion. (B) Chambers may include scrubber spray nozzles, headers, troughs, or other devices. Chambers shall be provided with adequate means for creating and maintaining scrubbing action for removal of particulate matter from the exhaust air stream. (v) Collecting tanks shall be of welded steel construction or other suitable non-combustible material. If pits are used as collecting tanks, they shall be concrete, masonry, or other material having similar properties. (A) Tanks shall be provided with weirs, skimmer plates, or screens to prevent sludge and floating paint from entering the pump suction box. Means for automatically maintaining the proper water level shall also be provided. Fresh water inlets shall not be submerged. They shall terminate at least one pipe diameter above the safety overflow level of the tank. (B) Tanks shall be so constructed as to discourage accumulation of hazardous deposits. (vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and headers shall be adequately sized to insure sufficient water flow to provide efficient operation of the water chamber. (4) Design and construction of spray rooms. (ii) Spray rooms shall have noncombustible fire doors and shutters. (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately ventilated so that the atmosphere in the breathing zone of the operator shall be maintained in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (h)(6)(ii) of this section. (iv) Spray rooms used for production spray-finishing operations shall conform to the requirements for spray booths. (5) Ventilation. (A) Where a fan plenum is used to equalize or control the distribution of exhaust air movement through the booth, it shall be of sufficient strength or rigidity to withstand the differential air pressure or other superficially imposed loads for which the equipment is designed and also to facilitate cleaning. Construction specifications shall be at least equivalent to those of paragraph (h)(5)(iii) of this section. (B) [Reserved] (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to transport makeup air to spray booths or surrounding areas shall be constructed of noncombustible materials. (A) If negative pressure exists within inlet ductwork, all seams and joints shall be sealed if there is a possibility of infiltration of harmful quantities of noxious gases, fumes, or mists from areas through which ductwork passes. (B) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in accordance with volume flow requirements and provide design air requirements at the spray booth. (C) Inlet ductwork shall be adequately supported throughout its length to sustain at least its own weight plus any negative pressure which is exerted upon it under normal operating conditions. (iii) [Reserved] (A) Exhaust ductwork shall be adequately supported throughout its length to sustain its weight plus any normal accumulation in interior during normal operating conditions and any negative pressure exerted upon it. (B) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized in accordance with good design practice which shall include consideration of fan capacity, length of duct, number of turns and elbows, variation in size, volume, and character of materials being exhausted. See American National Standard Z9.2-1960 for further details and explanation concerning elements of design. (C) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel ductwork shall be either lock-seamed, riveted, or welded. For other than steel construction, equivalent securing of joints shall be provided. (D) Circumferential joints in ductwork shall be substantially fastened together and lapped in the direction of airflow. At least every fourth joint shall be provided with connecting flanges, bolted together, or of equivalent fastening security. (E) Inspection or clean-out doors shall be provided for every 9 to 12 feet (2.736 to 3.648 m) of running length for ducts up to 12 inches (0.304 m) in diameter, but the distance between cleanout doors may be greater for larger pipes. (See 8.3.21 of American National Standard Z9.1-1951.) A clean-out door or doors shall be provided for servicing the fan, and where necessary, a drain shall be provided. (F) Where ductwork passes through a combustible roof or wall, the roof or wall shall be protected at the point of penetration by open space or fire-resistive material between the duct and the roof or wall. When ducts pass through firewalls, they shall be provided with automatic fire dampers on both sides of the wall, except that three-eighth-inch steel plates may be used in lieu of automatic fire dampers for ducts not exceeding 18 inches (45.72 cm) in diameter. (G) Ductwork used for ventilating any process covered in this standard shall not be connected to ducts ventilating any other process or any chimney or flue used for conveying any products of combustion. (6) Velocity and air flow requirements. Table D-57.7—Minimum Maintained Velocities Into Spray Booths Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth Crossdraft, f.p.m. Airflow velocities, f.p.m. Design Range Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth without operator Negligible 50 large booth 50-75 100 small booth 75-125 Air-operated guns, manual or automatic Up to 50 100 large booth 75-125 150 small booth 125-175 Air-operated guns, manual or automatic Up to 100 150 large booth 125-175 200 small booth 150-250 Notes: (1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of the booth to its height and width. (2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of 100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted. (3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas. (4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed “Design.” However, booths operating with velocities shown in the column headed “Range” are in compliance with this standard. (ii) In addition to the requirements in paragraph (h)(6)(i) of this section the total air volume exhausted through a spray booth shall be such as to dilute solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of the lower explosive limit of the solvent being sprayed. An example of the method of calculating this volume is given below. Example: To determine the lower explosive limits of the most common solvents used in spray finishing, see Table D-57.8. Column 1 gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by volume of air. Note that the quantity of solvent will be diminished by the quantity of solids and nonflammables contained in the finish. To determine the volume of air in cubic feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gallon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower explosive limit, apply the following formula: Dilution volume required per gallon of solvent = 4 (100-LEL) (cubic feet of vapor per gallon) ÷ LEL Using toluene as the solvent. (1) LEL of toluene from Table D-57.8, column 2, is 1.4 percent. (2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from Table D-57.8, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per gallon. (3) Dilution volume required = 4 (100-1.4) 30.4 ÷ 1.4 = 8,564 cubic feet. (4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of required ventilation, multiply the dilution volume required per gallon of solvent by the number of gallons of solvent evaporated per minute. Table D-57.8—Lower Explosive Limit of Some Commonly Used Solvents Solvent Cubic feet per gallon of vapor of liquid at 70 °F (21.11 °C). Lower explosive limit in percent by volume of air at 70 °F (21.11 °C) Column 1 Column 2 Acetone 44.0 2.6 Amyl Acetate (iso) 21.6 1 Amyl Alcohol (n) 29.6 1.2 Amyl Alcohol (iso) 29.6 1.2 Benzene 36.8 1 Butyl Acetate (n) 24.8 1.7 Butyl Alcohol (n) 35.2 1.4 Butyl Cellosolve 24.8 1.1 Cellosolve 33.6 1.8 Cellosolve Acetate 23.2 1.7 Cyclohexanone 31.2 1 1,1 Dichloroethylene 42.4 5.9 1,2 Dichloroethylene 42.4 9.7 Ethyl Acetate 32.8 2.5 Ethyl Alcohol 55.2 4.3 Ethyl Lactate 28.0 1 Methyl Acetate 40.0 3.1 Methyl Alcohol 80.8 7.3 Methyl Cellosolve 40.8 2.5 Methyl Ethyl Ketone 36.0 1.8 Methyl n-Propyl Ketone 30.4 1.5 Naphtha (VM&P) (76°Naphtha) 22.4 0.9 Naphtha (100°Flash) Safety Solvent—Stoddard Solvent 23.2 1.0 Propyl Acetate (n) 27.2 2.8 Propyl Acetate (iso) 28.0 1.1 Propyl Alcohol (n) 44.8 2.1 Propyl Alcohol (iso) 44.0 2.0 Toluene 30.4 1.4 Turpentine 20.8 0.8 Xylene (o) 26.4 1.0 1 (iii)(A) When an operator is in a booth downstream of the object being sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or other type of respirator approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for the material being sprayed should be used by the operator. (B) Where downdraft booths are provided with doors, such doors shall be closed when spray painting. (7) Make-up air. (ii) Where a spray booth or room receives make-up air through self-closing doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall be fully open at all times when the booth or room is in use for spraying. The velocity of air through such doors, dampers, or louvers shall not exceed 200 feet per minute. If the fan characteristics are such that the required air flow through the booth will be provided, higher velocities through the doors, dampers, or louvers may be used. (iii) (A) Where the air supply to a spray booth or room is filtered, the fan static pressure shall be calculated on the assumption that the filters are dirty to the extent that they require cleaning or replacement. (B) The rating of filters shall be governed by test data supplied by the manufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage shall be installed to show the pressure drop across the filters. This gage shall be marked to show the pressure drop at which the filters require cleaning or replacement. Filters shall be replaced or cleaned whenever the pressure drop across them becomes excessive or whenever the air flow through the face of the booth falls below that specified in Table D-57.7. (iv) (A) Means for heating make-up air to any spray booth or room, before or at the time spraying is normally performed, shall be provided in all places where the outdoor temperature may be expected to remain below 55 °F. (12.77 °C.) for appreciable periods of time during the operation of the booth except where adequate and safe means of radiant heating for all operating personnel affected is provided. The replacement air during the heating seasons shall be maintained at not less than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) at the point of entry into the spray booth or spray room. When otherwise unheated make-up air would be at a temperature of more than 10 °F. below room temperature, its temperature shall be regulated as provided in section 3.6.3 of ANSI Z9.2-1960. (B) As an alternative to an air replacement system complying with the preceding section, general heating of the building in which the spray room or booth is located may be employed provided that all occupied parts of the building are maintained at not less than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) when the exhaust system is in operation or the general heating system supplemented by other sources of heat may be employed to meet this requirement. (C) No means of heating make-up air shall be located in a spray booth. (D) Where make-up air is heated by coal or oil, the products of combustion shall not be allowed to mix with the make-up air, and the products of combustion shall be conducted outside the building through a flue terminating at a point remote from all points where make-up air enters the building. (E) Where make-up air is heated by gas, and the products of combustion are not mixed with the make-up air but are conducted through an independent flue to a point outside the building remote from all points where make-up air enters the building, it is not necessary to comply with paragraph (h)(7)(iv)(F) of this section. (F) Where make-up air to any manually operated spray booth or room is heated by gas and the products of combustion are allowed to mix with the supply air, the following precautions must be taken: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (8) Scope. (i) Open surface tanks General. (ii) Except where specific construction specifications are prescribed in this section, hoods, ducts, elbows, fans, blowers, and all other exhaust system parts, components, and supports thereof shall be so constructed as to meet conditions of service and to facilitate maintenance and shall conform in construction to the specifications contained in American National Standard Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960. (2) Classification of open-surface tank operations. (ii) Determination of class. (iii) Hazard potential is an index, on a scale of from A to D, inclusive, of the severity of the hazard associated with the substance contained in the tank because of the toxic, flammable, or explosive nature of the vapor, gas, or mist produced therefrom. The toxic hazard is determined from the concentration, measured in parts by volume of a gas or vapor, per million parts by volume of contaminated air (p.p.m.), or in milligrams of mist per cubic meter of air (mg./m. 3 (iv) The relative fire or explosion hazard is measured in degrees Fahrenheit in terms of the closed-cup flash point of the substance in the tank. Detailed information on the prevention of fire hazards in dip tanks may be found in Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids, NFPA No. 34-1966, National Fire Protection Association. Where the tank contains a mixture of liquids, other than organic solvents, whose effects are additive, the hygienic standard of the most toxic component (for example, the one having the lowest p.p.m. or mg./m. 3 (v) Hazard potential shall be determined from Table D-57.9, with the value indicating greater hazard being used. When the hazardous material may be either a vapor with a threshold limit value ( TLV TLV 3 TLV Note A: ( c 1 TLV 1 c 2 TLV 2 c 3 TLV 3 c N TLV N Where: c = Concentration measured at the operation in p.p.m. Table D-57.9—Determination of Hazard Potential Hazard potential Toxicity group Gas or vapor (p.p.m.) Mist (mg./m 3 Flash point in degrees F. (C.) A 0-10 0-0.1 B 11-100 0.11-1.0 Under 100 (37.77) C 101-500 1.1-10 100 200 (37.77-93.33) D Over 500 Over 10 Over 200 (93.33) (vi) Rate of gas, vapor, or mist evolution is a numerical index, on a scale of from 1 to 4, inclusive, both of the relative capacity of the tank to produce gas, vapor, or mist and of the relative energy with which it is projected or carried upwards from the tank. Rate is evaluated in terms of (A) The temperature of the liquid in the tank in degrees Fahrenheit; (B) The number of degrees Fahrenheit that this temperature is below the boiling point of the liquid in degrees Fahrenheit; (C) The relative evaporation of the liquid in still air at room temperature in an arbitrary scale—fast, medium, slow, or nil; and (D) The extent that the tank gases or produces mist in an arbitrary scale—high, medium, low, and nil. (See Table D-57.10, Note 2.) Gassing depends upon electrochemical or mechanical processes, the effects of which have to be individually evaluated for each installation (see Table D-57.10, Note 3). (vii) Rate of evolution shall be determined from Table D-57.10. When evaporation and gassing yield different rates, the lowest numerical value shall be used. Table D-57.10—Determination of Rate of Gas, Vapor, or Mist Evolution 1 Rate Liquid temperature, °F. (C.) Degrees below boiling point Relative evaporation 2 Gassing 3 1 Over 200 (93.33) 0-20 Fast High. 2 150-200 (65.55-93.33) 21-50 Medium Medium. 3 94-149 (34.44-65) 51-100 Slow Low. 4 Under 94 (34.44) Over 100 Nil Nil. 1 2 3 (3) Ventilation. (4) Control requirements. (ii) All tanks exhausted by means of hoods which (A) Project over the entire tank; (B) Are fixed in position in such a location that the head of the workman, in all his normal operating positions while working at the tank, is in front of all hood openings; and (C) Are completely enclosed on at least two sides, shall be considered to be exhausted through an enclosing hood. (D) The quantity of air in cubic feet per minute necessary to be exhausted through an enclosing hood shall be not less than the product of the control velocity times the net area of all openings in the enclosure through which air can flow into the hood. Table D-57.11—Control Velocities in Feet Per Minute (f.p.m.) for Undisturbed Locations Class Enclosing hood Lateral exhaust 1 Canopy hood 2 One open side Two open sides Three open sides Four open sides B-1 and A-2 100 150 150 Do not use Do not use A-3 2 75 100 100 125 175 A-3, C-2, and D-1 3 65 90 75 100 150 B-4 2 3 50 75 50 75 125 A-4, C-4, D-3 3 4 1 2 3 4 (iii) All tanks exhausted by means of hoods which do not project over the entire tank, and in which the direction of air movement into the hood or hoods is substantially horizontal, shall be considered to be laterally exhausted. The quantity of air in cubic feet per minute necessary to be laterally exhausted per square foot of tank area in order to maintain the required control velocity shall be determined from Table D-57.12 for all variations in ratio of tank width ( W L (A) For lateral exhaust hoods over 42 inches (1.06 m) wide, or where it is desirable to reduce the amount of air removed from the workroom, air supply slots or orifices shall be provided along the side or the center of the tank opposite from the exhaust slots. The design of such systems shall meet the following criteria: ( 1 ( 2 Table D-57.12—Minimum Ventilation Rate in Cubic Feet of Air Per Minute Per Square Foot of Tank Area for Lateral Exhaust Required minimum control velocity, f.p.m. (from Table D-57.11) C.f.m. per sq. ft. to maintain required minimum velocities at following ratios (tank width (W)/tank length (L)). 1 2 0.0-0.09 0.1-0.24 0.25-0.49 0.5-0.99 1.0-2.0 Hood along one side or two parallel sides of tank when one hood is against a wall or baffle. 2 Also for a manifold along tank centerline. 3 50 50 60 75 90 100 75 75 90 110 130 150 100 100 125 150 175 200 150 150 190 225 260 300 Hood along one side or two parallel sides of free standing tank not against wall or baffle. 50 75 90 100 110 125 75 110 130 150 170 190 100 150 175 200 225 250 150 225 260 300 340 375 1 W L It is undesirable to do so when W L 1 2 W L W L 2 3 W Tank Width ( W ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 (iv) All tanks exhausted by means of hoods which project over the entire tank, and which do not conform to the definition of enclosing hoods, shall be considered to be overhead canopy hoods. The quantity of air in cubic feet per minute necessary to be exhausted through a canopy hood shall be not less than the product of the control velocity times the net area of all openings between the bottom edges of the hood and the top edges of the tank. (v) The rate of vapor evolution (including steam or products of combustion) from the process shall be estimated. If the rate of vapor evolution is equal to or greater than 10 percent of the calculated exhaust volume required, the exhaust volume shall be increased in equal amount. (5) Spray cleaning and degreasing. (6) Control means other than ventilation. (7) System design. (ii) The capacity required in paragraph (i)(7)(i) of this section shall be obtained when the airflow producing equipment is operating against the following pressure losses, the sum of which is the static pressure: (A) Entrance losses into the hood. (B) Resistance to airflow in branch pipe including bends and transformations. (C) Entrance loss into the main pipe. (D) Resistance to airflow in main pipe including bends and transformations. (E) Resistance of mechanical equipment; that is, filters, washers, condensers, absorbers, etc., plus their entrance and exit losses. (F) Resistance in outlet duct and discharge stack. (iii) Two or more operations shall not be connected to the same exhaust system where either one or the combination of the substances removed may constitute a fire, explosion, or chemical reaction hazard in the duct system. Traps or other devices shall be provided to insure that condensate in ducts does not drain back into any tank. (iv) The exhaust system, consisting of hoods, ducts, air mover, and discharge outlet, shall be designed in accordance with American National Standard Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960, or the manual, Industrial Ventilation, published by the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists 1970. Airflow and pressure loss data provided by the manufacturer of any air cleaning device shall be included in the design calculations. (8) Operation. (ii) The exhaust system shall discharge to the outer air in such a manner that the possibility of its effluent entering any building is at a minimum. Recirculation shall only be through a device for contaminant removal which will prevent the creation of a health hazard in the room or area to which the air is recirculated. (iii) A volume of outside air in the range of 90 percent to 110 percent of the exhaust volume shall be provided to each room having exhaust hoods. The outside air supply shall enter the workroom in such a manner as not to be detrimental to any exhaust hood. The airflow of the makeup air system shall be measured on installation. Corrective action shall be taken when the airflow is below that required. The makeup air shall be uncontaminated. (9) Personal protection. (ii) All persons required to work in such a manner that their feet may become wet shall be provided with rubber or other impervious boots or shoes, rubbers, or wooden-soled shoes sufficient to keep feet dry. (iii) All persons required to handle work wet with a liquid other than water shall be provided with gloves impervious to such a liquid and of a length sufficient to prevent entrance of liquid into the tops of the gloves. The interior of gloves shall be kept free from corrosive or irritating contaminants. (iv) All persons required to work in such a manner that their clothing may become wet shall be provided with such aprons, coats, jackets, sleeves, or other garments made of rubber, or of other materials impervious to liquids other than water, as are required to keep their clothing dry. Aprons shall extend well below the top of boots to prevent liquid splashing into the boots. Provision of dry, clean, cotton clothing along with rubber shoes or short boots and an apron impervious to liquids other than water shall be considered a satisfactory substitute where small parts are cleaned, plated, or acid dipped in open tanks and rapid work is required. (v) Whenever there is a danger of splashing, for example, when additions are made manually to the tanks, or when acids and chemicals are removed from the tanks, the employees so engaged shall be required to wear either tight-fitting chemical goggles or an effective face shield. See § 1926.102. (vi) When, during the emergencies specified in paragraph (i)(11)(v) of this section, employees must be in areas where concentrations of air contaminants are greater than the limits set by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section or oxygen concentrations are less than 19.5 percent, they must use respirators that reduce their exposure to a level below these limits or that provide adequate oxygen. Such respirators must also be provided in marked, quickly-accessible storage compartments built for this purpose when the possibility exists of accidental release of hazardous concentrations of air contaminants. Respirators must be approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, selected by a competent industrial hygienist or other technically-qualified source, and used in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.103. (vii) Near each tank containing a liquid which may burn, irritate, or otherwise be harmful to the skin if splashed upon the worker's body, there shall be a supply of clean cold water. The water pipe (carrying a pressure not exceeding 25 pounds (11.325 kg)) shall be provided with a quick opening valve and at least 48 inches (1.216 m) of hose not smaller than three-fourths inch, so that no time may be lost in washing off liquids from the skin or clothing. Alternatively, deluge showers and eye flushes shall be provided in cases where harmful chemicals may be splashed on parts of the body. (viii) Operators with sores, burns, or other skin lesions requiring medical treatment shall not be allowed to work at their regular operations until so authorized by a physician. Any small skin abrasions, cuts, rash, or open sores which are found or reported shall be treated by a properly designated person so that chances of exposures to the chemicals are removed. Workers exposed to chromic acids shall have a periodic examination made of the nostrils and other parts of the body, to detect incipient ulceration. (ix) Sufficient washing facilities, including soap, individual towels, and hot water, shall be provided for all persons required to use or handle any liquids which may burn, irritate, or otherwise be harmful to the skin, on the basis of at least one basin (or its equivalent) with a hot water faucet for every 10 employees. See § 1926.51(f). (x) Locker space or equivalent clothing storage facilities shall be provided to prevent contamination of street clothing. (xi) First aid facilities specific to the hazards of the operations conducted shall be readily available. (10) Special precautions for cyanide. (11) Inspection, maintenance, and installation. (ii) Before cleaning the interior of any tank, the contents shall be drained off, and the cleanout doors shall be opened where provided. All pockets in tanks or pits, where it is possible for hazardous vapors to collect, shall be ventilated and cleared of such vapors. (iii) Tanks which have been drained to permit employees to enter for the purposes of cleaning, inspection, or maintenance may contain atmospheres which are hazardous to life or health, through the presence of flammable or toxic air contaminants, or through the absence of sufficient oxygen. Before employees shall be permitted to enter any such tank, appropriate tests of the atmosphere shall be made to determine if the limits set by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section are exceeded, or if the oxygen concentration is less than 19.5 percent. (iv) If the tests made in accordance with paragraph (i)(11)(iii) of this section indicate that the atmosphere in the tank is unsafe, before any employee is permitted to enter the tank, the tank shall be ventilated until the hazardous atmosphere is removed, and ventilation shall be continued so as to prevent the occurrence of a hazardous atmosphere as long as an employee is in the tank. (v) If, in emergencies, such as rescue work, it is necessary to enter a tank which may contain a hazardous atmosphere, suitable respirators, such as self-contained breathing apparatus; hose mask with blower, if there is a possibility of oxygen deficiency; or a gas mask, selected and operated in accordance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of this section, shall be used. If a contaminant in the tank can cause dermatitis, or be absorbed through the skin, the employee entering the tank shall also wear protective clothing. At least one trained standby employee, with suitable respirator, shall be present in the nearest uncontaminated area. The standby employee must be able to communicate with the employee in the tank and be able to haul him out of the tank with a lifeline if necessary. (vi) Maintenance work requiring welding or open flame, where toxic metal fumes such as cadmium, chromium, or lead may be evolved, shall be done only with sufficient local exhaust ventilation to prevent the creation of a health hazard, or be done with respirators selected and used in accordance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of this section. Welding, or the use of open flames near any solvent cleaning equipment shall be permitted only after such equipment has first been thoroughly cleared of solvents and vapors. (12) Vapor degreasing tanks. (ii) Where gas is used as a fuel for heating vapor degreasing tanks, the combustion chamber shall be of tight construction, except for such openings as the exhaust flue, and those that are necessary for supplying air for combustion. Flues shall be of corrosion-resistant construction and shall extend to the outer air. If mechanical exhaust is used on this flue, a draft diverter shall be used. Special precautions must be taken to prevent solvent fumes from entering the combustion air of this or any other heater when chlorinated or fluorinated hydrocarbon solvents (for example, trichloroethylene, Freon) are used. (iii) Heating elements shall be so designed and maintained that their surface temperature will not cause the solvent or mixture to decompose, break down, or be converted into an excessive quantity of vapor. (iv) Tanks or machines of more than 4 square feet (0.368 m 2 (13) Scope. (ii) Molten materials handling operations (iii) Surface coating operations [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35099, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9250, Mar. 3, 1996; 63 FR 1295, Jan. 8, 1998] § 1926.58 COVID-19. The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1910.501 subpart U. [86 FR 61555, Nov. 5, 2021] § 1926.59 Hazard communication. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1200 of this chapter. [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] § 1926.60 Methylenedianiline. (a) Scope and application. (i) Construction, alteration, repair, maintenance, or renovation of structures, substrates, or portions thereof, that contain MDA; (ii) Installation or the finishing of surfaces with products containing MDA; (iii) MDA spill/emergency cleanup at construction sites; and (iv) Transportation, disposal, storage, or containment of MDA or products containing MDA on the site or location at which construction activities are performed. (2) Except as provided in paragraphs (a)(7) and (f)(5) of this section, this section does not apply to the processing, use, and handling of products containing MDA where initial monitoring indicates that the product is not capable of releasing MDA in excess of the action level under the expected conditions of processing, use, and handling which will cause the greatest possible release; and where no “dermal exposure to MDA” can occur. (3) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(7) of this section, this section does not apply to the processing, use, and handling of products containing MDA where objective data are reasonably relied upon which demonstrate the product is not capable of releasing MDA under the expected conditions of processing, use, and handling which will cause the greatest possible release; and where no “dermal exposure to MDA” can occur. (4) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(7) of this section, this section does not apply to the storage, transportation, distribution or sale of MDA in intact containers sealed in such a manner as to contain the MDA dusts, vapors, or liquids, except for the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1200 and paragraph (e) of this section. (5) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(7) of this section, this section does not apply to materials in any form which contain less than 0.1% MDA by weight or volume. (6) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(7) of this section, this section does not apply to “finished articles containing MDA.” (7) Where products containing MDA are exempted under paragraphs (a)(2) through (a)(6) of this section, the employer shall maintain records of the initial monitoring results or objective data supporting that exemption and the basis for the employer's reliance on the data, as provided in the recordkeeping provision of paragraph (o) of this section. (b) Definitions. Action level Assistant Secretary Authorized person Container Decontamination area Dermal exposure to MDA (i) Liquid, powdered, granular, or flaked mixtures containing MDA in concentrations greater than 0.1% by weight or volume; and (ii) Materials other than “finished articles” containing MDA in concentrations greater than 0.1% by weight or volume. Director Emergency Employee exposure Finished article containing MDA (i) Which is formed to a specific shape or design during manufacture; (ii) Which has end use function(s) dependent in whole or part upon its shape or design during end use; and (iii) Where applicable, is an item which is fully cured by virtue of having been subjected to the conditions (temperature, time) necessary to complete the desired chemical reaction. Historical monitoring data (i) The data upon which judgments are based are scientifically sound and were collected using methods that are sufficiently accurate and precise; (ii) The processes and work practices that were in use when the historical monitoring data were obtained are essentially the same as those to be used during the job for which initial monitoring will not be performed; (iii) The characteristics of the MDA-containing material being handled when the historical monitoring data were obtained are the same as those on the job for which initial monitoring will not be performed; (iv) Environmental conditions prevailing when the historical monitoring data were obtained are the same as those on the job for which initial monitoring will not be performed; and (v) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exception are substantially similar. The data must be scientifically sound, the characteristics of the MDA containing material must be similar and the environmental conditions comparable. 4,4 Methylenedianiline or MDA Regulated Areas STEL (c) Permissible exposure limits. (d) Communication among employers. (e) Emergency situations Written plan. (ii) The plan shall specifically provide that employees engaged in correcting emergency conditions shall be equipped with the appropriate personal protective equipment and clothing as required in paragraphs (i) and (j) of this section until the emergency is abated. (iii) The plan shall specifically include provisions for alerting and evacuating affected employees as well as the applicable elements prescribed in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39, “Emergency action plans” and “Fire prevention plans,” respectively. (2) Alerting employees. (f) Exposure monitoring General. (ii) Representative employee exposure shall be determined on the basis of one or more samples representing full shift exposure for each shift for each job classification in each work area where exposure to MDA may occur. (iii) Where the employer can document that exposure levels are equivalent for similar operations in different work shifts, the employer shall only be required to determine representative employee exposure for that operation during one shift. (2) Initial monitoring. (i) The employer can demonstrate, on the basis of objective data, that the MDA-containing product or material being handled cannot cause exposures above the standard's action level, even under worst-case release conditions; or (ii) The employer has historical monitoring or other data demonstrating that exposures on a particular job will be below the action level. (3) Periodic monitoring and monitoring frequency. (ii) If the monitoring required by paragraph (f)(2) of this section reveals employee exposure above the PELs, the employer shall repeat such monitoring for each such employee at least every three (3) months. (iii) Employers who are conducting MDA operations within a regulated area can forego periodic monitoring if the employees are all wearing supplied-air respirators while working in the regulated area. (iv) The employer may alter the monitoring schedule from every three months to every six months for any employee for whom two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart indicate that the employee exposure has decreased to below the PELs but above the action level. (4) Termination of monitoring. (ii) If the periodic monitoring required by paragraph (f)(3) of this section reveals that employee exposures, as indicated by at least two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level the employer may discontinue the monitoring for that employee, except as otherwise required by paragraph (f)(5) of this section. (5) Additional monitoring. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. (7) Employee notification of monitoring results. (ii) The written notification required by paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section shall contain the corrective action being taken by the employer or any other protective measures which have been implemented to reduce the employee exposure to or below the PELs, wherever the PELs are exceeded. (8) Visual monitoring. (i) Determine the source of exposure; (ii) Implement protective measures to correct the hazard; and (iii) Maintain records of the corrective actions in accordance with paragraph (o) of this section. (g) Regulated areas Establishment Airborne exposures. (ii) Dermal exposures. (2) Demarcation. (3) Access. (4) Personal protective equipment and clothing. (5) Prohibited activities. (h) Methods of compliance Engineering controls and work practices and respirators. (A) Local exhaust ventilation equipped with HEPA filter dust collection systems; (B) General ventilation systems; (C) Use of workpractices; or (D) Other engineering controls such as isolation and enclosure that the Assistant Secretary can show to be feasible. (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering controls and work practices “which can be instituted are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the PELs, the employer shall use them to reduce employee exposure to the lowest levels achievable by these controls and shall supplement them by the use of respiratory protective devices which comply with the requirements of paragraph (i) of this section. (2) Special Provisions. (3) Prohibitions. (4) Employee rotation. (5) Compliance program. (ii) Upon request this written program shall be furnished for examination and copying to the Assistant Secretary, the Director, affected employees and designated employee representatives. The employer shall review and, as necessary, update such plans at least once every 12 months to make certain they reflect the current status of the program. (i) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls. (ii) Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activities and spray-application processes, for which engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible. (iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the PELs. (iv) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (B) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators. (C) For escape, provide employees with one of the following respirator options: Any self-contained breathing apparatus with a full facepiece or hood operated in the positive-pressure or continuous-flow mode; or a full facepiece air-purifying respirator. (D) Provide a combination HEPA filter and organic vapor canister or cartridge with air-purifying respirators when MDA is in liquid form or used as part of a process requiring heat. (ii) An employee who cannot use a negative-pressure respirator must be given the option of using a positive-pressure respirator, or a supplied-air respirator operated in the continuous-flow or pressure-demand mode. (j) Protective work clothing and equipment Provision and use. (i) Aprons, coveralls or other full-body work clothing; (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and foot coverings; and (iii) Face shields, chemical goggles; or (iv) Other appropriate protective equipment which comply with 29 CFR 1910.133. (2) Removal and storage. (ii) The employer shall ensure that, during their work shift, employees remove all other MDA-contaminated protective work clothing or equipment before leaving a regulated area. (iii) The employer shall ensure that no employee takes MDA-contaminated work clothing or equipment out of the decontamination areas, except those employees authorized to do so for the purpose of laundering, maintenance, or disposal. (iv) MDA-contaminated work clothing or equipment shall be placed and stored and transported in sealed, impermeable bags, or other closed impermeable containers. (v) Containers of MDA-contaminated protective work clothing or equipment which are to be taken out of decontamination areas or the workplace for cleaning, maintenance, or disposal, shall bear labels warning of the hazards of MDA. (3) Cleaning and replacement. (ii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of MDA from protective work clothing or equipment by blowing, shaking, or any methods which allow MDA to re-enter the workplace. (iii) The employer shall ensure that laundering of MDA-contaminated clothing shall be done so as to prevent the release of MDA in the workplace. (iv) Any employer who gives MDA-contaminated clothing to another person for laundering shall inform such person of the requirement to prevent the release of MDA. (v) The employer shall inform any person who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment contaminated with MDA of the potentially harmful effects of exposure. (4) Visual Examination. (ii) When rips or tears are detected, the protective equipment or clothing shall be repaired and replaced immediately. (k) Hygiene facilities and practices General. Exception: (ii) Change areas. (iii) Equipment area. (2) Shower area. (ii) Where dermal exposure to MDA occurs, the employer shall ensure that materials spilled or deposited on the skin are removed as soon as possible by methods which do not facilitate the dermal absorption of MDA. (3) Lunch Areas. (ii) The employer shall ensure that employees wash their hands and faces with soap and water prior to eating, drinking, smoking, or applying cosmetics. (iii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not enter lunch facilities with contaminated protective work clothing or equipment. (l) Communication of hazards to employees Hazard communication. (2) Signs and labels Signs. DANGER MDA MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (B) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (l)(2)(i)(A) of this section: DANGER MDA MAY CAUSE CANCER LIVER TOXIN AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED TO BE WORN IN THIS AREA (ii) Labels. DANGER CONTAINS MDA MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER (B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information workplace labels in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(A) of this section: ( 1 DANGER CONTAINS MDA MAY CAUSE CANCER LIVER TOXIN ( 2 DANGER CONTAINS MDA CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH MAY CAUSE CANCER LIVER TOXIN (3) Information and training. (ii) In addition to the information required under 29 CFR 1910.1200, the employer shall: (A) Provide an explanation of the contents of this section, including appendices A and B of this section, and indicate to employees where a copy of the standard is available; (B) Describe the medical surveillance program required under paragraph (n) of this section, and explain the information contained in appendix C of this section; and (C) Describe the medical removal provision required under paragraph (n) of this section. (4) Access to training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide to the Assistant Secretary and the Director, upon request, all information and training materials relating to the employee information and training program. (m) Housekeeping. (2) The employer shall institute a program for detecting MDA leaks, spills, and discharges, including regular visual inspections of operations involving liquid or solid MDA. (3) All leaks shall be repaired and liquid or dust spills cleaned up promptly. (4) Surfaces contaminated with MDA may not be cleaned by the use of compressed air. (5) Shoveling, dry sweeping, and other methods of dry clean-up of MDA may be used where HEPA filtered vacuuming and/or wet cleaning are not feasible or practical. (6) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment, and clothing contaminated with MDA shall be collected and disposed of in a manner to prevent the re-entry of MDA into the workplace. (n) Medical surveillance General. (A) Employees exposed at or above the action level for 30 or more days per year; (B) Employees who are subject to dermal exposure to MDA for 15 or more days per year; (C) Employees who have been exposed in an emergency situation; (D) Employees whom the employer, based on results from compliance with paragraph (f)(8) of this section, has reason to believe are being dermally exposed; and (E) Employees who show signs or symptoms of MDA exposure. (ii) The employer shall ensure that all medical examinations and procedures are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician at a reasonable time and place, and provided without cost to the employee. (2) Initial examinations. (A) A detailed history which includes: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) A physical examination which includes all routine physical examination parameters, skin examination, and examination for signs of liver disease. (C) Laboratory tests including: ( 1 ( 2 (D) Additional tests as necessary in the opinion of the physician. (ii) No initial medical examination is required if adequate records show that the employee has been examined in accordance with the requirements of this section within the previous six months prior to the effective date of this standard or prior to the date of initial assignment. (3) Periodic examinations. (A) A brief history regarding any new exposure to potential liver toxins, changes in drug, tobacco, and alcohol intake, and the appearance of physical signs relating to the liver, and the skin; (B) The appropriate tests and examinations including liver function tests and skin examinations; and (C) Appropriate additional tests or examinations as deemed necessary by the physician. (ii) If in the physician's opinion the results of liver function tests indicate an abnormality, the employee shall be removed from further MDA exposure in accordance with paragraph (n)(9) of this section. Repeat liver function tests shall be conducted on advice of the physician. (4) Emergency examinations. (5) Additional examinations. (6) Multiple physician review mechanism. (A) To review any findings, determinations or recommendations of the initial physician; and (B) To conduct such examinations, consultations, and laboratory tests as the second physician deems necessary to facilitate this review. (ii) The employer shall promptly notify an employee of the right to seek a second medical opinion after each occasion that an initial physician conducts a medical examination or consultation pursuant to this section. The employer may condition its participation in, and payment for, the multiple physician review mechanism upon the employee doing the following within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the foregoing notification, or receipt of the initial physician's written opinion, whichever is later: (A) The employee informing the employer that he or she intends to seek a second medical opinion, and (B) The employee initiating steps to make an appointment with a second physician. (iii) If the findings, determinations, or recommendations of the second physician differ from those of the initial physician, then the employer and the employee shall assure that efforts are made for the two physicians to resolve any disagreement. (iv) If the two physicians have been unable to quickly resolve their disagreement, then the employer and the employee through their respective physicians shall designate a third physician: (A) To review any findings, determinations, or recommendations of the prior physicians; and (B) To conduct such examinations, consultations, laboratory tests, and discussions with the prior physicians as the third physician deems necessary to resolve the disagreement of the prior physicians. (v) The employer shall act consistent with the findings, determinations, and recommendations of the second physician, unless the employer and the employee reach a mutually acceptable agreement. (7) Information provided to the examining physician. (A) A copy of this regulation and its appendices; (B) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's potential exposure to MDA; (C) The employee's current actual or representative MDA exposure level; (D) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used; and (E) Information from previous employment related medical examinations of the affected employee. (ii) The employer shall provide the foregoing information to a second physician under this section upon request either by the second physician, or by the employee. (8) Physician's written opinion. (A) The occupationally pertinent results of the medical examination and tests; (B) The physician's opinion concerning whether the employee has any detected medical conditions which would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment of health from exposure to MDA; (C) The physician's recommended limitations upon the employee's exposure to MDA or upon the employee's use of protective clothing or equipment and respirators; and (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions resulting from MDA exposure which require further explanation or treatment. (ii) The written opinion obtained by the employer shall not reveal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposures. (9) Medical removal Temporary medical removal of an employee Temporary removal resulting from occupational exposure. ( 1 ( 2 (B) Temporary removal due to a final medical determination. 1 ( 2 ( 3 (ii) Return of the employee to former job status. ( 1 ( 2 (B) For the purposes of this section, the requirement that an employer return an employee to his or her former job status is not intended to expand upon or restrict any rights an employee has or would have had, absent temporary medical removal, to a specific job classification or position under the terms of a collective bargaining agreement. (iii) Removal of other employee special protective measure or limitations. (iv) Employer options pending a final medical determination. (A) Removal. (B) Return. ( 1 ( 2 (v) Medical removal protection benefits Provisions of medical removal protection benefits. (B) Definition of medical removal protection benefits. (C) Follow-up medical surveillance during the period of employee removal or limitations. (D) Workers' compensation claims. (E) Other credits. (F) Employees who do not recover within the 6 months of removal. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of an employee. (o) Recordkeeping Objective data for exempted operations. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information: (A) The product qualifying for exemption; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol, results of testing, and/or analysis of the material for the release of MDA; (D) A description of the operation exempted and how the data support the exemption; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exemption. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of the employer's reliance upon such objective data. (2) Historical monitoring data. (ii) The record shall include information that reflect the following conditions: (A) The data upon which judgments are based are scientifically sound and were collected using methods that are sufficiently accurate and precise; (B) The processes and work practices that were in use when the historical monitoring data were obtained are essentially the same as those to be used during the job for which initial monitoring will not be performed; (C) The characteristics of the MDA-containing material being handled when the historical monitoring data were obtained are the same as those on the job for which initial monitoring will not be performed; (D) Environmental conditions prevailing when the historical monitoring data were obtained are the same as those on the job for which initial monitoring will not be performed; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exception. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of the employer's reliance upon such historical monitoring data. (3) The employer may utilize the services of competent organizations such as industry trade associations and employee associations to maintain the records required by this section. (4) Exposure measurements. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement; (B) The operation involving exposure to MDA; (C) Sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) Number, duration, and results of samples taken; (E) Type of protective devices worn, if any; and (F) Name and exposure of the employees whose exposures are represented. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.33. (5) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information: (A) The name of the employee; (B) A copy of the employee's medical examination results, including the medical history, questionnaire responses, results of any tests, and physician's recommendations. (C) Physician's written opinions; (D) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to MDA; and (E) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by paragraph (n) of this section. (iii) The employer shall ensure that this record is maintained for the duration of employment plus thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.33. (iv) A copy of the employee's medical removal and return to work status. (6) Training records. (7) Availability. (ii) The employer, upon request, shall make any exposure records required by paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section available for examination and copying to affected employees, former employees, designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.33(a)-(e) and (g)-(i). (iii) The employer, upon request, shall make employee medical records required by paragraphs (n) and (o) of this section available for examination and copying to the subject employee, anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee, and the Assistant Secretary, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.33. (8) Transfer of records. (p) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (q) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1926.60—Substance Data Sheet, for 4-4′ Methylenedianiline Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix A are identical to those set forth in appendix A to § 1910.1050 of this chapter. Appendix B to § 1926.60—Substance Technical Guidelines, MDA Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix B are identical to those set forth in appendix B to § 1910.1050 of this chapter. Appendix C to § 1926.60—Medical Surveillance Guidelines for MDA Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix C are identical to those set forth in appendix C to § 1910.1050 of this chapter. Appendix D to § 1926.60—Sampling and Analytical Methods for MDA Monitoring and Measurement Procedures Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix D are identical to those set forth in appendix D to § 1910.1050 of this chapter. [57 FR 35681, Aug. 10, 1992, as amended at 57 FR 49649, Nov. 3, 1992; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8, 1998; 69 FR 70373, Dec. 6, 2004; 70 FR 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17889, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, placards and labels. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1201 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.62 Lead. (a) Scope. (1) Demolition or salvage of structures where lead or materials containing lead are present; (2) Removal or encapsulation of materials containing lead; (3) New construction, alteration, repair, or renovation of structures, substrates, or portions thereof, that contain lead, or materials containing lead; (4) Installation of products containing lead; (5) Lead contamination/emergency cleanup; (6) Transportation, disposal, storage, or containment of lead or materials containing lead on the site or location at which construction activities are performed, and (7) Maintenance operations associated with the construction activities described in this paragraph. (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Assistant Secretary Competent person Director Lead This section (c) Permissible exposure limit. 3 (2) If an employee is exposed to lead for more than 8 hours in any work day the employees' allowable exposure, as a time weighted average (TWA) for that day, shall be reduced according to the following formula: Allowable employee exposure (in µg/m 3 (3) When respirators are used to limit employee exposure as required under paragraph (c) of this section and all the requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and (f) of this section have been met, employee exposure may be considered to be at the level provided by the protection factor of the respirator for those periods the respirator is worn. Those periods may be averaged with exposure levels during periods when respirators are not worn to determine the employee's daily TWA exposure. (d) Exposure assessment General. (ii) For the purposes of paragraph (d) of this section, employee exposure is that exposure which would occur if the employee were not using a respirator. (iii) With the exception of monitoring under paragraph (d)(3), where monitoring is required under this section, the employer shall collect personal samples representative of a full shift including at least one sample for each job classification in each work area either for each shift or for the shift with the highest exposure level. (iv) Full shift personal samples shall be representative of the monitored employee's regular, daily exposure to lead. (2) Protection of employees during assessment of exposure. (A) Where lead containing coatings or paint are present: Manual demolition of structures (e.g, dry wall), manual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun applications, and power tool cleaning with dust collection systems; (B) Spray painting with lead paint. (ii) In addition, with regard to tasks not listed in paragraph (d)(2)(i), where the employee has any reason to believe that an employee performing the task may be exposed to lead in excess of the PEL, until the employer performs an employee exposure assessment as required by paragraph (d) of this section and documents that the employee's lead exposure is not above the PEL the employer shall treat the employee as if the employee were exposed above the PEL and shall implememt employee protective measures as prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section. (iii) With respect to the tasks listed in this paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section, where lead is present, until the employer performs an employee exposure assessment as required in this paragraph (d), and documents that the employee performing any of the listed tasks is not exposed in excess of 500 µg/m 3 3 3 (A) Using lead containing mortar; lead burning (B) Where lead containing coatings or paint are present: rivet busting; power tool cleaning without dust collection systems; cleanup activities where dry expendable abrasives are used; and abrasive blasting enclosure movement and removal. (iv) With respect to the tasks listed in this paragraph (d)(2)(iv), where lead is present, until the employer performs an employee exposure assessment as required in this paragraph (d) and documents that the employee performing any of the listed tasks is not exposed to lead in excess of 2,500 µg/m 3 3 3 (A) Abrasive blasting, (B) Welding, (C) Cutting, and (D) Torch burning. (v) Until the employer performs an employee exposure assessment as required under paragraph (d) of this section and determines actual employee exposure, the employer shall provide to employees performing the tasks described in paragraphs (d)(2)(i), (d)(2)(ii), (d)(2)(iii), and (d)(2)(iv) of this section with interim protection as follows: (A) Appropriate respiratory protection in accordance with paragraph (f) of this section. (B) Appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section. (C) Change areas in accordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this section. (D) Hand washing facilities in accordance with paragraph (i)(5) of this section. (E) Biological monitoring in accordance with paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this section, to consist of blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin levels, and (F) Training as required under paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section regarding 29 CFR 1926.59, Hazard Communication; training as required under paragraph (1)(2)(iii) of this section, regarding use of respirators; and training in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.21, Safety training and education. (3) Basis of initial determination. (A) Any information, observations, or calculations which would indicate employee exposure to lead; (B) Any previous measurements of airborne lead; and (C) Any employee complaints of symptoms which may be attributable to exposure to lead. (ii) Monitoring for the initial determination where performed may be limited to a representative sample of the exposed employees who the employer reasonably believes are exposed to the greatest airborne concentrations of lead in the workplace. (iii) Where the employer has previously monitored for lead exposures, and the data were obtained within the past 12 months during work operations conducted under workplace conditions closely resembling the processes, type of material, control methods, work practices, and environmental conditions used and prevailing in the employer's current operations, the employer may rely on such earlier monitoring results to satisfy the requirements of paragraphs (d)(3)(i) and (d)(6) of this section if the sampling and analytical methods meet the accuracy and confidence levels of paragraph (d)(9) of this section. (iv) Where the employer has objective data, demonstrating that a particular product or material containing lead or a specific process, operation or activity involving lead cannot result in employee exposure to lead at or above the action level during processing, use, or handling, the employer may rely upon such data instead of implementing initial monitoring. (A) The employer shall establish and maintain an accurate record documenting the nature and relevancy of objective data as specified in paragraph (n)(4) of this section, where used in assessing employee exposure in lieu of exposure monitoring. (B) Objective data, as described in paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, is not permitted to be used for exposure assessment in connection with paragraph (d)(2) of this section. (4) Positive initial determination and initial monitoring. (ii) Where the employer has previously monitored for lead exposure, and the data were obtained within the past 12 months during work operations conducted under workplace conditions closely resembling the processes, type of material, control methods, work practices, and environmental conditions used and prevailing in the employer's current operations, the employer may rely on such earlier monitoring results to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section if the sampling and analytical methods meet the accuracy and confidence levels of paragraph (d)(9) of this section. (5) Negative initial determination. (6) Frequency. (ii) If the initial determination or subsequent determination reveals employee exposure to be at or above the action level but at or below the PEL the employer shall perform monitoring in accordance with this paragraph at least every 6 months. The employer shall continue monitoring at the required frequency until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level at which time the employer may discontinue monitoring for that employee except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of this section. (iii) If the initial determination reveals that employee exposure is above the PEL the employer shall perform monitoring quarterly. The employer shall continue monitoring at the required frequency until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are at or below the PEL but at or above the action level at which time the employer shall repeat monitoring for that employee at the frequency specified in paragraph (d)(6)(ii) of this section, except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of this section. The employer shall continue monitoring at the required frequency until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level at which time the employer may discontinue monitoring for that employee except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of this section. (7) Additional exposure assessments. (8) Employee notification. (ii) Whenever the results indicate that the representative employee exposure, without regard to respirators, is at or above the PEL the employer shall include in the written notice a statement that the employees exposure was at or above that level and a description of the corrective action taken or to be taken to reduce exposure to below that level. (9) Accuracy of measurement. 3 (e) Methods of compliance Engineering and work practice controls. (2) Compliance program. (ii) Written plans for these compliance programs shall include at least the following: (A) A description of each activity in which lead is emitted; e.g. equipment used, material involved, controls in place, crew size, employee job responsibilities, operating procedures and maintenance practices; (B) A description of the specific means that will be employed to achieve compliance and, where engineering controls are required engineering plans and studies used to determine methods selected for controlling exposure to lead; (C) A report of the technology considered in meeting the PEL; (D) Air monitoring data which documents the source of lead emissions; (E) A detailed schedule for implementation of the program, including documentation such as copies of purchase orders for equipment, construction contracts, etc.; (F) A work practice program which includes items required under paragraphs (g), (h) and (i) of this section and incorporates other relevant work practices such as those specified in paragraph (e)(5) of this section; (G) An administrative control schedule required by paragraph (e)(4) of this section, if applicable; (H) A description of arrangements made among contractors on multi-contractor sites with respect to informing affected employees of potential exposure to lead and with respect to responsibility for compliance with this section as set-forth in § 1926.16. (I) Other relevant information. (iii) The compliance program shall provide for frequent and regular inspections of job sites, materials, and equipment to be made by a competent person. (iv) Written programs shall be submitted upon request to any affected employee or authorized employee representatives, to the Assistant Secretary and the Director, and shall be available at the worksite for examination and copying by the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (v) Written programs must be revised and updated at least annually to reflect the current status of the program. (3) Mechanical ventilation. (4) Administrative controls. (i) Name or identification number of each affected employee; (ii) Duration and exposure levels at each job or work station where each affected employee is located; and (iii) Any other information which may be useful in assessing the reliability of administrative controls to reduce exposure to lead. (5) The employer shall ensure that, to the extent relevant, employees follow good work practices such as described in appendix B of this section. (f) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods when an employee's exposure to lead exceeds the PEL. (ii) Work operations for which engineering and work-practice controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the PEL. (iii) Periods when an employee requests a respirator. (iv) Periods when respirators are required to provide interim protection of employees while they perform the operations specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. (2) Respirator program. (ii) If an employee has breathing difficulty during fit testing or respirator use, the employer must provide the employee with a medical examination in accordance with paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B) of this section to determine whether or not the employee can use a respirator while performing the required duty. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (B) Provide employees with a full facepiece respirator instead of a half mask respirator for protection against lead aerosols that may cause eye or skin irritation at the use concentrations. (C) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators. (ii) The employer must provide a powered air-purifying respirator when an employee chooses to use such a respirator and it will provide adequate protection to the employee. (g) Protective work clothing and equipment Provision and use. (i) Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing; (ii) Gloves, hats, and shoes or disposable shoe coverlets; and (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or other appropriate protective equipment which complies with § 1910.133 of this chapter. (2) Cleaning and replacement. 3 (ii) The employer shall provide for the cleaning, laundering, and disposal of protective clothing and equipment required by paragraph (g)(1) of this section. (iii) The employer shall repair or replace required protective clothing and equipment as needed to maintain their effectiveness. (iv) The employer shall assure that all protective clothing is removed at the completion of a work shift only in change areas provided for that purpose as prescribed in paragraph (i)(2) of this section. (v) The employer shall assure that contaminated protective clothing which is to be cleaned, laundered, or disposed of, is placed in a closed container in the change area which prevents dispersion of lead outside the container. (vi) The employer shall inform in writing any person who cleans or launders protective clothing or equipment of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to lead. (vii)(A) The employer shall ensure that the containers of contaminated protective clothing and equipment required by paragraph (g)(2)(v) of this section are labeled as follows: DANGER: CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD. MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD. CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM. DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE WHEN HANDLING. DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR SHAKING. DISPOSE OF LEAD CONTAMINATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR FEDERAL REGULATIONS. (B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on bags or containers of contaminated protective clothing and equipment required by paragraph (g)(2)(v) in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraph (g)(2)(vii)(A) of this section: Caution: Clothing contaminated with lead. Do not remove dust by blowing or shaking. Dispose of lead contaminated wash water in accordance with applicable local, state, or federal regulations. (viii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of lead from protective clothing or equipment by blowing, shaking, or any other means which disperses lead into the air. (h) Housekeeping. (2) Clean-up of floors and other surfaces where lead accumulates shall wherever possible, be cleaned by vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of lead becoming airborne. (3) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only where vacuuming or other equally effective methods have been tried and found not to be effective. (4) Where vacuuming methods are selected, the vacuums shall be equipped with HEPA filters and used and emptied in a manner which minimizes the reentry of lead into the workplace. (5) Compressed air shall not be used to remove lead from any surface unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with a ventilation system designed to capture the airborne dust created by the compressed air. (i) Hygiene facilities and practices. (2) Change areas. (ii) The employer shall assure that change areas are equipped with separate storage facilities for protective work clothing and equipment and for street clothes which prevent cross-contamination. (iii) The employer shall assure that employees do not leave the workplace wearing any protective clothing or equipment that is required to be worn during the work shift. (3) Showers. (ii) The employer shall assure, where shower facilities are available, that employees shower at the end of the work shift and shall provide an adequate supply of cleansing agents and towels for use by affected employees. (4) Eating facilities. (ii) The employer shall assure that lunchroom facilities or eating areas are as free as practicable from lead contamination and are readily accessible to employees. (iii) The employer shall assure that employees whose airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL, without regard to the use of a respirator, wash their hands and face prior to eating, drinking, smoking or applying cosmetics. (iv) The employer shall assure that employees do not enter lunchroom facilities or eating areas with protective work clothing or equipment unless surface lead dust has been removed by vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other cleaning method that limits dispersion of lead dust. (5) Hand washing facilities. (ii) Where showers are not provided the employer shall assure that employees wash their hands and face at the end of the work-shift. (j) Medical surveillance General. (ii) The employer shall institute a medical surveillance program in accordance with paragraphs (j)(2) and (j)(3) of this section for all employees who are or may be exposed by the employer at or above the action level for more than 30 days in any consecutive 12 months; (iii) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician. (iv) The employer shall make available the required medical surveillance including multiple physician review under paragraph (j)(3)(iii) without cost to employees and at a reasonable time and place. (2) Biological monitoring Blood lead and ZPP level sampling and analysis. (A) For each employee covered under paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section, at least every 2 months for the first 6 months and every 6 months thereafter; (B) For each employee covered under paragraphs (j)(1) (i) or (ii) of this section whose last blood sampling and analysis indicated a blood lead level at or above 40 µg/dl, at least every two months. This frequency shall continue until two consecutive blood samples and analyses indicate a blood lead level below 40 µg/dl; and (C) For each employee who is removed from exposure to lead due to an elevated blood lead level at least monthly during the removal period. (ii) Follow-up blood sampling tests. (iii) Accuracy of blood lead level sampling and analysis. (iv) Employee notification. (B) The employer shall notify each employee whose blood lead level is at or above 40 µg/dl that the standard requires temporary medical removal with Medical Removal Protection benefits when an employee's blood lead level is at or above the numerical criterion for medical removal under paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section. (3) Medical examinations and consultations Frequency. (A) At least annually for each employee for whom a blood sampling test conducted at any time during the preceding 12 months indicated a blood lead level at or above 40 µg/dl; (B) As soon as possible, upon notification by an employee either that the employee has developed signs or symptoms commonly associated with lead intoxication, that the employee desires medical advice concerning the effects of current or past exposure to lead on the employee's ability to procreate a healthy child, that the employee is pregnant, or that the employee has demonstrated difficulty in breathing during a respirator fitting test or during use; and (C) As medically appropriate for each employee either removed from exposure to lead due to a risk of sustaining material impairment to health, or otherwise limited pursuant to a final medical determination. (ii) Content. (A) A detailed work history and a medical history, with particular attention to past lead exposure (occupational and non-occupational), personal habits (smoking, hygiene), and past gastrointestinal, hematologic, renal, cardiovascular, reproductive and neurological problems; (B) A thorough physical examination, with particular attention to teeth, gums, hematologic, gastrointestinal, renal, cardiovascular, and neurological systems. Pulmonary status should be evaluated if respiratory protection will be used; (C) A blood pressure measurement; (D) A blood sample and analysis which determines: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 (E) A routine urinalysis with microscopic examination; and (F) Any laboratory or other test relevant to lead exposure which the examining physician deems necessary by sound medical practice. (iii) Multiple physician review mechanism. ( 1 ( 2 (B) The employer shall promptly notify an employee of the right to seek a second medical opinion after each occasion that an initial physician conducts a medical examination or consultation pursuant to this section. The employer may condition its participation in, and payment for, the multiple physician review mechanism upon the employee doing the following within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the foregoing notification, or receipt of the initial physician's written opinion, whichever is later: ( 1 ( 2 (C) If the findings, determinations or recommendations of the second physician differ from those of the initial physician, then the employer and the employee shall assure that efforts are made for the two physicians to resolve any disagreement. (D) If the two physicians have been unable to quickly resolve their disagreement, then the employer and the employee through their respective physicians shall designate a third physician: ( 1 ( 2 (E) The employer shall act consistent with the findings, determinations and recommendations of the third physician, unless the employer and the employee reach an agreement which is otherwise consistent with the recommendations of at least one of the three physicians. (iv) Information provided to examining and consulting physicians. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 (B) The employer shall provide the foregoing information to a second or third physician conducting a medical examination or consultation under this section upon request either by the second or third physician, or by the employee. (v) Written medical opinions. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (B) The employer shall instruct each examining and consulting physician to: ( 1 ( 2 (vi) Alternate physician determination mechanisms. (4) Chelation. (ii) If therapeutic or diagnostic chelation is to be performed by any person in paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section, the employer shall assure that it be done under the supervision of a licensed physician in a clinical setting with thorough and appropriate medical monitoring and that the employee is notified in writing prior to its occurrence. (k) Medical removal protection Temporary medical removal and return of an employee Temporary removal due to elevated blood lead level. (ii) Temporary removal due to a final medical determination. (B) For the purposes of this section, the phrase final medical determination (C) Where a final medical determination results in any recommended special protective measures for an employee, or limitations on an employee's exposure to lead, the employer shall implement and act consistent with the recommendation. (iii) Return of the employee to former job status. ( 1 ( 2 (B) For the purposes of this section, the requirement that an employer return an employee to his or her former job status is not intended to expand upon or restrict any rights an employee has or would have had, absent temporary medical removal, to a specific job classification or position under the terms of a collective bargaining agreement. (iv) Removal of other employee special protective measure or limitations. (v) Employer options pending a final medical determination. (A) Removal. (B) Return. ( 1 ( 2 (2) Medical removal protection benefits Provision of medical removal protection benefits. (ii) Definition of medical removal protection benefits. (iii) Follow-up medical surveillance during the period of employee removal or limitation. (iv) Workers' compensation claims. (v) Other credits. (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of an employee. (l) Communication of hazards General Hazard communication. (A) Reproductive/developmental toxicity; (B) Central nervous system effects; (C) Kidney effects; (D) Blood effects; and (E) Acute toxicity effects. (ii) The employer shall train each employee who is subject to exposure to lead at or above the action level on any day, or who is subject to exposure to lead compounds which may cause skin or eye irritation ( e.g. (iii) The employer shall provide the training program as initial training prior to the time of job assignment or prior to the start up date for this requirement, whichever comes last. (iv) The employer shall also provide the training program at least annually for each employee who is subject to lead exposure at or above the action level on any day. (2) Training program. (i) The content of this standard and its appendices; (ii) The specific nature of the operations which could result in exposure to lead above the action level; (iii) The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use, and limitations of respirators; (iv) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program, and the medical removal protection program including information concerning the adverse health effects associated with excessive exposure to lead (with particular attention to the adverse reproductive effects on both males and females and hazards to the fetus and additional precautions for employees who are pregnant); (v) The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job assignment including training of employees to follow relevant good work practices described in appendix B of this section; (vi) The contents of any compliance plan in effect; (vii) Instructions to employees that chelating agents should not routinely be used to remove lead from their bodies and should not be used at all except under the direction of a licensed physician; and (viii) The employee's right of access to records under 29 CFR 1910.20. (3) Access to information and training materials. (ii) The employer shall provide, upon request, all materials relating to the employee information and training program to affected employees and their designated representatives, and to the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (m) Signs General. DANGER LEAD WORK AREA MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS AREA (ii) The employer shall ensure that no statement appears on or near any sign required by this paragraph (m) that contradicts or detracts from the meaning of the required sign. (iii) The employer shall ensure that signs required by this paragraph (m) are illuminated and cleaned as necessary so that the legend is readily visible. (iv) The employer may use signs required by other statutes, regulations or ordinances in addition to, or in combination with, signs required by this paragraph (m). (v) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (m)(1)(i) of this section: WARNING LEAD WORK AREA POISON NO SMOKING OR EATING (n) Recordkeeping Exposure assessment. (ii) Exposure monitoring records shall include: (A) The date(s), number, duration, location and results of each of the samples taken if any, including a description of the sampling procedure used to determine representative employee exposure where applicable; (B) A description of the sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (C) The type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any; (D) Name and job classification of the employee monitored and of all other employees whose exposure the measurement is intended to represent; and (E) The environmental variables that could affect the measurement of employee exposure. (iii) The employer shall maintain monitoring and other exposure assessment records in accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33. (2) Medical surveillance. (ii) This record shall include: (A) The name and description of the duties of the employee; (B) A copy of the physician's written opinions; (C) Results of any airborne exposure monitoring done on or for that employee and provided to the physician; and (D) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to lead. (iii) The employer shall keep, or assure that the examining physician keeps, the following medical records: (A) A copy of the medical examination results including medical and work history required under paragraph (j) of this section; (B) A description of the laboratory procedures and a copy of any standards or guidelines used to interpret the test results or references to that information; (C) A copy of the results of biological monitoring. (iv) The employer shall maintain or assure that the physician maintains medical records in accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33. (3) Medical removals. (ii) Each record shall include: (A) The name of the employee; (B) The date of each occasion that the employee was removed from current exposure to lead as well as the corresponding date on which the employee was returned to his or her former job status; (C) A brief explanation of how each removal was or is being accomplished; and (D) A statement with respect to each removal indicating whether or not the reason for the removal was an elevated blood lead level. (iii) The employer shall maintain each medical removal record for at least the duration of an employee's employment. (4) Objective data for exemption from requirement for initial monitoring. (ii) The employer shall maintain the record of the objective data relied upon for at least 30 years. (5) Availability. (6) Transfer of records. (ii) The employer shall also comply with any additional requirements involving the transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). (o) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (ii) Without interfering with the monitoring, observers shall be entitled to: (A) Receive an explanation of the measurement procedures; (B) Observe all steps related to the monitoring of lead performed at the place of exposure; and (C) Record the results obtained or receive copies of the results when returned by the laboratory. (p) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1926.62—Substance Data Sheet for Occupational Exposure to Lead I. Substance Identification A. Substance: B. Compounds covered by the standard: lead C. Uses: D. Permissible exposure: 3 E. Action level: 3 II. Health Hazard Data A. Ways in which lead enters your body. B. Effects of overexposure to lead Short term (acute) overexposure. (2) Long-term (chronic) overexposure. (3) Health protection goals of the standard. BLL measurements show the amount of lead circulating in your blood stream, but do not give any information about the amount of lead stored in your various tissues. BLL measurements merely show current absorption of lead, not the effect that lead is having on your body or the effects that past lead exposure may have already caused. Past research into lead-related diseases, however, has focused heavily on associations between BLLs and various diseases. As a result, your BLL is an important indicator of the likelihood that you will gradually acquire a lead-related health impairment or disease. Once your blood lead level climbs above 40 µg/dl, your risk of disease increases. There is a wide variability of individual response to lead, thus it is difficult to say that a particular BLL in a given person will cause a particular effect. Studies have associated fatal encephalopathy with BLLs as low as 150 µg/dl. Other studies have shown other forms of diseases in some workers with BLLs well below 80 µg/dl. Your BLL is a crucial indicator of the risks to your health, but one other factor is also extremely important. This factor is the length of time you have had elevated BLLs. The longer you have an elevated BLL, the greater the risk that large quantities of lead are being gradually stored in your organs and tissues (body burden). The greater your overall body burden, the greater the chances of substantial permanent damage. The best way to prevent all forms of lead-related impairments and diseases—both short term and long term—is to maintain your BLL below 40 µg/dl. The provisions of the standard are designed with this end in mind. Your employer has prime responsibility to assure that the provisions of the standard are complied with both by the company and by individual workers. You, as a worker, however, also have a responsibility to assist your employer in complying with the standard. You can play a key role in protecting your own health by learning about the lead hazards and their control, learning what the standard requires, following the standard where it governs your own actions, and seeing that your employer complies with provisions governing his or her actions. (4) Reporting signs and symptoms of health problems. Appendix B to § 1926.62—Employee Standard Summary This appendix summarizes key provisions of the interim final standard for lead in construction that you as a worker should become familiar with. I. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)—Paragraph (C) The standard sets a permissible exposure limit (PEL) of 50 micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (50 µg/m 3 3 II. Exposure Assessment—Paragraph (D) If lead is present in your workplace in any quantity, your employer is required to make an initial determination of whether any employee's exposure to lead exceeds the action level (30 µg/m 3 Objective data may be compiled from various sources, e.g., insurance companies and trade associations and information from suppliers or exposure data collected from similar operations. Objective data may also comprise previously-collected sampling data including area monitoring. If it cannot be determined through using objective data that worker exposure is less than the action level, your employer must conduct monitoring or must rely on relevant previous personal sampling, if available. Where monitoring is required for the initial determination, it may be limited to a representative number of employees who are reasonably expected to have the highest exposure levels. If your employer has conducted appropriate air sampling for lead in the past 12 months, he or she may use these results, provided they are applicable to the same employee tasks and exposure conditions and meet the requirements for accuracy as specified in the standard. As with objective data, if such results are relied upon for the initial determination, your employer must establish and maintain a record as to the relevancy of such data to current job conditions. If there have been any employee complaints of symptoms which may be attributable to exposure to lead or if there is any other information or observations which would indicate employee exposure to lead, this must also be considered as part of the initial determination. If this initial determination shows that a reasonable possibility exists that any employee may be exposed, without regard to respirators, over the action level, your employer must set up an air monitoring program to determine the exposure level representative of each employee exposed to lead at your workplace. In carrying out this air monitoring program, your employer is not required to monitor the exposure of every employee, but he or she must monitor a representative number of employees and job types. Enough sampling must be done to enable each employee's exposure level to be reasonably represent full shift exposure. In addition, these air samples must be taken under conditions which represent each employee's regular, daily exposure to lead. Sampling performed in the past 12 months may be used to determine exposures above the action level if such sampling was conducted during work activities essentially similar to present work conditions. The standard lists certain tasks which may likely result in exposures to lead in excess of the PEL and, in some cases, exposures in excess of 50 times the PEL. If you are performing any of these tasks, your employer must provide you with appropriate respiratory protection, protective clothing and equipment, change areas, hand washing facilities, biological monitoring, and training until such time that an exposure assessment is conducted which demonstrates that your exposure level is below the PEL. If you are exposed to lead and air sampling is performed, your employer is required to notify you in writing within 5 working days of the air monitoring results which represent your exposure. If the results indicate that your exposure exceeds the PEL (without regard to your use of a respirator), then your employer must also notify you of this in writing, and provide you with a description of the corrective action that has been taken or will be taken to reduce your exposure. Your exposure must be rechecked by monitoring, at least every six months if your exposure is at or over the action level but below the PEL. Your employer may discontinue monitoring for you if 2 consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are at or below the action level. Air monitoring must be repeated every 3 months if you are exposed over the PEL. Your employer must continue monitoring for you at this frequency until 2 consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the PEL but above the action level, at which time your employer must repeat monitoring of your exposure every six months and may discontinue monitoring only after your exposure drops to or below the action level. However, whenever there is a change of equipment, process, control, or personnel or a new type of job is added at your workplace which may result in new or additional exposure to lead, your employer must perform additional monitoring. III. Methods of Compliance—Paragraph (E) Your employer is required to assure that no employee is exposed to lead in excess of the PEL as an 8-hour TWA. The interim final standard for lead in construction requires employers to institute engineering and work practice controls including administrative controls to the extent feasible to reduce employee exposure to lead. Where such controls are feasible but not adequate to reduce exposures below the PEL they must be used nonetheless to reduce exposures to the lowest level that can be accomplished by these means and then supplemented with appropriate respiratory protection. Your employer is required to develop and implement a written compliance program prior to the commencement of any job where employee exposures may reach the PEL as an 8-hour TWA. The interim final standard identifies the various elements that must be included in the plan. For example, employers are required to include a description of operations in which lead is emitted, detailing other relevant information about the operation such as the type of equipment used, the type of material involved, employee job responsibilities, operating procedures and maintenance practices. In addition, your employer's compliance plan must specify the means that will be used to achieve compliance and, where engineering controls are required, include any engineering plans or studies that have been used to select the control methods. If administrative controls involving job rotation are used to reduce employee exposure to lead, the job rotation schedule must be included in the compliance plan. The plan must also detail the type of protective clothing and equipment, including respirators, housekeeping and hygiene practices that will be used to protect you from the adverse effects of exposure to lead. The written compliance program must be made available, upon request, to affected employees and their designated representatives, the Assistant Secretary and the Director. Finally, the plan must be reviewed and updated at least every 6 months to assure it reflects the current status in exposure control. IV. Respiratory Protection—Paragraph (F) Your employer is required to provide and assure your use of respirators when your exposure to lead is not controlled below the PEL by other means. The employer must pay the cost of the respirator. Whenever you request one, your employer is also required to provide you a respirator even if your air exposure level is not above the PEL. You might desire a respirator when, for example, you have received medical advice that your lead absorption should be decreased. Or, you may intend to have children in the near future, and want to reduce the level of lead in your body to minimize adverse reproductive effects. While respirators are the least satisfactory means of controlling your exposure, they are capable of providing significant protection if properly chosen, fitted, worn, cleaned, maintained, and replaced when they stop providing adequate protection. Your employer is required to select your respirator according to the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62(f)(3), including the requirements referenced in 29 CFR 1910.134(d)(3)(i)(A) of this chapter. Any respirator chosen must be approved by NIOSH under the provisions of 42 CFR part 84. These respirator selection references will enable your employer to choose a type of respirator that will give you a proper amount of protection based on your airborne lead exposure. Your employer may select a type of respirator that provides greater protection than that required by the standard; that is, one recommended for a higher concentration of lead than is present in your workplace. For example, a powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) is much more protective than a typical negative pressure respirator, and may also be more comfortable to wear. A PAPR has a filter, cartridge, or canister to clean the air, and a power source that continuously blows filtered air into your breathing zone. Your employer might make a PAPR available to you to ease the burden of having to wear a respirator for long periods of time. The standard provides that you can obtain a PAPR upon request. Your employer must also start a Respiratory Protection Program. This program must include written procedures for the proper selection, use, cleaning, storage, and maintenance of respirators. Your employer must ensure that your respirator facepiece fits properly. Proper fit of a respirator facepiece is critical to your protection from airborne lead. Obtaining a proper fit on each employee may require your employer to make available several different types of respirator masks. To ensure that your respirator fits properly and that facepiece leakage is minimal, your employer must give you either a qualitative or quantitative fit test as specified in appendix A of the Respiratory Protection standard located at 29 CFR 1910.134. You must also receive from your employer proper training in the use of respirators. Your employer is required to teach you how to wear a respirator, to know why it is needed, and to understand its limitations. The standard provides that if your respirator uses filter elements, you must be given an opportunity to change the filter elements whenever an increase in breathing resistance is detected. You also must be permitted to periodically leave your work area to wash your face and respirator facepiece whenever necessary to prevent skin irritation. If you ever have difficulty in breathing during a fit test or while using a respirator, your employer must make a medical examination available to you to determine whether you can safely wear a respirator. The result of this examination may be to give you a positive pressure respirator (which reduces breathing resistance) or to provide alternative means of protection. V. Protective Work Clothing and Equipment—Paragraph (G) If you are exposed to lead above the PEL as an 8-hour TWA, without regard to your use of a respirator, or if you are exposed to lead compounds such as lead arsenate or lead azide which can cause skin and eye irritation, your employer must provide you with protective work clothing and equipment appropriate for the hazard. If work clothing is provided, it must be provided in a clean and dry condition at least weekly, and daily if your airborne exposure to lead is greater than 200 µg/m 3 The interim final standard requires that your employer assure that you follow good work practices when you are working in areas where your exposure to lead may exceed the PEL. With respect to protective clothing and equipment, where appropriate, the following procedures should be observed prior to beginning work: 1. Change into work clothing and shoe covers in the clean section of the designated changing areas; 2. Use work garments of appropriate protective gear, including respirators before entering the work area; and 3. Store any clothing not worn under protective clothing in the designated changing area. Workers should follow these procedures upon leaving the work area: 1. HEPA vacuum heavily contaminated protective work clothing while it is still being worn. At no time may lead be removed from protective clothing by any means which result in uncontrolled dispersal of lead into the air; 2. Remove shoe covers and leave them in the work area; 3. Remove protective clothing and gear in the dirty area of the designated changing area. Remove protective coveralls by carefully rolling down the garment to reduce exposure to dust. 4. Remove respirators last; and 5. Wash hands and face. Workers should follow these procedures upon finishing work for the day (in addition to procedures described above): 1. Where applicable, place disposal coveralls and shoe covers with the abatement waste; 2. Contaminated clothing which is to be cleaned, laundered or disposed of must be placed in closed containers in the change room. 3. Clean protective gear, including respirators, according to standard procedures; 4. Wash hands and face again. If showers are available, take a shower and wash hair. If shower facilities are not available at the work site, shower immediately at home and wash hair. VI. Housekeeping—Paragraph (H) Your employer must establish a housekeeping program sufficient to maintain all surfaces as free as practicable of accumulations of lead dust. Vacuuming is the preferred method of meeting this requirement, and the use of compressed air to clean floors and other surfaces is generally prohibited unless removal with compressed air is done in conjunction with ventilation systems designed to contain dispersal of the lead dust. Dry or wet sweeping, shoveling, or brushing may not be used except where vacuuming or other equally effective methods have been tried and do not work. Vacuums must be used equipped with a special filter called a high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter and emptied in a manner which minimizes the reentry of lead into the workplace. VII. Hygiene Facilities and Practices—Paragraph (I) The standard requires that hand washing facilities be provided where occupational exposure to lead occurs. In addition, change areas, showers (where feasible), and lunchrooms or eating areas are to be made available to workers exposed to lead above the PEL. Your employer must assure that except in these facilities, food and beverage is not present or consumed, tobacco products are not present or used, and cosmetics are not applied, where airborne exposures are above the PEL. Change rooms provided by your employer must be equipped with separate storage facilities for your protective clothing and equipment and street clothes to avoid cross-contamination. After showering, no required protective clothing or equipment worn during the shift may be worn home. It is important that contaminated clothing or equipment be removed in change areas and not be worn home or you will extend your exposure and expose your family since lead from your clothing can accumulate in your house, car, etc. Lunchrooms or eating areas may not be entered with protective clothing or equipment unless surface dust has been removed by vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other cleaning method. Finally, workers exposed above the PEL must wash both their hands and faces prior to eating, drinking, smoking or applying cosmetics. All of the facilities and hygiene practices just discussed are essential to minimize additional sources of lead absorption from inhalation or ingestion of lead that may accumulate on you, your clothes, or your possessions. Strict compliance with these provisions can virtually eliminate several sources of lead exposure which significantly contribute to excessive lead absorption. VIII. Medical Surveillance—Paragraph (J) The medical surveillance program is part of the standard's comprehensive approach to the prevention of lead-related disease. Its purpose is to supplement the main thrust of the standard which is aimed at minimizing airborne concentrations of lead and sources of ingestion. Only medical surveillance can determine if the other provisions of the standard have affectively protected you as an individual. Compliance with the standard's provision will protect most workers from the adverse effects of lead exposure, but may not be satisfactory to protect individual workers (1) who have high body burdens of lead acquired over past years, (2) who have additional uncontrolled sources of non-occupational lead exposure, (3) who exhibit unusual variations in lead absorption rates, or (4) who have specific non-work related medical conditions which could be aggravated by lead exposure (e.g., renal disease, anemia). In addition, control systems may fail, or hygiene and respirator programs may be inadequate. Periodic medical surveillance of individual workers will help detect those failures. Medical surveillance will also be important to protect your reproductive ability-regardless of whether you are a man or woman. All medical surveillance required by the interim final standard must be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician. The employer must provide required medical surveillance without cost to employees and at a reasonable time and place. The standard's medical surveillance program has two parts—periodic biological monitoring and medical examinations. Your employer's obligation to offer you medical surveillance is triggered by the results of the air monitoring program. Full medical surveillance must be made available to all employees who are or may be exposed to lead in excess of the action level for more than 30 days a year and whose blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/dl. Initial medical surveillance consisting of blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin must be provided to all employees exposed at any time (1 day) above the action level. Biological monitoring under the standard must be provided at least every 2 months for the first 6 months and every 6 months thereafter until your blood lead level is below 40 µg/dl. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) test is a very useful blood test which measures an adverse metabolic effect of lead on your body and is therefore an indicator of lead toxicity. If your BLL exceeds 40 µg/dl the monitoring frequency must be increased from every 6 months to at least every 2 months and not reduced until two consecutive BLLs indicate a blood lead level below 40 µg/dl. Each time your BLL is determined to be over 40 µg/dl, your employer must notify you of this in writing within five working days of his or her receipt of the test results. The employer must also inform you that the standard requires temporary medical removal with economic protection when your BLL exceeds 50 µg/dl. (See Discussion of Medical Removal Protection-Paragraph (k).) Anytime your BLL exceeds 50 µg/dl your employer must make available to you within two weeks of receipt of these test results a second follow-up BLL test to confirm your BLL. If the two tests both exceed 50 µg/dl, and you are temporarily removed, then your employer must make successive BLL tests available to you on a monthly basis during the period of your removal. Medical examinations beyond the initial one must be made available on an annual basis if your blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/dl at any time during the preceding year and you are being exposed above the airborne action level of 30 µg/m 3 An initial medical examination to consist of blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin must also be made available (prior to assignment) for each employee being assigned for the first time to an area where the airborne concentration of lead equals or exceeds the action level at any time. In addition, a medical examination or consultation must be made available as soon as possible if you notify your employer that you are experiencing signs or symptoms commonly associated with lead poisoning or that you have difficulty breathing while wearing a respirator or during a respirator fit test. You must also be provided a medical examination or consultation if you notify your employer that you desire medical advice concerning the effects of current or past exposure to lead on your ability to procreate a healthy child. Finally, appropriate follow-up medical examinations or consultations may also be provided for employees who have been temporarily removed from exposure under the medical removal protection provisions of the standard. (See Part IX, below.) The standard specifies the minimum content of pre-assignment and annual medical examinations. The content of other types of medical examinations and consultations is left up to the sound discretion of the examining physician. Pre-assignment and annual medical examinations must include (1) a detailed work history and medical history; (2) a thorough physical examination, including an evaluation of your pulmonary status if you will be required to use a respirator; (3) a blood pressure measurement; and (4) a series of laboratory tests designed to check your blood chemistry and your kidney function. In addition, at any time upon your request, a laboratory evaluation of male fertility will be made (microscopic examination of a sperm sample), or a pregnancy test will be given. The standard does not require that you participate in any of the medical procedures, tests, etc. which your employer is required to make available to you. Medical surveillance can, however, play a very important role in protecting your health. You are strongly encouraged, therefore, to participate in a meaningful fashion. The standard contains a multiple physician review mechanism which will give you a chance to have a physician of your choice directly participate in the medical surveillance program. If you are dissatisfied with an examination by a physician chosen by your employer, you can select a second physician to conduct an independent analysis. The two doctors would attempt to resolve any differences of opinion, and select a third physician to resolve any firm dispute. Generally your employer will choose the physician who conducts medical surveillance under the lead standard-unless you and your employer can agree on the choice of a physician or physicians. Some companies and unions have agreed in advance, for example, to use certain independent medical laboratories or panels of physicians. Any of these arrangements are acceptable so long as required medical surveillance is made available to workers. The standard requires your employer to provide certain information to a physician to aid in his or her examination of you. This information includes (1) the standard and its appendices, (2) a description of your duties as they relate to occupational lead exposure, (3) your exposure level or anticipated exposure level, (4) a description of any personal protective equipment you wear, (5) prior blood lead level results, and (6) prior written medical opinions concerning you that the employer has. After a medical examination or consultation the physician must prepare a written report which must contain (1) the physician's opinion as to whether you have any medical condition which places you at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to lead, (2) any recommended special protective measures to be provided to you, (3) any blood lead level determinations, and (4) any recommended limitation on your use of respirators. This last element must include a determination of whether you can wear a powered air purifying respirator (PAPR) if you are found unable to wear a negative pressure respirator. The medical surveillance program of the interim lead standard may at some point in time serve to notify certain workers that they have acquired a disease or other adverse medical condition as a result of occupational lead exposure. If this is true, these workers might have legal rights to compensation from public agencies, their employers, firms that supply hazardous products to their employers, or other persons. Some states have laws, including worker compensation laws, that disallow a worker who learns of a job-related health impairment to sue, unless the worker sues within a short period of time after learning of the impairment. (This period of time may be a matter of months or years.) An attorney can be consulted about these possibilities. It should be stressed that OSHA is in no way trying to either encourage or discourage claims or lawsuits. However, since results of the standard's medical surveillance program can significantly affect the legal remedies of a worker who has acquired a job-related disease or impairment, it is proper for OSHA to make you aware of this. The medical surveillance section of the standard also contains provisions dealing with chelation. Chelation is the use of certain drugs (administered in pill form or injected into the body) to reduce the amount of lead absorbed in body tissues. Experience accumulated by the medical and scientific communities has largely confirmed the effectiveness of this type of therapy for the treatment of very severe lead poisoning. On the other hand, it has also been established that there can be a long list of extremely harmful side effects associated with the use of chelating agents. The medical community has balanced the advantages and disadvantages resulting from the use of chelating agents in various circumstances and has established when the use of these agents is acceptable. The standard includes these accepted limitations due to a history of abuse of chelation therapy by some lead companies. The most widely used chelating agents are calcium disodium EDTA, (Ca Na2 EDTA), Calcium Disodium Versenate (Versenate), and d-penicillamine (pencillamine or Cupramine). The standard prohibits “prophylactic chelation” of any employee by any person the employer retains, supervises or controls. Prophylactic chelation The standard allows the use of “therapeutic” or “diagnostic” chelation if administered under the supervision of a licensed physician in a clinical setting with thorough and appropriate medical monitoring. Therapeutic chelation responds to severe lead poisoning where there are marked symptoms. Diagnostic chelation involved giving a patient a dose of the drug then collecting all urine excreted for some period of time as an aid to the diagnosis of lead poisoning. In cases where the examining physician determines that chelation is appropriate, you must be notified in writing of this fact before such treatment. This will inform you of a potentially harmful treatment, and allow you to obtain a second opinion. IX. Medical Removal Protection—Paragraph (K) Excessive lead absorption subjects you to increased risk of disease. Medical removal protection (MRP) is a means of protecting you when, for whatever reasons, other methods, such as engineering controls, work practices, and respirators, have failed to provide the protection you need. MRP involves the temporary removal of a worker from his or her regular job to a place of significantly lower exposure without any loss of earnings, seniority, or other employment rights or benefits. The purpose of this program is to cease further lead absorption and allow your body to naturally excrete lead which has previously been absorbed. Temporary medical removal can result from an elevated blood lead level, or a medical opinion. For up to 18 months, or for as long as the job the employee was removed from lasts, protection is provided as a result of either form of removal. The vast majority of removed workers, however, will return to their former jobs long before this eighteen month period expires. You may also be removed from exposure even if your blood lead level is below 50 µg/dl if a final medical determination indicates that you temporarily need reduced lead exposure for medical reasons. If the physician who is implementing your employers medical program makes a final written opinion recommending your removal or other special protective measures, your employer must implement the physician's recommendation. If you are removed in this manner, you may only be returned when the doctor indicates that it is safe for you to do so. The standard does not give specific instructions dealing with what an employer must do with a removed worker. Your job assignment upon removal is a matter for you, your employer and your union (if any) to work out consistent with existing procedures for job assignments. Each removal must be accomplished in a manner consistent with existing collective bargaining relationships. Your employer is given broad discretion to implement temporary removals so long as no attempt is made to override existing agreements. Similarly, a removed worker is provided no right to veto an employer's choice which satisfies the standard. In most cases, employers will likely transfer removed employees to other jobs with sufficiently low lead exposure. Alternatively, a worker's hours may be reduced so that the time weighted average exposure is reduced, or he or she may be temporarily laid off if no other alternative is feasible. In all of these situation, MRP benefits must be provided during the period of removal—i.e., you continue to receive the same earnings, seniority, and other rights and benefits you would have had if you had not been removed. Earnings includes more than just your base wage; it includes overtime, shift differentials, incentives, and other compensation you would have earned if you had not been removed. During the period of removal you must also be provided with appropriate follow-up medical surveillance. If you were removed because your blood lead level was too high, you must be provided with a monthly blood test. If a medical opinion caused your removal, you must be provided medical tests or examinations that the doctor believes to be appropriate. If you do not participate in this follow up medical surveillance, you may lose your eligibility for MRP benefits. When you are medically eligible to return to your former job, your employer must return you to your “former job status.” This means that you are entitled to the position, wages, benefits, etc., you would have had if you had not been removed. If you would still be in your old job if no removal had occurred that is where you go back. If not, you are returned consistent with whatever job assignment discretion your employer would have had if no removal had occurred. MRP only seeks to maintain your rights, not expand them or diminish them. If you are removed under MRP and you are also eligible for worker compensation or other compensation for lost wages, your employer's MRP benefits obligation is reduced by the amount that you actually receive from these other sources. This is also true if you obtain other employment during the time you are laid off with MRP benefits. The standard also covers situations where an employer voluntarily removes a worker from exposure to lead due to the effects of lead on the employee's medical condition, even though the standard does not require removal. In these situations MRP benefits must still be provided as though the standard required removal. Finally, it is important to note that in all cases where removal is required, respirators cannot be used as a substitute. Respirators may be used before removal becomes necessary, but not as an alternative to a transfer to a low exposure job, or to a lay-off with MRP benefits. X. Employee Information and Training—Paragraph (L) Your employer is required to provide an information and training program for all employees exposed to lead above the action level or who may suffer skin or eye irritation from lead compounds such as lead arsenate or lead azide. The program must train these employees regarding the specific hazards associated with their work environment, protective measures which can be taken, including the contents of any compliance plan in effect, the danger of lead to their bodies (including their reproductive systems), and their rights under the standard. All employees must be trained prior to initial assignment to areas where there is a possibility of exposure over the action level. This training program must also be provided at least annually thereafter unless further exposure above the action level will not occur. XI. Signs—Paragraph (M) The standard requires that the following warning sign be posted in work areas when the exposure to lead is above the PEL: DANGER LEAD WORK AREA MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS AREA Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified above: WARNING LEAD WORK AREA POISON NO SMOKING OR EATING XII. Recordkeeping—Paragraph (N) Your employer is required to keep all records of exposure monitoring for airborne lead. These records must include the name and job classification of employees measured, details of the sampling and analytical techniques, the results of this sampling, and the type of respiratory protection being worn by the person sampled. Such records are to be retained for at least 30 years. Your employer is also required to keep all records of biological monitoring and medical examination results. These records must include the names of the employees, the physician's written opinion, and a copy of the results of the examination. Medical records must be preserved and maintained for the duration of employment plus 30 years. However, if the employee's duration of employment is less than one year, the employer need not retain that employee's medical records beyond the period of employment if they are provided to the employee upon termination of employment. Recordkeeping is also required if you are temporarily removed from your job under the medical removal protection program. This record must include your name, the date of your removal and return, how the removal was or is being accomplished, and whether or not the reason for the removal was an elevated blood lead level. Your employer is required to keep each medical removal record only for as long as the duration of an employee's employment. The standard requires that if you request to see or copy environmental monitoring, blood lead level monitoring, or medical removal records, they must be made available to you or to a representative that you authorize. Your union also has access to these records. Medical records other than BLL's must also be provided upon request to you, to your physician or to any other person whom you may specifically designate. Your union does not have access to your personal medical records unless you authorize their access. XIII. Observation of Monitoring—Paragraph (O) When air monitoring for lead is performed at your workplace as required by this standard, your employer must allow you or someone you designate to act as an observer of the monitoring. Observers are entitled to an explanation of the measurement procedure, and to record the results obtained. Since results will not normally be available at the time of the monitoring, observers are entitled to record or receive the results of the monitoring when returned by the laboratory. Your employer is required to provide the observer with any personal protective devices required to be worn by employees working in the area that is being monitored. The employer must require the observer to wear all such equipment and to comply with all other applicable safety and health procedures. XIV. For Additional Information A. A copy of the interim standard for lead in construction can be obtained free of charge by calling or writing the OSHA Office of Publications, room N-3101, United States Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210: Telephone (202) 219-4667. B. Additional information about the standard, its enforcement, and your employer's compliance can be obtained from the nearest OSHA Area Office listed in your telephone directory under United States Government/Department of Labor. Appendix C to § 1926.62—Medical Surveillance Guidelines Introduction The primary purpose of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 is to assure, so far as possible, safe and healthful working conditions for every working man and woman. The interim final occupational health standard for lead in construction is designed to protect workers exposed to inorganic lead including metallic lead, all inorganic lead compounds and organic lead soaps. Under this interim final standard occupational exposure to inorganic lead is to be limited to 50 µg/m 3 3 The standard also provides for a program of biological monitoring for employees exposed to lead above the action level at any time, and additional medical surveillance for all employees exposed to levels of inorganic lead above 30 µg/m 3 The purpose of this document is to outline the medical surveillance provisions of the interim standard for inorganic lead in construction, and to provide further information to the physician regarding the examination and evaluation of workers exposed to inorganic lead. Section 1 provides a detailed description of the monitoring procedure including the required frequency of blood testing for exposed workers, provisions for medical removal protection (MRP), the recommended right of the employee to a second medical opinion, and notification and recordkeeping requirements of the employer. A discussion of the requirements for respirator use and respirator monitoring and OSHA's position on prophylactic chelation therapy are also included in this section. Section 2 discusses the toxic effects and clinical manifestations of lead poisoning and effects of lead intoxication on enzymatic pathways in heme synthesis. The adverse effects on both male and female reproductive capacity and on the fetus are also discussed. Section 3 outlines the recommended medical evaluation of the worker exposed to inorganic lead, including details of the medical history, physical examination, and recommended laboratory tests, which are based on the toxic effects of lead as discussed in Section 2. Section 4 provides detailed information concerning the laboratory tests available for the monitoring of exposed workers. Included also is a discussion of the relative value of each test and the limitations and precautions which are necessary in the interpretation of the laboratory results. I. Medical Surveillance and Monitoring Requirements for Workers Exposed to Inorganic Lead Under the interim final standard for inorganic lead in the construction industry, initial medical surveillance consisting of biological monitoring to include blood lead and ZPP level determination shall be provided to employees exposed to lead at or above the action level on any one day. In addition, a program of biological monitoring is to be made available to all employees exposed above the action level at any time and additional medical surveillance is to be made available to all employees exposed to lead above 30 µg/m 3 Under this program, the blood lead level (BLL) of all employees who are exposed to lead above 30 µg/m 3 An annual medical examination and consultation performed under the guidelines discussed in Section 3 is to be made available to each employee exposed above 30 µg/m 3 3 Results of biological monitoring or the recommendations of an examining physician may necessitate removal of an employee from further lead exposure pursuant to the standard's medical removal protection (MRP) program. The object of the MRP program is to provide temporary medical removal to workers either with substantially elevated blood lead levels or otherwise at risk of sustaining material health impairment from continued substantial exposure to lead. Under the standard's ultimate worker removal criteria, a worker is to be removed from any work having an eight hour TWA exposure to lead of 30 µg/m 3 As part of the interim standard, the employer is required to notify in writing each employee whose blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/dl. In addition each such employee is to be informed that the standard requires medical removal with MRP benefits, discussed below, when an employee's blood lead level exceeds the above defined limit. In addition to the above blood lead level criterion, temporary worker removal may also take place as a result of medical determinations and recommendations. Written medical opinions must be prepared after each examination pursuant to the standard. If the examining physician includes a medical finding, determination or opinion that the employee has a medical condition which places the employee at increased risk of material health impairment from exposure to lead, then the employee must be removed from exposure to lead at or above 30 µg/m 3 Recommendations may be more stringent than the specific provisions of the standard. The examining physician, therefore, is given broad flexibility to tailor special protective procedures to the needs of individual employees. This flexibility extends to the evaluation and management of pregnant workers and male and female workers who are planning to raise children. Based on the history, physical examination, and laboratory studies, the physician might recommend special protective measures or medical removal for an employee who is pregnant or who is planning to conceive a child when, in the physician's judgment, continued exposure to lead at the current job would pose a significant risk. The return of the employee to his or her former job status, or the removal of special protections or limitations, depends upon the examining physician determining that the employee is no longer at increased risk of material impairment or that special measures are no longer needed. During the period of any form of special protection or removal, the employer must maintain the worker's earnings, seniority, and other employment rights and benefits (as though the worker had not been removed) for a period of up to 18 months or for as long as the job the employee was removed from lasts if less than 18 months. This economic protection will maximize meaningful worker participation in the medical surveillance program, and is appropriate as part of the employer's overall obligation to provide a safe and healthful workplace. The provisions of MRP benefits during the employee's removal period may, however, be conditioned upon participation in medical surveillance. The lead standard provides for a multiple physician review in cases where the employee wishes a second opinion concerning potential lead poisoning or toxicity. If an employee wishes a second opinion, he or she can make an appointment with a physician of his or her choice. This second physician will review the findings, recommendations or determinations of the first physician and conduct any examinations, consultations or tests deemed necessary in an attempt to make a final medical determination. If the first and second physicians do not agree in their assessment they must try to resolve their differences. If they cannot reach an agreement then they must designate a third physician to resolve the dispute. The employer must provide examining and consulting physicians with the following specific information: A copy of the lead regulations and all appendices, a description of the employee's duties as related to exposure, the exposure level or anticipated level to lead and any other toxic substances (if applicable), a description of personal protective equipment used, blood lead levels, and all prior written medical opinions regarding the employee in the employer's possession or control. The employer must also obtain from the physician and provide the employee with a written medical opinion containing blood lead levels, the physicians's opinion as to whether the employee is at risk of material impairment to health, any recommended protective measures for the employee if further exposure is permitted, as well as any recommended limitations upon an employee's use of respirators. Employers must instruct each physician not to reveal to the employer in writing or in any other way his or her findings, laboratory results, or diagnoses which are felt to be unrelated to occupational lead exposure. They must also instruct each physician to advise the employee of any occupationally or non-occupationally related medical condition requiring further treatment or evaluation. The standard provides for the use of respirators where engineering and other primary controls are not effective. However, the use of respirator protection shall not be used in lieu of temporary medical removal due to elevated blood lead levels or findings that an employee is at risk of material health impairment. This is based on the numerous inadequacies of respirators including skin rash where the facepiece makes contact with the skin, unacceptable stress to breathing in some workers with underlying cardiopulmonary impairment, difficulty in providing adequate fit, the tendency for respirators to create additional hazards by interfering with vision, hearing, and mobility, and the difficulties of assuring the maximum effectiveness of a complicated work practice program involving respirators. Respirators do, however, serve a useful function where engineering and work practice controls are inadequate by providing supplementary, interim, or short-term protection, provided they are properly selected for the environment in which the employee will be working, properly fitted to the employee, maintained and cleaned periodically, and worn by the employee when required. In its interim final standard on occupational exposure to inorganic lead in the construction industry, OSHA has prohibited prophylactic chelation. Diagnostic and therapeutic chelation are permitted only under the supervision of a licensed physician with appropriate medical monitoring in an acceptable clinical setting. The decision to initiate chelation therapy must be made on an individual basis and take into account the severity of symptoms felt to be a result of lead toxicity along with blood lead levels, ZPP levels, and other laboratory tests as appropriate. EDTA and penicillamine which are the primary chelating agents used in the therapy of occupational lead poisoning have significant potential side effects and their use must be justified on the basis of expected benefits to the worker. Unless frank and severe symptoms are present, therapeutic chelation is not recommended, given the opportunity to remove a worker from exposure and allow the body to naturally excrete accumulated lead. As a diagnostic aid, the chelation mobilization test using CA-EDTA has limited applicability. According to some investigators, the test can differentiate between lead-induced and other nephropathies. The test may also provide an estimation of the mobile fraction of the total body lead burden. Employers are required to assure that accurate records are maintained on exposure assessment, including environmental monitoring, medical surveillance, and medical removal for each employee. Exposure assessment records must be kept for at least 30 years. Medical surveillance records must be kept for the duration of employment plus 30 years except in cases where the employment was less than one year. If duration of employment is less than one year, the employer need not retain this record beyond the term of employment if the record is provided to the employee upon termination of employment. Medical removal records also must be maintained for the duration of employment. All records required under the standard must be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health and the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. Employers must also make environmental and biological monitoring and medical removal records available to affected employees and to former employees or their authorized employee representatives. Employees or their specifically designated representatives have access to their entire medical surveillance records. In addition, the standard requires that the employer inform all workers exposed to lead at or above 30 µg/m 3 II. Adverse Health Effects of Inorganic Lead Although the toxicity of lead has been known for 2,000 years, the knowledge of the complex relationship between lead exposure and human response is still being refined. Significant research into the toxic properties of lead continues throughout the world, and it should be anticipated that our understanding of thresholds of effects and margins of safety will be improved in future years. The provisions of the lead standard are founded on two prime medical judgments: First, the prevention of adverse health effects from exposure to lead throughout a working lifetime requires that worker blood lead levels be maintained at or below 40 µg/dl and second, the blood lead levels of workers, male or female, who intend to parent in the near future should be maintained below 30 µg/dl to minimize adverse reproductive health effects to the parents and developing fetus. The adverse effects of lead on reproduction are being actively researched and OSHA encourages the physician to remain abreast of recent developments in the area to best advise pregnant workers or workers planning to conceive children. The spectrum of health effects caused by lead exposure can be subdivided into five developmental stages: Normal, physiological changes of uncertain significance, pathophysiological changes, overt symptoms (morbidity), and mortality. Within this process there are no sharp distinctions, but rather a continuum of effects. Boundaries between categories overlap due to the wide variation of individual responses and exposures in the working population. OSHA's development of the lead standard focused on pathophysiological changes as well as later stages of disease. 1. Heme Synthesis Inhibition. The earliest demonstrated effect of lead involves its ability to inhibit at least two enzymes of the heme synthesis pathway at very low blood levels. Inhibition of delta aminolevulinic acid dehydrase (ALA-D) which catalyzes the conversion of delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA) to protoporphyrin is observed at a blood lead level below 20 µg/dl. At a blood lead level of 40 µg/dl, more than 20% of the population would have 70% inhibition of ALA-D. There is an exponential increase in ALA excretion at blood lead levels greater than 40 µg/dl. Another enzyme, ferrochelatase, is also inhibited at low blood lead levels. Inhibition of ferrochelatase leads to increased free erythrocyte protoporphyrin (FEP) in the blood which can then bind to zinc to yield zinc protoporphyrin. At a blood lead level of 50 µg/dl or greater, nearly 100% of the population will have an increase in FEP. There is also an exponential relationship between blood lead levels greater than 40 µg/dl and the associated ZPP level, which has led to the development of the ZPP screening test for lead exposure. While the significance of these effects is subject to debate, it is OSHA's position that these enzyme disturbances are early stages of a disease process which may eventually result in the clinical symptoms of lead poisoning. Whether or not the effects do progress to the later stages of clinical disease, disruption of these enzyme processes over a working lifetime is considered to be a material impairment of health. One of the eventual results of lead-induced inhibition of enzymes in the heme synthesis pathway is anemia which can be asymptomatic if mild but associated with a wide array of symptoms including dizziness, fatigue, and tachycardia when more severe. Studies have indicated that lead levels as low as 50 µg/dl can be associated with a definite decreased hemoglobin, although most cases of lead-induced anemia, as well as shortened red-cell survival times, occur at lead levels exceeding 80 µg/dl. Inhibited hemoglobin synthesis is more common in chronic cases whereas shortened erythrocyte life span is more common in acute cases. In lead-induced anemias, there is usually a reticulocytosis along with the presence of basophilic stippling, and ringed sideroblasts, although none of the above are pathognomonic for lead-induced anemia. 2. Neurological Effects. Inorganic lead has been found to have toxic effects on both the central and peripheral nervous systems. The earliest stages of lead-induced central nervous system effects first manifest themselves in the form of behavioral disturbances and central nervous system symptoms including irritability, restlessness, insomnia and other sleep disturbances, fatigue, vertigo, headache, poor memory, tremor, depression, and apathy. With more severe exposure, symptoms can progress to drowsiness, stupor, hallucinations, delirium, convulsions and coma. The most severe and acute form of lead poisoning which usually follows ingestion or inhalation of large amounts of lead is acute encephalopathy which may arise precipitously with the onset of intractable seizures, coma, cardiorespiratory arrest, and death within 48 hours. While there is disagreement about what exposure levels are needed to produce the earliest symptoms, most experts agree that symptoms definitely can occur at blood lead levels of 60 µg/dl whole blood and therefore recommend a 40 µg/dl maximum. The central nervous system effects frequently are not reversible following discontinued exposure or chelation therapy and when improvement does occur, it is almost always only partial. The peripheral neuropathy resulting from lead exposure characteristically involves only motor function with minimal sensory damage and has a marked predilection for the extensor muscles of the most active extremity. The peripheral neuropathy can occur with varying degrees of severity. The earliest and mildest form which can be detected in workers with blood lead levels as low as 50 µg/dl is manifested by slowing of motor nerve conduction velocity often without clinical symptoms. With progression of the neuropathy there is development of painless extensor muscle weakness usually involving the extensor muscles of the fingers and hand in the most active upper extremity, followed in severe cases by wrist drop or, much less commonly, foot drop. In addition to slowing of nerve conduction, electromyographical studies in patients with blood lead levels greater than 50 µg/dl have demonstrated a decrease in the number of acting motor unit potentials, an increase in the duration of motor unit potentials, and spontaneous pathological activity including fibrillations and fasciculations. Whether these effects occur at levels of 40 µg/dl is undetermined. While the peripheral neuropathies can occasionally be reversed with therapy, again such recovery is not assured particularly in the more severe neuropathies and often improvement is only partial. The lack of reversibility is felt to be due in part to segmental demyelination. 3. Gastrointestinal. Lead may also affect the gastrointestinal system producing abdominal colic or diffuse abdominal pain, constipation, obstipation, diarrhea, anorexia, nausea and vomiting. Lead colic rarely develops at blood lead levels below 80 µg/dl. 4. Renal. Renal toxicity represents one of the most serious health effects of lead poisoning. In the early stages of disease nuclear inclusion bodies can frequently be identified in proximal renal tubular cells. Renal function remains normal and the changes in this stage are probably reversible. With more advanced disease there is progressive interstitial fibrosis and impaired renal function. Eventually extensive interstitial fibrosis ensues with sclerotic glomeruli and dilated and atrophied proximal tubules; all represent end stage kidney disease. Azotemia can be progressive, eventually resulting in frank uremia necessitating dialysis. There is occasionally associated hypertension and hyperuricemia with or without gout. Early kidney disease is difficult to detect. The urinalysis is normal in early lead nephropathy and the blood urea nitrogen and serum creatinine increase only when two-thirds of kidney function is lost. Measurement of creatinine clearance can often detect earlier disease as can other methods of measurement of glomerular filtration rate. An abnormal Ca-EDTA mobilization test has been used to differentiate between lead-induced and other nephropathies, but this procedure is not widely accepted. A form of Fanconi syndrome with aminoaciduria, glycosuria, and hyperphosphaturia indicating severe injury to the proximal renal tubules is occasionally seen in children. 5. Reproductive effects. Exposure to lead can have serious effects on reproductive function in both males and females. In male workers exposed to lead there can be a decrease in sexual drive, impotence, decreased ability to produce healthy sperm, and sterility. Malformed sperm (teratospermia), decreased number of sperm (hypospermia), and sperm with decreased motility (asthenospermia) can all occur. Teratospermia has been noted at mean blood lead levels of 53 µg/dl and hypospermia and asthenospermia at 41 µg/dl. Furthermore, there appears to be a dose-response relationship for teratospermia in lead exposed workers. Women exposed to lead may experience menstrual disturbances including dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia and amenorrhea. Following exposure to lead, women have a higher frequency of sterility, premature births, spontaneous miscarriages, and stillbirths. Germ cells can be affected by lead and cause genetic damage in the egg or sperm cells before conception and result in failure to implant, miscarriage, stillbirth, or birth defects. Infants of mothers with lead poisoning have a higher mortality during the first year and suffer from lowered birth weights, slower growth, and nervous system disorders. Lead can pass through the placental barrier and lead levels in the mother's blood are comparable to concentrations of lead in the umbilical cord at birth. Transplacental passage becomes detectable at 12-14 weeks of gestation and increases until birth. There is little direct data on damage to the fetus from exposure to lead but it is generally assumed that the fetus and newborn would be at least as susceptible to neurological damage as young children. Blood lead levels of 50-60 µg/dl in children can cause significant neurobehavioral impairments and there is evidence of hyperactivity at blood levels as low as 25 µg/dl. Given the overall body of literature concerning the adverse health effects of lead in children, OSHA feels that the blood lead level in children should be maintained below 30 µg/dl with a population mean of 15 µg/dl. Blood lead levels in the fetus and newborn likewise should not exceed 30 µg/dl. Because of lead's ability to pass through the placental barrier and also because of the demonstrated adverse effects of lead on reproductive function in both the male and female as well as the risk of genetic damage of lead on both the ovum and sperm, OSHA recommends a 30 µg/dl maximum permissible blood lead level in both males and females who wish to bear children. 6. Other toxic effects. Debate and research continue on the effects of lead on the human body. Hypertension has frequently been noted in occupationally exposed individuals although it is difficult to assess whether this is due to lead's adverse effects on the kidney or if some other mechanism is involved. Vascular and electrocardiographic changes have been detected but have not been well characterized. Lead is thought to impair thyroid function and interfere with the pituitary-adrenal axis, but again these effects have not been well defined. III. Medical Evaluation The most important principle in evaluating a worker for any occupational disease including lead poisoning is a high index of suspicion on the part of the examining physician. As discussed in Section 2, lead can affect numerous organ systems and produce a wide array of signs and symptoms, most of which are non-specific and subtle in nature at least in the early stages of disease. Unless serious concern for lead toxicity is present, many of the early clues to diagnosis may easily be overlooked. The crucial initial step in the medical evaluation is recognizing that a worker's employment can result in exposure to lead. The worker will frequently be able to define exposures to lead and lead containing materials but often will not volunteer this information unless specifically asked. In other situations the worker may not know of any exposures to lead but the suspicion might be raised on the part of the physician because of the industry or occupation of the worker. Potential occupational exposure to lead and its compounds occur in many occupations in the construction industry, including demolition and salvaging operations, removal or encapsulation of materials containing lead, construction, alteration, repair or renovation of structures containing lead, transportation, disposal, storage or containment of lead or lead-containing materials on construction sites, and maintenance operations associated with construction activities. Once the possibility for lead exposure is raised, the focus can then be directed toward eliciting information from the medical history, physical exam, and finally from laboratory data to evaluate the worker for potential lead toxicity. A complete and detailed work history is important in the initial evaluation. A listing of all previous employment with information on job description, exposure to fumes or dust, known exposures to lead or other toxic substances, a description of any personal protective equipment used, and previous medical surveillance should all be included in the worker's record. Where exposure to lead is suspected, information concerning on-the-job personal hygiene, smoking or eating habits in work areas, laundry procedures, and use of any protective clothing or respiratory protection equipment should be noted. A complete work history is essential in the medical evaluation of a worker with suspected lead toxicity, especially when long term effects such as neurotoxicity and nephrotoxicity are considered. The medical history is also of fundamental importance and should include a listing of all past and current medical conditions, current medications including proprietary drug intake, previous surgeries and hospitalizations, allergies, smoking history, alcohol consumption, and also non-occupational lead exposures such as hobbies (hunting, riflery). Also known childhood exposures should be elicited. Any previous history of hematological, neurological, gastrointestinal, renal, psychological, gynecological, genetic, or reproductive problems should be specifically noted. A careful and complete review of systems must be performed to assess both recognized complaints and subtle or slowly acquired symptoms which the worker might not appreciate as being significant. The review of symptoms should include the following: 1. General—weight loss, fatigue, decreased appetite. 2. Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat (HEENT)—headaches, visual disturbances or decreased visual acuity, hearing deficits or tinnitus, pigmentation of the oral mucosa, or metallic taste in mouth. 3. Cardio-pulmonary—shortness of breath, cough, chest pains, palpitations, or orthopnea. 4. Gastrointestinal—nausea, vomiting, heartburn, abdominal pain, constipation or diarrhea. 5. Neurologic—irritability, insomnia, weakness (fatigue), dizziness, loss of memory, confusion, hallucinations, incoordination, ataxia, decreased strength in hands or feet, disturbances in gait, difficulty in climbing stairs, or seizures. 6. Hematologic—pallor, easy fatigability, abnormal blood loss, melena. 7. Reproductive (male and female and spouse where relevant)—history of infertility, impotence, loss of libido, abnormal menstrual periods, history of miscarriages, stillbirths, or children with birth defects. 8. Musculo-skeletal—muscle and joint pains. The physical examination should emphasize the neurological, gastrointestinal, and cardiovascular systems. The worker's weight and blood pressure should be recorded and the oral mucosa checked for pigmentation characteristic of a possible Burtonian or lead line on the gingiva. It should be noted, however, that the lead line may not be present even in severe lead poisoning if good oral hygiene is practiced. The presence of pallor on skin examination may indicate an anemia which, if severe, might also be associated with a tachycardia. If an anemia is suspected, an active search for blood loss should be undertaken including potential blood loss through the gastrointestinal tract. A complete neurological examination should include an adequate mental status evaluation including a search for behavioral and psychological disturbances, memory testing, evaluation for irritability, insomnia, hallucinations, and mental clouding. Gait and coordination should be examined along with close observation for tremor. A detailed evaluation of peripheral nerve function including careful sensory and motor function testing is warranted. Strength testing particularly of extensor muscle groups of all extremities is of fundamental importance. Cranial nerve evaluation should also be included in the routine examination. The abdominal examination should include auscultation for bowel sounds and abdominal bruits and palpation for organomegaly, masses, and diffuse abdominal tenderness. Cardiovascular examination should evaluate possible early signs of congestive heart failure. Pulmonary status should be addressed particularly if respirator protection is contemplated. As part of the medical evaluation, the interim lead standard requires the following laboratory studies: 1. Blood lead level 2. Hemoglobin and hematocrit determinations, red cell indices, and examination of the peripheral blood smear to evaluate red blood cell morphology 3. Blood urea nitrogen 4. Serum creatinine 5. Routine urinalysis with microscopic examination. 6. A zinc protoporphyrin level. In addition to the above, the physician is authorized to order any further laboratory or other tests which he or she deems necessary in accordance with sound medical practice. The evaluation must also include pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation of male fertility if requested by the employee. Additional tests which are probably not warranted on a routine basis but may be appropriate when blood lead and ZPP levels are equivocal include delta aminolevulinic acid and coproporphyrin concentrations in the urine, and dark-field illumination for detection of basophilic stippling in red blood cells. If an anemia is detected further studies including a careful examination of the peripheral smear, reticulocyte count, stool for occult blood, serum iron, total iron binding capacity, bilirubin, and, if appropriate, vitamin B12 and folate may be of value in attempting to identify the cause of the anemia. If a peripheral neuropathy is suspected, nerve conduction studies are warranted both for diagnosis and as a basis to monitor any therapy. If renal disease is questioned, a 24 hour urine collection for creatinine clearance, protein, and electrolytes may be indicated. Elevated uric acid levels may result from lead-induced renal disease and a serum uric acid level might be performed. An electrocardiogram and chest x-ray may be obtained as deemed appropriate. Sophisticated and highly specialized testing should not be done routinely and where indicated should be under the direction of a specialist. IV. Laboratory Evaluation The blood lead level at present remains the single most important test to monitor lead exposure and is the test used in the medical surveillance program under the lead standard to guide employee medical removal. The ZPP has several advantages over the blood lead level. Because of its relatively recent development and the lack of extensive data concerning its interpretation, the ZPP currently remains an ancillary test. This section will discuss the blood lead level and ZPP in detail and will outline their relative advantages and disadvantages. Other blood tests currently available to evaluate lead exposure will also be reviewed. The blood lead level is a good index of current or recent lead absorption when there is no anemia present and when the worker has not taken any chelating agents. However, blood lead levels along with urinary lead levels do not necessarily indicate the total body burden of lead and are not adequate measures of past exposure. One reason for this is that lead has a high affinity for bone and up to 90% of the body's total lead is deposited there. A very important component of the total lead body burden is lead in soft tissue (liver, kidney, and brain). This fraction of the lead body burden, the biologically active lead, is not entirely reflected by blood lead levels since it is a function of the dynamics of lead absorption, distribution, deposition in bone and excretion. Following discontinuation of exposure to lead, the excess body burden is only slowly mobilized from bone and other relatively stable body stores and excreted. Consequently, a high blood lead level may only represent recent heavy exposure to lead without a significant total body excess and likewise a low blood lead level does not exclude an elevated total body burden of lead. Also due to its correlation with recent exposures, the blood lead level may vary considerably over short time intervals. To minimize laboratory error and erroneous results due to contamination, blood specimens must be carefully collected after thorough cleaning of the skin with appropriate methods using lead-free blood containers and analyzed by a reliable laboratory. Under the standard, samples must be analyzed in laboratories which are approved by OSHA. Analysis is to be made using atomic absorption spectrophotometry, anodic stripping voltammetry or any method which meets the accuracy requirements set forth by the standard. The determination of lead in urine is generally considered a less reliable monitoring technique than analysis of whole blood primarily due to individual variability in urinary excretion capacity as well as the technical difficulty of obtaining accurate 24 hour urine collections. In addition, workers with renal insufficiency, whether due to lead or some other cause, may have decreased lead clearance and consequently urine lead levels may underestimate the true lead burden. Therefore, urine lead levels should not be used as a routine test. The zinc protoporphyrin test, unlike the blood lead determination, measures an adverse metabolic effect of lead and as such is a better indicator of lead toxicity than the level of blood lead itself. The level of ZPP reflects lead absorption over the preceding 3 to 4 months, and therefore is a better indicator of lead body burden. The ZPP requires more time than the blood lead to read significantly elevated levels; the return to normal after discontinuing lead exposure is also slower. Furthermore, the ZPP test is simpler, faster, and less expensive to perform and no contamination is possible. Many investigators believe it is the most reliable means of monitoring chronic lead absorption. Zinc protoporphyrin results from the inhibition of the enzyme ferrochelatase which catalyzes the insertion of an iron molecule into the protoporphyrin molecule, which then becomes heme. If iron is not inserted into the molecule then zinc, having a greater affinity for protoporphyrin, takes the place of the iron, forming ZPP. An elevation in the level of circulating ZPP may occur at blood lead levels as low as 20-30 µg/dl in some workers. Once the blood lead level has reached 40 µg/dl there is more marked rise in the ZPP value from its normal range of less than 100 µg/dl100 ml. Increases in blood lead levels beyond 40 µg/100 g are associated with exponential increases in ZPP. Whereas blood lead levels fluctuate over short time spans, ZPP levels remain relatively stable. ZPP is measured directly in red blood cells and is present for the cell's entire 120 day life-span. Therefore, the ZPP level in blood reflects the average ZPP production over the previous 3-4 months and consequently the average lead exposure during that time interval. It is recommended that a hematocrit be determined whenever a confirmed ZPP of 50 µg/100 ml whole blood is obtained to rule out a significant underlying anemia. If the ZPP is in excess of 100 µg/100 ml and not associated with abnormal elevations in blood lead levels, the laboratory should be checked to be sure that blood leads were determined using atomic absorption spectrophotometry anodic stripping voltammetry, or any method which meets the accuracy requirements set forth by the standard by an OSHA approved laboratory which is experienced in lead level determinations. Repeat periodic blood lead studies should be obtained in all individuals with elevated ZPP levels to be certain that an associated elevated blood lead level has not been missed due to transient fluctuations in blood leads. ZPP has a characteristic fluorescence spectrum with a peak at 594 nm which is detectable with a hematofluorimeter. The hematofluorimeter is accurate and portable and can provide on-site, instantaneous results for workers who can be frequently tested via a finger prick. However, careful attention must be given to calibration and quality control procedures. Limited data on blood lead-ZPP correlations and the ZPP levels which are associated with the adverse health effects discussed in Section 2 are the major limitations of the test. Also it is difficult to correlate ZPP levels with environmental exposure and there is some variation of response with age and sex. Nevertheless, the ZPP promises to be an important diagnostic test for the early detection of lead toxicity and its value will increase as more data is collected regarding its relationship to other manifestations of lead poisoning. Levels of delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA) in the urine are also used as a measure of lead exposure. Increasing concentrations of ALA are believed to result from the inhibition of the enzyme delta-aminolevulinic acid dehydrase (ALA-D). Although the test is relatively easy to perform, inexpensive, and rapid, the disadvantages include variability in results, the necessity to collect a complete 24 hour urine sample which has a specific gravity greater than 1.010, and also the fact that ALA decomposes in the presence of light. The pattern of porphyrin excretion in the urine can also be helpful in identifying lead intoxication. With lead poisoning, the urine concentrations of coproporphyrins I and II, porphobilinogen and uroporphyrin I rise. The most important increase, however, is that of coproporphyrin III; levels may exceed 5,000 µg/l in the urine in lead poisoned individuals, but its correlation with blood lead levels and ZPP are not as good as those of ALA. Increases in urinary porphyrins are not diagnostic of lead toxicity and may be seen in porphyria, some liver diseases, and in patients with high reticulocyte counts. Summary. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration's interim standard for inorganic lead in the construction industry places significant emphasis on the medical surveillance of all workers exposed to levels of inorganic lead above 30 µg/m 3 Even with adequate worker education on the adverse health effects of lead and appropriate training in work practices, personal hygiene and other control measures, the physician has a primary responsibility for evaluating potential lead toxicity in the worker. It is only through a careful and detailed medical and work history, a complete physical examination and appropriate laboratory testing that an accurate assessment can be made. Many of the adverse health effects of lead toxicity are either irreversible or only partially reversible and therefore early detection of disease is very important. This document outlines the medical monitoring program as defined by the occupational safety and health standard for inorganic lead. It reviews the adverse health effects of lead poisoning and describes the important elements of the history and physical examinations as they relate to these adverse effects. Finally, the appropriate laboratory testing for evaluating lead exposure and toxicity is presented. It is hoped that this review and discussion will give the physician a better understanding of the OSHA standard with the ultimate goal of protecting the health and well-being of the worker exposed to lead under his or her care. [58 FR 26627, May 4, 1993, as amended at 58 FR 34218, June 24, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8, 1998; 70 FR 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 76 FR 80741, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012; 85 FR 8735, Feb. 18, 2020; 87 FR 38986, June 30, 2022] § 1926.64 Process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals. For requirements regarding the process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals as it pertains to construction work, follow the requirements in 29 CFR 1910.119. [84 FR 21576, May 14, 2019] § 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and emergency response. (a) Scope, application, and definitions Scope. (i) Clean-up operations required by a governmental body, whether Federal, state, local or other involving hazardous substances that are conducted at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites (including, but not limited to, the EPA's National Priority Site List (NPL), state priority site lists, sites recommended for the EPA NPL, and initial investigations of government identified sites which are conducted before the presence or absence of hazardous substances has been ascertained); (ii) Corrective actions involving clean-up operations at sites covered by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42 U.S.C. 6901 et seq. (iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at sites recognized by Federal, state, local or other governmental bodies as uncontrolled hazardous waste sites; (iv) Operations involving hazardous wastes that are conducted at treatment, storage, and disposal (TSD) facilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agencies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A. to implement RCRA regulations; and (v) Emergency response operations for releases of, or substantial threats of releases of, hazardous substances without regard to the location of the hazard. (2) Application. (ii) Hazardous substance clean-up operations within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this section must comply with all paragraphs of this section except paragraphs (p) and (q). (iii) Operations within the scope of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section must comply only with the requirements of paragraph (p) of this section. Notes and Exceptions: (A) All provisions of paragraph (p) of this section cover any treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) operation regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265 or by state law authorized under RCRA, and required to have a permit or interim status from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from a state agency pursuant to RCRA. (B) Employers who are not required to have a permit or interim status because they are conditionally exempt small quantity generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are generators who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for exemptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts 264, 265 and 270 (“excepted employers”) are not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through (p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers who are required by the EPA or state agency to have their employees engage in emergency response or who direct their employees to engage in emergency response are covered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this section. Excepted employers who are not required to have employees engage in emergency response, who direct their employees to evacuate in the case of such emergencies and who meet the requirements of paragraph (p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. (C) If an area is used primarily for treatment, storage or disposal, any emergency response operations in that area shall comply with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other areas not used primarily for treatment, storage, or disposal, any emergency response operations shall comply with paragraph (q) of this section. Compliance with the requirements of paragraph (q) of this section shall be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. (iv) Emergency response operations for releases of, or substantial threats of releases of, hazardous substances which are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must only comply with the requirements of paragraph (q) of this section. (3) Definitions—Buddy system Clean-up operation Decontamination Emergency response responding to emergencies Facility Hazardous materials response (HAZMAT) team Hazardous substance (A) Any substance defined under section 101(14) of CERCLA; (B) Any biological agent and other disease-causing agent which after release into the environment and upon exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or assimilation into any person, either directly from the environment or indirectly by ingestion through food chains, will or may reasonably be anticipated to cause death, disease, behavioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic mutation, physiological malfunctions (including malfunctions in reproduction) or physical deformations in such persons or their offspring; (C) Any substance listed by the U.S. Department of Transportation as hazardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 and appendices; and (D) Hazardous waste as herein defined. Hazardous waste (B) Those substances defined as hazardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8. Hazardous waste operation Hazardous waste site Site Health hazard health hazard See IDLH Immediately dangerous to life or health Oxygen deficiency Permissible exposure limit Published exposure level Post emergency response Qualified person Site safety and health supervisor (or official) Small quantity generator Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, (b) Safety and health program. Note to ( b Safety and health programs developed and implemented to meet other Federal, state, or local regulations are considered acceptable in meeting this requirement if they cover or are modified to cover the topics required in this paragraph. An additional or separate safety and health program is not required by this paragraph. (1) General. (ii) The written safety and health program shall incorporate the following: (A) An organizational structure; (B) A comprehensive workplan; (C) A site-specific safety and health plan which need not repeat the employer's standard operating procedures required in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this section; (D) The safety and health training program; (E) The medical surveillance program; (F) The employer's standard operating procedures for safety and health; and (G) Any necessary interface between general program and site specific activities. (iii) Site excavation. (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors. (v) Program availability. (2) Organizational structure part of the site program. (A) A general supervisor who has the responsibility and authority to direct all hazardous waste operations. (B) A site safety and health supervisor who has the responsibility and authority to develop and implement the site safety and health plan and verify compliance. (C) All other personnel needed for hazardous waste site operations and emergency response and their general functions and responsibilities. (D) The lines of authority, responsibility, and communication. (ii) The organizational structure shall be reviewed and updated as necessary to reflect the current status of waste site operations. (3) Comprehensive workplan part of the site program. (i) The comprehensive workplan shall address anticipated clean-up activities as well as normal operating procedures which need not repeat the employer's procedures available elsewhere. (ii) The comprehensive workplan shall define work tasks and objectives and identify the methods for accomplishing those tasks and objectives. (iii) The comprehensive workplan shall establish personnel requirements for implementing the plan. (iv) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation of the training required in paragraph (e) of this section. (v) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation of the required informational programs required in paragraph (i) of this section. (vi) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation of the medical surveillance program described in paragraph (f) of this section. (4) Site-specific safety and health plan part of the program General. (ii) Elements. (A) A safety and health risk or hazard analysis for each site task and operation found in the workplan. (B) Employee training assignments to assure compliance with paragraph (e) of this section. (C) Personal protective equipment to be used by employees for each of the site tasks and operations being conducted as required by the personal protective equipment program in paragraph (g)(5) of this section. (D) Medical surveillance requirements in accordance with the program in paragraph (f) of this section. (E) Frequency and types of air monitoring, personnel monitoring, and environmental sampling techniques and instrumentation to be used, including methods of maintenance and calibration of monitoring and sampling equipment to be used. (F) Site control measures in accordance with the site control program required in paragraph (d) of this section. (G) Decontamination procedures in accordance with paragraph (k) of this section. (H) An emergency response plan meeting the requirements of paragraph (l) of this section for safe and effective responses to emergencies, including the necessary PPE and other equipment. (I) Confined space entry procedures. (J) A spill containment program meeting the requirements of paragraph (j) of this section. (iii) Pre-entry briefing. (iv) Effectiveness of site safety and health plan. (c) Site characterization and analysis General. (2) Preliminary evaluation. (3) Hazard identification. (4) Required information. (i) Location and approximate size of the site. (ii) Description of the response activity and/or the job task to be performed. (iii) Duration of the planned employee activity. (iv) Site topography and accessibility by air and roads. (v) Safety and health hazards expected at the site. (vi) Pathways for hazardous substance dispersion. (vii) Present status and capabilities of emergency response teams that would provide assistance to hazardous waste clean-up site employees at the time of an emergency. (viii) Hazardous substances and health hazards involved or expected at the site, and their chemical and physical properties. (5) Personal protective equipment. (i) Based upon the results of the preliminary site evaluation, an ensemble of PPE shall be selected and used during initial site entry which will provide protection to a level of exposure below permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels for known or suspected hazardous substances and health hazards, and which will provide protection against other known and suspected hazards identified during the preliminary site evaluation. If there is no permissible exposure limit or published exposure level, the employer may use other published studies and information as a guide to appropriate personal protective equipment. (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus is not used as part of the entry ensemble, and if respiratory protection is warranted by the potential hazards identified during the preliminary site evaluation, an escape self-contained breathing apparatus of at least five minute's duration shall be carried by employees during initial site entry. (iii) If the preliminary site evaluation does not produce sufficient information to identify the hazards or suspected hazards of the site, an ensemble providing protection equivalent to Level B PPE shall be provided as minimum protection, and direct reading instruments shall be used as appropriate for identifying IDLH conditions. (See appendix B for a description of Level B hazards and the recommendations for Level B protective equipment.) (iv) Once the hazards of the site have been identified, the appropriate PPE shall be selected and used in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section. (6) Monitoring. (i) Monitoring with direct reading instruments for hazardous levels of ionizing radiation. (ii) Monitoring the air with appropriate direct reading test equipment (i.e., combustible gas meters, detector tubes) for IDLH and other conditions that may cause death or serious harm (combustible or explosive atmospheres, oxygen deficiency, toxic substances). (iii) Visually observing for signs of actual or potential IDLH or other dangerous conditions. (iv) An ongoing air monitoring program in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section shall be implemented after site characterization has determined the site is safe for the start-up of operations. (7) Risk identification. Note to ( c Risks to consider include, but are not limited to: (a) Exposures exceeding the permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels. (b) IDLH concentrations. (c) Potential skin absorption and irritation sources. (d) Potential eye irritation sources. (e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability ranges. (f) Oxygen deficiency. (8) Employee notification. (d) Site control General. (2) Site control program. (3) Elements of the site control program. (e) Training General. (ii) Employees shall not be permitted to participate in or supervise field activities until they have been trained to a level required by their job function and responsibility. (2) Elements to be covered. (i) Names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety and health; (ii) Safety, health and other hazards present on the site; (iii) Use of personal protective equipment; (iv) Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from hazards; (v) Safe use of engineering controls and equipment on the site; (vi) Medical surveillance requirements, including recognition of symptoms and signs which might indicate overexposure to hazards; and (vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) through (J) of the site safety and health plan set forth in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section. (3) Initial training. (ii) Workers on site only occasionally for a specific limited task (such as, but not limited to, ground water monitoring, land surveying, or geo-physical surveying) and who are unlikely to be exposed over permissible exposure limits and published exposure limits shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the site, and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor. (iii) Workers regularly on site who work in areas which have been monitored and fully characterized indicating that exposures are under permissible exposure limits and published exposure limits where respirators are not necessary, and the characterization indicates that there are no health hazards or the possibility of an emergency developing, shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the site and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor. (iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who become general site workers or who are required to wear respirators, shall have the additional 16 hours and two days of training necessary to total the training specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). (4) Management and supervisor training. (5) Qualifications for trainers. (6) Training certification. (7) Emergency response. (8) Refresher training. (9) Equivalent training. (f) Medical surveillance General. (2) Employees covered. (i) All employees who are or may be exposed to hazardous substances or health hazards at or above the permissible exposure limits or, if there is no permissible exposure limit, above the published exposure levels for these substances, without regard to the use of respirators, for 30 days or more a year; (ii) All employees who wear a respirator for 30 days or more a year or as required by § 1926.103; (iii) All employees who are injured, become ill or develop signs or symptoms due to possible overexposure involving hazardous substances or health hazards from an emergency response or hazardous waste operation; and (iv) Members of HAZMAT teams. (3) Frequency of medical examinations and consultations. (i) For employees covered under paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and (f)(2)(iv): (A) Prior to assignment; (B) At least once every twelve months for each employee covered unless the attending physician believes a longer interval (not greater than biennially) is appropriate; (C) At termination of employment or reassignment to an area where the employee would not be covered if the employee has not had an examination within the last six months; (D) As soon as possible upon notification by an employee that the employee has developed signs or symptoms indicating possible overexposure to hazardous substances or health hazards, or that the employee has been injured or exposed above the permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels in an emergency situation; (E) At more frequent times, if the examining physician determines that an increased frequency of examination is medically necessary. (ii) For employees covered under paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employees including those of employers covered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may have been injured, received a health impairment, developed signs or symptoms which may have resulted from exposure to hazardous substances resulting from an emergency incident, or exposed during an emergency incident to hazardous substances at concentrations above the permissible exposure limits or the published exposure levels without the necessary personal protective equipment being used: (A) As soon as possible following the emergency incident or development of signs or symptoms; (B) At additional times, if the examining physician determines that follow-up examinations or consultations are medically necessary. (4) Content of medical examinations and consultations. (ii) The content of medical examinations or consultations made available to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) shall be determined by the attending physician. The guidelines in the Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities (5) Examination bv a physician and costs. (6) Information provided to the physician. (i) A description of the employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposures. (ii) The employee's exposure levels or anticipated exposure levels. (iii) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used. (iv) Information from previous medical examinations of the employee which is not readily available to the examining physician. (v) Information required by § 1926.103. (7) Physician's written opinion. (A) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions which would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment of the employee's health from work in hazardous waste operations or emergency response, or from respirator use. (B) The physician's recommended limitations upon the employee's assigned work. (C) The results of the medical examination and tests if requested by the employee. (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions which require further examination or treatment. (ii) The written opinion obtained by the employer shall not reveal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposures. (8) Recordkeeping. (ii) The record required in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at least the following information: (A) The name of the employee; (B) Physician's written opinions, recommended limitations, and results of examinations and tests; (C) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to hazardous substances; (D) A copy of the information provided to the examining physician by the employer, with the exception of the standard and its appendices. (g) Engineering controls, work practices, and personal protective equipment for employee protection. (1) Engineering controls, work practices and PPE for substances regulated either in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in other pertinent sections of this part. Note to ( g i Engineering controls which may be feasible include the use of pressurized cabs or control booths on equipment, and/or the use of remotely operated material handling equipment. Work practices which may be feasible are removing all non-essential employees from potential exposure during opening of drums, wetting down dusty operations and locating employees upwind of possible hazards. (ii) Whenever engineering controls and work practices are not feasible or not required, any reasonable combination of engineering controls, work practices and PPE shall be used to reduce and maintain employee exposures to or below the permissible exposure limits or dose limits for substances regulated either in § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of this part. (iii) The employer shall not implement a schedule of employee rotation as a means of compliance with permissible exposure limits or dose limits except when there is no other feasible way of complying with the airborne or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation. (iv) The provisions of subpart D shall be followed. (2) Engineering controls, work practices, and PPE for substances not regulated either in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in other pertinent sections of this part. (3) Personal protective equipment selection. (ii) Personal protective equipment selection shall be based on an evaluation of the performance characteristics of the PPE relative to the requirements and limitations of the site, the task-specific conditions and duration, and the hazards and potential hazards identified at the site. (iii) Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or positive pressure air-line respirators equipped with an escape air supply, shall be used when chemical exposure levels present will create a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate serious illness or injury, or impair the ability to escape. (iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suits (protection equivalent to Level A protection as recommended in appendix B) shall be used in conditions where skin absorption of a hazardous substance may result in a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate serious illness or injury, or impair the ability to escape. (v) The level of protection provided by PPE selection shall be increased when additional information on site conditions indicates that increased protection is necessary to reduce employee exposures below permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels for hazardous substances and health hazards. (See appendix B for guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.) Note to ( g The level of employee protection provided may be decreased when additional information or site conditions show that decreased protection will not result in hazardous exposures to employees. (vi) Personal protective equipment shall be selected and used to meet the requirements of subpart E of this part and additional requirements specified in this section. (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suits. (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall be capable of maintaining positive air pressure. (See appendix A for a test method which may be used to evaluate this requirement.) (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall be capable of preventing inward test gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent. (See appendix A for a test method which may be used to evaluate this requirement.) (5) Personal protective equipment (PPE) program. (i) PPE selection based upon site hazards, (ii) PPE use and limitations of the equipment, (iii) Work mission duration, (iv) PPE maintenance and storage, (v) PPE decontamination and disposal, (vi) PPE training and proper fitting, (vii) PPE donning and doffing procedures, (viii) PPE inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use, (ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of the PPE program, and (x) Limitations during temperature extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate medical considerations. (h) Monitoring General. (ii) Air monitoring shall be used to identify and quantify airborne levels of hazardous substances and safety and health hazards in order to determine the appropriate level of employee protection needed on site. (2) Initial entry. (3) Periodic monitoring. (i) When work begins on a different portion of the site. (ii) When contaminants other than those previously identified are being handled. (iii) When a different type of operation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as opposed to exploratory well drilling). (iv) When employees are handling leaking drums or containers or working in areas with obvious liquid contamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon). (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees. Note to ( h It is not required to monitor employees engaged in site characterization operations covered by paragraph (c) of this section. (i) Informational programs. (j) Handling drums and containers General. (ii) Drums and containers used during the clean-up shall meet the appropriate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regulations for the wastes that they contain. (iii) When practical, drums and containers shall be inspected and their integrity shall be assured prior to being moved. Drums or containers that cannot be inspected before being moved because of storage conditions (i.e., buried beneath the earth, stacked behind other drums, stacked several tiers high in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an accessible location and inspected prior to further handling. (iv) Unlabelled drums and containers shall be considered to contain hazardous substances and handled accordingly until the contents are positively identified and labeled. (v) Site operations shall be organized to minimize the amount of drum or container movement. (vi) Prior to movement of drums or containers, all employees exposed to the transfer operation shall be warned of the potential hazards associated with the contents of the drums or containers. (vii) U.S. Department of Transportation specified salvage drums or containers and suitable quantities of proper absorbent shall be kept available and used in areas where spills, leaks, or ruptures may occur. (viii) Where major spills may occur, a spill containment program, which is part of the employer's safety and health program required in paragraph (b) of this section, shall be implemented to contain and isolate the entire volume of the hazardous substance being transferred. (ix) Drums and containers that cannot be moved without rupture, leakage, or spillage shall be emptied into a sound container using a device classified for the material being transferred. (x) A ground-penetrating system or other type of detection system or device shall be used to estimate the location and depth of buried drums or containers. (xi) Soil or covering material shall be removed with caution to prevent drum or container rupture. (xii) Fire extinguishing equipment meeting the requirements of subpart F of this part shall be on hand and ready for use to control incipient fires. (2) Opening drums and containers. (i) Where an airline respirator system is used, connections to the source of air supply shall be protected from contamination and the entire system shall be protected from physical damage. (ii) Employees not actually involved in opening drums or containers shall be kept a safe distance from the drums or containers being opened. (iii) If employees must work near or adjacent to drums or containers being opened, a suitable shield that does not interfere with the work operation shall be placed between the employee and the drums or containers being opened to protect the employee in case of accidental explosion. (iv) Controls for drum or container opening equipment, monitoring equipment, and fire suppression equipment shall be located behind the explosion-resistant barrier. (v) When there is a reasonable possibility of flammable atmospheres being present, material handling equipment and hand tools shall be of the type to prevent sources of ignition. (vi) Drums and containers shall be opened in such a manner that excess interior pressure will be safely relieved. If pressure can not be relieved from a remote location, appropriate shielding shall be placed between the employee and the drums or containers to reduce the risk of employee injury. (vii) Employees shall not stand upon or work from drums or containers. (3) Material handling equipment. (4) Radioactive wastes. (5) Shock sensitive wastes. (i) All non-essential employees shall be evacuated from the area of transfer. (ii) Material handling equipment shall be provided with explosive containment devices or protective shields to protect equipment operators from exploding containers. (iii) An employee alarm system capable of being perceived above surrounding light and noise conditions shall be used to signal the commencement and completion of explosive waste handling activities. (iv) Continuous communications (i.e., portable radios, hand signals, telephones, as appropriate) shall be maintained between the employee-in-charge of the immediate handling area and both the site safety and health supervisor and the command post until such time as the handling operation is completed. Communication equipment or methods that could cause shock sensitive materials to explode shall not be used. (v) Drums and containers under pressure, as evidenced by bulging or swelling, shall not be moved until such time as the cause for excess pressure is determined and appropriate containment procedures have been implemented to protect employees from explosive relief of the drum. (vi) Drums and containers containing packaged laboratory wastes shall be considered to contain shock-sensitive or explosive materials until they have been characterized. Caution: (6) Laboratory waste packs. (i) Lab packs shall be opened only when necessary and then only by an individual knowledgeable in the inspection, classification, and segregation of the containers within the pack according to the hazards of the wastes. (ii) If crystalline material is noted on any container, the contents shall be handled as a shock-sensitive waste until the contents are identified. (7) Sampling of drum and container contents. (8) Shipping and transport. (ii) Drum or container staging areas shall be kept to the minimum number necessary to identify and classify materials safely and prepare them for transport. (iii) Staging areas shall be provided with adequate access and egress routes. (iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes shall be permitted only after a thorough characterization of the materials has been completed. (9) Tank and vault procedures. (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry procedures as described in the employer's safety and health plan shall be followed whenever employees must enter a tank or vault. (k) Decontamination General. (2) Decontamination procedures. (ii) Standard operating procedures shall be developed to minimize employee contact with hazardous substances or with equipment that has contacted hazardous substances. (iii) All employees leaving a contaminated area shall be appropriately decontaminated; all contaminated clothing and equipment leaving a contaminated area shall be appropriately disposed of or decontaminated. (iv) Decontamination procedures shall be monitored by the site safety and health supervisor to determine their effectiveness. When such procedures are found to be ineffective, appropriate steps shall be taken to correct any deficiencies. (3) Location. (4) Equipment and solvents. (5) Personal protective clothing and equipment. (ii) Employees whose non-impermeable clothing becomes wetted with hazardous substances shall immediately remove that clothing and proceed to shower. The clothing shall be disposed of or decontaminated before it is removed from the work zone. (6) Unauthorized employees. (7) Commercial laundries or cleaning establishments. (8) Showers and change rooms. (l) Emergency response by employees at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites Emergency response plan. (ii) Employers who will evacuate their employees from the danger area when an emergency occurs, and who do not permit any of their employees to assist in handling the emergency, are exempt from the requirements of this paragraph if they provide an emergency action plan complying with § 1926.35 of this part. (2) Elements of an emergency response plan. (i) Pre-emergency planning. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of authority, and communication. (iii) Emergency recognition and prevention. (iv) Safe distances and places of refuge. (v) Site security and control. (vi) Evacuation routes and procedures. (vii) Decontamination procedures which are not covered by the site safety and health plan. (viii) Emergency medical treatment and first aid. (ix) Emergency alerting and response procedures. (x) Critique of response and follow-up. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment. (3) Procedures for handling emergency incidents. (A) Site topography, layout, and prevailing weather conditions. (B) Procedures for reporting incidents to local, state, and federal governmental agencies. (ii) The emergency response plan shall be a separate section of the Site Safety and Health Plan. (iii) The emergency response plan shall be compatible and integrated with the disaster, fire and/or emergency response plans of local, state, and federal agencies. (iv) The emergency response plan shall be rehearsed regularly as part of the overall training program for site operations. (v) The site emergency response plan shall be reviewed periodically and, as necessary, be amended to keep it current with new or changing site conditions or information. (vi) An employee alarm system shall be installed to notify employees of an emergency situation; to stop work activities if necessary; to lower background noise in order to speed communication; and to begin emergency procedures. (vii) Based upon the information available at time of the emergency, the employer shall evaluate the incident and the site response capabilities and proceed with the appropriate steps to implement the site emergency response plan. (m) Illumination. Table D-65.1—Minimum Illumination Intensities in Foot-Candles Foot-candles Area or operations 5 General site areas. 3 Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and field maintenance areas. 5 Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and exitways. 5 Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Administration approved cap lights shall be acceptable for use in the tunnel heading.) 10 General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.) 30 First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. (n) Sanitation at temporary workplaces Potable water. (ii) Portable containers used to dispense drinking water shall be capable of being tightly closed, and equipped with a tap. Water shall not be dipped from containers. (iii) Any container used to distribute drinking water shall be clearly marked as to the nature of its contents and not used for any other purpose. (iv) Where single service cups (to be used but once) are supplied, both a sanitary container for the unused cups and a receptacle for disposing of the used cups shall be provided. (2) Nonpotable water. (ii) There shall be no cross-connection, open or potential, between a system furnishing potable water and a system furnishing nonpotable water. (3) Toilet facilities. Table D-65.2—Toilet Facilities Number of employees Minimum number of facilities 20 or fewer One. More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one urinal per 40 employees. More than 200 One toilet seat and one urinal per 50 employees. (ii) Under temporary field conditions, provisions shall be made to assure that at least one toilet facility is available. (iii) Hazardous waste sites not provided with a sanitary sewer shall be provided with the following toilet facilities unless prohibited by local codes: (A) Chemical toilets; (B) Recirculating toilets; (C) Combustion toilets; or (D) Flush toilets. (iv) The requirements of this paragraph for sanitation facilities shall not apply to mobile crews having transportation readily available to nearby toilet facilities. (v) Doors entering toilet facilities shall be provided with entrance locks controlled from inside the facility. (4) Food handling. (5) Temporary sleeping quarters. (6) Washing facilities. (7) Showers and change rooms. (i) Showers shall be provided and shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.51(f)(4). (ii) Change rooms shall be provided and shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.51(i). Change rooms shall consist of two separate change areas separated by the shower area required in paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. One change area, with an exit leading off the worksite, shall provide employees with a clean area where they can remove, store, and put on street clothing. The second area, with an exit to the worksite, shall provide employees with an area where they can put on, remove and store work clothing and personal protective equipment. (iii) Showers and change rooms shall be located in areas where exposures are below the permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels. If this cannot be accomplished, then a ventilation system shall be provided that will supply air that is below the permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels. (iv) Employers shall assure that employees shower at the end of their work shift and when leaving the hazardous waste site. (o) New technology programs. (2) New technologies, equipment or control measures available to the industry, such as the use of foams, absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or other means to suppress the level of air contaminates while excavating the site or for spill control, shall be evaluated by employers or their representatives. Such an evaluation shall be done to determine the effectiveness of the new methods, materials, or equipment before implementing their use on a large scale for enhancing employee protection. Information and data from manufacturers or suppliers may be used as part of the employer's evaluation effort. Such evaluations shall be made available to OSHA upon request. (p) Certain operations conducted under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA). (1) Safety and health program. (2) Hazard communication program. Note to 1926.65: The exemption for hazardous waste provided in § 1926.59 is applicable to this section. (3) Medical surveillance program. (4) Decontamination program. (5) New technology program. (6) Material handling program. (7) Training program New employees. (ii) Current employees. (iii) Trainers. (8) Emergency response program Emergency response plan. (ii) Elements of an emergency response plan. (A) Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties. (B) Personnel roles, lines of authority, and communication. (C) Emergency recognition and prevention. (D) Safe distances and places of refuge. (E) Site security and control. (F) Evacuation routes and procedures. (G) Decontamination procedures. (H) Emergency medical treatment and first aid. (I) Emergency alerting and response procedures. (J) Critique of response and follow-up. (K) PPE and emergency equipment. (iii) Training. Exception #1: Exception #2: (B) Employee members of TSD facility emergency response organizations shall be trained to a level of competence in the recognition of health and safety hazards to protect themselves and other employees. This would include training in the methods used to minimize the risk from safety and health hazards; in the safe use of control equipment; in the selection and use of appropriate personal protective equipment; in the safe operating procedures to be used at the incident scene; in the techniques of coordination with other employees to minimize risks; in the appropriate response to over exposure from health hazards or injury to themselves and other employees; and in the recognition of subsequent symptoms which may result from over exposures. (C) The employer shall certify that each covered employee has attended and successfully completed the training required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of this section, or shall certify the employee's competency at least yearly. The method used to demonstrate competency for certification of training shall be recorded and maintained by the employer. (iv) Procedures for handling emergency incidents. ( 1 ( 2 (B) The emergency response plan shall be compatible and integrated with the disaster, fire and/or emergency response plans of local, state, and federal agencies. (C) The emergency response plan shall be rehearsed regularly as part of the overall training program for site operations. (D) The site emergency response plan shall be reviewed periodically and, as necessary, be amended to keep it current with new or changing site conditions or information. (E) An employee alarm system shall be installed to notify employees of an emergency situation; to stop work activities if necessary; to lower background noise in order to speed communication; and to begin emergency procedures. (F) Based upon the information available at time of the emergency, the employer shall evaluate the incident and the site response capabilities and proceed with the appropriate steps to implement the site emergency response plan. (q) Emerqency response to hazardous substance releases. (1) Emergency response plan. (2) Elements of an emergency response plan. (i) Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of authority, training, and communication. (iii) Emergency recognition and prevention. (iv) Safe distances and places of refuge. (v) Site security and control. (vi) Evacuation routes and procedures. (vii) Decontamination. (viii) Emergency medical treatment and first aid. (ix) Emergency alerting and response procedures. (x) Critique of response and follow-up. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment. (xii) Emergency response organizations may use the local emergency response plan or the state emergency response plan or both, as part of their emergency response plan to avoid duplication. Those items of the emergency response plan that are being properly addressed by the SARA Title III plans may be substituted into their emergency plan or otherwise kept together for the employer and employee's use. (3) Procedures for handling emergency response. Note to ( g i The senior official (ii) The individual in charge of the ICS shall identify, to the extent possible, all hazardous substances or conditions present and shall address as appropriate site analysis, use of engineering controls, maximum exposure limits, hazardous substance handling procedures, and use of any new technologies. (iii) Based on the hazardous substances and/or conditions present, the individual in charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate emergency operations, and assure that the personal protective equipment worn is appropriate for the hazards to be encountered. (iv) Employees engaged in emergency response and exposed to hazardous substances presenting an inhalation hazard or potential inhalation hazard shall wear positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus while engaged in emergency response, until such time that the individual in charge of the ICS determines through the use of air monitoring that a decreased level of respiratory protection will not result in hazardous exposures to employees. (v) The individual in charge of the ICS shall limit the number of emergency response personnel at the emergency site, in those areas of potential or actual exposure to incident or site hazards, to those who are actively performing emergency operations. However, operations in hazardous areas shall be performed using the buddy system in groups of two or more. (vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by with equipment ready to provide assistance or rescue. Advance first aid support personnel, as a minimum, shall also stand by with medical equipment and transportation capability. (vii) The individual in charge of the ICS shall designate a safety official, who is knowledgable in the operations being implemented at the emergency response site, with specific responsibility to identify and evaluate hazards and to provide direction with respect to the safety of operations for the emergency at hand. (viii) When activities are judged by the safety official to be an IDLH condition and/or to involve an imminent danger condition, the safety official shall have the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate those activities. The safety official shall immediately inform the individual in charge of the ICS of any actions needed to be taken to correct these hazards at the emergency scene. (ix) After emergency operations have terminated, the individual in charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate decontamination procedures. (x) When deemed necessary for meeting the tasks at hand, approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus may be used with approved cylinders from other approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus provided that such cylinders are of the same capacity and pressure rating. All compressed air cylinders used with self-contained breathing apparatus shall meet U.S. Department of Transportation and National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health criteria. (4) Skilled support personnel. (5) Specialist employees. (6) Training. (i) First responder awareness level. (A) An understanding of what hazardous substances are, and the risks associated with them in an incident. (B) An understanding of the potential outcomes associated with an emergency created when hazardous substances are present. (C) The ability to recognize the presence of hazardous substances in an emergency. (D) The ability to identify the hazardous substances, if possible. (E) An understanding of the role of the first responder awareness individual in the employer's emergency response plan including site security and control and the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook. (F) The ability to realize the need for additional resources, and to make appropriate notifications to the communication center. (ii) First responder operations level. (A) Knowledge of the basic hazard and risk assessment techniques. (B) Know how to select and use proper personal protective equipment provided to the first responder operational level. (C) An understanding of basic hazardous materials terms. (D) Know how to perform basic control, containment and/or confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and personal protective equipment available with their unit. (E) Know how to implement basic decontamination procedures. (F) An understanding of the relevant standard operating procedures and termination procedures. (iii) Hazardous materials technician. (A) Know how to implement the employer's emergency response plan. (B) Know the classification, identification and verification of known and unknown materials by using field survey instruments and equipment. (C) Be able to function within an assigned role in the Incident Command System. (D) Know how to select and use proper specialized chemical personal protective equipment provided to the hazardous materials technician. (E) Understand hazard and risk assessment techniques. (F) Be able to perform advance control, containment, and/or confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and personal protective equipment available with the unit. (G) Understand and implement decontamination procedures. (H) Understand termination procedures. (I) Understand basic chemical and toxicological terminology and behavior. (iv) Hazardous materials specialist. (A) Know how to implement the local emergency response plan. (B) Understand classification, identification and verification of known and unknown materials by using advanced survey instruments and equipment. (C) Know of the state emergency response plan. (D) Be able to select and use proper specialized chemical personal protective equipment provided to the hazardous materials specialist. (E) Understand in-depth hazard and risk techniques. (F) Be able to perform specialized control, containment, and/or confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and personal protective equipment available. (G) Be able to determine and implement decontamination procedures. (H) Have the ability to develop a site safety and control plan. (I) Understand chemical, radiological and toxicological terminology and behavior. (v) On scene incident commander. (A) Know and be able to implement the employer's incident command system. (B) Know how to implement the employer's emergency response plan. (C) Know and understand the hazards and risks associated with employees working in chemical protective clothing. (D) Know how to implement the local emergency response plan. (E) Know of the state emergency response plan and of the Federal Regional Response Team. (F) Know and understand the importance of decontamination procedures. (7) Trainers. (8) Refresher training. (ii) A statement shall be made of the training or competency, and if a statement of competency is made, the employer shall keep a record of the methodology used to demonstrate competency. (9) Medical surveillance and consultation. (ii) Any emergency response employees who exhibits signs or symptoms which may have resulted from exposure to hazardous substances during the course of an emergency incident, either immediately or subsequently, shall be provided with medical consultation as required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section. (10) Chemical protective clothing. (11) Post-emergency response operations. (i) Meet all of the requirements of paragraphs (b) through (o) of this section; or (ii) Where the clean-up is done on plant property using plant or workplace employees, such employees shall have completed the training requirements of the following: 29 CFR 1926.35, 1926.59, and 1926.103, and other appropriate safety and health training made necessary by the tasks that they are expected to be performed such as personal protective equipment and decontamination procedures. All equipment to be used in the performance of the clean-up work shall be in serviceable condition and shall have been inspected prior to use. Appendices to § 1926.65—Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response Note: The following appendices serve as non-mandatory guidelines to assist employees and employers in complying with the appropriate requirements of this section. However § 1926.65(g) makes mandatory in certain circumstances the use of Level A and Level B PPE protection. Appendix A to § 1926.65—Personal Protective Equipment Test Methods This appendix sets forth the non-mandatory examples of tests which may be used to evaluate compliance with § 1926.65(g)(4) (ii) and (iii). Other tests and other challenge agents may be used to evaluate compliance. A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit pressure test 1.0—Scope 1.1 This practice measures the ability of a gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit material, seams, and closures to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The results of this practice allow the gas tight integrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit to be evaluated. 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to permeation, penetration, and degradation by specific hazardous substances is not determined by this test method. 2.0—Definition of terms 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) 2.2 Protective clothing material 2.3 Gas tight 3.0—Summary of test method 3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and modified for the test. The test apparatus is attached to the suit to permit inflation to the pre-test suit expansion pressure for removal of suit wrinkles and creases. The pressure is lowered to the test pressure and monitored for three minutes. If the pressure drop is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and is removed from service. The test is repeated after leak location and repair. 4.0—Required Supplies 4.1 Source of compressed air. 4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, including a pressure measurement device with a sensitivity of at least 1/4 4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing tape. 4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush. 4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing device. 5.0—Safety Precautions 5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the correct pressure safety devices required for the source of compressed air used. 6.0—Test Procedure 6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall perform a visual inspection of the suit. Check the suit for seam integrity by visually examining the seams and gently pulling on the seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fittings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure and show no signs of deterioration. 6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with any other normal inlet or exhaust points (such as umbilical air line fittings or face piece opening) with tape or other appropriate means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should be exercised in the sealing process not to damage any of the suit components. 6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. 6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by providing an improvised connection point on the suit for connecting an airline. Attach the pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit suit inflation from a compressed air source equipped with a pressure indicating regulator. The leak tightness of the pressure test apparatus should be tested before and after each test by closing off the end of the tubing attached to the suit and assuring a pressure of three inches water gauge for three minutes can be maintained. If a component is removed for the test, that component shall be replaced and a second test conducted with another component removed to permit a complete test of the ensemble. 6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A) and the suit test pressure (B) shall be supplied by the suit manufacturer, but in no case shall they be less than: (A) = three inches water gauge; and (B) = two inches water gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be no less than 80 percent of the test pressure (B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not exceed 20 percent of the test pressure (B). 6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure inside is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test expansion suit pressure. Allow at least one minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pressure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure. Begin timing. At the end of three minutes, record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the ending suit pressure. The difference between the suit test pressure and the ending suit test pressure (B-C) shall be defined as the suit pressure drop. 6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than 20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during the three-minute test period, the suit fails the test and shall be removed from service. 7.0—Retest Procedure 7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and brushing or wiping the entire suit (including seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solution. Observe the suit for the formation of soap bubbles, which is an indication of a leak. Repair all identified leaks. 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in Test procedure 6.0. 8.0—Report 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice shall have the following information recorded: 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identifying brand name, date of purchase, material of construction, and unique fit features, e.g., special breathing apparatus. 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with the specific observation times. If the ending pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as failing the test. When possible, the specific leak location shall be identified in the test records. Retest pressure data shall be recorded as an additional test. 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used shall be identified and the sensitivity of the pressure gauge shall be recorded. 8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pressure test even if repairs are being made at the test location. CAUTION Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be sure they are positioned correctly and secured tightly before putting the suit back into service. Special care should be taken to examine each exhaust valve to make sure it is not blocked. Care should also be exercised to assure that the inside and outside of the suit is completely dry before it is put into storage. B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit qualitative leak test 1.0—Scope 1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit integrity by detecting inward leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modifications are made to the suit to carry out this test, the results from this practice provide a realistic test for the integrity of the entire suit. 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to permeation, penetration, and degradation is not determined by this test method. ASTM test methods are available to test suit materials for these characteristics and the tests are usually conducted by the manufacturers of the suits. 2.0—Definition of terms 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) 2.2 Protective clothing material 2.3 Gas tight 2.4 Intrusion Coefficient 3.0—Summary of recommended practice 3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH 4 4.0—Required supplies 4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide (58% by weight). 4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indicating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5-10 ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6 (blue)] 4.3 A supply of high range (0.5-10 volume percent) and low range (5-700 ppm) detector tubes for ammonia and the corresponding sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia detectors can be substituted for the low range detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of this practice. 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least 12″:14″:1″ and a half pint plastic container (PVC) with tightly closing lid. 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volumetric measuring device of at least 50 milliliters in volume with an accuracy of at least ±1 milliliters. 5.0—Safety precautions 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide, NH 4 5.2 Since the established permissible exposure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15 minute STEL, only persons wearing a positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus or a positive pressure supplied air respirator shall be in the chamber. Normally only the person wearing the totally-encapsulating suit will be inside the chamber. A stand-by person shall have a positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a positive pressure supplied air respirator available to enter the test area should the suited individual need assistance. 5.3 A method to monitor the suited individual must be used during this test. Visual contact is the simplest but other methods using communication devices are acceptable. 5.4 The test room shall be large enough to allow the exercise protocol to be carried out and then to be ventilated to allow for easy exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere after the test(s) are completed. 5.5 Individuals shall be medically screened for the use of respiratory protection and checked for allergies to ammonia before participating in this test procedure. 6.0—Test procedure 6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milliliters of concentrated aqueous ammonia solution per cubic foot of test area volume to determine the approximate volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia required to generate 1000 ppm in the test area. 6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place it into a closed plastic container. 6.1.3 Place the container, several high range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump in the clean test pan and locate it near the test area entry door so that the suited individual has easy access to these supplies. 6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip and fasten one end of the strip to the inside of the suit face shield lens where it can be seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator strip with distilled water. Care shall be taken not to contaminate the detector part of the indicator paper by touching it. A small piece of masking tape or equivalent should be used to attach the indicator strip to the interior of the suit face shield. 6.2.2 If problems are encountered with this method of attachment, the indicator strip can be attached to the outside of the respirator face piece lens being used during the test. 6.3 Don the respiratory protective device normally used with the suit, and then don the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure all openings which are intended to be sealed (zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. DO NOT, however, plug off any venting valves. 6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should be exhausted from the chamber during the test because this will dilute the ammonia challenge concentrations. 6.5 Open the container with the pre-measured volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia within the enclosed test room, and pour the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. Wait two minutes to allow for adequate volatilization of the concentrated aqueous ammonia. A small mixing fan can be used near the evaporation pan to increase the evaporation rate of the ammonia solution. 6.6 After two minutes a determination of the ammonia concentration within the chamber should be made using the high range colorimetric detector tube. A concentration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater shall be generated before the exercises are started. 6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the following four minute exercise protocol should be followed: 6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head with at least 15 raising motions completed in one minute. 6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a one-minute period. 6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10 complete motions of the arms from above the head to touching of the toes in a one-minute period. 6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete standing and squatting motions in a one-minute period. 6.8 If at any time during the test the colorimetric indicating paper should change colors, the test should be stopped and section 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶ 4.2). 6.9 After completion of the test exercise, the test area concentration should be measured again using the high range colorimetric detector tube. 6.10 Exit the test area. 6.11 The opening created by the suit zipper or other appropriate suit penetration should be used to determine the ammonia concentration in the suit with the low range length of stain detector tube or other ammonia monitor. The internal TECP suit air should be sampled far enough from the enclosed test area to prevent a false ammonia reading. 6.12 After completion of the measurement of the suit interior ammonia concentration the test is concluded and the suit is doffed and the respirator removed. 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room should be turned on and allowed to run for enough time to remove the ammonia gas. The fan shall be vented to the outside of the building. 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit interior (five ppm ammonia (NH 3 6.15 By following this test method, an intrusion coefficient of approximately 200 or more can be measured with the suit in a completely operational condition. If the intrusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the suit is suitable for emergency response and field use. 7.0—Retest procedures 7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for leaks by following the pressure test in test A above. 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in the test procedure 6.0. 8.0—Report 8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit tested by this practice shall have the following information recorded. 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identifying brand name, date of purchase, material of construction, and unique suit features; e.g., special breathing apparatus. 8.1.2 General description of test room used for test. 8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of ammonia detector strips and color change data. 8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and expiration date of the length of stain ammonia detector tubes. The brand name and model of the sampling pump should also be recorded. If another type of ammonia detector is used, it should be identified along with its minimum detection limit for ammonia. 8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two test area concentrations, their average, the interior suit concentration, and the calculated intrusion coefficient. Retest data shall be recorded as an additional test. 8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be specified as “suit passed” or “suit failed,” and the date of the test. Any detectable ammonia (five ppm or greater for the length of stain detector tube) in the suit interior indicates the suit has failed this test. When other ammonia detectors are used, a lower level of detection is possible and it should be specified as the pass fail criteria. CAUTION Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be sure they are positioned correctly and secured tightly before putting the suit back into service. Special care should be taken to examine each exhaust valve to make sure it is not blocked. Care should also be exercised to assure that the inside and outside of the suit is completely dry before it is put into storage. Appendix B to § 1926.65—General Description and Discussion of the Levels of Protection and Protective Gear This appendix sets forth information about personal protective equipment (PPE) protection levels which may be used to assist employers in complying with the PPE requirements of this section. As required by the standard, PPE must be selected which will protect employees from the specific hazards which they are likely to encounter during their work on-site. Selection of the appropriate PPE is a complex process which should take into consideration a variety of factors. Key factors involved in this process are identification of the hazards, or suspected hazards; their routes of potential hazard to employees (inhalation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye or skin contact); and the performance of the PPE materials Other factors in this selection process to be considered are matching the PPE to the employee's work requirements and task-specific conditions. The durability of PPE materials, such as tear strength and seam strength, should be considered in relation to the employee's tasks. The effects of PPE in relation to heat stress and task duration are a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some cases layers of PPE may be necessary to provide sufficient protection, or to protect expensive PPE inner garments, suits or equipment. The more that is known about the hazards at the site, the easier the job of PPE selection becomes. As more information about the hazards and conditions at the site becomes available, the site supervisor can make decisions to up-grade or down-grade the level of PPE protection to match the tasks at hand. The following are guidelines which an employer can use to begin the selection of the appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site information may suggest the use of combinations of PPE selected from the different protection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being more suitable to the hazards of the work. It should be cautioned that the listing below does not fully address the performance of the specific PPE material in relation to the specific hazards at the job site, and that PPE selection, evaluation and re-selection is an ongoing process until sufficient information about the hazards and PPE performance is obtained. Part A. I. Level A— The following constitute Level A equipment; it may be used as appropriate; 1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or positive pressure supplied air respirator with escape SCBA, approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). 2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protective suit. 3. Coveralls. 1 4. Long underwear. 1 5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank. 8. Hard hat (under suit). 1 9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and boots (depending on suit construction, may be worn over totally-encapsulating suit). II. Level B The following constitute Level B equipment; it may be used as appropriate. 1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or positive pressure supplied air respirator with escape SCBA (NIOSH approved). 2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; disposable chemical-resistant overalls). 3. Coveralls. 1 4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank. 7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable). 1 8. Hard hat. 1 9. [Reserved] 10. Face shield. 1 III. Level C The following constitute Level C equipment; it may be used as appropriate. 1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying respirators (NIOSH approved). 2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; disposable chemical-resistant overalls). 3. Coveralls. 1 1 4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel toe and shank. 1 7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable) 1 8. Hard hat. 1 9. Escape mask. 1 10. Face shield. 1 IV. Level D The following constitute Level D equipment; it may be used as appropriate: 1. Coveralls. 2. Gloves. 1 3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank. 4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable). 1 5. Safety glasses or chemical splash goggles *. 6. Hard hat. 1 7. Escape mask. 1 8. Face shield. 1 Part B. I. Level A 1. The hazardous substance has been identified and requires the highest level of protection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory system based on either the measured (or potential for) high concentration of atmospheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the site operations and work functions involve a high potential for splash, immersion, or exposure to unexpected vapors, gases, or particulates of materials that are harmful to skin or capable of being absorbed through the skin; 2. Substances with a high degree of hazard to the skin are known or suspected to be present, and skin contact is possible; or 3. Operations are being conducted in confined, poorly ventilated areas, and the absence of conditions requiring Level A have not yet been determined. II. Level B 1. The type and atmospheric concentration of substances have been identified and require a high level of respiratory protection, but less skin protection; 2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5 percent oxygen; or 3. The presence of incompletely identified vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-reading organic vapor detection instrument, but vapors and gases are not suspected of containing high levels of chemicals harmful to skin or capable of being absorbed through the skin. Note: This involves atmospheres with IDLH concentrations of specific substances that present severe inhalation hazards and that do not represent a severe skin hazard; or that do not meet the criteria for use of air-purifying respirators. III. Level C 1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid splashes, or other direct contact will not adversely affect or be absorbed through any exposed skin; 2. The types of air contaminants have been identified, concentrations measured, and an air-purifying respirator is available that can remove the contaminants; and 3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying respirators are met. IV. Level D 1. The atmosphere contains no known hazard; and 2. Work functions preclude splashes, immersion, or the potential for unexpected inhalation of or contact with hazardous levels of any chemicals. Note: As stated before, combinations of personal protective equipment other than those described for Levels A, B, C, and D protection may be more appropriate and may be used to provide the proper level of protection. As an aid in selecting suitable chemical protective clothing, it should be noted that the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) has developed standards on chemical protective clothing. The standards that have been adopted by include: NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies (EPA Level A Protective Clothing). NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Clothing). NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non-flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations (EPA Level B Protective Clothing). These standards apply documentation and performance requirements to the manufacture of chemical protective suits. Chemical protective suits meeting these requirements are labelled as compliant with the appropriate standard. It is recommended that chemical protective suits that meet these standards be used. Appendix C to § 1926.65—Compliance Guidelines 1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. Also those employers involved with treating, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as covered in paragraph (p) must have implemented a safety and health program for their employees. This program is to include the hazard communication program required in paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the employers comprehensive overall safety and health program. This program is to be in writing. Each site or workplace safety and health program will need to include the following: (1) Policy statements of the line of authority and accountability for implementing the program, the objectives of the program and the role of the site safety and health supervisor or manager and staff; (2) means or methods for the development of procedures for identifying and controlling workplace hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for the development and communication to employees of the various plans, work rules, standard operating procedures and practices that pertain to individual employees and supervisors; (4) means for the training of supervisors and employees to develop the needed skills and knowledge to perform their work in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to anticipate and prepare for emergency situations; and (6) means for obtaining information feedback to aid in evaluating the program and for improving the effectiveness of the program. The management and employees should be trying continually to improve the effectiveness of the program thereby enhancing the protection being afforded those working on the site. Accidents on the site or workplace should be investigated to provide information on how such occurrences can be avoided in the future. When injuries or illnesses occur on the site or workplace, they will need to be investigated to determine what needs to be done to prevent this incident from occurring again. Such information will need to be used as feedback on the effectiveness of the program and the information turned into positive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Receipt of employee suggestions or complaints relating to safety and health issues involved with site or workplace activities is also a feedback mechanism that can be used effectively to improve the program and may serve in part as an evaluative tool(s). For the development and implementation of the program to be the most effective, professional safety and health personnel should be used. Certified Safety Professionals, Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Registered Professional Safety Engineers are good examples of professional stature for safety and health managers who will administer the employer's program. 2. Training. The training programs for employees subject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of this standard should address: the employers safety and health program elements impacting employees; the hazard communication program; the medical surveillance program; the hazards and the controls for such hazards that employees need to know for their job duties and functions. All require annual refresher training. The training programs for employees covered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of this standard should address those competencies required for the various levels of response such as: the hazards associated with hazardous substances; hazard identification and awareness; notification of appropriate persons; the need for and use of personal protective equipment including respirators; the decontamination procedures to be used; preplanning activities for hazardous substance incidents including the emergency reponse plan; company standard operating procedures for hazardous substance emergency responses; the use of the incident command system and other subjects. Hands-on training should be stressed whenever possible. Critiques done after an incident which include an evaluation of what worked and what did not and how could the incident be better handled the next time may be counted as training time. For hazardous materials specialists (usually members of hazardous materials teams), the training should address the care, use and/or testing of chemical protective clothing including totally encapsulating suits, the medical surveillance program, the standard operating procedures for the hazardous materials team including the use of plugging and patching equipment and other subject areas. Officers and leaders who may be expected to be in charge at an incident should be fully knowledgeable of their company's incident command system. They should know where and how to obtain additional assistance and be familiar with the local district's emergency response plan and the state emergency response plan. Specialist employees such as technical experts, medical experts or environmental experts that work with hazardous materials in their regular jobs, who may be sent to the incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer or governmental agency to advise and assist the person in charge of the incident should have training on an annual basis. Their training should include the care and use of personal protective equipment including respirators; knowledge of the incident command system and how they are to relate to it; and those areas needed to keep them current in their respective field as it relates to safety and health involving specific hazardous substances. Those skilled support personnel, such as employees who work for public works departments or equipment operators who operate bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who may be called to the incident scene to provide emergency support assistance, should have at least a safety and health briefing before entering the area of potential or actual exposure. These skilled support personnel, who have not been a part of the emergency response plan and do not meet the training requirements, should be made aware of the hazards they face and should be provided all necessary protective clothing and equipment required for their tasks. There are two National Fire Protection Association standards, NFPA 472—“Standard for Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Material Incidents” and NFPA 471—“Recommended Practice for Responding to Hazardous Material Incidents”, which are excellent resource documents to aid fire departments and other emergency response organizations in developing their training program materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance on the skills and knowledge needed for first responder awareness level, first responder operations level, hazmat technicians, and hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for the officer corp who will be in charge of hazardous substance incidents. 3. Decontamination. 4. Emergency response plans. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning Guide, Employers involved with treatment, storage, and disposal facilities for hazardous waste, which have the required contingency plan called for by their permit, would not need to duplicate the same planning elements. Those items of the emergency response plan that are properly addressed in the contingency plan may be substituted into the emergency response plan required in 1926.65 or otherwise kept together for employer and employee use. 5. Personal protective equipment programs. As discussed in appendix B, no single combination of protective equipment and clothing is capable of protecting against all hazards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunction with other protective methods and its effectiveness evaluated periodically. The use of PPE can itself create significant worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical and psychological stress, and impaired vision, mobility, and communication. For any given situation, equipment and clothing should be selected that provide an adequate level of protection. However, over-protection, as well as under-protection, can be hazardous and should be avoided where possible. Two basic objectives of any PPE program should be to protect the wearer from safety and health hazards, and to prevent injury to the wearer from incorrect use and/or malfunction of the PPE. To accomplish these goals, a comprehensive PPE program should include hazard identification, medical monitoring, environmental surveillance, selection, use, maintenance, and decontamination of PPE and its associated training. The written PPE program should include policy statements, procedures, and guidelines. Copies should be made available to all employees, and a reference copy should be made available at the worksite. Technical data on equipment, maintenance manuals, relevant regulations, and other essential information should also be collected and maintained. 6. Incident command system (ICS). manage one The ICS is a very similar system, except it is implemented for emergency response to all incidents, both large and small, that involve hazardous substances. For a small incident, the individual in charge of the ICS may perform many tasks of the ICS. There may not be any, or little, delegation of tasks to subordinates. For example, in response to a small incident, the individual in charge of the ICS, in addition to normal command activities, may become the safety officer and may designate only one employee (with proper equipment) as a back-up to provide assistance if needed. OSHA does recommend, however, that at least two employees be designated as back-up personnel since the assistance needed may include rescue. To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the following scenario might develop during a small incident, such as an overturned tank truck with a small leak of flammable liquid. The first responding senior officer would implement and take command of the ICS. That person would size-up the incident and determine if additional personnel and apparatus were necessary; would determine what actions to take to control the leak; and, determine the proper level of personal protective equipment. If additional assistance is not needed, the individual in charge of the ICS would implement actions to stop and control the leak using the fewest number of personnel that can effectively accomplish the tasks. The individual in charge of the ICS then would designate himself as the safety officer and two other employees as a back-up in case rescue may become necessary. In this scenario, decontamination procedures would not be necessary. A large complex incident may require many employees and difficult, time-consuming efforts to control. In these situations, the individual in charge of the ICS will want to delegate different tasks to subordinates in order to maintain a span of control that will keep the number of subordinates, that are reporting, to a manageable level. Delegation of task at large incidents may be by location, where the incident scene is divided into sectors, and subordinate officers coordinate activities within the sector that they have been assigned. Delegation of tasks can also be by function. Some of the functions that the individual in charge of the ICS may want to delegate at a large incident are: medical services; evacuation; water supply; resources (equipment, apparatus); media relations; safety; and, site control (integrate activities with police for crowd and traffic control). Also for a large incident, the individual in charge of the ICS will designate several employees as back-up personnel; and a number of safety officers to monitor conditions and recommend safety precautions. Therefore, no matter what size or complexity an incident may be, by implementing an ICS there will be one individual in charge 7. Site Safety and Control Plans. A comprehensive site safety and control plan should include the following: summary analysis of hazards on the site and a risk analysis of those hazards; site map or sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transition or decontamination zone, work or hot zone); use of the buddy system; site communications; command post or command center; standard operating procedures and safe work practices; medical assistance and triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air contaminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination procedures and area; and other relevant areas. This plan should be a part of the employer's emergency response plan or an extension of it to the specific site. 8. Medical surveillance programs. The Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities 9. New Technology and Spill Containment Programs. These agents can be rapidly applied over a large area and can be uniformly applied or otherwise can be used to build a small dam, thus improving the workers' ability to control spilled material. These application techniques enhance the intimate contact between the agent and the spilled material allowing for the quickest effect by the agent or quickest control of the spilled material. Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled materials, to suppress vapor generation from spilled materials, and to do both. Some special agents, which when applied as recommended by the manufacturer, will react in a controlled manner with the spilled material to neutralize acids or caustics, or greatly reduce the level of hazard of the spilled material. There are several modern methods and devices for use by emergency response personnel or others involved with spill control efforts to safely apply spill control agents to control spilled material hazards. These include portable pressurized applicators similar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar to portable fire fighting foam systems which allow the operator to apply the agent without having to come into contact with the spilled material. The operator is able to apply the agent to the spilled material from a remote position. The solidification of liquids provides for rapid containment and isolation of hazardous substance spills. By directing the agent at run-off points or at the edges of the spill, the reactant solid will automatically create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of the material. Clean-up of hazardous substances is greatly improved when solidifying agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or activated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly applied, these agents can totally solidify liquid hazardous substances or neutralize or absorb them, which results in materials which are less hazardous and easier to handle, transport, and dispose of. The concept of spill treatment, to create less hazardous substances, will improve the safety and level of protection of employees working at spill clean-up operations or emergency response operations to spills of hazardous substances. The use of vapor suppression agents for volatile hazardous substances, such as flammable liquids and those substances which present an inhalation hazard, is important for protecting workers. The rapid and uniform distribution of the agent over the surface of the spilled material can provide quick vapor knockdown. There are temporary and long-term foam-type agents which are effective on vapors and dusts, and activated carbon adsorption agents which are effective for vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. The proper use of hose lines or hand-held portable pressurized applicators provides good mobility and permits the worker to deliver the agent from a safe distance without having to step into the untreated spilled material. Some of these systems can be recharged in the field to provide coverage of larger spill areas than the design limits of a single charged applicator unit. Some of the more effective agents can solidify the liquid flammable hazardous substances and at the same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 °F so the resulting substance may be handled as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's 40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particularly § 261.21). All workers performing hazardous substance spill control work are expected to wear the proper protective clothing and equipment for the materials present and to follow the employer's established standard operating procedures for spill control. All involved workers need to be trained in the established operating procedures; in the use and care of spill control equipment; and in the associated hazards and control of such hazards of spill containment work. These new tools and agents are the things that employers will want to evaluate as part of their new technology program. The treatment of spills of hazardous substances or wastes at an emergency incident as part of the immediate spill containment and control efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a permit exception is described in 40 CFR 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11). Appendix D to § 1926.65—References The following references may be consulted for further information on the subject of this standard: 1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—January 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Hazardous Waste Sites. 2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2-2.37A—January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous Waste Site Activities. 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—January 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form, OSHA 175. 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference Manual, 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, the United States Coast Guard, and the United States Environmental Protection Agency, Guidance for Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous Substance Emergencies. 6. National Priorities List, 7. The Decontamination of Response Personnel, 8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, 9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; 10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities, 11. Protecting Health and Safety at Hazardous Waste Sites: An Overview, 12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous Substance Emergencies, 13. Personal Protective Equipment for Hazardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; 14. Fire Service Emergency Management Handbook, 15. Emergency Response Guidebook, 16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Materials Training, Planning and Preparedness, 17. Workbook for Fire Command, 18. Fire Command, 19. Incident Command System, 20. Site Emergency Response Planning, 21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning Guide, 22. Community Teamwork: Working Together to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation Safety. 23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and Industry, Appendix E to § 1926.65—Training Curriculum Guidelines The following non-mandatory general criteria may be used for assistance in developing site-specific training curriculum used to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR 1926.65(e); 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); and 29 CFR 1926.65(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These are generic guidelines and they are not presented as a complete training curriculum for any specific employer. Site-specific training programs must be developed on the basis of a needs assessment of the hazardous waste site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response operation in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.65. It is noted that Suggested General Criteria Definitions: Competent Demonstration Hands-on training Initial training Lecture Proficient Site-specific Training hours Suggested Core Criteria: 1. Training facility. 2. Training Director. 3. Instructors. Instructors should be required to maintain professional competency by participating in continuing education or professional development programs or by completing successfully an annual refresher course and having an annual review by the Training Director. The annual review by the Training Director should include observation of an instructor's delivery, a review of those observations with the trainer, and an analysis of any instructor or class evaluations completed by the students during the previous year. 4. Course materials. All written and audio-visual materials in training curricula should be peer reviewed by technically competent outside reviewers or by a standing advisory committee. Reviews should possess expertise in the following disciplines were applicable: occupational health, industrial hygiene and safety, chemical/environmental engineering, employee education, or emergency response. One or more of the peer reviewers should be a employee experienced in the work activities to which the training is directed. 5. Students. a. Assurance that the student is or will be involved in work where chemical exposures are likely and that the student possesses the skills necessary to perform the work. b. A policy on the necessary medical clearance. 6. Ratios. 7. Proficiency assessment. If a written test is used, there should be a minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is used in combination with a skills demonstration, a minimum of 25 questions should be used. If a skills demonstration is used, the tasks chosen and the means to rate successful completion should be fully documented by the Training Director. The content of the written test or of the skill demonstration shall be relevant to the objectives of the course. The written test and skill demonstration should be updated as necessary to reflect changes in the curriculum and any update should be approved by the Training Director. The proficiency assessment methods, regardless of the approach or combination of approaches used, should be justified, document and approved by the Training Director. The proficiency of those taking the additional courses for supervisors should be evaluated and document by using proficiency assessment methods acceptable to the Training Director. These proficiency assessment methods must reflect the additional responsibilities borne by supervisory personnel in hazardous waste operations or emergency response. 8. Course certificate. a. Student's name. b. Course title. c. Course date. d. Statement that the student has successfully completed the course. e. Name and address of the training provider. f. An individual identification number for the certificate. g. List of the levels of personal protective equipment used by the student to complete the course. This documentation may include a certificate and an appropriate wallet-sized laminated card with a photograph of the student and the above information. When such course certificate cards are used, the individual identification number for the training certificate should be shown on the card. 9. Recordkeeping. 10. Program quality control. Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria Factors listed here are suggested criteria for determining the quality and appropriateness of employee health and safety training for hazardous waste operations and emergency response. A. Training Plan. Adequacy and appropriateness of the training program's curriculum development, instructor training, distribution of course materials, and direct student training should be considered, including 1. The duration of training, course content, and course schedules/agendas; 2. The different training requirements of the various target populations, as specified in the appropriate generic training curriculum; 3. The process for the development of curriculum, which includes appropriate technical input, outside review, evaluation, program pretesting. 4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction methods; 5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, progress, and performance during the training. B. Program management, Training Director, staff, and consultants. Adequacy and appropriateness of staff performance and delivering an effective training program should be considered, including 1. Demonstration of the training director's leadership in assuring quality of health and safety training. 2. Demonstration of the competency of the staff to meet the demands of delivering high quality hazardous waste employee health and safety training. 3. Organization charts establishing clear lines of authority. 4. Clearly defined staff duties including the relationship of the training staff to the overall program. 5. Evidence that the training organizational structure suits the needs of the training program. 6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the training methods used by the instructors. 7. Sufficiency of the time committed by the training director and staff to the training program. 8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to students. 9. Availability and commitment of the training program of adequate human and equipment resources in the areas of a. Health effects, b. Safety, c. Personal protective equipment (PPE), d. Operational procedures, e. Employee protection practices/procedures. 10. Appropriateness of management controls. 11. Adequacy of the organization and appropriate resources assigned to assure appropriate training. 12. In the case of multiple-site training programs, adequacy of satellite centers management. C. Training facilities and resources. Adequacy and appropriateness of the facilities and resources for supporting the training program should be considered, including, 1. Space and equipment to conduct the training. 2. Facilities for representative hands-on training. 3. In the case of multiple-site programs, equipment and facilities at the satellite centers. 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluations program to account for instructor performance. 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluation program to ensure appropriate course evaluation, feedback, updating, and corrective action. 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of disciplines and expertise being used within the quality control and evaluation program. 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the role of student evaluations to provide feedback for training program improvement. D. Quality control and evaluation. Adequacy and appropriateness of quality control and evaluation plans for training programs should be considered, including: 1. A balanced advisory committee and/or competent outside reviewers to give overall policy guidance; 2. Clear and adequate definition of the composition and active programmatic role of the advisory committee or outside reviewers. 3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of the advisory committee or outside reviewers' meetings or written communication. 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluations program to account for instructor performance. 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluation program to ensure appropriate course evaluation, feedback, updating, and corrective action. 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of disciplines and expertise being used within the quality control and evaluation program. 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the role of student evaluations to provide feedback for training program improvement. E. Students Adequacy and appropriateness of the program for accepting students should be considered, including 1. Assurance that the student already possess the necessary skills for their job, including necessary documentation. 2. Appropriateness of methods the program uses to ensure that recruits are capable of satisfactorily completing training. 3. Review and compliance with any medical clearance policy. F. Institutional Environment and Administrative Support. 1. Adequacy of the institutional commitment to the employee training program. 2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the administrative structure and administrative support. G. Summary of Evaluation Questions 1. Are the program objectives clearly stated? 2. Is the program accomplishing its objectives? 3. Are appropriate facilities and staff available? 4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, demonstration, and hands-on training? 5. Is the program providing quality employee health and safety training that fully meets the intent of regulatory requirements? 6. What are the program's main strengths? 7. What are the program's main weaknesses? 8. What is recommended to improve the program? 9. Are instructors instructing according to their training outlines? 10. Is the evaluation tool current and appropriate for the program content? 11. Is the course material current and relevant to the target group? Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines The following training curriculum guidelines are for those operations specifically identified in 29 CFR 1926.65 as requiring training. Issues such as qualifications of instructors, training certification, and similar criteria appropriate to all categories of operations addressed in 1926.65 have been covered in the preceding section and are not re-addressed in each of the generic guidelines. Basic core requirements for training programs that are addressed include 1. General Hazardous Waste Operations 2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage, and disposal facilities. 3. Emergency Response. A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and Site-specific Training Off-site training. Minimum training course content for hazardous waste operations, required by 29 CFR 1926.65(e), should include the following topics or procedures: a. Regulatory knowledge. (1) A review of 29 CFR 1926.65 and the core elements of an occupational safety and health program. (2) The content of a medical surveillance program as outlined in 29 CFR 1926.65(f). (3) The content of an effective site safety and health plan consistent with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.65(b)(4)(ii). (4) Emergency response plan and procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1926.65(l). (5) Adequate illumination. (6) Sanitation recommendation and equipment. (7) Review and explanation of OSHA's hazard-communication standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29 CFR 1910.147). (8) Review of other applicable standards including but not limited to those in the construction standards (29 CFR part 1926). (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers and employees under applicable OSHA and EPA laws. b. Technical knowledge. (2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards including but not limited to vapor pressure, boiling points, flash points, ph, other physical and chemical properties. (3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemicals. (4) General safety hazards such as but not limited to electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walking-working surface hazards, excavation hazards, and hazards associated with working in hot and cold temperature extremes. (5) Review and knowledge of confined space entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146. (6) Work practices to minimize employee risk from site hazards. (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equipment, and any new relevant safety technology or safety procedures. (8) Review and demonstration of competency with air sampling and monitoring equipment that may be used in a site monitoring program. (9) Container sampling procedures and safeguarding; general drum and container handling procedures including special requirement for laboratory waste packs, shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive wastes. (10) The elements of a spill control program. (11) Proper use and limitations of material handling equipment. (12) Procedures for safe and healthful preparation of containers for shipping and transport. (13) Methods of communication including those used while wearing respiratory protection. c. Technical skills. (2) Instruction in decontamination programs including personnel, equipment, and hardware; hands-on training including level A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate decontamination lines; field activities including the donning and doffing of protective equipment to a level commensurate with the employee's anticipated job function and responsibility and to the degree required by potential hazards. (3) Sources for additional hazard information; exercises using relevant manuals and hazard coding systems. d. Additional suggested items. (2) Attendance should be required at all training modules, with successful completion of exercises and a final written or oral examination with at least 50 questions. (3) A minimum of one-third of the program should be devoted to hands-on exercises. (4) A curriculum should be established for the 8-hour refresher training required by 29 CFR 1926.65(e)(8), with delivery of such courses directed toward those areas of previous training that need improvement or reemphasis. (5) A curriculum should be established for the required 8-hour training for supervisors. Demonstrated competency in the skills and knowledge provided in a 40-hour course should be a prerequisite for supervisor training. 2. Refresher training. (a) Review of and retraining on relevant topics covered in the 40-hour program, as appropriate, using reports by the students on their work experiences. (b) Update on developments with respect to material covered in the 40-hour course. (c) Review of changes to pertinent provisions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws. (d) Introduction of additional subject areas as appropriate. (e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE or decontamination equipment or procedures. Review of new developments in personal protective equipment. (f) Review of newly developed air and contaminant monitoring equipment. 3. On-site training. (1) The requirements of the hazard communication program including the location and availability of the written program, required lists of hazardous chemicals, and safety data sheets. (2) Activities and locations in their work area where hazardous substance may be present. (3) Methods and observations that may be used to detect the present or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual appearances, or other evidence (sight, sound or smell) of hazardous chemicals being released, and applicable alarms from monitoring devices that record chemical releases. (4) The physical and health hazards of substances known or potentially present in the work area. (5) The measures employees can take to help protect themselves from work-site hazards, including specific procedures the employer has implemented. (6) An explanation of the labeling system and safety data sheets and how employees can obtain and use appropriate hazard information. (7) The elements of the confined space program including special PPE, permits, monitoring requirements, communication procedures, emergency response, and applicable lock-out procedures. b. The employer should provide hazardous waste employees information and training and should provide a review and access to the site safety and plan as follows: (1) Names of personnel and alternate responsible for site safety and health. (2) Safety and health hazards present on the site. (3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limitations of personal protective equipment specific to the site. (4) Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from hazards. (5) Safe use of engineering controls and equipment available on site. (6) Safe decontamination procedures established to minimize employee contact with hazardous substances, including: (A) Employee decontamination, (B) Clothing decontamination, and (C) Equipment decontamination. (7) Elements of the site emergency response plan, including: (A) Pre-emergency planning. (B) Personnel roles and lines of authority and communication. (C) Emergency recognition and prevention. (D) Safe distances and places of refuge. (E) Site security and control. (F) Evacuation routes and procedures. (G) Decontamination procedures not covered by the site safety and health plan. (H) Emergency medical treatment and first aid. (I) Emergency equipment and procedures for handling emergency incidents. c. The employer should provide hazardous waste employees information and training on personal protective equipment used at the site, such as the following: (1) PPE to be used based upon known or anticipated site hazards. (2) PPE limitations of materials and construction; limitations during temperature extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate medical considerations; use and limitations of respirator equipment as well as documentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.134. (3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use. (4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. (5) PPE decontamination and disposal procedures. (6) PPE maintenance and storage. (7) Task duration as related to PPE limitations. d. The employer should instruct the employee about the site medical surveillance program relative to the particular site, including (1) Specific medical surveillance programs that have been adapted for the site. (2) Specific signs and symptoms related to exposure to hazardous materials on the site. (3) The frequency and extent of periodic medical examinations that will be used on the site. (4) Maintenance and availability of records. (5) Personnel to be contacted and procedures to be followed when signs and symptoms of exposures are recognized. e. The employees will review and discuss the site safety plan as part of the training program. The location of the site safety plan and all written programs should be discussed with employees including a discussion of the mechanisms for access, review, and references described. B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facilities. 1. As a minimum, the training course required in 29 CFR 1926.65 (p) should include the following topics: (a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of 29 CFR 1926.65 and the elements of the employer's occupational safety and health plan. (b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but not limited to, chemical, biological, and radiological exposures; fire and explosion hazards; thermal extremes; and physical hazards. (c) General safety hazards including those associated with electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out procedures, motor vehicle hazards and walking-working surface hazards. (d) Confined-space hazards and procedures. (e) Work practices to minimize employee risk from workplace hazards. (f) Emergency response plan and procedures including first aid meeting the requirements of paragraph (p)(8). (g) A review of procedures to minimize exposure to hazardous waste and various type of waste streams, including the materials handling program and spill containment program. (h) A review of hazard communication programs meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200. (i) A review of medical surveillance programs meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(3) including the recognition of signs and symptoms of overexposure to hazardous substance including known synergistic interactions. (j) A review of decontamination programs and procedures meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(4). (k) A review of an employer's requirements to implement a training program and its elements. (l) A review of the criteria and programs for proper selection and use of personal protective equipment, including respirators. (m) A review of the applicable appendices to 29 CFR 1926.65. (n) Principles of toxicology and biological monitoring as they pertain to occupational health. (o) Rights and responsibilities of employees and employers under applicable OSHA and EPA laws. (p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations of competency with equipment to illustrate the basic equipment principles that may be used during the performance of work duties, including the donning and doffing of PPE. (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard coding systems to include information contained in hazardous waste manifests. (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training. (s) Training in the job skills required for an employee's job function and responsibility before they are permitted to participate in or supervise field activities. 2. The individual employer should provide hazardous waste employees with information and training prior to an employee's initial assignment into a work area. The training and information should cover the following topics: (a) The Emergency response plan and procedures including first aid. (b) A review of the employer's hazardous waste handling procedures including the materials handling program and elements of the spill containment program, location of spill response kits or equipment, and the names of those trained to respond to releases. (c) The hazardous communication program meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200. (d) A review of the employer's medical surveillance program including the recognition of signs and symptoms of exposure to relevant hazardous substance including known synergistic interactions. (e) A review of the employer's decontamination program and procedures. (f) An review of the employer's training program and the parties responsible for that program. (g) A review of the employer's personal protective equipment program including the proper selection and use of PPE based upon specific site hazards. (h) All relevant site-specific procedures addressing potential safety and health hazards. This may include, as appropriate, biological and radiological exposures, fire and explosion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical hazards such as electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards. (i) Safe use engineering controls and equipment on site. (j) Names of personnel and alternates responsible for safety and health. C. Emergency response training. Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR 1926.65(q) are directed toward private sector emergency responders. Therefore, the guidelines provided in this portion of the appendix are directed toward that employee population. However, they also impact indirectly through State OSHA or USEPA regulations some public sector emergency responders. Therefore, the guidelines provided in this portion of the appendix may be applied to both employee populations. States with OSHA state plans must cover their employees with regulations at least as effective as the Federal OSHA standards. Public employees in states without approved state OSHA programs covering hazardous waste operations and emergency response are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR 311, a regulation virtually identical to § 1926.65. Since this is a non-mandatory appendix and therefore not an enforceable standard, OSHA recommends that those employers, employees or volunteers in public sector emergency response organizations outside Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the following criteria in developing their own training programs. A unified approach to training at the community level between emergency response organizations covered by Federal OSHA and those not covered directly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an effective community response to the release or potential release of hazardous substances in the community. a. General considerations. Emergency response organizations are required to consider the topics listed in § 1926.65(q)(6). Emergency response organizations may use some or all of the following topics to supplement those mandatory topics when developing their response training programs. Many of the topics would require an interaction between the response provider and the individuals responsible for the site where the response would be expected. (1) Hazard recognition, including: (A) Nature of hazardous substances present, (B) Practical applications of hazard recognition, including presentations on biology, chemistry, and physics. (2) Principles of toxicology, biological monitoring, and risk assessment. (3) Safe work practices and general site safety. (4) Engineering controls and hazardous waste operations. (5) Site safety plans and standard operating procedures. (6) Decontamination procedures and practices. (7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and self-rescue. (8) Safe use of field equipment. (9) Storage, handling, use and transportation of hazardous substances. (10) Use, care, and limitations of personal protective equipment. (11) Safe sampling techniques. (12) Rights and responsibilities of employees under OSHA and other related laws concerning right-to-know, safety and health, compensations and liability. (13) Medical monitoring requirements. (14) Community relations. b. Suggested criteria for specific courses. (1) First responder awareness level. (A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the applicable skills of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident to determine both the hazardous substances present and the basic hazard and response information for each hazardous substance present. (D) Review of procedures for implementing actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the organization's standard operating procedures, and the current edition of DOT's ERG including emergency notification procedures and follow-up communications. (E) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards. (F) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the First Responder at the Awareness Level covered in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Materials Incidents. (2) First responder operations level. (A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the applicable skills of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident to determine the hazardous substances present, the likely behavior of the hazardous substance and its container, the types of hazardous substance transportation containers and vehicles, the types and selection of the appropriate defensive strategy for containing the release. (D) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the organization's standard operating procedures, and the current edition of DOT's ERG including extended emergency notification procedures and follow-up communications. (E) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and use of personal protective equipment. (F) Review of the principles and practice of personnel and equipment decontamination. (G) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards. (H) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the First Responder at the Operations Level covered in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Materials Incidents. (3) Hazardous materials technician. (A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the applicable skills of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). (B) Hands-on experience with written and electronic information relative to response decision making including but not limited to the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident to determine the hazardous substances present, their physical and chemical properties, the likely behavior of the hazardous substance and its container, the types of hazardous substance transportation containers and vehicles involved in the release, the appropriate strategy for approaching release sites and containing the release. (D) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the organization's standard operating procedures, and the current edition of DOT's ERG including extended emergency notification procedures and follow-up communications. (E) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and use of personal protective equipment. (F) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure zones, proper decontamination and medical surveillance stations and procedures. (G) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards. (H) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the Hazardous Materials Technician covered in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Materials Incidents. (4) Hazardous materials specialist. (A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the applicable skills of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and use of written and electronic information relative to response decision making including but not limited to the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident to determine the hazardous substances present, their physical and chemical properties, and the likely behavior of the hazardous substance and its container, vessel, or vehicle. (D) Review of the principles and practices for identification of the types of hazardous substance transportation containers, vessels and vehicles involved in the release; selecting and using the various types of equipment available for plugging or patching transportation containers, vessels or vehicles; organizing and directing the use of multiple teams of hazardous material technicians and selecting the appropriate strategy for approaching release sites and containing or stopping the release. (E) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the organization's standard operating procedures, including knowledge of the available public and private response resources, establishment of an incident command post, direction of hazardous material technician teams, and extended emergency notification procedures and follow-up communications. (F) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and use of personal protective equipment. (G) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure zones and proper decontamination, monitoring and medical surveillance stations and procedures. (H) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards. (I) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the Off-site Specialist Employee covered in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Materials Incidents. (5) Incident commander. Therefore, any emergency responder expected to perform as an incident commander should be trained to fulfill the obligations of the position at the level of response they will be providing including the following: (A) Ability to analyze a hazardous substance incident to determine the magnitude of the response problem. (B) Ability to plan and implement an appropriate response plan within the capabilities of available personnel and equipment. (C) Ability to implement a response to favorably change the outcome of the incident in a manner consistent with the local emergency response plan and the organization's standard operating procedures. (D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the emergency response to ensure that the response objectives are being met safely, effectively, and efficiently. (E) Ability to adjust the response plan to the conditions of the response and to notify higher levels of response when required by the changes to the response plan. [58 FR 35129, June 30, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 43275, Aug. 22, 1994: 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9315, Feb. 8, 2013; 85 FR 8736, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1926.66 Criteria for design and construction of spray booths. (a) Definitions applicable to this section Aerated solid powders. (2) Spraying area. (3) Spray booth. (4) Waterwash spray booth. (5) Dry spray booth. (i) Distribution or baffle plates to promote an even flow of air through the booth or cause the deposit of overspray before it enters the exhaust duct; or (ii) Overspray dry filters to minimize dusts; or (iii) Overspray dry filters to minimize dusts or residues entering exhaust ducts; or (iv) Overspray dry filter rolls designed to minimize dusts or residues entering exhaust ducts; or (v) Where dry powders are being sprayed, with powder collection systems so arranged in the exhaust to capture oversprayed material. (6) Fluidized bed. (7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. (8) Approved. (9) Listed. (b) Spray booths Construction. (2) Interiors. (3) Floors. (4) Distribution or baffle plates. (5) Dry type overspray collectors—(exhaust air filters). (i) The spraying operations except electrostatic spraying operations shall be so designed, installed and maintained that the average air velocity over the open face of the booth (or booth cross section during spraying operations) shall be not less than 100 linear feet per minute. Electrostatic spraying operations may be conducted with an air velocity over the open face of the booth of not less than 60 linear feet per minute, or more, depending on the volume of the finishing material being applied and its flammability and explosion characteristics. Visible gauges or audible alarm or pressure activated devices shall be installed to indicate or insure that the required air velocity is maintained. Filter rolls shall be inspected to insure proper replacement of filter media. (ii) All discarded filter pads and filter rolls shall be immediately removed to a safe, well-detached location or placed in a water-filled metal container and disposed of at the close of the day's operation unless maintained completely in water. (iii) The location of filters in a spray booth shall be so as to not reduce the effective booth enclosure of the articles being sprayed. (iv) Space within the spray booth on the downstream and upstream sides of filters shall be protected with approved automatic sprinklers. (v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be used when applying a spray material known to be highly susceptible to spontaneous heating and ignition. (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall be noncombustible or of a type having a combustibility not in excess of class 2 filters as listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls shall not be alternately used for different types of coating materials, where the combination of materials may be conducive to spontaneous ignition. (6) Frontal area. 1/2 (7) Conveyors. (8) Separation of operations. (9) Cleaning. (10) Illumination. (c) Electrical and other sources of ignition Conformance. (i) Electrostatic apparatus shall conform to the requirements of paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section; (ii) Drying, curing, and fusion apparatus shall conform to the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section; (iii) [Reserved] (iv) Powder coating equipment shall conform to the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section. (2) Minimum separation. (3) Hot surfaces. (4) Wiring conformance. (5) Combustible residues, areas. (6) Wiring type approved. (7) Lamps. (8) Portable lamps. (9) Grounding. (d) Ventilation Conformance. (2) General. (3) Independent exhaust. (4) Fan-rotating element. (5) Electric motors. (6) Belts. (7) Exhaust ducts. (i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected against mechanical damage and have a clearance from unprotected combustible construction or other combustible material of not less than 18 inches (45.72 cm). (ii) If combustible construction is provided with the following protection applied to all surfaces within 18 inches (45.72 cm), clearances may be reduced to the distances indicated: ( a 12 inches (30.48 cm). ( b 9 inches (22.86 cm). ( c 3 inches (7.62 cm). ( d (8) Discharge clearance. (9) Air exhaust. (10) Access doors. (11) Room intakes. (12) Drying spaces. (e) Fixed electrostatic apparatus Conformance. (2) Type approval. (3) Location. (4) Support. (5) Insulators, grounding. (6) Safe distance. (7) Conveyors required. (8) Prohibition. (9) Fail-safe controls. (i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or failure of ventilating equipment from any cause. (ii) Stoppage of the conveyor carrying goods through the high voltage field. (iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an imminent ground at any point on the high voltage system. (iv) Reduction of clearance below that specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this section. (10) Guarding. (11) Ventilation. (12) Fire protection. (f) Electrostatic hand spraying equipment Application. (2) Conformance. (3) Equipment approval and specifications. (4) Electrical support equipment. (5) Spray gun ground. (6) Grounding-general. (7) Maintenance of grounds. (8) Interlocks. (9) Ventilation. (g) Drying, curing, or fusion apparatus Conformance. (2) Alternate use prohibited. (3) Adjacent system interlocked. (i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying space before the heating system can be started; (ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at any source of ignition; (iii) Automatically shut down the heating system in the event of failure of the ventilating system. (4) Alternate use permitted. (i) Interior (especially floors) of spray enclosures shall be kept free of overspray deposits. (ii) During spray operations, the drying apparatus and electrical connections and wiring thereto shall not be located within spray enclosure nor in any other location where spray residues may be deposited thereon. (iii) The spraying apparatus, the drying apparatus, and the ventilating system of the spray enclosure shall be equipped with suitable interlocks so arranged that: ( a ( b ( c (iv) All electrical wiring and equipment of the drying apparatus shall conform with the applicable sections of subpart S of this part. Only equipment of a type approved for Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations shall be located within 18 inches (45.72 cm) of floor level. All metallic parts of the drying apparatus shall be properly electrically bonded and grounded. (v) The drying apparatus shall contain a prominently located, permanently attached warning sign indicating that ventilation should be maintained during the drying period and that spraying should not be conducted in the vicinity that spray will deposit on apparatus. [58 FR 35149, June 30, 1993] Subpart E—Personal Protective and Life Saving Equipment Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; § 1926.95 Criteria for personal protective equipment. (a) Application. (b) Employee-owned equipment. (c) Design and selection. (1) Is of safe design and construction for the work to be performed; and (2) Is selected to ensure that it properly fits each affected employee. (d) Payment for protective equipment. (2) The employer is not required to pay for non-specialty safety-toe protective footwear (including steel-toe shoes or steel-toe boots) and non-specialty prescription safety eyewear, provided that the employer permits such items to be worn off the job-site. (3) When the employer provides metatarsal guards and allows the employee, at his or her request, to use shoes or boots with built-in metatarsal protection, the employer is not required to reimburse the employee for the shoes or boots. (4) The employer is not required to pay for: (i) Everyday clothing, such as long-sleeve shirts, long pants, street shoes, and normal work boots; or (ii) Ordinary clothing, skin creams, or other items, used solely for protection from weather, such as winter coats, jackets, gloves, parkas, rubber boots, hats, raincoats, ordinary sunglasses, and sunscreen. (5) The employer must pay for replacement PPE, except when the employee has lost or intentionally damaged the PPE. (6) Where an employee provides adequate protective equipment he or she owns pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section, the employer may allow the employee to use it and is not required to reimburse the employee for that equipment. The employer shall not require an employee to provide or pay for his or her own PPE, unless the PPE is excepted by paragraphs (d)(2) through (d)(5) of this section. (7) This section shall become effective on February 13, 2008. Employers must implement the PPE payment requirements no later than May 15, 2008. Note to § 1926.95( d When the provisions of another OSHA standard specify whether or not the employer must pay for specific equipment, the payment provisions of that standard shall prevail. [58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993, as amended at 72 FR 64429, Nov. 15, 2007; 89 FR 100346, Dec. 12, 2024] § 1926.96 Occupational foot protection. Safety-toe footwear for employees shall meet the requirements and specifications in American National Standard for Men's Safety-Toe Footwear, Z41.1-1967. [58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993] § 1926.97 Electrical protective equipment. (a) Design requirements for specific types of electrical protective equipment. (1) Manufacture and marking of rubber insulating equipment. (ii) Each item shall be clearly marked as follows: (A) Class 00 equipment shall be marked Class 00. (B) Class 0 equipment shall be marked Class 0. (C) Class 1 equipment shall be marked Class 1. (D) Class 2 equipment shall be marked Class 2. (E) Class 3 equipment shall be marked Class 3. (F) Class 4 equipment shall be marked Class 4. (G) Nonozone-resistant equipment shall be marked Type I. (H) Ozone-resistant equipment shall be marked Type II. (I) Other relevant markings, such as the manufacturer's identification and the size of the equipment, may also be provided. (iii) Markings shall be nonconducting and shall be applied in such a manner as not to impair the insulating qualities of the equipment. (iv) Markings on gloves shall be confined to the cuff portion of the glove. (2) Electrical requirements. (A) The proof test shall reliably indicate that the equipment can withstand the voltage involved. (B) The test voltage shall be applied continuously for 3 minutes for equipment other than matting and shall be applied continuously for 1 minute for matting. (C) Gloves shall also be capable of separately withstanding the ac proof-test voltage specified in Table E-1 after a 16-hour water soak. (See the note following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) (ii) When the ac proof test is used on gloves, the 60-hertz proof-test current may not exceed the values specified in Table E-1 at any time during the test period. (A) If the ac proof test is made at a frequency other than 60 hertz, the permissible proof-test current shall be computed from the direct ratio of the frequencies. (B) For the test, gloves (right side out) shall be filled with tap water and immersed in water to a depth that is in accordance with Table E-3. Water shall be added to or removed from the glove, as necessary, so that the water level is the same inside and outside the glove. (C) After the 16-hour water soak specified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C) of this section, the 60-hertz proof-test current may not exceed the values given in Table E-1 by more than 2 milliamperes. (iii) Equipment that has been subjected to a minimum breakdown voltage test may not be used for electrical protection. (See the note following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) (iv) Material used for Type II insulating equipment shall be capable of withstanding an ozone test, with no visible effects. The ozone test shall reliably indicate that the material will resist ozone exposure in actual use. Any visible signs of ozone deterioration of the material, such as checking, cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evidence of failure to meet the requirements for ozone-resistant material. (See the note following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.) (3) Workmanship and finish. (ii) Surface irregularities that may be present on all rubber goods (because of imperfections on forms or molds or because of inherent difficulties in the manufacturing process) and that may appear as indentations, protuberances, or imbedded foreign material are acceptable under the following conditions: (A) The indentation or protuberance blends into a smooth slope when the material is stretched. (B) Foreign material remains in place when the insulating material is folded and stretches with the insulating material surrounding it. Note to paragraph ( a Rubber insulating equipment meeting the following national consensus standards is deemed to be in compliance with the performance requirements of paragraph (a) of this section: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D120-09, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves. ASTM D178-01 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting. ASTM D1048-12, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets. ASTM D1049-98 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers. ASTM D1050-05 (2011), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. ASTM D1051-08, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves. The preceding standards also contain specifications for conducting the various tests required in paragraph (a) of this section. For example, the ac and dc proof tests, the breakdown test, the water-soak procedure, and the ozone test mentioned in this paragraph are described in detail in these ASTM standards. ASTM F1236-96 (2012), Standard Guide for Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rubber Products, ASTM F819-10, Standard Terminology Relating to Electrical Protective Equipment for Workers, (b) Design requirements for other types of electrical protective equipment. (1) Voltage withstand. Note to paragraph ( b These voltages include transient overvoltages, such as switching surges, as well as nominal line voltage. See appendix B to subpart V of this part for a discussion of transient overvoltages on electric power transmission and distribution systems. See IEEE Std 516-2009, IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines, (2) Equipment current. (ii) When insulating equipment is tested in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section, the equipment current may not exceed 1 microampere per kilovolt of phase-to-phase applied voltage. Note 1 to paragraph ( b This paragraph applies to equipment that provides primary insulation of employees from energized parts. It does not apply to equipment used for secondary insulation or equipment used for brush contact only. Note 2 to paragraph ( b For ac excitation, this current consists of three components: Capacitive current because of the dielectric properties of the insulating material itself, conduction current through the volume of the insulating equipment, and leakage current along the surface of the tool or equipment. The conduction current is normally negligible. For clean, dry insulating equipment, the leakage current is small, and the capacitive current predominates. Note to paragraph ( b Plastic guard equipment is deemed to conform to the performance requirements of paragraph (b) of this section if it meets, and is used in accordance with, ASTM F712-06 (2011), Standard Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment for Protection of Workers. (c) In-service care and use of electrical protective equipment General. (2) Specific requirements. (i) Maximum use voltages shall conform to those listed in Table E-4. (ii) Insulating equipment shall be inspected for damage before each day's use and immediately following any incident that can reasonably be suspected of causing damage. Insulating gloves shall be given an air test, along with the inspection. Note to paragraph ( c ii ASTM F1236-96 (2012), Standard Guide for Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rubber Products, (iii) Insulating equipment with any of the following defects may not be used: (A) A hole, tear, puncture, or cut; (B) Ozone cutting or ozone checking (that is, a series of interlacing cracks produced by ozone on rubber under mechanical stress); (C) An embedded foreign object; (D) Any of the following texture changes: Swelling, softening, hardening, or becoming sticky or inelastic. (E) Any other defect that damages the insulating properties. (iv) Insulating equipment found to have other defects that might affect its insulating properties shall be removed from service and returned for testing under paragraphs (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(ix) of this section. (v) Insulating equipment shall be cleaned as needed to remove foreign substances. (vi) Insulating equipment shall be stored in such a location and in such a manner as to protect it from light, temperature extremes, excessive humidity, ozone, and other damaging substances and conditions. (vii) Protector gloves shall be worn over insulating gloves, except as follows: (A) Protector gloves need not be used with Class 0 gloves, under limited-use conditions, when small equipment and parts manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity. Note to paragraph ( c vii Persons inspecting rubber insulating gloves used under these conditions need to take extra care in visually examining them. Employees using rubber insulating gloves under these conditions need to take extra care to avoid handling sharp objects. (B) If the voltage does not exceed 250 volts, ac, or 375 volts, dc, protector gloves need not be used with Class 00 gloves, under limited-use conditions, when small equipment and parts manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity. Note to paragraph ( c vii Persons inspecting rubber insulating gloves used under these conditions need to take extra care in visually examining them. Employees using rubber insulating gloves under these conditions need to take extra care to avoid handling sharp objects. (C) Any other class of glove may be used without protector gloves, under limited-use conditions, when small equipment and parts manipulation necessitate unusually high finger dexterity but only if the employer can demonstrate that the possibility of physical damage to the gloves is small and if the class of glove is one class higher than that required for the voltage involved. (D) Insulating gloves that have been used without protector gloves may not be reused until they have been tested under the provisions of paragraphs (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(ix) of this section. (viii) Electrical protective equipment shall be subjected to periodic electrical tests. Test voltages and the maximum intervals between tests shall be in accordance with Table E-4 and Table E-5. (ix) The test method used under paragraphs (c)(2)(viii) and (c)(2)(xi) of this section shall reliably indicate whether the insulating equipment can withstand the voltages involved. Note to paragraph ( c ix Standard electrical test methods considered as meeting this paragraph are given in the following national consensus standards: ASTM D120-09, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves. ASTM D178-01 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting. ASTM D1048-12, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets. ASTM D1049-98 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers. ASTM D1050-05 (2011), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. ASTM D1051-08, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves. ASTM F478-09, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers. ASTM F479-06 (2011), Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets. ASTM F496-08, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves. (x) Insulating equipment failing to pass inspections or electrical tests may not be used by employees, except as follows: (A) Rubber insulating line hose may be used in shorter lengths with the defective portion cut off. (B) Rubber insulating blankets may be salvaged by severing the defective area from the undamaged portion of the blanket. The resulting undamaged area may not be smaller than 560 millimeters by 560 millimeters (22 inches by 22 inches) for Class 1, 2, 3, and 4 blankets. (C) Rubber insulating blankets may be repaired using a compatible patch that results in physical and electrical properties equal to those of the blanket. (D) Rubber insulating gloves and sleeves with minor physical defects, such as small cuts, tears, or punctures, may be repaired by the application of a compatible patch. Also, rubber insulating gloves and sleeves with minor surface blemishes may be repaired with a compatible liquid compound. The repaired area shall have electrical and physical properties equal to those of the surrounding material. Repairs to gloves are permitted only in the area between the wrist and the reinforced edge of the opening. (xi) Repaired insulating equipment shall be retested before it may be used by employees. (xii) The employer shall certify that equipment has been tested in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (c)(2)(iv), (c)(2)(vii)(D), (c)(2)(viii), (c)(2)(ix), and (c)(2)(xi) of this section. The certification shall identify the equipment that passed the test and the date it was tested and shall be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary for Occupational Safety and Health and to employees or their authorized representatives. Note to paragraph ( c xii Marking equipment with, and entering onto logs, the results of the tests and the dates of testing are two acceptable means of meeting the certification requirement. Table E-1—AC Proof-Test Requirements Class of equipment Proof-test Maximum proof-test current, mA 280-mm 360-mm 410-mm 460-mm 00 2,500 8 12 0 5,000 8 12 14 16 1 10,000 14 16 18 2 20,000 16 18 20 3 30,000 18 20 22 4 40,000 22 24 Table E-2—DC Proof-Test Requirements Class of equipment Proof-test voltage 00 10,000 0 20,000 1 40,000 2 50,000 3 60,000 4 70,000 Note: Table E-3—Glove Tests—Water Level 1 2 Class of glove AC proof test DC proof test mm in mm in 00 38 1.5 38 1.5 0 38 1.5 38 1.5 1 38 1.5 51 2.0 2 64 2.5 76 3.0 3 89 3.5 102 4.0 4 127 5.0 153 6.0 1 2 Table E-4—Rubber Insulating Equipment, Voltage Requirements Class of equipment Maximum use voltage 1 Retest 2 Retest 2 00 500 2,500 10,000 0 1,000 5,000 20,000 1 7,500 10,000 40,000 2 17,000 20,000 50,000 3 26,500 30,000 60,000 4 36,000 40,000 70,000 1 (1) There is no multiphase exposure in a system area and the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potential, or (2) The electric equipment and devices are insulated or isolated or both so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded wye circuit is removed. 2 Table E-5—Rubber Insulating Equipment, Test Intervals Type of equipment When to test Rubber insulating line hose Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair. Rubber insulating covers Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair. Rubber insulating blankets Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter; 1 Rubber insulating gloves Before first issue and every 6 months thereafter; 1 Rubber insulating sleeves Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter; 1 1 [79 FR 20693, Apr. 11, 2014] § 1926.98 [Reserved] § 1926.100 Head protection. (a) Employees working in areas where there is a possible danger of head injury from impact, or from falling or flying objects, or from electrical shock and burns, shall be protected by protective helmets. (b) Criteria for head protection. (i) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2009, “American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection,” incorporated by reference in § 1926.6; (ii) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2003, “American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection,” incorporated by reference in § 1926.6; or (iii) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-1997, “American National Standard for Personnel Protection—Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers—Requirements,” incorporated by reference in § 1926.6. (2) The employer must ensure that the head protection provided for each employee exposed to high-voltage electric shock and burns also meets the specifications contained in Section 9.7 (“Electrical Insulation”) of any of the consensus standards identified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. (3) OSHA will deem any head protection device that the employer demonstrates is at least as effective as a head protection device constructed in accordance with one of the consensus standards identified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section to be in compliance with the requirements of this section. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR 37600, June 22, 2012; 77 FR 42988, July 23, 2012] § 1926.101 Hearing protection. (a) Wherever it is not feasible to reduce the noise levels or duration of exposures to those specified in Table D-2, Permissible Noise Exposures, in § 1926.52, ear protective devices shall be provided and used. (b) Ear protective devices inserted in the ear shall be fitted or determined individually by competent persons. (c) Plain cotton is not an acceptable protective device. § 1926.102 Eye and face protection. (a) General. (2) The employer shall ensure that each affected employee uses eye protection that provides side protection when there is a hazard from flying objects. Detachable side protectors ( e.g. (3) The employer shall ensure that each affected employee who wears prescription lenses while engaged in operations that involve eye hazards wears eye protection that incorporates the prescription in its design, or wears eye protection that can be worn over the prescription lenses without disturbing the proper position of the prescription lenses or the protective lenses. (4) Eye and face PPE shall be distinctly marked to facilitate identification of the manufacturer. (5) Protectors shall meet the following minimum requirements: (i) They shall provide adequate protection against the particular hazards for which they are designed. (ii) They shall be reasonably comfortable when worn under the designated conditions. (iii) They shall fit snugly and shall not unduly interfere with the movements of the wearer. (iv) They shall be durable. (v) They shall be capable of being disinfected. (vi) They shall be easily cleanable. (b) Criteria for protective eye and face protection. (i) ANSI/ISEA Z87.1-2010, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, incorporated by reference in § 1926.6; (ii) ANSI Z87.1-2003, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, incorporated by reference in § 1926.6; or (iii) ANSI Z87.1-1989 (R-1998), Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection, incorporated by reference in § 1926.6; (2) Protective eye and face protection devices that the employer demonstrates are at least as effective as protective eye and face protection devices that are constructed in accordance with one of the above consensus standards will be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of this section. (c) Protection against radiant energy Selection of shade numbers for welding filter. Table E-1—Filter Lens Shade Numbers for Protection Against Radiant Energy Welding operation Shade number Shielded metal-arc welding 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch diameter electrodes 10 Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous) 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch diameter electrodes 11 Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch diameter electrodes 12 Shielded metal-arc welding 3/16-, 7/32-, 1/4-inch diameter electrodes 12 5/16-, 3/8-inch diameter electrodes 14 Atomic hydrogen welding 10-14 Carbon-arc welding 14 Soldering 2 Torch brazing 3 or 4 Light cutting, up to 1 inch 3 or 4 Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches 4 or 5 Heavy cutting, over 6 inches 5 or 6 Gas welding (light), up to 1/8-inch 4 or 5 Gas welding (medium), 1/8-inch to 1/2-inch 5 or 6 Gas welding (heavy), over 1/2-inch 6 or 8 (2) Laser protection. Table E-2—Selecting Laser Safety Glass Intensity, CW maximum power density (watts/cm 2 Attenuation Optical density (O.D.) Attenuation factor 10 −2 5 10 5 10 −1 6 10 6 1.0 7 10 7 10.0 8 10 8 (ii) All protective goggles shall bear a label identifying the following data: (A) The laser wavelengths for which use is intended; (B) The optical density of those wavelengths; (C) The visible light transmission. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35160, June 30, 1993; 81 FR 16092, Mar. 25, 2016] § 1926.103 Respiratory protection. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1910.134 of this chapter. [63 FR 1297; Jan. 8, 1998] § 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and lanyards. (a) Lifelines, safety belts, and lanyards shall be used only for employee safeguarding. Any lifeline, safety belt, or lanyard actually subjected to in-service loading, as distinguished from static load testing, shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee safeguarding. (b) Lifelines shall be secured above the point of operation to an anchorage or structural member capable of supporting a minimum dead weight of 5,400 pounds. (c) Lifelines used on rock-scaling operations, or in areas where the lifeline may be subjected to cutting or abrasion, shall be a minimum of 7/8 3/4 (d) Safety belt lanyard shall be a minimum of 1/2 (e) All safety belt and lanyard hardware shall be drop forged or pressed steel, cadmium plated in accordance with type 1, Class B plating specified in Federal Specification QQ-P-416. Surface shall be smooth and free of sharp edges. (f) All safety belt and lanyard hardware, except rivets, shall be capable of withstanding a tensile loading of 4,000 pounds without cracking, breaking, or taking a permanent deformation. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 84 FR 21577, May 14, 2019] § 1926.105 Safety nets. (a) Safety nets shall be provided when workplaces are more than 25 feet above the ground or water surface, or other surfaces where the use of ladders, scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary floors, safety lines, or safety belts is impractical. (b) Where safety net protection is required by this part, operations shall not be undertaken until the net is in place and has been tested. (c)(1) Nets shall extend 8 feet beyond the edge of the work surface where employees are exposed and shall be installed as close under the work surface as practical but in no case more than 25 feet below such work surface. Nets shall be hung with sufficient clearance to prevent user's contact with the surfaces or structures below. Such clearances shall be determined by impact load testing. (2) It is intended that only one level of nets be required for bridge construction. (d) The mesh size of nets shall not exceed 6 inches by 6 inches. All new nets shall meet accepted performance standards of 17,500 foot-pounds minimum impact resistance as determined and certified by the manufacturers, and shall bear a label of proof test. Edge ropes shall provide a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. (e) Forged steel safety hooks or shackles shall be used to fasten the net to its supports. (f) Connections between net panels shall develop the full strength of the net. § 1926.106 Working over or near water. (a) Employees working over or near water, where the danger of drowning exists, shall be provided with U.S. Coast Guard-approved life jacket or buoyant work vests. (b) Prior to and after each use, the buoyant work vests or life preservers shall be inspected for defects which would alter their strength or buoyancy. Defective units shall not be used. (c) Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of line shall be provided and readily available for emergency rescue operations. Distance between ring buoys shall not exceed 200 feet. (d) At least one lifesaving skiff shall be immediately available at locations where employees are working over or adjacent to water. § 1926.107 Definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Contaminant (b) Lanyard (c) Lifeline (d) O.D. (e) Radiant energy (f) Safety belt [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979] Subpart F—Fire Protection and Prevention Authority: Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3704); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736),1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (62 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 650008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. § 1926.150 Fire protection. (a) General requirements. (2) Access to all available firefighting equipment shall be maintained at all times. (3) All firefighting equipment, provided by the employer, shall be conspicuously located. (4) All firefighting equipment shall be periodically inspected and maintained in operating condition. Defective equipment shall be immediately replaced. (5) As warranted by the project, the employer shall provide a trained and equipped firefighting organization (Fire Brigade) to assure adequate protection to life. (b) Water supply. (2) Where underground water mains are to be provided, they shall be installed, completed, and made available for use as soon as practicable. (c) Portable firefighting equipment Fire extinguishers and small hose lines. (ii) One 55-gallon open drum of water with two fire pails may be substituted for a fire extinguisher having a 2A rating. (iii) A 1/2 (iv) One or more fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A, shall be provided on each floor. In multistory buildings, at least one fire extinguisher shall be located adjacent to stairway. (v) Extinguishers and water drums, subject to freezing, shall be protected from freezing. (vi) A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 10B, shall be provided within 50 feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of flammable or combustible liquids or 5 pounds of flammable gas are being used on the jobsite. This requirement does not apply to the integral fuel tanks of motor vehicles. (vii) Carbon tetrachloride and other toxic vaporizing liquid fire extinguishers are prohibited. (viii) Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected periodically and maintained in accordance with Maintenance and Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers, NFPA No. 10A-1970. (ix) Fire extinguishers which have been listed or approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, shall be used to meet the requirements of this subpart. (x) Table F-1 may be used as a guide for selecting the appropriate portable fire extinguishers. (2) Fire hose and connections. 1/2 (ii) If fire hose connections are not compatible with local firefighting equipment, the contractor shall provide adapters, or equivalent, to permit connections. (iii) During demolition involving combustible materials, charged hose lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank trucks with pumps, or equivalent, shall be made available. (d) Fixed firefighting equipment Sprinkler protection. (ii) During demolition or alterations, existing automatic sprinkler installations shall be retained in service as long as reasonable. The operation of sprinkler control valves shall be permitted only by properly authorized persons. Modification of sprinkler systems to permit alterations or additional demolition should be expedited so that the automatic protection may be returned to service as quickly as possible. Sprinkler control valves shall be checked daily at close of work to ascertain that the protection is in service. (2) Standpipes. (e) Fire alarm devices. (2) The alarm code and reporting instructions shall be conspicuously posted at phones and at employee entrances. (f) Fire cutoffs. (2) Fire cutoffs shall be retained in buildings undergoing alterations or demolition until operations necessitate their removal. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.151 Fire prevention. (a) Ignition hazards. (2) Internal combustion engine powered equipment shall be so located that the exhausts are well away from combustible materials. When the exhausts are piped to outside the building under construction, a clearance of at least 6 inches shall be maintained between such piping and combustible material. (3) Smoking shall be prohibited at or in the vicinity of operations which constitute a fire hazard, and shall be conspicuously posted: “No Smoking or Open Flame.” (4) Portable battery powered lighting equipment, used in connection with the storage, handling, or use of flammable gases or liquids, shall be of the type approved for the hazardous locations. (5) The nozzle of air, inert gas, and steam lines or hoses, when used in the cleaning or ventilation of tanks and vessels that contain hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, shall be bonded to the tank or vessel shell. Bonding devices shall not be attached or detached in hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors. (b) Temporary buildings. (2) Temporary buildings, when located within another building or structure, shall be of either noncombustible construction or of combustible construction having a fire resistance of not less than 1 hour. (3) Temporary buildings, located other than inside another building and not used for the storage, handling, or use of flammable or combustible liquids, flammable gases, explosives, or blasting agents, or similar hazardous occupancies, shall be located at a distance of not less than 10 feet from another building or structure. Groups of temporary buildings, not exceeding 2,000 square feet in aggregate, shall, for the purposes of this part, be considered a single temporary building. (c) Open yard storage. (2) Driveways between and around combustible storage piles shall be at least 15 feet wide and maintained free from accumulation of rubbish, equipment, or other articles or materials. Driveways shall be so spaced that a maximum grid system unit of 50 feet by 150 feet is produced. (3) The entire storage site shall be kept free from accumulation of unnecessary combustible materials. Weeds and grass shall be kept down and a regular procedure provided for the periodic cleanup of the entire area. (4) When there is a danger of an underground fire, that land shall not be used for combustible or flammable storage. (5) Method of piling shall be solid wherever possible and in orderly and regular piles. No combustible material shall be stored outdoors within 10 feet of a building or structure. (6) Portable fire extinguishing equipment, suitable for the fire hazard involved, shall be provided at convenient, conspicuously accessible locations in the yard area. Portable fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A, shall be placed so that maximum travel distance to the nearest unit shall not exceed 100 feet. (d) Indoor storage. (2) All materials shall be stored, handled, and piled with due regard to their fire characteristics. (3) Noncompatible materials, which may create a fire hazard, shall be segregated by a barrier having a fire resistance of at least 1 hour. (4) Material shall be piled to minimize the spread of fire internally and to permit convenient access for firefighting. Stable piling shall be maintained at all times. Aisle space shall be maintained to safely accommodate the widest vehicle that may be used within the building for firefighting purposes. (5) Clearance of at least 36 inches shall be maintained between the top level of the stored material and the sprinkler deflectors. (6) Clearance shall be maintained around lights and heating units to prevent ignition of combustible materials. (7) A clearance of 24 inches shall be maintained around the path of travel of fire doors unless a barricade is provided, in which case no clearance is needed. Material shall not be stored within 36 inches of a fire door opening. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986] § 1926.152 Flammable liquids. (a) General requirements. (2) Flammable liquids shall not be stored in areas used for exits, stairways, or normally used for the safe passage of people. (b) Indoor storage of flammable liquids. (2) Quantities of flammable liquid in excess of 25 gallons shall be stored in an acceptable or approved cabinet meeting the following requirements: (i) Acceptable wooden storage cabinets shall be constructed in the following manner, or equivalent: The bottom, sides, and top shall be constructed of an exterior grade of plywood at least 1 inch in thickness, which shall not break down or delaminate under standard fire test conditions. All joints shall be rabbeted and shall be fastened in two directions with flathead wood screws. When more than one door is used, there shall be a rabbeted overlap of not less than 1 inch. Steel hinges shall be mounted in such a manner as to not lose their holding capacity due to loosening or burning out of the screws when subjected to fire. Such cabinets shall be painted inside and out with fire retardant paint. (ii) Approved metal storage cabinets will be acceptable. (iii) Cabinets shall be labeled in conspicuous lettering, “Flammable-Keep Away from Open Flames.” (3) Not more than 60 gallons of Category 1, 2 and/or 3 flammable liquids or 120 gallons of Category 4 flammable liquids shall be stored in any one storage cabinet. Not more than three such cabinets may be located in a single storage area. Quantities in excess of this shall be stored in an inside storage room. (4)(i) Inside storage rooms shall be constructed to meet the required fire-resistive rating for their use. Such construction shall comply with the test specifications set forth in Standard Methods of Fire Test of Building Construction and Material, NFPA 251-1969. (ii) Where an automatic extinguishing system is provided, the system shall be designed and installed in an approved manner. Openings to other rooms or buildings shall be provided with noncombustible liquid-tight raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in height, or the floor in the storage area shall be at least 4 inches below the surrounding floor. Openings shall be provided with approved self-closing fire doors. The room shall be liquid-tight where the walls join the floor. A permissible alternate to the sill or ramp is an open-grated trench, inside of the room, which drains to a safe location. Where other portions of the building or other buildings are exposed, windows shall be protected as set forth in the Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, NFPA No. 80-1970, for Class E or F openings. Wood of at least 1-inch nominal thickness may be used for shelving, racks, dunnage, scuffboards, floor overlay, and similar installations. (iii) Materials which will react with water and create a fire hazard shall not be stored in the same room with flammable liquids. (iv) Storage in inside storage rooms shall comply with Table F-2 following: Table F-2 Fire protection provided Fire resistance Maximum size Total allowable quantities gals./sq. ft./floor area Yes 2 hrs 500 sq. ft 10 No 2 hrs 500 sq. ft 4 Yes 1 hr 150 sq. ft 5 No 1 hr 150 sq. ft 2 Note: (v) Electrical wiring and equipment located in inside storage rooms shall be approved for Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Locations. For definition of Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Locations, see § 1926.449. (vi) Every inside storage room shall be provided with either a gravity or a mechanical exhausting system. Such system shall commence not more than 12 inches above the floor and be designed to provide for a complete change of air within the room at least 6 times per hour. If a mechanical exhausting system is used, it shall be controlled by a switch located outside of the door. The ventilating equipment and any lighting fixtures shall be operated by the same switch. An electric pilot light shall be installed adjacent to the switch if Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids are dispensed within the room. Where gravity ventilation is provided, the fresh air intake, as well as the exhausting outlet from the room, shall be on the exterior of the building in which the room is located. (vii) In every inside storage room there shall be maintained one clear aisle at least 3 feet wide. Containers over 30 gallons capacity shall not be stacked one upon the other. (viii) Flammable liquids in excess of that permitted in inside storage rooms shall be stored outside of buildings in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section. (5) Quantity. (c) Storage outside buildings. (2) Within 200 feet of each pile of containers, there shall be a 12-foot-wide access way to permit approach of fire control apparatus. (3) The storage area shall be graded in a manner to divert possible spills away from buildings or other exposures, or shall be surrounded by a curb or earth dike at least 12 inches high. When curbs or dikes are used, provisions shall be made for draining off accumulations of ground or rain water, or spills of flammable liquids. Drains shall terminate at a safe location and shall be accessible to operation under fire conditions. (4) Outdoor portable tank storage: (i) Portable tanks shall not be nearer than 20 feet from any building. Two or more portable tanks, grouped together, having a combined capacity in excess of 2,200 gallons, shall be separated by a 5-foot-clear area. Individual portable tanks exceeding 1,100 gallons shall be separated by a 5-foot-clear area. (ii) Within 200 feet of each portable tank, there shall be a 12-foot-wide access way to permit approach of fire control apparatus. (5) Storage areas shall be kept free of weeds, debris, and other combustible material not necessary to the storage. (6) Portable tanks, not exceeding 660 gallons, shall be provided with emergency venting and other devices, as required by chapters III and IV of NFPA 30-1969, The Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. (7) Portable tanks, in excess of 660 gallons, shall have emergency venting and other devices, as required by chapters II and III of The Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30-1969. (d) Fire control for flammable liquid storage. (2) At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 20-B units shall be located not less than 25 feet, nor more than 75 feet, from any flammable liquid storage area located outside. (3) When sprinklers are provided, they shall be installed in accordance with the Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13-1969. (4) At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 20-B:C units shall be provided on all tank trucks or other vehicles used for transporting and/or dispensing flammable liquids. (e) Dispensing liquids. (2) Transfer of Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids from one container to another shall be done only when containers are electrically interconnected (bonded). (3) Flammable liquids shall be drawn from or transferred into vessels, containers, or tanks within a building or outside only through a closed piping system, from safety cans, by means of a device drawing through the top, or from a container, or portable tanks, by gravity or pump, through an approved self-closing valve. Transferring by means of air pressure on the container or portable tanks is prohibited. (4) The dispensing units shall be protected against collision damage. (5) Dispensing devices and nozzles for Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids shall be of an approved type. (f) Handling liquids at point of final use. (2) Leakage or spillage of flammable liquids shall be disposed of promptly and safely. (3) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids may be used only where there are no open flames or other sources of ignition within 50 feet of the operation, unless conditions warrant greater clearance. (g) Service and refueling areas. (2) The tank trucks shall comply with the requirements covered in the Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, NFPA No. 385-1966. (3) The dispensing hose shall be an approved type. (4) The dispensing nozzle shall be an approved automatic-closing type without a latch-open device. (5) Underground tanks shall not be abandoned. (6) Clearly identified and easily accessible switch(es) shall be provided at a location remote from dispensing devices to shut off the power to all dispensing devices in the event of an emergency. (7)(i) Heating equipment of an approved type may be installed in the lubrication or service area where there is no dispensing or transferring of Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids, provided the bottom of the heating unit is at least 18 inches above the floor and is protected from physical damage. (ii) Heating equipment installed in lubrication or service areas, where Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids are dispensed, shall be of an approved type for garages, and shall be installed at least 8 feet above the floor. (8) There shall be no smoking or open flames in the areas used for fueling, servicing fuel systems for internal combustion engines, receiving or dispensing of flammable liquids. (9) Conspicuous and legible signs prohibiting smoking shall be posted. (10) The motors of all equipment being fueled shall be shut off during the fueling operation. (11) Each service or fueling area shall be provided with at least one fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 20-B:C located so that an extinguisher will be within 75 feet of each pump, dispenser, underground fill pipe opening, and lubrication or service area. (h) Scope. (1) Bulk transportation of flammable liquids; and (2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel oil tanks and containers connected with oil burning equipment. (i) Tank storage Design and construction of tanks Materials. (B) Tanks may be built of materials other than steel for installation underground or if required by the properties of the liquid stored. Tanks located above ground or inside buildings shall be of noncombustible construction. (C) Tanks built of materials other than steel shall be designed to specifications embodying principles recognized as good engineering design for the material used. (D) Unlined concrete tanks may be used for storing flammable liquids having a gravity of 40° API or heavier. Concrete tanks with special lining may be used for other services provided the design is in accordance with sound engineering practice. (E) [Reserved] (F) Special engineering consideration shall be required if the specific gravity of the liquid to be stored exceeds that of water or if the tanks are designed to contain flammable liquids at a liquid temperature below 0 °F. (ii) Fabrication. (B) Metal tanks shall be welded, riveted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or constructed by use of a combination of these methods. Filler metal used in brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an alloy having a melting point above 1000 °F. and below that of the metal joined. (iii) Atmospheric tanks. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) Tanks designed for underground service not exceeding 2,500 gallons (9,462.5 L) capacity may be used aboveground. (C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure vessels may be used as atmospheric tanks. (D) Atmospheric tanks shall not be used for the storage of a flammable liquid at a temperature at or above its boiling point. (iv) Low pressure tanks. (B) Low-pressure tanks shall be built in accordance with acceptable standards of design. Low-pressure tanks may be built in accordance with: ( 1 ( 2 (C) Atmospheric tanks built according to Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., requirements in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(A) of this section and shall be limited to 2.5 p.s.i.g. under emergency venting conditions. This paragraph may be used for operating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g. (D) Pressure vessels may be used as low-pressure tanks. (v) Pressure vessels. (B) Pressure vessels shall be built in accordance with the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 1968. (vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. (2) Installation of outside aboveground tanks. (ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between aboveground tanks. (B) Except as provided in paragraph (i)(2)(ii)(C) of this section, the distance between any two adjacent tanks shall not be less than one-sixth the sum of their diameters. When the diameter of one tank is less than one-half the diameter of the adjacent tank, the distance between the two tanks shall not be less than one-half the diameter of the smaller tank. (C) Where crude petroleum in conjunction with production facilities are located in noncongested areas and have capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons (3,000 barrels), the distance between such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet (0.912 m). (D) Where unstable flammable liquids are stored, the distance between such tanks shall not be less than one-half the sum of their diameters. (E) When tanks are compacted in three or more rows or in an irregular pattern, greater spacing or other means shall be provided so that inside tanks are accessible for firefighting purposes. (F) The minimum separation between a liquefied petroleum gas container and a flammable liquid storage tank shall be 20 feet (6.08 m), except in the case of flammable liquid tanks operating at pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. or equipped with emergency venting which will permit pressures to exceed 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions of paragraphs (i)(2)(ii) (A) and (B) of this section shall apply. Suitable means shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of flammable liquids under adjacent liquefied petroleum gas containers such as by diversion curbs or grading. When flammable liquid storage tanks are within a diked area, the liquefied petroleum gas containers shall be outside the diked area and at least 10 feet (3.04 m) away from the centerline of the wall of the diked area. The foregoing provisions shall not apply when liquefied petroleum gas containers of 125 gallons (473.125 L) or less capacity are installed adjacent to fuel oil supply tanks of 550 gallons (2,081.75 L) or less capacity. (iii) [Reserved] (iv) Normal venting for aboveground tanks. (B) Normal vents shall be sized either in accordance with: ( 1 2 3 1/4 (C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure vessels shall be adequately vented to prevent development of pressure or vacuum, as a result of filling or emptying and atmospheric temperature changes, from exceeding the design pressure of the tank or vessel. Protection shall also be provided to prevent overpressure from any pump discharging into the tank or vessel when the pump discharge pressure can exceed the design pressure of the tank or vessel. (D) If any tank or pressure vessel has more than one fill or withdrawal connection and simultaneous filling or withdrawal can be made, the vent size shall be based on the maximum anticipated simultaneous flow. (E) Unless the vent is designed to limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or less, the outlet of vents and vent drains shall be arranged to discharge in such a manner as to prevent localized overheating of any part of the tank in the event vapors from such vents are ignited. (F) Tanks and pressure vessels storing Category 1 flammable liquids shall be equipped with venting devices that shall be normally closed except when venting to pressure or vacuum conditions. Tanks and pressure vessels storing Category 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be equipped with venting devices that shall be normally closed except when venting under pressure or vacuum conditions, or with approved flame arresters. Exemption: See (G) Flame arresters or venting devices required in paragraph (i)(2)(iv)(F) of this section may be omitted for Category 2 flammable liquids or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) where conditions are such that their use may, in case of obstruction, result in tank damage. (v) Emergency relief venting for fire exposure for aboveground tanks. (B) In a vertical tank the construction referred to in paragraph (i)(2)(v)(A) of this section may take the form of a floating roof, lifter roof, a weak roof-to-shell seam, or other approved pressure relieving construction. The weak roof-to-shell seam shall be constructed to fail preferential to any other seam. (C) Where entire dependence for emergency relief is placed upon pressure relieving devices, the total venting capacity of both normal and emergency vents shall be enough to prevent rupture of the shell or bottom of the tank if vertical, or of the shell or heads if horizontal. If unstable liquids are stored, the effects of heat or gas resulting from polymerization, decomposition, condensation, or self-reactivity shall be taken into account. The total capacity of both normal and emergency venting devices shall be not less than that derived from Table F-10 except as provided in paragraph (i)(2)(v) (E) or (F) of this section. Such device may be a self-closing manhole cover, or one using long bolts that permit the cover to lift under internal pressure, or an additional or larger relief valve or valves. The wetted area of the tank shall be calculated on the basis of 55 percent of the total exposed area of a sphere or spheroid, 75 percent of the total exposed area of a horizontal tank and the first 30 feet (9.12 m) above grade of the exposed shell area of a vertical tank. Table F-10—Wetted Area Versus Cubic Feet (Meters) Free Air Per Hour [14.7 psia and 60 °F. (15.55 °C)] Square feet (m 2 CFH (m 3 Square feet (m 2 CFH (m 3 Square feet (m 2 CFH (m 3 20 (1.84) 21,100 (590.8) 200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672) 30 (2.76) 31,600 (884.8) 250 (23) 239,000 (6,692) 1,200 (110.4) 557,000 (15,596) 40 (3.68) 42,100 (1,178.8) 300 (27.6) 265,000 (7,420) 1,400 (128.8) 587,000 (16,436) 50 (4.6) 52,700 (1,475.6) 350 (32.2) 288,000 (8,064) 1,600 (147.2) 614,000 (17,192) 60 (5.52) 63,200 (1,769.6) 400 (36.8) 312,000 (8,736) 1,800 (165.6) 639,000 (17,892) 70 (6.44) 73,700 (2,063.6) 500 (46) 354,000 (9,912) 2,000 (180.4) 662,000 (18,536) 80 (7.36) 84,200 (2,357.6) 600 (55.2) 392,000 (10,976) 2,400 (220.8) 704,000 (19,712) 90 (8.28) 94,800 (2,654.4) 700 (64.4) 428,000 (11,984) 2,800 (257.6) 742,000 (20,776) 100 (9.2) 105,000 (2,940) 800 (73.6) 462,000 (12,936) and 120 (11.04) 126,000 (3,528) 900 (82.8) 493,000 (13,804) over 140 (12.88) 147,000 (4,116) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672) 160 (14.72) 168,000 (4,704) 180 (16.56) 190,000 (5,320) 200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908) (D) For tanks and storage vessels designed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the total rate of venting shall be determined in accordance with Table F-10, except that when the exposed wetted area of the surface is greater than 2,800 square feet (257.6 m 2 CFH A 0.82 Where: CFH A 2 Note: The foregoing formula is based on Q = 21,000A 0.82 (E) The total emergency relief venting capacity for any specific stable liquid may be determined by the following formula: V L √ M V L M (F) The required airflow rate of paragraph (i)(2)(v) (C) or (E) of this section may be multiplied by the appropriate factor listed in the following schedule when protection is provided as indicated. Only one factor may be used for any one tank. 0.5 for drainage in accordance with paragraph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section for tanks over 200 square feet (18.4 m 2 0.3 for approved water spray. 0.3 for approved insulation. 0.15 for approved water spray with approved insulation. (G) The outlet of all vents and vent drains on tanks equipped with emergency venting to permit pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to discharge in such a way as to prevent localized overheating of any part of the tank, in the event vapors from such vents are ignited. (H) Each commercial tank venting device shall have stamped on it the opening pressure, the pressure at which the valve reaches the full open position, and the flow capacity at the latter pressure, expressed in cubic feet (meters) per hour of air at 60 °F. (15.55 °C) and at a pressure of 14.7 p.s.i.a. (I) The flow capacity of tank venting devices 12 inches (30.48 cm) and smaller in nominal pipe size shall be determined by actual test of each type and size of vent. These flow tests may be conducted by the manufacturer if certified by a qualified impartial observer, or may be conducted by an outside agency. The flow capacity of tank venting devices larger than 12 inches (30.48 cm) nominal pipe size, including manhole covers with long bolts or equivalent, may be calculated provided that the opening pressure is actually measured, the rating pressure and corresponding free orifice area are stated, the word “calculated” appears on the nameplate, and the computation is based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 applied to the rated orifice area. (vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks. (B) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are adjacent to buildings or public ways, they shall be located so that the vapors are released at a safe point outside of buildings and not less than 12 feet (3.658 m) above the adjacent ground level. In order to aid their dispersion, vapors shall be discharged upward or horizontally away from closely adjacent walls. Vent outlets shall be located so that flammable vapors will not be trapped by eaves or other obstructions and shall be at least 5 feet (1.52 m) from building openings. (C) When tank vent piping is manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as to discharge, within the pressure limitations of the system, the vapors they may be required to handle when manifolded tanks are subject to the same fire exposure. (vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for aboveground tanks Drainage and diked areas. (B) Drainage. ( 1 ( 2 (C) Diked areas. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 (viii) Tank openings other than vents for aboveground tanks. (A)-(C) [Reserved] (D) Openings for gaging shall be provided with a vaportight cap or cover. (E) For Category 2 flammable liquids or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other than crude oils, gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed and installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static electricity. A fill pipe entering the top of a tank shall terminate within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank and shall be installed to avoid excessive vibration. (F) Filling and emptying connections which are made and broken shall be located outside of buildings at a location free from any source of ignition and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from any building opening. Such connection shall be closed and liquidtight when not in use. The connection shall be properly identified. (3) Installation of underground tanks Location. (ii) Depth and cover. (iii) Corrosion protection. (A) Use of protective coatings or wrappings; (B) Cathodic protection; or, (C) Corrosion resistant materials of construction. (iv) Vents. (B) Size of vents. Each tank shall be vented through piping adequate in size to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid at the fill opening while the tank is being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less than 1 1/4 Table F-11—Vent Line Diameters Maximum flow GPM (L) Pipe length 1 50 feet (15.2 m) 100 feet (30.4 m) 200 feet (60.8 m) Inches (cm) Inches (cm) Inches (cm) 100 (378.5) 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 200 (757) 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 4 300 (1,135.5) 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 1 2 400 (1,514) 1 1 4 1 1 2 2 (5.08) 500 (1,892.5) 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 (5.08) 600 (2,271) 1 1 2 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 700 (2,649.5) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 800 (3,028) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62) 900 (3,406.5) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62) 1,000 (3,785) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62) 1 (C) Location and arrangement of vents for Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids. Vent pipes from tanks storing Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids shall terminate outside of the building and higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent outlets shall be above normal snow level. They may be fitted with return bends, coarse screens or other devices to minimize ingress of foreign material. (D) Vent piping shall be constructed in accordance with paragraph (3)(iv)(C) of this section. Vent pipes shall be so laid as to drain toward the tank without sags or traps in which liquid can collect. They shall be located so that they will not be subjected to physical damage. The tank end of the vent pipe shall enter the tank through the top. (E) When tank vent piping is manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as to discharge, within the pressure limitations of the system, the vapors they may be required to handle when manifolded tanks are filled simultaneously. (v) Tank openings other than vents. (B) Openings for manual gaging, if independent of the fill pipe, shall be provided with a liquid-tight cap or cover. If inside a building, each such opening shall be protected against liquid overflow and possible vapor release by means of a spring loaded check valve or other approved device. (C) Fill and discharge lines shall enter tanks only through the top. Fill lines shall be sloped toward the tank. (D) For Category 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other than crude oils, gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed and installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static electricity by terminating within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank. (E) Filling and emptying connections which are made and broken shall be located outside of buildings at a location free from any source of ignition and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from any building opening. Such connection shall be closed and liquidtight when not in use. The connection shall be properly identified. (4) Installation of tanks inside of buildings Location. (ii) Vents. (iii) Vent piping. (iv) Tank openings other than vents. (B) Each connection to a tank inside of buildings through which liquid can normally flow shall be provided with an internal or an external valve located as close as practical to the shell of the tank. Such valves, when external, and their connections to the tank shall be of steel except when the chemical characteristics of the liquid stored are incompatible with steel. When materials other than steel are necessary, they shall be suitable for the pressures, structural stresses, and temperatures involved, including fire exposures. (C) Flammable liquid tanks located inside of buildings, except in one-story buildings designed and protected for flammable liquid storage, shall be provided with an automatic-closing heat-actuated valve on each withdrawal connection below the liquid level, except for connections used for emergency disposal, to prevent continued flow in the event of fire in the vicinity of the tank. This function may be incorporated in the valve required in paragraph (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section, and if a separate valve, shall be located adjacent to the valve required in paragraph (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section. (D) Openings for manual gaging, if independent of the fill pipe (see paragraph (i)(4)(iv)(F) of this section), shall be provided with a vaportight cap or cover. Each such opening shall be protected against liquid overflow and possible vapor release by means of a spring loaded check valve or other approved device. (E) For Category 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other than crude oils, gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed and installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static electricity by terminating within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank. (F) The fill pipe inside of the tank shall be installed to avoid excessive vibration of the pipe. (G) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be located outside of buildings at a location free from any source of ignition and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from any building opening. The inlet of the fill pipe shall be closed and liquidtight when not in use. The fill connection shall be properly identified. (H) Tanks inside buildings shall be equipped with a device, or other means shall be provided, to prevent overflow into the building. (5) Supports, foundations, and anchorage for all tank locations General. (ii) Fire resistance. (iii) Spheres. (iv) Load distribution. (v) Foundations. (vi) Flood areas. (A) No aboveground vertical storage tank containing a flammable liquid shall be located so that the allowable liquid level within the tank is below the established maximum flood stage, unless the tank is provided with a guiding structure such as described in paragraphs (i)(5)(vi) (M), (N), and (O) of this section. (B) Independent water supply facilities shall be provided at locations where there is no ample and dependable public water supply available for loading partially empty tanks with water. (C) In addition to the preceding requirements, each tank so located that more than 70 percent, but less than 100 percent, of its allowable liquid storage capacity will be submerged at the established maximum flood stage, shall be safeguarded by one of the following methods: Tank shall be raised, or its height shall be increased, until its top extends above the maximum flood stage a distance equivalent to 30 percent or more of its allowable liquid storage capacity: Provided, however, (D) Each horizontal tank so located that more than 70 percent of its storage capacity will be submerged at the established flood stage, shall be anchored, attached to a foundation of concrete or of steel and concrete, of sufficient weight to provide adequate load for the tank when filled with flammable liquid and submerged by flood waters to the established flood stage, or adequately secured by other means. (E) [Reserved] (F) At locations where there is no ample and dependable water supply, or where filling of underground tanks with liquids is impracticable because of the character of their contents, their use, or for other reasons, each tank shall be safeguarded against movement when empty and submerged by high ground water or flood waters by anchoring, weighting with concrete or other approved solid loading material, or securing by other means. Each such tank shall be so constructed and installed that it will safely resist external pressures due to high ground water or flood waters. (G) At locations where there is an ample and dependable water supply available, underground tanks containing flammable liquids, so installed that more than 70 percent of their storage capacity will be submerged at the maximum flood stage, shall be so anchored, weighted, or secured by other means, as to prevent movement of such tanks when filled with flammable liquids, and submerged by flood waters to the established flood stage. (H) Pipe connections below the allowable liquid level in a tank shall be provided with valves or cocks located as closely as practicable to the tank shell. Such valves and their connections to tanks shall be of steel or other material suitable for use with the liquid being stored. Cast iron shall not be permitted. (I) At locations where an independent water supply is required, it shall be entirely independent of public power and water supply. Independent source of water shall be available when flood waters reach a level not less than 10 feet (3.04 m) below the bottom of the lowest tank on a property. (J) The self-contained power and pumping unit shall be so located or so designed that pumping into tanks may be carried on continuously throughout the rise in flood waters from a level 10 feet (3.04 m) below the lowest tank to the level of the potential flood stage. (K) Capacity of the pumping unit shall be such that the rate of rise of water in all tanks shall be equivalent to the established potential average rate of rise of flood waters at any stage. (L) Each independent pumping unit shall be tested periodically to insure that it is in satisfactory operating condition. (M) Structural guides for holding floating tanks above their foundations shall be so designed that there will be no resistance to the free rise of a tank, and shall be constructed of noncombustible material. (N) The strength of the structure shall be adequate to resist lateral movement of a tank subject to a horizontal force in any direction equivalent to not less than 25 pounds per square foot (1.05 kg m 2 (O) Where tanks are situated on exposed points or bends in a shoreline where swift currents in flood waters will be present, the structures shall be designed to withstand a unit force of not less than 50 pounds per square foot (2.1 kg m 2 (P) The filling of a tank to be protected by water loading shall be started as soon as flood waters reach a dangerous flood stage. The rate of filling shall be at least equal to the rate of rise of the floodwaters (or the established average potential rate of rise). (Q) Sufficient fuel to operate the water pumps shall be available at all times to insure adequate power to fill all tankage with water. (R) All valves on connecting pipelines shall be closed and locked in closed position when water loading has been completed. (S) Where structural guides are provided for the protection of floating tanks, all rigid connections between tanks and pipelines shall be disconnected and blanked off or blinded before the floodwaters reach the bottom of the tank, unless control valves and their connections to the tank are of a type designed to prevent breakage between the valve and the tank shell. (T) All valves attached to tanks other than those used in connection with water loading operations shall be closed and locked. (U) If a tank is equipped with a swing line, the swing pipe shall be raised to and secured at its highest position. (V) Inspections. The Assistant Secretary or his designated representative shall make periodic inspections of all plants where the storage of flammable liquids is such as to require compliance with the foregoing requirements, in order to assure the following: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (vii) Earthquake areas. (6) Sources of ignition. (7) Testing General. (ii) Strength. (iii) Tightness. (iv) Repairs. (v) Derated operations. (j) Piping, valves, and fittings General Design. (ii) Exceptions. (A) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas wells and any piping connected directly thereto. (B) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or portable or stationary engines. (C) Piping within the scope of any applicable boiler and pressures vessel code. (iii) Definitions. (2) Materials for piping, valves, and fittings Required materials. (ii) Exceptions. (iii) Linings. (iv) Low-melting materials. (3) Pipe joints. (4) Supports. (5) Protection against corrosion. (6) Valves. (7) Testing. (k) Marine service stations Dispensing. (ii) Dispensing shall be by approved dispensing units with or without integral pumps and may be located on open piers, wharves, or floating docks or on shore or on piers of the solid fill type. (iii) Dispensing nozzles shall be automatic-closing without a hold-open latch. (2) Tanks and pumps. (ii) Where shore location would require excessively long supply lines to dispensers, tanks may be installed on a pier provided that applicable portions of paragraph (b) of this section relative to spacing, diking, and piping are complied with and the quantity so stored does not exceed 1,100 gallons (4,163.5 L) aggregate capacity. (iii) Shore tanks supplying marine service stations may be located above ground, where rock ledges or high water table make underground tanks impractical. (iv) Where tanks are at an elevation which would produce gravity head on the dispensing unit, the tank outlet shall be equipped with a pressure control valve positioned adjacent to and outside the tank block valve specified in § 1926.152(c)(8) of this section, so adjusted that liquid cannot flow by gravity from the tank in case of piping or hose failure. (3) Piping. (ii) A readily accessible valve to shut off the supply from shore shall be provided in each pipeline at or near the approach to the pier and at the shore end of each pipeline adjacent to the point where flexible hose is attached. (iii) Piping shall be located so as to be protected from physical damage. (iv) Piping handling Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be grounded to control stray currents. (4) Definition; as used in this section: [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998; 77 FR 17891, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-Gas). (a) Approval of equipment and systems. (2) All cylinders shall meet the Department of Transportation specification identification requirements published in 49 CFR part 178, Shipping Container Specifications. (3) Definition. Containers (b) Welding on LP-Gas containers. (c) Container valves and container accessories. (2) Connections to containers, except safety relief connections, liquid level gauging devices, and plugged openings, shall have shutoff valves located as close to the container as practicable. (d) Safety devices. (2) Shutoff valves shall not be installed between the safety relief device and the container, or the equipment or piping to which the safety relief device is connected, except that a shutoff valve may be used where the arrangement of this valve is such that full required capacity flow through the safety relief device is always afforded. (3) Container safety relief devices and regulator relief vents shall be located not less than 5 feet in any direction from air openings into sealed combustion system appliances or mechanical ventilation air intakes. (e) Dispensing. (2) Filling of portable containers or containers mounted on skids from storage containers shall be performed not less than 50 feet from the nearest building. (f) Requirements for appliances. (2) Any appliance that was originally manufactured for operation with a gaseous fuel other than LP-Gas, and is in good condition, may be used with LP-Gas only after it is properly converted, adapted, and tested for performance with LP-Gas before the appliance is placed in use. (g) Containers and regulating equipment installed outside of buildings or structures. (h) Containers and equipment used inside of buildings or structures. (2) Containers in use (3) Systems utilizing containers having a water capacity greater than 2 1/2 (4) Regulators shall be either directly connected to the container valves or to manifolds connected to the container valves. The regulator shall be suitable for use with LP-Gas. Manifolds and fittings connecting containers to pressure regulator inlets shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. service pressure. (5) Valves on containers having water capacity greater than 50 pounds (nominal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) shall be protected from damage while in use or storage. (6) Aluminum piping or tubing shall not be used. (7) Hose shall be designed for a working pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. Design, construction, and performance of hose, and hose connections shall have their suitability determined by listing by a nationally recognized testing agency. The hose length shall be as short as practicable. Hoses shall be long enough to permit compliance with spacing provisions of paragraphs (h)(1) through (13) of this section, without kinking or straining, or causing hose to be so close to a burner as to be damaged by heat. (8) Portable heaters, including salamanders, shall be equipped with an approved automatic device to shut off the flow of gas to the main burner, and pilot if used, in the event of flame failure. Such heaters, having inputs above 50,000 B.t.u. per hour, shall be equipped with either a pilot, which must be lighted and proved before the main burner can be turned on, or an electrical ignition system. Note: The provisions of this subparagraph do not apply to portable heaters under 7,500 B.t.u. per hour input when used with containers having a maximum water capacity of 2 1/2 (9) Container valves, connectors, regulators, manifolds, piping, and tubing shall not be used as structural supports for heaters. (10) Containers, regulating equipment, manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose shall be located to minimize exposure to high temperatures or physical damage. (11) Containers having a water capacity greater than 2 1/2 (12) The maximum water capacity of individual containers shall be 245 pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas capacity). (13) For temporary heating, heaters (other than integral heater-container units) shall be located at least 6 feet from any LP-Gas container. This shall not prohibit the use of heaters specifically designed for attachment to the container or to a supporting standard, provided they are designed and installed so as to prevent direct or radiant heat application from the heater onto the containers. Blower and radiant type heaters shall not be directed toward any LP-Gas container within 20 feet. (14) If two or more heater-container units, of either the integral or nonintegral type, are located in an unpartitioned area on the same floor, the container or containers of each unit shall be separated from the container or containers of any other unit by at least 20 feet. (15) When heaters are connected to containers for use in an unpartitioned area on the same floor, the total water capacity of containers, manifolded together for connection to a heater or heaters, shall not be greater than 735 pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas capacity). Such manifolds shall be separated by at least 20 feet. (16) Storage of containers awaiting use shall be in accordance with paragraphs (j) and (k) of this section. (i) Multiple container systems. (2) Heaters shall be equipped with an approved regulator in the supply line between the fuel cylinder and the heater unit. Cylinder connectors shall be provided with an excess flow valve to minimize the flow of gas in the event the fuel line becomes ruptured. (3) Regulators and low-pressure relief devices shall be rigidly attached to the cylinder valves, clyinders, supporting standards, the building walls, or otherwise rigidly secured, and shall be so installed or protected from the elements. (j) Storage of LPG containers. (k) Storage outside of buildings. Table F-3 Quantity of LP-Gas stored Distance (feet) 500 lbs. or less 0 501 to 6,000 lbs 10 6,001 to 10,000 lbs 20 Over 10,000 lbs 25 (2) Containers shall be in a suitable ventilated enclosure or otherwise protected against tampering. (l) Fire protection. (m) Systems utilizing containers other than DOT containers Application. (2) Design pressure and classification of storage containers. Table F-31 Container type For gases with vapor press. Not to exceed lb. per sq. in. gage at 100 °F. (37.8 °C.) Minimum design pressure of container, lb. per sq. in. gage 1949 and earlier editions of ASME Code (Par. U-68, U-69) 1949 edition of ASME Code (Par. U-200, U-201); 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of ASME Code; All editions of API-ASME Code 3 1 1 1 1 100 100 100 125 125 125 125 156 150 150 150 187 175 175 175 219 2 215 200 250 1 2 3 (3) Containers with foundations attached (portable or semiportable b containers with suitable steel “runners” or “skids” and popularly known in the industry as “skid tanks”) shall be designed, installed, and used in accordance with these rules subject to the following provisions: (i) If they are to be used at a given general location for a temporary period not to exceed 6 months they need not have fire-resisting foundations or saddles but shall have adequate ferrous metal supports. (ii) They shall not be located with the outside bottom of the container shell more than 5 feet (1.52 m) above the surface of the ground unless fire-resisting supports are provided. (iii) The bottom of the skids shall not be less than 2 inches (5.08 cm) or more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) below the outside bottom of the container shell. (iv) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings, and the like, having communication with the interior of the container, shall be protected against physical damage. (v) When not permanently located on fire-resisting foundations, piping connections shall be sufficiently flexible to minimize the possibility of breakage or leakage of connections if the container settles, moves, or is otherwise displaced. (vi) Skids, or lugs for attachment of skids, shall be secured to the container in accordance with the code or rules under which the container is designed and built (with a minimum factor of safety of four) to withstand loading in any direction equal to four times the weight of the container and attachments when filled to the maximum permissible loaded weight. (4) Field welding where necessary shall be made only on saddle plates or brackets which were applied by the manufacturer of the tank. (n) When LP-Gas and one or more other gases are stored or used in the same area, the containers shall be marked to identify their content. Marking shall be in compliance with American National Standard Z48.1-1954, “Method of Marking Portable Compressed Gas Containers To Identify the Material Contained.” (o) Damage from vehicles. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35170, June 30, 1993] § 1926.154 Temporary heating devices. (a) Ventilation. (2) When heaters are used in confined spaces, special care shall be taken to provide sufficient ventilation in order to ensure proper combustion, maintain the health and safety of workmen, and limit temperature rise in the area. (b) Clearance and mounting. (2) Temporary heating devices, which are listed for installation with lesser clearances than specified in Table F-4, may be installed in accordance with their approval. Table F-4 Heating appliances Minimum clearance, (inches) Sides Rear Chimney connector Room heater, circulating type 12 12 18 Room heater, radiant type 36 36 18 (3) Heaters not suitable for use on wood floors shall not be set directly upon them or other combustible materials. When such heaters are used, they shall rest on suitable heat insulating material or at least 1-inch concrete, or equivalent. The insulating material shall extend beyond the heater 2 feet or more in all directions. (4) Heaters used in the vicinity of combustible tarpaulins, canvas, or similar coverings shall be located at least 10 feet from the coverings. The coverings shall be securely fastened to prevent ignition or upsetting of the heater due to wind action on the covering or other material. (c) Stability. (d) Solid fuel salamanders. (e) Oil-fired heaters. (2) Heaters designed for barometric or gravity oil feed shall be used only with the integral tanks. (3) [Reserved] (4) Heaters specifically designed and approved for use with separate supply tanks may be directly connected for gravity feed, or an automatic pump, from a supply tank. § 1926.155 Definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Approved, (b) Closed container (c) [Reserved] (d) Combustion (e) Fire brigade (f) Fire resistance (g) Flammable (h) Flammable liquid (1) Category 1 shall include liquids having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C) and having a boiling point at or below 95 °F (35 °C). (2) Category 2 shall include liquids having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C) and having a boiling point above 95 °F (35 °C). (3) Category 3 shall include liquids having flashpoints at or above 73.4 °F (23 °C) and at or below 140 °F (60 °C). (4) Category 4 shall include liquids having flashpoints above 140 °F (60 °C) and at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C). (i) Flash point (1) The flashpoint of liquids having a viscosity less than 45 Saybolt Universal Second(s) at 100 °F (37.8 °C) and a flashpoint below 175 °F (79.4 °C) shall be determined in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by the Tag Closed Tester, ASTM D-56-69 (incorporated by reference; See (2) The flashpoints of liquids having a viscosity of 45 Saybolt Universal Second(s) or more at 175 °F (79.4 °C) or higher shall be determined in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by the Pensky Martens Closed Tester, ASTM D-93-69 (incorporated by reference; See (j) Liquefied petroleum gases, LPG LP Gas (k) Portable tank (l) Safety can (m) Vapor pressure [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 77 FR 17894, Mar. 26, 2012] Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and Barricades Authority: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. § 1926.200 Accident prevention signs and tags. (a) General. (b) Danger signs. (2) Danger signs shall have red as the predominating color for the upper panel; black outline on the borders; and a white lower panel for additional sign wording. (c) Caution signs. (2) Caution signs shall have yellow as the predominating color; black upper panel and borders: yellow lettering of “caution” on the black panel; and the lower yellow panel for additional sign wording. Black lettering shall be used for additional wording. (3) The standard color of the background shall be yellow; and the panel, black with yellow letters. Any letters used against the yellow background shall be black. The colors shall be those of opaque glossy samples as specified in Table 1 of ANSI Z53.1-1967 or in Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1-2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in § 1926.6. (d) Exit signs. (e) Safety instruction signs. (f) Directional signs. (g) Traffic control signs and devices. (2) The design and use of all traffic control devices, including signs, signals, markings, barricades, and other devices, for protection of construction workers shall conform to Part 6 of the MUTCD (incorporated by reference, see § 1926.6). (h) Accident prevention tags. (2) For accident prevention tags, employers shall follow specifications that are similar to those in Figures 1 to 4 of ANSI Z35.2-1968 or Figures 1 to 8 of ANSI Z535.5-2011, incorporated by reference in § 1926.6. (i) Additional rules. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993; 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004; 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013; 78 FR 66642, Nov. 6, 2013; 84 FR 21577, May 14, 2019] § 1926.201 Signaling. (a) Flaggers. (b) Crane and hoist signals. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002; 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013; 84 FR 21577, May 14, 2019] Subpart H—Materials Handling, Storage, Use, and Disposal Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; and Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. Section 1926.250 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911. § 1926.250 General requirements for storage. (a) General. (2)(i) The weight of stored materials on floors within buildings and structures shall not exceed maximum safe load limits. (ii) Employers shall conspicuously post maximum safe load limits of floors within buildings and structures, in pounds per square foot, in all storage areas, except when the storage area is on a floor or slab on grade. Posting is not required for storage areas in all single-family residential structures and wood-framed multi-family residential structures. (3) Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear to provide for the free and safe movement of material handling equipment or employees. Such areas shall be kept in good repair. (4) When a difference in road or working levels exist, means such as ramps, blocking, or grading shall be used to ensure the safe movement of vehicles between the two levels. (b) Material storage. (2) Each employee required to work on stored material in silos, hoppers, tanks, and similar storage areas shall be equipped with personal fall arrest equipment meeting the requirements of subpart M of this part. (3) Noncompatible materials shall be segregated in storage. (4) Bagged materials shall be stacked by stepping back the layers and cross-keying the bags at least every 10 bags high. (5) Materials shall not be stored on scaffolds or runways in excess of supplies needed for immediate operations. (6) Brick stacks shall not be more than 7 feet in height. When a loose brick stack reaches a height of 4 feet, it shall be tapered back 2 inches in every foot of height above the 4-foot level. (7) When masonry blocks are stacked higher than 6 feet, the stack shall be tapered back one-half block per tier above the 6-foot level. (8) Lumber: (i) Used lumber shall have all nails withdrawn before stacking. (ii) Lumber shall be stacked on level and solidly supported sills. (iii) Lumber shall be so stacked as to be stable and self-supporting. (iv) Lumber piles shall not exceed 20 feet in height provided that lumber to be handled manually shall not be stacked more than 16 feet high. (9) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar stock, and other cylindrical materials, unless racked, shall be stacked and blocked so as to prevent spreading or tilting. (c) Housekeeping. (d) Dockboards (bridge plates). (2) Portable dockboards shall be secured in position, either by being anchored or equipped with devices which will prevent their slipping. (3) Handholds, or other effective means, shall be provided on portable dockboards to permit safe handling. (4) Positive protection shall be provided to prevent railroad cars from being moved while dockboards or bridge plates are in position. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993; 59 FR 40729, Aug. 9, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 84 FR 21577, May 14, 2019] § 1926.251 Rigging equipment for material handling. (a) General. (2) Employers must ensure that rigging equipment: (i) Has permanently affixed and legible identification markings as prescribed by the manufacturer that indicate the recommended safe working load; (ii) Not be loaded in excess of its recommended safe working load as prescribed on the identification markings by the manufacturer; and (iii) Not be used without affixed, legible identification markings, required by paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section. (3) Rigging equipment, when not in use, shall be removed from the immediate work area so as not to present a hazard to employees. (4) Special custom design grabs, hooks, clamps, or other lifting accessories, for such units as modular panels, prefabricated structures and similar materials, shall be marked to indicate the safe working loads and shall be proof-tested prior to use to 125 percent of their rated load. (5) Scope. (6) Inspections. (b) Alloy steel chains. (2) Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear-shaped links, welded or mechanical coupling links, or other attachments, when used with alloy steel chains, shall have a rated capacity at least equal to that of the chain. (3) Job or shop hooks and links, or makeshift fasteners, formed from bolts, rods, etc., or other such attachments, shall not be used. (4) Employers must not use alloy steel-chain slings with loads in excess of the rated capacities (i.e., working load limits) indicated on the sling by permanently affixed and legible identification markings prescribed by the manufacturer. (5) Whenever wear at any point of any chain link exceeds that shown in Table H-1, the assembly shall be removed from service. (6) Inspections. (ii) The employer shall make and maintain a record of the most recent month in which each alloy steel chain sling was thoroughly inspected, and shall make such record available for examination. (c) Wire rope. (2) Protruding ends of strands in splices on slings and bridles shall be covered or blunted. (3) Wire rope shall not be secured by knots, except on haul back lines on scrapers. (4) The following limitations shall apply to the use of wire rope: (i) An eye splice made in any wire rope shall have not less than three full tucks. However, this requirement shall not operate to preclude the use of another form of splice or connection which can be shown to be as efficient and which is not otherwise prohibited. (ii) Except for eye splices in the ends of wires and for endless rope slings, each wire rope used in hoisting or lowering, or in pulling loads, shall consist of one continuous piece without knot or splice. (iii) Eyes in wire rope bridles, slings, or bull wires shall not be formed by wire rope clips or knots. (iv) Wire rope shall not be used if, in any length of eight diameters, the total number of visible broken wires exceeds 10 percent of the total number of wires, or if the rope shows other signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or defect. (5) When U-bolt wire rope clips are used to form eyes, Table H-2 shall be used to determine the number and spacing of clips. (i) When used for eye splices, the U-bolt shall be applied so that the “U” section is in contact with the dead end of the rope. (i1) [Reserved] (6) Slings shall not be shortened with knots or bolts or other makeshift devices. (7) Sling legs shall not be kinked. (8) Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the loads balanced to prevent slippage. (9) Slings shall be padded or protected from the sharp edges of their loads. (10) Hands or fingers shall not be placed between the sling and its load while the sling is being tightened around the load. (11) Shock loading is prohibited. (12) A sling shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the sling. (13) Minimum sling lengths. (ii) Braided slings shall have a minimum clear length of wire rope 40 times the component rope diameter between the loops or end fittings. (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid grommets and endless slings shall have a minimum circumferential length of 96 times their body diameter. (14) Safe operating temperatures. (15) End attachments. (ii) All welded end attachments shall not be used unless proof tested by the manufacturer or equivalent entity at twice their rated capacity prior to initial use. The employer shall retain a certificate of the proof test, and make it available for examination. (16) Wire rope slings shall have permanently affixed, legible identification markings stating size, rated capacity for the type(s) of hitch(es) used and the angle upon which it is based, and the number of legs if more than one. (d) Natural rope, and synthetic fiber. (2) All splices in rope slings provided by the employer shall be made in accordance with fiber rope manufacturers recommendations. (i) In manila rope, eye splices shall contain at least three full tucks, and short splices shall contain at least six full tucks (three on each side of the centerline of the splice). (ii) In layed synthetic fiber rope, eye splices shall contain at least four full tucks, and short splices shall contain at least eight full tucks (four on each side of the centerline of the splice). (iii) Strand end tails shall not be trimmed short (flush with the surface of the rope) immediately adjacent to the full tucks. This precaution applies to both eye and short splices and all types of fiber rope. For fiber ropes under 1-inch diameter, the tails shall project at least six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck. For fiber ropes 1-inch diameter and larger, the tails shall project at least 6 inches beyond the last full tuck. In applications where the projecting tails may be objectionable, the tails shall be tapered and spliced into the body of the rope using at least two additional tucks (which will require a tail length of approximately six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck). (iv) For all eye splices, the eye shall be sufficiently large to provide an included angle of not greater than 60° at the splice when the eye is placed over the load or support. (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of splices. (3) Safe operating temperatures. (4) Splicing. (i) In manila rope, eye splices shall consist of at least three full tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least six full tucks, three on each side of the splice center line. (ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye splices shall consist of at least four full tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least eight full tucks, four on each side of the center line. (iii) Strand end tails shall not be trimmed flush with the surface of the rope immediately adjacent to the full tucks. This applies to all types of fiber rope and both eye and short splices. For fiber rope under 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter, the tail shall project at least six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck. For fiber rope 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter and larger, the tail shall project at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) beyond the last full tuck. Where a projecting tail interferes with the use of the sling, the tail shall be tapered and spliced into the body of the rope using at least two additional tucks (which will require a tail length of approximately six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck). (iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a minimum clear length of rope between eye splices equal to 10 times the rope diameter. (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of splices. (vi) Clamps not designed specifically for fiber ropes shall not be used for splicing. (vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall be of such size to provide an included angle of not greater than 60 degrees at the splice when the eye is placed over the load or support. (5) End attachments. (6) Removal from service. (i) Abnormal wear. (ii) Powdered fiber between strands. (iii) Broken or cut fibers. (iv) Variations in the size or roundness of strands. (v) Discoloration or rotting. (vi) Distortion of hardware in the sling. (7) Employers must use natural- and synthetic-fiber rope slings that have permanently affixed and legible identification markings that state the rated capacity for the type(s) of hitch(es) used and the angle upon which it is based, type of fiber material, and the number of legs if more than one. (e) Synthetic webbing nylon, polyester, and polypropylene (i) Name or trademark of manufacturer. (ii) Rated capacities for the type of hitch. (iii) Type of material. (2) Rated capacity shall not be exceeded. (3) Webbing. (4) Fittings. (i) Of a minimum breaking strength equal to that of the sling; and (ii) Free of all sharp edges that could in any way damage the webbing. (5) Attachment of end fittings to webbing and formation of eyes. (6) Environmental conditions. (i) Nylon web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of acids or phenolics are present. (ii) Polyester and polypropylene web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present. (iii) Web slings with aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present. (7) Safe operating temperatures. (8) Removal from service. (i) Acid or caustic burns; (ii) Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface; (iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts; (iv) Broken or worn stitches; or (v) Distortion of fittings. (f) Shackles and hooks. (2) The manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed in determining the safe working loads of the various sizes and types of specific and identifiable hooks. All hooks for which no applicable manufacturer's recommendations are available shall be tested to twice the intended safe working load before they are initially put into use. The employer shall maintain a record of the dates and results of such tests. Table H-1—Maximum Allowable Wear at any Point of Link Chain size (inches) Maximum allowable wear (inch) 1 4 3 64 3 8 5 64 1 2 7 64 5 8 9 64 3 4 5 32 7 8 11 64 1 3 16 1 1 8 7 32 1 1 4 1 4 1 3 8 9 32 1 1 2 5 16 1 3 4 11 32 Table H-2—Number and Spacing of U-Bolt Wire Rope Clips Improved plow steel, rope diameter (inches) Number of clips Minimum spacing (inches) Drop forged Other material 1 2 3 4 3 5 8 3 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 5 4 1 2 7 8 4 5 5 1 4 1 5 6 6 1 1 8 6 6 6 3 4 1 1 4 6 7 7 1 2 1 3 8 7 7 8 1 4 1 1 2 7 8 9 [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993; 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 23118, Apr. 18, 2012] § 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials. (a) Whenever materials are dropped more than 20 feet to any point lying outside the exterior walls of the building, an enclosed chute of wood, or equivalent material, shall be used. For the purpose of this paragraph, an enclosed chute is a slide, closed in on all sides, through which material is moved from a high place to a lower one. (b) When debris is dropped through holes in the floor without the use of chutes, the area onto which the material is dropped shall be completely enclosed with barricades not less than 42 inches high and not less than 6 feet back from the projected edge of the opening above. Signs warning of the hazard of falling materials shall be posted at each level. Removal shall not be permitted in this lower area until debris handling ceases above. (c) All scrap lumber, waste material, and rubbish shall be removed from the immediate work area as the work progresses. (d) Disposal of waste material or debris by burning shall comply with local fire regulations. (e) All solvent waste, oily rags, and flammable liquids shall be kept in fire resistant covered containers until removed from worksite. Subpart I—Tools—Hand and Power Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), or 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Section 1926.307 also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553. § 1926.300 General requirements. (a) Condition of tools. (b) Guarding. (2) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, chains, or other reciprocating, rotating or moving parts of equipment shall be guarded if such parts are exposed to contact by employees or otherwise create a hazard. Guarding shall meet the requirements as set forth in American National Standards Institute, B15.1-1953 (R1958), Safety Code for Mechanical Power-Transmission Apparatus. (3) Types of guarding. (4) Point of operation guarding. (ii) The point of operation of machines whose operation exposes an employee to injury, shall be guarded. The guarding device shall be in conformity with any appropriate standards therefor, or, in the absence of applicable specific standards, shall be so designed and constructed as to prevent the operator from having any part of his body in the danger zone during the operating cycle. (iii) Special handtools for placing and removing material shall be such as to permit easy handling of material without the operator placing a hand in the danger zone. Such tools shall not be in lieu of other guarding required by this section, but can only be used to supplement protection provided. (iv) The following are some of the machines which usually require point of operation guarding: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f ( g ( h ( i (5) Exposure of blades. 1/2 (6) Anchoring fixed machinery. (7) Guarding of abrasive wheel machinery—exposure adjustment. 1/4 Figure I-1 Figure I-2 Correct Showing adjustable tongue giving required angle protection for all sizes of wheel used. Figure I-3 Figure I-4 Correct Showing movable guard with opening small enough to give required protection for the smallest size wheel used. Figure I-5 Figure I-6 Incorrect Showing movable guard with size of opening correct for full size wheel but too large for smaller wheel. (8) Bench and floor stands. Figure I-7 Figure I-8 Wherever the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle, the exposure shall not exceed 125° (See Figures I-9 and I-10.) Figure I-9 Figure I-10 (9) Cylindrical grinders. Figure I-11 Figure I-12 (c) Personal protective equipment. (d) Switches. (2) All hand-held powered drills, tappers, fastener drivers, horizontal, vertical, and angle grinders with wheels greater than 2 inches in diameter, disc sanders, belt sanders, reciprocating saws, saber saws, and other similar operating powered tools shall be equipped with a momentary contact “on-off” control and may have a lock-on control provided that turnoff can be accomplished by a single motion of the same finger or fingers that turn it on. (3) All other hand-held powered tools, such as circular saws, chain saws, and percussion tools without positive accessory holding means, shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch that will shut off the power when the pressure is released. (4) The requirements of this paragraph shall become effective on July 15, 1972. (5) Exception: This paragraph does not apply to concrete vibrators, concrete breakers, powered tampers, jack hammers, rock drills, and similar hand operated power tools. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9250, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1926.301 Hand tools. (a) Employers shall not issue or permit the use of unsafe hand tools. (b) Wrenches, including adjustable, pipe, end, and socket wrenches shall not be used when jaws are sprung to the point that slippage occurs. (c) Impact tools, such as drift pins, wedges, and chisels, shall be kept free of mushroomed heads. (d) The wooden handles of tools shall be kept free of splinters or cracks and shall be kept tight in the tool. § 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools. (a) Electric power-operated tools. (2) The use of electric cords for hoisting or lowering tools shall not be permitted. (b) Pneumatic power tools. (2) Safety clips or retainers shall be securely installed and maintained on pneumatic impact (percussion) tools to prevent attachments from being accidentally expelled. (3) All pneumatically driven nailers, staplers, and other similar equipment provided with automatic fastener feed, which operate at more than 100 p.s.i. pressure at the tool shall have a safety device on the muzzle to prevent the tool from ejecting fasteners, unless the muzzle is in contact with the work surface. (4) Compressed air shall not be used for cleaning purposes except where reduced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then only with effective chip guarding and personal protective equipment which meets the requirements of subpart E of this part. The 30 p.s.i. requirement does not apply for concrete form, mill scale and similar cleaning purposes. (5) The manufacturer's safe operating pressure for hoses, pipes, valves, filters, and other fittings shall not be exceeded, (6) The use of hoses for hoisting or lowering tools shall not be permitted. (7) All hoses exceeding 1/2 (8) Airless spray guns of the type which atomize paints and fluids at high pressures (1,000 pounds or more per square inch) shall be equipped with automatic or visible manual safety devices which will prevent pulling of the trigger to prevent release of the paint or fluid until the safety device is manually released. (9) In lieu of the above, a diffuser nut which will prevent high pressure, high velocity release, while the nozzle tip is removed, plus a nozzle tip guard which will prevent the tip from coming into contact with the operator, or other equivalent protection, shall be provided. (10) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles. (c) Fuel powered tools. (2) When fuel powered tools are used in enclosed spaces, the applicable requirements for concentrations of toxic gases and use of personal protective equipment, as outlined in subparts D and E of this part, shall apply. (d) Hydraulic power tools. (2) The manufacturer's safe operating pressures for hoses, valves, pipes, filters, and other fittings shall not be exceeded. (e) Powder-actuated tools. (2) The tool shall be tested each day before loading to see that safety devices are in proper working condition. The method of testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. (3) Any tool found not in proper working order, or that develops a defect during use, shall be immediately removed from service and not used until properly repaired. (4) Personal protective equipment shall be in accordance with subpart E of this part. (5) Tools shall not be loaded until just prior to the intended firing time. Neither loaded nor empty tools are to be pointed at any employees. Hands shall be kept clear of the open barrel end. (6) Loaded tools shall not be left unattended. (7) Fasteners shall not be driven into very hard or brittle materials including, but not limited to, cast iron, glazed tile, surface-hardened steel, glass block, live rock, face brick, or hollow tile. (8) Driving into materials easily penetrated shall be avoided unless such materials are backed by a substance that will prevent the pin or fastener from passing completely through and creating a flying missile hazard on the other side. (9) No fastener shall be driven into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory fastening. (10) Tools shall not be used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere. (11) All tools shall be used with the correct shield, guard, or attachment recommended by the manufacturer. (12) Powder-actuated tools used by employees shall meet all other applicable requirements of American National Standards Institute, A10.3-1970, Safety Requirements for Explosive-Actuated Fastening Tools. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993] § 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools. (a) Power. (b) Guarding. (2) Guard design. (i) Safety guards on all operations where the work provides a suitable measure of protection to the operator, may be so constructed that the spindle end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; and where the nature of the work is such as to entirely cover the side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be omitted; and (ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on machines designed as portable saws. (c) Use of abrasive wheels. (2) Floor and bench-mounted grinders shall be provided with work rests which are rigidly supported and readily adjustable. Such work rests shall be kept at a distance not to exceed one-eighth inch from the surface of the wheel. (3) Cup type wheels used for external grinding shall be protected by either a revolving cup guard or a band type guard in accordance with the provisions of the American National Standards Institute, B7.1-1970 Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels. All other portable abrasive wheels used for external grinding, shall be provided with safety guards (protection hoods) meeting the requirements of paragraph (c)(5) of this section, except as follows: (i) When the work location makes it impossible, a wheel equipped with safety flanges, as described in paragraph (c)(6) of this section, shall be used; (ii) When wheels 2 inches or less in diameter which are securely mounted on the end of a steel mandrel are used. (4) Portable abrasive wheels used for internal grinding shall be provided with safety flanges (protection flanges) meeting the requirements of paragraph (c)(6) of this section, except as follows: (i) When wheels 2 inches or less in diameter which are securely mounted on the end of a steel mandrel are used; (ii) If the wheel is entirely within the work being ground while in use. (5) When safety guards are required, they shall be so mounted as to maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the guard and its fastenings shall be of sufficient strength to retain fragments of the wheel in case of accidental breakage. The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides shall not exceed 180°. (6) When safety flanges are required, they shall be used only with wheels designed to fit the flanges. Only safety flanges, of a type and design and properly assembled so as to ensure that the pieces of the wheel will be retained in case of accidental breakage, shall be used. (7) All abrasive wheels shall be closely inspected and ring-tested before mounting to ensure that they are free from cracks or defects. (8) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and shall not be forced on. The spindle nut shall be tightened only enough to hold the wheel in place. (9) All employees using abrasive wheels shall be protected by eye protection equipment in accordance with the requirements of subpart E of this part, except when adequate eye protection is afforded by eye shields which are permanently attached to the bench or floor stand. (d) Other requirements. (e) Work rests. 1/8 [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993] § 1926.304 Woodworking tools. (a) Disconnect switches. (b) Speeds. (c) Self-feed. (d) Guarding. (e) Personal protective equipment. (f) Other requirements. (g) Radial saws. (h) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (i) Hand-fed ripsaws. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996] § 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, screw, and hydraulic. (a) General requirements. (2) All jacks shall have a positive stop to prevent overtravel. (b) [Reserved] (c) Blocking. (d)(1) Operation and maintenance. (ii) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freezing temperatures shall be supplied with an adequate antifreeze liquid. (iii) All jacks shall be properly lubricated at regular intervals. (iv) Each jack shall be thoroughly inspected at times which depend upon the service conditions. Inspections shall be not less frequent than the following: ( a ( b ( c (v) Repair or replacement parts shall be examined for possible defects. (vi) Jacks which are out of order shall be tagged accordingly, and shall not be used until repairs are made. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] § 1926.306 Air receivers. (a) General requirements Application. (2) New and existing equipment. (ii) All safety valves used shall be constructed, installed, and maintained in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII Edition 1968. (b) Installation and equipment requirements Installation. (2) Drains and traps. (3) Gages and valves. (ii) No valve of any type shall be placed between the air receiver and its safety valve or valves. (iii) Safety appliances, such as safety valves, indicating devices and controlling devices, shall be constructed, located, and installed so that they cannot be readily rendered inoperative by any means, including the elements. (iv) All safety valves shall be tested frequently and at regular intervals to determine whether they are in good operating condition. [58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] § 1926.307 Mechanical power-transmission apparatus. (a) General requirements. 1/2 13/32 (2) Vertical and inclined belts (paragraphs (e) (3) and (4) of this section) if not more than 2 1/2 (3) For the Textile Industry, because of the presence of excessive deposits of lint, which constitute a serious fire hazard, the sides and face sections only of nip-point belt and pulley guards are required, provided the guard shall extend at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) beyond the rim of the pulley on the in-running and off-running sides of the belt and at least 2 inches (5.08 cm) away from the rim and face of the pulley in all other directions. (4) This section covers the principal features with which power transmission safeguards shall comply. (b) Prime-mover guards Flywheels. (i) With an enclosure of sheet, perforated, or expanded metal, or woven wire; (ii) With guard rails placed not less than 15 inches (38.1 cm) nor more than 20 inches (50.8 cm) from rim. When flywheel extends into pit or is within 12 inches (30.48 cm) of floor, a standard toeboard shall also be provided; (iii) When the upper rim of flywheel protrudes through a working floor, it shall be entirely enclosed or surrounded by a guardrail and toeboard. (iv) For flywheels with smooth rims 5 feet (1.52 m) or less in diameter, where the preceding methods cannot be applied, the following may be used: A disk attached to the flywheel in such manner as to cover the spokes of the wheel on the exposed side and present a smooth surface and edge, at the same time providing means for periodic inspection. An open space, not exceeding 4 inches (10.16 cm) in width, may be left between the outside edge of the disk and the rim of the wheel if desired, to facilitate turning the wheel over. Where a disk is used, the keys or other dangerous projections not covered by disk shall be cut off or covered. This subdivision does not apply to flywheels with solid web centers. (v) Adjustable guard to be used for starting engine or for running adjustment may be provided at the flywheel of gas or oil engines. A slot opening for jack bar will be permitted. (vi) Wherever flywheels are above working areas, guards shall be installed having sufficient strength to hold the weight of the flywheel in the event of a shaft or wheel mounting failure. (2) Cranks and connecting rods. (3) Tail rods or extension piston rods. (c) Shafting Installation. (ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, particularly inclined idler shafts, shall be securely held in position against endwise thrust. (2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (ii) Shafting under bench machines shall be enclosed by a stationary casing, or by a trough at sides and top or sides and bottom, as location requires. The sides of the trough shall come within at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) of the underside of table, or if shafting is located near floor within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of floor. In every case the sides of trough shall extend at least 2 inches (5.08 cm) beyond the shafting or protuberance. (3) Guarding vertical and inclined shafting. (4) Projecting shaft ends. (ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up or covered. (5) Power-transmission apparatus located in basements. (i) The basement, tower, or room occupied by transmission equipment is locked against unauthorized entrance. (ii) The vertical clearance in passageways between the floor and power transmission beams, ceiling, or any other objects, is not less than 5 ft. 6 in. (1.672 m). (iii) The intensity of illumination conforms to the requirements of ANSI A11.1-1965 (R-1970). (iv) [Reserved] (v) The route followed by the oiler is protected in such manner as to prevent accident. (d) Pulleys Guarding. e.g., (2) Location of pulleys. (ii) [Reserved] (3) Broken pulleys. (4) Pulley speeds. (e) Belt, rope, and chain drives Horizontal belts and ropes. (ii) In powerplants or power-development rooms, a guardrail may be used in lieu of the guard required by paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this section. (2) Overhead horizontal belts. (ii) Horizontal overhead belts more than 7 feet (2.128 m) above floor or platform shall be guarded for their entire length under the following conditions: ( a ( b ( c (iii) Where the upper and lower runs of horizontal belts are so located that passage of persons between them would be possible, the passage shall be either: ( a ( b (iv) Overhead chain and link belt drives are governed by the same rules as overhead horizontal belts and shall be guarded in the same manner as belts. (3) Vertical and inclined belts. (ii) All guards for inclined belts shall be arranged in such a manner that a minimum clearance of 7 feet (2.128 m) is maintained between belt and floor at any point outside of guard. (4) Vertical belts. a c (5) Cone-pulley belts. (ii) If the belt is of the endless type or laced with rawhide laces, and a belt shifter is not desired, the belt will be considered guarded if the nip point of the belt and pulley is protected by a nip point guard located in front of the cone extending at least to the top of the largest step of the cone, and formed to show the contour of the cone in order to give the nip point of the belt and pulley the maximum protection. (iii) If the cone is located less than 3 feet (0.912 m) from the floor or working platform, the cone pulley and belt shall be guarded to a height of 3 feet (0.912 m) regardless of whether the belt is endless or laced with rawhide. (6) Belt tighteners. (ii) Where suspended counterweights are used and not guarded by location, they shall be so encased as to prevent accident. (f) Gears, sprockets, and chains Gears. (i) By a complete enclosure; or (ii) By a standard guard as described in paragraph (o) of this section, at least 7 feet (2.128 m) high extending 6 inches (15.24 cm) above the mesh point of the gears; or (iii) By a band guard covering the face of gear and having flanges extended inward beyond the root of the teeth on the exposed side or sides. Where any portion of the train of gears guarded by a band guard is less than 6 feet (1.824 m) from the floor a disk guard or a complete enclosure to the height of 6 feet (1.824 m) shall be required. (2) Hand-operated gears. (3) Sprockets and chains. (4) Openings for oiling. (g) Guarding friction drives. (h) Keys, setscrews, and other projections. (2) It is recommended, however, that no projecting setscrews or oilcups be used in any revolving pulley or part of machinery. (i) Collars and couplings Collars. (2) Couplings. (j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. (k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff couplings, and clutch pulleys Guards. (2) Engine rooms. (l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers, poles, perches, and fasteners Belt shifters. (ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles shall be rounded and be located as far as possible from danger of accidental contact, but within easy reach of the operator. Where belt shifters are not directly located over a machine or bench, the handles shall be cut off 6 ft. 6 in. (1.976 m) above floor level. (2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. (3) Belt perches. (4) Belt fasteners. (m) Standard guards—general requirements Materials. (ii) All metal should be free from burrs and sharp edges. (2) Methods of manufacture. (n) [Reserved] (o) Approved materials Minimum requirements. (i) [Reserved] ( a (2) Wood guards. (3) Guards for horizontal overhead belts. (ii) [Reserved] (iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be provided for the ceiling rafters or overhead floor beams, where such is necessary, to sustain safely the weight and stress likely to be imposed by the guard. The interior surface of all guards, by which is meant the surface of the guard with which a belt will come in contact, shall be smooth and free from all projections of any character, except where construction demands it; protruding shallow roundhead rivets may be used. Overhead belt guards shall be at least one-quarter wider than belt which they protect, except that this clearance need not in any case exceed 6 inches (15.24 cm) on each side. Overhead rope drive and block and roller-chain-drive guards shall be not less than 6 inches (15.24 cm) wider than the drive on each side. In overhead silent chain-drive guards where the chain is held from lateral displacement on the sprockets, the side clearances required on drives of 20 inch (50.8 cm) centers or under shall be not less than 1/4 1/2 (4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope and chain drives. (5) Guardrails and toeboards. (ii) Posts shall be not more than 8 feet (2.432 m) apart; they are to be permanent and substantial, smooth, and free from protruding nails, bolts, and splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall be 1 1/4 1/2 1/2 3/16 (iii) Toeboards shall be 4 inches (10.16 cm) or more in height, of wood, metal, or of metal grill not exceeding 1 inch (2.54 cm) mesh. (p) Care of equipment General. (2) Shafting. (ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts, flammable vapors or flammable liquids exist, the hazard of static sparks from shafting shall be carefully considered. (3) Bearings. (4) Hangers. (5) Pulleys. (6) Care of belts. (i) [Reserved] (ii) Inspection shall be made of belts, lacings, and fasteners and such equipment kept in good repair. (7) Lubrication. [58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993, as amended at 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004] Subpart J—Welding and Cutting Authority: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), or 9-83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable. § 1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. (a) Transporting, moving, and storing compressed gas cylinders. (2) When cylinders are hoisted, they shall be secured on a cradle, slingboard, or pallet. They shall not be hoisted or transported by means of magnets or choker slings. (3) Cylinders shall be moved by tilting and rolling them on their bottom edges. They shall not be intentionally dropped, struck, or permitted to strike each other violently. (4) When cylinders are transported by powered vehicles, they shall be secured in a vertical position. (5) Valve protection caps shall not be used for lifting cylinders from one vertical position to another. Bars shall not be used under valves or valve protection caps to pry cylinders loose when frozen. Warm, not boiling, water shall be used to thaw cylinders loose. (6) Unless cylinders are firmly secured on a special carrier intended for this purpose, regulators shall be removed and valve protection caps put in place before cylinders are moved. (7) A suitable cylinder truck, chain, or other steadying device shall be used to keep cylinders from being knocked over while in use. (8) When work is finished, when cylinders are empty, or when cylinders are moved at any time, the cylinder valve shall be closed. (9) Compressed gas cylinders shall be secured in an upright position at all times except, if necessary, for short periods of time while cylinders are actually being hoisted or carried. (10) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or combustible materials (especially oil or grease), a minimum distance of 20 feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour. (11) Inside of buildings, cylinders shall be stored in a well-protected, well-ventilated, dry location, at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from highly combustible materials such as oil or excelsior. Cylinders should be stored in definitely assigned places away from elevators, stairs, or gangways. Assigned storage places shall be located where cylinders will not be knocked over or damaged by passing or falling objects, or subject to tampering by unauthorized persons. Cylinders shall not be kept in unventilated enclosures such as lockers and cupboards. (12) The in-plant handling, storage, and utilization of all compressed gases in cylinders, portable tanks, rail tankcars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks shall be in accordance with Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-1-1965. (b) Placing cylinders. (2) Cylinders shall be placed where they cannot become part of an electrical circuit. Electrodes shall not be struck against a cylinder to strike an arc. (3) Fuel gas cylinders shall be placed with valve end up whenever they are in use. They shall not be placed in a location where they would be subject to open flame, hot metal, or other sources of artificial heat. (4) Cylinders containing oxygen or acetylene or other fuel gas shall not be taken into confined spaces. (c) Treatment of cylinders. (2) No person other than the gas supplier shall attempt to mix gases in a cylinder. No one except the owner of the cylinder or person authorized by him, shall refill a cylinder. No one shall use a cylinder's contents for purposes other than those intended by the supplier. All cylinders used shall meet the Department of Transportation requirements published in 49 CFR part 178, subpart C, Specification for Cylinders. (3) No damaged or defective cylinder shall be used. (d) Use of fuel gas. (1) Before a regulator to a cylinder valve is connected, the valve shall be opened slightly and closed immediately. (This action is generally termed “cracking” and is intended to clear the valve of dust or dirt that might otherwise enter the regulator.) The person cracking the valve shall stand to one side of the outlet, not in front of it. The valve of a fuel gas cylinder shall not be cracked where the gas would reach welding work, sparks, flame, or other possible sources of ignition. (2) The cylinder valve shall always be opened slowly to prevent damage to the regulator. For quick closing, valves on fuel gas cylinders shall not be opened more than 1 1/2 (3) Fuel gas shall not be used from cylinders through torches or other devices which are equipped with shutoff valves without reducing the pressure through a suitable regulator attached to the cylinder valve or manifold. (4) Before a regulator is removed from a cylinder valve, the cylinder valve shall always be closed and the gas released from the regulator. (5) If, when the valve on a fuel gas cylinder is opened, there is found to be a leak around the valve stem, the valve shall be closed and the gland nut tightened. If this action does not stop the leak, the use of the cylinder shall be discontinued, and it shall be properly tagged and removed from the work area. In the event that fuel gas should leak from the cylinder valve, rather than from the valve stem, and the gas cannot be shut off, the cylinder shall be properly tagged and removed from the work area. If a regulator attached to a cylinder valve will effectively stop a leak through the valve seat, the cylinder need not be removed from the work area. (6) If a leak should develop at a fuse plug or other safety device, the cylinder shall be removed from the work area. (e) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds. (2) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall be placed in safe, well ventilated, and accessible locations. They shall not be located within enclosed spaces. (3) Manifold hose connections, including both ends of the supply hose that lead to the manifold, shall be such that the hose cannot be interchanged between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds and supply header connections. Adapters shall not be used to permit the interchange of hose. Hose connections shall be kept free of grease and oil. (4) When not in use, manifold and header hose connections shall be capped. (5) Nothing shall be placed on top of a manifold, when in use, which will damage the manifold or interfere with the quick closing of the valves. (f) Hose. (2) When parallel sections of oxygen and fuel gas hose are taped together, not more than 4 inches out of 12 inches shall be covered by tape. (3) All hose in use, carrying acetylene, oxygen, natural or manufactured fuel gas, or any gas or substance which may ignite or enter into combustion, or be in any way harmful to employees, shall be inspected at the beginning of each working shift. Defective hose shall be removed from service. (4) Hose which has been subject to flashback, or which shows evidence of severe wear or damage, shall be tested to twice the normal pressure to which it is subject, but in no case less than 300 p.s.i. Defective hose, or hose in doubtful condition, shall not be used. (5) Hose couplings shall be of the type that cannot be unlocked or disconnected by means of a straight pull without rotary motion. (6) Boxes used for the storage of gas hose shall be ventilated. (7) Hoses, cables, and other equipment shall be kept clear of passageways, ladders and stairs. (g) Torches. (2) Torches in use shall be inspected at the beginning of each working shift for leaking shutoff valves, hose couplings, and tip connections. Defective torches shall not be used. (3) Torches shall be lighted by friction lighters or other approved devices, and not by matches or from hot work. (h) Regulators and gauges. (i) Oil and grease hazards. (j) Additional rules. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993] § 1926.351 Arc welding and cutting. (a) Manual electrode holders. (2) Any current-carrying parts passing through the portion of the holder which the arc welder or cutter grips in his hand, and the outer surfaces of the jaws of the holder, shall be fully insulated against the maximum voltage encountered to ground. (b) Welding cables and connectors. (2) Only cable free from repair or splices for a minimum distance of 10 feet from the cable end to which the electrode holder is connected shall be used, except that cables with standard insulated connectors or with splices whose insulating quality is equal to that of the cable are permitted. (3) When it becomes necessary to connect or splice lengths of cable one to another, substantial insulated connectors of a capacity at least equivalent to that of the cable shall be used. If connections are effected by means of cable lugs, they shall be securely fastened together to give good electrical contact, and the exposed metal parts of the lugs shall be completely insulated. (4) Cables in need of repair shall not be used. When a cable, other than the cable lead referred to in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, becomes worn to the extent of exposing bare conductors, the portion thus exposed shall be protected by means of rubber and friction tape or other equivalent insulation. (c) Ground returns and machine grounding. (2) Pipelines containing gases or flammable liquids, or conduits containing electrical circuits, shall not be used as a ground return. For welding on natural gas pipelines, the technical portions of regulations issued by the Department of Transportation, Office of Pipeline Safety, 49 CFR part 192, Minimum Federal Safety Standards for Gas Pipelines, shall apply. (3) When a structure or pipeline is employed as a ground return circuit, it shall be determined that the required electrical contact exists at all joints. The generation of an arc, sparks, or heat at any point shall cause rejection of the structures as a ground circuit. (4) When a structure or pipeline is continuously employed as a ground return circuit, all joints shall be bonded, and periodic inspections shall be conducted to ensure that no condition of electrolysis or fire hazard exists by virtue of such use. (5) The frames of all arc welding and cutting machines shall be grounded either through a third wire in the cable containing the circuit conductor or through a separate wire which is grounded at the source of the current. Grounding circuits, other than by means of the structure, shall be checked to ensure that the circuit between the ground and the grounded power conductor has resistance low enough to permit sufficient current to flow to cause the fuse or circuit breaker to interrupt the current. (6) All ground connections shall be inspected to ensure that they are mechanically strong and electrically adequate for the required current. (d) Operating instructions. (1) When electrode holders are to be left unattended, the electrodes shall be removed and the holders shall be so placed or protected that they cannot make electrical contact with employees or conducting objects. (2) Hot electrode holders shall not be dipped in water; to do so may expose the arc welder or cutter to electric shock. (3) When the arc welder or cutter has occasion to leave his work or to stop work for any appreciable length of time, or when the arc welding or cutting machine is to be moved, the power supply switch to the equipment shall be opened. (4) Any faulty or defective equipment shall be reported to the supervisor. (5) See § 1926.406(c) for additional requirements. (e) Shielding. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986] § 1926.352 Fire prevention. (a) When practical, objects to be welded, cut, or heated shall be moved to a designated safe location or, if the objects to be welded, cut, or heated cannot be readily moved, all movable fire hazards in the vicinity shall be taken to a safe place, or otherwise protected. (b) If the object to be welded, cut, or heated cannot be moved and if all the fire hazards cannot be removed, positive means shall be taken to confine the heat, sparks, and slag, and to protect the immovable fire hazards from them. (c) No welding, cutting, or heating shall be done where the application of flammable paints, or the presence of other flammable compounds, or heavy dust concentrations creates a hazard. (d) Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall be immediately available in the work area and shall be maintained in a state of readiness for instant use. (e) When the welding, cutting, or heating operation is such that normal fire prevention precautions are not sufficient, additional personnel shall be assigned to guard against fire while the actual welding, cutting, or heating operation is being performed, and for a sufficient period of time after completion of the work to ensure that no possibility of fire exists. Such personnel shall be instructed as to the specific anticipated fire hazards and how the firefighting equipment provided is to be used. (f) When welding, cutting, or heating is performed on walls, floors, and ceilings, since direct penetration of sparks or heat transfer may introduce a fire hazard to an adjacent area, the same precautions shall be taken on the opposite side as are taken on the side on which the welding is being performed. (g) For the elimination of possible fire in enclosed spaces as a result of gas escaping through leaking or improperly closed torch valves, the gas supply to the torch shall be positively shut off at some point outside the enclosed space whenever the torch is not to be used or whenever the torch is left unattended for a substantial period of time, such as during the lunch period. Overnight and at the change of shifts, the torch and hose shall be removed from the confined space. Open end fuel gas and oxygen hoses shall be immediately removed from enclosed spaces when they are disconnected from the torch or other gas-consuming device. (h) Except when the contents are being removed or transferred, drums, pails, and other containers which contain or have contained flammable liquids shall be kept closed. Empty containers shall be removed to a safe area apart from hot work operations or open flames. (i) Drums containers, or hollow structures which have contained toxic or flammable substances shall, before welding, cutting, or heating is undertaken on them, either be filled with water or thoroughly cleaned of such substances and ventilated and tested. For welding, cutting and heating on steel pipelines containing natural gas, the pertinent portions of regulations issued by the Department of Transportation, Office of Pipeline Safety, 49 CFR part 192, Minimum Federal Safety Standards for Gas Pipelines, shall apply. (j) Before heat is applied to a drum, container, or hollow structure, a vent or opening shall be provided for the release of any built-up pressure during the application of heat. § 1926.353 Ventilation and protection in welding, cutting, and heating. (a) Mechanical ventilation. (1) Mechanical ventilation shall consist of either general mechanical ventilation systems or local exhaust systems. (2) General mechanical ventilation shall be of sufficient capacity and so arranged as to produce the number of air changes necessary to maintain welding fumes and smoke within safe limits, as defined in subpart D of this part. (3) Local exhaust ventilation shall consist of freely movable hoods intended to be placed by the welder or burner as close as practicable to the work. This system shall be of sufficient capacity and so arranged as to remove fumes and smoke at the source and keep the concentration of them in the breathing zone within safe limits as defined in subpart D of this part. (4) Contaminated air exhausted from a working space shall be discharged into the open air or otherwise clear of the source of intake air. (5) All air replacing that withdrawn shall be clean and respirable. (6) Oxygen shall not be used for ventilation purposes, comfort cooling, blowing dust from clothing, or for cleaning the work area. (b) Welding, cutting, and heating in confined spaces. (2) When sufficient ventilation cannot be obtained without blocking the means of access, employees in the confined space shall be protected by air line respirators in accordance with the requirements of subpart E of this part, and an employee on the outside of such a confined space shall be assigned to maintain communication with those working within it and to aid them in an emergency. (3) Lifelines. (c) Welding, cutting, or heating of metals of toxic significance. (i) Zinc-bearing base or filler metals or metals coated with zinc-bearing materials; (ii) Lead base metals; (iii) Cadmium-bearing filler materials; (iv) Chromium-bearing metals or metals coated with chromium-bearing materials. (2) Welding, cutting, or heating in any enclosed spaces involving the metals specified in this subparagraph shall be performed with local exhaust ventilation in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, or employees shall be protected by air line respirators in accordance with the requirements of subpart E of this part: (i) Metals containing lead, other than as an impurity, or metals coated with lead-bearing materials; (ii) Cadmium-bearing or cadmium-coated base metals; (iii) Metals coated with mercury-bearing metals; (iv) Beryllium-containing base or filler metals. Because of its high toxicity, work involving beryllium shall be done with both local exhaust ventilation and air line respirators. (3) Employees performing such operations in the open air shall be protected by filter-type respirators in accordance with the requirements of subpart E of this part, except that employees performing such operations on beryllium-containing base or filler metals shall be protected by air line respirators in accordance with the requirements of subpart E of this part. (4) Other employees exposed to the same atmosphere as the welders or burners shall be protected in the same manner as the welder or burner. (d) Inert-gas metal-arc welding. (i) The use of chlorinated solvents shall be kept at least 200 feet, unless shielded, from the exposed arc, and surfaces prepared with chlorinated solvents shall be thoroughly dry before welding is permitted on such surfaces. (ii) Employees in the area not protected from the arc by screening shall be protected by filter lenses meeting the requirements of subpart E of this part. When two or more welders are exposed to each other's arc, filter lens goggles of a suitable type, meeting the requirements of subpart E of this part, shall be worn under welding helmets. Hand shields to protect the welder against flashes and radiant energy shall be used when either the helmet is lifted or the shield is removed. (iii) Welders and other employees who are exposed to radiation shall be suitably protected so that the skin is covered completely to prevent burns and other damage by ultraviolet rays. Welding helmets and hand shields shall be free of leaks and openings, and free of highly reflective surfaces. (iv) When inert-gas metal-arc welding is being performed on stainless steel, the requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section shall be met to protect against dangerous concentrations of nitrogen dioxide. (e) General welding, cutting, and heating. (2) Employees performing any type of welding, cutting, or heating shall be protected by suitable eye protective equipment in accordance with the requirements of subpart E of this part. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993] § 1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heating in way of preservative coatings. (a) Before welding, cutting, or heating is commenced on any surface covered by a preservative coating whose flammability is not known, a test shall be made by a competent person to determine its flammability. Preservative coatings shall be considered to be highly flammable when scrapings burn with extreme rapidity. (b) Precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of highly flammable hardened preservative coatings. When coatings are determined to be highly flammable, they shall be stripped from the area to be heated to prevent ignition. (c) Protection against toxic preservative coatings: (1) In enclosed spaces, all surfaces covered with toxic preservatives shall be stripped of all toxic coatings for a distance of at least 4 inches from the area of heat application, or the employees shall be protected by air line respirators, meeting the requirements of subpart E of this part. (2) In the open air, employees shall be protected by a respirator, in accordance with requirements of subpart E of this part. (d) The preservative coatings shall be removed a sufficient distance from the area to be heated to ensure that the temperature of the unstripped metal will not be appreciably raised. Artificial cooling of the metal surrounding the heating area may be used to limit the size of the area required to be cleaned. Subpart K—Electrical Authority: 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; 40 U.S.C. 333; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033) or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911. Source: 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, unless otherwise noted. General § 1926.400 Introduction. This subpart addresses electrical safety requirements that are necessary for the practical safeguarding of employees involved in construction work and is divided into four major divisions and applicable definitions as follows: (a) Installation safety requirements. (b) Safety-related work practices. (c) Safety-related maintenance and environmental considerations. (d) Safety requirements for special equipment. (e) Definitions. § 1926.401 [Reserved] Installation Safety Requirements § 1926.402 Applicability. (a) Covered. Note: If the electrical installation is made in accordance with the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70-1984, exclusive of Formal Interpretations and Tentative Interim Amendments, it will be deemed to be in compliance with §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408, except for §§ 1926.404(b)(1) and 1926.405(a)(2)(ii) (E), (F), (G), and (J). (b) Not covered. § 1926.403 General requirements. (a) Approval. (b) Examination, installation, and use of equipment Examination. (i) Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the provisions of this subpart. Suitability of equipment for an identified purpose may be evidenced by listing, labeling, or certification for that identified purpose. (ii) Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts designed to enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the protection thus provided. (iii) Electrical insulation. (iv) Heating effects under conditions of use. (v) Arcing effects. (vi) Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity, specific use. (vii) Other factors which contribute to the practical safeguarding of employees using or likely to come in contact with the equipment. (2) Installation and use. (c) Interrupting rating. (d) Mounting and cooling of equipment Mounting. (2) Cooling. (e) Splices. (f) Arcing parts. (g) Marking. (h) Identification of disconnecting means and circuits. (i) 600 Volts, nominal, or less. (1) Working space about electric equipment. (i) Working clearances. Table K-1—Working Clearances Nominal voltage to ground Minimum clear distance for conditions 1 (a) (b) (c) Feet 2 Feet 2 Feet 2 0-150 3 3 3 151-600 3 3 1 2 4 1 2 (ii) Clear spaces. (iii) Access and entrance to working space. (iv) Front working space. (v) Headroom. (2) Guarding of live parts. (A) By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is accessible only to qualified persons. (B) By partitions or screens so arranged that only qualified persons will have access to the space within reach of the live parts. Any openings in such partitions or screens shall be so sized and located that persons are not likely to come into accidental contact with the live parts or to bring conducting objects into contact with them. (C) By location on a balcony, gallery, or platform so elevated and arranged as to exclude unqualified persons. (D) By elevation of 8 feet (2.44 m) or more above the floor or other working surface and so installed as to exclude unqualified persons. (ii) In locations where electric equipment would be exposed to physical damage, enclosures or guards shall be so arranged and of such strength as to prevent such damage. (iii) Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing exposed live parts shall be marked with conspicuous warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to enter. (j) Over 600 volts, nominal General. (2) Enclosure for electrical installations. (i) Installations accessible to qualified persons only. (ii) Installations accessible to unqualified persons. (3) Workspace about equipment. (i) Working space. Table K-2—Minimum Depth of Clear Working Space in Front of Electric Equipment Nominal voltage to ground Conditions 1 (a) (b) (c) Feet 2 Feet 2 Feet 2 601 to 2,500 3 4 5 2,501 to 9,000 4 5 6 9,001 to 25,000 5 6 9 25,001 to 75 kV 6 8 10 Above 75kV 8 10 12 1 2 Note: (ii) Lighting outlets and points of control. (iii) Elevation of unguarded live parts. Table K-3—Elevation of Unguarded Energized Parts Above Working Space Nominal voltage between phases Minimum elevation 601-7,500 8 feet 6 inches. 1 7,501-35,000 9 feet. Over 35kV 9 feet + 0.37 inches per kV above 35kV. 1 Note: (4) Entrance and access to workspace. [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] § 1926.404 Wiring design and protection. (a) Use and identification of grounded and grounding conductors Identification of conductors. (2) Polarity of connections. (3) Use of grounding terminals and devices. (b) Branch circuits Ground-fault protection General. (ii) Ground-fault circuit interrupters. (iii) Assured equipment grounding conductor program. (A) A written description of the program, including the specific procedures adopted by the employer, shall be available at the jobsite for inspection and copying by the Assistant Secretary and any affected employee. (B) The employer shall designate one or more competent persons (as defined in § 1926.32(f)) to implement the program. (C) Each cord set, attachment cap, plug and receptacle of cord sets, and any equipment connected by cord and plug, except cord sets and receptacles which are fixed and not exposed to damage, shall be visually inspected before each day's use for external defects, such as deformed or missing pins or insulation damage, and for indications of possible internal damage. Equipment found damaged or defective shall not be used until repaired. (D) The following tests shall be performed on all cord sets, receptacles which are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure, and cord- and plug-connected equipment required to be grounded: ( 1 ( 2 (E) All required tests shall be performed: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (F) The employer shall not make available or permit the use by employees of any equipment which has not met the requirements of this paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section. (G) Tests performed as required in this paragraph shall be recorded. This test record shall identify each receptacle, cord set, and cord- and plug-connected equipment that passed the test and shall indicate the last date it was tested or the interval for which it was tested. This record shall be kept by means of logs, color coding, or other effective means and shall be maintained until replaced by a more current record. The record shall be made available on the jobsite for inspection by the Assistant Secretary and any affected employee. (2) Outlet devices. (i) Single receptacles. (ii) Two or more receptacles. (iii) Receptacles used for the connection of motors. Table K-4—Receptacle Ratings for Various Size Circuits Circuit rating amperes Receptacle rating amperes 15 Not over 15. 20 15 or 20. 30 30. 40 40 or 50. 50 50. (c) Outside conductors and lamps 600 volts, nominal, or less. (i) Conductors on poles. (A) Power conductors below communication conductors—30 inches (762 mm) . (B) Power conductors alone or above communication conductors: 300 volts or less—24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 volts—30 inches (762 mm). (C) Communication conductors below power conductors: with power conductors 300 volts or less—24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 volts—30 inches (762 mm). (ii) Clearance from ground. (A) 10 feet (3.05 m)—above finished grade, sidewalks, or from any platform or projection from which they might be reached. (B) 12 feet (3.66 m)—over areas subject to vehicular traffic other than truck traffic. (C) 15 feet (4.57 m)—over areas other than those specified in paragraph (c)(1)(ii)(D) of this section that are subject to truck traffic. (D) 18 feet (5.49 m)—over public streets, alleys, roads, and driveways. (iii) Clearance from building openings. (iv) Clearance over roofs. (A) Where the roof space is also accessible to vehicular traffic, the vertical clearance shall not be less than 18 feet (5.49 m), or (B) Where the roof space is not normally accessible to employees on foot, fully insulated conductors shall have a vertical or diagonal clearance of not less than 3 feet (914 mm), or (C) Where the voltage between conductors is 300 volts or less and the roof has a slope of not less than 4 inches (102 mm) in 12 inches (305 mm), the clearance from roofs shall be at least 3 feet (914 mm), or (D) Where the voltage between conductors is 300 volts or less and the conductors do not pass over more than 4 feet (1.22 m) of the overhang portion of the roof and they are terminated at a through-the-roof raceway or support, the clearance from roofs shall be at least 18 inches (457 mm). (2) Location of outdoor lamps. (d) Services Disconnecting means General. (ii) Simultaneous opening of poles. (2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. (i) Guarding. (ii) Warning signs. (e) Overcurrent protection 600 volts, nominal, or less. (i) Protection of conductors and equipment. (ii) Grounded conductors. (iii) Disconnection of fuses and thermal cutouts. (iv) Location in or on premises. (v) Arcing or suddenly moving parts. (vi) Circuit breakers (B) Where circuit breaker handles on switchboards are operated vertically rather than horizontally or rotationally, the up position of the handle shall be the closed (on) position. (C) If used as switches in 120-volt, fluorescent lighting circuits, circuit breakers shall be marked “SWD.” (2) Over 600 volts, nominal. (f) Grounding. (1) Systems to be grounded. (i) Three-wire DC systems. (ii) Two-wire DC systems. (iii) AC circuits, less than 50 volts. (iv) AC systems, 50 volts to 1000 volts. (A) If the system can be so grounded that the maximum voltage to ground on the ungrounded conductors does not exceed 150 volts; (B) If the system is nominally rated 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which the neutral is used as a circuit conductor; (C) If the system is nominally rated 240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which the midpoint of one phase is used as a circuit conductor; or (D) If a service conductor is uninsulated. (v) Exceptions. (A) The system is used exclusively for control circuits, (B) The conditions of maintenance and supervision assure that only qualified persons will service the installation, (C) Continuity of control power is required, and (D) Ground detectors are installed on the control system. (2) Separately derived systems. (3) Portable and vehicle-mounted generators Portable generators. (A) The generator supplies only equipment mounted on the generator and/or cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on the generator, and (B) The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment and the equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are bonded to the generator frame. (ii) Vehicle-mounted generators. (A) The frame of the generator is bonded to the vehicle frame, and (B) The generator supplies only equipment located on the vehicle and/or cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on the vehicle or on the generator, and (C) The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment and the equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are bonded to the generator frame, and (D) The system complies with all other provisions of this section. (iii) Neutral conductor bonding. (4) Conductors to be grounded. (5) Grounding connections Grounded system. (ii) Ungrounded systems. (6) Grounding path. (7) Supports, enclosures, and equipment to be grounded Supports and enclosures for conductors. (A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves that are used to protect cable assemblies from physical damage need not be grounded; and (B) Metal enclosures for conductors added to existing installations of open wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable need not be grounded if all of the following conditions are met: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (ii) Service equipment enclosures. (iii) Fixed equipment. (A) If within 8 feet (2.44 m) vertically or 5 feet (1.52 m) horizontally of ground or grounded metal objects and subject to employee contact. (B) If located in a wet or damp location and subject to employee contact. (C) If in electrical contact with metal. (D) If in a hazardous (classified) location. (E) If supplied by a metal-clad, metal-sheathed, or grounded metal raceway wiring method. (F) If equipment operates with any terminal at over 150 volts to ground; however, the following need not be grounded: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (iv) Equipment connected by cord and plug. (A) If in a hazardous (classified) location (see § 1926.407). (B) If operated at over 150 volts to ground, except for guarded motors and metal frames of electrically heated appliances if the appliance frames are permanently and effectively insulated from ground. (C) If the equipment is one of the types listed in paragraphs (f)(7)(iv)(C)( 1 5 6 ( 1 (2) Cord- and plug-connected equipment used in damp or wet locations or by employees standing on the ground or on metal floors or working inside of metal tanks or boilers; ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 (v) Nonelectrical equipment. (8) Methods of grounding equipment With circuit conductors. (ii) Grounding conductor. (iii) Equipment considered effectively grounded. (9) Bonding. (10) Made electrodes. (11) Grounding of systems and circuits of 1000 volts and over (high voltage) General. (ii) Grounding of systems supplying portable or mobile equipment. (A) Portable and mobile high voltage equipment shall be supplied from a system having its neutral grounded through an impedance. If a delta-connected high voltage system is used to supply the equipment, a system neutral shall be derived. (B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of portable and mobile equipment shall be connected by an equipment grounding conductor to the point at which the system neutral impedance is grounded. (C) Ground-fault detection and relaying shall be provided to automatically de-energize any high voltage system component which has developed a ground fault. The continuity of the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuously monitored so as to de-energize automatically the high voltage feeder to the portable equipment upon loss of continuity of the equipment grounding conductor. (D) The grounding electrode to which the portable or mobile equipment system neutral impedance is connected shall be isolated from and separated in the ground by at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from any other system or equipment grounding electrode, and there shall be no direct connection between the grounding electrodes, such as buried pipe, fence or like objects. (iii) Grounding of equipment. [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] § 1926.405 Wiring methods, components, and equipment for general use. (a) Wiring methods. (1) General requirements Electrical continuity of metal raceways and enclosures. (ii) Wiring in ducts. (2) Temporary wiring Scope. (ii) General requirements for temporary wiring. (B) Branch circuits shall originate in a power outlet or panelboard. Conductors shall be run as multiconductor cord or cable assemblies or open conductors, or shall be run in raceways. All conductors shall be protected by overcurrent devices at their ampacity. Runs of open conductors shall be located where the conductors will not be subject to physical damage, and the conductors shall be fastened at intervals not exceeding 10 feet (3.05 m). No branch-circuit conductors shall be laid on the floor. Each branch circuit that supplies receptacles or fixed equipment shall contain a separate equipment grounding conductor if the branch circuit is run as open conductors. (C) Receptacles shall be of the grounding type. Unless installed in a complete metallic raceway, each branch circuit shall contain a separate equipment grounding conductor, and all receptacles shall be electrically connected to the grounding conductor. Receptacles for uses other than temporary lighting shall not be installed on branch circuits which supply temporary lighting. Receptacles shall not be connected to the same ungrounded conductor of multiwire circuits which supply temporary lighting. (D) Disconnecting switches or plug connectors shall be installed to permit the disconnection of all ungrounded conductors of each temporary circuit. (E) All lamps for general illumination shall be protected from accidental contact or breakage. Metal-case sockets shall be grounded. (F) Temporary lights shall not be suspended by their electric cords unless cords and lights are designed for this means of suspension. (G) Portable electric lighting used in wet and/or other conductive locations, as for example, drums, tanks, and vessels, shall be operated at 12 volts or less. However, 120-volt lights may be used if protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter. (H) A box shall be used wherever a change is made to a raceway system or a cable system which is metal clad or metal sheathed. (I) Flexible cords and cables shall be protected from damage. Sharp corners and projections shall be avoided. Flexible cords and cables may pass through doorways or other pinch points, if protection is provided to avoid damage. (J) Extension cord sets used with portable electric tools and appliances shall be of three-wire type and shall be designed for hard or extra-hard usage. Flexible cords used with temporary and portable lights shall be designed for hard or extra-hard usage. Note: The National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, in Article 400, Table 400-4, lists various types of flexible cords, some of which are noted as being designed for hard or extra-hard usage. Examples of these types of flexible cords include hard service cord (types S, ST, SO, STO) and junior hard service cord (types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO). (iii) Guarding. (b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or fittings. (2) Covers and canopies. (3) Pull and junction boxes for systems over 600 volts, nominal. (i) Complete enclosure. (ii) Covers. (c) Knife switches. (d) Switchboards and panelboards. (e) Enclosures for damp or wet locations Cabinets, fittings, and boxes. (2) Switches and circuit breakers. (f) Conductors for general wiring. (g) Flexible cords and cables Use of flexible cords and cables Permitted uses. (A) Pendants; (B) Wiring of fixtures; (C) Connection of portable lamps or appliances; (D) Elevator cables; (E) Wiring of cranes and hoists; (F) Connection of stationary equipment to facilitate their frequent interchange; (G) Prevention of the transmission of noise or vibration; or (H) Appliances where the fastening means and mechanical connections are designed to permit removal for maintenance and repair. (ii) Attachment plugs for cords. (iii) Prohibited uses. (A) As a substitute for the fixed wiring of a structure; (B) Where run through holes in walls, ceilings, or floors; (C) Where run through doorways, windows, or similar openings, except as permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(I) of this section; (D) Where attached to building surfaces; or (E) Where concealed behind building walls, ceilings, or floors. (2) Identification, splices, and terminations Identification. (ii) Marking. (iii) Splices. (iv) Strain relief. (v) Cords passing through holes. (h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nominal. (i) Fixture wires General. (2) Uses permitted. (i) For installation in lighting, fixtures and in similar equipment where enclosed or protected and not subject to bending or twisting in use; or (ii) For connecting lighting fixtures to the branch-circuit conductors supplying the fixtures. (3) Uses not permitted. (j) Equipment for general use Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps, and receptacles Live parts. (ii) Support. (iii) Portable lamps. (A) Metal shell, paperlined lampholders shall not be used; (B) Handlamps shall be equipped with a handle of molded composition or other insulating material; (C) Handlamps shall be equipped with a substantial guard attached to the lampholder or handle; (D) Metallic guards shall be grounded by the means of an equipment grounding conductor run within the power supply cord. (iv) Lampholders. (v) Fixtures. (2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs (caps) Configuration. (ii) Damp and wet locations. (3) Appliances Live parts. (ii) Disconnecting means. (iii) Rating. (4) Motors. (i) In sight from. (ii) Disconnecting means (B) The disconnecting means shall disconnect the motor and the controller from all ungrounded supply conductors and shall be so designed that no pole can be operated independently. (C) If a motor and the driven machinery are not in sight from the controller location, the installation shall comply with one of the following conditions: ( 1 ( 2 (D) The disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the open (off) or closed (on) position. (E) The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible. If more than one disconnect is provided for the same equipment, only one need be readily accessible. (F) An individual disconnecting means shall be provided for each motor, but a single disconnecting means may be used for a group of motors under any one of the following conditions: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (iii) Motor overload, short-circuit, and ground-fault protection. (iv) Protection of live parts—all voltages. ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) Where live parts of motors or controllers operating at over 150 volts to ground are guarded against accidental contact only by location, and where adjustment or other attendance may be necessary during the operation of the apparatus, insulating mats or platforms shall be provided so that the attendant cannot readily touch live parts unless standing on the mats or platforms. (5) Transformers Application. (A) Current transformers; (B) Dry-type transformers installed as a component part of other apparatus; (C) Transformers which are an integral part of an X-ray, high frequency, or electrostatic-coating apparatus; (D) Transformers used with Class 2 and Class 3 circuits, sign and outline lighting, electric discharge lighting, and power-limited fire-protective signaling circuits. (ii) Operating voltage. (iii) Transformers over 35 kV. (iv) Oil-insulated transformers. (v) Fire protection. (vi) Transformer vaults. (vii) Pipes and ducts. (viii) Material storage. (6) Capacitors Drainage of stored charge. (ii) Over 600 volts. (A) Isolating or disconnecting switches (with no interrupting rating) shall be interlocked with the load interrupting device or shall be provided with prominently displayed caution signs to prevent switching load current. (B) For series capacitors the proper switching shall be assured by use of at least one of the following: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 85 FR 8736, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1926.406 Specific purpose equipment and installations. (a) Cranes and hoists. (1) Disconnecting means Runway conductor disconnecting means. (ii) Disconnecting means for cranes and monorail hoists. (A) If this additional disconnecting means is not readily accessible from the crane or monorail hoist operating station, means shall be provided at the operating station to open the power circuit to all motors of the crane or monorail hoist. (B) The additional disconnect may be omitted if a monorail hoist or hand-propelled crane bridge installation meets all of the following: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (2) Control. (3) Clearance. (4) Grounding. (b) Elevators, escalators, and moving walks Disconnecting means. (2) Control panels. (c) Electric welders—disconnecting means Motor-generator, AC transformer, and DC rectifier arc welders. (2) Resistance welders. (d) X-Ray equipment Disconnecting means General. (ii) More than one piece of equipment. (2) Control—Radiographic and fluoroscopic types. § 1926.407 Hazardous (classified) locations. (a) Scope. Class I, Division 1 Class I, Division 2 Class II, Division 1 Class II, Division 2 Class III, Division l Class III, Division 2 For definitions of these locations see § 1926.449. All applicable requirements in this subpart apply to all hazardous (classified) locations, unless modified by provisions of this section. (b) Electrical installations. (1) Intrinsically safe. (2) Approved for the hazardous (classified) location General. Note: NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code, lists or defines hazardous gases, vapors, and dusts by “Groups” characterized by their ignitible or combustible properties. (ii) Marking. (A) Equipment of the non-heat-producing type (such as junction boxes, conduit, and fitting) and equipment of the heat-producing type having a maximum temperature of not more than 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) need not have a marked operating temperature or temperature range. (B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked for use only in Class I, Division 2 locations need not be marked to indicate the group. (C) Fixed general-purpose equipment in Class I locations, other than lighting fixtures, which is acceptable for use in Class I, Division 2 locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating temperature. (D) Fixed dust-tight equipment, other than lighting fixtures, which is acceptable for use in Class II, Division 2 and Class III locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating temperature. (3) Safe for the hazardous (classified) location. Note: The National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, contains guidelines for determining the type and design of equipment and installations which will meet this requirement. The guidelines of this document address electric wiring, equipment, and systems installed in hazardous (classified) locations and contain specific provisions for the following: wiring methods, wiring connections, conductor insulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage, transformers, capacitors, switches, circuit breakers, fuses, motor controllers, receptacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, instruments, resistors, generators, motors, lighting fixtures, storage battery charging equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists and similar equipment, utilization equipment, signaling systems, alarm systems, remote control systems, local loud speaker and communication systems, ventilation piping, live parts, lightning surge protection, and grounding. Compliance with these guidelines will constitute one means, but not the only means, of compliance with this paragraph. (c) Conduits. [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] § 1926.408 Special systems. (a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal. (1) Wiring methods for fixed installations Above ground. (ii) Installations emerging from the ground. (2) Interrupting and isolating devices Circuit breakers. (ii) Fused cutouts. (iii) Equipment isolating means. (3) Mobile and portable equipment Power cable connections to mobile machines. (ii) Guarding live parts. (4) Tunnel installations Application. (ii) Conductors. (A) Metal conduit or other metal raceway, (B) Type MC cable, or (C) Other suitable multiconductor cable. Conductors shall also be so located or guarded as to protect them from physical damage. Multiconductor portable cable may supply mobile equipment. An equipment grounding conductor shall be run with circuit conductors inside the metal raceway or inside the multiconductor cable jacket. The equipment grounding conductor may be insulated or bare. (iii) Guarding live parts. (iv) Disconnecting means. (v) Grounding and bonding. (b) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and power-limited circuits Classification. (i) Class 1 circuits. (B) A Class 1 remote control circuit or a Class 1 signaling circuit has a voltage which does not exceed 600 volts; however, the power output of the source need not be limited. (ii) Class 2 and Class 3 circuits. (B) The maximum circuit voltage is 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2 inherently limited power source, and 100 volts AC or DC for a Class 3 inherently limited power source. (C) The maximum circuit voltage is 30 volts AC and 60 volts DC for a Class 2 power source limited by overcurrent protection, and 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 3 power source limited by overcurrent protection. (iii) Application. (2) Marking. (c) Communications systems Scope. (2) Protective devices Circuits exposed to power conductors. (ii) Antenna lead-ins. (3) Conductor location Outside of buildings (B) The clearance between lead-in conductors and any lightning protection conductors shall not be less than 6 feet (1.83 m). (ii) On poles. (iii) Inside of buildings. (4) Equipment location. (5) Grounding Lead-in conductors. (ii) Antenna structures. (iii) Equipment enclosures. [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] §§ 1926.409-1926.415 [Reserved] Safety-Related Work Practices § 1926.416 General requirements. (a) Protection of employees. (2) In work areas where the exact location of underground electric powerlines is unknown, employees using jack-hammers, bars, or other hand tools which may contact a line shall be provided with insulated protective gloves. (3) Before work is begun the employer shall ascertain by inquiry or direct observation, or by instruments, whether any part of an energized electric power circuit, exposed or concealed, is so located that the performance of the work may bring any person, tool, or machine into physical or electrical contact with the electric power circuit. The employer shall post and maintain proper warning signs where such a circuit exists. The employer shall advise employees of the location of such lines, the hazards involved, and the protective measures to be taken. (b) Passageways and open spaces (2) Working spaces, walkways, and similar locations shall be kept clear of cords so as not to create a hazard to employees. (c) Load ratings. (d) Fuses. (e) Cords and cables. (2) Extension cords shall not be fastened with staples, hung from nails, or suspended by wire. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 41738, Aug. 12, 1996] § 1926.417 Lockout and tagging of circuits. (a) Controls. (b) Equipment and circuits. (c) Tags. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35181, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 41739, Aug. 12, 1996]] §§ 1926.418-1926.430 [Reserved] Safety-Related Maintenance and Environmental Considerations § 1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. The employer shall ensure that all wiring components and utilization equipment in hazardous locations are maintained in a dust-tight, dust-ignition-proof, or explosion-proof condition, as appropriate. There shall be no loose or missing screws, gaskets, threaded connections, seals, or other impairments to a tight condition. § 1926.432 Environmental deterioration of equipment. (a) Deteriorating agents. (i) In damp or wet locations; (ii) Where exposed to gases, fumes, vapors, liquids, or other agents having a deteriorating effect on the conductors or equipment; or (iii) Where exposed to excessive temperatures. (2) Control equipment, utilization equipment, and busways approved for use in dry locations only shall be protected against damage from the weather during building construction. (b) Protection against corrosion. §§ 1926.433-1926.440 [Reserved] Safety Requirements for Special Equipment § 1926.441 Batteries and battery charging. (a) General requirements. (2) Ventilation shall be provided to ensure diffusion of the gases from the battery and to prevent the accumulation of an explosive mixture. (3) Racks and trays shall be substantial and shall be treated to make them resistant to the electrolyte. (4) Floors shall be of acid resistant construction unless protected from acid accumulations. (5) Face shields, aprons, and rubber gloves shall be provided for workers handling acids or batteries. (6) Facilities for quick drenching of the eyes and body shall be provided within 25 feet (7.62 m) of battery handling areas. (7) Facilities shall be provided for flushing and neutralizing spilled electrolyte and for fire protection. (b) Charging. (2) Charging apparatus shall be protected from damage by trucks. (3) When batteries are being charged, the vent caps shall be kept in place to avoid electrolyte spray. Vent caps shall be maintained in functioning condition. §§ 1926.442-1926.448 [Reserved] Definitions § 1926.449 Definitions applicable to this subpart. The definitions given in this section apply to the terms used in subpart K. The definitions given here for “approved” and “qualified person” apply, instead of the definitions given in § 1926.32, to the use of these terms in subpart K. Acceptable. (a) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or otherwise determined to be safe by a qualified testing laboratory capable of determining the suitability of materials and equipment for installation and use in accordance with this standard; or (b) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no qualified testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by another Federal agency, or by a State, municipal, or other local authority responsible for enforcing occupational safety provisions of the National Electrical Code, and found in compliance with those provisions; or (c) With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations which are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by a particular customer, if it is determined to be safe for its intended use by its manufacturer on the basis of test data which the employer keeps and makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary and his authorized representatives. Accepted. Accessible. “concealed” “exposed.”) Accessible. “Readily accessible.”) Ampacity. Appliances. Approved. Askarel. Attachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap). Automatic. Bare conductor. “Conductor.” Bonding. Bonding jumper. Branch circuit. Building. Cabinet. Certified. (a) Has been tested and found by a qualified testing laboratory to meet applicable test standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner, and (b) Is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a qualified testing laboratory. Certified equipment must bear a label, tag, or other record of certification. Circuit breaker (b) (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A switching device capable of making, carrying, and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions, and also making, carrying for a specified time, and breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions, such as those of short circuit. Class I locations. (a) Class I, Division 1. (1) In which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may exist under normal operating conditions; or (2) In which ignitible concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or (3) In which breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or processes might release ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, and might also cause simultaneous failure of electric equipment. Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred from one container to another; interiors of spray booths and areas in the vicinity of spraying and painting operations where volatile flammable solvents are used; locations containing open tanks or vats of volatile flammable liquids; drying rooms or compartments for the evaporation of flammable solvents; inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas or for volatile flammable liquids; and all other locations where ignitible concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to occur in the course of normal operations. (b) Class I, Division 2. (1) In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed, or used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or in case of abnormal operation of equipment; or (2) In which ignitible concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, and which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operations of the ventilating equipment; or (3) That is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, and to which ignitible concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided. Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which would become hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual operating condition. The quantity of flammable material that might escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total area involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all factors that merit consideration in determining the classification and extent of each location. Piping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would not ordinarily introduce a hazardous condition even though used for flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of flammable liquids or of liquefied or compressed gases in sealed containers would not normally be considered hazardous unless also subject to other hazardous conditions. Electrical conduits and their associated enclosures separated from process fluids by a single seal or barrier are classed as a Division 2 location if the outside of the conduit and enclosures is a nonhazardous location. Class II locations. (a) Class II, Division 1. (1) In which combustible dust is or may be in suspension in the air under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures; or (2) Where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of machinery or equipment might cause such explosive or ignitible mixtures to be produced, and might also provide a source of ignition through simultaneous failure of electric equipment, operation of protection devices, or from other causes, or (3) In which combustible dusts of an electrically conductive nature may be present. Note: Combustible dusts which are electrically nonconductive include dusts produced in the handling and processing of grain and grain products, pulverized sugar and cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulverized spices, starch and pastes, potato and woodflour, oil meal from beans and seed, dried hay, and other organic materials which may produce combustible dusts when processed or handled. Dusts containing magnesium or aluminum are particularly hazardous and the use of extreme caution is necessary to avoid ignition and explosion. (b) Class II, Division 2. (1) Combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures, and dust accumulations are normally insufficient to interfere with the normal operation of electrical equipment or other apparatus; or (2) Dust may be in suspension in the air as a result of infrequent malfunctioning of handling or processing equipment, and dust accumulations resulting therefrom may be ignitible by abnormal operation or failure of electrical equipment or other apparatus. Note: This classification includes locations where dangerous concentrations of suspended dust would not be likely but where dust accumulations might form on or in the vicinity of electric equipment. These areas may contain equipment from which appreciable quantities of dust would escape under abnormal operating conditions or be adjacent to a Class II Division 1 location, as described above, into which an explosive or ignitible concentration of dust may be put into suspension under abnormal operating conditions. Class III locations. (a) Class III, Division 1. Note: Easily ignitible fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton (including cotton linters and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, sawdust, woodchips, and other material of similar nature. (b) Class III, Division 2. Collector ring. Concealed. “Accessible. Conductor Bare. (b) Covered. (c) Insulated. Controller. Covered conductor. “Conductor.” Cutout. Cutout box. “Cabinet.”) Damp location. “Location.” Dead front. Device. Disconnecting means. Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. Dry location. “Location.” Enclosed. Enclosure. Equipment. Equipment grounding conductor. “Grounding conductor, equipment.” Explosion-proof apparatus. Exposed. “Accessible “Concealed.”) Exposed. “Accessible. Exposed. Externally operable. Feeder. Festoon lighting. Fitting. Fuse. Ground. Grounded. Grounded, effectively Grounded conductor. Grounding conductor. Grounding conductor, equipment. Grounding electrode conductor. Ground-fault circuit interrupter. Guarded. Hoistway. Identified (conductors or terminals). Identified (for the use). Insulated conductor. Conductor. Interrupter switch. Intrinsically safe equipment and associated wiring. Isolated. Isolated power system. Labeled. Lighting outlet. Listed. Location Damp location. (b) Dry location. (c) Wet location. Mobile X-ray. Motor control center. Outlet. Overcurrent. Overload. “Overcurrent.” Panelboard. Switchboard. Portable X-ray. Power fuse. “Fuse.” Power outlet. Premises wiring system. Qualified person. Qualified testing laboratory. (a) Experimental testing for safety of specified items of equipment and materials referred to in this standard to determine compliance with appropriate test standards or performance in a specified manner; (b) Inspecting the run of such items of equipment and materials at factories for product evaluation to assure compliance with the test standards; (c) Service-value determinations through field inspections to monitor the proper use of labels on products and with authority for recall of the label in the event a hazardous product is installed; (d) Employing a controlled procedure for identifying the listed and/or labeled equipment or materials tested; and (e) Rendering creditable reports or findings that are objective and without bias of the tests and test methods employed. Raceway. Readily accessible. “Accessible.” Receptacle. Receptacle outlet. Remote-control circuit. Sealable equipment. Separately derived system. Service. Service conductors. Service drop. Service-entrance conductors, overhead system. Service-entrance conductors, underground system. Service equipment. Service raceway. Signaling circuit. Switchboard. “Panelboard.”) Switches General-use switch. (b) General-use snap switch. (c) Isolating switch. (d) Motor-circuit switch. Switching devices. Transportable X-ray. Utilization equipment. Utilization system. Ventilated. Volatile flammable liquid. Voltage. Voltage, nominal. Voltage to ground. Watertight. Weatherproof. Wet location. “Location.” Subpart L—Scaffolds Authority: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order Nos. 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912); and 29 CFR part 1911. Source: 61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, unless otherwise noted. § 1926.450 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions. Adjustable suspension scaffold Bearer (putlog) Boatswains' chair Body belt (safety belt) Body harness Brace Bricklayers' square scaffold Carpenters' bracket scaffold Catenary scaffold Chimney hoist Cleat Competent person Continuous run scaffold (Run scaffold) Coupler Crawling board (chicken ladder) Deceleration device Double pole (independent pole) scaffold Equivalent Exposed power lines Eye Eye splice Fabricated decking and planking Fabricated frame scaffold (tubular welded frame scaffold) Failure Float (ship) scaffold Form scaffold Guardrail system Hoist Horse scaffold Independent pole scaffold Interior hung scaffold Ladder jack scaffold Ladder stand Landing Large area scaffold Lean-to scaffold Lifeline Lower levels Masons' adjustable supported scaffold Masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold Maximum intended load Mobile scaffold Multi-level suspended scaffold Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold Needle beam scaffold Open sides and ends Outrigger Outrigger beam (Thrustout) Outrigger scaffold Overhand bricklaying Personal fall arrest system Platform Pole scaffold Power operated hoist Pump jack scaffold Qualified Rated load Repair bracket scaffold Roof bracket scaffold Runner (ledger or ribbon) Scaffold Self-contained adjustable scaffold Shore scaffold Single-point adjustable suspension scaffold Single-pole scaffold Stair tower (Scaffold stairway/tower) Stall load Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffold Stilts Stonesetters' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold Supported scaffold Suspension scaffold System scaffold Tank builders' scaffold Top plate bracket scaffold Tube and coupler scaffold Tubular welded frame scaffold Two-point suspension scaffold (swing stage) Unstable objects Vertical pickup Walkway Window jack scaffold [61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, as amended at 75 FR 48133, Aug. 9, 2010] § 1926.451 General requirements. This section does not apply to aerial lifts, the criteria for which are set out exclusively in § 1926.453. (a) Capacity. (2) Direct connections to roofs and floors, and counterweights used to balance adjustable suspension scaffolds, shall be capable of resisting at least 4 times the tipping moment imposed by the scaffold operating at the rated load of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times the tipping moment imposed by the scaffold operating at the stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater. (3) Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on non-adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to that rope. (4) Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to that rope with the scaffold operating at either the rated load of the hoist, or 2 (minimum) times the stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater. (5) The stall load of any scaffold hoist shall not exceed 3 times its rated load. (6) Scaffolds shall be designed by a qualified person and shall be constructed and loaded in accordance with that design. Non-mandatory appendix A to this subpart contains examples of criteria that will enable an employer to comply with paragraph (a) of this section. (b) Scaffold platform construction. (i) Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold plank, fabricated plank, fabricated deck, or fabricated platform) shall be installed so that the space between adjacent units and the space between the platform and the uprights is no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except where the employer can demonstrate that a wider space is necessary (for example, to fit around uprights when side brackets are used to extend the width of the platform). (ii) Where the employer makes the demonstration provided for in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the platform shall be planked or decked as fully as possible and the remaining open space between the platform and the uprights shall not exceed 9 1/2 Exception to paragraph (b)(1): The requirement in paragraph (b)(1) to provide full planking or decking does not apply to platforms used solely as walkways or solely by employees performing scaffold erection or dismantling. In these situations, only the planking that the employer establishes is necessary to provide safe working conditions is required. (2) Except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section, each scaffold platform and walkway shall be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide. (i) Each ladder jack scaffold, top plate bracket scaffold, roof bracket scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall be at least 12 inches (30 cm) wide. There is no minimum width requirement for boatswains' chairs. Note to paragraph ( b i Pursuant to an administrative stay effective November 29, 1996 and published in the Federal Register (ii) Where scaffolds must be used in areas that the employer can demonstrate are so narrow that platforms and walkways cannot be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide, such platforms and walkways shall be as wide as feasible, and employees on those platforms and walkways shall be protected from fall hazards by the use of guardrails and/or personal fall arrest systems. (3) Except as provided in paragraphs (b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section, the front edge of all platforms shall not be more than 14 inches (36 cm) from the face of the work, unless guardrail systems are erected along the front edge and/or personal fall arrest systems are used in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section to protect employees from falling. (i) The maximum distance from the face for outrigger scaffolds shall be 3 inches (8 cm); (ii) The maximum distance from the face for plastering and lathing operations shall be 18 inches (46 cm). (4) Each end of a platform, unless cleated or otherwise restrained by hooks or equivalent means, shall extend over the centerline of its support at least 6 inches (15 cm). (5)(i) Each end of a platform 10 feet or less in length shall not extend over its support more than 12 inches (30 cm) unless the platform is designed and installed so that the cantilevered portion of the platform is able to support employees and/or materials without tipping, or has guardrails which block employee access to the cantilevered end. (ii) Each platform greater than 10 feet in length shall not extend over its support more than 18 inches (46 cm), unless it is designed and installed so that the cantilevered portion of the platform is able to support employees without tipping, or has guardrails which block employee access to the cantilevered end. (6) On scaffolds where scaffold planks are abutted to create a long platform, each abutted end shall rest on a separate support surface. This provision does not preclude the use of common support members, such as “T” sections, to support abutting planks, or hook on platforms designed to rest on common supports. (7) On scaffolds where platforms are overlapped to create a long platform, the overlap shall occur only over supports, and shall not be less than 12 inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are nailed together or otherwise restrained to prevent movement. (8) At all points of a scaffold where the platform changes direction, such as turning a corner, any platform that rests on a bearer at an angle other than a right angle shall be laid first, and platforms which rest at right angles over the same bearer shall be laid second, on top of the first platform. (9) Wood platforms shall not be covered with opaque finishes, except that platform edges may be covered or marked for identification. Platforms may be coated periodically with wood preservatives, fire-retardant finishes, and slip-resistant finishes; however, the coating may not obscure the top or bottom wood surfaces. (10) Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers shall not be intermixed unless the components fit together without force and the scaffold's structural integrity is maintained by the user. Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers shall not be modified in order to intermix them unless a competent person determines the resulting scaffold is structurally sound. (11) Scaffold components made of dissimilar metals shall not be used together unless a competent person has determined that galvanic action will not reduce the strength of any component to a level below that required by paragraph (a)(1) of this section. (c) Criteria for supported scaffolds. (i) Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed at locations where horizontal members support both inner and outer legs. (ii) Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed according to the scaffold manufacturer's recommendations or at the closest horizontal member to the 4:1 height and be repeated vertically at locations of horizontal members every 20 feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaffolds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or less, and every 26 feet (7.9 m) or less thereafter for scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m) wide. The top guy, tie or brace of completed scaffolds shall be placed no further than the 4:1 height from the top. Such guys, ties and braces shall be installed at each end of the scaffold and at horizontal intervals not to exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end [not both] towards the other). (iii) Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers shall be used to prevent the tipping of supported scaffolds in all circumstances where an eccentric load, such as a cantilevered work platform, is applied or is transmitted to the scaffold. (2) Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall bear on base plates and mud sills or other adequate firm foundation. (i) Footings shall be level, sound, rigid, and capable of supporting the loaded scaffold without settling or displacement. (ii) Unstable objects shall not be used to support scaffolds or platform units. (iii) Unstable objects shall not be used as working platforms. (iv) Front-end loaders and similar pieces of equipment shall not be used to support scaffold platforms unless they have been specifically designed by the manufacturer for such use. (v) Fork-lifts shall not be used to support scaffold platforms unless the entire platform is attached to the fork and the fork-lift is not moved horizontally while the platform is occupied. (3) Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall be plumb and braced to prevent swaying and displacement. (d) Criteria for suspension scaffolds. (2) Suspension scaffold outrigger beams, when used, shall be made of structural metal or equivalent strength material, and shall be restrained to prevent movement. (3) The inboard ends of suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be stabilized by bolts or other direct connections to the floor or roof deck, or they shall have their inboard ends stabilized by counterweights, except masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall not be stabilized by counterweights. (i) Before the scaffold is used, direct connections shall be evaluated by a competent person who shall confirm, based on the evaluation, that the supporting surfaces are capable of supporting the loads to be imposed. In addition, masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold connections shall be designed by an engineer experienced in such scaffold design. (ii) Counterweights shall be made of non-flowable material. Sand, gravel and similar materials that can be easily dislocated shall not be used as counterweights. (iii) Only those items specifically designed as counterweights shall be used to counterweight scaffold systems. Construction materials such as, but not limited to, masonry units and rolls of roofing felt, shall not be used as counterweights. (iv) Counterweights shall be secured by mechanical means to the outrigger beams to prevent accidental displacement. (v) Counterweights shall not be removed from an outrigger beam until the scaffold is disassembled. (vi) Outrigger beams which are not stabilized by bolts or other direct connections to the floor or roof deck shall be secured by tiebacks. (vii) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the suspension ropes. (viii) Outrigger beams shall be placed perpendicular to its bearing support (usually the face of the building or structure). However, where the employer can demonstrate that it is not possible to place an outrigger beam perpendicular to the face of the building or structure because of obstructions that cannot be moved, the outrigger beam may be placed at some other angle, provided opposing angle tiebacks are used. (ix) Tiebacks shall be secured to a structurally sound anchorage on the building or structure. Sound anchorages include structural members, but do not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, or electrical conduit. (x) Tiebacks shall be installed perpendicular to the face of the building or structure, or opposing angle tiebacks shall be installed. Single tiebacks installed at an angle are prohibited. (4) Suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be: (i) Provided with stop bolts or shackles at both ends; (ii) Securely fastened together with the flanges turned out when channel iron beams are used in place of I-beams; (iii) Installed with all bearing supports perpendicular to the beam center line; (iv) Set and maintained with the web in a vertical position; and (v) When an outrigger beam is used, the shackle or clevis with which the rope is attached to the outrigger beam shall be placed directly over the center line of the stirrup. (5) Suspension scaffold support devices such as cornice hooks, roof hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or similar devices shall be: (i) Made of steel, wrought iron, or materials of equivalent strength; (ii) Supported by bearing blocks; and (iii) Secured against movement by tiebacks installed at right angles to the face of the building or structure, or opposing angle tiebacks shall be installed and secured to a structurally sound point of anchorage on the building or structure. Sound points of anchorage include structural members, but do not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, or electrical conduit. (iv) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the hoisting rope. (6) When winding drum hoists are used on a suspension scaffold, they shall contain not less than four wraps of the suspension rope at the lowest point of scaffold travel. When other types of hoists are used, the suspension ropes shall be long enough to allow the scaffold to be lowered to the level below without the rope end passing through the hoist, or the rope end shall be configured or provided with means to prevent the end from passing through the hoist. (7) The use of repaired wire rope as suspension rope is prohibited. (8) Wire suspension ropes shall not be joined together except through the use of eye splice thimbles connected with shackles or coverplates and bolts. (9) The load end of wire suspension ropes shall be equipped with proper size thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or equivalent means. (10) Ropes shall be inspected for defects by a competent person prior to each workshift and after every occurrence which could affect a rope's integrity. Ropes shall be replaced if any of the following conditions exist: (i) Any physical damage which impairs the function and strength of the rope. (ii) Kinks that might impair the tracking or wrapping of rope around the drum(s) or sheave(s). (iii) Six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay or three broken wires in one strand in one rope lay. (iv) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, flattening or peening causing loss of more than one-third of the original diameter of the outside wires. (v) Heat damage caused by a torch or any damage caused by contact with electrical wires. (vi) Evidence that the secondary brake has been activated during an overspeed condition and has engaged the suspension rope. (11) Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not be used unless they are made by the wire rope manufacturer or a qualified person. (12) When wire rope clips are used on suspension scaffolds: (i) There shall be a minimum of 3 wire rope clips installed, with the clips a minimum of 6 rope diameters apart; (ii) Clips shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations; (iii) Clips shall be retightened to the manufacturer's recommendations after the initial loading; (iv) Clips shall be inspected and retightened to the manufacturer's recommendations at the start of each workshift thereafter; (v) U-bolt clips shall not be used at the point of suspension for any scaffold hoist; (vi) When U-bolt clips are used, the U-bolt shall be placed over the dead end of the rope, and the saddle shall be placed over the live end of the rope. (13) Suspension scaffold power-operated hoists and manual hoists shall be tested by a qualified testing laboratory. (14) Gasoline-powered equipment and hoists shall not be used on suspension scaffolds. (15) Gears and brakes of power-operated hoists used on suspension scaffolds shall be enclosed. (16) In addition to the normal operating brake, suspension scaffold power-operated hoists and manually operated hoists shall have a braking device or locking pawl which engages automatically when a hoist makes either of the following uncontrolled movements: an instantaneous change in momentum or an accelerated overspeed. (17) Manually operated hoists shall require a positive crank force to descend. (18) Two-point and multi-point suspension scaffolds shall be tied or otherwise secured to prevent them from swaying, as determined to be necessary based on an evaluation by a competent person. Window cleaners' anchors shall not be used for this purpose. (19) Devices whose sole function is to provide emergency escape and rescue shall not be used as working platforms. This provision does not preclude the use of systems which are designed to function both as suspension scaffolds and emergency systems. (e) Access. (1) When scaffold platforms are more than 2 feet (0.6 m) above or below a point of access, portable ladders, hook-on ladders, attachable ladders, stair towers (scaffold stairways/towers), stairway-type ladders (such as ladder stands), ramps, walkways, integral prefabricated scaffold access, or direct access from another scaffold, structure, personnel hoist, or similar surface shall be used. Crossbraces shall not be used as a means of access. (2) Portable, hook-on, and attachable ladders (Additional requirements for the proper construction and use of portable ladders are contained in subpart X of this part—Stairways and Ladders): (i) Portable, hook-on, and attachable ladders shall be positioned so as not to tip the scaffold; (ii) Hook-on and attachable ladders shall be positioned so that their bottom rung is not more than 24 inches (61 cm) above the scaffold supporting level; (iii) When hook-on and attachable ladders are used on a supported scaffold more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high, they shall have rest platforms at 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals. (iv) Hook-on and attachable ladders shall be specifically designed for use with the type of scaffold used; (v) Hook-on and attachable ladders shall have a minimum rung length of 11 1/2 (vi) Hook-on and attachable ladders shall have uniformly spaced rungs with a maximum spacing between rungs of 16 3/4 (3) Stairway-type ladders shall: (i) Be positioned such that their bottom step is not more than 24 inches (61 cm) above the scaffold supporting level; (ii) Be provided with rest platforms at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum vertical intervals; (iii) Have a minimum step width of 16 inches (41 cm), except that mobile scaffold stairway-type ladders shall have a minimum step width of 11 1/2 (iv) Have slip-resistant treads on all steps and landings. (4) Stairtowers (scaffold stairway/towers) shall be positioned such that their bottom step is not more than 24 inches (61 cm.) above the scaffold supporting level. (i) A stairrail consisting of a toprail and a midrail shall be provided on each side of each scaffold stairway. (ii) The toprail of each stairrail system shall also be capable of serving as a handrail, unless a separate handrail is provided. (iii) Handrails, and toprails that serve as handrails, shall provide an adequate handhold for employees grasping them to avoid falling. (iv) Stairrail systems and handrails shall be surfaced to prevent injury to employees from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing. (v) The ends of stairrail systems and handrails shall be constructed so that they do not constitute a projection hazard. (vi) Handrails, and toprails that are used as handrails, shall be at least 3 inches (7.6 cm) from other objects. (vii) Stairrails shall be not less than 28 inches (71 cm) nor more than 37 inches (94 cm) from the upper surface of the stairrail to the surface of the tread, in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread. (viii) A landing platform at least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide by at least 18 inches (45.7 cm) long shall be provided at each level. (ix) Each scaffold stairway shall be at least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide between stairrails. (x) Treads and landings shall have slip-resistant surfaces. (xi) Stairways shall be installed between 40 degrees and 60 degrees from the horizontal. (xii) Guardrails meeting the requirements of paragraph (g)(4) of this section shall be provided on the open sides and ends of each landing. (xiii) Riser height shall be uniform, within 1/4 (xiv) Tread depth shall be uniform, within 1/4 (5) Ramps and walkways. (i) Ramps and walkways 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall have guardrail systems which comply with subpart M of this part—Fall Protection; (ii) No ramp or walkway shall be inclined more than a slope of one (1) vertical to three (3) horizontal (20 degrees above the horizontal). (iii) If the slope of a ramp or a walkway is steeper than one (1) vertical in eight (8) horizontal, the ramp or walkway shall have cleats not more than fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which are securely fastened to the planks to provide footing. (6) Integral prefabricated scaffold access frames shall: (i) Be specifically designed and constructed for use as ladder rungs; (ii) Have a rung length of at least 8 inches (20 cm); (iii) Not be used as work platforms when rungs are less than 11 1/2 (iv) Be uniformly spaced within each frame section; (v) Be provided with rest platforms at 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals on all supported scaffolds more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high; and (vi) Have a maximum spacing between rungs of 16 3/4 3/4 (7) Steps and rungs of ladder and stairway type access shall line up vertically with each other between rest platforms. (8) Direct access to or from another surface shall be used only when the scaffold is not more than 14 inches (36 cm) horizontally and not more than 24 inches (61 cm) vertically from the other surface. (9) Effective September 2, 1997, access for employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds shall be in accordance with the following: (i) The employer shall provide safe means of access for each employee erecting or dismantling a scaffold where the provision of safe access is feasible and does not create a greater hazard. The employer shall have a competent person determine whether it is feasible or would pose a greater hazard to provide, and have employees use a safe means of access. This determination shall be based on site conditions and the type of scaffold being erected or dismantled. (ii) Hook-on or attachable ladders shall be installed as soon as scaffold erection has progressed to a point that permits safe installation and use. (iii) When erecting or dismantling tubular welded frame scaffolds, (end) frames, with horizontal members that are parallel, level and are not more than 22 inches apart vertically may be used as climbing devices for access, provided they are erected in a manner that creates a usable ladder and provides good hand hold and foot space. (iv) Cross braces on tubular welded frame scaffolds shall not be used as a means of access or egress. (f) Use. (2) The use of shore or lean-to scaffolds is prohibited. (3) Scaffolds and scaffold components shall be inspected for visible defects by a competent person before each work shift, and after any occurrence which could affect a scaffold's structural integrity. (4) Any part of a scaffold damaged or weakened such that its strength is less than that required by paragraph (a) of this section shall be immediately repaired or replaced, braced to meet those provisions, or removed from service until repaired. (5) Scaffolds shall not be moved horizontally while employees are on them, unless they have been designed by a registered professional engineer specifically for such movement or, for mobile scaffolds, where the provisions of § 1926.452(w) are followed. (6) The clearance between scaffolds and power lines shall be as follows: Scaffolds shall not be erected, used, dismantled, altered, or moved such that they or any conductive material handled on them might come closer to exposed and energized power lines than as follows: Insulated lines Minimum distance Alternatives Less than 300 volts 3 feet (0.9 m) 300 volts to 50 kv 10 feet (3.1m) More than 50 kv 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for each 1 kv over 50 kv 2 times the length of the line insulator, but never less than 10 feet (3.1 m). Uninsulated lines Minimum distance Alternatives Less than 50 kv 10 feet (3.1 m) More than 50 kv 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for each 1 kv over 50 kv 2 times the length of the line insulator, but never less than 10 feet (3.1 m). Exception to paragraph ( f Scaffolds and materials may be closer to power lines than specified above where such clearance is necessary for performance of work, and only after the utility company, or electrical system operator, has been notified of the need to work closer and the utility company, or electrical system operator, has deenergized the lines, relocated the lines, or installed protective coverings to prevent accidental contact with the lines. (7) Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, dismantled, or altered only under the supervision and direction of a competent person qualified in scaffold erection, moving, dismantling or alteration. Such activities shall be performed only by experienced and trained employees selected for such work by the competent person. (8) Employees shall be prohibited from working on scaffolds covered with snow, ice, or other slippery material except as necessary for removal of such materials. (9) Where swinging loads are being hoisted onto or near scaffolds such that the loads might contact the scaffold, tag lines or equivalent measures to control the loads shall be used. (10) Suspension ropes supporting adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be of a diameter large enough to provide sufficient surface area for the functioning of brake and hoist mechanisms. (11) Suspension ropes shall be shielded from heat-producing processes. When acids or other corrosive substances are used on a scaffold, the ropes shall be shielded, treated to protect against the corrosive substances, or shall be of a material that will not be damaged by the substance being used. (12) Work on or from scaffolds is prohibited during storms or high winds unless a competent person has determined that it is safe for employees to be on the scaffold and those employees are protected by a personal fall arrest system or wind screens. Wind screens shall not be used unless the scaffold is secured against the anticipated wind forces imposed. (13) Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on platforms. (14) Makeshift devices, such as but not limited to boxes and barrels, shall not be used on top of scaffold platforms to increase the working level height of employees. (15) Ladders shall not be used on scaffolds to increase the working level height of employees, except on large area scaffolds where employers have satisfied the following criteria: (i) When the ladder is placed against a structure which is not a part of the scaffold, the scaffold shall be secured against the sideways thrust exerted by the ladder; (ii) The platform units shall be secured to the scaffold to prevent their movement; (iii) The ladder legs shall be on the same platform or other means shall be provided to stabilize the ladder against unequal platform deflection, and (iv) The ladder legs shall be secured to prevent them from slipping or being pushed off the platform. (16) Platforms shall not deflect more than 1/60 (17) To reduce the possibility of welding current arcing through the suspension wire rope when performing welding from suspended scaffolds, the following precautions shall be taken, as applicable: (i) An insulated thimble shall be used to attach each suspension wire rope to its hanging support (such as cornice hook or outrigger). Excess suspension wire rope and any additional independent lines from grounding shall be insulated; (ii) The suspension wire rope shall be covered with insulating material extending at least 4 feet (1.2 m) above the hoist. If there is a tail line below the hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent contact with the platform. The portion of the tail line that hangs free below the scaffold shall be guided or retained, or both, so that it does not become grounded; (iii) Each hoist shall be covered with insulated protective covers; (iv) In addition to a work lead attachment required by the welding process, a grounding conductor shall be connected from the scaffold to the structure. The size of this conductor shall be at least the size of the welding process work lead, and this conductor shall not be in series with the welding process or the work piece; (v) If the scaffold grounding lead is disconnected at any time, the welding machine shall be shut off; and (vi) An active welding rod or uninsulated welding lead shall not be allowed to contact the scaffold or its suspension system. (g) Fall protection. Note to paragraph ( g The fall protection requirements for employees installing suspension scaffold support systems on floors, roofs, and other elevated surfaces are set forth in subpart M of this part. (i) Each employee on a boatswains' chair, catenary scaffold, float scaffold, needle beam scaffold, or ladder jack scaffold shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system; (ii) Each employee on a single-point or two-point adjustable suspension scaffold shall be protected by both a personal fall arrest system and guardrail system; (iii) Each employee on a crawling board (chicken ladder) shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system, a guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail capacity), or by a three-fourth inch (1.9 cm) diameter grabline or equivalent handhold securely fastened beside each crawling board; (iv) Each employee on a self-contained adjustable scaffold shall be protected by a guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) when the platform is supported by the frame structure, and by both a personal fall arrest system and a guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) when the platform is supported by ropes; (v) Each employee on a walkway located within a scaffold shall be protected by a guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) installed within 9 1/2 (vi) Each employee performing overhand bricklaying operations from a supported scaffold shall be protected from falling from all open sides and ends of the scaffold (except at the side next to the wall being laid) by the use of a personal fall arrest system or guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail capacity). (vii) For all scaffolds not otherwise specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through (g)(1)(vi) of this section, each employee shall be protected by the use of personal fall arrest systems or guardrail systems meeting the requirements of paragraph (g)(4) of this section. (2) Effective September 2, 1997, the employer shall have a competent person determine the feasibility and safety of providing fall protection for employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds. Employers are required to provide fall protection for employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds where the installation and use of such protection is feasible and does not create a greater hazard. (3) In addition to meeting the requirements of § 1926.502(d), personal fall arrest systems used on scaffolds shall be attached by lanyard to a vertical lifeline, horizontal lifeline, or scaffold structural member. Vertical lifelines shall not be used when overhead components, such as overhead protection or additional platform levels, are part of a single-point or two-point adjustable suspension scaffold. (i) When vertical lifelines are used, they shall be fastened to a fixed safe point of anchorage, shall be independent of the scaffold, and shall be protected from sharp edges and abrasion. Safe points of anchorage include structural members of buildings, but do not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, electrical conduit, outrigger beams, or counterweights. (ii) When horizontal lifelines are used, they shall be secured to two or more structural members of the scaffold, or they may be looped around both suspension and independent suspension lines (on scaffolds so equipped) above the hoist and brake attached to the end of the scaffold. Horizontal lifelines shall not be attached only to the suspension ropes. (iii) When lanyards are connected to horizontal lifelines or structural members on a single-point or two-point adjustable suspension scaffold, the scaffold shall be equipped with additional independent support lines and automatic locking devices capable of stopping the fall of the scaffold in the event one or both of the suspension ropes fail. The independent support lines shall be equal in number and strength to the suspension ropes. (iv) Vertical lifelines, independent support lines, and suspension ropes shall not be attached to each other, nor shall they be attached to or use the same point of anchorage, nor shall they be attached to the same point on the scaffold or personal fall arrest system. (4) Guardrail systems installed to meet the requirements of this section shall comply with the following provisions (guardrail systems built in accordance with appendix A to this subpart will be deemed to meet the requirements of paragraphs (g)(4) (vii), (viii), and (ix) of this section): (i) Guardrail systems shall be installed along all open sides and ends of platforms. Guardrail systems shall be installed before the scaffold is released for use by employees other than erection/dismantling crews. (ii) The top edge height of toprails or equivalent member on supported scaffolds manufactured or placed in service after January 1, 2000 shall be installed between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches (1.2 m) above the platform surface. The top edge height on supported scaffolds manufactured and placed in service before January 1, 2000, and on all suspended scaffolds where both a guardrail and a personal fall arrest system are required shall be between 36 inches (0.9 m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). When conditions warrant, the height of the top edge may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the guardrail system meets all other criteria of paragraph (g)(4). (iii) When midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, or equivalent structural members are used, they shall be installed between the top edge of the guardrail system and the scaffold platform. (iv) When midrails are used, they shall be installed at a height approximately midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the platform surface. (v) When screens and mesh are used, they shall extend from the top edge of the guardrail system to the scaffold platform, and along the entire opening between the supports. (vi) When intermediate members (such as balusters or additional rails) are used, they shall not be more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart. (vii) Each toprail or equivalent member of a guardrail system shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force applied in any downward or horizontal direction at any point along its top edge of at least 100 pounds (445 n) for guardrail systems installed on single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds or two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds, and at least 200 pounds (890 n) for guardrail systems installed on all other scaffolds. (viii) When the loads specified in paragraph (g)(4)(vii) of this section are applied in a downward direction, the top edge shall not drop below the height above the platform surface that is prescribed in paragraph (g)(4)(ii) of this section. (ix) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and equivalent structural members of a guardrail system shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force applied in any downward or horizontal direction at any point along the midrail or other member of at least 75 pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems with a minimum 100 pound toprail capacity, and at least 150 pounds (666 n) for guardrail systems with a minimum 200 pound toprail capacity. (x) Suspension scaffold hoists and non-walk-through stirrups may be used as end guardrails, if the space between the hoist or stirrup and the side guardrail or structure does not allow passage of an employee to the end of the scaffold. (xi) Guardrails shall be surfaced to prevent injury to an employee from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing. (xii) The ends of all rails shall not overhang the terminal posts except when such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard to employees. (xiii) Steel or plastic banding shall not be used as a toprail or midrail. (xiv) Manila or plastic (or other synthetic) rope being used for toprails or midrails shall be inspected by a competent person as frequently as necessary to ensure that it continues to meet the strength requirements of paragraph (g) of this section. (xv) Crossbracing is acceptable in place of a midrail when the crossing point of two braces is between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8 m) above the work platform or as a toprail when the crossing point of two braces is between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m) above the work platform. The end points at each upright shall be no more than 48 inches (1.3 m) apart. (h) Falling object protection. (2) Where there is a danger of tools, materials, or equipment falling from a scaffold and striking employees below, the following provisions apply: (i) The area below the scaffold to which objects can fall shall be barricaded, and employees shall not be permitted to enter the hazard area; or (ii) A toeboard shall be erected along the edge of platforms more than 10 feet (3.1 m) above lower levels for a distance sufficient to protect employees below, except on float (ship) scaffolds where an edging of 3/4 1/2 (iii) Where tools, materials, or equipment are piled to a height higher than the top edge of the toeboard, paneling or screening extending from the toeboard or platform to the top of the guardrail shall be erected for a distance sufficient to protect employees below; or (iv) A guardrail system shall be installed with openings small enough to prevent passage of potential falling objects; or (v) A canopy structure, debris net, or catch platform strong enough to withstand the impact forces of the potential falling objects shall be erected over the employees below. (3) Canopies, when used for falling object protection, shall comply with the following criteria: (i) Canopies shall be installed between the falling object hazard and the employees. (ii) When canopies are used on suspension scaffolds for falling object protection, the scaffold shall be equipped with additional independent support lines equal in number to the number of points supported, and equivalent in strength to the strength of the suspension ropes. (iii) Independent support lines and suspension ropes shall not be attached to the same points of anchorage. (4) Where used, toeboards shall be: (i) Capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 50 pounds (222 n) applied in any downward or horizontal direction at any point along the toeboard (toeboards built in accordance with appendix A to this subpart will be deemed to meet this requirement); and (ii) At least three and one-half inches (9 cm) high from the top edge of the toeboard to the level of the walking/working surface. Toeboards shall be securely fastened in place at the outermost edge of the platform and have not more than 1/4 [61 FR 46107, Aug. 30, 1996, as corrected and amended at 61 FR 59831, 59832, Nov. 25, 1996] Effective Date Note: At 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996, § 1926.451(b)(2)(i) was amended and certain requirements stayed until Nov. 25, 1997, or until further rulemaking has been completed, whichever is later. § 1926.452 Additional requirements applicable to specific types of scaffolds. In addition to the applicable requirements of § 1926.451, the following requirements apply to the specific types of scaffolds indicated. Scaffolds not specifically addressed by § 1926.452, such as but not limited to systems scaffolds, must meet the requirements of § 1926.451. (a) Pole scaffolds. (2) Crossbracing shall be installed between the inner and outer sets of poles on double pole scaffolds. (3) Diagonal bracing in both directions shall be installed across the entire inside face of double-pole scaffolds used to support loads equivalent to a uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds (22.7 kg) or more per square foot (929 square cm). (4) Diagonal bracing in both directions shall be installed across the entire outside face of all double- and single-pole scaffolds. (5) Runners and bearers shall be installed on edge. (6) Bearers shall extend a minimum of 3 inches (7.6 cm) over the outside edges of runners. (7) Runners shall extend over a minimum of two poles, and shall be supported by bearing blocks securely attached to the poles. (8) Braces, bearers, and runners shall not be spliced between poles. (9) Where wooden poles are spliced, the ends shall be squared and the upper section shall rest squarely on the lower section. Wood splice plates shall be provided on at least two adjacent sides, and shall extend at least 2 feet (0.6 m) on either side of the splice, overlap the abutted ends equally, and have at least the same cross-sectional areas as the pole. Splice plates of other materials of equivalent strength may be used. (10) Pole scaffolds over 60 feet in height shall be designed by a registered professional engineer, and shall be constructed and loaded in accordance with that design. Non-mandatory appendix A to this subpart contains examples of criteria that will enable an employer to comply with design and loading requirements for pole scaffolds under 60 feet in height. (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (2) Transverse bracing forming an “X” across the width of the scaffold shall be installed at the scaffold ends and at least at every third set of posts horizontally (measured from only one end) and every fourth runner vertically. Bracing shall extend diagonally from the inner or outer posts or runners upward to the next outer or inner posts or runners. Building ties shall be installed at the bearer levels between the transverse bracing and shall conform to the requirements of § 1926.451(c)(1). (3) On straight run scaffolds, longitudinal bracing across the inner and outer rows of posts shall be installed diagonally in both directions, and shall extend from the base of the end posts upward to the top of the scaffold at approximately a 45 degree angle. On scaffolds whose length is greater than their height, such bracing shall be repeated beginning at least at every fifth post. On scaffolds whose length is less than their height, such bracing shall be installed from the base of the end posts upward to the opposite end posts, and then in alternating directions until reaching the top of the scaffold. Bracing shall be installed as close as possible to the intersection of the bearer and post or runner and post. (4) Where conditions preclude the attachment of bracing to posts, bracing shall be attached to the runners as close to the post as possible. (5) Bearers shall be installed transversely between posts, and when coupled to the posts, shall have the inboard coupler bear directly on the runner coupler. When the bearers are coupled to the runners, the couplers shall be as close to the posts as possible. (6) Bearers shall extend beyond the posts and runners, and shall provide full contact with the coupler. (7) Runners shall be installed along the length of the scaffold, located on both the inside and outside posts at level heights (when tube and coupler guardrails and midrails are used on outside posts, they may be used in lieu of outside runners). (8) Runners shall be interlocked on straight runs to form continuous lengths, and shall be coupled to each post. The bottom runners and bearers shall be located as close to the base as possible. (9) Couplers shall be of a structural metal, such as drop-forged steel, malleable iron, or structural grade aluminum. The use of gray cast iron is prohibited. (10) Tube and coupler scaffolds over 125 feet in height shall be designed by a registered professional engineer, and shall be constructed and loaded in accordance with such design. Non-mandatory appendix A to this subpart contains examples of criteria that will enable an employer to comply with design and loading requirements for tube and coupler scaffolds under 125 feet in height. (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds (2) Frames and panels shall be braced by cross, horizontal, or diagonal braces, or combination thereof, which secure vertical members together laterally. The cross braces shall be of such length as will automatically square and align vertical members so that the erected scaffold is always plumb, level, and square. All brace connections shall be secured. (3) Frames and panels shall be joined together vertically by coupling or stacking pins or equivalent means. (4) Where uplift can occur which would displace scaffold end frames or panels, the frames or panels shall be locked together vertically by pins or equivalent means. (5) Brackets used to support cantilevered loads shall: (i) Be seated with side-brackets parallel to the frames and end-brackets at 90 degrees to the frames; (ii) Not be bent or twisted from these positions; and (iii) Be used only to support personnel, unless the scaffold has been designed for other loads by a qualified engineer and built to withstand the tipping forces caused by those other loads being placed on the bracket-supported section of the scaffold. (6) Scaffolds over 125 feet (38.0 m) in height above their base plates shall be designed by a registered professional engineer, and shall be constructed and loaded in accordance with such design. (d) Plasterers', decorators', and large area scaffolds. (e) Bricklayers' square scaffolds (squares). (2) Diagonal braces shall be installed on all sides of each square. (3) Diagonal braces shall be installed between squares on the rear and front sides of the scaffold, and shall extend from the bottom of each square to the top of the next square. (4) Scaffolds shall not exceed three tiers in height, and shall be so constructed and arranged that one square rests directly above the other. The upper tiers shall stand on a continuous row of planks laid across the next lower tier, and shall be nailed down or otherwise secured to prevent displacement. (f) Horse scaffolds. (2) When horses are arranged in tiers, each horse shall be placed directly over the horse in the tier below. (3) When horses are arranged in tiers, the legs of each horse shall be nailed down or otherwise secured to prevent displacement. (4) When horses are arranged in tiers, each tier shall be crossbraced. (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters' bracket scaffolds. (2) Wooden bracket-form scaffolds shall be an integral part of the form panel. (3) Folding type metal brackets, when extended for use, shall be either bolted or secured with a locking-type pin. (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (2) Brackets (including those provided with pointed metal projections) shall be anchored in place by nails unless it is impractical to use nails. When nails are not used, brackets shall be secured in place with first-grade manila rope of at least three-fourth inch (1.9 cm) diameter, or equivalent. (i) Outrigger scaffolds. (2) Outrigger beams fabricated in the shape of an I-beam or channel shall be placed so that the web section is vertical. (3) The fulcrum point of outrigger beams shall rest on secure bearings at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) in each horizontal dimension. (4) Outrigger beams shall be secured in place against movement, and shall be securely braced at the fulcrum point against tipping. (5) The inboard ends of outrigger beams shall be securely anchored either by means of braced struts bearing against sills in contact with the overhead beams or ceiling, or by means of tension members secured to the floor joists underfoot, or by both. (6) The entire supporting structure shall be securely braced to prevent any horizontal movement. (7) To prevent their displacement, platform units shall be nailed, bolted, or otherwise secured to outriggers. (8) Scaffolds and scaffold components shall be designed by a registered professional engineer and shall be constructed and loaded in accordance with such design. (j) Pump jack scaffolds. (2) Poles shall be secured to the structure by rigid triangular bracing or equivalent at the bottom, top, and other points as necessary. When the pump jack has to pass bracing already installed, an additional brace shall be installed approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) above the brace to be passed, and shall be left in place until the pump jack has been moved and the original brace reinstalled. (3) When guardrails are used for fall protection, a workbench may be used as the toprail only if it meets all the requirements in paragraphs (g)(4) (ii), (vii), (viii), and (xiii) of § 1926.451. (4) Work benches shall not be used as scaffold platforms. (5) When poles are made of wood, the pole lumber shall be straight-grained, free of shakes, large loose or dead knots, and other defects which might impair strength. (6) When wood poles are constructed of two continuous lengths, they shall be joined together with the seam parallel to the bracket. (7) When two by fours are spliced to make a pole, mending plates shall be installed at all splices to develop the full strength of the member. (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. (2) All ladders used to support ladder jack scaffolds shall meet the requirements of subpart X of this part—Stairways and Ladders, except that job-made ladders shall not be used to support ladder jack scaffolds. (3) The ladder jack shall be so designed and constructed that it will bear on the side rails and ladder rungs or on the ladder rungs alone. If bearing on rungs only, the bearing area shall include a length of at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) on each rung. (4) Ladders used to support ladder jacks shall be placed, fastened, or equipped with devices to prevent slipping. (5) Scaffold platforms shall not be bridged one to another. (l) Window jack scaffolds. (2) Scaffolds shall be used only for the purpose of working at the window opening through which the jack is placed. (3) Window jacks shall not be used to support planks placed between one window jack and another, or for other elements of scaffolding. (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). (2) Crawling boards shall be secured to the roof by ridge hooks or by means that meet equivalent criteria (e.g., strength and durability). (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds. (2) All ladders used in conjunction with step, platform and trestle ladder scaffolds shall meet the pertinent requirements of subpart X of this part—Stairways and Ladders, except that job-made ladders shall not be used to support such scaffolds. (3) Ladders used to support step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds shall be placed, fastened, or equipped with devices to prevent slipping. (4) Scaffolds shall not be bridged one to another. (o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (2) The supporting rope between the scaffold and the suspension device shall be kept vertical unless all of the following conditions are met: (i) The rigging has been designed by a qualified person, and (ii) The scaffold is accessible to rescuers, and (iii) The supporting rope is protected to ensure that it will not chafe at any point where a change in direction occurs, and (iv) The scaffold is positioned so that swinging cannot bring the scaffold into contact with another surface. (3) Boatswains' chair tackle shall consist of correct size ball bearings or bushed blocks containing safety hooks and properly “eye-spliced” minimum five-eighth ( 5/8 (4) Boatswains' chair seat slings shall be reeved through four corner holes in the seat; shall cross each other on the underside of the seat; and shall be rigged so as to prevent slippage which could cause an out-of-level condition. (5) Boatswains' chair seat slings shall be a minimum of five-eight ( 5/8 (6) When a heat-producing process such as gas or arc welding is being conducted, boatswains' chair seat slings shall be a minimum of three-eight ( 3/8 (7) Non-cross-laminated wood boatswains' chairs shall be reinforced on their underside by cleats securely fastened to prevent the board from splitting. (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds (swing stages). (1) Platforms shall not be more than 36 inches (0.9 m) wide unless designed by a qualified person to prevent unstable conditions. (2) The platform shall be securely fastened to hangers (stirrups) by U-bolts or by other means which satisfy the requirements of § 1926.451(a). (3) The blocks for fiber or synthetic ropes shall consist of at least one double and one single block. The sheaves of all blocks shall fit the size of the rope used. (4) Platforms shall be of the ladder-type, plank-type, beam-type, or light-metal type. Light metal-type platforms having a rated capacity of 750 pounds or less and platforms 40 feet (12.2 m) or less in length shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. (5) Two-point scaffolds shall not be bridged or otherwise connected one to another during raising and lowering operations unless the bridge connections are articulated (attached), and the hoists properly sized. (6) Passage may be made from one platform to another only when the platforms are at the same height, are abutting, and walk-through stirrups specifically designed for this purpose are used. (q) Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds, stonesetters' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds, and masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (2) If bridges are not used, passage may be made from one platform to another only when the platforms are at the same height and are abutting. (3) Scaffolds shall be suspended from metal outriggers, brackets, wire rope slings, hooks, or means that meet equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, durability). (r) Catenary scaffolds. (2) Platforms supported by wire ropes shall have hook-shaped stops on each end of the platforms to prevent them from slipping off the wire ropes. These hooks shall be so placed that they will prevent the platform from falling if one of the horizontal wire ropes breaks. (3) Wire ropes shall not be tightened to the extent that the application of a scaffold load will overstress them. (4) Wire ropes shall be continuous and without splices between anchors. (s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (2) Rope connections shall be such that the platform cannot shift or slip. (3) When only two ropes are used with each float: (i) They shall be arranged so as to provide four ends which are securely fastened to overhead supports. (ii) Each supporting rope shall be hitched around one end of the bearer and pass under the platform to the other end of the bearer where it is hitched again, leaving sufficient rope at each end for the supporting ties. (t) Interior hung scaffolds. (2) Overhead supporting members (roof structure, ceiling beams, or other structural members) shall be inspected and checked for strength before the scaffold is erected. (3) Suspension ropes and cables shall be connected to the overhead supporting members by shackles, clips, thimbles, or other means that meet equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, durability). (u) Needle beam scaffolds. (2) Ropes or hangers shall be used for supports, except that one end of a needle beam scaffold may be supported by a permanent structural member. (3) The ropes shall be securely attached to the needle beams. (4) The support connection shall be arranged so as to prevent the needle beam from rolling or becoming displaced. (5) Platform units shall be securely attached to the needle beams by bolts or equivalent means. Cleats and overhang are not considered to be adequate means of attachment. (v) Multi-level suspended scaffolds. (2) Independent support lines and suspension ropes shall not be attached to the same points of anchorage. (3) Supports for platforms shall be attached directly to the support stirrup and not to any other platform. (w) Mobile scaffolds. (i) Scaffolds constructed of tube and coupler components shall also comply with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section; (ii) Scaffolds constructed of fabricated frame components shall also comply with the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section. (2) Scaffold casters and wheels shall be locked with positive wheel and/or wheel and swivel locks, or equivalent means, to prevent movement of the scaffold while the scaffold is used in a stationary manner. (3) Manual force used to move the scaffold shall be applied as close to the base as practicable, but not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) above the supporting surface. (4) Power systems used to propel mobile scaffolds shall be designed for such use. Forklifts, trucks, similar motor vehicles or add-on motors shall not be used to propel scaffolds unless the scaffold is designed for such propulsion systems. (5) Scaffolds shall be stabilized to prevent tipping during movement. (6) Employees shall not be allowed to ride on scaffolds unless the following conditions exist: (i) The surface on which the scaffold is being moved is within 3 degrees of level, and free of pits, holes, and obstructions; (ii) The height to base width ratio of the scaffold during movement is two to one or less, unless the scaffold is designed and constructed to meet or exceed nationally recognized stability test requirements such as those listed in paragraph 2.(w) of appendix A to this subpart; (iii) Outrigger frames, when used, are installed on both sides of the scaffold; (iv) When power systems are used, the propelling force is applied directly to the wheels, and does not produce a speed in excess of 1 foot per second (.3 mps); and (v) No employee is on any part of the scaffold which extends outward beyond the wheels, casters, or other supports. (7) Platforms shall not extend outward beyond the base supports of the scaffold unless outrigger frames or equivalent devices are used to ensure stability. (8) Where leveling of the scaffold is necessary, screw jacks or equivalent means shall be used. (9) Caster stems and wheel stems shall be pinned or otherwise secured in scaffold legs or adjustment screws. (10) Before a scaffold is moved, each employee on the scaffold shall be made aware of the move. (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. 1/2 (2) Each bracket shall be attached to the securing wire rope (or ropes) by a positive locking device capable of preventing the unintentional detachment of the bracket from the rope, or by equivalent means. (3) Each bracket, at the contact point between the supporting structure and the bottom of the bracket, shall be provided with a shoe (heel block or foot) capable of preventing the lateral movement of the bracket. (4) Platforms shall be secured to the brackets in a manner that will prevent the separation of the platforms from the brackets and the movement of the platforms or the brackets on a completed scaffold. (5) When a wire rope is placed around the structure in order to provide a safe anchorage for personal fall arrest systems used by employees erecting or dismantling scaffolds, the wire rope shall meet the requirements of subpart M of this part, but shall be at least 5/16 (6) Each wire rope used for securing brackets in place or as an anchorage for personal fall arrest systems shall be protected from damage due to contact with edges, corners, protrusions, or other discontinuities of the supporting structure or scaffold components. (7) Tensioning of each wire rope used for securing brackets in place or as an anchorage for personal fall arrest systems shall be by means of a turnbuckle at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter, or by equivalent means. (8) Each turnbuckle shall be connected to the other end of its rope by use of an eyesplice thimble of a size appropriate to the turnbuckle to which it is attached. (9) U-bolt wire rope clips shall not be used on any wire rope used to secure brackets or to serve as an anchor for personal fall arrest systems. (10) The employer shall ensure that materials shall not be dropped to the outside of the supporting structure. (11) Scaffold erection shall progress in only one direction around any structure. (y) Stilts. (1) An employee may wear stilts on a scaffold only if it is a large area scaffold. (2) When an employee is using stilts on a large area scaffold where a guardrail system is used to provide fall protection, the guardrail system shall be increased in height by an amount equal to the height of the stilts being used by the employee. (3) Surfaces on which stilts are used shall be flat and free of pits, holes and obstructions, such as debris, as well as other tripping and falling hazards. (4) Stilts shall be properly maintained. Any alteration of the original equipment shall be approved by the manufacturer. [61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, as amended at 85 FR 8736, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1926.453 Aerial lifts. (a) General requirements. (i) Extensible boom platforms; (ii) Aerial ladders; (iii) Articulating boom platforms; (iv) Vertical towers; and (v) A combination of any such devices. Aerial equipment may be made of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), or other material; may be powered or manually operated; and are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or not they are capable of rotating about a substantially vertical axis. (2) Aerial lifts may be “field modified” for uses other than those intended by the manufacturer provided the modification has been certified in writing by the manufacturer or by any other equivalent entity, such as a nationally recognized testing laboratory, to be in conformity with all applicable provisions of ANSI A92.2-1969 and this section and to be at least as safe as the equipment was before modification. (b) Specific requirements Ladder trucks and tower trucks. (2) Extensible and articulating boom platforms. (ii) Only authorized persons shall operate an aerial lift. (iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working from an aerial lift shall not be permitted. (iv) Employees shall always stand firmly on the floor of the basket, and shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket or use planks, ladders, or other devices for a work position. (v) A body belt shall be worn and a lanyard attached to the boom or basket when working from an aerial lift. Note to paragraph ( b v As of January 1, 1998, subpart M of this part (§ 1926.502(d)) provides that body belts are not acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest system. The use of a body belt in a tethering system or in a restraint system is acceptable and is regulated under § 1926.502(e). (vi) Boom and basket load limits specified by the manufacturer shall not be exceeded. (vii) The brakes shall be set and when outriggers are used, they shall be positioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel chocks shall be installed before using an aerial lift on an incline, provided they can be safely installed. (viii) An aerial lift truck shall not be moved when the boom is elevated in a working position with men in the basket, except for equipment which is specifically designed for this type of operation in accordance with the provisions of paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this section. (ix) Articulating boom and extensible boom platforms, primarily designed as personnel carriers, shall have both platform (upper) and lower controls. Upper controls shall be in or beside the platform within easy reach of the operator. Lower controls shall provide for overriding the upper controls. Controls shall be plainly marked as to their function. Lower level controls shall not be operated unless permission has been obtained from the employee in the lift, except in case of emergency. (x) Climbers shall not be worn while performing work from an aerial lift. (xi) The insulated portion of an aerial lift shall not be altered in any manner that might reduce its insulating value. (xii) Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected to see that it is properly cradled and outriggers are in stowed position except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(viii) of this section. (3) Electrical tests. (4) Bursting safety factor. (5) Welding standards. (i) Standard Qualification Procedure, AWS B3.0-41. (ii) Recommended Practices for Automotive Welding Design, AWS D8.4-61. (iii) Standard Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, AWS D10.9-69. (iv) Specifications for Welding Highway and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.0-69. Note to § 1926.453: Non-mandatory appendix C to this subpart lists examples of national consensus standards that are considered to provide employee protection equivalent to that provided through the application of ANSI A92.2-1969, where appropriate. This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained from the American National Standards Institute. Copies may be inspected at the Docket Office, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., room N2634, Washington, DC or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. [61 FR 46116, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004] § 1926.454 Training requirements. This section supplements and clarifies the requirements of § 1926.21(b)(2) as these relate to the hazards of work on scaffolds. (a) The employer shall have each employee who performs work while on a scaffold trained by a person qualified in the subject matter to recognize the hazards associated with the type of scaffold being used and to understand the procedures to control or minimize those hazards. The training shall include the following areas, as applicable: (1) The nature of any electrical hazards, fall hazards and falling object hazards in the work area; (2) The correct procedures for dealing with electrical hazards and for erecting, maintaining, and disassembling the fall protection systems and falling object protection systems being used; (3) The proper use of the scaffold, and the proper handling of materials on the scaffold; (4) The maximum intended load and the load-carrying capacities of the scaffolds used; and (5) Any other pertinent requirements of this subpart. (b) The employer shall have each employee who is involved in erecting, disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, maintaining, or inspecting a scaffold trained by a competent person to recognize any hazards associated with the work in question. The training shall include the following topics, as applicable: (1) The nature of scaffold hazards; (2) The correct procedures for erecting, disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, inspecting, and maintaining the type of scaffold in question; (3) The design criteria, maximum intended load-carrying capacity and intended use of the scaffold; (4) Any other pertinent requirements of this subpart. (c) When the employer has reason to believe that an employee lacks the skill or understanding needed for safe work involving the erection, use or dismantling of scaffolds, the employer shall retrain each such employee so that the requisite proficiency is regained. Retraining is required in at least the following situations: (1) Where changes at the worksite present a hazard about which an employee has not been previously trained; or (2) Where changes in the types of scaffolds, fall protection, falling object protection, or other equipment present a hazard about which an employee has not been previously trained; or (3) Where inadequacies in an affected employee's work involving scaffolds indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite proficiency. Non-Mandatory Appendices (Non-mandatory) Appendix A to Subpart L of Part 1926—Scaffold Specifications This appendix provides non-mandatory guidelines to assist employers in complying with the requirements of subpart L of this part. An employer may use these guidelines and tables as a starting point for designing scaffold systems. However, the guidelines do not provide all the information necessary to build a complete system, and the employer is still responsible for designing and assembling these components in such a way that the completed system will meet the requirements of § 1926.451(a). Scaffold components which are not selected and loaded in accordance with this Appendix, and components for which no specific guidelines or tables are given in this appendix (e.g., joints, ties, components for wood pole scaffolds more than 60 feet in height, components for heavy-duty horse scaffolds, components made with other materials, and components with other dimensions, etc.) must be designed and constructed in accordance with the capacity requirements of § 1926.451(a), and loaded in accordance with § 1926.451(d)(1). Index to appendix A for Subpart L 1. General guidelines and tables. 2. Specific guidelines and tables. (a) Pole scaffolds: Single-pole wood pole scaffolds. Independent wood pole scaffolds. (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. (d) Plasterers', decorators' and large area scaffolds. (e) Bricklayers' square scaffolds. (f) Horse scaffolds. (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters' bracket scaffolds. (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (i) Outrigger scaffolds (one level). (j) Pump jack scaffolds. (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. (l) Window jack scaffolds. (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). (n) Step, platform and trestle ladder scaffolds. (o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (q)(1) Stonesetters' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (2) Masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (r) Catenary scaffolds. (s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (t) Interior hung scaffolds. (u) Needle beam scaffolds. (v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. (w) Mobile scaffolds. (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. (y) Stilts. (z) Tank builders' scaffolds. 1. General Guidelines and Tables (a) The following tables, and the tables in part 2—Specific guidelines and tables, assume that all load-carrying timber members (except planks) of the scaffold are a minimum of 1,500 lb-f/in 2 (b) Solid sawn wood used as scaffold planks shall be selected for such use following the grading rules established by a recognized lumber grading association or by an independent lumber grading inspection agency. Such planks shall be identified by the grade stamp of such association or agency. The association or agency and the grading rules under which the wood is graded shall be certified by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee, as set forth in the American Softwood Lumber Standard of the U.S. Department of Commerce. (i) Allowable spans shall be determined in compliance with the National Design Specification for Wood Construction published by the National Forest Products Association; paragraph 5 of ANSI A10.8-1988 Scaffolding-Safety Requirements published by the American National Standards Institute; or for 2 × 10 inch (nominal) or 2 × 9 inch (rough) solid sawn wood planks, as shown in the following table: Maximum intended nominal load 2 Maximum permissible span using full thickness undressed Maximum permissible span using nominal thickness 25 10 8 50 8 6 75 6 (ii) The maximum permissible span for 1 1/4 2 (c) Fabricated planks and platforms may be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks. Maximum spans for such units shall be as recommended by the manufacturer based on the maximum intended load being calculated as follows: Rated load Intended load Light-duty • 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area. Medium-duty • 50 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area. Heavy-duty • 75 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area. One-person • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span (total 250 pounds). Two-person • 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 500 pounds). Three-person • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span and 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 750 pounds). Note: Platform units used to make scaffold platforms intended for light-duty use shall be capable of supporting at least 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire unit-span area, or a 250-pound point load placed on the unit at the center of the span, whichever load produces the greater shear force. (d) Guardrails shall be as follows: (i) Toprails shall be equivalent in strength to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or 1 1/4 1/8 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tubing. (ii) Midrails shall be equivalent in strength to 1 inch by 6 inch lumber; or 1 1/4 1/4 1/8 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tubing. (iii) Toeboards shall be equivalent in strength to 1 inch by 4 inch lumber; or 1 1/4 1/4 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tubing. (iv) Posts shall be equivalent in strength to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or 1 1/4 1/4 1/8 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tubing. (v) Distance between posts shall not exceed 8 feet. (e) Overhead protection shall consist of 2 inch nominal planking laid tight, or 3/4 (f) Screen installed between toeboards and midrails or toprails shall consist of No. 18 gauge U.S. Standard wire one inch mesh. 2. Specific guidelines and tables. (a) Pole Scaffolds. Single Pole Wood Pole Scaffolds Light duty up to 20 feet high Light duty up to 60 feet high Medium duty up to 60 feet high Heavy duty up to 60 feet high Maximum intended load (lbs/ft 2 25 25 50 75 Poles or uprights 2 × 4 in 4 × 4 in 4 × 4 in 4 × 6 in. Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) 6 feet 10 feet 8 feet 6 feet Maximum pole spacing (transverse) 5 feet 5 feet 5 feet 5 feet Runners 1 × 4 in 1 1 4 2 × 10 in 2 × 10 in. Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers: 3 feet 2 × 4 in 2 × 4 in 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 in 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5 in. 5 feet 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 in 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 in. (rough) 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 in 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5 in. 6 feet 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 in 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 5 in. 8 feet 2 × 10 in. or 3 × 4 in Planking 1 1 4 2 × 10 in 2 × 10 in 2 × 10 in. Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal members 7 feet 9 feet 7 feet 6 ft. 6 in. Bracing horizontal 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in 1 × 6 in. or 1 1 4 2 × 4 in. Bracing diagonal 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in 2 × 4 in. Tie-ins 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in. Note: 3 16 Independent Wood Pole Scaffolds Light duty up to 20 feet high Light duty up to 60 feet high Medium duty up to 60 feet high Heavy duty up to 60 feet high Maximum intended load 25 lbs/ft 2 25 lbs/ft 2 50 lbs/ft 2 75 lbs/ft 2 Poles or uprights 2 × 4 in 4 × 4 in 4 × 4 in 4 × 4 in. Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) 6 feet 10 feet 8 feet 6 feet. Maximum (transverse) 6 feet 10 feet 8 feet 8 feet. Runners 1 1 4 1 1 4 2 × 10 in 2 × 10 in. Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers: 3 feet 2 × 4 in 2 × 4 in 2 × 10 in 2 × 10 in. (rough). 6 feet 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 in 2 × 10 in. (rough) or 3 × 8 in 2 × 10 in 2 × 10 in. (rough). 8 feet 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 in 2 × 10 in. (rough) or 3 × 8 in 2 × 10 in 10 feet 2 × 6 in. or 3 × 4 in 2 × 10 in. (rough) or 3 × 3 in Planking 1 1 4 2 × 10 in 2 × 10 in 2 × 10 in. Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal members 7 feet 7 feet 6 feet 6 feet. Bracing horizontal 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in 1 × 6 in. or 1 1 4 2 × 4 in. Bracing diagonal 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in 2 × 4 in. Tie-ins 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in 1 × 4 in. Note: 3 16 (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. Minimum Size of Members Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty Maximum intended load 25 lbs/ft 2 50 lbs/ft 2 75 lbs/ft 2 Posts, runners and braces Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) OD steel tube or pipe Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) OD steel tube or pipe Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) OD steel tube or pipe. Bearers Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 1 2 OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 4 ft. × 10 ft. OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 4 ft. × 7 ft. or OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 6 ft. × 6 ft. Nominal 2 1 2 OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum post spacing of 6 ft. × 8 ft. * Maximum runner spacing vertically 6 ft. 6 in 6 ft. 6 in 6 ft. 6 in. * Bearers shall be installed in the direction of the shorter dimension. Note: Maximum Number of Planked Levels Maximum number of additional planked levels Maximum height of scaffold Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty Number of Working Levels: 1 16 11 6 125 2 11 1 0 125 3 6 0 0 125 4 1 0 0 125 (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. (d) Plasterers', decorators', and large area scaffolds. (e) Bricklayers' square scaffolds. Maximum intended load: 50 lb/ft. 2 * The squares shall be set not more than 8 feet apart for light duty scaffolds and not more than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaffolds. Maximum width: 5 ft. Maximum height: 5 ft. Gussets: 1 × 6 in. Braces: 1 × 8 in. Legs: 2 × 6 in. Bearers (horizontal members): 2 × 6 in. (f) Horse scaffolds. Maximum intended load (light duty): 25 lb/ft. 2 ** Horses shall be spaced not more than 8 feet apart for light duty loads, and not more than 5 feet apart for medium duty loads. Maximum intended load (medium duty): 50 lb/ft. 2 Horizontal members or bearers: Light duty: 2 × 4 in. Medium duty: 3 × 4 in. Legs: 2 × 4 in. Longitudinal brace between legs: 1 × 6 in. Gusset brace at top of legs: 1 × 8 in. Half diagonal braces: 2 × 4 in. (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters' bracket scaffolds. 1/4 1/4 1/8 (2) Bolts used to attach brackets to structures shall not be less than 5/8 (3) Maximum bracket spacing shall be 8 feet on centers. (4) No more than two employees shall occupy any given 8 feet of a bracket or form scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials shall not exceed 75 pounds in addition to the occupancy. (5) Wooden figure-four scaffolds: Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft. 2 Uprights: 2 × 4 in. or 2 × 6 in. Bearers (two): 1 × 6 in. Braces: 1 × 6 in. Maximum length of bearers (unsupported): 3 ft. 6 in. (i) Outrigger bearers shall consist of two pieces of 1 × 6 inch lumber nailed on opposite sides of the vertical support. (ii) Bearers for wood figure-four brackets shall project not more than 3 feet 6 inches from the outside of the form support, and shall be braced and secured to prevent tipping or turning. The knee or angle brace shall intersect the bearer at least 3 feet from the form at an angle of approximately 45 degrees, and the lower end shall be nailed to a vertical support. (6) Metal bracket scaffolds: Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft. 2 Uprights: 2 × 4 inch Bearers: As designed. Braces: As designed. (7) Wood bracket scaffolds: Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft. 2 Uprights: 2 × 4 in or 2 × 6 in Bearers: 2 × 6 in Maximum scaffold width: 3 ft 6 in Braces: 1 × 6 in (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (i) Outrigger scaffolds (single level). (j) Pump jack scaffolds. (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. 2 (l) Window jack scaffolds. (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). 1/2 (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds. (o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. 5/8 (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (2) On suspension scaffolds designed for a working load of 500 pounds, no more than two employees shall be permitted on the scaffold at one time. On suspension scaffolds with a working load of 750 pounds, no more than three employees shall be permitted on the scaffold at one time. (3) Ladder-type platforms. The side stringer shall be of clear straight-grained spruce. The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak, ash, or hickory, at least 1 1/8 7/8 7/8 1/4 5/8 Schedule for Ladder-Type Platforms Length of Platform 12 feet 14 & 16 feet 18 & 20 feet. Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes): At ends 1 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 At middle 1 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 Reinforcing strip (minimum) A 1 8 7 8 Rungs Rungs shall be 1 1 8 7 8 Tie rods: Number (minimum) 3 4 4 Diameter (minimum) 1 4 1 4 1 4 Flooring, minimum finished size 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Schedule for Ladder-Type Platforms Length of Platform 22 & 24 ft 28 & 30 ft. Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes): At ends 1 3 4 1 3 4 1 2 At middle 1 3 4 1 4 1 3 4 Reinforcing strip (minimum) A 1 8 7 8 Rungs Rungs shall be 1 1 8 7 8 Number (minimum) 5 6. Diameter (minimum) 1 4 1 4 Flooring, minimum finished size 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 (4) Plank-Type Platforms. Plank-type platforms shall be composed of not less than nominal 2 × 8 inch unspliced planks, connected together on the underside with cleats at intervals not exceeding 4 feet, starting 6 inches from each end. A bar or other effective means shall be securely fastened to the platform at each end to prevent the platform from slipping off the hanger. The span between hangers for plank-type platforms shall not exceed 10 feet. (5) Beam-Type Platforms. Beam platforms shall have side stringers of lumber not less than 2 × 6 inches set on edge. The span between hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when beam platforms are used. The flooring shall be supported on 2 × 6 inch cross beams, laid flat and set into the upper edge of the stringers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more than 4 feet, securely nailed to the cross beams. Floor-boards shall not be spaced more than 1/2 (q)(1) Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds and stonesetters' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (2) Masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. 2 (r) Catenary scaffolds. (2) Not more than two employees shall be permitted on the scaffold at one time. (3) Maximum capacity of come-along shall be 2,000 lbs. (4) Vertical pickups shall be spaced not more than 50 feet apart. (5) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to at least 1/2 (s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (2) Platforms shall be made of 3/4 (3) Bearers shall be made from 2 × 4 inch, or 1 × 10 inch rough lumber. They shall be free of knots and other flaws. (4) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade manila rope. (t) Interior hung scaffolds. Bearers (use on edge): 2 × 10 in. Maximum intended load: Maximum span 25 lb/ft. 2 50 lb/ft. 2 75 lb/ft. 2 (u) Needle beam scaffolds. Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft. 2 Beams: 4 × 6 in. Maximum platform span: 8 ft. Maximum beam span: 10 ft. (1) Ropes shall be attached to the needle beams by a scaffold hitch or an eye splice. The loose end of the rope shall be tied by a bowline knot or by a round turn and a half hitch. (2) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade manila rope. (v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. (w) Mobile Scaffolds. (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. (y) Stilts. (z) Tank builder's scaffold. (2) Not more than three employees shall occupy a 10 feet 6 inch span of scaffold planking at any time. (3) A taut wire or synthetic rope supported on the scaffold brackets shall be installed at the scaffold plank level between the innermost edge of the scaffold platform and the curved plate structure of the tank shell to serve as a safety line in lieu of an inner guardrail assembly where the space between the scaffold platform and the tank exceeds 12 inches (30.48 cm). In the event the open space on either side of the rope exceeds 12 inches (30.48 cm), a second wire or synthetic rope appropriately placed, or guardrails in accordance with § 1926.451(g)(4), shall be installed in order to reduce that open space to less than 12 inches (30.48 cm). (4) Scaffold planks of rough full-dimensioned 2-inch (5.1 cm) × 12-inch (30.5 cm) Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine of Select Structural Grade shall be used. Douglas Fir planks shall have a fiber stress of at least 1900 lb/in 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (5) Guardrails shall be constructed of a taut wire or synthetic rope, and shall be supported by angle irons attached to brackets welded to the steel plates. These guardrails shall comply with § 1926.451(g)(4). Guardrail supports shall be located at no greater than 10 feet 6 inch intervals. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR 46950, Aug. 7, 2012] (Non-mandatory) Appendix B to Subpart L of Part 1926—Criteria for Determining the Feasibility of Providing Safe Access and Fall Protection for Scaffold Erectors and Dismantlers [Reserved] (Non-mandatory) Appendix C to Subpart L of Part 1926—List of National Consensus Standards ANSI/SIA A92.2-1990 Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices ANSI/SIA A92.3-1990 Manually Propelled Elevating Aerial Platforms ANSI/SIA A92.5-1990 Boom Supported Elevating Work Platforms ANSI/SIA A92.6-1990 Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms ANSI/SIA A92.7-1990 Airline Ground Support Vehicle-Mounted Vertical Lift Devices ANSI/SIA A92.8-1993 Vehicle-Mounted Bridge Inspection and Maintenance Devices ANSI/SIA A92.9-1993 Mast-Climbing Work Platforms (Non-mandatory) Appendix D to Subpart L of Part 1926—List of Training Topics for Scaffold Erectors and Dismantlers This appendix D is provided to serve as a guide to assist employers when evaluating the training needs of employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds. The Agency believes that employees erecting or dismantling scaffolds should be trained in the following topics: • General Overview of Scaffolding • regulations and standards • erection/dismantling planning • PPE and proper procedures • fall protection • materials handling • access • working platforms • foundations • guys, ties and braces • Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds • specific regulations and standards • components • parts inspection • erection/dismantling planning • guys, ties and braces • fall protection • general safety • access and platforms • erection/dismantling procedures • rolling scaffold assembly • putlogs • Tube and Clamp Scaffolds • specific regulations and standards • components • parts inspection • erection/dismantling planning • guys, ties and braces • fall protection • general safety • access and platforms • erection/dismantling procedures • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges • System Scaffolds • specific regulations and standards • components • parts inspection • erection/dismantling planning • guys, ties and braces • fall protection • general safety • access and platforms • erection/dismantling procedures • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges Scaffold erectors and dismantlers should all receive the general overview, and, in addition, specific training for the type of supported scaffold being erected or dismantled. (Non-mandatory) Appendix E to Subpart L of Part 1926—Drawings and Illustrations This appendix provides drawings of particular types of scaffolds and scaffold components, and graphic illustrations of bracing patterns and tie spacing patterns. This appendix is intended to provide visual guidance to assist the user in complying with the requirements of subpart L, part 1926. HOISTS MUST BE ELECTRONICALLY ISOLATED FROM SCAFFOLD [61 FR 46122, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996; 85 FR 8736, Feb. 18, 2020] Subpart M—Fall Protection Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; Source: 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, unless otherwise noted. § 1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Scope and application. (2) Section 1926.501 sets forth those workplaces, conditions, operations, and circumstances for which fall protection shall be provided except as follows: (i) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on scaffolds are provided in subpart L of this part. (ii) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on cranes and derricks are provided in subpart CC of this part. (iii) Fall protection requirements for employees performing steel erection work (except for towers and tanks) are provided in subpart R of this part. (iv) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on certain types of equipment used in tunneling operations are provided in subpart S of this part. (v) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees engaged in the erection of tanks and communication and broadcast towers are provided in § 1926.105. (vi) Subpart V of this part provides requirements relating to fall protection for employees working from aerial lifts or on poles, towers, or similar structures while engaged in the construction of electric transmission or distribution lines or equipment. (vii) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working on stairways and ladders are provided in subpart X of this part. (3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the requirements for the installation, construction, and proper use of fall protection required by part 1926, except as follows: (i) Performance requirements for guardrail systems used on scaffolds and performance requirements for falling object protection used on scaffolds are provided in subpart L of this part. (ii) Performance requirements for stairways, stairrail systems, and handrails are provided in subpart X of this part. (iii) Additional performance requirements for fall arrest and work-positioning equipment are provided in subpart V of this part. (iv) Section 1926.502 does not apply to the erection of tanks and communication and broadcast towers. (Note: Section 1926.104 sets the criteria for body belts, lanyards and lifelines used for fall protection during tank and communication and broadcast tower erection. Paragraphs (b),(c) and (f) of § 1926.107 provide definitions for the pertinent terms.) (v) Criteria for steps, handholds, ladders, and grabrails/guardrails/railings required by subpart CC are provided in subpart CC. Sections 1926.502(a), (c) through (e), and (i) apply to activities covered under subpart CC unless otherwise stated in subpart CC. No other paragraphs of § 1926.502 apply to subpart CC. (4) Section 1926.503 sets forth requirements for training in the installation and use of fall protection systems, except in relation to steel erection activities and the use of equipment covered by subpart CC. (b) Definitions. Anchorage Body belt Body harness Buckle Connector Controlled access zone Dangerous equipment Deceleration device Deceleration distance Equivalent Failure Free fall Free fall distance Guardrail system Hole Infeasible Lanyard Leading edge Lifeline Low-slope roof Lower levels Mechanical equipment Opening Overhand bricklaying and related work Personal fall arrest system Positioning device system Rope grab Roof Roofing work Safety-monitoring system Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard Snaphook (1) The locking type with a self-closing, self-locking keeper which remains closed and locked until unlocked and pressed open for connection or disconnection; or (2) The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains closed until pressed open for connection or disconnection. As of January 1, 1998, the use of a non-locking snaphook as part of personal fall arrest systems and positioning device systems is prohibited. Steep roof Toeboard Unprotected sides and edges Walking/working surface Warning line system Work area [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 39255, Aug. 2, 1995; 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001; 75 FR 48133, Aug. 9, 2010; 79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014] § 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection. (a) General. (2) The employer shall determine if the walking/working surfaces on which its employees are to work have the strength and structural integrity to support employees safely. Employees shall be allowed to work on those surfaces only when the surfaces have the requisite strength and structural integrity. (b)(1) Unprotected sides and edges. (2) Leading edges. Note: There is a presumption that it is feasible and will not create a greater hazard to implement at least one of the above-listed fall protection systems. Accordingly, the employer has the burden of establishing that it is appropriate to implement a fall protection plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) for a particular workplace situation, in lieu of implementing any of those systems. (ii) Each employee on a walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a lower level where leading edges are under construction, but who is not engaged in the leading edge work, shall be protected from falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system. If a guardrail system is chosen to provide the fall protection, and a controlled access zone has already been established for leading edge work, the control line may be used in lieu of a guardrail along the edge that parallels the leading edge. (3) Hoist areas. (4) Holes. (ii) Each employee on a walking/working surface shall be protected from tripping in or stepping into or through holes (including skylights) by covers. (iii) Each employee on a walking/working surface shall be protected from objects falling through holes (including skylights) by covers. (5) Formwork and reinforcing steel. (6) Ramps, runways, and other walkways. (7) Excavations. (ii) Each employee at the edge of a well, pit, shaft, and similar excavation 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, fences, barricades, or covers. (8) Dangerous equipment. (ii) Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above dangerous equipment shall be protected from fall hazards by guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, or safety net systems. (9) Overhand bricklaying and related work. (ii) Each employee reaching more than 10 inches (25 cm) below the level of the walking/working surface on which they are working, shall be protected from falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system. Note: Bricklaying operations performed on scaffolds are regulated by subpart L—Scaffolds of this part. (10) Roofing work on Low-slope roofs. (11) Steep roofs. (12) Precast concrete erection. Note: There is a presumption that it is feasible and will not create a greater hazard to implement at least one of the above-listed fall protection systems. Accordingly, the employer has the burden of establishing that it is appropriate to implement a fall protection plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) for a particular workplace situation, in lieu of implementing any of those systems. (13) Residential construction. Note: There is a presumption that it is feasible and will not create a greater hazard to implement at least one of the above-listed fall protection systems. Accordingly, the employer has the burden of establishing that it is appropriate to implement a fall protection plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) for a particular workplace situation, in lieu of implementing any of those systems. (14) Wall openings. (15) Walking/working surfaces not otherwise addressed. (c) Protection from falling objects. (1) Erect toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems to prevent objects from falling from higher levels; or, (2) Erect a canopy structure and keep potential fall objects far enough from the edge of the higher level so that those objects would not go over the edge if they were accidentally displaced; or, (3) Barricade the area to which objects could fall, prohibit employees from entering the barricaded area, and keep objects that may fall far enough away from the edge of a higher level so that those objects would not go over the edge if they were accidentally displaced. § 1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria and practices. (a) General. (2) Employers shall provide and install all fall protection systems required by this subpart for an employee, and shall comply with all other pertinent requirements of this subpart before that employee begins the work that necessitates the fall protection. (b) Guardrail systems. (1) Top edge height of top rails, or equivalent guardrail system members, shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) above the walking/working level. When conditions warrant, the height of the top edge may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the guardrail system meets all other criteria of this paragraph. Note: When employees are using stilts, the top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent member, shall be increased an amount equal to the height of the stilts. (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or equivalent intermediate structural members shall be installed between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/working surface when there is no wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches (53 cm) high. (i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/working level. (ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall extend from the top rail to the walking/working level and along the entire opening between top rail supports. (iii) Intermediate members (such as balusters), when used between posts, shall be not more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart. (iv) Other structural members (such as additional midrails and architectural panels) shall be installed such that there are no openings in the guardrail system that are more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide. (3) Guardrail systems shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top edge, in any outward or downward direction, at any point along the top edge. (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test load specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section is applied in a downward direction, the top edge of the guardrail shall not deflect to a height less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/working level. Guardrail system components selected and constructed in accordance with the appendix B to subpart M of this part will be deemed to meet this requirement. (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and equivalent structural members shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 150 pounds (666 N) applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the midrail or other member. (6) Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced as to prevent injury to an employee from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing. (7) The ends of all top rails and midrails shall not overhang the terminal posts, except where such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard. (8) Steel banding and plastic banding shall not be used as top rails or midrails. (9) Top rails and midrails shall be at least one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal diameter or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations. If wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be flagged at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-visibility material. (10) When guardrail systems are used at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or removable guardrail section shall be placed across the access opening between guardrail sections when hoisting operations are not taking place. (11) When guardrail systems are used at holes, they shall be erected on all unprotected sides or edges of the hole. (12) When guardrail systems are used around holes used for the passage of materials, the hole shall have not more than two sides provided with removable guardrail sections to allow the passage of materials. When the hole is not in use, it shall be closed over with a cover, or a guardrail system shall be provided along all unprotected sides or edges. (13) When guardrail systems are used around holes which are used as points of access (such as ladderways), they shall be provided with a gate, or be so offset that a person cannot walk directly into the hole. (14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and runways shall be erected along each unprotected side or edge. (15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being used for top rails or midrails shall be inspected as frequently as necessary to ensure that it continues to meet the strength requirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section. (c) Safety net systems. (1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as practicable under the walking/working surface on which employees are working, but in no case more than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When nets are used on bridges, the potential fall area from the walking/working surface to the net shall be unobstructed. (2) Safety nets shall extend outward from the outermost projection of the work surface as follows: Vertical distance from working level to horizontal plane of net Minimum required horizontal distance of outer edge of net from the edge of the working surface Up to 5 feet 8 feet. More than 5 feet up to 10 feet 10 feet. More than 10 feet 13 feet. (3) Safety nets shall be installed with sufficient clearance under them to prevent contact with the surface or structures below when subjected to an impact force equal to the drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4) of this section. (4) Safety nets and their installations shall be capable of absorbing an impact force equal to that produced by the drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section. (i) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section, safety nets and safety net installations shall be drop-tested at the jobsite after initial installation and before being used as a fall protection system, whenever relocated, after major repair, and at 6-month intervals if left in one place. The drop-test shall consist of a 400 pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 ±2 inches (76 ±5 cm) in diameter dropped into the net from the highest walking/working surface at which employees are exposed to fall hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level. (ii) When the employer can demonstrate that it is unreasonable to perform the drop-test required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section, the employer (or a designated competent person) shall certify that the net and net installation is in compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and (c)(4)(i) of this section by preparing a certification record prior to the net being used as a fall protection system. The certification record must include an identification of the net and net installation for which the certification record is being prepared; the date that it was determined that the identified net and net installation were in compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this section and the signature of the person making the determination and certification. The most recent certification record for each net and net installation shall be available at the jobsite for inspection. (5) Defective nets shall not be used. Safety nets shall be inspected at least once a week for wear, damage, and other deterioration. Defective components shall be removed from service. Safety nets shall also be inspected after any occurrence which could affect the integrity of the safety net system. (6) Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and tools which have fallen into the safety net shall be removed as soon as possible from the net and at least before the next work shift. (7) The maximum size of each safety net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 square inches (230 cm 2 (8) Each safety net (or section of it) shall have a border rope for webbing with a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). (9) Connections between safety net panels shall be as strong as integral net components and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart. (d) Personal fall arrest systems. (1) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or made of equivalent materials. (2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of the system. (3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). (4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent deformation. (5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to which they are connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member, or shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of the snaphook keeper by the connected member. Effective January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks shall be used. (6) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed for the following connections, snaphooks shall not be engaged: (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; (ii) to each other; (iii) to a Dee-ring to which another snaphook or other connector is attached; (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or (v) to any object which is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such that unintentional disengagement could occur by the connected object being able to depress the snaphook keeper and release itself. (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work platforms with horizontal lifelines which may become vertical lifelines, the devices used to connect to a horizontal lifeline shall be capable of locking in both directions on the lifeline. (8) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, and used, under the supervision of a qualified person, as part of a complete personal fall arrest system, which maintains a safety factor of at least two. (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). (10) (i) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(10)(ii) of this section, when vertical lifelines are used, each employee shall be attached to a separate lifeline. (ii) During the construction of elevator shafts, two employees may be attached to the same lifeline in the hoistway, provided both employees are working atop a false car that is equipped with guardrails; the strength of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 pounds per employee attached] (44.4 kN); and all other criteria specified in this paragraph for lifelines have been met. (11) Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or abraded. (12) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN) applied to the device with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position. (13) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and tearing and deforming lanyards shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position. (14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lanyards, lifelines, and strength components of body belts and body harnesses shall be made from synthetic fibers. (15) Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per employee attached, or shall be designed, installed, and used as follows: (i) as part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of at least two; and (ii) under the supervision of a qualified person. (16) Personal fall arrest systems, when stopping a fall, shall: (i) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used with a body belt; (ii) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used with a body harness; (iii) be rigged such that an employee can neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m), nor contact any lower level; (iv) bring an employee to a complete stop and limit maximum deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and, (v) have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact energy of an employee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is less. Note: If the personal fall arrest system meets the criteria and protocols contained in appendix C to subpart M, and if the system is being used by an employee having a combined person and tool weight of less than 310 pounds (140 kg), the system will be considered to be in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. If the system is used by an employee having a combined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140 kg) or more, then the employer must appropriately modify the criteria and protocols of the appendix to provide proper protection for such heavier weights, or the system will not be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. (17) The attachment point of the body belt shall be located in the center of the wearer's back. The attachment point of the body harness shall be located in the center of the wearer's back near shoulder level, or above the wearer's head. (18) Body belts, harnesses, and components shall be used only for employee protection (as part of a personal fall arrest system or positioning device system) and not to hoist materials. (19) Personal fall arrest systems and components subjected to impact loading shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee protection until inspected and determined by a competent person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse. (20) The employer shall provide for prompt rescue of employees in the event of a fall or shall assure that employees are able to rescue themselves. (21) Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected prior to each use for wear, damage and other deterioration, and defective components shall be removed from service. (22) Body belts shall be at least one and five-eighths (1 5/8 (23) Personal fall arrest systems shall not be attached to guardrail systems, nor shall they be attached to hoists except as specified in other subparts of this part. (24) When a personal fall arrest system is used at hoist areas, it shall be rigged to allow the movement of the employee only as far as the edge of the walking/working surface. (e) Positioning device systems. (1) Positioning devices shall be rigged such that an employee cannot free fall more than 2 feet (.6 m). (2) Positioning devices shall be secured to an anchorage capable of supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee's fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater. (3) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or made of equivalent materials. (4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of this system. (5) Connecting assemblies shall have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) (6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent deformation. (7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to which they are connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member, or shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of the snaphook keeper by the connected member. As of January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks shall be used. (8) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed for the following connections, snaphooks shall not be engaged: (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; (ii) to each other; (iii) to a Dee-ring to which another snaphook or other connector is attached; (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or (v) to any object which is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such that unintentional disengagement could occur by the connected object being able to depress the snaphook keeper and release itself. (9) Positioning device systems shall be inspected prior to each use for wear, damage, and other deterioration, and defective components shall be removed from service. (10) Body belts, harnesses, and components shall be used only for employee protection (as part of a personal fall arrest system or positioning device system) and not to hoist materials. (f) Warning line systems. (1) The warning line shall be erected around all sides of the roof work area. (i) When mechanical equipment is not being used, the warning line shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge. (ii) When mechanical equipment is being used, the warning line shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge which is parallel to the direction of mechanical equipment operation, and not less than 10 feet (3.1 m) from the roof edge which is perpendicular to the direction of mechanical equipment operation. (iii) Points of access, materials handling areas, storage areas, and hoisting areas shall be connected to the work area by an access path formed by two warning lines. (iv) When the path to a point of access is not in use, a rope, wire, chain, or other barricade, equivalent in strength and height to the warning line, shall be placed across the path at the point where the path intersects the warning line erected around the work area, or the path shall be offset such that a person cannot walk directly into the work area. (2) Warning lines shall consist of ropes, wires, or chains, and supporting stanchions erected as follows: (i) The rope, wire, or chain shall be flagged at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-visibility material; (ii) The rope, wire, or chain shall be rigged and supported in such a way that its lowest point (including sag) is no less than 34 inches (.9 m) from the walking/working surface and its highest point is no more than 39 inches (1.0 m) from the walking/working surface; (iii) After being erected, with the rope, wire, or chain attached, stanchions shall be capable of resisting, without tipping over, a force of at least 16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally against the stanchion, 30 inches (.8 m) above the walking/working surface, perpendicular to the warning line, and in the direction of the floor, roof, or platform edge; (iv) The rope, wire, or chain shall have a minimum tensile strength of 500 pounds (2.22 kN), and after being attached to the stanchions, shall be capable of supporting, without breaking, the loads applied to the stanchions as prescribed in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section; and (v) The line shall be attached at each stanchion in such a way that pulling on one section of the line between stanchions will not result in slack being taken up in adjacent sections before the stanchion tips over. (3) No employee shall be allowed in the area between a roof edge and a warning line unless the employee is performing roofing work in that area. (4) Mechanical equipment on roofs shall be used or stored only in areas where employees are protected by a warning line system, guardrail system, or personal fall arrest system. (g) Controlled access zones. (1) When used to control access to areas where leading edge and other operations are taking place the controlled access zone shall be defined by a control line or by any other means that restricts access. (i) When control lines are used, they shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 25 feet (7.7 m) from the unprotected or leading edge, except when erecting precast concrete members. (ii) When erecting precast concrete members, the control line shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the member being erected, whichever is less, from the leading edge. (iii) The control line shall extend along the entire length of the unprotected or leading edge and shall be approximately parallel to the unprotected or leading edge. (iv) The control line shall be connected on each side to a guardrail system or wall. (2) When used to control access to areas where overhand bricklaying and related work are taking place: (i) The controlled access zone shall be defined by a control line erected not less than 10 feet (3.1 m) nor more than 15 feet (4.5 m) from the working edge. (ii) The control line shall extend for a distance sufficient for the controlled access zone to enclose all employees performing overhand bricklaying and related work at the working edge and shall be approximately parallel to the working edge. (iii) Additional control lines shall be erected at each end to enclose the controlled access zone. (iv) Only employees engaged in overhand bricklaying or related work shall be permitted in the controlled access zone. (3) Control lines shall consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and supporting stanchions as follows: (i) Each line shall be flagged or otherwise clearly marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-visibility material. (ii) Each line shall be rigged and supported in such a way that its lowest point (including sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from the walking/working surface and its highest point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) [50 inches (1.3 m) when overhand bricklaying operations are being performed] from the walking/working surface. (iii) Each line shall have a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN). (4) On floors and roofs where guardrail systems are not in place prior to the beginning of overhand bricklaying operations, controlled access zones shall be enlarged, as necessary, to enclose all points of access, material handling areas, and storage areas. (5) On floors and roofs where guardrail systems are in place, but need to be removed to allow overhand bricklaying work or leading edge work to take place, only that portion of the guardrail necessary to accomplish that day's work shall be removed. (h) Safety monitoring systems. (1) The employer shall designate a competent person to monitor the safety of other employees and the employer shall ensure that the safety monitor complies with the following requirements: (i) The safety monitor shall be competent to recognize fall hazards; (ii) The safety monitor shall warn the employee when it appears that the employee is unaware of a fall hazard or is acting in an unsafe manner; (iii) The safety monitor shall be on the same walking/working surface and within visual sighting distance of the employee being monitored; (iv) The safety monitor shall be close enough to communicate orally with the employee; and (v) The safety monitor shall not have other responsibilities which could take the monitor's attention from the monitoring function. (2) Mechanical equipment shall not be used or stored in areas where safety monitoring systems are being used to monitor employees engaged in roofing operations on low-slope roofs. (3) No employee, other than an employee engaged in roofing work [on low-sloped roofs] or an employee covered by a fall protection plan, shall be allowed in an area where an employee is being protected by a safety monitoring system. (4) Each employee working in a controlled access zone shall be directed to comply promptly with fall hazard warnings from safety monitors. (i) Covers. (1) Covers located in roadways and vehicular aisles shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least twice the maximum axle load of the largest vehicle expected to cross over the cover. (2) All other covers shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least twice the weight of employees, equipment, and materials that may be imposed on the cover at any one time. (3) All covers shall be secured when installed so as to prevent accidental displacement by the wind, equipment, or employees. (4) All covers shall be color coded or they shall be marked with the word “HOLE” or “COVER” to provide warning of the hazard. Note: This provision does not apply to cast iron manhole covers or steel grates used on streets or roadways. (j) Protection from falling objects. (1) Toeboards, when used as falling object protection, shall be erected along the edge of the overhead walking/working surface for a distance sufficient to protect employees below. (2) Toeboards shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the toeboard. (3) Toeboards shall be a minimum of 3 1/2 1/4 (4) Where tools, equipment, or materials are piled higher than the top edge of a toeboard, paneling or screening shall be erected from the walking/working surface or toeboard to the top of a guardrail system's top rail or midrail, for a distance sufficient to protect employees below. (5) Guardrail systems, when used as falling object protection, shall have all openings small enough to prevent passage of potential falling objects. (6) During the performance of overhand bricklaying and related work: (i) No materials or equipment except masonry and mortar shall be stored within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the working edge. (ii) Excess mortar, broken or scattered masonry units, and all other materials and debris shall be kept clear from the work area by removal at regular intervals. (7) During the performance of roofing work: (i) Materials and equipment shall not be stored within 6 feet (1.8 m) of a roof edge unless guardrails are erected at the edge. (ii) Materials which are piled, grouped, or stacked near a roof edge shall be stable and self-supporting. (8) Canopies, when used as falling object protection, shall be strong enough to prevent collapse and to prevent penetration by any objects which may fall onto the canopy. (k) Fall protection plan. (1) The fall protection plan shall be prepared by a qualified person and developed specifically for the site where the leading edge work, precast concrete work, or residential construction work is being performed and the plan must be maintained up to date. (2) Any changes to the fall protection plan shall be approved by a qualified person. (3) A copy of the fall protection plan with all approved changes shall be maintained at the job site. (4) The implementation of the fall protection plan shall be under the supervision of a competent person. (5) The fall protection plan shall document the reasons why the use of conventional fall protection systems (guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, or safety nets systems) are infeasible or why their use would create a greater hazard. (6) The fall protection plan shall include a written discussion of other measures that will be taken to reduce or eliminate the fall hazard for workers who cannot be provided with protection from the conventional fall protection systems. For example, the employer shall discuss the extent to which scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle mounted work platforms can be used to provide a safer working surface and thereby reduce the hazard of falling. (7) The fall protection plan shall identify each location where conventional fall protection methods cannot be used. These locations shall then be classified as controlled access zones and the employer must comply with the criteria in paragraph (g) of this section. (8) Where no other alternative measure has been implemented, the employer shall implement a safety monitoring system in conformance with § 1926.502(h). (9) The fall protection plan must include a statement which provides the name or other method of identification for each employee who is designated to work in controlled access zones. No other employees may enter controlled access zones. (10) In the event an employee falls, or some other related, serious incident occurs, (e.g., a near miss) the employer shall investigate the circumstances of the fall or other incident to determine if the fall protection plan needs to be changed (e.g. new practices, procedures, or training) and shall implement those changes to prevent similar types of falls or incidents. § 1926.503 Training requirements. The following training provisions supplement and clarify the requirements of § 1926.21 regarding the hazards addressed in subpart M of this part. (a) Training program. (2) The employer shall assure that each employee has been trained, as necessary, by a competent person qualified in the following areas: (i) The nature of fall hazards in the work area; (ii) The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting the fall protection systems to be used; (iii) The use and operation of guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, safety net systems, warning line systems, safety monitoring systems, controlled access zones, and other protection to be used; (iv) The role of each employee in the safety monitoring system when this system is used; (v) The limitations on the use of mechanical equipment during the performance of roofing work on low-sloped roofs; (vi) The correct procedures for the handling and storage of equipment and materials and the erection of overhead protection; and (vii) The role of employees in fall protection plans; (viii) The standards contained in this subpart. (b) Certification of training. (2) The latest training certification shall be maintained. (c) Retraining. (1) Changes in the workplace render previous training obsolete; or (2) Changes in the types of fall protection systems or equipment to be used render previous training obsolete; or (3) Inadequacies in an affected employee's knowledge or use of fall protection systems or equipment indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill. Note: The following appendices to subpart M of this part serve as non-mandatory guidelines to assist employers in complying with the appropriate requirements of subpart M of this part. Appendix A to Subpart M of Part 1926—Determining Roof Widths Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With § 1926.501(b)(10) (1) This appendix serves as a guideline to assist employers complying with the requirements of § 1926.501(b)(10). Section 1926.501(b)(10) allows the use of a safety monitoring system alone as a means of providing fall protection during the performance of roofing operations on low-sloped roofs 50 feet (15.25 m) or less in width. Each example in the appendix shows a roof plan or plans and indicates where each roof or roof area is to be measured to determine its width. Section views or elevation views are shown where appropriate. Some examples show “correct” and “incorrect” subdivisions of irregularly shaped roofs divided into smaller, regularly shaped areas. In all examples, the dimension selected to be the width of an area is the lesser of the two primary dimensions of the area, as viewed from above. Example A shows that on a simple rectangular roof, width is the lesser of the two primary overall dimensions. This is also the case with roofs which are sloped toward or away from the roof center, as shown in Example B. (2) Many roofs are not simple rectangles. Such roofs may be broken down into subareas as shown in Example C. The process of dividing a roof area can produce many different configurations. Example C gives the general rule of using dividing lines of minimum length to minimize the size and number of the areas which are potentially less than 50 feet (15.25 m) wide. The intent is to minimize the number of roof areas where safety monitoring systems alone are sufficient protection. (3) Roofs which are comprised of several separate, non-contiguous roof areas, as in Example D, may be considered as a series of individual roofs. Some roofs have penthouses, additional floors, courtyard openings, or similar architectural features; Example E shows how the rule for dividing roofs into subareas is applied to such configurations. Irregular, non-rectangular roofs must be considered on an individual basis, as shown in Example F. [85 FR 8738, Feb. 18, 2020] Appendix B to Subpart M of Part 1926—Guardrail Systems Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with § 1926.502(b) The standard requires guardrail systems and components to be designed and built to meet the requirements of § 1926.502 (b) (3), (4), and (5). This appendix serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers in complying with these requirements. An employer may use these guidelines as a starting point for designing guardrail systems. However, the guidelines do not provide all the information necessary to build a complete system, and the employer is still responsible for designing and assembling these components in such a way that the completed system will meet the requirements of § 1926.502(b) (3), (4), and (5). Components for which no specific guidelines are given in this appendix (e.g., joints, base connections, components made with other materials, and components with other dimensions) must also be designed and constructed in such a way that the completed system meets the requirements of § 1926.502. (1) For wood railings: Wood components shall be minimum 1500 lb-ft/in 2 (2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and intermediate railings shall be at least one and one-half inches nominal diameter (schedule 40 pipe) with posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. (3) For structural steel railings: posts, top rails, and intermediate rails shall be at least 2-inch by 2-inch (5 cm × 10 cm) by 3/8 Appendix C to Subpart M of Part 1926—Personal Fall Arrest Systems Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With § 1926.502(d) I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems and positioning device systems General. (b) General conditions for all tests in the appendix to § 1926.502(d). (2) The anchorage should be rigid, and should not have a deflection greater than 0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied. (3) The frequency response of the load measuring instrumentation should be 500 Hz. (4) The test weight used in the strength and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cylindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm). (5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create the free fall distance should be supplied with the system, or in its absence, the least elastic lanyard or lifeline available to be used with the system. (6) The test weight for each test should be hoisted to the required level and should be quickly released without having any appreciable motion imparted to it. (7) The system's performance should be evaluated taking into account the range of environmental conditions for which it is designed to be used. (8) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further operation. (c) Strength test. (2) The test consists of dropping the test weight once. A new unused system should be used for each test. (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or body harness. (4) For rope-grab-type deceleration systems, the length of the lifeline above the centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the lifeline's anchorage point should not exceed 2 feet (0.61 m). (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which do not automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, and for systems with deceleration devices which have a connection distance in excess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness), the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is 1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point, to its hanging location (6 feet below the anchorage). The test weight should fall without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test. In some cases a non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length may need to be added to the system (for test purposes) to create the necessary free fall distance. (6) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22 m). (7) Any weight which detaches from the belt or harness has failed the strength test. (d) Force test General. (2) For lanyard systems. (ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or body harness. (iii) The test weight should fall free from the anchorage level to its hanging location (a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test. (3) For all other systems. (ii) The free fall distance to be used in the test should be the maximum fall distance physically permitted by the system during normal use conditions, up to a maximum free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet (1.83 m), except as follows: (A) For deceleration systems which have a connection link or lanyard, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to the connection distance (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness). (B) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to that permitted by the system in normal use. (For example, to test a system with a self-retracting lifeline or lanyard, the test weight should be supported and the system allowed to retract the lifeline or lanyard as it would in normal use. The test weight would then be released and the force and deceleration distance measured). (4) A system fails the force test if the recorded maximum arresting force exceeds 1,260 pounds (5.6 kN) when using a body belt, and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when using a body harness. (5) The maximum elongation and deceleration distance should be recorded during the force test. (e) Deceleration device tests General. (2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (ii) Unless the device is permanently marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline which must be used, several types (different diameters and different materials), of lifelines should be used to test the device. (3) Other self-activating-type deceleration devices. II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for personal fall arrest systems. (a) Selection and use considerations. (2) Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines are subject to damage by work operations such as welding, chemical cleaning, and sandblasting, the component should be protected, or other securing systems should be used. The employer should fully evaluate the work conditions and environment (including seasonal weather changes) before selecting the appropriate personal fall protection system. Once in use, the system's effectiveness should be monitored. In some cases, a program for cleaning and maintenance of the system may be necessary. (b) Testing considerations. (c) Component compatibility considerations. (d) Employee training considerations. (e) Instruction considerations. (1) The force measured during the sample force test; (2) The maximum elongation measured for lanyards during the force test; (3) The deceleration distance measured for deceleration devices during the force test; (4) Caution statements on critical use limitations; (5) Application limits; (6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off techniques, including the proper dee-ring or other attachment point to use on the body belt and harness for fall arrest; (7) Proper climbing techniques; (8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, and storage; and (9) Specific lifelines which may be used. This information should be provided to employees during training. (f) Rescue considerations. (g) Inspection considerations. (h) Tie-off considerations. before during (i) Properly planned anchorages should be used if they are available. In some cases, anchorages must be installed immediately prior to use. In such cases, a registered professional engineer with experience in designing fall protection systems, or another qualified person with appropriate education and experience should design an anchor point to be installed. (ii) In other cases, the Agency recognizes that there will be a need to devise an anchor point from existing structures. Examples of what might be appropriate anchor points are steel members or I-beams if an acceptable strap is available for the connection (do not use a lanyard with a snaphook clipped onto itself); large eye-bolts made of an appropriate grade steel; guardrails or railings if they have been designed for use as an anchor point; or masonry or wood members only if the attachment point is substantial and precautions have been taken to assure that bolts or other connectors will not pull through. A qualified person should be used to evaluate the suitable of these “make shift” anchorages with a focus on proper strength. (2) Employers and employees should at all times be aware that the strength of a personal fall arrest system is based on its being attached to an anchoring system which does not reduce the strength of the system (such as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/snap-hook anchorage). Therefore, if a means of attachment is used that will reduce the strength of the system, that component should be replaced by a stronger one, but one that will also maintain the appropriate maximum arrest force characteristics. (3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or lifeline (at any location) can reduce the lifeline or lanyard strength by 50 percent or more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or lifeline should be used to compensate for the weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard length should be reduced (or the tie-off location raised) to minimize free fall distance, or the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by one which has an appropriately incorporated connector to eliminate the need for a knot. (4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline around an “H” or “I” beam or similar support can reduce its strength as much as 70 percent due to the cutting action of the beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline should be protected from the edge; or free fall distance should be greatly minimized. (5) Tie-off where the line passes over or around rough or sharp surfaces reduces strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging should be used. Such alternatives may include use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection, wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap around or over the problem surface. (6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected to greater loads than the impact load imposed by an attached component. When the angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 degrees, the impact force imparted to the lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly amplified. For example, with a sag angle of 15 degrees, the force amplification is about 2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. Depending on the angle of sag, and the line's elasticity, the strength of the horizontal lifeline and the anchorages to which it is attached should be increased a number of times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care should be taken in considering a horizontal lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to a horizontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement of the falling employee and the horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall may cause other employees to fall also. Horizontal lifeline and anchorage strength should be increased for each additional employee to be tied off. For these and other reasons, the design of systems using horizontal lifelines must only be done by qualified persons. Testing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to use is recommended. (7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated along the axis of the bolt and its strength is greatly reduced if the force is applied at an angle to this axis (in the direction of shear). Also, care should be exercised in selecting the proper diameter of the eye to avoid accidental disengagement of snap-hooks not designed to be compatible for the connection. (8) Due to the significant reduction in the strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the sliding hitch knot (prusik) should not be used for lifeline/lanyard connections except in emergency situations where no other available system is practical. The “one-and-one” sliding hitch knot should never be used because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The “two-and-two,” or “three-and-three” knot (preferable) may be used in emergency situations; however, care should be taken to limit free fall distance to a minimum because of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength. (i) Vertical lifeline considerations. (j) Snap-hook considerations. (2) As required by § 1926.502(d)(6), the following connections must be avoided (unless properly designed locking snaphooks are used) because they are conditions which can result in roll-out when a nonlocking snaphook is used: (i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a horizontal lifeline. (ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to one dee-ring. (iii) Two snaphooks connected to each other. (iv) A snaphook connected back on its integral lanyard. (v) A snaphook connected to a webbing loop or webbing lanyard. (vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring, rebar, or other connection point in relation to the snaphook dimensions which would allow the snaphook keeper to be depressed by a turning motion of the snaphook. (k) Free fall considerations. (l) Elongation and deceleration distance considerations. (m) Obstruction considerations. (n) Other considerations. Appendix D to Subpart M of Part 1926—Positioning Device Systems Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With § 1926.502(e) I. Testing Methods For Positioning Device Systems. (a) General. (2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and shall not have a deflection greater than .04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied. (3) During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 250 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used. The weight shall be a rigid object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm). (4) Each test shall consist of dropping the specified weight one time without failure of the system being tested. A new system shall be used for each test. (5) The test weight for each test shall be hoisted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its “at rest” position), and shall be dropped so as to permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m). (6) The test is failed whenever any breakage or slippage occurs which permits the weight to fall free of the system. (7) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further operation; however, all such incapacities shall be readily apparent. II. Inspection Considerations. Appendix E to Subpart M of Part 1926—Sample Fall Protection Plan Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With § 1926.502(k) Employers engaged in leading edge work, precast concrete construction work and residential construction work who can demonstrate that it is infeasible or creates a greater hazard to use conventional fall protection systems must develop and follow a fall protection plan. Below are sample fall protection plans developed for precast concrete construction and residential work that could be tailored to be site specific for other precast concrete or residential jobsite. This sample plan can be modified to be used for other work involving leading edge work. The sample plan outlines the elements that must be addressed in any fall protection plan. The reasons outlined in this sample fall protection plan are for illustrative purposes only and are not necessarily a valid, acceptable rationale (unless the conditions at the job site are the same as those covered by these sample plans) for not using conventional fall protection systems for a particular precast concrete or residential construction worksite. However, the sample plans provide guidance to employers on the type of information that is required to be discussed in fall protection plans. Sample Fall Protection Plans Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress Concrete Structures This Fall Protection Plan is specific for the following project: Location of Job Erecting Company Date Plan Prepared or Modified Plan Prepared By Plan Approved By Plan Supervised By The following Fall Protection Plan is a sample program prepared for the prevention of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Protection Plan must be developed and evaluated on a site by site basis. It is recommended that erectors discuss the written Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area Office prior to going on a jobsite. I. Statement of Company Policy (Company Name) is dedicated to the protection of its employees from on-the-job injuries. All employees of (Company Name) have the responsibility to work safely on the job. The purpose of this plan is: (a) To supplement our standard safety policy by providing safety standards specifically designed to cover fall protection on this job and; (b) to ensure that each employee is trained and made aware of the safety provisions which are to be implemented by this plan prior to the start of erection. This Fall Protection Plan addresses the use of other than conventional fall protection at a number of areas on the project, as well as identifying specific activities that require non-conventional means of fall protection. These areas include: a. Connecting activity (point of erection). b. Leading edge work. c. Unprotected sides or edge. d. Grouting. This plan is designed to enable employers and employees to recognize the fall hazards on this job and to establish the procedures that are to be followed in order to prevent falls to lower levels or through holes and openings in walking/working surfaces. Each employee will be trained in these procedures and strictly adhere to them except when doing so would expose the employee to a greater hazard. If, in the employee's opinion, this is the case, the employee is to notify the foreman of the concern and the concern addressed before proceeding. Safety policy and procedure on any one project cannot be administered, implemented, monitored and enforced by any one individual. The total objective of a safe, accident free work environment can only be accomplished by a dedicated, concerted effort by every individual involved with the project from management down to the last employee. Each employee must understand their value to the company; the costs of accidents, both monetary, physical, and emotional; the objective of the safety policy and procedures; the safety rules that apply to the safety policy and procedures; and what their individual role is in administering, implementing, monitoring, and compliance of their safety policy and procedures. This allows for a more personal approach to compliance through planning, training, understanding and cooperative effort, rather than by strict enforcement. If for any reason an unsafe act persists, strict enforcement will be implemented. It is the responsibility of (name of competent person) to implement this Fall Protection Plan. (Name of Competent Person) is responsible for continual observational safety checks of their work operations and to enforce the safety policy and procedures. The foreman also is responsible to correct any unsafe acts or conditions immediately. It is the responsibility of the employee to understand and adhere to the procedures of this plan and to follow the instructions of the foreman. It is also the responsibility of the employee to bring to management's attention any unsafe or hazardous conditions or acts that may cause injury to either themselves or any other employees. Any changes to this Fall Protection Plan must be approved by (name of Qualified Person). II. Fall Protection Systems To Be Used on This Project Where conventional fall protection is infeasible or creates a greater hazard at the leading edge and during initial connecting activity, we plan to do this work using a safety monitoring system and expose only a minimum number of employees for the time necessary to actually accomplish the job. The maximum number of workers to be monitored by one safety monitor is six (6). We are designating the following trained employees as designated erectors and they are permitted to enter the controlled access zones and work without the use of conventional fall protection. Safety monitor: Designated erector: Designated erector: Designated erector: Designated erector: Designated erector: Designated erector: The safety monitor shall be identified by wearing an orange hard hat. The designated erectors will be identified by one of the following methods: 1. They will wear a blue colored arm band, or 2. They will wear a blue colored hard hat, or 3. They will wear a blue colored vest. Only individuals with the appropriate experience, skills, and training will be authorized as designated erectors. All employees that will be working as designated erectors under the safety monitoring system shall have been trained and instructed in the following areas: 1. Recognition of the fall hazards in the work area (at the leading edge and when making initial connections—point of erection). 2. Avoidance of fall hazards using established work practices which have been made known to the employees. 3. Recognition of unsafe practices or working conditions that could lead to a fall, such as windy conditions. 4. The function, use, and operation of safety monitoring systems, guardrail systems, body belt/harness systems, control zones and other protection to be used. 5. The correct procedure for erecting, maintaining, disassembling and inspecting the system(s) to be used. 6. Knowledge of construction sequence or the erection plan. A conference will take place prior to starting work involving all members of the erection crew, crane crew and supervisors of any other concerned contractors. This conference will be conducted by the precast concrete erection supervisor in charge of the project. During the pre-work conference, erection procedures and sequences pertinent to this job will be thoroughly discussed and safety practices to be used throughout the project will be specified. Further, all personnel will be informed that the controlled access zones are off limits to all personnel other than those designated erectors specifically trained to work in that area. Safety Monitoring System A safety monitoring system means a fall protection system in which a competent person is responsible for recognizing and warning employees of fall hazards. The duties of the safety monitor are to: 1. Warn by voice when approaching the open edge in an unsafe manner. 2. Warn by voice if there is a dangerous situation developing which cannot be seen by another person involved with product placement, such as a member getting out of control. 3. Make the designated erectors aware they are in a dangerous area. 4. Be competent in recognizing fall hazards. 5. Warn employees when they appear to be unaware of a fall hazard or are acting in an unsafe manner. 6. Be on the same walking/working surface as the monitored employees and within visual sighting distance of the monitored employees. 7. Be close enough to communicate orally with the employees. 8. Not allow other responsibilities to encumber monitoring. If the safety monitor becomes too encumbered with other responsibilities, the monitor shall (1) stop the erection process; and (2) turn over other responsibilities to a designated erector; or (3) turn over the safety monitoring function to another designated, competent person. The safety monitoring system shall not be used when the wind is strong enough to cause loads with large surface areas to swing out of radius, or result in loss of control of the load, or when weather conditions cause the walking-working surfaces to become icy or slippery. Control Zone System A controlled access zone means an area designated and clearly marked, in which leading edge work may take place without the use of guardrail, safety net or personal fall arrest systems to protect the employees in the area. Control zone systems shall comply with the following provisions: 1. When used to control access to areas where leading edge and other operations are taking place the controlled access zone shall be defined by a control line or by any other means that restricts access. When control lines are used, they shall be erected not less than 6 feet (l.8 m) nor more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the member being erected, whichever is less, from the leading edge. 2. The control line shall extend along the entire length of the unprotected or leading edge and shall be approximately parallel to the unprotected or leading edge. 3. The control line shall be connected on each side to a guardrail system or wall. 4. Control lines shall consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and supporting stanchions as follows: 5. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise clearly marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high- visibility material. 6. Each line shall be rigged and supported in such a way that its lowest point (including sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from the walking/working surface and its highest point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from the walking/working surface. 7. Each line shall have a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN). Holes All openings greater than 12 in. × 12 in. will have perimeter guarding or covering. All predetermined holes will have the plywood covers made in the precasters' yard and shipped with the member to the jobsite. Prior to cutting holes on the job, proper protection for the hole must be provided to protect the workers. Perimeter guarding or covers will not be removed without the approval of the erection foreman. Precast concrete column erection through the existing deck requires that many holes be provided through this deck. These are to be covered and protected. Except for the opening being currently used to erect a column, all opening protection is to be left undisturbed. The opening being uncovered to erect a column will become part of the point of erection and will be addressed as part of this Fall Protection Plan. This uncovering is to be done at the erection foreman's direction and will only occur immediately prior to “feeding” the column through the opening. Once the end of the column is through the slab opening, there will no longer exist a fall hazard at this location. III. Implementation of Fall Protection Plan The structure being erected is a multistory total precast concrete building consisting of columns, beams, wall panels and hollow core slabs and double tee floor and roof members. The following is a list of the products and erection situations on this job: Columns For columns 10 ft to 36 ft long, employees disconnecting crane hooks from columns will work from a ladder and wear a body belt/harness with lanyard and be tied off when both hands are needed to disconnect. For tying off, a vertical lifeline will be connected to the lifting eye at the top of the column, prior to lifting, to be used with a manually operated or mobile rope grab. For columns too high for the use of a ladder, 36 ft and higher, an added cable will be used to reduce the height of the disconnecting point so that a ladder can be used. This cable will be left in place until a point in erection that it can be removed safely. In some cases, columns will be unhooked from the crane by using an erection tube or shackle with a pull pin which is released from the ground after the column is stabilized. The column will be adequately connected and/or braced to safely support the weight of a ladder with an employee on it. Inverted Tee Beams Employees erecting inverted tee beams, at a height of 6 to 40 ft, will erect the beam, make initial connections, and final alignment from a ladder. If the employee needs to reach over the side of the beam to bar or make an adjustment to the alignment of the beam, they will mount the beam and be tied off to the lifting device in the beam after ensuring the load has been stabilized on its bearing. To disconnect the crane from the beam an employee will stand a ladder against the beam. Because the use of ladders is not practical at heights above 40 ft, beams will be initially placed with the use of tag lines and their final alignment made by a person on a manlift or similar employee positioning systems. Spandrel Beams Spandrel beams at the exterior of the building will be aligned as closely as possible with the use of tag lines with the final placement of the spandrel beam made from a ladder at the open end of the structure. A ladder will be used to make the initial connections and a ladder will be used to disconnect the crane. The other end of the beam will be placed by the designated erector from the double tee deck under the observation of the safety monitor. The beams will be adequately connected and/or braced to safely support the weight of a ladder with an employee on it. Floor and Roof Members During installation of the precast concrete floor and/or roof members, the work deck continuously increases in area as more and more units are being erected and positioned. Thus, the unprotected floor/roof perimeter is constantly modified with the leading edge changing location as each member is installed. The fall protection for workers at the leading edge shall be assured by properly constructed and maintained control zone lines not more than 60 ft away from the leading edge supplemented by a safety monitoring system to ensure the safety of all designated erectors working within the area defined by the control zone lines. The hollow core slabs erected on the masonry portion of the building will be erected and grouted using the safety monitoring system. Grout will be placed in the space between the end of the slab and face shell of the concrete masonry by dumping from a wheelbarrow. The grout in the keyways between the slabs will be dumped from a wheelbarrow and then spread with long handled tools, allowing the worker to stand erect facing toward the unprotected edge and back from any work deck edge. Whenever possible, the designated erectors will approach the incoming member at the leading edge only after it is below waist height so that the member itself provides protection against falls. Except for the situations described below, when the arriving floor or roof member is within 2 to 3 inches of its final position, the designated erectors can then proceed to their position of erection at each end of the member under the control of the safety monitor. Crane hooks will be unhooked from double tee members by designated erectors under the direction and supervision of the safety monitor. Designated erectors, while waiting for the next floor or roof member, will be constantly under the control of the safety monitor for fall protection and are directed to stay a minimum of six (6) ft from the edge. In the event a designated erector must move from one end of a member, which has just been placed at the leading edge, they must first move away from the leading edge a minimum of six (6) ft and then progress to the other end while maintaining the minimum distance of six (6) ft at all times. Erection of double tees, where conditions require bearing of one end into a closed pocket and the other end on a beam ledge, restricting the tee legs from going directly into the pockets, require special considerations. The tee legs that are to bear in the closed pocket must hang lower than those at the beam bearing. The double tee will be “two-lined” in order to elevate one end higher than the other to allow for the low end to be ducked into the closed pocket using the following procedure. The double tee will be rigged with a standard four-way spreader off of the main load line. An additional choker will be attached to the married point of the two-legged spreader at the end of the tee that is to be elevated. The double tee will be hoisted with the main load line and swung into a position as close as possible to the tee's final bearing elevation. When the tee is in this position and stabilized, the whip line load block will be lowered to just above the tee deck. At this time, two erectors will walk out on the suspended tee deck at midspan of the tee member and pull the load block to the end of the tee to be elevated and attach the additional choker to the load block. The possibility of entanglement with the crane lines and other obstacles during this two lining process while raising and lowering the crane block on that second line could be hazardous to an encumbered employee. Therefore, the designated erectors will not tie off during any part of this process. While the designated erectors are on the double tee, the safety monitoring system will be used. After attaching the choker, the two erectors then step back on the previously erected tee deck and signal the crane operator to hoist the load with the whip line to the elevation that will allow for enough clearance to let the low end tee legs slide into the pockets when the main load line is lowered. The erector, who is handling the lowered end of the tee at the closed pocket bearing, will step out on the suspended tee. An erection bar will then be placed between the end of the tee leg and the inside face of the pocketed spandrel member. The tee is barred away from the pocketed member to reduce the friction and lateral force against the pocketed member. As the tee is being lowered, the other erector remains on the tee which was previously erected to handle the other end. At this point the tee is slowly lowered by the crane to a point where the tee legs can freely slide into the pockets. The erector working the lowered end of the tee must keep pressure on the bar between the tee and the face of the pocketed spandrel member to very gradually let the tee legs slide into the pocket to its proper bearing dimension. The tee is then slowly lowered into its final erected position. The designated erector should be allowed onto the suspended double tee, otherwise there is no control over the horizontal movement of the double tee and this movement could knock the spandrel off of its bearing or the column out of plumb. The control necessary to prevent hitting the spandrel can only be done safely from the top of the double tee being erected. Loadbearing Wall Panels: The erection of the loadbearing wall panels on the elevated decks requires the use of a safety monitor and a controlled access zone that is a minimum of 25 ft and a maximum of 1/2 Non-Loadbearing Panels (Cladding): The locating of survey lines, panel layout and other installation prerequisites (prewelding, etc.) for non-loadbearing panels (cladding) will not commence until floor perimeter and floor openings have been protected. In some areas, it is necessary because of panel configuration to remove the perimeter protection as the cladding is being installed. Removal of perimeter protection will be performed on a bay to bay basis, just ahead of cladding erection to minimize temporarily unprotected floor edges. Those workers within 6 ft of the edge, receiving and positioning the cladding when the perimeter protection is removed shall be tied off. Detailing Employees exposed to falls of six (6) feet or more to lower levels, who are not actively engaged in leading edge work or connecting activity, such as welding, bolting, cutting, bracing, guying, patching, painting or other operations, and who are working less than six (6) ft from an unprotected edge will be tied off at all times or guardrails will be installed. Employees engaged in these activities but who are more than six (6) ft from an unprotected edge as defined by the control zone lines, do not require fall protection but a warning line or control lines must be erected to remind employees they are approaching an area where fall protection is required. IV. Conventional Fall Protection Considered for the Point of Erection or Leading Edge Erection Operations A. Personal Fall Arrest Systems In this particular erection sequence and procedure, personal fall arrest systems requiring body belt/harness systems, lifelines and lanyards will not reduce possible hazards to workers and will create offsetting hazards during their usage at the leading edge of precast/prestressed concrete construction. Leading edge erection and initial connections are conducted by employees who are specifically trained to do this type of work and are trained to recognize the fall hazards. The nature of such work normally exposes the employee to the fall hazard for a short period of time and installation of fall protection systems for a short duration is not feasible because it exposes the installers of the system to the same fall hazard, but for a longer period of time. 1. It is necessary that the employee be able to move freely without encumbrance in order to guide the sections of precast concrete into their final position without having lifelines attached which will restrict the employee's ability to move about at the point of erection. 2. A typical procedure requires 2 or more workers to maneuver around each other as a concrete member is positioned to fit into the structure. If they are each attached to a lifeline, part of their attention must be diverted from their main task of positioning a member weighing several tons to the task of avoiding entanglements of their lifelines or avoiding tripping over lanyards. Therefore, if these workers are attached to lanyards, more fall potential would result than from not using such a device. In this specific erection sequence and procedure, retractable lifelines do not solve the problem of two workers becoming tangled. In fact, such a tangle could prevent the lifeline from retracting as the worker moved, thus potentially exposing the worker to a fall greater than 6 ft. Also, a worker crossing over the lifeline of another worker can create a hazard because the movement of one person can unbalance the other. In the event of a fall by one person there is a likelihood that the other person will be caused to fall as well. In addition, if contamination such as grout (during hollow core grouting) enters the retractable housing it can cause excessive wear and damage to the device and could clog the retracting mechanism as the lanyard is dragged across the deck. Obstructing the cable orifice can defeat the device's shock absorbing function, produce cable slack and damage, and adversely affect cable extraction and retraction. 3. Employees tied to a lifeline can be trapped and crushed by moving structural members if the employee becomes restrained by the lanyard or retractable lifeline and cannot get out of the path of the moving load. The sudden movement of a precast concrete member being raised by a crane can be caused by a number of factors. When this happens, a connector may immediately have to move a considerable distance to avoid injury. If a tied off body belt/harness is being used, the connector could be trapped. Therefore, there is a greater risk of injury if the connector is tied to the structure for this specific erection sequence and procedure. When necessary to move away from a retractable device, the worker cannot move at a rate greater than the device locking speed typically 3.5 to 4.5 ft/sec. When moving toward the device it is necessary to move at a rate which does not permit cable slack to build up. This slack may cause cable retraction acceleration and cause a worker to lose their balance by applying a higher than normal jerking force on the body when the cable suddenly becomes taut after building up momentum. This slack can also cause damage to the internal spring-loaded drum, uneven coiling of cable on the drum, and possible cable damage. The factors causing sudden movements for this location include: (a) Cranes (1) Operator error. (2) Site conditions (soft or unstable ground). (3) Mechanical failure. (4) Structural failure. (5) Rigging failure. (6) Crane signal/radio communication failure. (b) Weather Conditions (1) Wind (strong wind/sudden gusting)—particularly a problem with the large surface areas of precast concrete members. (2) Snow/rain (visibility). (3) Fog (visibility). (4) Cold—causing slowed reactions or mechanical problems. (c) Structure/Product Conditions. (1) Lifting Eye failure. (2) Bearing failure or slippage. (3) Structure shifting. (4) Bracing failure. (5) Product failure. (d) Human Error. (1) Incorrect tag line procedure. (2) Tag line hang-up. (3) Incorrect or misunderstood crane signals. (4) Misjudged elevation of member. (5) Misjudged speed of member. (6) Misjudged angle of member. 4. Anchorages or special attachment points could be cast into the precast concrete members if sufficient preplanning and consideration of erectors' position is done before the members are cast. Any hole or other attachment must be approved by the engineer who designed the member. It is possible that some design restrictions will not allow a member to be weakened by an additional hole; however, it is anticipated that such situations would be the exception, not the rule. Attachment points, other than on the deck surface, will require removal and/or patching. In order to remove and/or patch these points, requires the employee to be exposed to an additional fall hazard at an unprotected perimeter. The fact that attachment points could be available anywhere on the structure does not eliminate the hazards of using these points for tying off as discussed above. A logical point for tying off on double tees would be using the lifting loops, except that they must be cut off to eliminate a tripping hazard at an appropriate time. 5. Providing attachment at a point above the walking/working surface would also create fall exposures for employees installing their devices. Final positioning of a precast concrete member requires it to be moved in such a way that it must pass through the area that would be occupied by the lifeline and the lanyards attached to the point above. Resulting entanglements of lifelines and lanyards on a moving member could pull employees from the work surface. Also, the structure is being created and, in most cases, there is no structure above the members being placed. (a) Temporary structural supports, installed to provide attaching points for lifelines limit the space which is essential for orderly positioning, alignment and placement of the precast concrete members. To keep the lanyards a reasonable and manageable length, lifeline supports would necessarily need to be in proximity to the positioning process. A sudden shift of the precast concrete member being positioned because of wind pressure or crane movement could make it strike the temporary supporting structure, moving it suddenly and causing tied off employees to fall. (b) The time in manhours which would be expended in placing and maintaining temporary structural supports for lifeline attaching points could exceed the expended manhours involved in placing the precast concrete members. No protection could be provided for the employees erecting the temporary structural supports and these supports would have to be moved for each successive step in the construction process, thus greatly increasing the employee's exposure to the fall hazard. (c) The use of a cable strung horizontally between two columns to provide tie off lines for erecting or walking a beam for connecting work is not feasible and creates a greater hazard on this multi-story building for the following reasons: (1) If a connector is to use such a line, it must be installed between the two columns. To perform this installation requires an erector to have more fall exposure time attaching the cable to the columns than would be spent to make the beam to column connection itself. (2) If such a line is to be installed so that an erector can walk along a beam, it must be overhead or below him. For example, if a connector must walk along a 24 in. wide beam, the presence of a line next to the connector at waist level, attached directly to the columns, would prevent the connector from centering their weight over the beam and balancing themselves. Installing the line above the connector might be possible on the first level of a two-story column; however, the column may extend only a few feet above the floor level at the second level or be flush with the floor level. Attaching the line to the side of the beam could be a solution; however, it would require the connector to attach the lanyard below foot level which would most likely extend a fall farther than 6 ft. (3) When lines are strung over every beam, it becomes more and more difficult for the crane operator to lower a precast concrete member into position without the member becoming fouled. Should the member become entangled, it could easily dislodge the line from a column. If a worker is tied to it at the time, a fall could be caused. 6. The ANSI A10.14-1991 American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations—Requirements for Safety Belts, Harnesses, Lanyards and Lifelines for Construction and Demolition Use, states that the anchor point of a lanyard or deceleration device should, if possible, be located above the wearer's belt or harness attachment. ANSI A10.14 also states that a suitable anchorage point is one which is located as high as possible to prevent contact with an obstruction below should the worker fall. Most manufacturers also warn in the user's handbook that the safety block/retractable lifeline must be positioned above the D-ring (above the work space of the intended user) and OSHA recommends that fall arrest and restraint equipment be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Attachment of a retractable device to a horizontal cable near floor level or using the inserts in the floor or roof members may result in increased free fall due to the dorsal D-ring of the full-body harness riding higher than the attachment point of the snaphook to the cable or insert (e.g., 6 foot tall worker with a dorsal D-ring at 5 feet above the floor or surface, reduces the working length to only one foot, by placing the anchorage five feet away from the fall hazard). In addition, impact loads may exceed maximum fall arrest forces (MAF) because the fall arrest D-ring would be 4 to 5 feet higher than the safety block/retractable lifeline anchored to the walking-working surface; and the potential for swing hazards is increased. Manufacturers also require that workers not work at a level where the point of snaphook attachment to the body harness is above the device because this will increase the free fall distance and the deceleration distance and will cause higher forces on the body in the event of an accidental fall. Manufacturers recommend an anchorage for the retractable lifeline which is immovably fixed in space and is independent of the user's support systems. A moveable anchorage is one which can be moved around (such as equipment or wheeled vehicles) or which can deflect substantially under shock loading (such as a horizontal cable or very flexible beam). In the case of a very flexible anchorage, a shock load applied to the anchorage during fall arrest can cause oscillation of the flexible anchorage such that the retractable brake mechanism may undergo one or more cycles of locking/unlocking/locking (ratchet effect) until the anchorage deflection is dampened. Therefore, use of a moveable anchorage involves critical engineering and safety factors and should only be considered after fixed anchorage has been determined to be not feasible. Horizontal cables used as an anchorage present an additional hazard due to amplification of the horizontal component of maximum arrest force (of a fall) transmitted to the points where the horizontal cable is attached to the structure. This amplification is due to the angle of sag of a horizontal cable and is most severe for small angles of sag. For a cable sag angle of 2 degrees the horizontal force on the points of cable attachment can be amplified by a factor of 15. It is also necessary to install the retractable device vertically overhead to minimize swing falls. If an object is in the worker's swing path (or that of the cable) hazardous situations exist: (1) due to the swing, horizontal speed of the user may be high enough to cause injury when an obstacle in the swing fall path is struck by either the user or the cable; (2) the total vertical fall distance of the user may be much greater than if the user had fallen only vertically without a swing fall path. With retractable lines, overconfidence may cause the worker to engage in inappropriate behavior, such as approaching the perimeter of a floor or roof at a distance appreciably greater than the shortest distance between the anchorage point and the leading edge. Though the retractable lifeline may arrest a worker's fall before he or she has fallen a few feet, the lifeline may drag along the edge of the floor or beam and swing the worker like a pendulum until the line has moved to a position where the distance between the anchorage point and floor edge is the shortest distance between those two points. Accompanying this pendulum swing is a lowering of the worker, with the attendant danger that he or she may violently impact the floor or some obstruction below. The risk of a cable breaking is increased if a lifeline is dragged sideways across the rough surface or edge of a concrete member at the same moment that the lifeline is being subjected to a maximum impact loading during a fall. The typical 3/16 7. The competent person, who can take into account the specialized operations being performed on this project, should determine when and where a designated erector cannot use a personal fall arrest system. B. Safety Net Systems The nature of this particular precast concrete erection worksite precludes the safe use of safety nets where point of erection or leading edge work must take place. 1. To install safety nets in the interior high bay of the single story portion of the building poses rigging attachment problems. Structural members do not exist to which supporting devices for nets can be attached in the area where protection is required. As the erection operation advances, the location of point of erection or leading edge work changes constantly as each member is attached to the structure. Due to this constant change it is not feasible to set net sections and build separate structures to support the nets. 2. The nature of the erection process for the precast concrete members is such that an installed net would protect workers as they position and secure only one structural member. After each member is stabilized the net would have to be moved to a new location (this could mean a move of 8 to 10 ft or the possibility of a move to a different level or area of the structure) to protect workers placing the next piece in the construction sequence. The result would be the installation and dismantling of safety nets repeatedly throughout the normal work day. As the time necessary to install a net, test, and remove it is significantly greater than the time necessary to position and secure a precast concrete member, the exposure time for the worker installing the safety net would be far longer than for the workers whom the net is intended to protect. The time exposure repeats itself each time the nets and supporting hardware must be moved laterally or upward to provide protection at the point of erection or leading edge. 3. Strict interpretation of § 1926.502(c) requires that operations shall not be undertaken until the net is in place and has been tested. With the point of erection constantly changing, the time necessary to install and test a safety net significantly exceeds the time necessary to position and secure the concrete member. 4. Use of safety nets on exposed perimeter wall openings and opensided floors, causes attachment points to be left in architectural concrete which must be patched and filled with matching material after the net supporting hardware is removed. In order to patch these openings, additional numbers of employees must be suspended by swing stages, boatswain chairs or other devices, thereby increasing the amount of fall exposure time to employees. 5. Installed safety nets pose an additional hazard at the perimeter of the erected structure where limited space is available in which members can be turned after being lifted from the ground by the crane. There would be a high probability that the member being lifted could become entangled in net hardware, cables, etc. 6. The use of safety nets where structural wall panels are being erected would prevent movement of panels to point of installation. To be effective, nets would necessarily have to provide protection across the area where structural supporting wall panels would be set and plumbed before roof units could be placed. 7. Use of a tower crane for the erection of the high rise portion of the structure poses a particular hazard in that the crane operator cannot see or judge the proximity of the load in relation to the structure or nets. If the signaler is looking through nets and supporting structural devices while giving instructions to the crane operator, it is not possible to judge precise relationships between the load and the structure itself or to nets and supporting structural devices. This could cause the load to become entangled in the net or hit the structure causing potential damage. C. Guardrail Systems On this particular worksite, guardrails, barricades, ropes, cables or other perimeter guarding devices or methods on the erection floor will pose problems to safe erection procedures. Typically, a floor or roof is erected by placing 4 to 10 ft wide structural members next to one another and welding or grouting them together. The perimeter of a floor and roof changes each time a new member is placed into position. It is unreasonable and virtually impossible to erect guardrails and toe boards at the ever changing leading edge of a floor or roof. 1. To position a member safely it is necessary to remove all obstructions extending above the floor level near the point of erection. Such a procedure allows workers to swing a new member across the erected surface as necessary to position it properly without worrying about knocking material off of this surface. Hollow core slab erection on the masonry wall requires installation of the perimeter protection where the masonry wall has to be constructed. This means the guardrail is installed then subsequently removed to continue the masonry construction. The erector will be exposed to a fall hazard for a longer period of time while installing and removing perimeter protection than while erecting the slabs. In hollow core work, as in other precast concrete erection, others are not typically on the work deck until the precast concrete erection is complete. The deck is not complete until the leveling, aligning, and grouting of the joints is done. It is normal practice to keep others off the deck until at least the next day after the installation is complete to allow the grout to harden. 2. There is no permanent boundary until all structural members have been placed in the floor or roof. At the leading edge, workers are operating at the temporary edge of the structure as they work to position the next member in the sequence. Compliance with the standard would require a guardrail and toe board be installed along this edge. However, the presence of such a device would prevent a new member from being swung over the erected surface low enough to allow workers to control it safely during the positioning process. Further, these employees would have to work through the guardrail to align the new member and connect it to the structure. The guardrail would not protect an employee who must lean through it to do the necessary work, rather it would hinder the employee to such a degree that a greater hazard is created than if the guardrail were absent. 3. Guardrail requirements pose a hazard at the leading edge of installed floor or roof sections by creating the possibility of employees being caught between guardrails and suspended loads. The lack of a clear work area in which to guide the suspended load into position for placement and welding of members into the existing structure creates still further hazards. 4. Where erection processes require precast concrete stairways or openings to be installed as an integral part of the overall erection process, it must also be recognized that guardrails or handrails must not project above the surface of the erection floor. Such guardrails should be terminated at the level of the erection floor to avoid placing hazardous obstacles in the path of a member being positioned. V. Other Fall Protection Measures Considered for This Job The following is a list and explanation of other fall protection measures available and an explanation of limitations for use on this particular jobsite. If during the course of erecting the building the employee sees an area that could be erected more safely by the use of these fall protection measures, the foreman should be notified. A. Scaffolds are not used because: 1. The leading edge of the building is constantly changing and the scaffolding would have to be moved at very frequent intervals. Employees erecting and dismantling the scaffolding would be exposed to fall hazards for a greater length of time than they would by merely erecting the precast concrete member. 2. A scaffold tower could interfere with the safe swinging of a load by the crane. 3. Power lines, terrain and site do not allow for the safe use of scaffolding. B. Vehicle mounted platforms are not used because: 1. A vehicle mounted platform will not reach areas on the deck that are erected over other levels. 2. The leading edge of the building is usually over a lower level of the building and this lower level will not support the weight of a vehicle mounted platform. 3. A vehicle mounted platform could interfere with the safe swinging of a load by the crane, either by the crane swinging the load over or into the equipment. 4. Power lines and surrounding site work do not allow for the safe use of a vehicle mounted platform. C. Crane suspended personnel platforms are not used because: 1. A second crane close enough to suspend any employee in the working and erecting area could interfere with the safe swinging of a load by the crane hoisting the product to be erected. 2. Power lines and surrounding site work do not allow for the safe use of a second crane on the job. VI. Enforcement Constant awareness of and respect for fall hazards, and compliance with all safety rules are considered conditions of employment. The jobsite Superintendent, as well as individuals in the Safety and Personnel Department, reserve the right to issue disciplinary warnings to employees, up to and including termination, for failure to follow the guidelines of this program. VII. Accident Investigations All accidents that result in injury to workers, regardless of their nature, shall be investigated and reported. It is an integral part of any safety program that documentation take place as soon as possible so that the cause and means of prevention can be identified to prevent a reoccurrence. In the event that an employee falls or there is some other related, serious incident occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to determine if additional practices, procedures, or training need to be implemented to prevent similar types of falls or incidents from occurring. VIII. Changes to Plan Any changes to the plan will be approved by (name of the qualified person). This plan shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the job progresses to determine if additional practices, procedures or training needs to be implemented by the competent person to improve or provide additional fall protection. Workers shall be notified and trained, if necessary, in the new procedures. A copy of this plan and all approved changes shall be maintained at the jobsite. Sample Fall Protection Plan for Residential Construction (Insert Company Name) This Fall Protection Plan Is Specific For The Following Project: Location of Job Date Plan Prepared or Modified Plan Prepared By Plan Approved By Plan Supervised By The following Fall Protection Plan is a sample program prepared for the prevention of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Protection Plan must be developed and evaluated on a site by site basis. It is recommended that builders discuss the written Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area Office prior to going on a jobsite. I. Statement of Company Policy (Your company name here) is dedicated to the protection of its employees from on-the-job injuries. All employees of (Your company name here) have the responsibility to work safely on the job. The purpose of the plan is to supplement our existing safety and health program and to ensure that every employee who works for (Your company name here) recognizes workplace fall hazards and takes the appropriate measures to address those hazards. This Fall Protection Plan addresses the use of conventional fall protection at a number of areas on the project, as well as identifies specific activities that require non-conventional means of fall protection. During the construction of residential buildings under 48 feet in height, it is sometimes infeasible or it creates a greater hazard to use conventional fall protection systems at specific areas or for specific tasks. The areas or tasks may include, but are not limited to: a. Setting and bracing of roof trusses and rafters; b. Installation of floor sheathing and joists; c. Roof sheathing operations; and d. Erecting exterior walls. In these cases, conventional fall protection systems may not be the safest choice for builders. This plan is designed to enable employers and employees to recognize the fall hazards associated with this job and to establish the safest procedures that are to be followed in order to prevent falls to lower levels or through holes and openings in walking/working surfaces. Each employee will be trained in these procedures and will strictly adhere to them except when doing so would expose the employee to a greater hazard. If, in the employee's opinion, this is the case, the employee is to notify the competent person of their concern and have the concern addressed before proceeding. It is the responsibility of (name of competent person) to implement this Fall Protection Plan. Continual observational safety checks of work operations and the enforcement of the safety policy and procedures shall be regularly enforced. The crew supervisor or foreman (insert name) is responsible for correcting any unsafe practices or conditions immediately. It is the responsibility of the employer to ensure that all employees understand and adhere to the procedures of this plan and to follow the instructions of the crew supervisor. It is also the responsibility of the employee to bring to management's attention any unsafe or hazardous conditions or practices that may cause injury to either themselves or any other employees. Any changes to the Fall Protection Plan must be approved by (name of qualified person). II. Fall Protection Systems To Be Used on This Job Installation of roof trusses/rafters, exterior wall erection, roof sheathing, floor sheathing and joist/truss activities will be conducted by employees who are specifically trained to do this type of work and are trained to recognize the fall hazards. The nature of such work normally exposes the employee to the fall hazard for a short period of time. This Plan details how (Your company name here) will minimize these hazards. Controlled Access Zones When using the Plan to implement the fall protection options available, workers must be protected through limited access to high hazard locations. Before any non-conventional fall protection systems are used as part of the work plan, a controlled access zone (CAZ) shall be clearly defined by the competent person as an area where a recognized hazard exists. The demarcation of the CAZ shall be communicated by the competent person in a recognized manner, either through signs, wires, tapes, ropes or chains. (Your company name here) shall take the following steps to ensure that the CAZ is clearly marked or controlled by the competent person: • All access to the CAZ must be restricted to authorized entrants; • All workers who are permitted in the CAZ shall be listed in the appropriate sections of the Plan (or be visibly identifiable by the competent person) prior to implementation; • The competent person shall ensure that all protective elements of the CAZ be implemented prior to the beginning of work. Installation Procedures for Roof Truss and Rafter Erection During the erection and bracing of roof trusses/rafters, conventional fall protection may present a greater hazard to workers. On this job, safety nets, guardrails and personal fall arrest systems will not provide adequate fall protection because the nets will cause the walls to collapse, while there are no suitable attachment or anchorage points for guardrails or personal fall arrest systems. On this job, requiring workers to use a ladder for the entire installation process will cause a greater hazard because the worker must stand on the ladder with his back or side to the front of the ladder. While erecting the truss or rafter the worker will need both hands to maneuver the truss and therefore cannot hold onto the ladder. In addition, ladders cannot be adequately protected from movement while trusses are being maneuvered into place. Many workers may experience additional fatigue because of the increase in overhead work with heavy materials, which can also lead to a greater hazard. Exterior scaffolds cannot be utilized on this job because the ground, after recent backfilling, cannot support the scaffolding. In most cases, the erection and dismantling of the scaffold would expose workers to a greater fall hazard than erection of the trusses/rafters. On all walls eight feet or less, workers will install interior scaffolds along the interior wall below the location where the trusses/rafters will be erected. “Sawhorse” scaffolds constructed of 46 inch sawhorses and 2 × 10 planks will often allow workers to be elevated high enough to allow for the erection of trusses and rafters without working on the top plate of the wall. In structures that have walls higher than eight feet and where the use of scaffolds and ladders would create a greater hazard, safe working procedures will be utilized when working on the top plate and will be monitored by the crew supervisor. During all stages of truss/rafter erection the stability of the trusses/rafters will be ensured at all times. (Your company name here) shall take the following steps to protect workers who are exposed to fall hazards while working from the top plate installing trusses/rafters: • Only the following trained workers will be allowed to work on the top plate during roof truss or rafter installation: • Workers shall have no other duties to perform during truss/rafter erection procedures; • All trusses/rafters will be adequately braced before any worker can use the truss/rafter as a support; • Workers will remain on the top plate using the previously stabilized truss/rafter as a support while other trusses/rafters are being erected; • Workers will leave the area of the secured trusses only when it is necessary to secure another truss/rafter; • The first two trusses/rafters will be set from ladders leaning on side walls at points where the walls can support the weight of the ladder; and • A worker will climb onto the interior top plate via a ladder to secure the peaks of the first two trusses/rafters being set. The workers responsible for detaching trusses from cranes and/or securing trusses at the peaks traditionally are positioned at the peak of the trusses/rafters. There are also situations where workers securing rafters to ridge beams will be positioned on top of the ridge beam. (Your company name here) shall take the following steps to protect workers who are exposed to fall hazards while securing trusses/rafters at the peak of the trusses/ridge beam: • Only the following trained workers will be allowed to work at the peak during roof truss or rafter installation: • Once truss or rafter installation begins, workers not involved in that activity shall not stand or walk below or adjacent to the roof opening or exterior walls in any area where they could be struck by falling objects; • Workers shall have no other duties than securing/bracing the trusses/ridge beam; • Workers positioned at the peaks or in the webs of trusses or on top of the ridge beam shall work from a stable position, either by sitting on a “ridge seat” or other equivalent surface that provides additional stability or by positioning themselves in previously stabilized trusses/rafters and leaning into and reaching through the trusses/rafters; • Workers shall not remain on or in the peak/ridge any longer than necessary to safely complete the task. Roof Sheathing Operations Workers typically install roof sheathing after all trusses/rafters and any permanent truss bracing is in place. Roof structures are unstable until some sheathing is installed, so workers installing roof sheathing cannot be protected from fall hazards by conventional fall protection systems until it is determined that the roofing system can be used as an anchorage point. At that point, employees shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system. Trusses/rafters are subject to collapse if a worker falls while attached to a single truss with a belt/harness. Nets could also cause collapse, and there is no place to attach guardrails. All workers will ensure that they have secure footing before they attempt to walk on the sheathing, including cleaning shoes/boots of mud or other slip hazards. To minimize the time workers must be exposed to a fall hazard, materials will be staged to allow for the quickest installation of sheathing. (Your company name here) shall take the following steps to protect workers who are exposed to fall hazards while installing roof sheathing: • Once roof sheathing installation begins, workers not involved in that activity shall not stand or walk below or adjacent to the roof opening or exterior walls in any area where they could be struck by falling objects; • The competent person shall determine the limits of this area, which shall be clearly communicated to workers prior to placement of the first piece of roof sheathing; • The competent person may order work on the roof to be suspended for brief periods as necessary to allow other workers to pass through such areas when this would not create a greater hazard; • Only qualified workers shall install roof sheathing; • The bottom row of roof sheathing may be installed by workers standing in truss webs; • After the bottom row of roof sheathing is installed, a slide guard extending the width of the roof shall be securely attached to the roof. Slide guards are to be constructed of no less than nominal 4” height capable of limiting the uncontrolled slide of workers. Workers should install the slide guard while standing in truss webs and leaning over the sheathing; • Additional rows of roof sheathing may be installed by workers positioned on previously installed rows of sheathing. A slide guard can be used to assist workers in retaining their footing during successive sheathing operations; and • Additional slide guards shall be securely attached to the roof at intervals not to exceed 13 feet as successive rows of sheathing are installed. For roofs with pitches in excess of 9-in-12, slide guards will be installed at four-foot intervals. • When wet weather (rain, snow, or sleet) are present, roof sheathing operations shall be suspended unless safe footing can be assured for those workers installing sheathing. • When strong winds (above 40 miles per hour) are present, roof sheathing operations are to be suspended unless wind breakers are erected. Installation of Floor Joists and Sheathing During the installation of floor sheathing/joists (leading edge construction), the following steps shall be taken to protect workers: • Only the following trained workers will be allowed to install floor joists or sheathing: • Materials for the operations shall be conveniently staged to allow for easy access to workers; • The first floor joists or trusses will be rolled into position and secured either from the ground, ladders or sawhorse scaffolds; • Each successive floor joist or truss will be rolled into place and secured from a platform created from a sheet of plywood laid over the previously secured floor joists or trusses; • Except for the first row of sheathing which will be installed from ladders or the ground, workers shall work from the established deck; and • Any workers not assisting in the leading edge construction while leading edges still exist (e.g. cutting the decking for the installers) shall not be permitted within six feet of the leading edge under construction. Erection of Exterior Walls During the construction and erection of exterior walls, employers shall take the following steps to protect workers: • Only the following trained workers will be allowed to erect exterior walls: • A painted line six feet from the perimeter will be clearly marked prior to any wall erection activities to warn of the approaching unprotected edge; • Materials for operations shall be conveniently staged to minimize fall hazards; and • Workers constructing exterior walls shall complete as much cutting of materials and other preparation as possible away from the edge of the deck. III. Enforcement Constant awareness of and respect for fall hazards, and compliance with all safety rules are considered conditions of employment. The crew supervisor or foreman, as well as individuals in the Safety and Personnel Department, reserve the right to issue disciplinary warnings to employees, up to and including termination, for failure to follow the guidelines of this program. IV. Accident Investigations All accidents that result in injury to workers, regardless of their nature, shall be investigated and reported. It is an integral part of any safety program that documentation take place as soon as possible so that the cause and means of prevention can be identified to prevent a reoccurrence. In the event that an employee falls or there is some other related, serious incident occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to determine if additional practices, procedures, or training need to be implemented to prevent similar types of falls or incidents from occurring. V. Changes to Plan Any changes to the plan will be approved by (name of the qualified person). This plan shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the job progresses to determine if additional practices, procedures or training needs to be implemented by the competent person to improve or provide additional fall protection. Workers shall be notified and trained, if necessary, in the new procedures. A copy of this plan and all approved changes shall be maintained at the jobsite. [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] Subpart N—Helicopters, Hoists, Elevators, and Conveyors Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order Nos. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (49 FR 35736), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR 1911. § 1926.550 [Reserved] § 1926.551 Helicopters. (a) Helicopter regulations. (b) Briefing. (c) Slings and tag lines. (d) Cargo hooks. (e) Personal protective equipment. (2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to flap in the downwash, and thus be snagged on hoist line, shall not be worn. (f) Loose gear and objects. (g) Housekeeping. (h) Operator responsibility. (i) Hooking and unhooking loads. (j) Static charge. (k) Weight limitation. (l) Ground lines. (m) Visibility. (n) Signal systems. (o) Approach distance. (p) Approaching helicopter. (q) Personnel. (r) Communications. (s) Fires. § 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel hoists, and elevators. (a) General requirements. (2) Rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds, and special hazard warnings or instructions shall be posted on cars and platforms. (3) Wire rope shall be removed from service when any of the following conditions exists: (i) In hoisting ropes, six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay or three broken wires in one strand in one rope lay; (ii) Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, or peening, causing loss of more than one-third of the original diameter of the outside wires; (iii) Evidence of any heat damage resulting from a torch or any damage caused by contact with electrical wires; (iv) Reduction from nominal diameter of more than three sixty-fourths inch for diameters up to and including three-fourths inch; one-sixteenth inch for diameters seven-eights to 1 1/8 1/4 1/2 (4) Hoisting ropes shall be installed in accordance with the wire rope manufacturers' recommendations. (5) The installation of live booms on hoists is prohibited. (6) The use of endless belt-type manlifts on construction shall be prohibited. (b) Material hoists. (ii) No person shall be allowed to ride on material hoists except for the purposes of inspection and maintenance. (2) All entrances of the hoistways shall be protected by substantial gates or bars which shall guard the full width of the landing entrance. All hoistway entrance bars and gates shall be painted with diagonal contrasting colors, such as black and yellow stripes. (i) Bars shall be not less than 2- by 4-inch wooden bars or the equivalent, located 2 feet from the hoistway line. Bars shall be located not less than 36 inches nor more than 42 inches above the floor. (ii) Gates or bars protecting the entrances to hoistways shall be equipped with a latching device. (3) Overhead protective covering of 2-inch planking, 3/4 (4) The operator's station of a hoisting machine shall be provided with overhead protection equivalent to tight planking not less than 2 inches thick. The support for the overhead protection shall be of equal strength. (5) Hoist towers may be used with or without an enclosure on all sides. However, whichever alternative is chosen, the following applicable conditions shall be met: (i) When a hoist tower is enclosed, it shall be enclosed on all sides for its entire height with a screen enclosure of 1/2 (ii) When a hoist tower is not enclosed, the hoist platform or car shall be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides for the full height between the floor and the overhead protective covering with 1/2 (6) Car arresting devices shall be installed to function in case of rope failure. (7) All material hoist towers shall be designed by a licensed professional engineer. (8) All material hoists shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A10.5-1969, Safety Requirements for Material Hoists. (c) Personnel hoists. (2) Towers inside of structures shall be enclosed on all four sides throughout the full height. (3) Towers shall be anchored to the structure at intervals not exceeding 25 feet. In addition to tie-ins, a series of guys shall be installed. Where tie-ins are not practical the tower shall be anchored by means of guys made of wire rope at least one-half inch in diameter, securely fastened to anchorage to ensure stability. (4) Hoistway doors or gates shall be not less than 6 feet 6 inches high and shall be provided with mechanical locks which cannot be operated from the landing side, and shall be accessible only to persons on the car. (5) Cars shall be permanently enclosed on all sides and the top, except sides used for entrance and exit which have car gates or doors. (6) A door or gate shall be provided at each entrance to the car which shall protect the full width and height of the car entrance opening. (7) Overhead protective covering of 2-inch planking, 3/4 (8) Doors or gates shall be provided with electric contacts which do not allow movement of the hoist when door or gate is open. (9) Safeties shall be capable of stopping and holding the car and rated load when traveling at governor tripping speed. (10) Cars shall be provided with a capacity and data plate secured in a conspicuous place on the car or crosshead. (11) Internal combustion engines shall not be permitted for direct drive. (12) Normal and final terminal stopping devices shall be provided. (13) An emergency stop switch shall be provided in the car and marked “Stop.” (14) Ropes: (i) The minimum number of hoisting ropes used shall be three for traction hoists and two for drum-type hoists. (ii) The minimum diameter of hoisting and counterweight wire ropes shall be 1/2 (iii) Safety factors: Minimum Factors of Safety for Suspension Wire Ropes Rope speed in feet per minute Minimum factor of safety 50 7.60 75 7.75 100 7.95 125 8.10 150 8.25 175 8.40 200 8.60 225 8.75 250 8.90 300 9.20 350 9.50 400 9.75 450 10.00 500 10.25 550 10.45 600 10.70 (15) Following assembly and erection of hoists, and before being put in service, an inspection and test of all functions and safety devices shall be made under the supervision of a competent person. A similar inspection and test is required following major alteration of an existing installation. All hoists shall be inspected and tested at not more than 3-month intervals. The employer shall prepare a certification record which includes the date the inspection and test of all functions and safety devices was performed; the signature of the person who performed the inspection and test; and a serial number, or other identifier, for the hoist that was inspected and tested. The most recent certification record shall be maintained on file. (16) All personnel hoists used by employees shall be constructed of materials and components which meet the specifications for materials, construction, safety devices, assembly, and structural integrity as stated in the American National Standard A10.4-1963, Safety Requirements for Workmen's Hoists. The requirements of this paragraph (c)(16) do not apply to cantilever type personnel hoists. (17)(i) Personnel hoists used in bridge tower construction shall be approved by a registered professional engineer and erected under the supervision of a qualified engineer competent in this field. (ii) When a hoist tower is not enclosed, the hoist platform or car shall be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides for the full height between the floor and the overhead protective covering with 3/4 (iii) These hoists shall be inspected and maintained on a weekly basis. Whenever the hoisting equipment is exposed to winds exceeding 35 miles per hour it shall be inspected and put in operable condition before reuse. (iv) Wire rope shall be taken out of service when any of the following conditions exist: (A) In running ropes, six randomly distributed broken wires in one lay or three broken wires in one strand in one lay; (B) Wear of one-third the original diameter of outside individual wires. Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any other damage resulting in distortion of the rope structure; (C) Evidence of any heat damage from any cause; (D) Reductions from nominal diameter of more than three-sixty-fourths inch for diameters to and including three-fourths inch, one-sixteenth inch for diameters seven-eights inch to 1 1/8 1/4 1/2 (E) In standing ropes, more than two broken wires in one lay in sections beyond end connections or more than one broken wire at an end connection. (d) Permanent elevators under the care and custody of the employer and used by employees for work covered by this Act shall comply with the requirements of American National Standards Institute A17.1-1965 with addenda A17.1a-1967, A17.1b-1968, A17.1c-1969, A17.1d-1970, and inspected in accordance with A17.2-1960 with addenda A17.2a-1965, A17.2b-1967. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28, 1987; 85 FR 8743, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists. (a) General requirements. (2) All controls used during the normal operation cycle shall be located within easy reach of the operator's station. (3) Electric motor operated hoists shall be provided with: (i) A device to disconnect all motors from the line upon power failure and not permit any motor to be restarted until the controller handle is brought to the “off” position; (ii) Where applicable, an overspeed preventive device; (iii) A means whereby remotely operated hoists stop when any control is ineffective. (4) All base-mounted drum hoists in use shall meet the applicable requirements for design, construction, installation, testing, inspection, maintenance, and operations, as prescribed by the manufacturer. (b) Specific requirements. (c) This section does not apply to base-mounted drum hoists used in conjunction with derricks. Base-mounted drum hoists used in conjunction with derricks must conform to § 1926.1436(e). [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 75 FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010] § 1926.554 Overhead hoists. (a) General requirements. (2) The supporting structure to which the hoist is attached shall have a safe working load equal to that of the hoist. (3) The support shall be arranged so as to provide for free movement of the hoist and shall not restrict the hoist from lining itself up with the load. (4) The hoist shall be installed only in locations that will permit the operator to stand clear of the load at all times. (5) Air hoists shall be connected to an air supply of sufficient capacity and pressure to safely operate the hoist. All air hoses supplying air shall be positively connected to prevent their becoming disconnected during use. (6) All overhead hoists in use shall meet the applicable requirements for construction, design, installation, testing, inspection, maintenance, and operation, as prescribed by the manufacturer. (b) Specific requirements. § 1926.555 Conveyors. (a) General requirements. (2) If the operator's station is at a remote point, similar provisions for stopping the motor or engine shall be provided at the motor or engine location. (3) Emergency stop switches shall be arranged so that the conveyor cannot be started again until the actuating stop switch has been reset to running or “on” position. (4) Screw conveyors shall be guarded to prevent employee contact with turning flights. (5) Where a conveyor passes over work areas, aisles, or thoroughfares, suitable guards shall be provided to protect employees required to work below the conveyors. (6) All crossovers, aisles, and passageways shall be conspicuously marked by suitable signs, as required by subpart G of this part. (7) Conveyors shall be locked out or otherwise rendered inoperable, and tagged out with a “Do Not Operate” tag during repairs and when operation is hazardous to employees performing maintenance work. (8) All conveyors in use shall meet the applicable requirements for design, construction, inspection, testing, maintenance, and operation, as prescribed in the ANSI B20.1-1957, Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related Equipment. Subpart O—Motor Vehicles, Mechanized Equipment, and Marine Operations Authority: Section 107, Construction Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), or 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), as applicable. Section 1926.602 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911. § 1926.600 Equipment. (a) General requirements. (2) A safety tire rack, cage, or equivalent protection shall be provided and used when inflating, mounting, or dismounting tires installed on split rims, or rims equipped with locking rings or similar devices. (3)(i) Heavy machinery, equipment, or parts thereof, which are suspended or held aloft by use of slings, hoists, or jacks shall be substantially blocked or cribbed to prevent falling or shifting before employees are permitted to work under or between them. Bulldozer and scraper blades, end-loader buckets, dump bodies, and similar equipment, shall be either fully lowered or blocked when being repaired or when not in use. All controls shall be in a neutral position, with the motors stopped and brakes set, unless work being performed requires otherwise. (ii) Whenever the equipment is parked, the parking brake shall be set. Equipment parked on inclines shall have the wheels chocked and the parking brake set. (4) The use, care and charging of all batteries shall conform to the requirements of subpart K of this part. (5) All cab glass shall be safety glass, or equivalent, that introduces no visible distortion affecting the safe operation of any machine covered by this subpart. (6) All equipment covered by this subpart shall comply with the following requirements when working or being moved in the vicinity of power lines or energized transmitters, except where electrical distribution and transmission lines have been deenergized and visibly grounded at point of work or where insulating barriers, not a part of or an attachment to the equipment or machinery, have been erected to prevent physical contact with the lines: (i) For lines rated 50 kV or below, minimum clearance between the lines and any part of the crane or load shall be 10 feet; (ii) For lines rated over 50 kV, minimum clearance between the lines and any part of the crane or load shall be 10 feet plus 0.4 inch for each 1 kV over 50 kV, or twice the length of the line insulator, but never less than 10 feet; (iii) In transit with no load and boom lowered, the equipment clearance shall be a minimum of 4 feet for voltages less than 50 kV, and 10 feet for voltages over 50 kV, up to and including 345 kV, and 16 feet for voltages up to and including 750 kV; (iv) A person shall be designated to observe clearance of the equipment and give timely warning for all operations where it is difficult for the operator to maintain the desired clearance by visual means; (v) Cage-type boom guards, insulating links, or proximity warning devices may be used on cranes, but the use of such devices shall not alter the requirements of any other regulation of this part even if such device is required by law or regulation; (vi) Any overhead wire shall be considered to be an energized line unless and until the person owning such line or the electrical utility authorities indicate that it is not an energized line and it has been visibly grounded; (vii) Prior to work near transmitter towers where an electrical charge can be induced in the equipment or materials being handled, the transmitter shall be de-energized or tests shall be made to determine if electrical charge is induced on the crane. The following precautions shall be taken when necessary to dissipate induced voltages: (A) The equipment shall be provided with an electrical ground directly to the upper rotating structure supporting the boom; and (B) Ground jumper cables shall be attached to materials being handled by boom equipment when electrical charge is induced while working near energized transmitters. Crews shall be provided with nonconductive poles having large alligator clips or other similar protection to attach the ground cable to the load. (C) Combustible and flammable materials shall be removed from the immediate area prior to operations. (7) Rolling railroad cars. (b) Specific requirements. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993; 75 FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010] § 1926.601 Motor vehicles. (a) Coverage. (b) General requirements. (2)(i) Whenever visibility conditions warrant additional light, all vehicles, or combinations of vehicles, in use shall be equipped with at least two headlights and two taillights in operable condition. (ii) All vehicles, or combination of vehicles, shall have brake lights in operable condition regardless of light conditions. (3) All vehicles shall be equipped with an adequate audible warning device at the operator's station and in an operable condition. (4) No employer shall use any motor vehicle equipment having an obstructed view to the rear unless: (i) The vehicle has a reverse signal alarm audible above the surrounding noise level or: (ii) The vehicle is backed up only when an observer signals that it is safe to do so. (5) All vehicles with cabs shall be equipped with windshields and powered wipers. Cracked and broken glass shall be replaced. Vehicles operating in areas or under conditions that cause fogging or frosting of the windshields shall be equipped with operable defogging or defrosting devices. (6) All haulage vehicles, whose pay load is loaded by means of cranes, power shovels, loaders, or similar equipment, shall have a cab shield and/or canopy adequate to protect the operator from shifting or falling materials. (7) Tools and material shall be secured to prevent movement when transported in the same compartment with employees. (8) Vehicles used to transport employees shall have seats firmly secured and adequate for the number of employees to be carried. (9) Seat belts and anchorages meeting the requirements of 49 CFR part 571 (Department of Transportation, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards) shall be installed in all motor vehicles. (10) Trucks with dump bodies shall be equipped with positive means of support, permanently attached, and capable of being locked in position to prevent accidental lowering of the body while maintenance or inspection work is being done. (11) Operating levers controlling hoisting or dumping devices on haulage bodies shall be equipped with a latch or other device which will prevent accidental starting or tripping of the mechanism. (12) Trip handles for tailgates of dump trucks shall be so arranged that, in dumping, the operator will be in the clear. (13) (i) All rubber-tired motor vehicle equipment manufactured on or after May 1, 1972, shall be equipped with fenders. All rubber-tired motor vehicle equipment manufactured before May 1, 1972, shall be equipped with fenders not later than May 1, 1973. (ii) Mud flaps may be used in lieu of fenders whenever motor vehicle equipment is not designed for fenders. (14) All vehicles in use shall be checked at the beginning of each shift to assure that the following parts, equipment, and accessories are in safe operating condition and free of apparent damage that could cause failure while in use: service brakes, including trailer brake connections; parking system (hand brake); emergency stopping system (brakes); tires; horn; steering mechanism; coupling devices; seat belts; operating controls; and safety devices. All defects shall be corrected before the vehicle is placed in service. These requirements also apply to equipment such as lights, reflectors, windshield wipers, defrosters, fire extinguishers, etc., where such equipment is necessary. § 1926.602 Material handling equipment. (a) Earthmoving equipment; General. (2) Seat belts. (ii) Seat belts need not be provided for equipment which is designed only for standup operation. (iii) Seat belts need not be provided for equipment which does not have roll-over protective structure (ROPS) or adequate canopy protection. (3) Access roadways and grades. (ii) Every emergency access ramp and berm used by an employer shall be constructed to restrain and control runaway vehicles. (4) Brakes. Self-Propelled Scrapers SAE J319b-1971. Self-Propelled Graders SAE J236-1971. Trucks and Wagons SAE J166-1971. Front End Loaders and Dozers SAE J237-1971. (5) Fenders. (6) Rollover protective structures (ROPS). (7) Rollover protective structures for off-highway trucks. (8) Specific effective dates—brakes and fenders. Federal Register. (ii) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs (a)(5) and (a)(8)(i) of this section, the requirement that fenders be installed on pneumatic-tired earthmoving haulage equipment, is suspended pending reconsideration of the requirement. (9) Audible alarms. (ii) No employer shall permit earthmoving or compacting equipment which has an obstructed view to the rear to be used in reverse gear unless the equipment has in operation a reverse signal alarm distinguishable from the surrounding noise level or an employee signals that it is safe to do so. (10) Scissor points. (b) Excavating and other equipment. (2) For the purposes of this subpart and of subpart N of this part, the nomenclatures and descriptions for measurement of dimensions of machinery and attachments shall be as described in Society of Automotive Engineers 1970 Handbook, pages 1088 through 1103. (3) The safety requirements, ratios, or limitations applicable to machines or attachment usage covered in Power Crane and Shovel Associations Standards No. 1 and No. 2 of 1968, and No. 3 of 1969, shall be complied with, and shall apply to cranes, machines, and attachments under this part. (c) Lifting and hauling equipment (other than equipment covered under subpart N of this part). (i) Lift trucks, stackers, etc., shall have the rated capacity clearly posted on the vehicle so as to be clearly visible to the operator. When auxiliary removable counterweights are provided by the manufacturer, corresponding alternate rated capacities also shall be clearly shown on the vehicle. These ratings shall not be exceeded. (ii) No modifications or additions which affect the capacity or safe operation of the equipment shall be made without the manufacturer's written approval. If such modifications or changes are made, the capacity, operation, and maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals shall be changed accordingly. In no case shall the original safety factor of the equipment be reduced. (iii) If a load is lifted by two or more trucks working in unison, the proportion of the total load carried by any one truck shall not exceed its capacity. (iv) Steering or spinner knobs shall not be attached to the steering wheel unless the steering mechanism is of a type that prevents road reactions from causing the steering handwheel to spin. The steering knob shall be mounted within the periphery of the wheel. (v) All high lift rider industrial trucks shall be equipped with overhead guards which meet the configuration and structural requirements as defined in paragraph 421 of American National Standards Institute B56.1-1969, Safety Standards for Powered Industrial Trucks. (vi) All industrial trucks in use shall meet the applicable requirements of design, construction, stability, inspection, testing, maintenance, and operation, as defined in American National Standards Institute B56.1-1969, Safety Standards for Powered Industrial Trucks. (vii) Unauthorized personnel shall not be permitted to ride on powered industrial trucks. A safe place to ride shall be provided where riding of trucks is authorized. (viii) Whenever a truck is equipped with vertical only, or vertical and horizontal controls elevatable with the lifting carriage or forks for lifting personnel, the following additional precautions shall be taken for the protection of personnel being elevated. (A) Use of a safety platform firmly secured to the lifting carriage and/or forks. (B) Means shall be provided whereby personnel on the platform can shut off power to the truck. (C) Such protection from falling objects as indicated necessary by the operating conditions shall be provided. (d) Powered industrial truck operator training. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this paragraph are identical to those set forth at § 1910.178(l) of this chapter. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993; 63 FR 66274, Dec. 1, 1998] § 1926.603 Pile driving equipment. (a) General requirements. (2) All pressure vessels which are a part of, or used with, pile driving equipment shall meet the applicable requirements of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, Pressure Vessels (section VIII). (3) Overhead protection, which will not obscure the vision of the operator and which meets the requirements of subpart N of this part, shall be provided. Protection shall be the equivalent of 2-inch planking or other solid material of equivalent strength. (4) Stop blocks shall be provided for the leads to prevent the hammer from being raised against the head block. (5) A blocking device, capable of safely supporting the weight of the hammer, shall be provided for placement in the leads under the hammer at all times while employees are working under the hammer. (6) Guards shall be provided across the top of the head block to prevent the cable from jumping out of the sheaves. (7) When the leads must be inclined in the driving of batter piles, provisions shall be made to stabilize the leads. (8) Fixed leads shall be provided with ladder, and adequate rings, or similar attachment points, so that the loft worker may engage his safety belt lanyard to the leads. If the leads are provided with loft platforms(s), such platform(s) shall be protected by standard guardrails. (9) Steam hose leading to a steam hammer or jet pipe shall be securely attached to the hammer with an adequate length of at least 1/4 (10) Safety chains, or equivalent means, shall be provided for each hose connection to prevent the line from thrashing around in case the coupling becomes disconnected. (11) Steam line controls shall consist of two shutoff valves, one of which shall be a quick-acting lever type within easy reach of the hammer operator. (12) Guys, outriggers, thrustouts, or counterbalances shall be provided as necessary to maintain stability of pile driver rigs. (b) Pile driving from barges and floats. (c) Pile driving equipment. (2) All employees shall be kept clear when piling is being hoisted into the leads. (3) When piles are being driven in an excavated pit, the walls of the pit shall be sloped to the angle of repose or sheet-piled and braced. (4) When steel tube piles are being “blown out”, employees shall be kept well beyond the range of falling materials. (5) When it is necessary to cut off the tops of driven piles, pile driving operations shall be suspended except where the cutting operations are located at least twice the length of the longest pile from the driver. (6) When driving jacked piles, all access pits shall be provided with ladders and bulkheaded curbs to prevent material from falling into the pit. § 1926.604 Site clearing. (a) General requirements. (2) All equipment used in site clearing operations shall be equipped with rollover guards meeting the requirements of this subpart. In addition, rider-operated equipment shall be equipped with an overhead and rear canopy guard meeting the following requirements: (i) The overhead covering on this canopy structure shall be of not less than 1/8 1/4 (ii) The opening in the rear of the canopy structure shall be covered with not less than 1/4 (b) Specific requirements. § 1926.605 Marine operations and equipment. (a) Material handling operations. (b) Access to barges. (2) Unless employees can step safely to or from the wharf, float, barge, or river towboat, either a ramp, meeting the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of this section, or a safe walkway, shall be provided. (3) Jacob's ladders shall be of the double rung or flat tread type. They shall be well maintained and properly secured. (4) A Jacob's ladder shall either hang without slack from its lashings or be pulled up entirely. (5) When the upper end of the means of access rests on or is flush with the top of the bulwark, substantial steps properly secured and equipped with at least one substantial hand rail approximately 33 inches in height, shall be provided between the top of the bulwark and the deck. (6) Obstructions shall not be laid on or across the gangway. (7) The means of access shall be adequately illuminated for its full length. (8) Unless the structure makes it impossible, the means of access shall be so located that the load will not pass over employees. (c) Working surfaces of barges. (2) Decks and other working surfaces shall be maintained in a safe condition. (3) Employees shall not be permitted to pass fore and aft, over, or around deckloads, unless there is a safe passage. (4) Employees shall not be permitted to walk over deckloads from rail to coaming unless there is a safe passage. If it is necessary to stand at the outboard or inboard edge of the deckload where less than 24 inches of bulwark, rail, coaming, or other protection exists, all employees shall be provided with a suitable means of protection against falling from the deckload. (d) First-aid and lifesaving equipment. (2) The employer shall ensure that there is in the vicinity of each barge in use at least one U.S. Coast Guard-approved 30-inch lifering with not less than 90 feet of line attached, and at least one portable or permanent ladder which will reach the top of the apron to the surface of the water. If the above equipment is not available at the pier, the employer shall furnish it during the time that he is working the barge. (3) Employees walking or working on the unguarded decks of barges shall be protected with U.S. Coast Guard-approved work vests or buoyant vests. (e) Commercial diving operations. [39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 42 FR 37674, July 22, 1977] § 1926.606 Definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Apron (b) Bulwark (c) Coaming (d) Jacob's ladder (e) Rail, Subpart P—Excavations Authority: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Source: 54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, unless otherwise noted. § 1926.650 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions applicable to this subpart. Accepted engineering practices Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring Bell-bottom pier hole Benching Cave-in Competent person Cross braces Excavation Faces sides Failure Hazardous atmosphere Kickout Protective system Ramp Registered Professional Engineer Sheeting Shield Shoring Sides. Sloping Stable rock Structural ramp Support system Tabulated data Trench Trench box. Trench shield. Uprights Wales § 1926.651 Specific excavation requirements. (a) Surface encumbrances. (b) Underground installations. (2) Utility companies or owners shall be contacted within established or customary local response times, advised of the proposed work, and asked to establish the location of the utility underground installations prior to the start of actual excavation. When utility companies or owners cannot respond to a request to locate underground utility installations within 24 hours (unless a longer period is required by state or local law), or cannot establish the exact location of these installations, the employer may proceed, provided the employer does so with caution, and provided detection equipment or other acceptable means to locate utility installations are used. (3) When excavation operations approach the estimated location of underground installations, the exact location of the installations shall be determined by safe and acceptable means. (4) While the excavation is open, underground installations shall be protected, supported or removed as necessary to safeguard employees. (c) Access and egress Structural ramps. (ii) Ramps and runways constructed of two or more structural members shall have the structural members connected together to prevent displacement. (iii) Structural members used for ramps and runways shall be of uniform thickness. (iv) Cleats or other appropriate means used to connect runway structural members shall be attached to the bottom of the runway or shall be attached in a manner to prevent tripping. (v) Structural ramps used in lieu of steps shall be provided with cleats or other surface treatments on the top surface to prevent slipping. (2) Means of egress from trench excavations. (d) Exposure to vehicular traffic. (e) Exposure to falling loads. (f) Warning system for mobile equipment. (g) Hazardous atmospheres Testing and controls. (i) Where oxygen deficiency (atmospheres containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen) or a hazardous atmosphere exists or could reasonably be expected to exist, such as in excavations in landfill areas or excavations in areas where hazardous substances are stored nearby, the atmospheres in the excavation shall be tested before employees enter excavations greater than 4 feet (1.22 m) in depth. (ii) Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent employee exposure to atmospheres containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen and other hazardous atmospheres. These precautions include providing proper respiratory protection or ventilation in accordance with subparts D and E of this part respectively. (iii) Adequate precaution shall be taken such as providing ventilation, to prevent employee exposure to an atmosphere containing a concentration of a flammable gas in excess of 20 percent of the lower flammable limit of the gas. (iv) When controls are used that are intended to reduce the level of atmospheric contaminants to acceptable levels, testing shall be conducted as often as necessary to ensure that the atmosphere remains safe. (2) Emergency rescue equipment. (ii) Employees entering bell-bottom pier holes, or other similar deep and confined footing excavations, shall wear a harness with a life-line securely attached to it. The lifeline shall be separate from any line used to handle materials, and shall be individually attended at all times while the employee wearing the lifeline is in the excavation. (h) Protection from hazards associated with water accumulation. (2) If water is controlled or prevented from accumulating by the use of water removal equipment, the water removal equipment and operations shall be monitored by a competent person to ensure proper operation. (3) If excavation work interrupts the natural drainage of surface water (such as streams), diversion ditches, dikes, or other suitable means shall be used to prevent surface water from entering the excavation and to provide adequate drainage of the area adjacent to the excavation. Excavations subject to runoff from heavy rains will require an inspection by a competent person and compliance with paragraphs (h)(1) and (h)(2) of this section. (i) Stability of adjacent structures. (2) Excavation below the level of the base or footing of any foundation or retaining wall that could be reasonably expected to pose a hazard to employees shall not be permitted except when: (i) A support system, such as underpinning, is provided to ensure the safety of employees and the stability of the structure; or (ii) The excavation is in stable rock; or (iii) A registered professional engineer has approved the determination that the structure is sufficently removed from the excavation so as to be unaffected by the excavation activity; or (iv) A registered professional engineer has approved the determination that such excavation work will not pose a hazard to employees. (3) Sidewalks, pavements, and appurtenant structure shall not be undermined unless a support system or another method of protection is provided to protect employees from the possible collapse of such structures. (j) Protection of employees from loose rock or soil. (2) Employees shall be protected from excavated or other materials or equipment that could pose a hazard by falling or rolling into excavations. Protection shall be provided by placing and keeping such materials or equipment at least 2 feet (.61 m) from the edge of excavations, or by the use of retaining devices that are sufficient to prevent materials or equipment from falling or rolling into excavations, or by a combination of both if necessary. (k) Inspections. (2) Where the competent person finds evidence of a situation that could result in a possible cave-in, indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions, exposed employees shall be removed from the hazardous area until the necessary precautions have been taken to ensure their safety. (l) Walkways shall be provided where employees or equipment are required or permitted to cross over excavations. Guardrails which comply with § 1926.502(b) shall be provided where walkways are 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels. [54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, as amended at 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] § 1926.652 Requirements for protective systems. (a) Protection of employees in excavations. (i) Excavations are made entirely in stable rock; or (ii) Excavations are less than 5 feet (1.52m) in depth and examination of the ground by a competent person provides no indication of a potential cave-in. (2) Protective systems shall have the capacity to resist without failure all loads that are intended or could reasonably be expected to be applied or transmitted to the system. (b) Design of sloping and benching systems. (1) Option (1)—Allowable configurations and slopes. (ii) Slopes specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, shall be excavated to form configurations that are in accordance with the slopes shown for Type C soil in appendix B to this subpart. (2) Option (2)—Determination of slopes and configurations using Appendices A and B. (3) Option (3)—Designs using other tabulated data. (ii) The tabulated data shall be in written form and shall include all of the following: (A) Identification of the parameters that affect the selection of a sloping or benching system drawn from such data; (B) Identification of the limits of use of the data, to include the magnitude and configuration of slopes determined to be safe; (C) Explanatory information as may be necessary to aid the user in making a correct selection of a protective system from the data. (iii) At least one copy of the tabulated data which identifies the registered professional engineer who approved the data, shall be maintained at the jobsite during construction of the protective system. After that time the data may be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of the data shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. (4) Option (4)—Design by a registered professional engineer. (ii) Designs shall be in written form and shall include at least the following: (A) The magnitude of the slopes that were determined to be safe for the particular project; (B) The configurations that were determined to be safe for the particular project; and (C) The identity of the registered professional engineer approving the design. (iii) At least one copy of the design shall be maintained at the jobsite while the slope is being constructed. After that time the design need not be at the jobsite, but a copy shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. (c) Design of support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems. (1) Option (1)—Designs using appendices A, C and D. (2) Option (2)—Designs Using Manufacturer's Tabulated Data. (ii) Deviation from the specifications, recommendations, and limitations issued or made by the manufacturer shall only be allowed after the manufacturer issues specific written approval. (iii) Manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and limitations, and manufacturer's approval to deviate from the specifications, recommendations, and limitations shall be in written form at the jobsite during construction of the protective system. After that time this data may be stored off the jobsite, but a copy shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. (3) Option (3)—Designs using other tabulated data. (ii) The tabulated data shall be in written form and include all of the following: (A) Identification of the parameters that affect the selection of a protective system drawn from such data; (B) Identification of the limits of use of the data; (C) Explanatory information as may be necessary to aid the user in making a correct selection of a protective system from the data. (iii) At least one copy of the tabulated data, which identifies the registered professional engineer who approved the data, shall be maintained at the jobsite during construction of the protective system. After that time the data may be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of the data shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. (4) Option (4)—Design by a registered professional engineer. (ii) Designs shall be in written form and shall include the following: (A) A plan indicating the sizes, types, and configurations of the materials to be used in the protective system; and (B) The identity of the registered professional engineer approving the design. (iii) At least one copy of the design shall be maintained at the jobsite during construction of the protective system. After that time, the design may be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of the design shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. (d) Materials and equipment. (2) Manufactured materials and equipment used for protective systems shall be used and maintained in a manner that is consistent with the recommendations of the manufacturer, and in a manner that will prevent employee exposure to hazards. (3) When material or equipment that is used for protective systems is damaged, a competent person shall examine the material or equipment and evaluate its suitability for continued use. If the competent person cannot assure the material or equipment is able to support the intended loads or is otherwise suitable for safe use, then such material or equipment shall be removed from service, and shall be evaluated and approved by a registered professional engineer before being returned to service. (e) Installation and removal of support General. (ii) Support systems shall be installed and removed in a manner that protects employees from cave-ins, structural collapses, or from being struck by members of the support system. (iii) Individual members of support systems shall not be subjected to loads exceeding those which those members were designed to withstand. (iv) Before temporary removal of individual members begins, additional precautions shall be taken to ensure the safety of employees, such as installing other structural members to carry the loads imposed on the support system. (v) Removal shall begin at, and progress from, the bottom of the excavation. Members shall be released slowly so as to note any indication of possible failure of the remaining members of the structure or possible cave-in of the sides of the excavation. (vi) Backfilling shall progress together with the removal of support systems from excavations. (2) Additional requirements for support systems for trench excavations. (ii) Installation of a support system shall be closely coordinated with the excavation of trenches. (f) Sloping and benching systems. (g) Shield systems General. (ii) Shields shall be installed in a manner to restrict lateral or other hazardous movement of the shield in the event of the application of sudden lateral loads. (iii) Employees shall be protected from the hazard of cave-ins when entering or exiting the areas protected by shields. (iv) Employees shall not be allowed in shields when shields are being installed, removed, or moved vertically. (2) Additional requirement for shield systems used in trench excavations. Appendix A to Subpart P of Part 1926—Soil Classification (a) Scope and application Scope. (2) Application. (b) Definitions. Cemented soil Cohesive soil Dry soil Fissured Granular soil Layered system Moist soil Plastic Saturated soil Soil classification system Stable rock Submerged soil Type A (i) The soil is fissured; or (ii) The soil is subject to vibration from heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects; or (iii) The soil has been previously disturbed; or (iv) The soil is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) or greater; or (v) The material is subject to other factors that would require it to be classified as a less stable material. Type B (i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) but less than 1.5 tsf (144 kPa); or (ii) Granular cohesionless soils including: angular gravel (similar to crushed rock), silt, silt loam, sandy loam and, in some cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. (iii) Previously disturbed soils except those which would otherwise be classified as Type C soil. (iv) Soil that meets the unconfined compressive strength or cementation requirements for Type A, but is fissured or subject to vibration; or (v) Dry rock that is not stable; or (vi) Material that is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope less steep than four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V), but only if the material would otherwise be classified as Type B. Type C (i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less; or (ii) Granular soils including gravel, sand, and loamy sand; or (iii) Submerged soil or soil from which water is freely seeping; or (iv) Submerged rock that is not stable; or (v) Material in a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) or steeper. Unconfined compressive strength Wet soil (c) Requirements Classification of soil and rock deposits. (2) Basis of classification. (3) Visual and manual analyses. (4) Layered systems. (5) Reclassification. (d) Acceptable visual and manual tests Visual tests. (i) Observe samples of soil that are excavated and soil in the sides of the excavation. Estimate the range of particle sizes and the relative amounts of the particle sizes. Soil that is primarily composed of fine-grained material is cohesive material. Soil composed primarily of coarse-grained sand or gravel is granular material. (ii) Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil that remains in clumps when excavated is cohesive. Soil that breaks up easily and does not stay in clumps is granular. (iii) Observe the side of the opened excavation and the surface area adjacent to the excavation. Crack-like openings such as tension cracks could indicate fissured material. If chunks of soil spall off a vertical side, the soil could be fissured. Small spalls are evidence of moving ground and are indications of potentially hazardous situations. (iv) Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the excavation itself for evidence of existing utility and other underground structures, and to identify previously disturbed soil. (v) Observe the opened side of the excavation to identify layered systems. Examine layered systems to identify if the layers slope toward the excavation. Estimate the degree of slope of the layers. (vi) Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the sides of the opened excavation for evidence of surface water, water seeping from the sides of the excavation, or the location of the level of the water table. (vii) Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the area within the excavation for sources of vibration that may affect the stability of the excavation face. (2) Manual tests. (i) Plasticity. 1/8 1/8 (ii) Dry strength. (iii) Thumb penetration. (iv) Other strength tests. (v) Drying test. (A) If the sample develops cracks as it dries, significant fissures are indicated. (B) Samples that dry without cracking are to be broken by hand. If considerable force is necessary to break a sample, the soil has significant cohesive material content. The soil can be classified as an unfissured cohesive material and the unconfined compressive strength should be determined. (C) If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is either a fissured cohesive material or a granular material. To distinguish between the two, pulverize the dried clumps of the sample by hand or by stepping on them. If the clumps do not pulverize easily, the material is cohesive with fissures. If they pulverize easily into very small fragments, the material is granular. [85 FR 8743, Feb. 18, 2020] Appendix B to Subpart P of Part 1926—Sloping and Benching (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions. Actual slope Distress Maximum allowable slope Short term exposure (c) Requirements Soil classification. (2) Maximum allowable slope. (3) Actual slope. (ii) The actual slope shall be less steep than the maximum allowable slope, when there are signs of distress. If that situation occurs, the slope shall be cut back to an actual slope which is at least 1/2 1/2 (iii) When surcharge loads from stored material or equipment, operating equipment, or traffic are present, a competent person shall determine the degree to which the actual slope must be reduced below the maximum allowable slope, and shall assure that such reduction is achieved. Surcharge loads from adjacent structures shall be evaluated in accordance with § 1926.651(i). (4) Configurations. Figure B-1 Slope Configurations (All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio) B-1.1 Excavations made in Type A soil. 1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4 Simple Slope—General Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which are 12 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1/2 Simple Slope—Short Term 2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4 Simple Bench Multiple Bench 3. All excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum vertical side of 3 1/2 Unsupported Vertically Sided Lower Portion—Maximum 8 Feet in Depth All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth which unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and a maximum vertical side of 3 1/2 Unsupported Vertically Sided Lower Portion—Maximum 12 Feet in Depth All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions that are supported or shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3/4 Supported or Shielded Vertically Sided Lower Portion 4. All other simple slope, compound slope, and vertically sided lower portion excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted under § 1926.652(b). B-1.2 Excavations Made in Type B Soil 1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1. Simple Slope 2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows: Single Bench Multiple Bench 3. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1. Vertically Sided Lower Portion 4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in § 1926.652(b). B-1.3 Excavations Made in Type C Soil 1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1 1/2 Simple Slope 2. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1 1/2 Vertical Sided Lower Portion 3. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in § 1926.652(b). B-1.4 Excavations Made in Layered Soils 1. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth made in layered soils shall have a maximum allowable slope for each layer as set forth below. 2. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in § 1926.652(b). Appendix C to Subpart P of Part 1926—Timber Shoring for Trenches (a) Scope. (b) Soil Classification. (c) Presentation of Information. (1) Information is presented in tabular form in Tables C-1.1, C-1.2, and C-1.3, and Tables C-2.1, C-2.2 and C-2.3 following paragraph (g) of the appendix. Each table presents the minimum sizes of timber members to use in a shoring system, and each table contains data only for the particular soil type in which the excavation or portion of the excavation is made. The data are arranged to allow the user the flexibility to select from among several acceptable configurations of members based on varying the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. Stable rock is exempt from shoring requirements and therefore, no data are presented for this condition. (2) Information concerning the basis of the tabular data and the limitations of the data is presented in paragraph (d) of this appendix, and on the tables themselves. (3) Information explaining the use of the tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of this appendix. (4) Information illustrating the use of the tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of this appendix. (5) Miscellaneous notations regarding Tables C-1.1 through C-1.3 and Tables C-2.1 through C-2.3 are presented in paragraph (g) of this Appendix. (d) Basis and limitations of the data Dimensions of timber members. (ii) The required dimensions of the members listed in Tables C-1.1 through C-1.3 refer to actual dimensions and not nominal dimensions of the timber. Employers wanting to use nominal size shoring are directed to Tables C-2.1 through C-2.3, or have this choice under § 1926.652(c)(3), and are referred to The Corps of Engineers, The Bureau of Reclamation or data from other acceptable sources. (2) Limitation of application. (ii) When any of the following conditions are present, the members specified in the tables are not considered adequate. Either an alternate timber shoring system must be designed or another type of protective system designed in accordance with § 1926.652. (A) When loads imposed by structures or by stored material adjacent to the trench weigh in excess of the load imposed by a two-foot soil surcharge. The term “adjacent” as used here means the area within a horizontal distance from the edge of the trench equal to the depth of the trench. (B) When vertical loads imposed on cross braces exceed a 240-pound gravity load distributed on a one-foot section of the center of the crossbrace. (C) When surcharge loads are present from equipment weighing in excess of 20,000 pounds. (D) When only the lower portion of a trench is shored and the remaining portion of the trench is sloped or benched unless: The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less steep than three horizontal to one vertical; or the members are selected from the tables for use at a depth which is determined from the top of the overall trench, and not from the toe of the sloped portion. (e) Use of Tables. (f) Examples to Illustrate the Use of Tables C-1.1 through C-1.3. (1) Example 1. A trench dug in Type A soil is 13 feet deep and five feet wide. From Table C-1.1, Arrangement #B1 Space 4 × 4 crossbraces at six feet horizontally and four feet vertically. Wales are not required. Space 3 × 8 uprights at six feet horizontally. This arrangement is commonly called “skip shoring.” Arrangement #B2 Space 4 × 6 crossbraces at eight feet horizontally and four feet vertically. Space 8 × 8 wales at four feet vertically. Space 2 × 6 uprights at four feet horizontally. Arrangement #B3 Space 6 × 6 crossbraces at 10 feet horizontally and four feet vertically. Space 8 × 10 wales at four feet vertically. Space 2 × 6 uprights at five feet horizontally. Arrangement #B4 Space 6 × 6 crossbraces at 12 feet horizontally and four feet vertically. Space 10 × 10 wales at four feet vertically. Spaces 3 × 8 uprights at six feet horizontally. (2) Example 2. A trench dug in Type B soil in 13 feet deep and five feet wide. From Table C-1.2 three acceptable arrangements of members are listed. Arrangement #B1 Space 6 × 6 crossbraces at six feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 8 × 8 wales at five feet vertically. Space 2 × 6 uprights at two feet horizontally. Arrangement #B2 Space 6 × 8 crossbraces at eight feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 10 × 10 wales at five feet vertically. Space 2 × 6 uprights at two feet horizontally. Arrangement #B3 Space 8 × 8 crossbraces at 10 feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 10 × 12 wales at five feet vertically. Space 2 × 6 uprights at two feet vertically. (3) Example 3. A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep and five feet wide. From Table C-1.3 two acceptable arrangements of members can be used. Arrangement #B1 Space 8 × 8 crossbraces at six feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 10 × 12 wales at five feet vertically. Position 2 × 6 uprights as closely together as possible. If water must be retained use special tongue and groove uprights to form tight sheeting. Arrangement #B2 Space 8 × 10 crossbraces at eight feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 12 × 12 wales at five feet vertically. Position 2 × 6 uprights in a close sheeting configuration unless water pressure must be resisted. Tight sheeting must be used where water must be retained. (4) Example 4. A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep and 11 feet wide. The size and spacing of members for the section of trench that is over 15 feet in depth is determined using Table C-1.3. Only one arrangement of members is provided. Space 8 × 10 crossbraces at six feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 12 × 12 wales at five feet vertically. Use 3 × 6 tight sheeting. Use of Tables C-2.1 through C-2.3 would follow the same procedures. (g) Notes for all Tables. 1. Member sizes at spacings other than indicated are to be determined as specified in § 1926.652(c), “Design of Protective Systems.” 2. When conditions are saturated or submerged use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting refers to the use of specially-edged timber planks (e.g., tongue and groove) at least three inches thick, steel sheet piling, or similar construction that when driven or placed in position provide a tight wall to resist the lateral pressure of water and to prevent the loss of backfill material. Close Sheeting refers to the placement of planks side-by-side allowing as little space as possible between them. 3. All spacing indicated is measured center to center. 4. Wales to be installed with greater dimension horizontal. 5. If the vertical distance from the center of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the trench exceeds two and one-half feet, uprights shall be firmly embedded or a mudsill shall be used. Where uprights are embedded, the vertical distance from the center of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the trench shall not exceed 36 inches. When mudsills are used, the vertical distance shall not exceed 42 inches. Mudsills are wales that are installed at the toe of the trench side. 6. Trench jacks may be used in lieu of or in combination with timber crossbraces. 7. Placement cf crossbraces. When the vertical spacing of crossbraces is four feet, place the top crossbrace no more than two feet below the top of the trench. When the vertical spacing of crossbraces is five feet, place the top crossbrace no more than 2.5 feet below the top of the trench. Appendix D to Subpart P of Part 1926—Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring for Trenches (a) Scope. (b) Soil Classification. (c) Presentation of Information. (1) Information is presented in tabular form in Tables D-1.1, D-1.2, D-1.3 and E-1.4. Each table presents the maximum vertical and horizontal spacings that may be used with various aluminum member sizes and various hydraulic cylinder sizes. Each table contains data only for the particular soil type in which the excavation or portion of the excavation is made. Tables D-1.1 and D-1.2 are for vertical shores in Types A and B soil. Tables D-1.3 and D1.4 are for horizontal waler systems in Types B and C soil. (2) Information concerning the basis of the tabular data and the limitations of the data is presented in paragraph (d) of this appendix. (3) Information explaining the use of the tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of this appendix. (4) Information illustrating the use of the tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of this appendix. (5) Miscellaneous notations (footnotes) regarding Table D-1.1 through D-1.4 are presented in paragraph (g) of this appendix. (6) Figures, illustrating typical installations of hydraulic shoring, are included just prior to the Tables. The illustrations page is entitled “Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring; Typical Installations.” (d) Basis and limitations of the data. (2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications. (i) 2-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch inside diameter with a minimum safe working capacity of no less than 18,000 pounds axial compressive load at maximum extension. Maximum extension is to include full range of cylinder extensions as recommended by product manufaturer. (ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3-inch inside diameter with a safe working capacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial compressive load at extensions as recommended by product manufacturer. (3) Limitation of application. (i) It is not intended that the aluminum hydraulic specification apply to every situation that may be experienced in the field. These data were developed to apply to the situations that are most commonly experienced in current trenching practice. Shoring systems for use in situations that are not covered by the data in this appendix must be otherwise designed as specified in § 1926.652(c). (ii) When any of the following conditions are present, the members specified in the Tables are not considered adequate. In this case, an alternative aluminum hydraulic shoring system or other type of protective system must be designed in accordance with § 1926.652. (A) When vertical loads imposed on cross braces exceed a 100 Pound gravity load distributed on a one foot section of the center of the hydraulic cylinder. (B) When surcharge loads are present from equipment weighing in excess of 20,000 pounds. (C) When only the lower portion or a trench is shored and the remaining portion of the trench is sloped or benched unless: The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less steep than three horizontal to one vertical; or the members are selected from the tables for use at a depth which is determined from the top of the overall trench, and not from the toe of the sloped portion. (e) Use of Tables D-1.1, D-1.2, D-1.3 and D-1.4. (f) Example to Illustrate the Use of the Tables: (1) Example 1: A trench dug in Type A soil is 6 feet deep and 3 feet wide. From Table D-1.1: Find vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 8 feet on center (o.c.) horizontally and 4 feet on center (o.c.) vertically. (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.) (2) Example 2: A trench is dug in Type B soil that does not require sheeting, 13 feet deep and 5 feet wide. From Table D-1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 6.5 feet o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically. (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.) (3) A trench is dug in Type B soil that does not require sheeting, but does experience some minor raveling of the trench face. The trench is 16 feet deep and 9 feet wide. From Table D-1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinder (with special oversleeves as designated by footnote #B2) spaced 5.5 feet o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically, plywood (per footnote (g)(7) to the D-1 Table) should be used behind the shores. (See Figures 2 & 3 for typical installations.) (4) Example 4: A trench is dug in previously disturbed Type B soil, with characteristics of a Type C soil, and will require sheeting. The trench is 18 feet deep and 12 feet wide. 8 foot horizontal spacing between cylinders is desired for working space. From Table D-1.3: Find horizontal wale with a section modulus of 14.0 spaced at 4 feet o.c. vertically and 3 inch diameter cylinder spaced at 9 feet maximum o.c. horizontally. 3 × 12 timber sheeting is required at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical installation.) (5) Example 5: A trench is dug in Type C soil, 9 feet deep and 4 feet wide. Horizontal cylinder spacing in excess of 6 feet is desired for working space. From Table D-1.4: Find horizontal wale with a section modulus of 7.0 and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced at 6.5 feet o.c. horizontally. Or, find horizontal wale with a 14.0 section modulus and 3 inch diameter cylinder spaced at 10 feet o.c. horizontally. Both wales are spaced 4 feet o.c. vertically. 3 × 12 timber sheeting is required at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical installation.) (g) Footnotes, and general notes, for Tables D-1.1, D-1.2, D-1.3, and D-1.4. (1) For applications other than those listed in the tables, refer to § 1926.652(c)(2) for use of manufacturer's tabulated data. For trench depths in excess of 20 feet, refer to § 1926.652(c)(2) and § 1926.652(c)(3). (2) 2 inch diameter cylinders, at this width, shall have structural steel tube (3.5 × 3.5 × 0.1875) oversleeves, or structural oversleeves of manufacturer's specification, extending the full, collapsed length. (3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities. (i) 2 inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch inside diameter with a safe working capacity of not less than 18,000 pounds axial compressive load at maximum extension. Maximum extension is to include full range of cylinder extensions as recommended by product manufacturer. (ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3-inch inside diameter with a safe work capacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial compressive load at maximum extension. Maximum extension is to include full range of cylinder extensions as recommended by product manufacturer. (4) All spacing indicated is measured center to center. (5) Vertical shoring rails shall have a minimum section modulus of 0.40 inch. (6) When vertical shores are used, there must be a minimum of three shores spaced equally, horizontally, in a group. (7) Plywood shall be 1.125 in. thick softwood or 0.75 inch. thick, 14 ply, arctic white birch (Finland form). Please note that plywood is not intended as a structural member, but only for prevention of local raveling (sloughing of the trench face) between shores. (8) See appendix C for timber specifications. (9) Wales are calculated for simple span conditions. (10) See appendix D, item (d), for basis and limitations of the data. Appendix E to Subpart P of Part 1926—Alternatives to Timber Shoring Appendix F to Subpart P of Part 1926—Selection of Protective Systems The following figures are a graphic summary of the requirements contained in subpart P for excavations 20 feet or less in depth. Protective systems for use in excavations more than 20 feet in depth must be designed by a registered professional engineer in accordance with § 1926.652 (b) and (c). Subpart Q—Concrete and Masonry Construction Authority: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6 and 8 Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 1-90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Source: 53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, unless otherwise noted. § 1926.700 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions applicable to this subpart. (1) Bull float (2) Formwork (3) Lift slab (4) Limited access zone (5) Precast concrete (6) Reshoring (7) Shore (8) Vertical slip forms (9) Jacking operation [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990] § 1926.701 General requirements. (a) Construction loads. (b) Reinforcing steel. (c) Post-tensioning operations. (2) Signs and barriers shall be erected to limit employee access to the post-tensioning area during tensioning operations. (d) Riding concrete buckets. (e) Working under loads. (2) To the extent practical, elevated concrete buckets shall be routed so that no employee, or the fewest number of employees, are exposed to the hazards associated with falling concrete buckets. (f) Personal protective equipment. [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] § 1926.702 Requirements for equipment and tools. (a) Bulk cement storage. (i) Conical or tapered bottoms; and (ii) Mechanical or pneumatic means of starting the flow of material. (2) No employee shall be permitted to enter storage facilities unless the ejection system has been shut down, locked out, and tagged to indicate that the ejection system is not to be operated. (b) Concrete mixers. 3 (1) A mechanical device to clear the skip of materials; and (2) Guardrails installed on each side of the skip. (c) Power concrete trowels. (d) Concrete buggies. (e) Concrete pumping systems. (2) Compressed air hoses used on concrete pumping system shall be provided with positive fail-safe joint connectors to prevent separation of sections when pressurized. (f) Concrete buckets. (2) Concrete buckets shall be designed to prevent concrete from hanging up on top and the sides. (g) Tremies. (h) Bull floats. (i) Masonry saws. (2) A method for retaining blade fragments shall be incorporated in the design of the semicircular enclosure. (j) Lockout/Tagout Procedures. (2) Tags shall read Do Not Start § 1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-place concrete. (a) General requirements for formwork. (2) Drawings or plans, including all revisions, for the jack layout, formwork (including shoring equipment), working decks, and scaffolds, shall be available at the jobsite. (b) Shoring and reshoring. (2) Shoring equipment found to be damaged such that its strength is reduced to less than that required by § 1926.703(a)(1) shall not be used for shoring. (3) Erected shoring equipment shall be inspected immediately prior to, during, and immediately after concrete placement. (4) Shoring equipment that is found to be damaged or weakened after erection, such that its strength is reduced to less than that required by § 1926.703(a)(1), shall be immediately reinforced. (5) The sills for shoring shall be sound, rigid, and capable of carrying the maximum intended load. (6) All base plates, shore heads, extension devices, and adjustment screws shall be in firm contact, and secured when necessary, with the foundation and the form. (7) Eccentric loads on shore heads and similar members shall be prohibited unless these members have been designed for such loading. (8) Whenever single post shores are used one on top of another (tiered), the employer shall comply with the following specific requirements in addition to the general requirements for formwork: (i) The design of the shoring shall be prepared by a qualified designer and the erected shoring shall be inspected by an engineer qualified in structural design. (ii) The single post shores shall be vertically aligned. (iii) The single post shores shall be spliced to prevent misalignment. (iv) The single post shores shall be adequately braced in two mutually perpendicular directions at the splice level. Each tier shall also be diagonally braced in the same two directions. (9) Adjustment of single post shores to raise formwork shall not be made after the placement of concrete. (10) Reshoring shall be erected, as the original forms and shores are removed, whenever the concrete is required to support loads in excess of its capacity. (c) Vertical slip forms. (i) Specifically designed for that purpose; and (ii) Adequately braced where not encased in concrete. (2) Forms shall be designed to prevent excessive distortion of the structure during the jacking operation. (3) All vertical slip forms shall be provided with scaffolds or work platforms where employees are required to work or pass. (4) Jacks and vertical supports shall be positioned in such a manner that the loads do not exceed the rated capacity of the jacks. (5) The jacks or other lifting devices shall be provided with mechanical dogs or other automatic holding devices to support the slip forms whenever failure of the power supply or lifting mechanism occurs. (6) The form structure shall be maintained within all design tolerances specified for plumbness during the jacking operation. (7) The predetermined safe rate of lift shall not be exceeded. (d) Reinforcing steel. (2) Employers shall take measures to prevent unrolled wire mesh from recoiling. Such measures may include, but are not limited to, securing each end of the roll or turning over the roll. (e) Removal of formwork. (i) The plans and specifications stipulate conditions for removal of forms and shores, and such conditions have been followed, or (ii) The concrete has been properly tested with an appropriate ASTM standard test method designed to indicate the concrete compressive strength, and the test results indicate that the concrete has gained sufficient strength to support its weight and superimposed loads. (2) Reshoring shall not be removed until the concrete being supported has attained adequate strength to support its weight and all loads in place upon it. Appendix to § 1926.703( a General Requirements for Formwork (This appendix is non-mandatory.) This appendix serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers in complying with the formwork requirements in § 1926.703(a)(1). Formwork which has been designed, fabricated, erected, braced, supported and maintained in accordance with Sections 6 and 7 of the American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations—Concrete and Masonry Work, ANSI A10.9-1983, shall be deemed to be in compliance with the provision of § 1926.703(a)(1). [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] § 1926.704 Requirements for precast concrete. (a) Precast concrete wall units, structural framing, and tilt-up wall panels shall be adequately supported to prevent overturning and to prevent collapse until permanent connections are completed. (b) Lifting inserts which are embedded or otherwise attached to tilt-up precast concrete members shall be capable of supporting at least two times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to them. (c) Lifting inserts which are embedded or otherwise attached to precast concrete members, other than the tilt-up members, shall be capable of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to them. (d) Lifting hardware shall be capable of supporting at least five times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to the lifting hardware. (e) No employee shall be permitted under precast concrete members being lifted or tilted into position except those employees required for the erection of those members. [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 41088, Oct. 5, 1989] § 1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab construction operations. (a) Lift-slab operations shall be designed and planned by a registered professional engineer who has experience in lift-slab construction. Such plans and designs shall be implemented by the employer and shall include detailed instructions and sketches indicating the prescribed method of erection. These plans and designs shall also include provisions for ensuring lateral stability of the building/structure during construction. (b) Jacks/lifting units shall be marked to indicate their rated capacity as established by the manufacturer. (c) Jacks/lifting units shall not be loaded beyond their rated capacity as established by the manufacturer. (d) Jacking equipment shall be capable of supporting at least two and one-half times the load being lifted during jacking operations and the equipment shall not be overloaded. For the purpose of this provision, jacking equipment includes any load bearing component which is used to carry out the lifting operation(s). Such equipment includes, but is not limited, to the following: threaded rods, lifting attachments, lifting nuts, hook-up collars, T-caps, shearheads, columns, and footings. (e) Jacks/lifting units shall be designed and installed so that they will neither lift nor continue to lift when they are loaded in excess of their rated capacity. (f) Jacks/lifting units shall have a safety device installed which will cause the jacks/lifting units to support the load in any position in the event any jack/lifting unit malfunctions or loses its lifting ability. (g) Jacking operations shall be synchronized in such a manner to ensure even and uniform lifting of the slab. During lifting, all points at which the slab is supported shall be kept within 1/2 (h) If leveling is automatically controlled, a device shall be installed that will stop the operation when the 1/2 (i) If leveling is maintained by manual controls, such controls shall be located in a central location and attended by a competent person while lifting is in progress. In addition to meeting the definition in § 1926.32(f), the competent person must be experienced in the lifting operation and with the lifting equipment being used. (j) The maximum number of manually controlled jacks/lifting units on one slab shall be limited to a number that will permit the operator to maintain the slab level within specified tolerances of paragraph (g) of this section, but in no case shall that number exceed 14. (k)(1) No employee, except those essential to the jacking operation, shall be permitted in the building/structure while any jacking operation is taking place unless the building/structure has been reinforced sufficiently to ensure its integrity during erection. The phrase “reinforced sufficiently to ensure its integrity” used in this paragraph means that a registered professional engineer, independent of the engineer who designed and planned the lifting operation, has determined from the plans that if there is a loss of support at any jack location, that loss will be confined to that location and the structure as a whole will remain stable. (2) Under no circumstances, shall any employee who is not essential to the jacking operation be permitted immediately beneath a slab while it is being lifted. (3) For the purpose of paragraph (k) of this section, a jacking operation begins when a slab or group of slabs is lifted and ends when such slabs are secured (with either temporary connections or permanent connections). (4) Employers who comply with appendix A to § 1926.705 shall be considered to be in compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (k)(1) through (k)(3) of this section. (l) When making temporary connections to support slabs, wedges shall be secured by tack welding, or an equivalent method of securing the wedges to prevent them from falling out of position. Lifting rods may not be released until the wedges at that column have been secured. (m) All welding on temporary and permanent connections shall be performed by a certified welder, familiar with the welding requirements specified in the plans and specifications for the lift-slab operation. (n) Load transfer from jacks/lifting units to building columns shall not be executed until the welds on the column shear plates (weld blocks) are cooled to air temperature. (o) Jacks/lifting units shall be positively secured to building columns so that they do not become dislodged or dislocated. (p) Equipment shall be designed and installed so that the lifting rods cannot slip out of position or the employer shall institute other measures, such as the use of locking or blocking devices, which will provide positive connection between the lifting rods and attachments and will prevent components from disengaging during lifting operations. Appendix to § 1926.705—Lift-Slab Operations (This appendix is non-mandatory.) In paragraph 1926.705(k), OSHA requires employees to be removed from the building/structure during jacking operations unless an independent registered professional engineer, other than the engineer who designed and planned the lifting operation, has determined that the building/structure has been sufficiently reinforced to insure the integrity of the building/structure. One method to comply with this provision is for the employer to ensure that continuous bottom steel is provided in every slab and in both directions through every wall or column head area. (Column head area means the distance between lines that are one and one half times the thickness of the slab or drop panel. These lines are located outside opposite faces of the outer edges of the shearhead sections—See Figure 1). The amount of bottom steel shall be established by assuming loss of support at a given lifting jack and then determining the steel necessary to carry, by catenary action over the span between surrounding supports, the slab service dead load plus [55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990] § 1926.706 Requirements for masonry construction. (a) A limited access zone shall be established whenever a masonry wall is being constructed. The limited access zone shall conform to the following. (1) The limited access zone shall be established prior to the start of construction of the wall. (2) The limited access zone shall be equal to the height of the wall to be constructed plus four feet, and shall run the entire length of the wall. (3) The limited access zone shall be established on the side of the wall which will be unscaffolded. (4) The limited access zone shall be restricted to entry by employees actively engaged in constructing the wall. No other employees shall be permitted to enter the zone. (5) The limited access zone shall remain in place until the wall is adequately supported to prevent overturning and to prevent collapse unless the height of wall is over eight feet, in which case, the limited access zone shall remain in place until the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section have been met. (b) All masonry walls over eight feet in height shall be adequately braced to prevent overturning and to prevent collapse unless the wall is adequately supported so that it will not overturn or collapse. The bracing shall remain in place until permanent supporting elements of the structure are in place. Appendix A to Subpart Q of Part 1926—References to subpart Q of Part 1926 (This appendix is non-mandatory.) The following non-mandatory references provide information which can be helpful in understanding and complying with the requirements contained in subpart Q. • Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations; Eighth Edition; National Safety Council. • Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-83). • Formwork for Concrete (ACI SP-4). • Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork (ACI 347-78). • Safety Requirements for Concrete and Masonry Work (ANSI A10.9-1983). • Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens (ASTM C39-86). • Standard Test Method for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field (ASTM C31-85). • Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of Hardened Concrete (ASTM C803-82). • Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast In-Place in Cylindrical Molds (ASTM C873-85). • Standard Method for Developing Early Age Compressive Test Values and Projecting Later Age Strengths (ASTM C918-80). • Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction (ASTM E329-77). • Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory (ASTM C192-88). • Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete (ASTM C42-87). • Methods of Securing, Preparing and Testing Specimens from Hardened Lightweight Insulating Concrete for Compressive Strength (ASTM C513-86). • Test Method for Comprehensive Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete (ASTM C495-86). • Method of Making, Accelerating Curing, and Testing of Concrete Compression Test Specimens (ASTM C684-81). • Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete Using Portions of Beams Broken in Flexure (ASTM C116-68 (1980)). Subpart R—Steel Erection Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order Nos. 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Source: 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, unless otherwise noted. § 1926.750 Scope. (a) This subpart sets forth requirements to protect employees from the hazards associated with steel erection activities involved in the construction, alteration, and/or repair of single and multi-story buildings, bridges, and other structures where steel erection occurs. The requirements of this subpart apply to employers engaged in steel erection unless otherwise specified. This subpart does not cover electrical transmission towers, communication and broadcast towers, or tanks. Note to paragraph ( a Examples of structures where steel erection may occur include but are not limited to the following: Single and multi-story buildings; systems-engineered metal buildings; lift slab/tilt-up structures; energy exploration structures; energy production, transfer and storage structures and facilities; auditoriums; malls; amphitheaters; stadiums; power plants; mills; chemical process structures; bridges; trestles; overpasses; underpasses; viaducts; aqueducts; aerospace facilities and structures; radar and communication structures; light towers; signage; billboards; scoreboards; conveyor systems; conveyor supports and related framing; stairways; stair towers; fire escapes; draft curtains; fire containment structures; monorails; aerialways; catwalks; curtain walls; window walls; store fronts; elevator fronts; entrances; skylights; metal roofs; industrial structures; hi-bay structures; rail, marine and other transportation structures; sound barriers; water process and water containment structures; air and cable supported structures; space frames; geodesic domes; canopies; racks and rack support structures and frames; platforms; walkways; balconies; atriums; penthouses; car dumpers; stackers/reclaimers; cranes and craneways; bins; hoppers; ovens; furnaces; stacks; amusement park structures and rides; and artistic and monumental structures. (b)(1) Steel erection activities include hoisting, laying out, placing, connecting, welding, burning, guying, bracing, bolting, plumbing and rigging structural steel, steel joists and metal buildings; installing metal decking, curtain walls, window walls, siding systems, miscellaneous metals, ornamental iron and similar materials; and moving point-to-point while performing these activities. (2) The following activities are covered by this subpart when they occur during and are a part of steel erection activities: rigging, hoisting, laying out, placing, connecting, guying, bracing, dismantling, burning, welding, bolting, grinding, sealing, caulking, and all related activities for construction, alteration and/or repair of materials and assemblies such as structural steel; ferrous metals and alloys; non-ferrous metals and alloys; glass; plastics and synthetic composite materials; structural metal framing and related bracing and assemblies; anchoring devices; structural cabling; cable stays; permanent and temporary bents and towers; falsework for temporary supports of permanent steel members; stone and other non-precast concrete architectural materials mounted on steel frames; safety systems for steel erection; steel and metal joists; metal decking and raceway systems and accessories; metal roofing and accessories; metal siding; bridge flooring; cold formed steel framing; elevator beams; grillage; shelf racks; multi-purpose supports; crane rails and accessories; miscellaneous, architectural and ornamental metals and metal work; ladders; railings; handrails; fences and gates; gratings; trench covers; floor plates; castings; sheet metal fabrications; metal panels and panel wall systems; louvers; column covers; enclosures and pockets; stairs; perforated metals; ornamental iron work, expansion control including bridge expansion joint assemblies; slide bearings; hydraulic structures; fascias; soffit panels; penthouse enclosures; skylights; joint fillers; gaskets; sealants and seals; doors; windows; hardware; detention/security equipment and doors, windows and hardware; conveying systems; building specialties; building equipment; machinery and plant equipment, furnishings and special construction. (c) The duties of controlling contractors under this subpart include, but are not limited to, the duties specified in §§ 1926.752 (a) and (c), 1926.755(b)(2), 1926.759(b), and 1926.760(e). § 1926.751 Definitions. Anchored bridging Bolted diagonal bridging Bridging clip Bridging terminus point Choker Cold forming Column Competent person Connector Constructibility Construction load (for joist erection) Controlled Decking Zone Controlled load lowering Controlling contractor Critical lift Decking hole Derrick floor Double connection Double connection seat Erection bridging Fall restraint system Final interior perimeter Girt (in systems-engineered metal buildings) Headache ball Hoisting equipment Leading edge Metal decking Multiple lift rigging Opening Permanent floor Personal fall arrest system Positioning device system Post Project structural engineer of record Purlin (in systems-engineered metal buildings) Qualified person Safety deck attachment Shear connector Steel erection Steel joist Steel joist girder Steel truss Structural steel Systems-engineered metal building Tank Unprotected sides and edges § 1926.752 Site layout, site-specific erection plan and construction sequence. (a) Approval to begin steel erection. (1) The concrete in the footings, piers and walls and the mortar in the masonry piers and walls has attained, on the basis of an appropriate ASTM standard test method of field-cured samples, either 75 percent of the intended minimum compressive design strength or sufficient strength to support the loads imposed during steel erection. (2) Any repairs, replacements and modifications to the anchor bolts were conducted in accordance with § 1926.755(b). (b) Commencement of steel erection. (c) Site layout. (1) Adequate access roads into and through the site for the safe delivery and movement of derricks, cranes, trucks, other necessary equipment, and the material to be erected and means and methods for pedestrian and vehicular control. Exception: this requirement does not apply to roads outside of the construction site. (2) A firm, properly graded, drained area, readily accessible to the work with adequate space for the safe storage of materials and the safe operation of the erector's equipment. (d) Pre-planning of overhead hoisting operations. (e) Site-specific erection plan. § 1926.753 Hoisting and rigging. (a) All the provisions of subpart CC apply to hoisting and rigging with the exception of § 1926.1431(a). (b) In addition, paragraphs (c) through (e) of this section apply regarding the hazards associated with hoisting and rigging. (c) General. (i) Cranes being used in steel erection activities shall be visually inspected prior to each shift by a competent person; the inspection shall include observation for deficiencies during operation. At a minimum this inspection shall include the following: (A) All control mechanisms for maladjustments; (B) Control and drive mechanism for excessive wear of components and contamination by lubricants, water or other foreign matter; (C) Safety devices, including but not limited to boom angle indicators, boom stops, boom kick out devices, anti-two block devices, and load moment indicators where required; (D) Air, hydraulic, and other pressurized lines for deterioration or leakage, particularly those which flex in normal operation; (E) Hooks and latches for deformation, chemical damage, cracks, or wear; (F) Wire rope reeving for compliance with hoisting equipment manufacturer's specifications; (G) Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive deterioration, dirt, or moisture accumulation; (H) Hydraulic system for proper fluid level; (I) Tires for proper inflation and condition; (J) Ground conditions around the hoisting equipment for proper support, including ground settling under and around outriggers, ground water accumulation, or similar conditions; (K) The hoisting equipment for level position; and (L) The hoisting equipment for level position after each move and setup. (ii) If any deficiency is identified, an immediate determination shall be made by the competent person as to whether the deficiency constitutes a hazard. (iii) If the deficiency is determined to constitute a hazard, the hoisting equipment shall be removed from service until the deficiency has been corrected. (iv) The operator shall be responsible for those operations under the operator's direct control. Whenever there is any doubt as to safety, the operator shall have the authority to stop and refuse to handle loads until safety has been assured. (2) A qualified rigger (a rigger who is also a qualified person) shall inspect the rigging prior to each shift in accordance with § 1926.251. (3) The headache ball, hook or load shall not be used to transport personnel except as provided in paragraph (c)(4) of this section. (4) Cranes or derricks may be used to hoist employees on a personnel platform when work under this subpart is being conducted, provided that all provisions of § 1926.1431 (except for § 1926.1431(a)) are met. (5) Safety latches on hooks shall not be deactivated or made inoperable except: (i) When a qualified rigger has determined that the hoisting and placing of purlins and single joists can be performed more safely by doing so; or (ii) When equivalent protection is provided in a site-specific erection plan. (d) Working under loads. (i) Employees engaged in the initial connection of the steel; or (ii) Employees necessary for the hooking or unhooking of the load. (2) When working under suspended loads, the following criteria shall be met: (i) Materials being hoisted shall be rigged to prevent unintentional displacement; (ii) Hooks with self-closing safety latches or their equivalent shall be used to prevent components from slipping out of the hook; and (iii) All loads shall be rigged by a qualified rigger (e) Multiple lift rigging procedure. (i) A multiple lift rigging assembly is used; (ii) A maximum of five members are hoisted per lift; (iii) Only beams and similar structural members are lifted; and (iv) All employees engaged in the multiple lift have been trained in these procedures in accordance with § 1926.761(c)(1). (v) No crane is permitted to be used for a multiple lift where such use is contrary to the manufacturer's specifications and limitations. (2) Components of the multiple lift rigging assembly shall be specifically designed and assembled with a maximum capacity for total assembly and for each individual attachment point. This capacity, certified by the manufacturer or a qualified rigger, shall be based on the manufacturer's specifications with a 5 to 1 safety factor for all components. (3) The total load shall not exceed: (i) The rated capacity of the hoisting equipment specified in the hoisting equipment load charts; (ii) The rigging capacity specified in the rigging rating chart. (4) The multiple lift rigging assembly shall be rigged with members: (i) Attached at their center of gravity and maintained reasonably level; (ii) Rigged from top down; and (iii) Rigged at least 7 feet (2.1 m) apart. (5) The members on the multiple lift rigging assembly shall be set from the bottom up. (6) Controlled load lowering shall be used whenever the load is over the connectors. [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 75 FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010] § 1926.754 Structural steel assembly. (a) Structural stability shall be maintained at all times during the erection process. Note to paragraph ( a Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) regulations incorporate by reference a number of standards, policies, and standard specifications published by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) and other organizations. ( See See See http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/bridge/lrfd/index.htm. (b) The following additional requirements shall apply for multi-story structures: (1) The permanent floors shall be installed as the erection of structural members progresses, and there shall be not more than eight stories between the erection floor and the upper-most permanent floor, except where the structural integrity is maintained as a result of the design. (2) At no time shall there be more than four floors or 48 feet (14.6 m), whichever is less, of unfinished bolting or welding above the foundation or uppermost permanently secured floor, except where the structural integrity is maintained as a result of the design. (3) A fully planked or decked floor or nets shall be maintained within two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is less, directly under any erection work being performed. (c) Walking/working surfaces—shear connectors and other similar devices Tripping hazards. (2) Installation of shear connectors on composite floors, roofs and bridge decks. (d) Plumbing-up. (2) When used, plumbing-up equipment shall be in place and properly installed before the structure is loaded with construction material such as loads of joists, bundles of decking or bundles of bridging. (3) Plumbing-up equipment shall be removed only with the approval of a competent person. (e) Metal decking Hoisting, landing and placing of metal decking bundles. (ii) If loose items such as dunnage, flashing, or other materials are placed on the top of metal decking bundles to be hoisted, such items shall be secured to the bundles. (iii) Bundles of metal decking on joists shall be landed in accordance with § 1926.757(e)(4). (iv) Metal decking bundles shall be landed on framing members so that enough support is provided to allow the bundles to be unbanded without dislodging the bundles from the supports. (v) At the end of the shift or when environmental or jobsite conditions require, metal decking shall be secured against displacement. (2) Roof and floor holes and openings. (i) Framed metal deck openings shall have structural members turned down to allow continuous deck installation except where not allowed by structural design constraints or constructibility. (ii) Roof and floor holes and openings shall be decked over. Where large size, configuration or other structural design does not allow openings to be decked over (such as elevator shafts, stair wells, etc.) employees shall be protected in accordance with § 1926.760(a)(1). (iii) Metal decking holes and openings shall not be cut until immediately prior to being permanently filled with the equipment or structure needed or intended to fulfill its specific use and which meets the strength requirements of paragraph (e)(3) of this section, or shall be immediately covered. (3) Covering roof and floor openings. (ii) All covers shall be secured when installed to prevent accidental displacement by the wind, equipment or employees. (iii) All covers shall be painted with high-visibility paint or shall be marked with the word “HOLE” or “COVER” to provide warning of the hazard. (iv) Smoke dome or skylight fixtures that have been installed, are not considered covers for the purpose of this section unless they meet the strength requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(i) of this section. (4) Decking gaps around columns. (5) Installation of metal decking. (ii) During initial placement, metal decking panels shall be placed to ensure full support by structural members. (6) Derrick floors. (i) A derrick floor shall be fully decked and/or planked and the steel member connections completed to support the intended floor loading. (ii) Temporary loads placed on a derrick floor shall be distributed over the underlying support members so as to prevent local overloading of the deck material. [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 71 FR 2885, Jan. 18, 2006; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 75 FR 27429, May 17, 2010; 85 FR 8745, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1926.755 Column anchorage. (a) General requirements for erection stability. (2) Each column anchor rod (anchor bolt) assembly, including the column-to-base plate weld and the column foundation, shall be designed to resist a minimum eccentric gravity load of 300 pounds (136.2 kg) located 18 inches (.46m) from the extreme outer face of the column in each direction at the top of the column shaft. (3) Columns shall be set on level finished floors, pre-grouted leveling plates, leveling nuts, or shim packs which are adequate to transfer the construction loads. (4) All columns shall be evaluated by a competent person to determine whether guying or bracing is needed; if guying or bracing is needed, it shall be installed. (b) Repair, replacement or field modification of anchor rods (anchor bolts). (2) Prior to the erection of a column, the controlling contractor shall provide written notification to the steel erector if there has been any repair, replacement or modification of the anchor rods (anchor bolts) of that column. § 1926.756 Beams and columns. (a) General. (2) A competent person shall determine if more than two bolts are necessary to ensure the stability of cantilevered members; if additional bolts are needed, they shall be installed. (b) Diagonal bracing. (c)(1) Double connections at columns and/or at beam webs over a column. (2) If a seat or equivalent device is used, the seat (or device) shall be designed to support the load during the double connection process. It shall be adequately bolted or welded to both a supporting member and the first member before the nuts on the shared bolts are removed to make the double connection. (d) Column splices. (e) Perimeter columns. (1) The perimeter columns extend a minimum of 48 inches (1.2 m) above the finished floor to permit installation of perimeter safety cables prior to erection of the next tier, except where constructibility does not allow (see appendix F to this subpart); (2) The perimeter columns have holes or other devices in or attached to perimeter columns at 42-45 inches (107-114 cm) above the finished floor and the midpoint between the finished floor and the top cable to permit installation of perimeter safety cables required by § 1926.760(a)(2), except where constructibility does not allow. (See appendix F to this subpart). § 1926.757 Open web steel joists. (a) General. (i) A vertical stabilizer plate shall be provided on each column for steel joists. The plate shall be a minimum of 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm) and shall extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) below the bottom chord of the joist with a 13/16 (ii) The bottom chords of steel joists at columns shall be stabilized to prevent rotation during erection. (iii) Hoisting cables shall not be released until the seat at each end of the steel joist is field-bolted, and each end of the bottom chord is restrained by the column stabilizer plate. (2) Where constructibility does not allow a steel joist to be installed at the column: (i) an alternate means of stabilizing joists shall be installed on both sides near the column and shall: (A) provide stability equivalent to paragraph (a)(1) of this section; (B) be designed by a qualified person; (C) be shop installed; and (D) be included in the erection drawings. (ii) hoisting cables shall not be released until the seat at each end of the steel joist is field-bolted and the joist is stabilized. (3) Where steel joists at or near columns span 60 feet (18.3 m) or less, the joist shall be designed with sufficient strength to allow one employee to release the hoisting cable without the need for erection bridging. (4) Where steel joists at or near columns span more than 60 feet (18.3 m), the joists shall be set in tandem with all bridging installed unless an alternative method of erection, which provides equivalent stability to the steel joist, is designed by a qualified person and is included in the site-specific erection plan. (5) A steel joist or steel joist girder shall not be placed on any support structure unless such structure is stabilized. (6) When steel joist(s) are landed on a structure, they shall be secured to prevent unintentional displacement prior to installation. (7) No modification that affects the strength of a steel joist or steel joist girder shall be made without the approval of the project structural engineer of record. (8) Field-bolted joists. (ii) These connections shall be field-bolted unless constructibility does not allow. (9) Steel joists and steel joist girders shall not be used as anchorage points for a fall arrest system unless written approval to do so is obtained from a qualified person. (10) A bridging terminus point shall be established before bridging is installed. (See appendix C to this subpart.) (b) Attachment of steel joists and steel joist girders. 1/8 1/2 (2) Each end of “LH” and “DLH” series steel joists and steel joist girders shall be attached to the support structure with a minimum of two 1/4 3/4 (3) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4) of this section, each steel joist shall be attached to the support structure, at least at one end on both sides of the seat, immediately upon placement in the final erection position and before additional joists are placed. (4) Panels that have been pre-assembled from steel joists with bridging shall be attached to the structure at each corner before the hoisting cables are released. (c) Erection of steel joists. (2) For joists over 60 feet, both ends of the joist shall be attached as specified in paragraph (b) of this section and the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section met before the hoisting cables are released. (3) On steel joists that do not require erection bridging under Tables A and B, only one employee shall be allowed on the joist until all bridging is installed and anchored. Table A—Erection Bridging for Short Span Joists Joist Span 8L1 NM 10K1 NM 12K1 23-0 12K3 NM 12K5 NM 14K1 27-0 14K3 NM 14K4 NM 14K6 NM 16K2 29-0 16K3 30-0 16K4 32-0 16K5 32-0 16K6 NM 16K7 NM 16K9 NM 18K3 31-0 18K4 32-0 18K5 33-0 18K6 35-0 18K7 NM 18K9 NM 18K10 NM 20K3 32-0 20K4 34-0 20K5 34-0 20K6 36-0 20K7 39-0 20K9 39-0 20K10 NM 22K4 34-0 22K5 35-0 22K6 36-0 22K7 40-0 22K9 40-0 22K10 40-0 22K11 40-0 24K4 36-0 24K5 38-0 24K6 39-0 24K7 43-0 24K8 43-0 24K9 44-0 24K10 NM 24K12 NM 26K5 38-0 26K6 39-0 26K7 43-0 26K8 44-0 26K9 45-0 26K10 49-0 26K12 NM 28K6 40-0 28K7 43-0 28K8 44-0 28K9 45-0 28K10 49-0 28K12 53-0 30K7 44-0 30K8 45-0 30K9 45-0 30K10 50-0 30K11 52-0 30K12 54-0 10KCS1 NM 10KCS2 NM 10KCS3 NM 12KCS1 NM 12KCS2 NM 12KCS3 NM 14KCS1 NM 14KCS2 NM 14KCS3 NM 16KCS2 NM 16KCS3 NM 16KCS4 NM 16KCS5 NM 18KCS2 35-0 18KCS3 NM 18KCS4 NM 18KCS5 NM 20KCS2 36-0 20KCS3 39-0 20KCS4 NM 20KCS5 NM 22KCS2 36-0 22KCS3 40-0 22KCS4 NM 22KCS5 NM 24KCS2 39-0 24KCS3 44-0 24KCS4 NM 24KCS5 NM 26KCS2 39-0 26KCS3 44-0 26KCS4 NM 26KCS5 NM 28KCS2 40-0 28KCS3 45-0 28KCS4 53-0 28KCS5 53-0 30KC53 45-0 30KCS4 54-0 30KCS5 54-0 NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory. Table B—Erection Bridging for Long Span Joists Joist Span 18LH02 33-0. 18LH03 NM. 18LH04 NM. 18LH05 NM. 18LH06 NM. 18LH07 NM. 18LH08 NM. 18LH09 NM. 20LH02 33-0. 20LH03 38-0. 20LH04 NM. 20LH05 NM. 20LH06 NM. 20LH07 NM. 20LH08 NM. 20LH09 NM. 20LH10 NM. 24LH03 35-0. 24LH04 39-0. 24LH05 40-0. 24LH06 45-0. 24LH07 NM. 24LH08 NM. 24LH09 NM. 24LH10 NM. 24LH11 NM. 28LH05 42-0. 28LH06 42-0. 28LH07 NM. 28LH08 NM. 28LH09 NM. 28LH10 NM. 28LH11 NM. 28LH12 NM. 28LH13 NM. 32LH06 47-0 through 60-0. 32LH07 47-0 through 60-0. 32LH08 55-0 through 60-0. 32LH09 NM through 60-0. 32LH10 NM through 60-0. 32LH11 NM through 60-0. 32LH12 NM through 60-0. 32LH13 NM through 60-0. 32LH14 NM through 60-0. 32LH15 NM through 60-0. 36LH07 47-0 through 60-0. 36LH08 47-0 through 60-0. 36LH09 57-0 through 60-0. 36LH10 NM through 60-0. 36LH11 NM through 60-0. 36LH12 NM through 60-0. 36LH13 NM through 60-0. 36LH14 NM through 60-0. 36LH15 NM through 60-0. NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory. (4) Employees shall not be allowed on steel joists where the span of the steel joist is equal to or greater than the span shown in Tables A and B except in accordance with § 1926.757(d). (5) When permanent bridging terminus points cannot be used during erection, additional temporary bridging terminus points are required to provide stability. (See appendix C of this subpart.) (d) Erection bridging. (i) A row of bolted diagonal erection bridging shall be installed near the midspan of the steel joist; (ii) Hoisting cables shall not be released until this bolted diagonal erection bridging is installed and anchored; and (iii) No more than one employee shall be allowed on these spans until all other bridging is installed and anchored. (2) Where the span of the steel joist is over 60 feet (18.3 m) through 100 feet (30.5 m), the following shall apply: (i) All rows of bridging shall be bolted diagonal bridging; (ii) Two rows of bolted diagonal erection bridging shall be installed near the third points of the steel joist; (iii) Hoisting cables shall not be released until this bolted diagonal erection bridging is installed and anchored; and (iv) No more than two employees shall be allowed on these spans until all other bridging is installed and anchored. (3) Where the span of the steel joist is over 100 feet (30.5 m) through 144 feet (43.9 m), the following shall apply: (i) All rows of bridging shall be bolted diagonal bridging; (ii) Hoisting cables shall not be released until all bridging is installed and anchored; and (iii) No more than two employees shall be allowed on these spans until all bridging is installed and anchored. (4) For steel members spanning over 144 feet (43.9 m), the erection methods used shall be in accordance with § 1926.756. (5) Where any steel joist specified in paragraphs (c)(2) and (d)(1), (d)(2), and (d)(3) of this section is a bottom chord bearing joist, a row of bolted diagonal bridging shall be provided near the support(s). This bridging shall be installed and anchored before the hoisting cable(s) is released. (6) When bolted diagonal erection bridging is required by this section, the following shall apply: (i) The bridging shall be indicated on the erection drawing; (ii) The erection drawing shall be the exclusive indicator of the proper placement of this bridging; (iii) Shop-installed bridging clips, or functional equivalents, shall be used where the bridging bolts to the steel joists; (iv) When two pieces of bridging are attached to the steel joist by a common bolt, the nut that secures the first piece of bridging shall not be removed from the bolt for the attachment of the second; and (v) Bridging attachments shall not protrude above the top chord of the steel joist. (e) Landing and placing loads. (2) Except for paragraph (e)(4) of this section, no construction loads are allowed on the steel joists until all bridging is installed and anchored and all joist-bearing ends are attached. (3) The weight of a bundle of joist bridging shall not exceed a total of 1,000 pounds (454 kg). A bundle of joist bridging shall be placed on a minimum of three steel joists that are secured at one end. The edge of the bridging bundle shall be positioned within 1 foot (.30 m) of the secured end. (4) No bundle of decking may be placed on steel joists until all bridging has been installed and anchored and all joist bearing ends attached, unless all of the following conditions are met: (i) The employer has first determined from a qualified person and documented in a site-specific erection plan that the structure or portion of the structure is capable of supporting the load; (ii) The bundle of decking is placed on a minimum of three steel joists; (iii) The joists supporting the bundle of decking are attached at both ends; (iv) At least one row of bridging is installed and anchored; (v) The total weight of the bundle of decking does not exceed 4,000 pounds (1816 kg); and (vi) Placement of the bundle of decking shall be in accordance with paragraph (e)(5) of this section. (5) The edge of the construction load shall be placed within 1 foot (.30 m) of the bearing surface of the joist end. [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 85 FR 8745, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1926.758 Systems-engineered metal buildings. (a) All of the requirements of this subpart apply to the erection of systems-engineered metal buildings except §§ 1926.755 (column anchorage) and 1926.757 (open web steel joists). (b) Each structural column shall be anchored by a minimum of four anchor rods (anchor bolts). (c) Rigid frames shall have 50 percent of their bolts or the number of bolts specified by the manufacturer (whichever is greater) installed and tightened on both sides of the web adjacent to each flange before the hoisting equipment is released. (d) Construction loads shall not be placed on any structural steel framework unless such framework is safely bolted, welded or otherwise adequately secured. (e) In girt and eave strut-to-frame connections, when girts or eave struts share common connection holes, at least one bolt with its wrench-tight nut shall remain connected to the first member unless a manufacturer-supplied, field-attached seat or similar connection device is present to secure the first member so that the girt or eave strut is always secured against displacement. (f) Both ends of all steel joists or cold-formed joists shall be fully bolted and/or welded to the support structure before: (1) Releasing the hoisting cables; (2) Allowing an employee on the joists; or (3) Allowing any construction loads on the joists. (g) Purlins and girts shall not be used as an anchorage point for a fall arrest system unless written approval is obtained from a qualified person. (h) Purlins may only be used as a walking/working surface when installing safety systems, after all permanent bridging has been installed and fall protection is provided. (i) Construction loads may be placed only within a zone that is within 8 feet (2.5 m) of the center-line of the primary support member. § 1926.759 Falling object protection. (a) Securing loose items aloft. (b) Protection from falling objects other than materials being hoisted. § 1926.760 Fall protection. (a) General requirements. (2) Perimeter safety cables. (3) Connectors and employees working in controlled decking zones shall be protected from fall hazards as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, respectively. (b) Connectors. (1) Be protected in accordance with paragraph (a)(1) of this section from fall hazards of more than two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m) above a lower level, whichever is less; (2) Have completed connector training in accordance with § 1926.761; and (3) Be provided, at heights over 15 and up to 30 feet above a lower level, with a personal fall arrest system, positioning device system or fall restraint system and wear the equipment necessary to be able to be tied off; or be provided with other means of protection from fall hazards in accordance with paragraph (a)(1) of this section. (c) Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ). (1) Each employee working at the leading edge in a CDZ shall be protected from fall hazards of more than two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is less. (2) Access to a CDZ shall be limited to only those employees engaged in leading edge work. (3) The boundaries of a CDZ shall be designated and clearly marked. The CDZ shall not be more than 90 feet (27.4 m) wide and 90 (27.4 m) feet deep from any leading edge. The CDZ shall be marked by the use of control lines or the equivalent. Examples of acceptable procedures for demarcating CDZ's can be found in appendix D to this subpart. (4) Each employee working in a CDZ shall have completed CDZ training in accordance with § 1926.761. (5) Unsecured decking in a CDZ shall not exceed 3,000 square feet (914.4 m 2 (6) Safety deck attachments shall be performed in the CDZ from the leading edge back to the control line and shall have at least two attachments for each metal decking panel. (7) Final deck attachments and installation of shear connectors shall not be performed in the CDZ. (d) Criteria for fall protection equipment. (2) Fall arrest system components shall be used in fall restraint systems and shall conform to the criteria in § 1926.502 (see appendix G). Either body belts or body harnesses shall be used in fall restraint systems. (3) Perimeter safety cables shall meet the criteria for guardrail systems in § 1926.502 (see appendix G). (e) Custody of fall protection. (1) Has directed the steel erector to leave the fall protection in place; and (2) Has inspected and accepted control and responsibility of the fall protection prior to authorizing persons other than steel erectors to work in the area. § 1926.761 Training. The following provisions supplement the requirements of § 1926.21 regarding the hazards addressed in this subpart. (a) Training personnel. (b) Fall hazard training. (1) The recognition and identification of fall hazards in the work area; (2) The use and operation of guardrail systems (including perimeter safety cable systems), personal fall arrest systems, positioning device systems, fall restraint systems, safety net systems, and other protection to be used; (3) The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting the fall protection systems to be used; (4) The procedures to be followed to prevent falls to lower levels and through or into holes and openings in walking/working surfaces and walls; and (5) The fall protection requirements of this subpart. (c) Special training programs. (1) Multiple lift rigging procedure. (i) The nature of the hazards associated with multiple lifts; and (ii) The proper procedures and equipment to perform multiple lifts required by § 1926.753(e). (2) Connector procedures. (i) The nature of the hazards associated with connecting; and (ii) The establishment, access, proper connecting techniques and work practices required by § 1926.756(c) and § 1926.760(b). (3) Controlled Decking Zone Procedures. (i) The nature of the hazards associated with work within a controlled decking zone; and (ii) The establishment, access, proper installation techniques and work practices required by § 1926.760(c) and § 1926.754(e). [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 73 FR 75589, Dec. 12, 2008; 85 FR 8745, Feb. 18, 2020] Appendix A to Subpart R of Part 1926—Guidelines for Establishing the Components of a Site-specific Erection Plan: Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With § 1926.752( e (a) General. (b) Development of a site-specific erection plan. (c) Components of a site-specific erection plan. (1) The sequence of erection activity, developed in coordination with the controlling contractor, that includes the following: (i) Material deliveries: (ii) Material staging and storage; and (iii) Coordination with other trades and construction activities. (2) A description of the crane and derrick selection and placement procedures, including the following: (i) Site preparation; (ii) Path for overhead loads; and (iii) Critical lifts, including rigging supplies and equipment. (3) A description of steel erection activities and procedures, including the following: (i) Stability considerations requiring temporary bracing and guying; (ii) Erection bridging terminus point; (iii) Anchor rod (anchor bolt) notifications regarding repair, replacement and modifications; (iv) Columns and beams (including joists and purlins); (v) Connections; (vi) Decking; and (vii) Ornamental and miscellaneous iron. (4) A description of the fall protection procedures that will be used to comply with § 1926.760. (5) A description of the procedures that will be used to comply with § 1926.759. (6) A description of the special procedures required for hazardous non-routine tasks. (7) A certification for each employee who has received training for performing steel erection operations as required by § 1926.761. (8) A list of the qualified and competent persons. (9) A description of the procedures that will be utilized in the event of rescue or emergency response. (d) Other plan information. (1) Includes the identification of the site and project; and (2) Is signed and dated by the qualified person(s) responsible for its preparation and modification. Appendix B to Subpart R of Part 1926 [Reserved] Appendix C to Subpart R of Part 1926—Illustrations of Bridging Terminus Points: Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With §§ 1926.757( a c Appendix D to Subpart R of Part 1926—Illustration of the Use of Control Lines To Demarcate Controlled Decking Zones (CDZs): Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With § 1926.760( c (1) When used to control access to areas where leading edge and initial securement of metal deck and other operations connected with leading edge work are taking place, the controlled decking zone (CDZ) is defined by a control line or by any other means that restricts access. (i) A control line for a CDZ is erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 90 feet (27.4 m) from the leading edge. (ii) Control lines extend along the entire length of the unprotected or leading edge and are approximately parallel to the unprotected or leading edge. (iii) Control lines are connected on each side to a guardrail system, wall, stanchion or other suitable anchorage. (2) Control lines consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and supporting stanchions as follows: (i) Each line is rigged and supported in such a way that its lowest point (including sag) is not less than 39 inches (1.0 m) from the walking/working surface and its highest point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from the walking/working surface. (ii) Each line has a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds (90.8 kg). Appendix E to Subpart R of Part 1926—Training: Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With § 1926.761 The training requirements of § 1926.761 will be deemed to have been met if employees have completed a training course on steel erection, including instruction in the provisions of this standard, that has been approved by the U.S. Department of Labor Bureau of Apprenticeship. Appendix F to Subpart R of Part 1926—Perimeter Columns: Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With § 1926.756( e In multi-story structures, when holes in the column web are used for perimeter safety cables, the column splice must be placed sufficiently high so as not to interfere with any attachments to the column necessary for the column splice. Column splices are recommended to be placed at every other or fourth levels as design allows. Column splices at third levels are detrimental to the erection process and should be avoided if possible. Appendix G to Subpart R of Part 1926—§ 1926.502 ( b e (b) “Guardrail systems.” Guardrail systems and their use shall comply with the following provisions: (1) Top edge height of top rails, or equivalent guardrail system members, shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) above the walking/working level. When conditions warrant, the height of the top edge may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the guardrail system meets all other criteria of this paragraph (§ 1926.502(b)). Note: When employees are using stilts, the top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent member, shall be increased an amount equal to the height of the stilts. (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or equivalent intermediate structural members shall be installed between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/working surface when there is no wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches (53 cm) high. (i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/working level. (ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall extend from the top rail to the walking/working level and along the entire opening between top rail supports. (iii) Intermediate members (such as balusters), when used between posts, shall be not more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart. (iv) Other structural members (such as additional midrails and architectural panels) shall be installed such that there are no openings in the guardrail system that are more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide. (3) Guardrail systems shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top edge, in any outward or downward direction, at any point along the top edge. (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test load specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section (§ 1926.502) is applied in a downward direction, the top edge of the guardrail shall not deflect to a height less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/working level. Guardrail system components selected and constructed in accordance with the appendix B to subpart M of this part will be deemed to meet this requirement. (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and equivalent structural members shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 150 pounds (666 N) applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the midrail or other member. (6) Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced as to prevent injury to an employee from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing. (7) The ends of all top rails and midrails shall not overhang the terminal posts, except where such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard. (8) Steel banding and plastic banding shall not be used as top rails or midrails. (9) Top rails and midrails shall be at least one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal diameter or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations. If wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be flagged at not more than 6-foot intervals with high-visibility material. (10) When guardrail systems are used at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or removable guardrail section shall be placed across the access opening between guardrail sections when hoisting operations are not taking place. (11) When guardrail systems are used at holes, they shall be erected on all unprotected sides or edges of the hole. (12) When guardrail systems are used around holes used for the passage of materials, the hole shall have not more than two sides provided with removable guardrail sections to allow the passage of materials. When the hole is not in use, it shall be closed over with a cover, or a guardrail system shall be provided along all unprotected sides or edges. (13) When guardrail systems are used around holes which are used as points of access (such as ladderways), they shall be provided with a gate, or be so offset that a person cannot walk directly into the hole. (14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and runways shall be erected along each unprotected side or edge. (15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being used for top rails or midrails shall be inspected as frequently as necessary to ensure that it continues to meet the strength requirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section (§ 1926.502). (c) Safety net systems. (1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as practicable under the walking/working surface on which employees are working, but in no case more than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When nets are used on bridges, the potential fall area from the walking/working surface to the net shall be unobstructed. (2) Safety nets shall extend outward from the outermost projection of the work surface as follows: Vertical distance from working level to horizontal plane of net Minimum required horizontal distance of outer edge of net from the edge of the working surface Up to 5 feet 8 feet More than 5 feet up to 10 feet 10 feet More than 10 feet 13 feet (3) Safety nets shall be installed with sufficient clearance under them to prevent contact with the surface or structures below when subjected to an impact force equal to the drop test specified in paragraph (4) of this section [§ 1926.502]. (4) Safety nets and their installations shall be capable of absorbing an impact force equal to that produced by the drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section [§ 1926.502]. (i) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section (§ 1926.502), safety nets and safety net installations shall be drop-tested at the jobsite after initial installation and before being used as a fall protection system, whenever relocated, after major repair, and at 6-month intervals if left in one place. The drop-test shall consist of a 400 pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 + or −2 inches (76 + or −5 cm) in diameter dropped into the net from the highest walking/working surface at which employees are exposed to fall hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level. (ii) When the employer can demonstrate that it is unreasonable to perform the drop-test required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section (§ 1926.502), the employer (or a designated competent person) shall certify that the net and net installation is in compliance with the provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and (c)(4)(i) of this section (§ 1926.502) by preparing a certification record prior to the net being used as a fall protection system. The certification record must include an identification of the net and net installation for which the certification record is being prepared; the date that it was determined that the identified net and net installation were in compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this section (§ 1926.502) and the signature of the person making the determination and certification. The most recent certification record for each net and net installation shall be available at the jobsite for inspection. (5) Defective nets shall not be used. Safety nets shall be inspected at least once a week for wear, damage, and other deterioration. Defective components shall be removed from service. Safety nets shall also be inspected after any occurrence which could affect the integrity of the safety net system. (6) Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and tools which have fallen into the safety net shall be removed as soon as possible from the net and at least before the next work shift. (7) The maximum size of each safety net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 square inches (230 cm) nor be longer than 6 inches (15 cm) on any side, and the opening, measured center-to-center of mesh ropes or webbing, shall not be longer than 6 inches (15 cm). All mesh crossings shall be secured to prevent enlargement of the mesh opening. (8) Each safety net (or section of it) shall have a border rope for webbing with a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). (9) Connections between safety net panels shall be as strong as integral net components and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart. (d) “Personal fall arrest systems.” Personal fall arrest systems and their use shall comply with the provisions set forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, body belts are not acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest system. Note: The use of a body belt in a positioning device system is acceptable and is regulated under paragraph (e) of this section (§ 1926.502). (1) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or made of equivalent materials. (2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of the system. (3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). (4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent deformation. (5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to which they are connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member, or shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of the snaphook keeper by the connected member. Effective January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks shall be used. (6) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed for the following connections, snaphooks shall not be engaged: (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; (ii) to each other; (iii) to a dee-ring to which another snaphook or other connector is attached; (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or (v) to any object which is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such that unintentional disengagement could occur by the connected object being able to depress the snaphook keeper and release itself. (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work platforms with horizontal lifelines which may become vertical lifelines, the devices used to connect to a horizontal lifeline shall be capable of locking in both directions on the lifeline. (8) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, and used, under the supervision of a qualified person, as part of a complete personal fall arrest system, which maintains a safety factor of at least two. (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). (10)(i) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(10)(ii) of this section [§ 1926.502], when vertical lifelines are used, each employee shall be attached to a separate lifeline. (ii) During the construction of elevator shafts, two employees may be attached to the same lifeline in the hoistway, provided both employees are working atop a false car that is equipped with guardrails; the strength of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 pounds per employee attached] (44.4 kN); and all other criteria specified in this paragraph for lifelines have been met. (11) Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or abraded. (12) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN) applied to the device with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position. (13) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and tearing and deforming lanyards shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position. (14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lanyards, lifelines, and strength components of body belts and body harnesses shall be made from synthetic fibers. (15) Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per employee attached, or shall be designed, installed, and used as follows: (i) as part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of at least two; and (ii) under the supervision of a qualified person. (16) Personal fall arrest systems, when stopping a fall, shall: (i) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used with a body belt; (ii) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used with a body harness; (iii) be rigged such that an employee can neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m), nor contact any lower level; (iv) bring an employee to a complete stop and limit maximum deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and, (v) have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact energy of an employee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is less. Note: If the personal fall arrest system meets the criteria and protocols contained in appendix C to subpart M, and if the system is being used by an employee having a combined person and tool weight of less than 310 pounds (140 kg), the system will be considered to be in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (d)(16) of this section [§ 1926.502]. If the system is used by an employee having a combined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140 kg) or more, then the employer must appropriately modify the criteria and protocols of the appendix to provide proper protection for such heavier weights, or the system will not be deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this section (§ 1926.502). (17) The attachment point of the body belt shall be located in the center of the wearer's back. The attachment point of the body harness shall be located in the center of the wearer's back near shoulder level, or above the wearer's head. (18) Body belts, harnesses, and components shall be used only for employee protection (as part of a personal fall arrest system or positioning device system) and not to hoist materials. (19) Personal fall arrest systems and components subjected to impact loading shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee protection until inspected and determined by a competent person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse. (20) The employer shall provide for prompt rescue of employees in the event of a fall or shall assure that employees are able to rescue themselves. (21) Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected prior to each use for wear, damage and other deterioration, and defective components shall be removed from service. (22) Body belts shall be at least one and five-eighths (1 5/8 (23) Personal fall arrest systems shall not be attached to guardrail systems, nor shall they be attached to hoists except as specified in other subparts of this Part. (24) When a personal fall arrest system is used at hoist areas, it shall be rigged to allow the movement of the employee only as far as the edge of the walking/working surface. (e) Positioning device systems. (1) Positioning devices shall be rigged such that an employee cannot free fall more than 2 feet (.9 m). (2) Positioning devices shall be secured to an anchorage capable of supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee's fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater. (3) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or made of equivalent materials. (4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of this system. (5) Connecting assemblies shall have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) (6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent deformation. (7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to which they are connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member, or shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of the snaphook keeper by the connected member. As of January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks shall be used. (8) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed for the following connections, snaphooks shall not be engaged: (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; (ii) to each other; (iii) to a dee-ring to which another snaphook or other connector is attached; (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or to depress the snaphook keeper and release itself. (v) to any object which is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such that unintentional disengagement could occur by the connected object being able to depress the snaphook keeper and release itself. (9) Positioning device systems shall be inspected prior to each use for wear, damage, and other deterioration, and defective components shall be removed from service. (10) Body belts, harnesses, and components shall be used only for employee protection (as part of a personal fall arrest system or positioning device system) and not to hoist materials. Appendix H to Subpart R of Part 1926—Double Connections: Illustration of a Clipped End Connection and a Staggered Connection: Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With § 1926.756( c Clipped end connections are connection material on the end of a structural member which has a notch at the bottom and/or top to allow the bolt(s) of the first member placed on the opposite side of the central member to remain in place. The notch(es) fits around the nut or bolt head of the opposing member to allow the second member to be bolted up without removing the bolt(s) holding the first member. Staggered connections are connection material on a structural member in which all of the bolt holes in the common member web are not shared by the two incoming members in the final connection. The extra hole in the column web allows the erector to maintain at least a one bolt connection at all times while making the double connection. Subpart S—Underground Construction, Caissons, Cofferdams and Compressed Air Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; and Secretary of Labor's Orders 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. § 1926.800 Underground construction. (a) Scope and application. (2) This section does not apply to the following: (i) Excavation and trenching operations covered by subpart P of this part, such as foundation operations for above-ground structures that are not physically connected to underground construction operations, and surface excavation; nor (ii) Underground electrical transmission and distribution lines, as addressed in subpart V of this part. (b) Access and egress. (2) The employer shall provide access and egress in such a manner that employees are protected from being struck by excavators, haulage machines, trains and other mobile equipment. (3) The employer shall control access to all openings to prevent unauthorized entry underground. Unused chutes, manways, or other openings shall be tightly covered, bulkheaded, or fenced off, and shall be posted with warning signs indicating “Keep Out” or similar language. Completed or unused sections of the underground facility shall be barricaded. (c) Check-in/check-out. (d) Safety instruction. (1) Air monitoring; (2) Ventilation; (3) Illumination; (4) Communications; (5) Flood control; (6) Mechanical equipment; (7) Personal protective equipment; (8) Explosives; (9) Fire prevention and protection; and (10) Emergency procedures, including evacuation plans and check-in/check-out systems. (e) Notification. (2) The employer shall establish and maintain direct communications for coordination of activities with other employers whose operations at the jobsite affect or may affect the safety of employees underground. (f) Communications. (2) Two effective means of communication, at least one of which shall be voice communication, shall be provided in all shafts which are being developed or used either for personnel access or for hoisting. Additional requirements for hoist operator communication are contained in paragraph (t)(3)(xiv) of this section. (3) Powered communication systems shall operate on an independent power supply, and shall be installed so that the use of or disruption of any one phone or signal location will not disrupt the operation of the system from any other location. (4) Communication systems shall be tested upon initial entry of each shift to the underground, and as often as necessary at later times, to ensure that they are in working order. (5) Any employee working alone underground in a hazardous location, who is both out of the range of natural unassisted voice communication and not under observation by other persons, shall be provided with an effective means of obtaining assistance in an emergency. (g) Emergency provisions Hoisting capability. (2) Self-rescuers. (3) Designated person. (4) Emergency lighting. (5) Rescue teams. (ii) On jobsites where less than 25 employees work underground at one time, the employer shall provide (or make arrangements in advance with locally available rescue services to provide) at least one 5-person rescue team to be either on the jobsite or within one-half hour travel time from the entry point. (iii) Rescue team members shall be qualified in rescue procedures, the use and limitations of breathing apparatus, and the use of firefighting equipment. Qualifications shall be reviewed not less than annually. (iv) On jobsites where flammable or noxious gases are encountered or anticipated in hazardous quantities, rescue team members shall practice donning and using self-contained breathing apparatus monthly. (v) The employer shall ensure that rescue teams are familiar with conditions at the jobsite. (h) Hazardous classifications Potentially gassy operations. (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane or other flammable gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm) ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face, floor or walls in any underground work area for more than a 24-hour period; or (ii) The history of the geographical area or geological formation indicates that 10 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane or other flammable gases is likely to be encountered in such underground operations. (2) Gassy operations. (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane or other flammable gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm) ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face, floor or walls in any underground work area for three consecutive days; or (ii) There has been an ignition of methane or of other flammable gases emanating from the strata that indicates the presence of such gases; or (iii) The underground construction operation is both connected to an underground work area which is currently classified as gassy and is also subject to a continuous course of air containing the flammable gas concentration. (3) Declassification to potentially gassy operations. (i) Gassy operations-additional requirements. (2) Mobile diesel-powered equipment used in gassy operations shall be either approved in accordance with the requirements of 30 CFR part 36 (formerly Schedule 31) by MSHA, or shall be demonstrated by the employer to be fully equivalent to such MSHA-approved equipment, and shall be operated in accordance with that part. (3) Each entrance to a gassy operation shall be prominently posted with signs notifying all entrants of the gassy classification. (4) Smoking shall be prohibited in all gassy operations and the employer shall be responsible for collecting all personal sources of ignition, such as matches and lighters, from all persons entering a gassy operation. (5) A fire watch as described in § 1926.352(e) shall be maintained when hot work is performed. (6) Once an operation has met the criteria in paragraph (h)(2) warranting classification as gassy, all operations in the affected area, except the following, shall be discontinued until the operation either is in compliance with all of the gassy operation requirements or has been declassified in accordance with paragraph (h)(3) of this section: (i) Operations related to the control of the gas concentration; (ii) Installation of new equipment, or conversion of existing equipment, to comply with this paragraph (i); and (iii) Installation of above-ground controls for reversing the air flow. (j) Air quality and monitoring General. (i)(A) The employer shall assign a competent person who shall perform all air monitoring required by this section. (B) Where this paragraph requires monitoring of airborne contaminants “as often as necessary,” the competent person shall make a reasonable determination as to which substances to monitor and how frequently to monitor, considering at least the following factors: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (ii)(A) The atmosphere in all underground work areas shall be tested as often as necessary to assure that the atmosphere at normal atmospheric pressure contains at least 19.5 percent oxygen and no more than 22 percent oxygen. (B) Tests for oxygen content shall be made before tests for air contaminants. (iii)(A) The atmosphere in all underground work areas shall be tested quantitatively for carbon monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and other toxic gases, dusts, vapors, mists, and fumes as often as necessary to ensure that the permissible exposure limits prescribed in § 1926.55 are not exceeded. (B) The atmosphere in all underground work areas shall be tested quantitatively for methane and other flammable gases as often as necessary to determine: ( 1 ( 2 (C) If diesel-engine or gasoline-engine driven ventilating fans or compressors are used, an initial test shall be made of the inlet air of the fan or compressor, with the engines operating, to ensure that the air supply is not contaminated by engine exhaust. (D) Testing shall be performed as often as necessary to ensure that the ventilation requirements of paragraph (k) of this section are met. (iv) When rapid excavation machines are used, a continuous flammable gas monitor shall be operated at the face with the sensor(s) placed as high and close to the front of the machine's cutter head as practicable. (v)(A) Whenever air monitoring indicates the presence of 5 ppm or more of hydrogen sulfide, a test shall be conducted in the affected underground work area(s), at least at the beginning and midpoint of each shift, until the concentration of hydrogen sulfide has been less than 5 ppm for 3 consecutive days. (B) Whenever hydrogen sulfide is detected in an amount exceeding 10 ppm, a continuous sampling and indicating hydrogen sulfide monitor shall be used to monitor the affected work area. (C) Employees shall be informed when a concentration of 10 ppm hydrogen sulfide is exceeded. (D) The continuous sampling and indicating hydrogen sulfide monitor shall be designed, installed, and maintained to provide a visual and aural alarm when the hydrogen sulfide concentration reaches 20 ppm to signal that additional measures, such as respirator use, increased ventilation, or evacuation, might be necessary to maintain hydrogen sulfide exposure below the permissible exposure limit. (vi) When the competent person determines, on the basis of air monitoring results or other information, that air contaminants may be present in sufficient quantity to be dangerous to life, the employer shall: (A) Prominently post a notice at all entrances to the underground jobsite to inform all entrants of the hazardous condition; and (B) Ensure that the necessary precautions are taken. (vii) Whenever five percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane or other flammable gases is detected in any underground work area(s) or in the air return, steps shall be taken to increase ventilation air volume or otherwise control the gas concentration, unless the employer is operating in accordance with the potentially gassy or gassy operation requirements. Such additional ventilation controls may be discontinued when gas concentrations are reduced below five percent of the lower explosive limit, but shall be reinstituted whenever the five percent level is exceeded. (viii) Whenever 10 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane or other flammable gases is detected in the vicinity of welding, cutting, or other hot work, such work shall be suspended until the concentration of such flammable gas is reduced to less than 10 percent of the lower explosive limit. (ix) Whenever 20 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane or other flammable gases is detected in any underground work area(s) or in the air return: (A) All employees, except those necessary to eliminate the hazard, shall be immediately withdrawn to a safe location above ground; and (B) Electrical power, except for acceptable pumping and ventilation equipment, shall be cut off to the area endangered by the flammable gas until the concentration of such gas is reduced to less than 20 percent of the lower explosive limit. (2) Additional monitoring for potentially gassy and gassy operations. (i) A test for oxygen content shall be conducted in the affected underground work areas and work areas immediately adjacent to such areas at least at the beginning and midpoint of each shift. (ii) When using rapid excavation machines, continuous automatic flammable gas monitoring equipment shall be used to monitor the air at the heading, on the rib, and in the return air duct. The continuous monitor shall signal the heading, and shut down electric power in the affected underground work area, except for acceptable pumping and ventilation equipment, when 20 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane or other flammable gases is encountered. (iii) A manual flammable gas monitor shall be used as needed, but at least at the beginning and midpoint of each shift, to ensure that the limits prescribed in paragraphs (h) and (j) are not exceeded. In addition, a manual electrical shut down control shall be provided near the heading. (iv) Local gas tests shall be made prior to and continuously during any welding, cutting, or other hot work. (v) In underground operations driven by drill-and-blast methods, the air in the affected area shall be tested for flammable gas prior to re-entry after blasting, and continuously when employees are working underground. (3) Recordkeeping. (k) Ventilation. (ii) Mechanical ventilation shall be provided in all underground work areas except when the employer can demonstrate that natural ventilation provides the necessary air quality through sufficient air volume and air flow. (2) A minimum of 200 cubic feet (5.7 m 3 (3) The linear velocity of air flow in the tunnel bore, in shafts, and in all other underground work areas shall be at least 30 feet (9.15 m) per minute where blasting or rock drilling is conducted, or where other conditions likely to produce dust, fumes, mists, vapors, or gases in harmful or explosive quantities are present. (4) The direction of mechanical air flow shall be reversible. (5) Following blasting, ventilation systems shall exhaust smoke and fumes to the outside atmosphere before work is resumed in affected areas. (6) Ventilation doors shall be designed and installed so that they remain closed when in use, regardless of the direction of the air flow. (7) When ventilation has been reduced to the extent that hazardous levels of methane or flammable gas may have accumulated, a competent person shall test all affected areas after ventilation has been restored and shall determine whether the atmosphere is within flammable limits before any power, other than for acceptable equipment, is restored or work is resumed. (8) Whenever the ventilation system has been shut down with all employees out of the underground area, only competent persons authorized to test for air contaminants shall be allowed underground until the ventilation has been restored and all affected areas have been tested for air contaminants and declared safe. (9) When drilling rock or concrete, appropriate dust control measures shall be taken to maintain dust levels within limits set in § 1926.55. Such measures may include, but are not limited to, wet drilling, the use of vacuum collectors, and water mix spray systems. (10)(i) Internal combustion engines, except diesel-powered engines on mobile equipment, are prohibited underground. (ii) Mobile diesel-powered equipment used underground in atmospheres other than gassy operations: (A) Shall comply with MSHA provisions in 30 CFR 57.5067; or (B) If purchased on or before July 15, 2019, may alternatively comply with MSHA provisions under 30 CFR part 32 (revised as of July 1, 1996) (formerly Schedule 24), or be demonstrated by the employer to be fully equivalent to such MSHA-approved equipment, and be operated in accordance with that part. (iii) For purposes of this paragraph (k)(10), when an applicable MSHA provision uses the term “mine,” use the phrase “underground construction site.” (Each brake horsepower of a diesel engine requires at least 100 cubic feet (2.832 m 3 (11) Potentially gassy or gassy operations shall have ventilation systems installed which shall: (i) Be constructed of fire-resistant materials; and (ii) Have acceptable electrical systems, including fan motors. (12) Gassy operations shall be provided with controls located above ground for reversing the air flow of ventilation systems. (13) In potentially gassy or gassy operations, wherever mine-type ventilation systems using an offset main fan installed on the surface are used, they shall be equipped with explosion-doors or a weak-wall having an area at least equivalent to the cross-sectional area of the airway. (l) Illumination. Table D-3 (2) Only acceptable portable lighting equipment shall be used within 50 feet (15.24 m) of any underground heading during explosives handling. (m) Fire prevention and control. (1) Open flames and fires are prohibited in all underground construction operations except as permitted for welding, cutting and other hot work operations in paragraph (n) of this section. (2)(i) Smoking may be allowed only in areas free of fire and explosion hazards. (ii) Readily visible signs prohibiting smoking and open flames shall be posted in areas having fire or explosion hazards. (3) The employer may store underground no more than a 24-hour supply of diesel fuel for the underground equipment used at the worksite. (4) The piping of diesel fuel from the surface to an underground location is permitted only if: (i) Diesel fuel is contained at the surface in a tank whose maximum capacity is no more than the amount of fuel required to supply for a 24-hour period the equipment serviced by the underground fueling station; and (ii) The surface tank is connected to the underground fueling station by an acceptable pipe or hose system that is controlled at the surface by a valve, and at the shaft bottom by a hose nozzle; and (iii) The pipe is empty at all times except when transferring diesel fuel from the surface tank to a piece of equipment in use underground; and (iv) Hoisting operations in the shaft are suspended during refueling operations if the supply piping in the shaft is not protected from damage. (5)(i) Gasoline shall not be carried, stored, or used underground. (ii) Acetylene, liquefied petroleum gas, and Methylacetylene Propadiene Stabilized gas may be used underground only for welding, cutting and other hot work, and only in accordance with subpart J of this part, and paragraphs (j), (k), (m), and (n) of this section. (6) Oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored underground shall be kept in tightly sealed containers in fire-resistant areas at least 300 feet (91.44 m) from underground explosive magazines, and at least 100 feet (30.48 m) from shaft stations and steeply inclined passageways. Storage areas shall be positioned or diked so that the contents of ruptured or overturned containers will not flow from the storage area. (7) Flammable or combustible materials shall not be stored above ground within 100 feet (30.48 m) of any access opening to any underground operation. Where this is not feasible because of space limitations at the jobsite, such materials may be located within the 100-foot limit, provided that: (i) They are located as far as practicable from the opening; and (ii) Either a fire-resistant barrier of not less than one-hour rating is placed between the stored material and the opening, or additional precautions are taken which will protect the materials from ignition sources. (8) Fire-resistant hydraulic fluids shall be used in hydraulically-actuated underground machinery and equipment unless such equipment is protected by a fire suppression system or by multi-purpose fire extinguisher(s) rated at of sufficient capacity for the type and size of hydraulic equipment involved, but rated at least 4A:40B:C. (9)(i) Electrical installations in underground areas where oil, grease, or diesel fuel are stored shall be used only for lighting fixtures. (ii) Lighting fixtures in storage areas, or within 25 feet (7.62 m) of underground areas where oil, grease, or diesel fuel are stored, shall be approved for Class I, Division 2 locations, in accordance with subpart K of this part. (10) Leaks and spills of flammable or combustible fluids shall be cleaned up immediately. (11) A fire extinguisher of at least 4A:40B:C rating or other equivalent extinguishing means shall be provided at the head pulley and at the tail pulley of underground belt conveyors. (12) Any structure located underground or within 100 feet (30.48 m) of an opening to the underground shall be constructed of material having a fire-resistance rating of at least one hour. (n) Welding, cutting, and other hot work. (1) No more than the amount of fuel gas and oxygen cylinders necessary to perform welding, cutting, or other hot work during the next 24-hour period shall be permitted underground. (2) Noncombustible barriers shall be installed below welding, cutting, or other hot work being done in or over a shaft or raise. (o) Ground support Portal areas. (2) Subsidence areas. (3) Underground areas. (B) Competent persons conducting such inspections shall be protected from loose ground by location, ground support or equivalent means. (ii) Ground conditions along haulageways and travelways shall be inspected as frequently as necessary to ensure safe passage. (iii) Loose ground that might be hazardous to employees shall be taken down, scaled or supported. (iv) (A) Torque wrenches shall be used wherever bolts that depend on torsionally applied force are used for ground support. (B) A competent person shall determine whether rock bolts meet the necessary torque, and shall determine the testing frequency in light of the bolt system, ground conditions and the distance from vibration sources. (v) Suitable protection shall be provided for employees exposed to the hazard of loose ground while installing ground support systems. (vi) Support sets shall be installed so that the bottoms have sufficient anchorage to prevent ground pressures from dislodging the support base of the sets. Lateral bracing (collar bracing, tie rods, or spreaders) shall be provided between immediately adjacent sets to ensure added stability. (vii) Damaged or dislodged ground supports that create a hazardous condition shall be promptly repaired or replaced. When replacing supports, the new supports shall be installed before the damaged supports are removed. (viii) A shield or other type of support shall be used to maintain a safe travelway for employees working in dead-end areas ahead of any support replacement operation. (4) Shafts. (ii) (A) The full depth of the shaft shall be supported by casing or bracing except where the shaft penetrates into solid rock having characteristics that will not change as a result of exposure. Where the shaft passes through earth into solid rock, or through solid rock into earth, and where there is potential for shear, the casing or bracing shall extend at least 5 feet (1.53 m) into the solid rock. When the shaft terminates in solid rock, the casing or bracing shall extend to the end of the shaft or 5 feet (1.53 m) into the solid rock, whichever is less. (B) The casing or bracing shall extend 42 inches (1.07 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) above ground level, except that the minimum casing height may be reduced to 12 inches (0.3 m), provided that a standard railing is installed; that the ground adjacent to the top of the shaft is sloped away from the shaft collar to prevent entry of liquids; and that effective barriers are used to prevent mobile equipment operating near the shaft from jumping over the 12 inch (0.3 m) barrier. (iii) After blasting operations in shafts, a competent person shall determine if the walls, ladders, timbers, blocking, or wedges have loosened. If so, necessary repairs shall be made before employees other than those assigned to make the repairs are allowed in or below the affected areas. (p) Blasting. (1) Blasting wires shall be kept clear of electrical lines, pipes, rails, and other conductive material, excluding earth, to prevent explosives initiation or employee exposure to electric current. (2) Following blasting, an employee shall not enter a work area until the air quality meets the requirements of paragraph (j) of this section. (q) Drilling. (2) The drilling area shall be inspected for hazards before the drilling operation is started. (3) Employees shall not be allowed on a drill mast while the drill bit is in operation or the drill machine is being moved. (4) When a drill machine is being moved from one drilling area to another, drill steel, tools, and other equipment shall be secured and the mast shall be placed in a safe position. (5) Receptacles or racks shall be provided for storing drill steel located on jumbos. (6) Employees working below jumbo decks shall be warned whenever drilling is about to begin. (7) Drills on columns shall be anchored firmly before starting drilling, and shall be retightened as necessary thereafter. (8) (i) The employer shall provide mechanical means on the top deck of a jumbo for lifing unwieldy or heavy material. (ii) When jumbo decks are over 10 feet (3.05 m) in height, the employer shall install stairs wide enough for two persons. (iii) Jumbo decks more than 10 feet (3.05 m) in height shall be equipped with guardrails on all open sides, excluding access openings of platforms, unless an adjacent surface provides equivalent fall protection. (iv) (A) Only employees assisting the operator shall be allowed to ride on jumbos, unless the jumbo meets the requirements of paragraph (r)(6)(ii) of this section. (B) Jumbos shall be chocked to prevent movement while employees are working on them. (v) (A) Walking and working surfaces of jumbos shall be maintained to prevent the hazards of slipping, tripping and falling. (B) Jumbo decks and stair treads shall be designed to be slip-resistent and secured to prevent accidental displacement. (9) Scaling bars shall be available at scaling operations and shall be maintained in good condition at all times. Blunted or severely worn bars shall not be used. (10)(i) Blasting holes shall not be drilled through blasted rock (muck) or water. (ii) Employees in a shaft shall be protected either by location or by suitable barrier(s) if powered mechanical loading equipment is used to remove muck containing unfired explosives. (11) A caution sign reading “Buried Line,” or similar wording shall be posted where air lines are buried or otherwise hidden by water or debris. (r) Haulage. (ii) Equipment defects affecting safety and health shall be corrected before the equipment is used. (2) Powered mobile haulage equipment shall have suitable means of stopping. (3)(i) Power mobile haulage equipment, including trains, shall have audible warning devices to warn employees to stay clear. The operator shall sound the warning device before moving the equipment and whenever necessary during travel. (ii) The operator shall assure that lights which are visible to employees at both ends of any mobile equipment, including a train, are turned on whenever the equipment is operating. (4) In those cabs where glazing is used, the glass shall be safety glass, or its equivalent, and shall be maintained and cleaned so that vision is not obstructed. (5) Anti-roll back devices or brakes shall be installed on inclined conveyor drive units to prevent conveyors from inadvertently running in reverse. (6)(i) (A) Employees shall not be permitted to ride a power-driven chain, belt, or bucket conveyor unless the conveyor is specifically designed for the transportation of persons. (B) Endless belt-type manlifts are prohibited in underground construction. (C) General requirements also applicable to underground construction for use of conveyors in construction are found in § 1926.555 of this part. (ii) No employee shall ride haulage equipment unless it is equipped with seating for each passenger and protects passengers from being struck, crushed, or caught between other equipment or surfaces. Members of train crews may ride on a locomotive if it is equipped with handholds and nonslip steps or footboards. Requirements applicable to Underground Construction for motor vehicle transportation of employees are found in § 1926.601 of this part. (7) Powered mobile haulage equipment, including trains, shall not be left unattended unless the master switch or motor is turned off; operating controls are in neutral or park position; and the brakes are set, or equivalent precautions are taken to prevent rolling. (8) Whenever rails serve as a return for a trolley circuit, both rails shall be bonded at every joint and crossbonded every 200 feet (60.96 m). (9) When dumping cars by hand, the car dumps shall have tiedown chains, bumper blocks, or other locking or holding devices to prevent the cars from overturning. (10) Rocker-bottom or bottom-dump cars shall be equipped with positive locking devices to prevent unintended dumping. (11) Equipment to be hauled shall be loaded and secured to prevent sliding or dislodgement. (12)(i) Mobile equipment, including rail-mounted equipment, shall be stopped for manual connecting or service work. (ii) Employees shall not reach between moving cars during coupling operations. (iii) Couplings shall not be aligned, shifted or cleaned on moving cars or locomotives. (13)(i) Safety chains or other connections shall be used in addition to couplers to connect man cars or powder cars whenever the locomotive is uphill of the cars. (ii) When the grade exceeds one percent and there is a potential for runaway cars, safety chains or other connections shall be used in addition to couplers to connect haulage cars or, as an alternative, the locomotive must be downhill of the train. (iii) Such safety chains or other connections shall be capable of maintaining connection between cars in the event of either coupler disconnect, failure or breakage. (14) Parked rail equipment shall be chocked, blocked, or have brakes set to prevent inadvertent movement. (15) Berms, bumper blocks, safety hooks, or equivalent means shall be provided to prevent overtravel and overturning of haulage equipment at dumping locations. (16) Bumper blocks or equivalent stopping devices shall be provided at all track dead ends. (17)(i) Only small handtools, lunch pails or similar small items may be transported with employees in man-cars, or on top of a locomotive. (ii) When small hand tools or other small items are carried on top of a locomotive, the top shall be designed or modified to retain them while traveling. (18)(i) Where switching facilities are available, occupied personnel-cars shall be pulled, not pushed. If personnel-cars must be pushed and visibility of the track ahead is hampered, then a qualified person shall be stationed in the lead car to give signals to the locomotive operator. (ii) Crew trips shall consist of personnel-loads only. (s) Electrical safety. (1) Electric power lines shall be insulated or located away from water lines, telephone lines, air lines, or other conductive materials so that a damaged circuit will not energize the other systems. (2) Lighting circuits shall be located so that movement of personnel or equipment will not damage the circuits or disrupt service. (3) Oil-filled transformers shall not be used underground unless they are located in a fire-resistant enclosure suitably vented to the outside and surrounded by a dike to retain the contents of the transformers in the event of rupture. (t) Hoisting unique to underground construction. (1) General requirements for cranes and hoists. (ii) A warning light suitably located to warn employees at the shaft bottom and subsurface shaft entrances shall flash whenever a load is above the shaft bottom or subsurface entrances, or the load is being moved in the shaft. This paragraph does not apply to fully enclosed hoistways. (iii) Whenever a hoistway is not fully enclosed and employees are at the shaft bottom, conveyances or equipment shall be stopped at least 15 feet (4.57 m) above the bottom of the shaft and held there until the signalman at the bottom of the shaft directs the operator to continue lowering the load, except that the load may be lowered without stopping if the load or conveyance is within full view of a bottom signalman who is in constant voice communication with the operator. (iv)(A) Before maintenance, repairs, or other work is commenced in the shaft served by a cage, skip, or bucket, the operator and other employees in the area shall be informed and given suitable instructions. (B) A sign warning that work is being done in the shaft shall be installed at the shaft collar, at the operator's station, and at each underground landing. (v) Any connection between the hoisting rope and the cage or skip shall be compatible with the type of wire rope used for hoisting. (vi) Spin-type connections, where used, shall be maintained in a clean condition and protected from foreign matter that could affect their operation. (vii) Cage, skip, and load connections to the hoist rope shall be made so that the force of the hoist pull, vibration, misalignment, release of lift force, or impact will not disengage the connection. Moused or latched openthroat hooks do not meet this requirement. (viii) When using wire rope wedge sockets, means shall be provided to prevent wedge escapement and to ensure that the wedge is properly seated. (2) Additional requirements for cranes. (3) Additional requirements for hoists. (ii) Control levers shall be of the “deadman type” which return automatically to their center (neutral) position upon release. (iii) When a hoist is used for both personnel hoisting and material hoisting, load and speed ratings for personnel and for materials shall be assigned to the equipment. (iv) Material hoisting may be performed at speeds higher than the rated speed for personnel hoisting if the hoist and components have been designed for such higher speeds and if shaft conditions permit. (v) Employees shall not ride on top of any cage, skip or bucket except when necessary to perform inspection or maintenance of the hoisting system, in which case they shall be protected by a body belt/harness system to prevent falling. (vi) Personnel and materials (other than small tools and supplies secured in a manner that will not create a hazard to employees) shall not be hoisted together in the same conveyance. However, if the operator is protected from the shifting of materials, then the operator may ride with materials in cages or skips which are designed to be controlled by an operator within the cage or skip. (vii) Line speed shall not exceed the design limitations of the systems. (viii) Hoists shall be equipped with landing level indicators at the operator's station. Marking the hoist rope does not satisfy this requirement. (ix) Whenever glazing is used in the hoist house, it shall be safety glass, or its equivalent, and be free of distortions and obstructions. (x) A fire extinguisher that is rated at least 2A:10B:C (multi-purpose, dry chemical) shall be mounted in each hoist house. (xi) Hoist controls shall be arranged so that the operator can perform all operating cycle functions and reach the emergency power cutoff without having to reach beyond the operator's normal operating position. (xii) Hoists shall be equipped with limit switches to prevent overtravel at the top and bottom of the hoistway. (xiii) Limit switches are to be used only to limit travel of loads when operational controls malfunction and shall not be used as a substitute for other operational controls. (xiv) Hoist operators shall be provided with a closed-circuit voice communication system to each landing station, with speaker microphones so located that the operator can communicate with individual landing stations during hoist use. (xv) When sinking shafts 75 feet (22.86 m) or less in depth, cages, skips, and buckets that may swing, bump, or snag against shaft sides or other structural protrusions shall be guided by fenders, rails, ropes, or a combination of those means. (xvi) When sinking shafts more than 75 feet (22.86 m) in depth, all cages, skips, and buckets shall be rope or rail guided to within a rail length from the sinking operation. (xvii) Cages, skips, and buckets in all completed shafts, or in all shafts being used as completed shafts, shall be rope or rail-guided for the full length of their travel. (xviii) Wire rope used in load lines of material hoists shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least five times the maximum intended load or the factor recommended by the rope manufacturer, whichever is greater. Refer to § 1926.552(c)(14)(iii) of this part for design factors for wire rope used in personnel hoists. The design factor shall be calculated by dividing the breaking strength of wire rope, as reported in the manufacturer's rating tables, by the total static load, including the weight of the wire rope in the shaft when fully extended. (xix) A competent person shall visually check all hoisting machinery, equipment, anchorages, and hoisting rope at the beginning of each shift and during hoist use, as necessary. (xx) Each safety device shall be checked by a competent person at least weekly during hoist use to ensure suitable operation and safe condition. (xxi) In order to ensure suitable operation and safe condition of all functions and safety devices, each hoist assembly shall be inspected and load-tested to 100 percent of its rated capacity: at the time of installation; after any repairs or alterations affecting its structural integrity; after the operation of any safety device; and annually when in use. The employer shall prepare a certification record which includes the date each inspection and load-test was performed; the signature of the person who performed the inspection and test; and a serial number or other identifier for the hoist that was inspected and tested. The most recent certification record shall be maintained on file until completion of the project. (xxii) Before hoisting personnel or material, the operator shall perform a test run of any cage or skip whenever it has been out of service for one complete shift, and whenever the assembly or components have been repaired or adjusted. (xxiii) Unsafe conditions shall be corrected before using the equipment. (4) Additional requirements for personnel hoists. (ii) The operator shall remain within sight and sound of the signals at the operator's station. (iii) All sides of personnel cages shall be enclosed by one-half inch (12.70 mm) wire mesh (not less than No. 14 gauge or equivalent) to a height of not less than 6 feet (1.83 m). However, when the cage or skip is being used as a work platform, its sides may be reduced in height to 42 inches (1.07 m) when the conveyance is not in motion. (iv) All personnel cages shall be provided with a positive locking door that does not open outward. (v) All personnel cages shall be provided with a protective canopy. The canopy shall be made of steel plate, at least 3/16-inch (4.763 mm) in thickness, or material of equivalent strength and impact resistance. The canopy shall be sloped to the outside, and so designed that a section may be readily pushed upward to afford emergency egress. The canopy shall cover the top in such a manner as to protect those inside from objects falling in the shaft. (vi) Personnel platforms operating on guide rails or guide ropes shall be equipped with broken-rope safety devices, safety catches or arrestment devices that will stop and hold 150 percent of the weight of the personnel platform and its maximum rated load. (vii) During sinking operations in shafts where guides and safeties are not yet used, the travel speed of the personnel platform shall not exceed 200 feet (60.96 m) per minute. Governor controls set for 200 feet (60.96 m) per minute shall be installed in the control system and shall be used during personnel hoisting. (viii) The personnel platform may travel over the controlled length of the hoistway at rated speeds up to 600 feet (182.88 m) per minute during sinking operations in shafts where guides and safeties are used. (ix) The personnel platform may travel at rated speeds greater than 600 feet (182.88 m) per minute in completed shafts. (u) Definitions. “Rapid Excavation Machine”—Tunnel boring machines, shields, roadheaders, or any other similar excavation machine. [54 FR 23850, June 2, 1989; 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1297, Jan. 8, 1998; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010; 77 FR 49728, Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23841, Apr. 24, 2013; 84 FR 21577, May 14, 2019] § 1926.801 Caissons. (a) Wherever, in caisson work in which compressed air is used, and the working chamber is less than 11 feet in length, and when such caissons are at any time suspended or hung while work is in progress so that the bottom of the excavation is more than 9 feet below the deck of the working chamber, a shield shall be erected therein for the protection of the employees. (b) Shafts shall be subjected to a hydrostatic or air-pressure test, at which pressure they shall be tight. The shaft shall be stamped on the outside shell about 12 inches from each flange to show the pressure to which they have been subjected. (c) Whenever a shaft is used, it shall be provided, where space permits, with a safe, proper, and suitable staircase for its entire length, including landing platforms, not more than 20 feet apart. Where this is impracticable, suitable ladders shall be installed with landing platforms located about 20 feet apart to break the climb. (d) All caissons having a diameter or side greater than 10 feet shall be provided with a man lock and shaft for the exclusive use of employees. (e) In addition to the gauge in the locks, an accurate gauge shall be maintained on the outer and inner side of each bulkhead. These gauges shall be accessible at all times and kept in accurate working order. (f) In caisson operations where employees are exposed to compressed air working environments, the requirements contained in § 1926.803 shall be complied with. § 1926.802 Cofferdams. (a) If overtopping of the cofferdam by high waters is possible, means shall be provided for controlled flooding of the work area. (b) Warning signals for evacuation of employees in case of emergency shall be developed and posted. (c) Cofferdam walkways, bridges, or ramps with at least two means of rapid exit shall be provided with guardrails as specified in subpart M of this part. (d) Cofferdams located close to navigable shipping channels shall be protected from vessels in transit, where possible. § 1926.803 Compressed air. (a) General provisions. (2) Every employee shall be instructed in the rules and regulations which concern his safety or the safety of others. (b) Medical attendance, examination, and regulations. (2) No employee shall be permitted to enter a compressed air environment until he has been examined by the physician and reported by him to be physically qualified to engage in such work. (3) In the event an employee is absent from work for 10 days, or is absent due to sickness or injury, he shall not resume work until he is reexamined by the physician, and his physical condition reported, as provided in this paragraph, to be such as to permit him to work in compressed air. (4) After an employee has been employed continuously in compressed air for a period designated by the physician, but not to exceed 1 year, he shall be reexamined by the physician to determine if he is still physically qualified to engage in compressed air work. (5) Such physician shall at all times keep a complete and full record of examinations made by him. The physician shall also keep an accurate record of any decompression illness or other illness or injury incapacitating any employee for work, and of all loss of life that occurs in the operation of a tunnel, caisson, or other compartment in which compressed air is used. (6) Records shall be available for the inspection of the Secretary or his representatives, and a copy thereof shall be forwarded to OSHA within 48 hours following the occurrence of the accident, death, injury, or decompression illness. It shall state as fully as possible the cause of said death or decompression illness, and the place where the injured or sick employee was taken, and such other relative information as may be required by the Secretary. (7) A fully equipped first aid station shall be provided at each tunnel project regardless of the number of persons employed. An ambulance or transportation suitable for a litter case shall be at each project. (8) Where tunnels are being excavated from portals more than 5 road miles apart, a first aid station and transportation facilities shall be provided at each portal. (9) A medical lock shall be established and maintained in immediate working order whenever air pressure in the working chamber is increased above the normal atmosphere. (10) The medical lock shall: (i) Have at least 6 feet of clear headroom at the center, and be subdivided into not less than two compartments; (ii) Be readily accessible to employees working under compressed air; (iii) Be kept ready for immediate use for at least 5 hours subsequent to the emergence of any employee from the working chamber; (iv) Be properly heated, lighted and ventilated; (v) Be maintained in a sanitary condition; (vi) Have a nonshatterable port through which the occupant(s) may be kept under constant observation; (vii) Be designed for a working pressure of 75 p.s.i.g. (viii) Be equipped with internal controls which may be overridden by external controls; (ix) Be provided with air pressure gauges to show the air pressure within each compartment to observers inside and outside the medical lock. (x) Be equipped with a manual type sprinkler system that can be activated inside the lock or by the outside lock tender. (xi) Be provided with oxygen lines and fittings leading into external tanks. The lines shall be fitted with check valves to prevent reverse flow. The oxygen system inside the chamber shall be of a closed circuit design and be so designed as to automatically shut off the oxygen supply whenever the fire system is activated. (xii) Be in constant charge of an attendant under the direct control of the retained physician. The attendant shall be trained in the use of the lock and suitably instructed regarding steps to be taken in the treatment of employee exhibiting symptoms compatible with a diagnosis of decompression illness; (xiii) Be adjacent to an adequate emergency medical facility; (xiv) The medical facility shall be equipped with demand-type oxygen inhalation equipment approved by the U.S. Bureau of Mines; (xv) Be capable of being maintained at a temperature, in use, not to exceed 90 °F. nor be less than 70 °F.; and (xvi) Be provided with sources of air, free of oil and carbon monoxide, for normal and emergency use, which are capable of raising the air pressure in the lock from 0 to 75 p.s.i.g. in 5 minutes. (11) Identification badges shall be furnished to all employees, indicating that the wearer is a compressed air worker. A permanent record shall be kept of all identification badges issued. The badge shall give the employee's name, address of the medical lock, the telephone number of the licensed physician for the compressed air project, and contain instructions that in case of emergency of unknown or doubtful cause or illness, the wearer shall be rushed to the medical lock. The badge shall be worn at all times—off the job, as well as on the job. (c) Telephone and signal communication. (i) The working chamber face; (ii) The working chamber side of the man lock near the door; (iii) The interior of the man lock; (iv) Lock attendant's station; (v) The compressor plant; (vi) The first-aid station; (vii) The emergency lock (if one is required); and (viii) The special decompression chamber (if one is required). (d) Signs and records. Time of Decompression for This Lock __ pounds to __ pounds in __ minutes. __ pounds to __ pounds in __ minutes. (Signed by) ______ (Superintendent) This form shall be posted in the Man Lock at all times. (2) Any code of signals used shall be conspicuously posted near workplace entrances and such other locations as may be necessary to bring them to the attention of all employees concerned. (3) For each 8-hour shift, a record of employees employed under air pressure shall be kept by an employee who shall remain outside the lock near the entrance. This record shall show the period each employee spends in the air chamber and the time taken from decompression. A copy shall be submitted to the appointed physician after each shift. (e) Compression. (2) During the compression of employees, the pressure shall not be increased to more than 3 p.s.i.g. within the first minute. The pressure shall be held at 3 p.s.i.g. and again at 7 p.s.i.g. sufficiently long to determine if any employees are experiencing discomfort. (3) After the first minute the pressure shall be raised uniformly and at a rate not to exceed 10 p.s.i. per minute. (4) If any employee complains of discomfort, the pressure shall be held to determine if the symptoms are relieved. If, after 5 minutes the discomfort does not disappear, the lock attendant shall gradually reduce the pressure until the employee signals that the discomfort has ceased. If he does not indicate that the discomfort has disappeared, the lock attendant shall reduce the pressure to atmospheric and the employee shall be released from the lock. (5) No employee shall be subjected to pressure exceeding 50 pounds per square inch except in emergency. (f) Decompression. (2) In the event it is necessary for an employee to be in compressed air more than once in a 24-hour period, the appointed physician shall be responsible for the establishment of methods and procedures of decompression applicable to repetitive exposures. (3) If decanting is necessary, the appointed physician shall establish procedures before any employee is permitted to be decompressed by decanting methods. The period of time that the employees spend at atmospheric pressure between the decompression following the shift and recompression shall not exceed 5 minutes. (g) Man locks and special decompression chambers Man locks. (ii) The lock attendant in charge of a man lock shall be under the direct supervision of the appointed physician. He shall be stationed at the lock controls on the free air side during the period of compression and decompression and shall remain at the lock control station whenever there are men in the working chamber or in the man lock. (iii) Except where air pressure in the working chamber is below 12 p.s.i.g., each man lock shall be equipped with automatic controls which, through taped programs, cams, or similar apparatus, shall automatically regulate decompressions. It shall also be equipped with manual controls to permit the lock attendant to override the automatic mechanism in the event of an emergency, as provided in paragraph (g)(1)(viii) of this section. (iv) A manual control, which can be used in the event of an emergency, shall be placed inside the man lock. (v) A clock, thermometer, and continuous recording pressure gauge with a 4-hour graph shall be installed outside of each man lock and shall be changed prior to each shift's decompression. The chart shall be of sufficient size to register a legible record of variations in pressure within the man lock and shall be visible to the lock attendant. A copy of each graph shall be submitted to the appointed physician after each shift. In addition, a pressure gauge, clock, and thermometer shall also be installed in each man lock. Additional fittings shall be provided so that test gauges may be attached whenever necessary. (vi) Except where air pressure is below 12 p.s.i.g. and there is no danger of rapid flooding, all caissons having a working area greater than 150 square feet, and each bulkhead in tunnels of 14 feet or more in diameter, or equivalent area, shall have at least two locks in perfect working condition, one of which shall be used exclusively as a man lock, the other, as a materials lock. (vii) Where only a combination man-and-materials lock is required, this single lock shall be of sufficient capacity to hold the employees constituting two successive shifts. (viii) Emergency locks shall be large enough to hold an entire heading shift and a limit maintained of 12 p.s.i.g. There shall be a chamber available for oxygen decompression therapy to 28 p.s.i.g. (ix) The man lock shall be large enough so that those using it are not compelled to be in a cramped position, and shall not have less than 5 feet clear head room at the center and a minimum of 30 cubic feet of air space per occupant. (x) Locks on caissons shall be so located that the bottom door shall be not less than 3 feet above the water level surrounding the caisson on the outside. (The water level, where it is affected by tides, is construed to mean high tide.) (xi) In addition to the pressure gauge in the locks, an accurate pressure gauge shall be maintained on the outer and inner side of each bulkhead. These gauges shall be accessible at all times and shall be kept in accurate working order. (xii) Man locks shall have an observation port at least 4 inches in diameter located in such a position that all occupants of the man lock may be observed from the working chamber and from the free air side of the lock. (xiii) Adequate ventilation in the lock shall be provided. (xiv) Man locks shall be maintained at a minimum temperature of 70 °F. (xv) When locks are not in use and employees are in the working chamber, lock doors shall be kept open to the working chamber, where practicable. (xvi) Provision shall be made to allow for rescue parties to enter the tunnel if the working force is disabled. (xvii) A special decompression chamber of sufficient size to accommodate the entire force of employees being decompressed at the end of a shift shall be provided whenever the regularly established working period requires a total time of decompression exceeding 75 minutes. (2) Special decompression chamber. (ii) Each special decompression chamber shall be equipped with the following: ( a ( b ( c ( d ( e ( f (iii) Seating facilities in special decompression chambers shall be so arranged as to permit a normal sitting posture without cramping. Seating space, not less than 18 inches by 24 inches wide, shall be provided per occupant. (iv) Adequate toilet and washing facilities, in a screened or enclosed recess, shall be provided. Toilet bowls shall have a built-in protector on the rim so that an air space is created when the seat lid is closed. (v) Fresh and pure drinking water shall be available. This may be accomplished by either piping water into the special decompression chamber and providing drinking fountains, or by providing individual canteens, or by some other sanitary means. Community drinking vessels are prohibited. (vi) No refuse or discarded material of any kind shall be permitted to accumulate, and the chamber shall be kept clean. (vii) Unless the special decompression chamber is serving as the man lock to atmospheric pressure, the special decompression chamber shall be situated, where practicable, adjacent to the man lock on the atmospheric pressure side of the bulkhead. A passageway shall be provided, connecting the special chamber with the man lock, to permit employees in the process of decompression to move from the man lock to the special chamber without a reduction in the ambient pressure from that designated for the next stage of decompression. The passageway shall be so arranged as to not interfere with the normal operation of the man lock, nor with the release of the occupants of the special chamber to atmospheric pressure upon the completion of the decompression procedure. (h) Compressor plant and air supply. Provided, (2) The low air compressor plant shall be of sufficient capacity to not only permit the work to be done safely, but shall also provide a margin to meet emergencies and repairs. (3) Low air compressor units shall have at least two independent and separate sources of power supply and each shall be capable of operating the entire low air plant and its accessory systems. (4) The capacity, arrangement, and number of compressors shall be sufficient to maintain the necessary pressure without overloading the equipment and to assure maintenance of such pressure in the working chamber during periods of breakdown, repair, or emergency. (5) Switching from one independent source of power supply to the other shall be done periodically to ensure the workability of the apparatus in an emergency. (6) Duplicate low-pressure air feedlines and regulating valves shall be provided between the source of air supply and a point beyond the locks with one of the lines extending to within 100 feet of the working face. (7) All high- and low-pressure air supply lines shall be equipped with check valves. (8) Low-pressure air shall be regulated automatically. In addition, manually operated valves shall be provided for emergency conditions. (9) The air intakes for all air compressors shall be located at a place where fumes, exhaust, gases, and other air contaminants will be at a minimum. (10) Gauges indicating the pressure in the working chamber shall be installed in the compressor building, the lock attendant's station, and at the employer's field office. (i) Ventilation and air quality. (2) The air in the workplace shall be analyzed by the employer not less than once each shift, and records of such tests shall be kept on file at the place where the work is in progress. The test results shall be within the threshold limit values specified in subpart D of this part, for hazardous gases, and within 10 percent of the lower explosive limit of flammable gases. If these limits are not met, immediate action to correct the situation shall be taken by the employer. (3) The temperature of all working chambers which are subjected to air pressure shall, by means of after-coolers or other suitable devices, be maintained at a temperature not to exceed 85 °F. (4) Forced ventilation shall be provided during decompression. During the entire decompression period, forced ventilation through chemical or mechanical air purifying devices that will ensure a source of fresh air shall be provided. (5) Whenever heat-producing machines (moles, shields) are used in compressed air tunnel operations, a positive means of removing the heat build-up at the heading shall be provided. (j) Electricity. (2) The minimum intensity of light on any walkway, ladder, stairway, or working level shall be not less than 10 foot-candles, and in all workplaces the lighting shall at all times be such as to enable employees to see clearly. (3) All electrical equipment and wiring for light and power circuits shall comply with the requirements of subpart K of this part for use in damp, hazardous, high temperature, and compressed air environments. (4) External parts of lighting fixtures and all other electrical equipment, when within 8 feet of the floor, shall be constructed of noncombustible, nonabsorptive, insulating materials, except that metal may be used if it is effectively grounded. (5) Portable lamps shall be equipped with noncombustible, nonabsorptive, insulating sockets, approved handles, basket guards, and approved cords. (6) The use of worn or defective portable and pendant conductors is prohibited. (k) Sanitation. (2) When the toilet bowl is shut by a cover, there should be an air space so that the bowl or bucket does not implode when pressure is increased. (3) All parts of caissons and other working compartments shall be kept in a sanitary condition. (l) Fire prevention and protection. (2) While welding or flame-cutting is being done in compressed air, a firewatch with a fire hose or approved extinguisher shall stand by until such operation is completed. (3) Shafts and caissons containing flammable material of any kind, either above or below ground, shall be provided with a waterline and a fire hose connected thereto, so arranged that all points of the shaft or caisson are within reach of the hose stream. (4) Fire hose shall be at least 1 1/2 (5) The power house, compressor house, and all buildings housing ventilating equipment, shall be provided with at least one hose connection in the water line, with a fire hose connected thereto. A fire hose shall be maintained within reach of structures of wood over or near shafts. (6) Tunnels shall be provided with a 2-inch minimum diameter water line extending into the working chamber and to within 100 feet of the working face. Such line shall have hose outlets with 100 feet of fire hose attached and maintained as follows: One at the working face; one immediately inside of the bulkhead of the working chamber; and one immediately outside such bulkhead. In addition, hose outlets shall be provided at 200-foot intervals throughout the length of the tunnel, and 100 feet of fire hose shall be attached to the outlet nearest to any location where flammable material is being kept or stored or where any flame is being used. (7) In addition to fire hose protection required by this subpart, on every floor of every building not under compressed air, but used in connection with the compressed air work, there shall be provided at least one approved fire extinguisher of the proper type for the hazard involved. At least two approved fire extinguishers shall be provided in the working chamber as follows: One at the working face and one immediately inside the bulkhead (pressure side). Extinguishers in the working chamber shall use water as the primary extinguishing agent and shall not use any extinguishing agent which could be harmful to the employees in the working chamber. The fire extinguisher shall be protected from damage. (8) Highly combustible materials shall not be used or stored in the working chamber. Wood, paper, and similar combustible material shall not be used in the working chamber in quantities which could cause a fire hazard. The compressor building shall be constructed of non-combustible material. (9) Man locks shall be equipped with a manual type fire extinguisher system that can be activated inside the man lock and also by the outside lock attendant. In addition, a fire hose and portable fire extinguisher shall be provided inside and outside the man lock. The portable fire extinguisher shall be the dry chemical type. (10) Equipment, fixtures, and furniture in man locks and special decompression chambers shall be constructed of noncombustible materials. Bedding, etc., shall be chemically treated so as to be fire resistant. (11) Head frames shall be constructed of structural steel or open frame-work fireproofed timber. Head houses and other temporary surface buildings or structures within 100 feet of the shaft, caisson, or tunnel opening shall be built of fire-resistant materials. (12) No oil, gasoline, or other combustible material shall be stored within 100 feet of any shaft, caisson, or tunnel opening, except that oils may be stored in suitable tanks in isolated fireproof buildings, provided such buildings are not less than 50 feet from any shaft, caisson, or tunnel opening, or any building directly connected thereto. (13) Positive means shall be taken to prevent leaking flammable liquids from flowing into the areas specifically mentioned in the preceding paragraph. (14) All explosives used in connection with compressed air work shall be selected, stored, transported, and used as specified in subpart U of this part. (m) Bulkheads and safety screens. (2) In tunnels 16 feet or more in diameter, hanging walkways shall be provided from the face to the man lock as high in the tunnel as practicable, with at least 6 feet of head room. Walkways shall be constructed of noncombustible material. Standard railings shall be securely installed throughout the length of all walkways on open sides in accordance with subpart M of this part. Where walkways are ramped under safety screens, the walkway surface shall be skidproofed by cleats or by equivalent means. (3) Bulkheads used to contain compressed air shall be tested, where practicable, to prove their ability to resist the highest air pressure which may be expected to be used. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 47 FR 14696, 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] § 1926.804 Definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Bulkhead (b) Caisson (c) Decanting (d) Emergency locks (e) High air (f) Low air (g) Man lock (h) Materials lock (i) Medical lock (j) Normal condition (k) Pressure (l) Absolute pressure (m) Atmospheric pressure (n) Gauge pressure (o) Safety screen (p) Special decompression chamber (q) Working chamber Appendix A to Subpart S of Part 1926—Decompression Tables 1. Explanation. Stage 1 consists of a reduction in ambient pressure ranging from 10 to a maximum of 16 pounds per square inch, but in no instance will the pressure be reduced below 4 pounds at the end of stage 1. This reduction in pressure in stage 1 will always take place at a rate not greater than 5 pounds per minute. Further reduction in pressure will take place during stage 2 and subsequent stages as required at a slower rate, but in no event at a rate greater than 1 pound per minute. Decompression Table No. 1 indicates in the body of the table the total decompression time in minutes for various combinations of working chamber pressure and exposure time. Decompression Table No. 2 indicates for the same various combinations of working chamber pressure and exposure time the following: a. The number of stages required; b. The reduction in pressure and the terminal pressure for each required stage; c. The time in minutes through which the reduction in pressure is accomplished for each required stage; d. The pressure reduction rate in minutes per pound for each required stage; Important Note: The Pressure Reduction in Each Stage is Accomplished at a Uniform Rate. Do Not Interpolate Between Values Shown on the Tables. Use the Next Higher Value of Working Chamber Pressure or Exposure Time Should the Actual Working Chamber Pressure or the Actual Exposure Time, Respectively, Fall Between Those for Which Calculated Values Are Shown in the Body of the Tables. Examples Minutes Example No. 1: 4 hours working period at 20 pounds gauge. Decompression Table No. 1: 20 pounds for 4 hours, total decompression time 43 Decompression Table No. 2: Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 20 pounds to 4 pounds at the uniform rate of 5 pounds per minute. Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 3 Stage 2 (final stage): Reduce pressure at a uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound gage over a period of 40 minutes. Rate—0.10 pound per minute or 10 minutes per pound. Stage 2 (final) elapsed time 40 Total time 43 Example No. 2: 5-hour working period at 24 pounds gage. Decompression Table No. 1: 24 pounds for 5 hours, total decompression time 117 Decompression Table No. 2: Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 24 pounds to 8 pounds at the uniform rate of 5 pounds per minute. Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 3 Stage 2: Reduce pressure at a uniform rate from 8 pounds to 4 pounds over a period of 4 minutes. Rate, 1 pound per minute elapsed time, stage 2 4 Transfer men to special decompression chamber maintaining the 4-pound pressure during the transfer operation. Stage 3 (final stage): In the special decompression chamber, reduce the pressure at a uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound gage over a period of 110 minutes. Rate, 0.037 pound per minute or 27.5 minutes per pound. Stage 3 (final) elapsed time 110 Total time 117 Decompression Table No. 1—Total Decompression Time Work pressure p.s.i.g. Working period hours 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Over 8 9 to 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 14 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 16 16 33 16 7 7 7 7 7 7 17 33 48 48 62 18 7 7 7 8 11 17 48 63 63 73 87 20 7 7 8 15 15 43 63 73 83 103 113 22 9 9 16 24 38 68 93 103 113 128 133 24 11 12 23 27 52 92 117 122 127 137 151 26 13 14 29 34 69 104 126 141 142 142 163 28 15 23 31 41 98 127 143 153 153 165 183 30 17 28 38 62 105 143 165 168 178 188 204 32 19 35 43 85 126 163 178 193 203 213 226 34 21 39 58 98 151 178 195 218 223 233 248 36 24 44 63 113 170 198 223 233 243 253 273 38 28 49 73 128 178 203 223 238 253 263 278 40 31 49 84 143 183 213 233 248 258 278 288 42 37 56 102 144 189 215 245 260 263 268 293 44 43 64 118 154 199 234 254 264 269 269 293 46 44 74 139 171 214 244 269 274 289 299 318 48 51 89 144 189 229 269 299 309 319 319 50 58 94 164 209 249 279 309 329 Decompression Table No. 2 [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed] Working chamber pressure p.s.i.g. Working period hours Decompression data Stage No. Pressure reduc. p.s.i.g. Time in stage minutes Pressure reduc. rate Min/pound Total time decompress minutes From To 14 1 2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 1 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 1 1 2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 3 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 4 1 14 0 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 5 1 14 4 2 0.20 6 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 6 1 14 4 2 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 6 7 1 14 4 2 0.20 2 4 0 14 3.50 16 8 1 14 4 2 0.20 2 4 0 14 3.50 16 Over 8 1 14 4 2 0.20 2 4 0 30 7.50 32 16 1 2 1 16 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 16 4 3 0.20 7 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 2 1 16 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 2 1 16 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 3 1 16 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 4 1 14 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 5 1 14 4 3 0.20 7 2 4 0 4 3.50 17 6 1 14 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 30 7.50 33 7 1 14 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 45 11.25 48 8 1 14 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 45 11.25 48 Over 8 1 14 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 18 1 2 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 2 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 2 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 5 1.25 8 3 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 8 2.00 11 4 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 14 3.50 17 5 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 45 11.25 48 6 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 7 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 8 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 70 17.50 73 Over 8 1 18 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 84 21.00 87 20 1 2 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 4 1.00 7 1 1 2 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 5 1.25 8 2 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 12 3.00 15 3 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 12 3.00 15 4 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 40 10.00 43 5 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 60 15.00 63 6 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 70 17.50 73 7 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 80 20.00 83 8 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 100 25.00 103 Over 8 1 20 4 3 0.20 2 4 0 110 27.50 113 22 1 2 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 6 0 6 1.00 9 1 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 6 0 6 1.00 9 1 1 2 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 6 0 13 2.20 16 2 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 6 0 21 3.50 24 3 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 6 0 35 5.85 38 4 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 6 0 65 10.83 68 5 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 6 0 90 15.00 93 6 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 4 0 100 16.67 103 7 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 6 0 110 18.35 113 8 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 6 0 125 20.80 128 Over 8 1 22 6 3 0.20 2 6 0 130 21.70 133 24 1 2 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 4 1.00 3 4 0 4 1.00 11 1 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 4 1.00 3 4 0 5 1.25 12 1 1 2 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 4 1.00 3 4 0 16 4.00 23 2 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 4 1.00 3 4 0 20 5.00 27 3 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 4 1.00 3 4 0 45 11.25 52 4 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 4 1.00 3 4 0 85 21.25 92 5 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 4 1.00 3 4 0 110 27.50 117 6 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 4 1.00 3 4 0 115 28.80 122 7 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 4 1.00 3 4 0 120 30.00 127 8 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 4 1.00 3 4 0 130 32.50 137 Over 8 1 24 8 3 0.20 2 8 4 8 2.00 3 4 0 140 35.00 151 26 1 2 1 26 10 3 0.20 2 10 4 6 1.00 3 4 0 4 1.00 13 1 1 26 10 3 0.20 2 10 4 6 1.00 3 4 0 5 1.25 14 1 1 2 1 26 10 3 0.20 2 10 4 6 1.00 3 4 0 20 5.00 29 2 1 26 10 3 0.20 2 10 4 6 1.00 3 4 0 25 6.25 34 3 1 26 10 3 0.20 2 10 4 6 1.00 3 4 0 60 15.00 69 4 1 26 10 3 0.20 2 10 4 6 1.00 3 4 0 95 23.75 104 5 1 26 10 3 0.20 2 10 4 8 1.33 3 4 0 115 28.80 126 6 1 26 10 3 0.20 2 10 4 8 1.33 3 4 0 130 32.50 141 7 1 26 10 3 2.20 2 10 4 9 1.50 3 4 0 130 32.50 142 8 1 26 10 3 0.20 2 10 4 9 1.50 3 4 0 130 32.50 142 Over 8 1 26 10 3 0.20 2 10 4 30 5.00 3 4 0 30 32.50 163 28 1 2 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 8 1.00 3 4 0 4 1.00 15 1 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 8 1.00 3 4 0 12 3.00 23 1 1 2 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 8 1.00 3 4 0 20 5.00 31 2 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 8 1.00 3 4 0 30 7.50 41 3 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 10 1.25 3 4 0 85 21.20 98 4 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 14 1.75 3 4 0 110 27.50 127 5 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 20 2.50 3 4 0 120 30.00 143 6 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 20 2.50 3 4 0 130 32.50 153 7 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 20 2.50 3 4 0 120 32.50 153 8 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 32 4.00 3 4 0 130 32.50 165 Over 8 1 28 12 3 0.20 2 12 4 50 6.25 3 4 0 130 32.50 183 30 1 2 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 10 1.00 3 4 0 4 1.00 17 1 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 10 1.00 3 4 0 15 3.75 28 1 1 2 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 10 1.00 3 4 0 25 6.25 38 2 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 14 1.40 3 4 0 45 11.25 62 3 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 17 1.70 3 4 0 85 21.20 105 4 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 30 3.00 3 4 0 110 27.50 143 5 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 35 3.50 3 4 0 130 32.50 165 6 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 35 3.50 3 4 0 130 32.50 168 7 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 45 4.50 3 4 0 130 32.50 178 8 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 55 5.50 3 4 0 130 32.50 188 Over 8 1 30 14 3 0.20 2 14 4 71 7.10 3 4 0 130 32.50 204 32 1 2 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 12 1.00 3 4 0 4 1.00 19 1 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 12 1.00 3 4 0 20 5.00 35 1 1 2 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 15 1.25 3 4 0 25 6.25 43 2 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 22 1.83 3 4 0 60 15.00 85 3 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 28 2.33 3 4 0 95 23.75 126 4 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 40 3.33 3 4 0 120 30.00 163 5 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 45 3.75 3 4 0 130 32.50 178 6 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 60 5.00 3 4 0 130 32.50 193 7 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 70 5.83 3 4 0 130 32.50 203 8 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 80 6.67 3 4 0 130 32.50 213 Over 8 1 32 16 3 0.20 2 16 4 93 7.75 3 4 0 130 32.50 226 34 1 2 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 14 1.00 3 4 0 4 1.00 21 1 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 14 1.00 3 4 0 22 5.50 39 1 1 2 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 25 1.80 3 4 0 30 7.50 58 2 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 35 2.50 3 4 0 60 15.00 98 3 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 43 3.10 3 4 0 105 26.25 151 4 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 55 3.93 3 4 0 120 30.00 178 5 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 62 4.43 3 4 0 130 32.50 195 6 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 85 6.07 3 4 0 130 32.50 218 7 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 90 6.43 3 4 0 130 32.50 223 8 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 100 7.15 3 4 0 130 32.50 233 Over 8 1 34 18 3 0.20 2 18 4 115 8.23 3 4 0 130 32.50 248 36 1 2 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 16 1.00 3 4 0 5 1.25 24 1 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 16 1.00 3 4 0 25 6.25 44 1 1 2 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 30 1.88 3 4 0 30 7.50 63 2 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 40 2.50 3 4 0 70 17.50 113 3 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 52 3.25 3 4 0 115 28.75 170 4 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 65 4.06 3 4 0 130 32.50 198 5 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 90 5.63 3 4 0 130 32.50 223 6 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 100 6.25 3 4 0 130 32.50 233 7 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 110 6.88 3 4 0 130 32.50 243 8 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 120 7.50 3 4 0 130 32.50 253 Over 8 1 36 20 3 0.20 2 20 4 140 8.75 3 4 0 130 32.50 273 38 1 2 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 16 1.00 3 6 0 9 1.50 28 1 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 16 1.00 3 6 0 30 5.00 49 1 1 2 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 20 1.25 3 6 0 50 8.34 73 2 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 30 1.88 3 6 0 95 15.83 128 3 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 35 2.19 3 6 0 140 23.35 178 4 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 50 3.12 3 6 0 150 25.00 203 5 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 55 3.44 3 6 0 165 27.50 223 6 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 70 4.38 3 6 0 165 27.50 238 7 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 85 5.32 3 6 0 165 27.50 253 8 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 95 5.93 3 6 0 165 27.50 263 Over 8 1 38 22 3 0.20 2 22 6 110 6.88 3 6 0 165 27.50 278 40 1 2 1 40 24 3 0.20 2 24 8 16 1.00 3 8 4 4 1.00 4 4 0 8 2.00 31 1 1 40 24 3 0.20 2 24 8 16 1.00 3 8 4 5 1.25 4 4 0 25 6.25 49 1 1 2 1 40 24 3 0.20 2 24 8 16 1.00 3 8 4 20 5.00 4 4 0 45 11.25 84 2 2 40 24 3 0.20 1 24 8 25 1.56 3 8 4 20 5.00 4 4 0 95 23.75 143 3 1 40 24 3 0.20 2 24 8 30 1.88 3 8 4 30 7.50 4 4 0 120 30.00 183 4 1 40 24 3 0.20 2 24 8 45 2.81 3 8 4 35 8.75 4 4 0 130 32.50 213 5 1 40 24 3 0.20 2 24 8 47 2.94 3 8 4 53 13.25 4 4 0 130 32.50 233 6 1 40 24 3 0.20 2 24 8 55 3.44 3 8 4 60 15.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 248 7 1 40 24 3 0.20 2 24 8 65 4.06 3 8 4 60 15.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 258 8 1 40 24 3 0.20 2 24 8 75 4.70 3 8 4 60 15.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 268 Over 8 1 40 24 3 0.20 2 24 8 95 5.93 3 8 4 60 15.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 288 42 1 2 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 16 1.00 3 10 4 6 1.00 4 4 0 12 3.00 37 1 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 16 1.00 3 10 4 12 2.00 4 4 0 25 6.25 56 1 1 2 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 16 1.00 3 10 4 23 3.83 4 4 0 60 15.00 102 2 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 16 1.00 3 10 4 30 5.00 4 4 0 95 23.75 144 3 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 16 1.00 3 10 4 50 8.34 4 4 0 120 30.00 189 4 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 17 1.06 3 10 4 65 10.83 4 4 0 130 32.50 215 5 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 27 1.69 3 10 4 85 14.18 4 4 0 130 32.50 245 6 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 27 1.69 3 10 4 100 16.67 4 4 0 130 32.50 260 7 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 30 1.88 3 10 4 100 16.67 4 4 0 130 32.50 263 8 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 35 2.19 3 10 4 100 16.67 4 4 0 130 32.50 268 Over 8 1 42 26 3 0.20 2 26 10 60 3.75 3 10 4 100 16.67 4 4 0 130 32.50 293 44 1 2 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 16 1.00 3 12 4 8 1.00 4 4 0 16 4.00 43 1 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 16 1.00 3 12 4 20 2.50 4 4 0 25 6.25 64 1 1 2 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 16 1.00 3 12 4 27 3.38 4 4 0 72 18.00 118 2 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 16 1.00 3 12 4 40 5.00 4 4 0 95 23.75 154 3 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 16 1.00 3 12 4 60 7.50 4 4 0 120 30.00 199 4 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 16 1.00 3 12 4 85 10.62 4 4 0 130 32.50 234 5 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 16 1.00 3 12 4 105 13.13 4 4 0 130 32.50 254 6 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 16 1.00 3 12 4 115 14.38 4 4 0 130 32.50 264 7 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 16 1.00 3 12 4 120 15.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 8 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 16 1.00 3 12 4 120 15.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 Over 8 1 44 28 3 0.20 2 28 12 40 2.50 3 12 4 120 15.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 293 46 1 2 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 30 14 16 1.00 3 14 4 10 1.00 4 4 0 15 3.75 44 1 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 30 14 16 1.00 3 14 4 25 2.50 4 4 0 30 7.50 74 1 1 2 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 30 14 16 1.00 3 14 4 35 3.50 4 4 0 85 21.20 139 2 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 30 14 16 1.00 3 14 4 47 4.70 4 4 0 105 26.25 171 3 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 30 14 16 1.00 3 14 4 65 6.50 4 4 0 130 32.50 214 4 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 30 14 16 1.00 3 14 4 95 9.50 4 4 0 130 32.50 244 5 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 30 14 16 1.00 3 14 4 120 12.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 6 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 30 14 16 1.00 3 14 4 125 12.50 4 4 0 130 32.50 274 7 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 34 14 16 1.00 3 10 4 140 14.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 289 8 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 30 14 16 1.00 3 14 4 150 15.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 299 Over 8 1 46 30 3 0.20 2 30 14 25 1.56 3 14 4 160 16.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 318 48 1 2 1 48 32 3 0.20 2 32 16 16 1.00 3 16 4 12 1.00 4 4 0 20 5.00 51 1 1 48 32 3 0.20 2 32 16 16 1.00 3 16 4 35 2.92 4 4 0 35 8.75 89 1 1 2 1 48 32 3 0.20 2 32 16 16 1.00 3 16 4 45 3.75 4 4 0 80 20.00 144 2 1 48 32 3 0.20 2 32 16 16 1.00 3 16 4 60 5.00 4 4 0 110 27.50 189 3 1 48 32 3 0.20 2 32 16 16 1.00 3 16 4 90 7.50 4 4 0 120 30.00 229 4 1 48 32 3 0.20 2 32 16 16 1.00 3 16 4 120 10.00 4 4 0 130 32.50 269 5 1 48 32 3 0.20 2 32 16 16 1.00 3 16 4 140 11.67 4 4 0 130 32.50 209 6 1 48 32 3 0.20 2 32 16 16 1.00 3 16 4 160 13.33 4 4 0 130 32.50 309 7 1 48 32 3 0.20 2 32 16 16 1.00 3 16 4 170 14.17 4 4 0 130 32.50 8 1 48 32 3 0.20 2 32 16 16 1.00 3 16 4 170 14.17 4 4 0 130 32.50 50 1 2 1 50 34 3 0.20 2 34 18 16 1.00 3 18 4 14 1.00 4 4 0 25 6.25 58 1 1 50 34 3 0.20 2 34 18 16 1.00 3 18 4 40 2.86 4 4 0 35 8.75 94 1 1 2 1 50 34 3 0.20 2 34 18 16 1.00 3 18 4 55 3.93 4 4 0 90 22.50 164 2 1 50 34 3 0.20 2 34 18 16 1.00 3 18 4 70 5.00 4 4 0 120 30.00 209 3 1 50 34 3 0.20 2 34 18 16 1.00 3 18 4 100 7.15 4 4 0 130 32.50 249 4 1 50 34 3 0.20 2 34 18 16 1.00 3 18 4 130 8.58 4 4 0 130 32.50 279 5 1 50 34 3 0.20 2 34 18 16 1.00 3 18 4 160 11.42 Decompression Table No. 2—Continued [Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed] Working chamber pressure p.s.i.g. Working period hours Decompression data Stage No. Pressure reduc. p.s.i.g. Time in stage minutes Pressure reduc. rate Min/pound Total time decompress minutes From To 4 4 0 130 32.50 309 6 1 50 34 3 0.20 2 34 18 16 1.00 3 18 4 180 12.85 4 4 0 130 32.50 329 [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] Subpart T—Demolition Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; and Secretary of Labor's Orders 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. § 1926.850 Preparatory operations. (a) Prior to permitting employees to start demolition operations, an engineering survey shall be made, by a competent person, of the structure to determine the condition of the framing, floors, and walls, and possibility of unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure. Any adjacent structure where employees may be exposed shall also be similarly checked. The employer shall have in writing evidence that such a survey has been performed. (b) When employees are required to work within a structure to be demolished which has been damaged by fire, flood, explosion, or other cause, the walls or floor shall be shored or braced. (c) All electric, gas, water, steam, sewer, and other service lines shall be shut off, capped, or otherwise controlled, outside the building line before demolition work is started. In each case, any utility company which is involved shall be notified in advance. (d) If it is necessary to maintain any power, water or other utilities during demolition, such lines shall be temporarily relocated, as necessary, and protected. (e) It shall also be determined if any type of hazardous chemicals, gases, explosives, flammable materials, or similarly dangerous substances have been used in any pipes, tanks, or other equipment on the property. When the presence of any such substances is apparent or suspected, testing and purging shall be performed and the hazard eliminated before demolition is started. (f) Where a hazard exists from fragmentation of glass, such hazards shall be removed. (g) Where a hazard exists to employees falling through wall openings, the opening shall be protected to a height of approximately 42 inches. (h) When debris is dropped through holes in the floor without the use of chutes, the area onto which the material is dropped shall be completely enclosed with barricades not less than 42 inches high and not less than 6 feet back from the projected edge of the opening above. Signs, warning of the hazard of falling materials, shall be posted at each level. Removal shall not be permitted in this lower area until debris handling ceases above. (i) All floor openings, not used as material drops, shall be covered over with material substantial enough to support the weight of any load which may be imposed. Such material shall be properly secured to prevent its accidental movement. (j) Except for the cutting of holes in floors for chutes, holes through which to drop materials, preparation of storage space, and similar necessary preparatory work, the demolition of exterior walls and floor construction shall begin at the top of the structure and proceed downward. Each story of exterior wall and floor construction shall be removed and dropped into the storage space before commencing the removal of exterior walls and floors in the story next below. (k) Employee entrances to multi-story structures being demolished shall be completely protected by sidewalk sheds or canopies, or both, providing protection from the face of the building for a minimum of 8 feet. All such canopies shall be at least 2 feet wider than the building entrances or openings (1 foot wider on each side thereof), and shall be capable of sustaining a load of 150 pounds per square foot. § 1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and ladders. (a) Only those stairways, passageways, and ladders, designated as means of access to the structure of a building, shall be used. Other access ways shall be entirely closed at all times. (b) All stairs, passageways, ladders and incidental equipment thereto, which are covered by this section, shall be periodically inspected and maintained in a clean safe condition. (c) In a multistory building, when a stairwell is being used, it shall be properly illuminated by either natural or artificial means, and completely and substantially covered over at a point not less than two floors below the floor on which work is being performed, and access to the floor where the work is in progress shall be through a properly lighted, protected, and separate passageway. § 1926.852 Chutes. (a) No material shall be dropped to any point lying outside the exterior walls of the structure unless the area is effectively protected. (b) All materials chutes, or sections thereof, at an angle of more than 45° from the horizontal, shall be entirely enclosed, except for openings equipped with closures at or about floor level for the insertion of materials. The openings shall not exceed 48 inches in height measured along the wall of the chute. At all stories below the top floor, such openings shall be kept closed when not in use. (c) A substantial gate shall be installed in each chute at or near the discharge end. A competent employee shall be assigned to control the operation of the gate, and the backing and loading of trucks. (d) When operations are not in progress, the area surrounding the discharge end of a chute shall be securely closed off. (e) Any chute opening, into which workmen dump debris, shall be protected by a substantial guardrail approximately 42 inches above the floor or other surface on which the men stand to dump the material. Any space between the chute and the edge of openings in the floors through which it passes shall be solidly covered over. (f) Where the material is dumped from mechanical equipment or wheelbarrows, a securely attached toeboard or bumper, not less than 4 inches thick and 6 inches high, shall be provided at each chute opening. (g) Chutes shall be designed and constructed of such strength as to eliminate failure due to impact of materials or debris loaded therein. § 1926.853 Removal of materials through floor openings. Any openings cut in a floor for the disposal of materials shall be no larger in size than 25 percent of the aggregate of the total floor area, unless the lateral supports of the removed flooring remain in place. Floors weakened or otherwise made unsafe by demolition operations shall be shored to carry safely the intended imposed load from demolition operations. § 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry sections, and chimneys. (a) Masonry walls, or other sections of masonry, shall not be permitted to fall upon the floors of the building in such masses as to exceed the safe carrying capacities of the floors. (b) No wall section, which is more than one story in height, shall be permitted to stand alone without lateral bracing, unless such wall was originally designed and constructed to stand without such lateral support, and is in a condition safe enough to be self-supporting. All walls shall be left in a stable condition at the end of each shift. (c) Employees shall not be permitted to work on the top of a wall when weather conditions constitute a hazard. (d) Structural or load-supporting members on any floor shall not be cut or removed until all stories above such a floor have been demolished and removed. This provision shall not prohibit the cutting of floor beams for the disposal of materials or for the installation of equipment, provided that the requirements of §§ 1926.853 and 1926.855 are met. (e) Floor openings within 10 feet of any wall being demolished shall be planked solid, except when employees are kept out of the area below. (f) In buildings of “skeleton-steel” construction, the steel framing may be left in place during the demolition of masonry. Where this is done, all steel beams, girders, and similar structural supports shall be cleared of all loose material as the masonry demolition progresses downward. (g) Walkways or ladders shall be provided to enable employees to safely reach or leave any scaffold or wall. (h) Walls, which serve as retaining walls to support earth or adjoining structures, shall not be demolished until such earth has been properly braced or adjoining structures have been properly underpinned. (i) Walls, which are to serve as retaining walls against which debris will be piled, shall not be so used unless capable of safely supporting the imposed load. § 1926.855 Manual removal of floors. (a) Openings cut in a floor shall extend the full span of the arch between supports. (b) Before demolishing any floor arch, debris and other material shall be removed from such arch and other adjacent floor area. Planks not less than 2 inches by 10 inches in cross section, full size undressed, shall be provided for, and shall be used by employees to stand on while breaking down floor arches between beams. Such planks shall be so located as to provide a safe support for the workmen should the arch between the beams collapse. The open space between planks shall not exceed 16 inches. (c) Safe walkways, not less than 18 inches wide, formed of planks not less than 2 inches thick if wood, or of equivalent strength if metal, shall be provided and used by workmen when necessary to enable them to reach any point without walking upon exposed beams. (d) Stringers of ample strength shall be installed to support the flooring planks, and the ends of such stringers shall be supported by floor beams or girders, and not by floor arches alone. (e) Planks shall be laid together over solid bearings with the ends overlapping at least 1 foot. (f) When floor arches are being removed, employees shall not be allowed in the area directly underneath, and such an area shall be barricaded to prevent access to it. (g) Demolition of floor arches shall not be started until they, and the surrounding floor area for a distance of 20 feet, have been cleared of debris and any other unnecessary materials. § 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, and material with equipment. (a) Mechanical equipment shall not be used on floors or working surfaces unless such floors or surfaces are of sufficient strength to support the imposed load. (b) Floor openings shall have curbs or stop-logs to prevent equipment from running over the edge. (c) Cranes, derricks, and other mechanical equipment. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 , 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010; 77 FR 49730, Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23843, Apr. 23, 2013] § 1926.857 Storage. (a) The storage of waste material and debris on any floor shall not exceed the allowable floor loads. (b) In buildings having wooden floor construction, the flooring boards may be removed from not more than one floor above grade to provide storage space for debris, provided falling material is not permitted to endanger the stability of the structure. (c) When wood floor beams serve to brace interior walls or free-standing exterior walls, such beams shall be left in place until other equivalent support can be installed to replace them. (d) Floor arches, to an elevation of not more than 25 feet above grade, may be removed to provide storage area for debris: Provided, (e) Storage space into which material is dumped shall be blocked off, except for openings necessary for the removal of material. Such openings shall be kept closed at all times when material is not being removed. § 1926.858 Removal of steel construction. (a) When floor arches have been removed, planking in accordance with § 1926.855(b) shall be provided for the workers engaged in razing the steel framing. (b) Cranes, derricks, and other hoisting equipment. (c) Steel construction shall be dismantled column length by column length, and tier by tier (columns may be in two-story lengths). (d) Any structural member being dismembered shall not be overstressed. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 , 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010; 77 FR 49730, Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23843, Apr. 23, 2013] § 1926.859 Mechanical demolition. (a) No workers shall be permitted in any area, which can be adversely affected by demolition operations, when balling or clamming is being performed. Only those workers necessary for the performance of the operations shall be permitted in this area at any other time. (b) The weight of the demolition ball shall not exceed 50 percent of the crane's rated load, based on the length of the boom and the maximum angle of operation at which the demolition ball will be used, or it shall not exceed 25 percent of the nominal breaking strength of the line by which it is suspended, whichever results in a lesser value. (c) The crane boom and loadline shall be as short as possible. (d) The ball shall be attached to the loadline with a swivel-type connection to prevent twisting of the loadline, and shall be attached by positive means in such manner that the weight cannot become accidentally disconnected. (e) When pulling over walls or portions thereof, all steel members affected shall have been previously cut free. (f) All roof cornices or other such ornamental stonework shall be removed prior to pulling walls over. (g) During demolition, continuing inspections by a competent person shall be made as the work progresses to detect hazards resulting from weakened or deteriorated floors, or walls, or loosened material. No employee shall be permitted to work where such hazards exist until they are corrected by shoring, bracing, or other effective means. § 1926.860 Selective demolition by explosives. Selective demolition by explosives shall be conducted in accordance with the applicable sections of subpart U of this part. Subpart U—Blasting and the Use of Explosives Authority: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. § 1926.900 General provisions. (a) The employer shall permit only authorized and qualified persons to handle and use explosives. (b) Smoking, firearms, matches, open flame lamps, and other fires, flame or heat producing devices and sparks shall be prohibited in or near explosive magazines or while explosives are being handled, transported or used. (c) No person shall be allowed to handle or use explosives while under the influence of intoxicating liquors, narcotics, or other dangerous drugs. (d) All explosives shall be accounted for at all times. Explosives not being used shall be kept in a locked magazine, unavailable to persons not authorized to handle them. The employer shall maintain an inventory and use record of all explosives. Appropriate authorities shall be notified of any loss, theft, or unauthorized entry into a magazine. (e) No explosives or blasting agents shall be abandoned. (f) No fire shall be fought where the fire is in imminent danger of contact with explosives. All employees shall be removed to a safe area and the fire area guarded against intruders. (g) Original containers, or Class II magazines, shall be used for taking detonators and other explosives from storage magazines to the blasting area. (h) When blasting is done in congested areas or in proximity to a structure, railway, or highway, or any other installation that may be damaged, the blaster shall take special precautions in the loading, delaying, initiation, and confinement of each blast with mats or other methods so as to control the throw of fragments, and thus prevent bodily injury to employees. (i) Employees authorized to prepare explosive charges or conduct blasting operations shall use every reasonable precaution including, but not limited to, visual and audible warning signals, flags, or barricades, to ensure employee safety. (j) Insofar as possible, blasting operations above ground shall be conducted between sunup and sundown. (k) Due precautions shall be taken to prevent accidental discharge of electric blasting caps from current induced by radar, radio transmitters, lightning, adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or other sources of extraneous electricity. These precautions shall include: (1) Detonators shall be short-circuited in holes which have been primed and shunted until wired into the blasting circuit. (2) The suspension of all blasting operations and removal of persons from the blasting area during the approach and progress of an electric storm; (3)(i) The prominent display of adequate signs, warning against the use of mobile radio transmitters, on all roads within 1,000 feet of blasting operations. Whenever adherence to the 1,000-foot distance would create an operational handicap, a competent person shall be consulted to evaluate the particular situation, and alternative provisions may be made which are adequately designed to prevent any premature firing of electric blasting caps. A description of any such alternatives shall be reduced to writing and shall be certified as meeting the purposes of this subdivision by the competent person consulted. The description shall be maintained at the construction site during the duration of the work, and shall be available for inspection by representatives of the Secretary of Labor. (ii) Specimens of signs which would meet the requirements of paragraph (k)(3) of this section are the following: (4) Ensuring that mobile radio transmitters which are less than 100 feet away from electric blasting caps, in other than original containers, shall be deenergized and effectively locked; (5) Compliance with the recommendations of The Institute of the Makers of Explosives with regard to blasting in the vicinity of radio transmitters as stipulated in Radio Frequency Energy—A Potential Hazard in the Use of Electric Blasting Caps, IME Publication No. 20, March 1971. (l) Empty boxes and paper and fiber packing materials, which have previously contained high explosives, shall not be used again for any purpose, but shall be destroyed by burning at an approved location. (m) Explosives, blasting agents, and blasting supplies that are obviously deteriorated or damaged shall not be used. (n) Delivery and issue of explosives shall only be made by and to authorized persons and into authorized magazines or approved temporary storage or handling areas. (o) Blasting operations in the proximity of overhead power lines, communication lines, utility services, or other services and structures shall not be carried on until the operators and/or owners have been notified and measures for safe control have been taken. (p) The use of black powder shall be prohibited. (q) All loading and firing shall be directed and supervised by competent persons thoroughly experienced in this field. (r) All blasts shall be fired electrically with an electric blasting machine or properly designed electric power source, except as provided in § 1926.906 (a) and (r). (s) Buildings used for the mixing of blasting agents shall conform to the requirements of this section. (1) Buildings shall be of noncombustible construction or sheet metal on wood studs. (2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be of concrete or of other nonabsorbent materials. (3) All fuel oil storage facilities shall be separated from the mixing plant and located in such a manner that in case of tank rupture, the oil will drain away from the mixing plant building. (4) The building shall be well ventilated. (5) Heating units which do not depend on combustion processes, when properly designed and located, may be used in the building. All direct sources of heat shall be provided exclusively from units located outside the mixing building. (6) All internal-combustion engines used for electric power generation shall be located outside the mixing plant building, or shall be properly ventilated and isolated by a firewall. The exhaust systems on all such engines shall be located so any spark emission cannot be a hazard to any materials in or adjacent to the plant. (t) Buildings used for the mixing of water gels shall conform to the requirements of this subdivision. (1) Buildings shall be of noncombustible construction or sheet metal on wood studs. (2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be of concrete or of other nonabsorbent materials. (3) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil storage facilities shall be separated from the mixing plant and located in such a manner that in case of tank rupture, the oil will drain away from the mixing plant building. (4) The building shall be well ventilated. (5) Heating units that do not depend on combustion processes, when properly designed and located, may be used in the building. All direct sources of heat shall be provided exclusively from units located outside of the mixing building. (6) All internal-combustion engines used for electric power generation shall be located outside the mixing plant building, or shall be properly ventilated and isolated by a firewall. The exhaust systems on all such engines shall be located so any spark emission cannot be a hazard to any materials in or adjacent to the plant. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993] § 1926.901 Blaster qualifications. (a) A blaster shall be able to understand and give written and oral orders. (b) A blaster shall be in good physical condition and not be addicted to narcotics, intoxicants, or similar types of drugs. (c) A blaster shall be qualified, by reason of training, knowledge, or experience, in the field of transporting, storing, handling, and use of explosives, and have a working knowledge of State and local laws and regulations which pertain to explosives. (d) Blasters shall be required to furnish satisfactory evidence of competency in handling explosives and performing in a safe manner the type of blasting that will be required. (e) The blaster shall be knowledgeable and competent in the use of each type of blasting method used. § 1926.902 Surface transportation of explosives. (a) Transportation of explosives shall meet the provisions of Department of Transportation regulations contained in 46 CFR parts 146-149, Water Carriers; 49 CFR parts 171-179, Highways and Railways; 49 CFR part 195, Pipelines; and 49 CFR parts 390-397, Motor Carriers. (b) Motor vehicles or conveyances transporting explosives shall only be driven by, and be in the charge of, a licensed driver who is physically fit. He shall be familiar with the local, State, and Federal regulation governing the transportation of explosives. (c) No person shall smoke, or carry matches or any other flame-producing device, nor shall firearms or loaded cartridges be carried while in or near a motor vehicle or conveyance transporting explosives. (d) Explosives, blasting agents, and blasting supplies shall not be transported with other materials or cargoes. Blasting caps (including electric) shall not be transported in the same vehicle with other explosives. (e) Vehicles used for transporting explosives shall be strong enough to carry the load without difficulty, and shall be in good mechanical condition. (f) When explosives are transported by a vehicle with an open body, a Class II magazine or original manufacturer's container shall be securely mounted on the bed to contain the cargo. (g) All vehicles used for the transportation of explosives shall have tight floors and any exposed spark-producing metal on the inside of the body shall be covered with wood, or other nonsparking material, to prevent contact with containers of explosives. (h) Every motor vehicle or conveyance used for transporting explosives shall be marked or placarded on both sides, the front, and the rear with the word “Explosives” in red letters, not less than 4 inches in height, on white background. In addition to such marking or placarding, the motor vehicle or conveyance may display, in such a manner that it will be readily visible from all directions, a red flag 18 inches by 30 inches, with the word “Explosives” painted, stamped, or sewed thereon, in white letters, at least 6 inches in height. (i) Each vehicle used for transportation of explosives shall be equipped with a fully charged fire extinguisher, in good condition. An Underwriters Laboratory-approved extinguisher of not less than 10-ABC rating will meet the minimum requirement. The driver shall be trained in the use of the extinguisher on his vehicle. (j) Motor vehicles or conveyances carrying explosives, blasting agents, or blasting supplies, shall not be taken inside a garage or shop for repairs or servicing. (k) No motor vehicle transporting explosives shall be left unattended. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] § 1926.903 Underground transportation of explosives. (a) All explosives or blasting agents in transit underground shall be taken to the place of use or storage without delay. (b) The quantity of explosives or blasting agents taken to an underground loading area shall not exceed the amount estimated to be necessary for the blast. (c) Explosives in transit shall not be left unattended. (d) The hoist operator shall be notified before explosives or blasting agents are transported in a shaft conveyance. (e) Trucks used for the transportation of explosives underground shall have the electrical system checked weekly to detect any failures which may constitute an electrical hazard. A certification record which includes the date of the inspection; the signature of the person who performed the inspection; and a serial number, or other identifier, of the truck inspected shall be prepared and the most recent certification record shall be maintained on file. (f) The installation of auxiliary lights on truck beds, which are powered by the truck's electrical system, shall be prohibited. (g) Explosives and blasting agents shall be hoisted, lowered, or conveyed in a powder car. No other materials, supplies, or equipment shall be transported in the same conveyance at the same time. (h) No one, except the operator, his helper, and the powderman, shall be permitted to ride on a conveyance transporting explosives and blasting agents. (i) No person shall ride in any shaft conveyance transporting explosives and blasting agents. (j) No explosives or blasting agents shall be transported on any locomotive. At least two car lengths shall separate the locomotive from the powder car. (k) No explosives or blasting agents shall be transported on a man haul trip. (l) The car or conveyance containing explosives or blasting agents shall be pulled, not pushed, whenever possible. (m) The powder car or conveyance especially built for the purpose of transporting explosives or blasting agents shall bear a reflectorized sign on each side with the word “Explosives” in letters, not less than 4 inches in height; upon a background of sharply contrasting color. (n) Compartments for transporting detonators and explosives in the same car or conveyance shall be physically separated by a distance of 24 inches or by a solid partition at least 6 inches thick. (o) Detonators and other explosives shall not be transported at the same time in any shaft conveyance. (p) Explosives, blasting agents, or blasting supplies shall not be transported with other materials. (q) Explosives or blasting agents, not in original containers, shall be placed in a suitable container when transported manually. (r) Detonators, primers, and other explosives shall be carried in separate containers when transported manually. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28, 1987] § 1926.904 Storage of explosives and blasting agents. (a) Explosives and related materials shall be stored in approved facilities required under the applicable provisions of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms regulations contained in 27 CFR part 55, Commerce in Explosives. (b) Blasting caps, electric blasting caps, detonating primers, and primed cartridges shall not be stored in the same magazine with other explosives or blasting agents. (c) Smoking and open flames shall not be permitted within 50 feet of explosives and detonator storage magazine. (d) No explosives or blasting agents shall be permanently stored in any underground operation until the operation has been developed to the point where at least two modes of exit have been provided. (e) Permanent underground storage magazines shall be at least 300 feet from any shaft, adit, or active underground working area. (f) Permanent underground magazines containing detonators shall not be located closer than 50 feet to any magazine containing other explosives or blasting agents. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] § 1926.905 Loading of explosives or blasting agents. (a) Procedures that permit safe and efficient loading shall be established before loading is started. (b) All drill holes shall be sufficiently large to admit freely the insertion of the cartridges of explosives. (c) Tamping shall be done only with wood rods or plastic tamping poles without exposed metal parts, but nonsparking metal connectors may be used for jointed poles. Violent tamping shall be avoided. The primer shall never be tamped. (d) No holes shall be loaded except those to be fired in the next round of blasting. After loading, all remaining explosives and detonators shall be immediately returned to an authorized magazine. (e) Drilling shall not be started until all remaining butts of old holes are examined for unexploded charges, and if any are found, they shall be refired before work proceeds. (f) No person shall be allowed to deepen drill holes which have contained explosives or blasting agents. (g) No explosives or blasting agents shall be left unattended at the blast site. (h) Machines and all tools not used for loading explosives into bore holes shall be removed from the immediate location of holes before explosives are delivered. Equipment shall not be operated within 50 feet of loaded holes. (i) No activity of any nature other than that which is required for loading holes with explosives shall be permitted in a blast area. (j) Powerlines and portable electric cables for equipment being used shall be kept a safe distance from explosives or blasting agents being loaded into drill holes. Cables in the proximity of the blast area shall be deenergized and locked out by the blaster. (k) Holes shall be checked prior to loading to determine depth and conditions. Where a hole has been loaded with explosives but the explosives have failed to detonate, there shall be no drilling within 50 feet of the hole. (l) When loading a long line of holes with more than one loading crew, the crews shall be separated by practical distance consistent with efficient operation and supervision of crews. (m) No explosive shall be loaded or used underground in the presence of combustible gases or combustible dusts. (n) No explosives other than those in Fume Class 1, as set forth by the Institute of Makers of Explosives, shall be used; however, explosives complying with the requirements of Fume Class 2 and Fume Class 3 may be used if adequate ventilation has been provided. (o) All blast holes in open work shall be stemmed to the collar or to a point which will confine the charge. (p) Warning signs, indicating a blast area, shall be maintained at all approaches to the blast area. The warning sign lettering shall not be less than 4 inches in height on a contrasting background. (q) A bore hole shall never be sprung when it is adjacent to or near a hole that is loaded. Flashlight batteries shall not be used for springing holes. (r) Drill holes which have been sprung or chambered, and which are not water-filled, shall be allowed to cool before explosives are loaded. (s) No loaded holes shall be left unattended or unprotected. (t) The blaster shall keep an accurate, up-to-date record of explosives, blasting agents, and blasting supplies used in a blast and shall keep an accurate running inventory of all explosives and blasting agents stored on the operation. (u) When loading blasting agents pneumatically over electric blasting caps, semiconductive delivery hose shall be used and the equipment shall be bonded and grounded. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993] § 1926.906 Initiation of explosive charges—electric blasting. (a) Electric blasting caps shall not be used where sources of extraneous electricity make the use of electric blasting caps dangerous. Blasting cap leg wires shall be kept short-circuited (shunted) until they are connected into the circuit for firing. (b) Before adopting any system of electrical firing, the blaster shall conduct a thorough survey for extraneous currents, and all dangerous currents shall be eliminated before any holes are loaded. (c) In any single blast using electric blasting caps, all caps shall be of the same style or function, and of the same manufacture. (d) Electric blasting shall be carried out by using blasting circuits or power circuits in accordance with the electric blasting cap manufacturer's recommendations, or an approved contractor or his designated representative. (e) When firing a circuit of electric blasting caps, care must be exercised to ensure that an adequate quantity of delivered current is available, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. (f) Connecting wires and lead wires shall be insulated single solid wires of sufficient current-carrying capacity. (g) Bus wires shall be solid single wires of sufficient current-carrying capacity. (h) When firing electrically, the insulation on all firing lines shall be adequate and in good condition. (i) A power circuit used for firing electric blasting caps shall not be grounded. (j) In underground operations when firing from a power circuit, a safety switch shall be placed in the permanent firing line at intervals. This switch shall be made so it can be locked only in the “Off” position and shall be provided with a short-circuiting arrangement of the firing lines to the cap circuit. (k) In underground operations there shall be a “lightning” gap of at least 5 feet in the firing system ahead of the main firing switch; that is, between this switch and the source of power. This gap shall be bridged by a flexible jumper cord just before firing the blast. (l) When firing from a power circuit, the firing switch shall be locked in the open or “Off” position at all times, except when firing. It shall be so designed that the firing lines to the cap circuit are automatically short-circuited when the switch is in the “Off” position. Keys to this switch shall be entrusted only to the blaster. (m) Blasting machines shall be in good condition and the efficiency of the machine shall be tested periodically to make certain that it can deliver power at its rated capacity. (n) When firing with blasting machines, the connections shall be made as recommended by the manufacturer of the electric blasting caps used. (o) The number of electric blasting caps connected to a blasting machine shall not be in excess of its rated capacity. Furthermore, in primary blasting, a series circuit shall contain no more caps than the limits recommended by the manufacturer of the electric blasting caps in use. (p) The blaster shall be in charge of the blasting machines, and no other person shall connect the leading wires to the machine. (q) Blasters, when testing circuits to charged holes, shall use only blasting galvanometers or other instruments that are specifically designed for this purpose. (r) Whenever the possibility exists that a leading line or blasting wire might be thrown over a live powerline by the force of an explosion, care shall be taken to see that the total length of wires are kept too short to hit the lines, or that the wires are securely anchored to the ground. If neither of these requirements can be satisfied, a nonelectric system shall be used. (s) In electrical firing, only the man making leading wire connections shall fire the shot. All connections shall be made from the bore hole back to the source of firing current, and the leading wires shall remain shorted and not be connected to the blasting machine or other source of current until the charge is to be fired. (t) After firing an electric blast from a blasting machine, the leading wires shall be immediately disconnected from the machine and short-circuited. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998] § 1926.907 Use of safety fuse. (a) Safety fuse shall only be used where sources of extraneous electricity make the use of electric blasting caps dangerous. The use of a fuse that has been hammered or injured in any way shall be forbidden. (b) The hanging of a fuse on nails or other projections which will cause a sharp bend to be formed in the fuse is prohibited. (c) Before capping safety fuse, a short length shall be cut from the end of the supply reel so as to assure a fresh cut end in each blasting cap. (d) Only a cap crimper of approved design shall be used for attaching blasting caps to safety fuse. Crimpers shall be kept in good repair and accessible for use. (e) No unused cap or short capped fuse shall be placed in any hole to be blasted; such unused detonators shall be removed from the working place and destroyed. (f) No fuse shall be capped, or primers made up, in any magazine or near any possible source of ignition. (g) No one shall be permitted to carry detonators or primers of any kind on his person. (h) The minimum length of safety fuse to be used in blasting shall be as required by State law, but shall not be less than 30 inches. (i) At least two men shall be present when multiple cap and fuse blasting is done by hand lighting methods. (j) Not more than 12 fuses shall be lighted by each blaster when hand lighting devices are used. However, when two or more safety fuses in a group are lighted as one by means of igniter cord, or other similar fuse-lighting devices, they may be considered as one fuse. (k) The so-called “drop fuse” method of dropping or pushing a primer or any explosive with a lighted fuse attached is forbidden. (l) Cap and fuse shall not be used for firing mudcap charges unless charges are separated sufficiently to prevent one charge from dislodging other shots in the blast. (m) When blasting with safety fuses, consideration shall be given to the length and burning rate of the fuse. Sufficient time, with a margin of safety, shall always be provided for the blaster to reach a place of safety. § 1926.908 Use of detonating cord. (a) Care shall be taken to select a detonating cord consistent with the type and physical condition of the bore hole and stemming and the type of explosives used. (b) Detonating cord shall be handled and used with the same respect and care given other explosives. (c) The line of detonating cord extending out of a bore hole or from a charge shall be cut from the supply spool before loading the remainder of the bore hole or placing additional charges. (d) Detonating cord shall be handled and used with care to avoid damaging or severing the cord during and after loading and hooking-up. (e) Detonating cord connections shall be competent and positive in accordance with approved and recommended methods. Knot-type or other cord-to-cord connections shall be made only with detonating cord in which the explosive core is dry. (f) All detonating cord trunklines and branchlines shall be free of loops, sharp kinks, or angles that direct the cord back toward the oncoming line of detonation. (g) All detonating cord connections shall be inspected before firing the blast. (h) When detonating cord millisecond-delay connectors or short-interval-delay electric blasting caps are used with detonating cord, the practice shall conform strictly to the manufacturer's recommendations. (i) When connecting a blasting cap or an electric blasting cap to detonating cord, the cap shall be taped or otherwise attached securely along the side or the end of the detonating cord, with the end of the cap containing the explosive charge pointed in the direction in which the detonation is to proceed. (j) Detonators for firing the trunkline shall not be brought to the loading area nor attached to the detonating cord until everything else is in readiness for the blast. § 1926.909 Firing the blast. (a) A code of blasting signals equivalent to Table U-1, shall be posted on one or more conspicuous places at the operation, and all employees shall be required to familiarize themselves with the code and conform to it. Danger signs shall be placed at suitable locations. (b) Before a blast is fired, a loud warning signal shall be given by the blaster in charge, who has made certain that all surplus explosives are in a safe place and all employees, vehicles, and equipment are at a safe distance, or under sufficient cover. (c) Flagmen shall be safely stationed on highways which pass through the danger zone so as to stop traffic during blasting operations. (d) It shall be the duty of the blaster to fix the time of blasting. (e) Before firing an underground blast, warning shall be given, and all possible entries into the blasting area, and any entrances to any working place where a drift, raise, or other opening is about to hole through, shall be carefully guarded. The blaster shall make sure that all employees are out of the blast area before firing a blast. Table U-1 Warning Signal Blast Signal All Clear Signal § 1926.910 Inspection after blasting. (a) Immediately after the blast has been fired, the firing line shall be disconnected from the blasting machine, or where power switches are used, they shall be locked open or in the off position. (b) Sufficient time shall be allowed, not less than 15 minutes in tunnels, for the smoke and fumes to leave the blasted area before returning to the shot. An inspection of the area and the surrounding rubble shall be made by the blaster to determine if all charges have been exploded before employees are allowed to return to the operation, and in tunnels, after the muck pile has been wetted down. § 1926.911 Misfires. (a) If a misfire is found, the blaster shall provide proper safeguards for excluding all employees from the danger zone. (b) No other work shall be done except that necessary to remove the hazard of the misfire and only those employees necessary to do the work shall remain in the danger zone. (c) No attempt shall be made to extract explosives from any charged or misfired hole; a new primer shall be put in and the hole reblasted. If refiring of the misfired hole presents a hazard, the explosives may be removed by washing out with water or, where the misfire is under water, blown out with air. (d) If there are any misfires while using cap and fuse, all employees shall remain away from the charge for at least 1 hour. Misfires shall be handled under the direction of the person in charge of the blasting. All wires shall be carefully traced and a search made for unexploded charges. (e) No drilling, digging, or picking shall be permitted until all missed holes have been detonated or the authorized representative has approved that work can proceed. § 1926.912 Underwater blasting. (a) A blaster shall conduct all blasting operations, and no shot shall be fired without his approval. (b) Loading tubes and casings of dissimilar metals shall not be used because of possible electric transient currents from galvanic action of the metals and water. (c) Only water-resistant blasting caps and detonating cords shall be used for all marine blasting. Loading shall be done through a nonsparking metal loading tube when tube is necessary. (d) No blast shall be fired while any vessel under way is closer than 1,500 feet to the blasting area. Those on board vessels or craft moored or anchored within 1,500 feet shall be notified before a blast is fired. (e) No blast shall be fired while any swimming or diving operations are in progress in the vicinity of the blasting area. If such operations are in progress, signals and arrangements shall be agreed upon to assure that no blast shall be fired while any person is in the water. (f) Blasting flags shall be displayed. (g) The storage and handling of explosives aboard vessels used in underwater blasting operations shall be according to provisions outlined herein on handling and storing explosives. (h) When more than one charge is placed under water, a float device shall be attached to an element of each charge in such manner that it will be released by the firing. Misfires shall be handled in accordance with the requirements of § 1926.911. § 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work under compressed air. (a) Detonators and explosives shall not be stored or kept in tunnels, shafts, or caissons. Detonators and explosives for each round shall be taken directly from the magazines to the blasting zone and immediately loaded. Detonators and explosives left over after loading a round shall be removed from the working chamber before the connecting wires are connected up. (b) When detonators or explosives are brought into an air lock, no employee except the powderman, blaster, lock tender and the employees necessary for carrying, shall be permitted to enter the air lock. No other material, supplies, or equipment shall be locked through with the explosives. (c) Detonators and explosives shall be taken separately into pressure working chambers. (d) The blaster or powderman shall be responsible for the receipt, unloading, storage, and on-site transportation of explosives and detonators. (e) All metal pipes, rails, air locks, and steel tunnel lining shall be electrically bonded together and grounded at or near the portal or shaft, and such pipes and rails shall be cross-bonded together at not less than 1,000-foot intervals throughout the length of the tunnel. In addition, each low air supply pipe shall be grounded at its delivery end. (f) The explosives suitable for use in wet holes shall be water-resistant and shall be Fume Class 1. (g) When tunnel excavation in rock face is approaching mixed face, and when tunnel excavation is in mixed face, blasting shall be performed with light charges and with light burden on each hole. Advance drilling shall be performed as tunnel excavation in rock face approaches mixed face, to determine the general nature and extent of rock cover and the remaining distance ahead to soft ground as excavation advances. § 1926.914 Definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) American Table of Distances (b) Approved storage facility (c) Blast area (d) Blaster (e) Blasting agent 4 3 (f) Blasting cap (g) Block holing (h) Conveyance (i) Detonating cord (j) Detonator (k) Electric blasting cap (l) Electric blasting circuitry (1) Bus wire. An expendable wire, used in parallel or series, in parallel circuits, to which are connected the leg wires of electric blasting caps. (2) Connecting wire. An insulated expendable wire used between electric blasting caps and the leading wires or between the bus wire and the leading wires. (3) Leading wire. An insulated wire used between the electric power source and the electric blasting cap circuit. (4) Permanent blasting wire. A permanently mounted insulated wire used between the electric power source and the electric blasting cap circuit. (m) Electric delay blasting caps (n) Explosives. (2) All material which is classified as Class A, Class B, and Class C Explosives by the U.S. Department of Transportation. (3) Classification of explosives by the U.S. Department of Transportation is as follows: Class A Explosives. Class B Explosives. Class C Explosives. (o) Fuse lighters (p) Magazine (q) Misfire (r) Mud-capping (s) Nonelectric delay blasting cap (t) Primary blasting (u) Primer (v) Safety fuse (w) Secondary blasting (x) Stemming (y) Springing (z) Water gels, or slurry explosives (aa) Semiconductive hose. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184, 35311, June 30, 1993] Subpart V—Electric Power Transmission and Distribution Source: 79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, unless otherwise noted. Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; § 1926.950 General. (a) Application Scope. Note to paragraph ( a i An employer that complies with § 1910.269 of this chapter will be considered in compliance with requirements in this subpart that do not reference other subparts of this part. Compliance with § 1910.269 of this chapter will not excuse an employer from compliance obligations under other subparts of this part. (ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, this subpart does not apply to electrical safety-related work practices for unqualified employees. (2) Other part 1926 standards. (3) Applicable part 1910 requirements. (ii) Work involving electric power generation installations shall comply with § 1910.269 of this chapter. (b) Training All employees. (ii) Each employee shall also be trained in and familiar with any other safety practices, including applicable emergency procedures (such as pole-top and manhole rescue), that are not specifically addressed by this subpart but that are related to his or her work and are necessary for his or her safety. (iii) The degree of training shall be determined by the risk to the employee for the hazard involved. (2) Qualified employees. (i) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other parts of electric equipment, (ii) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed live parts, (iii) The minimum approach distances specified in this subpart corresponding to the voltages to which the qualified employee will be exposed and the skills and techniques necessary to maintain those distances, (iv) The proper use of the special precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools for working on or near exposed energized parts of electric equipment, and (v) The recognition of electrical hazards to which the employee may be exposed and the skills and techniques necessary to control or avoid these hazards. Note to paragraph ( b For the purposes of this subpart, a person must have the training required by paragraph (b)(2) of this section to be considered a qualified person. (3) Supervision and annual inspection. (4) Additional training. (i) If the supervision or annual inspections required by paragraph (b)(3) of this section indicate that the employee is not complying with the safety-related work practices required by this subpart, or (ii) If new technology, new types of equipment, or changes in procedures necessitate the use of safety-related work practices that are different from those which the employee would normally use, or (iii) If he or she must employ safety-related work practices that are not normally used during his or her regular job duties. Note to paragraph ( b iii The Occupational Safety and Health Administration considers tasks that are performed less often than once per year to necessitate retraining before the performance of the work practices involved. (5) Type of training. (6) Training goals. (7) Demonstration of proficiency. Note 1 to paragraph ( b Though they are not required by this paragraph, employment records that indicate that an employee has successfully completed the required training are one way of keeping track of when an employee has demonstrated proficiency. Note 2 to paragraph ( b For an employee with previous training, an employer may determine that that employee has demonstrated the proficiency required by this paragraph using the following process: (1) Confirm that the employee has the training required by paragraph (b) of this section, (2) use an examination or interview to make an initial determination that the employee understands the relevant safety-related work practices before he or she performs any work covered by this subpart, and (3) supervise the employee closely until that employee has demonstrated proficiency as required by this paragraph. (c) Information transfer Host employer responsibilities. (i) The characteristics of the host employer's installation that are related to the safety of the work to be performed and are listed in paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(5) of this section; Note to paragraph ( c i This paragraph requires the host employer to obtain information listed in paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(5) of this section if it does not have this information in existing records. (ii) Conditions that are related to the safety of the work to be performed, that are listed in paragraphs (d)(6) through (d)(8) of this section, and that are known to the host employer; Note to paragraph ( c ii For the purposes of this paragraph, the host employer need only provide information to contract employers that the host employer can obtain from its existing records through the exercise of reasonable diligence. This paragraph does not require the host employer to make inspections of worksite conditions to obtain this information. (iii) Information about the design and operation of the host employer's installation that the contract employer needs to make the assessments required by this subpart; and Note to paragraph ( c iii This paragraph requires the host employer to obtain information about the design and operation of its installation that contract employers need to make required assessments if it does not have this information in existing records. (iv) Any other information about the design and operation of the host employer's installation that is known by the host employer, that the contract employer requests, and that is related to the protection of the contract employer's employees. Note to paragraph ( c iv For the purposes of this paragraph, the host employer need only provide information to contract employers that the host employer can obtain from its existing records through the exercise of reasonable diligence. This paragraph does not require the host employer to make inspections of worksite conditions to obtain this information. (2) Contract employer responsibilities. (ii) Before work begins, the contract employer shall advise the host employer of any unique hazardous conditions presented by the contract employer's work. (iii) The contract employer shall advise the host employer of any unanticipated hazardous conditions found during the contract employer's work that the host employer did not mention under paragraph (c)(1) of this section. The contract employer shall provide this information to the host employer within 2 working days after discovering the hazardous condition. (3) Joint host- and contract-employer responsibilities. (d) Existing characteristics and conditions. (1) The nominal voltages of lines and equipment, (2) The maximum switching-transient voltages, (3) The presence of hazardous induced voltages, (4) The presence of protective grounds and equipment grounding conductors, (5) The locations of circuits and equipment, including electric supply lines, communication lines, and fire-protective signaling circuits, (6) The condition of protective grounds and equipment grounding conductors, (7) The condition of poles, and (8) Environmental conditions relating to safety. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 80 FR 60040, Oct. 5, 2015] § 1926.951 Medical services and first aid. (a) General. (b) First-aid training. (1) Field work. (2) Fixed work locations. § 1926.952 Job briefing. (a) Before each job Information provided by the employer. (2) Briefing by the employee in charge. (b) Subjects to be covered. (c) Number of briefings At least one before each day or shift. (2) Additional briefings. (d) Extent of briefing Short discussion. (2) Detailed discussion. (i) If the work is complicated or particularly hazardous, or (ii) If the employee cannot be expected to recognize and avoid the hazards involved in the job. Note to paragraph ( d The briefing must address all the subjects listed in paragraph (b) of this section. (e) Working alone. § 1926.953 Enclosed spaces. (a) General. (b) Safe work practices. (c) Training. (d) Rescue equipment. (e) Evaluating potential hazards. Note to paragraph ( e The determination called for in this paragraph may consist of a check of the conditions that might foreseeably be in the enclosed space. For example, the cover could be checked to see if it is hot and, if it is fastened in place, could be loosened gradually to release any residual pressure. An evaluation also needs to be made of whether conditions at the site could cause a hazardous atmosphere, such as an oxygen-deficient or flammable atmosphere, to develop within the space. (f) Removing covers. (g) Hazardous atmosphere. (h) Attendants. Note to paragraph ( h See § 1926.965 for additional requirements on attendants for work in manholes and vaults. (i) Calibration of test instruments. (j) Testing for oxygen deficiency. (k) Testing for flammable gases and vapors. (l) Ventilation, and monitoring for flammable gases or vapors. Note to paragraph ( l See the definition of “hazardous atmosphere” for guidance in determining whether a specific concentration of a substance is hazardous. (m) Specific ventilation requirements. (n) Air supply. (o) Open flames. Note to paragraph ( o See the definition of “hazardous atmosphere” for guidance in determining whether a specific concentration of a substance is hazardous. Note to § 1926.953: Entries into enclosed spaces conducted in accordance with the permit space entry requirements of subpart AA of this part are considered as complying with this section. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 80 FR 25518, May 4, 2015] § 1926.954 Personal protective equipment. (a) General. Note to paragraph ( a Paragraph (d) of § 1926.95 sets employer payment obligations for the personal protective equipment required by this subpart, including, but not limited to, the fall protection equipment required by paragraph (b) of this section, the electrical protective equipment required by § 1926.960(c), and the flame-resistant and arc-rated clothing and other protective equipment required by § 1926.960(g). (b) Fall protection Personal fall arrest systems. (ii) Personal fall arrest equipment used by employees who are exposed to hazards from flames or electric arcs, as determined by the employer under § 1926.960(g)(1), shall be capable of passing a drop test equivalent to that required by paragraph (b)(2)(xii) of this section after exposure to an electric arc with a heat energy of 40±5 cal/cm 2 (2) Work-positioning equipment. (i) Hardware for body belts and positioning straps shall meet the following requirements: (A) Hardware shall be made of drop-forged steel, pressed steel, formed steel, or equivalent material. (B) Hardware shall have a corrosion-resistant finish. (C) Hardware surfaces shall be smooth and free of sharp edges. (ii) Buckles shall be capable of withstanding an 8.9-kilonewton (2,000-pound-force) tension test with a maximum permanent deformation no greater than 0.4 millimeters (0.0156 inches). (iii) D rings shall be capable of withstanding a 22-kilonewton (5,000-pound-force) tensile test without cracking or breaking. (iv) Snaphooks shall be capable of withstanding a 22-kilonewton (5,000-pound-force) tension test without failure. Note to paragraph ( b iv Distortion of the snaphook sufficient to release the keeper is considered to be tensile failure of a snaphook. (v) Top grain leather or leather substitute may be used in the manufacture of body belts and positioning straps; however, leather and leather substitutes may not be used alone as a load-bearing component of the assembly. (vi) Plied fabric used in positioning straps and in load-bearing parts of body belts shall be constructed in such a way that no raw edges are exposed and the plies do not separate. (vii) Positioning straps shall be capable of withstanding the following tests: (A) A dielectric test of 819.7 volts, AC, per centimeter (25,000 volts per foot) for 3 minutes without visible deterioration; (B) A leakage test of 98.4 volts, AC, per centimeter (3,000 volts per foot) with a leakage current of no more than 1 mA; Note to paragraphs ( b vii b vii Positioning straps that pass direct-current tests at equivalent voltages are considered as meeting this requirement. (C) Tension tests of 20 kilonewtons (4,500 pounds-force) for sections free of buckle holes and of 15 kilonewtons (3,500 pounds-force) for sections with buckle holes; (D) A buckle-tear test with a load of 4.4 kilonewtons (1,000 pounds-force); and (E) A flammability test in accordance with Table V-1. Table V-1—Flammability Test Test method Criteria for passing the test Vertically suspend a 500-mm (19.7-inch) length of strapping supporting a 100-kg (220.5-lb) weight Any flames on the positioning strap shall self extinguish. Use a butane or propane burner with a 76-mm (3-inch) flame The positioning strap shall continue to support the 100-kg (220.5-lb) mass. Direct the flame to an edge of the strapping at a distance of 25 mm (1 inch). Remove the flame after 5 seconds. Wait for any flames on the positioning strap to stop burning. (viii) The cushion part of the body belt shall contain no exposed rivets on the inside and shall be at least 76 millimeters (3 inches) in width. (ix) Tool loops shall be situated on the body of a body belt so that the 100 millimeters (4 inches) of the body belt that is in the center of the back, measuring from D ring to D ring, is free of tool loops and any other attachments. (x) Copper, steel, or equivalent liners shall be used around the bars of D rings to prevent wear between these members and the leather or fabric enclosing them. (xi) Snaphooks shall be of the locking type meeting the following requirements: (A) The locking mechanism shall first be released, or a destructive force shall be placed on the keeper, before the keeper will open. (B) A force in the range of 6.7 N (1.5 lbf) to 17.8 N (4 lbf) shall be required to release the locking mechanism. (C) With the locking mechanism released and with a force applied on the keeper against the face of the nose, the keeper may not begin to open with a force of 11.2 N (2.5 lbf) or less and shall begin to open with a maximum force of 17.8 N (4 lbf). (xii) Body belts and positioning straps shall be capable of withstanding a drop test as follows: (A) The test mass shall be rigidly constructed of steel or equivalent material with a mass of 100 kg (220.5 lbm). For work-positioning equipment used by employees weighing more than 140 kg (310 lbm) fully equipped, the test mass shall be increased proportionately (that is, the test mass must equal the mass of the equipped worker divided by 1.4). (B) For body belts, the body belt shall be fitted snugly around the test mass and shall be attached to the test-structure anchorage point by means of a wire rope. (C) For positioning straps, the strap shall be adjusted to its shortest length possible to accommodate the test and connected to the test-structure anchorage point at one end and to the test mass on the other end. (D) The test mass shall be dropped an unobstructed distance of 1 meter (39.4 inches) from a supporting structure that will sustain minimal deflection during the test. (E) Body belts shall successfully arrest the fall of the test mass and shall be capable of supporting the mass after the test. (F) Positioning straps shall successfully arrest the fall of the test mass without breaking, and the arrest force may not exceed 17.8 kilonewtons (4,000 pounds-force). Additionally, snaphooks on positioning straps may not distort to such an extent that the keeper would release. Note to paragraph ( b When used by employees weighing no more than 140 kg (310 lbm) fully equipped, body belts and positioning straps that conform to American Society of Testing and Materials Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment, e1 (3) Care and use of personal fall protection equipment. Note to paragraph ( b i Appendix F to this subpart contains guidelines for inspecting work-positioning equipment. (ii) Personal fall arrest systems shall be used in accordance with § 1926.502(d). Note to paragraph ( b ii Fall protection equipment rigged to arrest falls is considered a fall arrest system and must meet the applicable requirements for the design and use of those systems. Fall protection equipment rigged for work positioning is considered work-positioning equipment and must meet the applicable requirements for the design and use of that equipment. (iii) The employer shall ensure that employees use fall protection systems as follows: (A) Each employee working from an aerial lift shall use a fall restraint system or a personal fall arrest system. Paragraph (b)(2)(v) of § 1926.453 does not apply. (B) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(C) of this section, each employee in elevated locations more than 1.2 meters (4 feet) above the ground on poles, towers, or similar structures shall use a personal fall arrest system, work-positioning equipment, or fall restraint system, as appropriate, if the employer has not provided other fall protection meeting subpart M of this part. (C) Until March 31, 2015, a qualified employee climbing or changing location on poles, towers, or similar structures need not use fall protection equipment, unless conditions, such as, but not limited to, ice, high winds, the design of the structure (for example, no provision for holding on with hands), or the presence of contaminants on the structure, could cause the employee to lose his or her grip or footing. On and after April 1, 2015, each qualified employee climbing or changing location on poles, towers, or similar structures must use fall protection equipment unless the employer can demonstrate that climbing or changing location with fall protection is infeasible or creates a greater hazard than climbing or changing location without it. Note 1 to paragraphs ( b iii b iii These paragraphs apply to structures that support overhead electric power transmission and distribution lines and equipment. They do not apply to portions of buildings, such as loading docks, or to electric equipment, such as transformers and capacitors. Subpart M of this part contains the duty to provide fall protection associated with walking and working surfaces. Note 2 to paragraphs ( b iii b iii Until the employer ensures that employees are proficient in climbing and the use of fall protection under § 1926.950(b)(7), the employees are not considered “qualified employees” for the purposes of paragraphs (b)(3)(iii)(B) and (b)(3)(iii)(C) of this section. These paragraphs require unqualified employees (including trainees) to use fall protection any time they are more than 1.2 meters (4 feet) above the ground. (iv) On and after April 1, 2015, work-positioning systems shall be rigged so that an employee can free fall no more than 0.6 meters (2 feet). (v) Anchorages for work-positioning equipment shall be capable of supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee's fall, or 13.3 kilonewtons (3,000 pounds-force), whichever is greater. Note to paragraph ( b v Wood-pole fall-restriction devices meeting American Society of Testing and Materials Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment, e1 (vi) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed specifically for the following connections, snaphooks on work-positioning equipment may not be engaged: (A) Directly to webbing, rope, or wire rope; (B) To each other; (C) To a D ring to which another snaphook or other connector is attached; (D) To a horizontal lifeline; or (E) To any object that is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such that accidental disengagement could occur should the connected object sufficiently depress the snaphook keeper to allow release of the object. § 1926.955 Portable ladders and platforms. (a) General. (b) Special ladders and platforms. (1) Design load. (2) Maximum load. (3) Securing in place. (4) Intended use. (c) Conductive ladders. § 1926.956 Hand and portable power equipment. (a) General. (b) Cord- and plug-connected equipment. (1) The equipment shall be equipped with a cord containing an equipment grounding conductor connected to the equipment frame and to a means for grounding the other end of the conductor (however, this option may not be used where the introduction of the ground into the work environment increases the hazard to an employee); or (2) The equipment shall be of the double-insulated type conforming to subpart K of this part; or (3) The equipment shall be connected to the power supply through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary of not more than 50 volts. (c) Portable and vehicle-mounted generators. (1) Equipment to be supplied. (2) Equipment grounding. (3) Bonding the frame. (4) Bonding the neutral conductor. (d) Hydraulic and pneumatic tools Hydraulic fluid in insulating tools. (2) Operating pressure. Note to paragraph ( d If any hazardous defects are present, no operating pressure is safe, and the hydraulic or pneumatic equipment involved may not be used. In the absence of defects, the maximum rated operating pressure is the maximum safe pressure. (3) Work near energized parts. (4) Protection against vacuum formation. Note to paragraph ( d Use of hydraulic lines that do not have check valves and that have a separation of more than 10.7 meters (35 feet) between the oil reservoir and the upper end of the hydraulic system promotes the formation of a partial vacuum. (5) Protection against the accumulation of moisture. (6) Breaking connections. (7) Leaks. (8) Hoses. § 1926.957 Live-line tools. (a) Design of tools. (1) Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. Note to paragraph ( a Live-line tools using rod and tube that meet ASTM F711-02 (2007), Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live Line Tools, (2) Wood. (3) Equivalent tests. (b) Condition of tools Daily inspection. (2) Defects. (3) Biennial inspection and testing. (i) Each tool shall be thoroughly examined for defects. (ii) If a defect or contamination that could adversely affect the insulating qualities or mechanical integrity of the live-line tool is found, the tool shall be repaired and refinished or shall be permanently removed from service. If no such defect or contamination is found, the tool shall be cleaned and waxed. (iii) The tool shall be tested in accordance with paragraphs (b)(3)(iv) and (b)(3)(v) of this section under the following conditions: (A) After the tool has been repaired or refinished; and (B) After the examination if repair or refinishing is not performed, unless the tool is made of FRP rod or foam-filled FRP tube and the employer can demonstrate that the tool has no defects that could cause it to fail during use. (iv) The test method used shall be designed to verify the tool's integrity along its entire working length and, if the tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic, its integrity under wet conditions. (v) The voltage applied during the tests shall be as follows: (A) 246,100 volts per meter (75,000 volts per foot) of length for 1 minute if the tool is made of fiberglass, or (B) 164,000 volts per meter (50,000 volts per foot) of length for 1 minute if the tool is made of wood, or (C) Other tests that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent. Note to paragraph ( b Guidelines for the examination, cleaning, repairing, and in-service testing of live-line tools are specified in the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers' IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines, § 1926.958 Materials handling and storage. (a) General. (b) Materials storage near energized lines or equipment Unrestricted areas. (i) For lines and equipment energized at 50 kilovolts or less, the distance is 3.05 meters (10 feet). (ii) For lines and equipment energized at more than 50 kilovolts, the distance is 3.05 meters (10 feet) plus 0.10 meter (4 inches) for every 10 kilovolts over 50 kilovolts. (2) Restricted areas. Note to paragraph ( b Paragraph (b) of § 1926.966 specifies the size of the working space. § 1926.959 Mechanical equipment. (a) General requirements Other applicable requirements. (2) Inspection before use. Note to paragraph ( a Critical safety components of mechanical elevating and rotating equipment are components for which failure would result in free fall or free rotation of the boom. (3) Operator. (b) Outriggers Extend outriggers. (2) Clear view. (3) Operation without outriggers. (c) Applied loads. (d) Operations near energized lines or equipment Minimum approach distance. (2) Observer. (3) Extra precautions. (i) The energized lines or equipment exposed to contact shall be covered with insulating protective material that will withstand the type of contact that could be made during the operation. (ii) The mechanical equipment shall be insulated for the voltage involved. The mechanical equipment shall be positioned so that its uninsulated portions cannot approach the energized lines or equipment any closer than the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i). (iii) Each employee shall be protected from hazards that could arise from mechanical equipment contact with energized lines or equipment. The measures used shall ensure that employees will not be exposed to hazardous differences in electric potential. Unless the employer can demonstrate that the methods in use protect each employee from the hazards that could arise if the mechanical equipment contacts the energized line or equipment, the measures used shall include all of the following techniques: (A) Using the best available ground to minimize the time the lines or electric equipment remain energized, (B) Bonding mechanical equipment together to minimize potential differences, (C) Providing ground mats to extend areas of equipotential, and (D) Employing insulating protective equipment or barricades to guard against any remaining hazardous electrical potential differences. Note to paragraph ( d iii Appendix C to this subpart contains information on hazardous step and touch potentials and on methods of protecting employees from hazards resulting from such potentials. § 1926.960 Working on or near exposed energized parts. (a) Application. (b) General Qualified employees only. (ii) Only qualified employees may work in areas containing unguarded, uninsulated energized lines or parts of equipment operating at 50 volts or more. (2) Treat as energized. (3) At least two employees. (A) Installation, removal, or repair of lines energized at more than 600 volts, (B) Installation, removal, or repair of deenergized lines if an employee is exposed to contact with other parts energized at more than 600 volts, (C) Installation, removal, or repair of equipment, such as transformers, capacitors, and regulators, if an employee is exposed to contact with parts energized at more than 600 volts, (D) Work involving the use of mechanical equipment, other than insulated aerial lifts, near parts energized at more than 600 volts, and (E) Other work that exposes an employee to electrical hazards greater than, or equal to, the electrical hazards posed by operations listed specifically in paragraphs (b)(3)(i)(A) through (b)(3)(i)(D) of this section. (ii) Paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section does not apply to the following operations: (A) Routine circuit switching, when the employer can demonstrate that conditions at the site allow safe performance of this work, (B) Work performed with live-line tools when the position of the employee is such that he or she is neither within reach of, nor otherwise exposed to contact with, energized parts, and (C) Emergency repairs to the extent necessary to safeguard the general public. (c) Live work Minimum approach distances. (ii) No later than April 1, 2015, for voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the employer shall determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table V-8. When the employer uses portable protective gaps to control the maximum transient overvoltage, the value of the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, must provide for five standard deviations between the statistical sparkover voltage of the gap and the statistical withstand voltage corresponding to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. The employer shall make any engineering analysis conducted to determine maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage available upon request to employees and to the Assistant Secretary or designee for examination and copying. Note to paragraph ( c ii See appendix B to this subpart for information on how to calculate the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, when the employer uses portable protective gaps to reduce maximum transient overvoltages. (iii) The employer shall ensure that no employee approaches or takes any conductive object closer to exposed energized parts than the employer's established minimum approach distance, unless: (A) The employee is insulated from the energized part (rubber insulating gloves or rubber insulating gloves and sleeves worn in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this section constitutes insulation of the employee from the energized part upon which the employee is working provided that the employee has control of the part in a manner sufficient to prevent exposure to uninsulated portions of the employee's body), or (B) The energized part is insulated from the employee and from any other conductive object at a different potential, or (C) The employee is insulated from any other exposed conductive object in accordance with the requirements for live-line barehand work in § 1926.964(c). (2) Type of insulation. (A) Exposed energized parts on which the employee is not working are insulated from the employee; and (B) When installing insulation for purposes of paragraph (c)(2)(i)(A) of this section, the employee installs the insulation from a position that does not expose his or her upper arm to contact with other energized parts. (ii) When an employee uses rubber insulating gloves or rubber insulating gloves and sleeves as insulation from energized parts (under paragraph (c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section), the employer shall ensure that the employee: (A) Puts on the rubber insulating gloves and sleeves in a position where he or she cannot reach into the minimum approach distance, established by the employer under paragraph (c)(1) of this section; and (B) Does not remove the rubber insulating gloves and sleeves until he or she is in a position where he or she cannot reach into the minimum approach distance, established by the employer under paragraph (c)(1) of this section. (d) Working position Working from below. (2) Requirements for working without electrical protective equipment. (e) Making connections. (1) Connecting. (2) Disconnecting. (3) Loose conductors. (f) Conductive articles. (g) Protection from flames and electric arcs Hazard assessment. (2) Estimate of available heat energy. Note 1 to paragraph ( g Appendix E to this subpart provides guidance on estimating available heat energy. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will deem employers following the guidance in appendix E to this subpart to be in compliance with paragraph (g)(2) of this section. An employer may choose a method of calculating incident heat energy not included in appendix E to this subpart if the chosen method reasonably predicts the incident energy to which the employee would be exposed. Note 2 to paragraph ( g This paragraph does not require the employer to estimate the incident heat energy exposure for every job task performed by each employee. The employer may make broad estimates that cover multiple system areas provided the employer uses reasonable assumptions about the energy-exposure distribution throughout the system and provided the estimates represent the maximum employee exposure for those areas. For example, the employer could estimate the heat energy just outside a substation feeding a radial distribution system and use that estimate for all jobs performed on that radial system. (3) Prohibited clothing. Note to paragraph ( g This paragraph prohibits clothing made from acetate, nylon, polyester, rayon and polypropylene, either alone or in blends, unless the employer demonstrates that the fabric has been treated to withstand the conditions that may be encountered by the employee or that the employee wears the clothing in such a manner as to eliminate the hazard involved. (4) Flame-resistant clothing. (i) The employee is exposed to contact with energized circuit parts operating at more than 600 volts, (ii) An electric arc could ignite flammable material in the work area that, in turn, could ignite the employee's clothing, (iii) Molten metal or electric arcs from faulted conductors in the work area could ignite the employee's clothing, or Note to paragraph ( g iii This paragraph does not apply to conductors that are capable of carrying, without failure, the maximum available fault current for the time the circuit protective devices take to interrupt the fault. (iv) The incident heat energy estimated under paragraph (g)(2) of this section exceeds 2.0 cal/cm 2 (5) Arc rating. 2 (i) Arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's hands when the employee is wearing rubber insulating gloves with protectors or, if the estimated incident energy is no more than 14 cal/cm 2 2 2 (ii) Arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's feet when the employee is wearing heavy-duty work shoes or boots, (iii) Arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's head when the employee is wearing head protection meeting § 1926.100(b)(2) if the estimated incident energy is less than 9 cal/cm 2 2 (iv) The protection for the employee's head may consist of head protection meeting § 1926.100(b)(2) and a faceshield with a minimum arc rating of 8 cal/cm 2 2 2 (v) For exposures involving single-phase arcs in open air, the arc rating for the employee's head and face protection may be 4 cal/cm 2 Note to paragraph ( g See appendix E to this subpart for further information on the selection of appropriate protection. (6) Dates. (ii) The obligation in paragraph (g)(4)(iv) of this section for the employer to ensure that the outer layer of clothing worn by an employee is flame-resistant when the estimated incident heat energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm 2 (iii) The obligation in paragraph (g)(5) of this section for the employer to ensure that each employee exposed to hazards from electric arcs wears the required arc-rated protective equipment commences April 1, 2015. (h) Fuse handling. (i) Covered (noninsulated) conductors. (j) Non-current-carrying metal parts. (k) Opening and closing circuits under load. (2) The employer shall ensure that devices used by employees to close circuits under load conditions are designed to safely carry the current involved. Table V-3—Electrical Component of the Minimum Approach Distance (D; in Meters) at 5.1 to 72.5 kV Nominal voltage (kV) phase-to-phase Phase-to-ground Phase-to-phase D (m) D (m) 5.1 to 15.0 0.04 0.07 15.1 to 36.0 0.16 0.28 36.1 to 46.0 0.23 0.37 46.1 to 72.5 0.39 0.59 Table V-4—Altitude Correction Factor Altitude above sea level (m) A 0 to 900 1.00 901 to 1,200 1.02 1,201 to 1,500 1.05 1,501 to 1,800 1.08 1,801 to 2,100 1.11 2,101 to 2,400 1.14 2,401 to 2,700 1.17 2,701 to 3,000 1.20 3,001 to 3,600 1.25 3,601 to 4,200 1.30 4,201 to 4,800 1.35 4,801 to 5,400 1.39 5,401 to 6,000 1.44 Table V-5—Alternative Minimum Approach Distances for Voltages of 72.5 kV and Less 1 Nominal voltage (kV) phase-to-phase Distance Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 0.050 0.300 2 Avoid contact Avoid contact 0.301 to 0.750 2 0.33 1.09 0.33 1.09 0.751 to 5.0 0.63 2.07 0.63 2.07 5.1 to 15.0 0.65 2.14 0.68 2.24 15.1 to 36.0 0.77 2.53 0.89 2.92 36.1 to 46.0 0.84 2.76 0.98 3.22 46.1 to 72.5 1.00 3.29 1.20 3.94 1 2 Table V-6—Alternative Minimum Approach Distances for Voltages of More Than 72.5 kV 1 2 3 Voltage range phase to phase (kV) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 72.6 to 121.0 1.13 3.71 1.42 4.66 121.1 to 145.0 1.30 4.27 1.64 5.38 145.1 to 169.0 1.46 4.79 1.94 6.36 169.1 to 242.0 2.01 6.59 3.08 10.10 242.1 to 362.0 3.41 11.19 5.52 18.11 362.1 to 420.0 4.25 13.94 6.81 22.34 420.1 to 550.0 5.07 16.63 8.24 27.03 550.1 to 800.0 6.88 22.57 11.38 37.34 1 2 3 Table V-7—DC Live-Line Minimum Approach Distance (in Meters) With Overvoltage Factor 1 Maximum anticipated per-unit distance (m) 250 400 500 600 750 1.5 or less 1.12 1.60 2.06 2.62 3.61 1.6 1.17 1.69 2.24 2.86 3.98 1.7 1.23 1.82 2.42 3.12 4.37 1.8 1.28 1.95 2.62 3.39 4.79 1 Table V-8—Assumed Maximum Per-Unit Transient Overvoltage Voltage range Type of current Assumed maximum 72.6 to 420.0 ac 3.5 420.1 to 550.0 ac 3.0 550.1 to 800.0 ac 2.5 250 to 750 dc 1.8 [79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, as amended at 79 FR 56962, Sept. 24, 2014; 80 FR 60040, Oct. 5, 2015] § 1926.961 Deenergizing lines and equipment for employee protection. (a) Application. (b) General System operator. (2) No system operator. (3) Single crews working with the means of disconnection under the control of the employee in charge of the clearance. (4) Multiple crews. (i) The crews shall coordinate their activities under this section with a single employee in charge of the clearance for all of the crews and follow the requirements of this section as if all of the employees formed a single crew, or (ii) Each crew shall independently comply with this section and, if there is no system operator in charge of the lines or equipment, shall have separate tags and coordinate deenergizing and reenergizing the lines and equipment with the other crews. (5) Disconnecting means accessible to general public. (c) Deenergizing lines and equipment Request to deenergize. (2) Open disconnecting means. (3) Automatically and remotely controlled switches. (4) Network protectors. (i) Every network protector is maintained so that it will immediately trip open if closed when a primary conductor is deenergized; (ii) Employees cannot manually place any network protector in a closed position without the use of tools, and any manual override position is blocked, locked, or otherwise disabled; and (iii) The employer has procedures for manually overriding any network protector that incorporate provisions for determining, before anyone places a network protector in a closed position, that: The line connected to the network protector is not deenergized for the protection of any employee working on the line; and (if the line connected to the network protector is not deenergized for the protection of any employee working on the line) the primary conductors for the network protector are energized. (5) Tags. (6) Test for energized condition. (7) Install grounds. (8) Consider lines and equipment deenergized. (9) Transferring clearances. (10) Releasing clearances. (i) Notify each employee under that clearance of the pending release of the clearance; (ii) Ensure that all employees under that clearance are clear of the lines and equipment; (iii) Ensure that all protective grounds protecting employees under that clearance have been removed; and (iv) Report this information to the system operator and then release the clearance. (11) Person releasing clearance. (12) Removal of tags. (13) Reenergizing lines and equipment. § 1926.962 Grounding for the protection of employees. (a) Application. Note to paragraph ( a This section covers grounding of transmission and distribution lines and equipment when this subpart requires protective grounding and whenever the employer chooses to ground such lines and equipment for the protection of employees. (b) General. (1) Deenergized. (2) No possibility of contact. (3) No induced voltage. (c) Equipotential zone. Note to paragraph ( c Appendix C to this subpart contains guidelines for establishing the equipotential zone required by this paragraph. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will deem grounding practices meeting these guidelines as complying with paragraph (c) of this section. (d) Protective grounding equipment Ampacity. (ii) Protective grounding equipment shall have an ampacity greater than or equal to that of No. 2 AWG copper. (2) Impedance. Note to paragraph ( d American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment, Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines, (e) Testing. (f) Connecting and removing grounds Order of connection. (2) Order of removal. (g) Additional precautions. (h) Removal of grounds for test. § 1926.963 Testing and test facilities. (a) Application. Note to paragraph ( a OSHA considers routine inspection and maintenance measurements made by qualified employees to be routine line work not included in the scope of this section, provided that the hazards related to the use of intrinsic high-voltage or high-power sources require only the normal precautions associated with routine work specified in the other paragraphs of this subpart. Two typical examples of such excluded test work procedures are “phasing-out” testing and testing for a “no-voltage” condition. (b) General requirements Safe work practices. (2) Training. (c) Safeguarding of test areas Safeguarding. (2) Permanent test areas. (3) Temporary test areas. (i) Distinctively colored safety tape supported approximately waist high with safety signs attached to it, (ii) A barrier or barricade that limits access to the test area to a degree equivalent, physically and visually, to the barricade specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this section, or (iii) One or more test observers stationed so that they can monitor the entire area. (4) Removal of safeguards. (d) Grounding practices Establish and implement practices. (i) The employer shall maintain at ground potential all conductive parts accessible to the test operator while the equipment is operating at high voltage. (ii) Wherever ungrounded terminals of test equipment or apparatus under test may be present, they shall be treated as energized until tests demonstrate that they are deenergized. (2) Installation of grounds. (3) Isolated ground return. (i) The employer cannot provide an isolated ground-return conductor due to the distance of the test site from the electric energy source, and (ii) The employer protects employees from any hazardous step and touch potentials that may develop during the test. Note to paragraph ( d ii See appendix C to this subpart for information on measures that employers can take to protect employees from hazardous step and touch potentials. (4) Equipment grounding conductors. (5) Grounding after tests. (i) Before any employee applies a direct ground, the employer shall discharge high capacitance equipment or apparatus through a resistor rated for the available energy. (ii) A direct ground shall be applied to the exposed terminals after the stored energy drops to a level at which it is safe to do so. (6) Grounding test vehicles. (e) Control and measuring circuits Control wiring. (2) Instruments. (3) Routing temporary wiring. (4) Test observer. (f) Safety check Before each test. (2) Conditions to be checked. (i) Barriers and safeguards are in workable condition and placed properly to isolate hazardous areas; (ii) System test status signals, if used, are in operable condition; (iii) Clearly marked test-power disconnects are readily available in an emergency; (iv) Ground connections are clearly identifiable; (v) Personal protective equipment is provided and used as required by subpart E of this part and by this subpart; and (vi) Proper separation between signal, ground, and power cables. § 1926.964 Overhead lines and live-line barehand work. (a) General Application. (2) Checking structure before climbing. Note to paragraph ( a Appendix D to this subpart contains test methods that employers can use in ascertaining whether a wood pole is capable of sustaining the forces imposed by an employee climbing the pole. This paragraph also requires the employer to ascertain that the pole can sustain all other forces imposed by the work employees will perform. (3) Setting and moving poles. (ii) When a pole is set, moved, or removed near an exposed energized overhead conductor, the employer shall ensure that each employee wears electrical protective equipment or uses insulated devices when handling the pole and that no employee contacts the pole with uninsulated parts of his or her body. (iii) To protect employees from falling into holes used for placing poles, the employer shall physically guard the holes, or ensure that employees attend the holes, whenever anyone is working nearby. (b) Installing and removing overhead lines. (1) Tension stringing method. (2) Conductors, cables, and pulling and tensioning equipment. (i) Failure of the pulling or tensioning equipment, (ii) Failure of the conductor or cable being pulled, or (iii) Failure of the previously installed lines or equipment. (3) Disable automatic-reclosing feature. (4) Induced voltage. (ii) Unless the employer can demonstrate that the lines that employees are installing are not subject to the induction of a hazardous voltage or unless the lines are treated as energized, temporary protective grounds shall be placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential. Note to paragraph ( b ii Appendix C to this subpart contains guidelines for protecting employees from hazardous differences in electric potential as required by this paragraph. Note to paragraph ( b If the employer takes no precautions to protect employees from hazards associated with involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the induced voltage is sufficient to pass a current of 1 milliampere through a 500-ohm resistor. If the employer protects employees from injury due to involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the resultant current would be more than 6 milliamperes. (5) Safe operating condition. (6) Load ratings. (7) Defective pulling lines. (8) Conductor grips. (9) Communications. (10) Operation of pulling rig. Note to paragraph ( b Examples of unsafe conditions include: employees in locations prohibited by paragraph (b)(11) of this section, conductor and pulling line hang-ups, and slipping of the conductor grip. (11) Working under overhead operations. (c) Live-line barehand work. (1) Training. (2) Existing conditions. (i) The nominal voltage rating of the circuit on which employees will perform the work, (ii) The clearances to ground of lines and other energized parts on which employees will perform the work, and (iii) The voltage limitations of equipment employees will use. (3) Insulated tools and equipment. (ii) The employer shall ensure that employees keep tools and equipment clean and dry while they are in use. (4) Disable automatic-reclosing feature. (5) Adverse weather conditions. Note to paragraph ( c Thunderstorms in the vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that make live-line barehand work too hazardous to perform safely even after the employer implements the work practices required by this subpart. (6) Bucket liners and electrostatic shielding. (i) The employee shall be connected to the bucket liner or other conductive device by the use of conductive shoes, leg clips, or other means. (ii) Where differences in potentials at the worksite pose a hazard to employees, the employer shall provide electrostatic shielding designed for the voltage being worked. (7) Bonding the employee to the energized part. (8) Aerial-lift controls. (i) The upper controls shall be within easy reach of the employee in the bucket. On a two-bucket-type lift, access to the controls shall be within easy reach of both buckets. (ii) The lower set of controls shall be near the base of the boom and shall be designed so that they can override operation of the equipment at any time. (9) Operation of lower controls. (10) Check controls. (11) Body of aerial lift truck. (12) Boom-current test. (i) This test shall consist of placing the bucket in contact with an energized source equal to the voltage to be encountered for a minimum of 3 minutes. (ii) The leakage current may not exceed 1 microampere per kilovolt of nominal phase-to-ground voltage. (iii) The employer shall immediately suspend work from the aerial lift when there is any indication of a malfunction in the equipment. (13) Minimum approach distance. (14) Approaching, leaving, and bonding to energized part. (15) Positioning bucket near energized bushing or insulator string. (16) Handlines. (17) Passing objects to employee. (18) Nonconductive measuring device. (d) Towers and structures. (1) Working beneath towers and structures. (2) Tag lines. (3) Disconnecting load lines. (4) Adverse weather conditions. Note to paragraph ( d Thunderstorms in the vicinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that make this work too hazardous to perform even after the employer implements the work practices required by this subpart. § 1926.965 Underground electrical installations. (a) Application. (b) Access. (c) Lowering equipment into manholes Hoisting equipment. (2) Clear the area of employees. (d) Attendants for manholes and vaults When required. (2) Brief entries allowed. Note 1 to paragraph ( d Paragraph (h) of 1926.953 may also require an attendant and does not permit this attendant to enter the manhole or vault. Note 2 to paragraph ( d Paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of § 1926.960 requires employees entering manholes or vaults containing unguarded, uninsulated energized lines or parts of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more to be qualified. (3) Entry without attendant. (4) Communications. (e) Duct rods. (f) Multiple cables. (g) Moving cables. (h) Protection against faults Cables with abnormalities. (2) Work-related faults. (i) Sheath continuity. § 1926.966 Substations. (a) Application. (b) Access and working space. Note to paragraph ( b American National Standard National Electrical Safety Code, (1) Whether the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made; (2) Whether the configuration of the installation enables employees to maintain the minimum approach distances, established by the employer under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i), while the employees are working on exposed, energized parts; and (3) Whether the precautions taken when employees perform work on the installation provide protection equivalent to the protection provided by access and working space meeting ANSI/IEEE C2-2012. (c) Draw-out-type circuit breakers. (d) Substation fences. Note to paragraph ( d IEEE Std 80-2000, IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding, (e) Guarding of rooms and other spaces containing electric supply equipment When to guard rooms and other spaces. (i) If exposed live parts operating at 50 to 150 volts to ground are within 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or other working surface inside the room or other space, (ii) If live parts operating at 151 to 600 volts to ground and located within 2.4 meters (8 feet) of the ground or other working surface inside the room or other space are guarded only by location, as permitted under paragraph (f)(1) of this section, or (iii) If live parts operating at more than 600 volts to ground are within the room or other space, unless: (A) The live parts are enclosed within grounded, metal-enclosed equipment whose only openings are designed so that foreign objects inserted in these openings will be deflected from energized parts, or (B) The live parts are installed at a height, above ground and any other working surface, that provides protection at the voltage on the live parts corresponding to the protection provided by a 2.4-meter (8-foot) height at 50 volts. (2) Prevent access by unqualified persons. (3) Restricted entry. (4) Warning signs. (5) Entrances to rooms and other. (f) Guarding of energized parts Type of guarding. Note to paragraph ( f American National Standard National Electrical Safety Code, (1) Whether the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect when the installation was made; (2) Whether each employee is isolated from energized parts at the point of closest approach; and (3) Whether the precautions taken when employees perform work on the installation provide protection equivalent to the protection provided by horizontal and vertical clearances meeting ANSI/IEEE C2-2002. (2) Maintaining guards during operation. (3) Temporary removal of guards. (g) Substation entry Report upon entering. (2) Job briefing. § 1926.967 Special conditions. (a) Capacitors. Note to paragraph ( a See §§ 1926.961 and 1926.962 for requirements pertaining to the deenergizing and grounding of capacitor installations. (1) Disconnect from energized source. (2) Short circuiting units. (3) Short circuiting connected lines. (b) Current transformer secondaries. (c) Series streetlighting Applicable requirements. (2) Opening a series loop. (d) Illumination. Note to paragraph ( d See § 1926.56, which requires specific levels of illumination. (e) Protection against drowning Personal flotation devices. (2) Maintaining flotation devices in safe condition. (3) Crossing bodies of water. (f) Excavations. (g) Employee protection in public work areas Traffic control devices. (2) Controlling traffic. (3) Barricades. (4) Excavated areas. (5) Warning lights. (h) Backfeed. (i) Lasers. (j) Hydraulic fluids. (k) Communication facilities Microwave transmission. (ii) If the electromagnetic-radiation level within an accessible area associated with microwave communications systems exceeds the radiation-protection guide specified by § 1910.97(a)(2) of this chapter, the employer shall post the area with warning signs containing the warning symbol described in § 1910.97(a)(3) of this chapter. The lower half of the warning symbol shall include the following statements, or ones that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent: “Radiation in this area may exceed hazard limitations and special precautions are required. Obtain specific instruction before entering.” (iii) When an employee works in an area where the electromagnetic radiation could exceed the radiation-protection guide, the employer shall institute measures that ensure that the employee's exposure is not greater than that permitted by that guide. Such measures may include administrative and engineering controls and personal protective equipment. (2) Power-line carrier. § 1926.968 Definitions. Attendant. Automatic circuit recloser. Barricade. Barrier. Bond. Bus. Bushing. Cable. Cable sheath. Note to the definition of “cable sheath”: A cable sheath may consist of multiple layers one or more of which is conductive. Circuit. Clearance (between objects). Clearance (for work). Communication lines. Lines; Communication lines. Conductor. Contract employer. Covered conductor. Current-carrying part. Deenergized. Note to the definition of “deenergized”: The term applies only to current-carrying parts, which are sometimes energized (alive). Designated employee (designated person). Electric line truck. Electric supply equipment. Electric supply lines. Electric utility. Enclosed space. Note to the definition of “Enclosed space”. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration does not consider spaces that are enclosed but not designed for employee entry under normal operating conditions to be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this subpart. Similarly, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration does not consider spaces that are enclosed and that are expected to contain a hazardous atmosphere to be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this subpart. Such spaces meet the definition of permit spaces in subpart AA of this part, and entry into them must conform to that standard. Energized (alive, live). Energy source. Entry (as used in § 1926.953). Equipment (electric). Exposed, Exposed to contact (as applied to energized parts). Fall restraint system. First-aid training. Ground. Grounded. Guarded. Note to the definition of “guarded”: Wires that are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are not guarded. Hazardous atmosphere. (1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its lower flammable limit (LFL); (2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its LFL; Note to the definition of “hazardous atmosphere” (2): This concentration may be approximated as a condition in which the dust obscures vision at a distance of 1.52 meters (5 feet) or less. (3) Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent; (4) Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a permissible exposure limit is published in Subpart D, Occupational Health and Environmental Controls, Toxic and Hazardous Substances, Note to the definition of “hazardous atmosphere” (4): An atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not capable of causing death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its health effects is not covered by this provision. (5) Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life or health. Note to the Definition of “Hazardous Atmosphere” (5): For air contaminants for which the Occupational Safety and Health Administration has not determined a dose or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information, such as Safety Data Sheets (SDS) that comply with the Hazard Communication Standard, § 1910.1200, published information, and internal documents can provide guidance in establishing acceptable atmospheric conditions. High-power tests. High-voltage tests. High wind. (1) The wind could blow an employee from an elevated location, (2) The wind could cause an employee or equipment handling material to lose control of the material, or (3) The wind would expose an employee to other hazards not controlled by the standard involved. Note to the definition of “high wind”: The Occupational Safety and Health Administration normally considers winds exceeding 64.4 kilometers per hour (40 miles per hour), or 48.3 kilometers per hour (30 miles per hour) if the work involves material handling, as meeting this criteria, unless the employer takes precautions to protect employees from the hazardous effects of the wind. Host employer. Note to the definition of “host employer”: The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will treat the electric utility or the owner of the installation as the host employer if it operates or controls operating procedures for the installation. If the electric utility or installation owner neither operates nor controls operating procedures for the installation, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will treat the employer that the utility or owner has contracted with to operate or control the operating procedures for the installation as the host employer. In no case will there be more than one host employer. Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH). Note to the definition of “immediately dangerous to life or health”: Some materials—hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for example—may produce immediate transient effects that, even if severe, may pass without medical attention, but are followed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12-72 hours after exposure. The victim “feels normal” from recovery from transient effects until collapse. Such materials in hazardous quantities are considered to be “immediately” dangerous to life or health. Insulated. Note to the definition of “insulated”: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be insulated for the conditions to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise, it is, for the purpose of this subpart, uninsulated. Insulation (cable). Isolated. Line-clearance tree trimming. (1) For voltages to ground of 50 kilovolts or less—3.05 meters (10 feet); (2) For voltages to ground of more than 50 kilovolts—3.05 meters (10 feet) plus 0.10 meters (4 inches) for every 10 kilovolts over 50 kilovolts. Lines Communication lines. Note to the definition of “communication lines”: Telephone, telegraph, railroad signal, data, clock, fire, police alarm, cable television, and other systems conforming to this definition are included. Lines used for signaling purposes, but not included under this definition, are considered as electric supply lines of the same voltage. (2) Electric supply lines. Manhole. Minimum approach distance. Note to the definition of “minimum approach distance”: Paragraph (c)(1)(i) of § 1926.960 requires employers to establish minimum approach distances. Personal fall arrest system. Qualified employee (qualified person). Note 1 to the definition of “qualified employee (qualified person)”: An employee must have the training required by § 1926.950(b)(2) to be a qualified employee. Note 2 to the definition of “qualified employee (qualified person)”: Except under § 1926.954(b)(3)(iii), an employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who has demonstrated, in the course of such training, an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of a qualified person is a qualified person for the performance of those duties. Statistical sparkover voltage. Statistical withstand voltage. Switch. System operator. Vault. Vented vault. Voltage. Work-positioning equipment. [79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, as amended at 79 FR 56962, Sept. 24, 2014; 80 FR 25518, May 4, 2015; 85 FR 8745, Feb. 18, 2020] Appendix A to Subpart V of Part 1926 [Reserved] Appendix B to Subpart V of Part 1926—Working on Exposed Energized Parts I. Introduction Electric utilities design electric power generation, transmission, and distribution installations to meet National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), ANSI C2, requirements. Electric utilities also design transmission and distribution lines to limit line outages as required by system reliability criteria 1 1 The information in this appendix will assist employers in complying with the minimum approach-distance requirements contained in §§ 1926.960(c)(1) and 1926.964(c). Employers must use the technical criteria and methodology presented in this appendix in establishing minimum approach distances in accordance with § 1926.960(c)(1)(i) and Table V-2 and Table V-7. This appendix provides essential background information and technical criteria for the calculation of the required minimum approach distances for live-line work on electric power generation, transmission, and distribution installations. Unless an employer is using the maximum transient overvoltages specified in Table V-8 for voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the employer must use persons knowledgeable in the techniques discussed in this appendix, and competent in the field of electric transmission and distribution system design, to determine the maximum transient overvoltage. II. General A. Definitions. Exposed. Guarded. Note to the definition of “guarded”: Wires that are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are not guarded. Insulated. Note to the definition of “insulated”: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to be insulated for the conditions to which it normally is subjected. Otherwise, it is, for the purpose of this subpart, uninsulated. Isolated. Statistical sparkover voltage. Statistical withstand voltage. B. Installations energized at 50 to 300 volts. C. Exposed energized parts over 300 volts AC. 2 2 Unless the employee is using electrical protective equipment, air is the insulating medium between the employee and energized parts. The distance between the employee and an energized part must be sufficient for the air to withstand the maximum transient overvoltage that can reach the worksite under the working conditions and practices the employee is using. This distance is the minimum air insulation distance, and it is equal to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. Normal system design may provide or include a means (such as lightning arrestors) to control maximum anticipated transient overvoltages, or the employer may use temporary devices (portable protective gaps) or measures (such as preventing automatic circuit breaker reclosing) to achieve the same result. Paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of § 1926.960 requires the employer to determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table V-8, which specifies the following maximums for ac systems: 72.6 to 420.0 kilovolts 3.5 per unit. 420.1 to 550.0 kilovolts 3.0 per unit. 550.1 to 800.0 kilovolts 2.5 per unit. See paragraph IV.A.2, later in this appendix, for additional discussion of maximum transient overvoltages. D. Types of exposures. III. Determination of Minimum Approach Distances for AC Voltages Greater Than 300 Volts A. Voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts. B. Voltages of 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts. Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing. IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines. Table 1—Sparkover Distance for Rod-to-Rod Gap 60 Hz rod-to-rod sparkover Gap spacing from IEEE Std 4-1995 25 2 36 3 46 4 53 5 60 6 70 8 79 10 86 12 95 14 104 16 112 18 120 20 143 25 167 30 192 35 218 40 243 45 270 50 322 60 Source: IEEE Std 516-2009. To use this table to determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance, the employer must determine the peak phase-to-ground transient overvoltage and select a gap from the table that corresponds to that voltage as a withstand voltage rather than a critical sparkover voltage. To calculate the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for voltages between 5 and 72.5 kilovolts, use the following procedure: 1. Divide the phase-to-phase voltage by the square root of 3 to convert it to a phase-to-ground voltage. 2. Multiply the phase-to-ground voltage by the square root of 2 to convert the rms value of the voltage to the peak phase-to-ground voltage. 3. Multiply the peak phase-to-ground voltage by the maximum per-unit transient overvoltage, which, for this voltage range, is 3.0, as discussed later in this appendix. This is the maximum phase-to-ground transient overvoltage, which corresponds to the withstand voltage for the relevant exposure. 3 3 4. Divide the maximum phase-to-ground transient overvoltage by 0.85 to determine the corresponding critical sparkover voltage. (The critical sparkover voltage is 3 standard deviations (or 15 percent) greater than the withstand voltage.) 5. Determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance from Table 1 through interpolation. Table 2 illustrates how to derive the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts, before the application of any altitude correction factor, as explained later. Table 2—Calculating the Electrical Component of MAD—751 V to 72.5 kV Step Maximum system phase-to-phase voltage (kV) 15 36 46 72.5 1. Divide by √3 8.7 20.8 26.6 41.9 2. Multiply by √2 12.2 29.4 37.6 59.2 3. Multiply by 3.0 36.7 88.2 112.7 177.6 4. Divide by 0.85 43.2 103.7 132.6 208.9 5. Interpolate from Table 1 3 + (7.2/10) 1 14 + (8.7/9)*2 20 + (12.6/23)*5 35 + (16.9/26)*5 Electrical component of MAD (cm) 3.72 15.93 22.74 38.25 C. Voltages of 72.6 to 800 kilovolts. Equation 1—For voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV D C a V L-G T Where: D C a 4 4 a V L-G T In Equation 1, C C In Equation 1, the term a a. a, Peak In Equation 1, T T L-G T T L-L T L-G T L-L T L-G For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer uses this value as T D. Provisions for inadvertent movement. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration based the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance on response time-distance analysis. This technique uses an estimate of the total response time to a hazardous incident and converts that time to the distance traveled. For example, the driver of a car takes a given amount of time to respond to a “stimulus” and stop the vehicle. The elapsed time involved results in the car's traveling some distance before coming to a complete stop. This distance depends on the speed of the car at the time the stimulus appears and the reaction time of the driver. In the case of live-line work, the employee must first perceive that he or she is approaching the danger zone. Then, the worker responds to the danger and must decelerate and stop all motion toward the energized part. During the time it takes to stop, the employee will travel some distance. This is the distance the employer must add to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the total safe minimum approach distance. At voltages from 751 volts to 72.5 kilovolts, 5 5 For voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts, employees must use different work practices during energized line work. Generally, employees use live-line tools (hot sticks) to perform work on energized equipment. These tools, by design, keep the energized part at a constant distance from the employee and, thus, maintain the appropriate minimum approach distance automatically. The location of the worker and the type of work methods the worker is using also influence the length of the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance. In this higher voltage range, the employees use work methods that more tightly control their movements than when the workers perform work using rubber insulating gloves. The worker, therefore, is farther from the energized line or equipment and must be more precise in his or her movements just to perform the work. For these reasons, this subpart adopts an ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance of 0.31 m (1 foot) for voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts. Table 4 summarizes the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance for various voltage ranges. Table 4—Ergonomic Component of Minimum Approach Distance Voltage range (kV) Distance m ft 0.301 to 0.750 0.31 1.0 0.751 to 72.5 0.61 2.0 72.6 to 800 0.31 1.0 Note The ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance accounts for errors in maintaining the minimum approach distance (which might occur, for example, if an employee misjudges the length of a conductive object he or she is holding), and for errors in judging the minimum approach distance. The ergonomic component also accounts for inadvertent movements by the employee, such as slipping. In contrast, the working position selected to properly maintain the minimum approach distance must account for all of an employee's reasonably likely movements and still permit the employee to adhere to the applicable minimum approach distance. (See Figure 1.) Reasonably likely movements include an employee's adjustments to tools, equipment, and working positions and all movements needed to perform the work. For example, the employee should be able to perform all of the following actions without straying into the minimum approach distance: • Adjust his or her hardhat, • maneuver a tool onto an energized part with a reasonable amount of overreaching or underreaching, • reach for and handle tools, material, and equipment passed to him or her, and • adjust tools, and replace components on them, when necessary during the work procedure. The training of qualified employees required under § 1926.950, and the job planning and briefing required under § 1926.952, must address selection of a proper working position. E. Miscellaneous correction factors. 1. Dielectric strength of air. 6 6 2. Atmospheric effect. 3. Altitude. IV. Determining Minimum Approach Distances A. Factors Affecting Voltage Stress at the Worksite 1. System voltage (nominal). 2. Transient overvoltages. In developing requirements for minimum approach distances, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration considered the most common wave shapes and the magnitude of transient overvoltages found on electric power generation, transmission, and distribution systems. The equations in Table V-2 for minimum approach distances use per-unit maximum transient overvoltages, which are relative to the nominal maximum voltage of the system. For example, a maximum transient overvoltage value of 3.0 per unit indicates that the highest transient overvoltage is 3.0 times the nominal maximum system voltage. 3. Typical magnitude of overvoltages. Table 5—Magnitude of Typical Transient Overvoltages Cause Magnitude Energized 200-mile line without closing resistors 3.5 Energized 200-mile line with one-step closing resistor 2.1 Energized 200-mile line with multistep resistor 2.5 Reclosing with trapped charge one-step resistor 2.2 Opening surge with single restrike 3.0 Fault initiation unfaulted phase 2.1 Fault initiation adjacent circuit 2.5 Fault clearing 1.7 to 1.9 4. Standard deviation—air-gap withstand. 5. Broken Insulators. B. Minimum Approach Distances Based on Known, Maximum-Anticipated Per-Unit Transient Overvoltages 1. Determining the minimum approach distance for AC systems. 2. Calculation of reduced approach distance values. Step 1. Step 2. Step 3. Step 4. C. Methods of Controlling Possible Transient Overvoltage Stress Found on a System 1. Introduction. 2. Operation of circuit breakers. 7 7 Transient surges on an adjacent line, particularly for double circuit construction, may cause a significant overvoltage on the line on which employees are working. The employer's engineering analysis must account for coupling to adjacent lines. 3. Surge arresters. The employer may use properly designed arresters to control transient overvoltages along a transmission line and thereby reduce the requisite length of the insulator string and possibly the maximum transient overvoltage on the line. 8 8 4. Switching Restrictions. D. Minimum Approach Distance Based on Control of Maximum Transient Overvoltage at the Worksite When the employer institutes control of maximum transient overvoltage at the worksite by installing portable protective gaps, the employer may calculate the minimum approach distance as follows: Step 1. 9 9 Step 2. 10 11 10 11 Step 3. V PPG Peak Step 4. Step 5. T 12 T 12 T Note: All rounding must be to the next higher value (that is, always round up). Sample protective gap calculations. Problem: Step 1. 13 13 This value equals the withstand voltage of the protective gap. Step 2. 561 kV kV For example, if a protective gap with a 1.22-m (4.0-foot) spacing tested to a critical sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts (crest), select this gap spacing. Step 3. V PPG Peak 665 kV kV This value corresponds to the withstand voltage of the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. Step 4. T: Step 5. T MAD E. Location of Protective Gaps 1. Adjacent structures. 2. Terminal stations. T T 3. Worksite. F. Disabling automatic reclosing. • To prevent reenergization of a circuit faulted during the work, which could create a hazard or result in more serious injuries or damage than the injuries or damage produced by the original fault; • To prevent any transient overvoltage caused by the switching surge that would result if the circuit were reenergized. However, due to system stability considerations, it may not always be feasible to disable the automatic-reclosing feature. V. Minimum Approach-Distance Tables A. Legacy tables. Table 6—Minimum Approach Distances Until March 31, 2015 Voltage range Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 2.1 to 15.0 0.64 2.1 0.61 2.0 15.1 to 35.0 0.71 2.3 0.71 2.3 35.1 to 46.0 0.76 2.5 0.76 2.5 46.1 to 72.5 0.91 3.0 0.91 3.0 72.6 to 121 1.02 3.3 1.37 4.5 138 to 145 1.07 3.5 1.52 5.0 161 to 169 1.12 3.7 1.68 5.5 230 to 242 1.52 5.0 2.54 8.3 345 to 362 * 2.13 7.0 4.06 13.3 500 to 552 * 3.35 11.0 6.10 20.0 700 to 765 * 4.57 15.0 9.45 31.0 * The minimum approach distance may be the shortest distance between the energized part and the grounded surface. B. Alternative minimum approach distances. Table 7—AC Minimum Approach Distances—72.6 to 121.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 0.67 2.2 0.84 2.8 1.6 0.69 2.3 0.87 2.9 1.7 0.71 2.3 0.90 3.0 1.8 0.74 2.4 0.93 3.1 1.9 0.76 2.5 0.96 3.1 2.0 0.78 2.6 0.99 3.2 2.1 0.81 2.7 1.01 3.3 2.2 0.83 2.7 1.04 3.4 2.3 0.85 2.8 1.07 3.5 2.4 0.88 2.9 1.10 3.6 2.5 0.90 3.0 1.13 3.7 2.6 0.92 3.0 1.16 3.8 2.7 0.95 3.1 1.19 3.9 2.8 0.97 3.2 1.22 4.0 2.9 0.99 3.2 1.24 4.1 3.0 1.02 3.3 1.27 4.2 3.1 1.04 3.4 1.30 4.3 3.2 1.06 3.5 1.33 4.4 3.3 1.09 3.6 1.36 4.5 3.4 1.11 3.6 1.39 4.6 3.5 1.13 3.7 1.42 4.7 Table 8—AC Minimum Approach Distances—121.1 to 145.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground rxposure Phase-to-phase rxposure m ft m ft 1.5 0.74 2.4 0.95 3.1 1.6 0.76 2.5 0.98 3.2 1.7 0.79 2.6 1.02 3.3 1.8 0.82 2.7 1.05 3.4 1.9 0.85 2.8 1.08 3.5 2.0 0.88 2.9 1.12 3.7 2.1 0.90 3.0 1.15 3.8 2.2 0.93 3.1 1.19 3.9 2.3 0.96 3.1 1.22 4.0 2.4 0.99 3.2 1.26 4.1 2.5 1.02 3.3 1.29 4.2 2.6 1.04 3.4 1.33 4.4 2.7 1.07 3.5 1.36 4.5 2.8 1.10 3.6 1.39 4.6 2.9 1.13 3.7 1.43 4.7 3.0 1.16 3.8 1.46 4.8 3.1 1.19 3.9 1.50 4.9 3.2 1.21 4.0 1.53 5.0 3.3 1.24 4.1 1.57 5.2 3.4 1.27 4.2 1.60 5.2 3.5 1.30 4.3 1.64 5.4 Table 9—AC Minimum Approach Distances—145.1 to 169.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 0.81 2.7 1.05 3.4 1.6 0.84 2.8 1.09 3.6 1.7 0.87 2.9 1.13 3.7 1.8 0.90 3.0 1.17 3.8 1.9 0.94 3.1 1.21 4.0 2.0 0.97 3.2 1.25 4.1 2.1 1.00 3.3 1.29 4.2 2.2 1.03 3.4 1.33 4.4 2.3 1.07 3.5 1.37 4.5 2.4 1.10 3.6 1.41 4.6 2.5 1.13 3.7 1.45 4.8 2.6 1.17 3.8 1.49 4.9 2.7 1.20 3.9 1.53 5.0 2.8 1.23 4.0 1.57 5.2 2.9 1.26 4.1 1.61 5.3 3.0 1.30 4.3 1.65 5.4 3.1 1.33 4.4 1.70 5.6 3.2 1.36 4.5 1.76 5.8 3.3 1.39 4.6 1.82 6.0 3.4 1.43 4.7 1.88 6.2 3.5 1.46 4.8 1.94 6.4 Table 10—AC Minimum Approach Distances—169.1 to 242.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 1.02 3.3 1.37 4.5 1.6 1.06 3.5 1.43 4.7 1.7 1.11 3.6 1.48 4.9 1.8 1.16 3.8 1.54 5.1 1.9 1.21 4.0 1.60 5.2 2.0 1.25 4.1 1.66 5.4 2.1 1.30 4.3 1.73 5.7 2.2 1.35 4.4 1.81 5.9 2.3 1.39 4.6 1.90 6.2 2.4 1.44 4.7 1.99 6.5 2.5 1.49 4.9 2.08 6.8 2.6 1.53 5.0 2.17 7.1 2.7 1.58 5.2 2.26 7.4 2.8 1.63 5.3 2.36 7.7 2.9 1.67 5.5 2.45 8.0 3.0 1.72 5.6 2.55 8.4 3.1 1.77 5.8 2.65 8.7 3.2 1.81 5.9 2.76 9.1 3.3 1.88 6.2 2.86 9.4 3.4 1.95 6.4 2.97 9.7 3.5 2.01 6.6 3.08 10.1 Table 11—AC Minimum Approach Distances—242.1 to 362.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 1.37 4.5 1.99 6.5 1.6 1.44 4.7 2.13 7.0 1.7 1.51 5.0 2.27 7.4 1.8 1.58 5.2 2.41 7.9 1.9 1.65 5.4 2.56 8.4 2.0 1.72 5.6 2.71 8.9 2.1 1.79 5.9 2.87 9.4 2.2 1.87 6.1 3.03 9.9 2.3 1.97 6.5 3.20 10.5 2.4 2.08 6.8 3.37 11.1 2.5 2.19 7.2 3.55 11.6 2.6 2.29 7.5 3.73 12.2 2.7 2.41 7.9 3.91 12.8 2.8 2.52 8.3 4.10 13.5 2.9 2.64 8.7 4.29 14.1 3.0 2.76 9.1 4.49 14.7 3.1 2.88 9.4 4.69 15.4 3.2 3.01 9.9 4.90 16.1 3.3 3.14 10.3 5.11 16.8 3.4 3.27 10.7 5.32 17.5 3.5 3.41 11.2 5.52 18.1 Table 12—AC Minimum Approach Distances—362.1 to 420.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 1.53 5.0 2.40 7.9 1.6 1.62 5.3 2.58 8.5 1.7 1.70 5.6 2.75 9.0 1.8 1.78 5.8 2.94 9.6 1.9 1.88 6.2 3.13 10.3 2.0 1.99 6.5 3.33 10.9 2.1 2.12 7.0 3.53 11.6 2.2 2.24 7.3 3.74 12.3 2.3 2.37 7.8 3.95 13.0 2.4 2.50 8.2 4.17 13.7 2.5 2.64 8.7 4.40 14.4 2.6 2.78 9.1 4.63 15.2 2.7 2.93 9.6 4.87 16.0 2.8 3.07 10.1 5.11 16.8 2.9 3.23 10.6 5.36 17.6 3.0 3.38 11.1 5.59 18.3 3.1 3.55 11.6 5.82 19.1 3.2 3.72 12.2 6.07 19.9 3.3 3.89 12.8 6.31 20.7 3.4 4.07 13.4 6.56 21.5 3.5 4.25 13.9 6.81 22.3 Table 13—AC Minimum Approach Distances—420.1 to 550.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 1.95 6.4 3.46 11.4 1.6 2.11 6.9 3.73 12.2 1.7 2.28 7.5 4.02 13.2 1.8 2.45 8.0 4.31 14.1 1.9 2.62 8.6 4.61 15.1 2.0 2.81 9.2 4.92 16.1 2.1 3.00 9.8 5.25 17.2 2.2 3.20 10.5 5.55 18.2 2.3 3.40 11.2 5.86 19.2 2.4 3.62 11.9 6.18 20.3 2.5 3.84 12.6 6.50 21.3 2.6 4.07 13.4 6.83 22.4 2.7 4.31 14.1 7.18 23.6 2.8 4.56 15.0 7.52 24.7 2.9 4.81 15.8 7.88 25.9 3.0 5.07 16.6 8.24 27.0 Table 14—AC Minimum Approach Distances—550.1 to 800.0 kV T (p.u.) Phase-to-ground exposure Phase-to-phase exposure m ft m ft 1.5 3.16 10.4 5.97 19.6 1.6 3.46 11.4 6.43 21.1 1.7 3.78 12.4 6.92 22.7 1.8 4.12 13.5 7.42 24.3 1.9 4.47 14.7 7.93 26.0 2.0 4.83 15.8 8.47 27.8 2.1 5.21 17.1 9.02 29.6 2.2 5.61 18.4 9.58 31.4 2.3 6.02 19.8 10.16 33.3 2.4 6.44 21.1 10.76 35.3 2.5 6.88 22.6 11.38 37.3 Notes to Table 7 through Table 14: 1. The employer must determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis, as required by § 1926.960(c)(1)(ii), or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table V-8. 2. For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer must demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap. 3. The worksite must be at an elevation of 900 meters (3,000 feet) or less above sea level. [79 FR 20696, Apr. 11, 2014, as amended at 79 FR 56962, Sept. 24, 2014] Appendix C to Subpart V of Part 1926—Protection From Hazardous Differences in Electric Potential I. Introduction Current passing through an impedance impresses voltage across that impedance. Even conductors have some, albeit low, value of impedance. Therefore, if a “grounded” 1 2 1 2 II. Voltage-Gradient Distribution A. Voltage-gradient distribution curve. B. Step and touch potentials. Touch potential is the voltage between the energized grounded object (again, the electrode) and the feet of a person in contact with the object. In Figure 1, the touch potential is equal to the difference in voltage between the electrode (which is at a distance of 0 meters) and a point some distance away from the electrode (where the point represents the location of the feet of the person in contact with the object). The touch potential could be nearly the full voltage across the grounded object if that object is grounded at a point remote from the place where the person is in contact with it. For example, a crane grounded to the system neutral and that contacts an energized line would expose any person in contact with the crane or its uninsulated load line to a touch potential nearly equal to the full fault voltage. Figure 2 illustrates step and touch potentials. III. Protecting Workers From Hazardous Differences in Electrical Potential A. Definitions. Bond. Bonding cable (bonding jumper). Cluster bar. Ground. Grounding cable (grounding jumper). Ground mat (grounding grid). B. Analyzing the hazard. C. Protecting workers on the ground. 1. An equipotential zone will protect workers within it from hazardous step and touch potentials. (See Figure 3.) Equipotential zones will not, however, protect employees located either wholly or partially outside the protected area. The employer can establish an equipotential zone for workers on the ground, with respect to a grounded object, through the use of a metal mat connected to the grounded object. The employer can use a grounding grid to equalize the voltage within the grid or bond conductive objects in the immediate work area to minimize the potential between the objects and between each object and ground. (Bonding an object outside the work area can increase the touch potential to that object, however.) Section III.D of this appendix discusses equipotential zones for employees working on deenergized and grounded power lines. 2. Insulating equipment, such as rubber gloves, can protect employees handling grounded equipment and conductors from hazardous touch potentials. The insulating equipment must be rated for the highest voltage that can be impressed on the grounded objects under fault conditions (rather than for the full system voltage). 3. Restricting employees from areas where hazardous step or touch potentials could arise can protect employees not directly involved in performing the operation. The employer must ensure that employees on the ground in the vicinity of transmission structures are at a distance where step voltages would be insufficient to cause injury. Employees must not handle grounded conductors or equipment likely to become energized to hazardous voltages unless the employees are within an equipotential zone or protected by insulating equipment. D. Protecting employees working on deenergized and grounded power lines. 3 3 Finally, Section III.D.3 of this appendix discusses other safety considerations that will help the employer comply with other requirements in § 1926.962. Following these guidelines will protect workers from hazards that can occur when a deenergized and grounded line becomes energized. 1. Determining safe body current limits. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 1048-2003, IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines, where I t To use this equation to set safe voltage limits in an equipotential zone around the worker, the employer will need to assume a value for the resistance of the worker's body. IEEE Std 1048-2003 states that “total body resistance is usually taken as 1000 Ω for determining . . . body current limits.” However, employers should be aware that the impedance of a worker's body can be substantially less than that value. For instance, IEEE Std 1048-2003 reports a minimum hand-to-hand resistance of 610 ohms and an internal body resistance of 500 ohms. The internal resistance of the body better represents the minimum resistance of a worker's body when the skin resistance drops near zero, which occurs, for example, when there are breaks in the worker's skin, for instance, from cuts or from blisters formed as a result of the current from an electric shock, or when the worker is wet at the points of contact. Employers may use the IEEE Std 1048-2003 equation to determine safe body current limits only if the employer protects workers from hazards associated with involuntary muscle reactions from electric shock (for example, the hazard to a worker from falling as a result of an electric shock). Moreover, the equation applies only when the duration of the electric shock is limited. If the precautions the employer takes, including those required by applicable standards, do not adequately protect employees from hazards associated with involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the induced voltage is sufficient to pass a current of 1 milliampere through a 500-ohm resistor. (The 500-ohm resistor represents the resistance of an employee. The 1-milliampere current is the threshold of perception.) Finally, if the employer protects employees from injury due to involuntary reactions from electric shock, but the duration of the electric shock is unlimited (that is, when the fault current at the work location will be insufficient to trip the devices protecting the circuit), a hazard exists if the resultant current would be more than 6 milliamperes (the recognized let-go threshold for workers 4 4 2. Acceptable methods of grounding for employers that do not perform an engineering determination. Paragraph (c) of § 1926.962 does not require grounding methods to meet the criteria embodied in these principles. Instead, the paragraph requires that protective grounds be “placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential.” However, when the employer's grounding practices do not follow these two principles, the employer will need to perform an engineering analysis to make the demonstration required by § 1926.962(c). i. Ensuring that the circuit opens in the fastest available clearing time. In addition, if employees are working on a three-phase system, the grounding method must short circuit all three phases. Short circuiting all phases will ensure faster clearing and lower the current through the grounding cable connecting the deenergized line to ground, thereby lowering the voltage across that cable. The short circuit need not be at the worksite; however, the employer must treat any conductor that is not grounded at the worksite as energized because the ungrounded conductors will be energized at fault voltage during a fault. ii. Ensuring that the potential differences between conductive objects in the employee's work area are as low as possible. The employer must use bonding cables to bond conductive objects, except for metallic objects bonded through metal-to-metal contact. The employer must ensure that metal-to-metal contacts are tight and free of contamination, such as oxidation, that can increase the impedance across the connection. For example, a bolted connection between metal lattice tower members is acceptable if the connection is tight and free of corrosion and other contamination. Figure 4 shows how to create an equipotential zone for metal lattice towers. Wood poles are conductive objects. The poles can absorb moisture and conduct electricity, particularly at distribution and transmission voltages. Consequently, the employer must either: (1) Provide a conductive platform, bonded to a grounding cable, on which the worker stands or (2) use cluster bars to bond wood poles to the grounding cable. The employer must ensure that employees install the cluster bar below, and close to, the worker's feet. The inner portion of the wood pole is more conductive than the outer shell, so it is important that the cluster bar be in conductive contact with a metal spike or nail that penetrates the wood to a depth greater than or equal to the depth the worker's climbing gaffs will penetrate the wood. For example, the employer could mount the cluster bar on a bare pole ground wire fastened to the pole with nails or staples that penetrate to the required depth. Alternatively, the employer may temporarily nail a conductive strap to the pole and connect the strap to the cluster bar. Figure 5 shows how to create an equipotential zone for wood poles. For underground systems, employers commonly install grounds at the points of disconnection of the underground cables. These grounding points are typically remote from the manhole or underground vault where employees will be working on the cable. Workers in contact with a cable grounded at a remote location can experience hazardous potential differences if the cable becomes energized or if a fault occurs on a different, but nearby, energized cable. The fault current causes potential gradients in the earth, and a potential difference will exist between the earth where the worker is standing and the earth where the cable is grounded. Consequently, to create an equipotential zone for the worker, the employer must provide a means of connecting the deenergized cable to ground at the worksite by having the worker stand on a conductive mat bonded to the deenergized cable. If the cable is cut, the employer must install a bond across the opening in the cable or install one bond on each side of the opening to ensure that the separate cable ends are at the same potential. The employer must protect the worker from any hazardous differences in potential any time there is no bond between the mat and the cable (for example, before the worker installs the bonds). 3. Other safety-related considerations. 5 5 i. Maintenance of grounding equipment. ii. Grounding cable length and movement. Appendix D to Subpart V of Part 1926—Methods of Inspecting and Testing Wood Poles I. Introduction When employees are to perform work on a wood pole, it is important to determine the condition of the pole before employees climb it. The weight of the employee, the weight of equipment to be installed, and other working stresses (such as the removal or retensioning of conductors) can lead to the failure of a defective pole or a pole that is not designed to handle the additional stresses. 1 1 If the employer finds the pole to be unsafe to climb or to work from, the employer must secure the pole so that it does not fail while an employee is on it. The employer can secure the pole by a line truck boom, by ropes or guys, or by lashing a new pole alongside it. If a new one is lashed alongside the defective pole, employees should work from the new one. II. Inspecting Wood Poles A qualified employee should inspect wood poles for the following conditions: 2 2 A. General condition. B. Cracks. C. Holes. D. Shell rot and decay. E. Knots. F. Depth of setting. G. Soil conditions. H. Burn marks. III. Testing Wood Poles The following tests, which are from § 1910.268(n)(3) of this chapter, are acceptable methods of testing wood poles: A. Hammer test. B. Rocking test. Appendix E to Subpart V of Part 1926—Protection From Flames and Electric Arcs I. Introduction Paragraph (g) of § 1926.960 addresses protecting employees from flames and electric arcs. This paragraph requires employers to: (1) Assess the workplace for flame and electric-arc hazards (paragraph (g)(1)); (2) estimate the available heat energy from electric arcs to which employees would be exposed (paragraph (g)(2)); (3) ensure that employees wear clothing that will not melt, or ignite and continue to burn, when exposed to flames or the estimated heat energy (paragraph (g)(3)); and (4) ensure that employees wear flame-resistant clothing 1 1 Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards, Standard Specification for Arc and Flame Resistant Rainwear. II. Assessing the Workplace for Flame and Electric-Arc Hazards Paragraph (g)(1) of § 1926.960 requires the employer to assess the workplace to identify employees exposed to hazards from flames or from electric arcs. This provision ensures that the employer evaluates employee exposure to flames and electric arcs so that employees who face such exposures receive the required protection. The employer must conduct an assessment for each employee who performs work on or near exposed, energized parts of electric circuits. A. Assessment Guidelines Sources electric arcs. • Energized circuit parts not guarded or insulated, • Switching devices that produce electric arcs in normal operation, • Sliding parts that could fault during operation (for example, rack-mounted circuit breakers), and • Energized electric equipment that could fail (for example, electric equipment with damaged insulation or with evidence of arcing or overheating). Exposure to flames. • The proximity of employees to open flames, and • For flammable material in the work area, whether there is a reasonable likelihood that an electric arc or an open flame can ignite the material. Probability that an electric arc will occur. • For energized circuit parts not guarded or insulated, whether conductive objects can come too close to or fall onto the energized parts, • For exposed, energized circuit parts, whether the employee is closer to the part than the minimum approach distance established by the employer (as permitted by § 1926.960(c)(1)(iii)). • Whether the operation of electric equipment with sliding parts that could fault during operation is part of the normal operation of the equipment or occurs during servicing or maintenance, and • For energized electric equipment, whether there is evidence of impending failure, such as evidence of arcing or overheating. B. Examples Table 1 provides task-based examples of exposure assessments. Table 1—Example Assessments for Various Tasks Task Is employee exposed to flame or electric-arc hazard? Normal operation of enclosed equipment, such as closing or opening a switch The employer properly installs and maintains enclosed equipment, and there is no evidence of impending failure No. There is evidence of arcing or overheating Yes. Parts of the equipment are loose or sticking, or the equipment otherwise exhibits signs of lack of maintenance Yes. Servicing electric equipment, such as racking in a circuit breaker or replacing a switch Yes. Inspection of electric equipment with exposed energized parts The employee is not holding conductive objects and remains outside the minimum approach distance established by the employer No. The employee is holding a conductive object, such as a flashlight, that could fall or otherwise contact energized parts (irrespective of whether the employee maintains the minimum approach distance) Yes. The employee is closer than the minimum approach distance established by the employer (for example, when wearing rubber insulating gloves or rubber insulating gloves and sleeves) Yes. Using open flames, for example, in wiping cable splice sleeves Yes. III. Protection Against Burn Injury A. Estimating Available Heat Energy Calculation methods. Table 2—Methods of Calculating Incident Heat Energy From an Electric Arc 1. Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, 2. Doughty, T.E., Neal, T.E., and Floyd II, H.L., “Predicting Incident Energy to Better Manage the Electric Arc Hazard on 600 V Power Distribution Systems,” Record of Conference Papers IEEE IAS 45th Annual Petroleum and Chemical Industry Conference, 3. Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations, 4. ARCPRO, a commercially available software program developed by Kinectrics, Toronto, ON, CA. * This appendix refers to IEEE Std 1584-2002 with both amendments as IEEE Std 1584b-2011. The amount of heat energy calculated by any of the methods is approximatelyinversely proportional to the square of the distance between the employee and the arc. In other words, if the employee is very close to the arc, the heat energy is very high; but if the employee is just a few more centimeters away, the heat energy drops substantially. Thus, estimating the distance from the arc to the employee is key to protecting employees. The employer must select a method of estimating incident heat energy that provides a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy for the exposure involved. Table 3 shows which methods provide reasonable estimates for various exposures. Table 3—Selecting a Reasonable Incident-Energy Calculation Method 1 Incident-energy calculation method 600 V and Less 2 601 V to 15 kV 2 More than 15 kV 1Φ 3Φa 3Φb 1Φ 3Φa 3Φb 1Φ 3Φa 3Φb NFPA 70E-2012 Annex D (Lee equation) Y-C Y N Y-C Y-C N N 3 N 3 N 3 Doughty, Neal, and Floyd Y-C Y Y N N N N N N IEEE Std 1584b-2011 Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N ARCPRO Y N N Y N N Y Y 4 Y 4 Key: 1Φ: Single-phase arc in open air 3Φa: Three-phase arc in open air 3Φb: Three-phase arc in an enclosure (box) Y: Acceptable; produces a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc N: Not acceptable; does not produce a reasonable estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc Y-C: Acceptable; produces a reasonable, but conservative, estimate of incident heat energy from this type of electric arc. Notes: 1 2 3 2 4 Selecting a reasonable distance from the employee to the arc. National Electrical Safety Code, IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations, Table 4—Selecting a Reasonable Distance from the Employee to the Electric Arc Class of equipment Single-phase arc mm Three-phase arc mm Cable NA * 455 (18) Low voltage MCCs and panelboards NA 455 (18) Low-voltage switchgear NA 610 (24) 5-kV switchgear NA 910 (36) 15-kV switchgear NA 910 (36) Single conductors in air (up to 46 kilovolts), work with rubber insulating gloves 380 (15) NA Single conductors in air, work with live-line tools and live-line barehand work MAD−(2 × kV kV † NA * NA = not applicable. † MAD kV Selecting a reasonable arc gap. For three-phase arcs in open air and in enclosures, the arc gap will generally be dependent on the spacing between parts energized at different electrical potentials. Documents such as IEEE Std 1584b-2011 provide information on these distances. Employers may select a reasonable arc gap from Table 5, or they may select any other reasonable arc gap based on sparkover distance or on the spacing between (1) live parts at different potentials or (2) live parts and grounded parts (for example, bus or conductor spacings in equipment). In any event, the employer must use an estimate that reasonably resembles the actual exposures faced by the employee. Table 5—Selecting a Reasonable Arc Gap Class of equipment Single-phase arc mm Three-phase arc mm 1 Cable NA 2 13 (0.5) Low voltage MCCs and panelboards NA 25 (1.0) Low-voltage switchgear NA 32 (1.25) 5-kV switchgear NA 104 (4.0) 15-kV switchgear NA 152 (6.0) Single conductors in air, 15 kV and less 51 (2.0) Phase conductor spacings. Single conductor in air, more than 15 kV Voltage in kV × 2.54 (Voltage in kV × 0.1), but no less than 51 mm (2 inches) Phase conductor spacings. 1 2 Making estimates over multiple system areas. Incident heat energy for single-phase-to-ground exposures. 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 Table 7 presents similar estimates for employees using live-line tools to perform work on overhead systems operating at voltages of 4 to 800 kilovolts. The table assumes that the arc length will be equal to the sparkover distance 4 4 The employer will need to use other methods for estimating available heat energy in situations not addressed by Table 6 or Table 7. The calculation methods listed in Table 2 and the guidance provided in Table 3 will help employers do this. For example, employers can use IEEE Std 1584b-2011 to estimate the available heat energy (and to select appropriate protective equipment) for many specific conditions, including lower-voltage, phase-to-phase arc, and enclosed arc exposures. Table 6—Incident Heat Energy for Various Fault Currents, Clearing Times, and Voltages of 4.0 to 46.0 kV: Rubber Insulating Glove Exposures Involving Phase-to-Ground Arcs in Open Air Only * † ‡ Voltage range (kV) ** Fault current (kA) Maximum clearing time (cycles) 4 cal/cm 2 5 cal/cm 2 8 cal/cm 2 12 cal/cm 2 4.0 to 15.0 5 46 58 92 138 10 18 22 36 54 15 10 12 20 30 20 6 8 13 19 15.1 to 25.0 5 28 34 55 83 10 11 14 23 34 15 7 8 13 20 20 4 5 9 13 25.1 to 36.0 5 21 26 42 62 10 9 11 18 26 15 5 6 10 16 20 4 4 7 11 36.1 to 46.0 5 16 20 32 48 10 7 9 14 21 15 4 5 8 13 20 3 4 6 9 Notes: * This table is for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures. It is not for phase-to-phase arcs or enclosed arcs (arc in a box). † 4.0 to 15.0 kV 51 mm (2 in.) 15.1 to 25.0 kV 102 mm (4 in.) 25.1 to 36.0 kV 152 mm (6 in.) 36.1 to 46.0 kV 229 mm (9 in.) ‡ ** The voltage range is the phase-to-phase system voltage. Table 7—Incident Heat Energy for Various Fault Currents, Clearing Times, and Voltages: Live-Line Tool Exposures Involving Phase-to-Ground Arcs in Open Air Only * † ‡ # Voltage range Fault current Maximum clearing time (cycles) 4 cal/cm 2 5 cal/cm 2 8 cal/cm 2 12 cal/cm 2 4.0 to 15.0 5 197 246 394 591 10 73 92 147 220 15 39 49 78 117 20 24 31 49 73 15.1 to 25.0 5 197 246 394 591 10 75 94 150 225 15 41 51 82 122 20 26 33 52 78 25.1 to 36.0 5 138 172 275 413 10 53 66 106 159 15 30 37 59 89 20 19 24 38 58 36.1 to 46.0 5 129 161 257 386 10 51 64 102 154 15 29 36 58 87 20 19 24 38 57 46.1 to 72.5 20 18 23 36 55 30 10 13 20 30 40 6 8 13 19 50 4 6 9 13 72.6 to 121.0 20 10 12 20 30 30 6 7 11 17 40 4 5 7 11 50 3 3 5 8 121.1 to 145.0 20 12 15 24 35 30 7 9 15 22 40 5 6 10 15 50 4 5 8 11 145.1 to 169.0 20 12 15 24 36 30 7 9 15 22 40 5 7 10 16 50 4 5 8 12 169.1 to 242.0 20 13 17 27 40 30 8 10 17 25 40 6 7 12 17 50 4 5 9 13 242.1 to 362.0 20 25 32 51 76 30 16 19 31 47 40 11 14 22 33 50 8 10 16 25 362.1 to 420.0 20 12 15 25 37 30 8 10 15 23 40 5 7 11 16 50 4 5 8 12 420.1 to 550.0 20 23 29 47 70 30 14 18 29 43 40 10 13 20 30 50 8 9 15 23 550.1 to 800.0 20 25 31 50 75 30 15 19 31 46 40 11 13 21 32 50 8 10 16 24 Notes: * This table is for open-air, phase-to-ground electric-arc exposures. It is not for phase-to-phase arcs or enclosed arcs (arc in a box). † ‡ # 72.6 to 121.0 kV 1.02 m 121.1 to 145.0 kV 1.16 m 145.1 to 169.0 kV 1.30 m 169.1 to 242.0 kV 1.72 m 242.1 to 362.0 kV 2.76 m 362.1 to 420.0 kV 2.50 m 420.1 to 550.0 kV 3.62 m 550.1 to 800.0 kV 4.83 m ** The voltage range is the phase-to-phase system voltage. B. Selecting Protective Clothing and Other Protective Equipment Paragraph (g)(5) of § 1926.960 requires employers, in certain situations, to select protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating that is greater than or equal to the incident heat energy estimated under § 1926.960(g)(2). Based on laboratory testing required by ASTM F1506-10a, the expectation is that protective clothing with an arc rating equal to the estimated incident heat energy will be capable of preventing second-degree burn injury to an employee exposed to that incident heat energy from an electric arc. Note that actual electric-arc exposures may be more or less severe than the estimated value because of factors such as arc movement, arc length, arcing from reclosing of the system, secondary fires or explosions, and weather conditions. Additionally, for arc rating based on the fabric's arc thermal performance value 5 5 2 Paragraph (g)(5) of § 1926.960 does not require arc-rated protection for exposures of 2 cal/cm 2 2 2 2 2 Paragraph (g)(5) of § 1926.960 requires that arc-rated protection cover the employee's entire body, with limited exceptions for the employee's hands, feet, face, and head. Paragraph (g)(5)(i) of § 1926.960 provides that arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's hands under the following conditions: For any estimated incident heat energy When the employee is wearing rubber insulating gloves with protectors If the estimated incident heat energy does not exceed 14 cal/cm 2 When the employee is wearing heavy-duty leather work gloves with a weight of at least 407 gm/m 2 2 Paragraph (g)(5)(ii) of § 1926.960 provides that arc-rated protection is not necessary for the employee's feet when the employee is wearing heavy-duty work shoes or boots. Finally, § 1926.960(g)(5)(iii), (g)(5)(iv), and (g)(5)(v) require arc-rated head and face protection as follows: Exposure Minimum head and face protection None * Arc-rated faceshield with a minimum rating of 8 cal/cm 2 Arc-rated hood or faceshield with Single-phase, open air 2-8 cal/cm 2 9-12 cal/cm 2 13 cal/ 2 † Three-phase 2-4 cal/cm 2 5-8 cal/cm 2 9 cal/cm 2 ‡ * These ranges assume that employees are wearing hardhats meeting the specifications in § 1910.135 or § 1926.100(b)(2), as applicable. † 2 2 ‡ IV. Protection Against Ignition Paragraph (g)(3) of § 1926.960 prohibits clothing that could melt onto an employee's skin or that could ignite and continue to burn when exposed to flames or to the available heat energy estimated by the employer under § 1926.960(g)(2). Meltable fabrics, such as acetate, nylon, polyester, and polypropylene, even in blends, must be avoided. When these fibers melt, they can adhere to the skin, thereby transferring heat rapidly, exacerbating burns, and complicating treatment. These outcomes can result even if the meltable fabric is not directly next to the skin. The remainder of this section focuses on the prevention of ignition. Paragraph (g)(5) of § 1926.960 generally requires protective clothing and other protective equipment with an arc rating greater than or equal to the employer's estimate of available heat energy. As explained earlier in this appendix, untreated cotton is usually acceptable for exposures of 2 cal/cm 2 6 6 2 Under § 1926.960(g)(3), employees may not wear flammable clothing in conjunction with flame-resistant clothing if the flammable clothing poses an ignition hazard. 7 8 7 8 Non-flame-resistant clothing can ignite even when the heat energy from an electric arc is insufficient to ignite the clothing. For example, nearby flames can ignite an employee's clothing; and, even in the absence of flames, electric arcs pose ignition hazards beyond the hazard of ignition from incident energy under certain conditions. In addition to requiring flame-resistant clothing when the estimated incident energy exceeds 2.0 cal/cm 2 9 9 Appendix F to Subpart V of Part 1926—Work-Positioning Equipment Inspection Guidelines I. Body Belts Inspect body belts to ensure that: A. The hardware has no cracks, nicks, distortion, or corrosion; B. No loose or worn rivets are present; C. The waist strap has no loose grommets; D. The fastening straps are not 100-percent leather; and E. No worn materials that could affect the safety of the user are present. II. Positioning Straps Inspect positioning straps to ensure that: A. The warning center of the strap material is not exposed; B. No cuts, burns, extra holes, or fraying of strap material is present; C. Rivets are properly secured; D. Straps are not 100-percent leather; and E. Snaphooks do not have cracks, burns, or corrosion. III. Climbers Inspect pole and tree climbers to ensure that: A. Gaffs are at least as long as the manufacturer's recommended minimums (generally 32 and 51 millimeters (1.25 and 2.0 inches) for pole and tree climbers, respectively, measured on the underside of the gaff); Note: Gauges are available to assist in determining whether gaffs are long enough and shaped to easily penetrate poles or trees. B. Gaffs and leg irons are not fractured or cracked; C. Stirrups and leg irons are free of excessive wear; D. Gaffs are not loose; E. Gaffs are free of deformation that could adversely affect use; F. Gaffs are properly sharpened; and G. There are no broken straps or buckles. Appendix G to Subpart V of Part 1926—Reference Documents The references contained in this appendix provide information that can be helpful in understanding and complying with the requirements contained in Subpart V of this part. The national consensus standards referenced in this appendix contain detailed specifications that employers may follow in complying with the more performance-based requirements of Subpart V of this part. Except as specifically noted in Subpart V of this part, however, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration will not necessarily deem compliance with the national consensus standards to be compliance with the provisions of Subpart V of this part. ANSI/SIA A92.2-2009, American National Standard for Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices. ANSI Z133-2012, American National Standard Safety Requirements for Arboricultural Operations—Pruning, Trimming, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and Cutting Brush. ANSI/IEEE Std 935-1989, IEEE Guide on Terminology for Tools and Equipment to Be Used in Live Line Working. ASME B20.1-2012, Safety Standard for Conveyors and Related Equipment. ASTM D120-09, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves. ASTM D149-09 (2013), Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies. ASTM D178-01 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting. ASTM D1048-12, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets. ASTM D1049-98 (2010), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers. ASTM D1050-05 (2011), Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose. ASTM D1051-08, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves. ASTM F478-09, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers. ASTM F479-06 (2011), Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets. ASTM F496-08, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves. ASTM F711-02 (2007), Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live Line Tools. ASTM F712-06 (2011), Standard Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment for Protection of Workers. ASTM F819-10, Standard Terminology Relating to Electrical Protective Equipment for Workers. ASTM F855-09, Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment. ASTM F887-12 e1 Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment. ASTM F914/F914M-10, Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission for Aerial Personnel Devices Without Supplemental Load Handling Attachments. ASTM F1116-03 (2008), Standard Test Method for Determining Dielectric Strength of Dielectric Footwear. ASTM F1117-03 (2008), Standard Specification for Dielectric Footwear. ASTM F1236-96 (2012), Standard Guide for Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rubber Products. ASTM F1430/F1430M-10, Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission Testing of Insulated and Non-Insulated Aerial Personnel Devices with Supplemental Load Handling Attachments. ASTM F1505-10, Standard Specification for Insulated and Insulating Hand Tools. ASTM F1506-10a, Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant and Arc Rated Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards. ASTM F1564-13, Standard Specification for Structure-Mounted Insulating Work Platforms for Electrical Workers. ASTM F1701-12, Standard Specification for Unused Polypropylene Rope with Special Electrical Properties. ASTM F1742-03 (2011), Standard Specification for PVC Insulating Sheeting. ASTM F1796-09, Standard Specification for High Voltage Detectors—Part 1 Capacitive Type to be Used for Voltages Exceeding 600 Volts AC. ASTM F1797-09 ε 1 Standard Test Method for Acoustic Emission Testing of Insulated and Non-Insulated Digger Derricks. ASTM F1825-03 (2007), Standard Specification for Clampstick Type Live Line Tools. ASTM F1826-00 (2011), Standard Specification for Live Line and Measuring Telescoping Tools. ASTM F1891-12, Standard Specification for Arc and Flame Resistant Rainwear. ASTM F1958/F1958M-12, Standard Test Method for Determining the Ignitability of Non-flame-Resistant Materials for Clothing by Electric Arc Exposure Method Using Mannequins. ASTM F1959/F1959M-12, Standard Test Method for Determining the Arc Rating of Materials for Clothing. IEEE Stds 4-1995, 4a-2001 (Amendment to IEEE Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing IEEE Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing. IEEE Std 62-1995, IEEE Guide for Diagnostic Field Testing of Electric Power Apparatus—Part 1: Oil Filled Power Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors. IEEE Std 80-2000, Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding. IEEE Std 100-2000, The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms Seventh Edition. IEEE Std 516-2009, IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines. IEEE Std 524-2003, IEEE Guide to the Installation of Overhead Transmission Line Conductors. IEEE Std 957-2005, IEEE Guide for Cleaning Insulators. IEEE Std 1048-2003, IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines. IEEE Std 1067-2005, IEEE Guide for In-Service Use, Care, Maintenance, and Testing of Conductive Clothing for Use on Voltages up to 765 kV AC and ±750 kV DC. IEEE Std 1307-2004, IEEE Standard for Fall Protection for Utility Work. IEEE Stds 1584-2002, 1584a-2004 (Amendment 1 to IEEE Std 1584-2002), and 1584b-2011 (Amendment 2: Changes to Clause 4 of IEEE Std 1584-2002), IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations. IEEE C2-2012, National Electrical Safety Code. NFPA 70E-2012, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. Subpart W—Rollover Protective Structures; Overhead Protection Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; and Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. § 1926.1000 Scope. (a) Coverage. (b) Equipment manufactured before (c) Equipment manufactured on or after (d) Remounting. (e) Labeling. (1) Manufacturer or fabricator's name and address; (2) ROPS model number, if any; (3) Machine make, model, or series number that the structure is designed to fit. (f) Machines meeting certain existing governmental requirements. (1) State of California: Construction Safety Orders, issued by the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Division 5, Labor Code, § 6312, State of California. (2) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: General Safety Requirements, EM-385-1-1 (March 1967). (3) Bureau of Reclamation, U.S. Department of the Interior: Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. Part II (September 1971). [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 84 FR 21577, May 14, 2019] § 1926.1001 Minimum performance criteria for rollover protective structures for designated scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders, crawler tractors, compactors, and rubber-tired skid steer equipment. (a) General. (b) Equipment manufactured before (c) Equipment manufactured on or after [84 FR 21578, May 14, 2019] § 1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-over protective structures, known as ROPS) for wheel-type agricultural and industrial tractors used in construction. (a) General. (b) Equipment manufactured before (c) Equipment manufactured on or after (d) Overhead protection requirements. (e) Definitions applicable to this section. (2) “Industrial tractor” means that class of wheel-type tractors of more than 20 engine horsepower (other than rubber-tired loaders and dozers described in 29 CFR 1926.1001), used in operations such as landscaping, construction services, loading, digging, grounds keeping, and highway maintenance. [70 FR 76985, Dec. 29, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 41129, July 20, 2006; 84 FR 21578, May 14, 2019] § 1926.1003 Overhead protection for operators of agricultural and industrial tractors used in construction. (a) General. (b) Equipment manufactured before (c) Equipment manufactured on or after (d) Site clearing. [84 FR 21578, May 14, 2019] Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; Source: 55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990, unless otherwise noted. § 1926.1050 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Scope and application. (b) Definitions. Cleat Double-cleat ladder Equivalent Extension trestle ladder Failure Fixed ladder side-step fixed ladder through fixed ladder Handrail Individual-rung/step ladders Job-made ladder Ladder stand. Lower levels Maximum intended load Nosing Point of access Portable ladder Riser height Side-step fixed ladder. Single-cleat ladder Single-rail ladder Spiral stairway Stairrail system Step stool (ladder type) Through fixed ladder. Tread depth Unprotected sides and edges [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23, 1991, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993; 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010] § 1926.1051 General requirements. (a) A stairway or ladder shall be provided at all personnel points of access where there is a break in elevation of 19 inches (48 cm) or more, and no ramp, runway, sloped embankment, or personnel hoist is provided. (1) Employees shall not use any spiral stairways that will not be a permanent part of the structure on which construction work is being performed. (2) A double-cleated ladder or two or more separate ladders shall be provided when ladders are the only mean of access or exit from a working area for 25 or more employees, or when a ladder is to serve simultaneous two-way traffic. (3) When a building or structure has only one point of access between levels, that point of access shall be kept clear to permit free passage of employees. When work must be performed or equipment must be used such that free passage at that point of access is restricted, a second point of access shall be provided and used. (4) When a building or structure has two or more points of access between levels, at least one point of access shall be kept clear to permit free passage of employees. (b) Employers shall provide and install all stairway and ladder fall protection systems required by this subpart and shall comply with all other pertinent requirements of this subpart before employees begin the work that necessitates the installation and use of stairways, ladders, and their respective fall protection systems. § 1926.1052 Stairways. (a) General. (1) Stairways that will not be a permanent part of the structure on which construction work is being performed shall have landings of not less than 30 inches (76 cm) in the direction of travel and extend at least 22 inches (56 cm) in width at every 12 feet (3.7 m) or less of vertical rise. (2) Stairs shall be installed between 30° and 50° from horizontal. (3) Riser height and tread depth shall be uniform within each flight of stairs, including any foundation structure used as one or more treads of the stairs. Variations in riser height or tread depth shall not be over 1/4 (4) Where doors or gates open directly on a stairway, a platform shall be provided, and the swing of the door shall not reduce the effective width of the platform to less than 20 inches (51 cm). (5) Metal pan landings and metal pan treads, when used, shall be secured in place before filling with concrete or other material. (6) All parts of stairways shall be free of hazardous projections, such as protruding nails. (7) Slippery conditions on stairways shall be eliminated before the stairways are used to reach other levels. (b) Temporary service. (1) Except during stairway construction, foot traffic is prohibited on stairways with pan stairs where the treads and/or landings are to be filled in with concrete or other material at a later date, unless the stairs are temporarily fitted with wood or other solid material at least to the top edge of each pan. Such temporary treads and landings shall be replaced when worn below the level of the top edge of the pan. (2) Except during stairway construction, foot traffic is prohibited on skeleton metal stairs where permanent treads and/or landings are to be installed at a later date, unless the stairs are fitted with secured temporary treads and landings long enough to cover the entire tread and/or landing area. (3) Treads for temporary service shall be made of wood or other solid material, and shall be installed the full width and depth of the stair. (c) Stairrails and handrails. (1) Stairways having four or more risers or rising more than 30 inches (76 cm), whichever is less, shall be equipped with: (i) At least one handrail; and (ii) One stairrail system along each unprotected side or edge. Note: When the top edge of a stairrail system also serves as a handrail, paragraph (c)(7) of this section applies. (2) Winding and spiral stairways shall be equipped with a handrail offset sufficiently to prevent walking on those portions of the stairways where the tread width is less than 6 inches (15 cm). (3) The height of stairrails shall be as follows: (i) Stairrails installed after March 15, 1991, shall be not less than 36 inches (91.5 cm) from the upper surface of the stairrail system to the surface of the tread, in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread. (ii) Stairrails installed before March 15, 1991, shall be not less than 30 inches (76 cm) nor more than 34 inches (86 cm) from the upper surface of the stairrail system to the surface of the tread, in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread. (4) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or equivalent intermediate structural members, shall be provided between the top rail of the stairrail system and the stairway steps. (i) Midrails, when used, shall be located at a height midway between the top edge of the stairrail system and the stairway steps. (ii) Screens or mesh, when used, shall extend from the top rail to the stairway step, and along the entire opening between top rail supports. (iii) When intermediate vertical members, such as balusters, are used between posts, they shall be not more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart. (iv) Other structural members, when used, shall be installed such that there are no openings in the stairrail system that are more than 19 inches (48 cm) wide. (5) Handrails and the top rails of stairrail systems shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 n) applied within 2 inches (5 cm) of the top edge, in any downward or outward direction, at any point along the top edge. (6) The height of handrails shall be not more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor less than 30 inches (76 cm) from the upper surface of the handrail to the surface of the tread, in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread. (7) When the top edge of a stairrail system also serves as a handrail, the height of the top edge shall be not more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor less than 36 inches (91.5 cm) from the upper surface of the stairrail system to the surface of the tread, in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread. (8) Stairrail systems and handrails shall be so surfaced as to prevent injury to employees from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing. (9) Handrails shall provide an adequate handhold for employees grasping them to avoid falling. (10) The ends of stairrail systems and handrails shall be constructed so as not to constitute a projection hazard. (11) Handrails that will not be a permanent part of the structure being built shall have a minimum clearance of 3 inches (8 cm) between the handrail and walls, stairrail systems, and other objects. (12) Unprotected sides and edges of stairway landings shall be provided with guardrail systems. Guardrail system criteria are contained in subpart M of this part. [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23, 1991; 56 FR 5061, Feb. 7, 1991; 56 FR 41794, Aug. 23, 1991] § 1926.1053 Ladders. (a) General. (1) Ladders shall be capable of supporting the following loads without failure: (i) Each self-supporting portable ladder: At least four times the maximum intended load, except that each extra-heavy-duty type 1A metal or plastic ladder shall sustain at least 3.3 times the maximum intended load. The ability of a ladder to sustain the loads indicated in this paragraph shall be determined by applying or transmitting the requisite load to the ladder in a downward vertical direction. Ladders built and tested in conformance with the applicable provisions of appendix A of this subpart will be deemed to meet this requirement. (ii) Each portable ladder that is not self-supporting: At least four times the maximum intended load, except that each extra-heavy-duty type 1A metal or plastic ladders shall sustain at least 3.3 times the maximum intended load. The ability of a ladder to sustain the loads indicated in this paragraph shall be determined by applying or transmitting the requisite load to the ladder in a downward vertical direction when the ladder is placed at an angle of 75 1/2 (iii) Each fixed ladder: At least two loads of 250 pounds (114 kg) each, concentrated between any two consecutive attachments (the number and position of additional concentrated loads of 250 pounds (114 kg) each, determined from anticipated usage of the ladder, shall also be included), plus anticipated loads caused by ice buildup, winds, rigging, and impact loads resulting from the use of ladder safety devices. Each step or rung shall be capable of supporting a single concentrated load of at least 250 pounds (114 kg) applied in the middle of the step or rung. Ladders built in conformance with the applicable provisions of appendix A will be deemed to meet this requirement. (2) Ladder rungs, cleats, and steps shall be parallel, level, and uniformly spaced when the ladder is in position for use. (3)(i) Rungs, cleats, and steps of portable ladders (except as provided below) and fixed ladders (including individual-rung/step ladders) shall be spaced not less than 10 inches (25 cm) apart, nor more than 14 inches (36 cm) apart, as measured between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. (ii) Rungs, cleats, and steps of step stools shall be not less than 8 inches (20 cm) apart, nor more than 12 inches (31 cm) apart, as measured between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. (iii) Rungs, cleats, and steps of the base section of extension trestle ladders shall not be less than 8 inches (20 cm) nor more than 18 inches (46 cm) apart, as measured between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. The rung spacing on the extension section of the extension trestle ladder shall be not less than 6 inches (15 cm) nor more than 12 inches (31 cm), as measured between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. (4)(i) The minimum clear distance between the sides of individual-rung/step ladders and the minimum clear distance between the side rails of other fixed ladders shall be 16 inches (41 cm). (ii) The minimum clear distance between side rails for all portable ladders shall be 11 1/2 (5) The rungs of individual-rung/step ladders shall be shaped such that employees' feet cannot slide off the end of the rungs. (6)(i) The rungs and steps of fixed metal ladders manufactured after March 15, 1991, shall be corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-resistant material, or otherwise treated to minimize slipping. (ii) The rungs and steps of portable metal ladders shall be corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-resistant material, or otherwise treated to minimize slipping. (7) Ladders shall not be tied or fastened together to provide longer sections unless they are specifically designed for such use. (8) A metal spreader or locking device shall be provided on each stepladder to hold the front and back sections in an open position when the ladder is being used. (9) When splicing is required to obtain a given length of side rail, the resulting side rail must be at least equivalent in strength to a one-piece side rail made of the same material. (10) Except when portable ladders are used to gain access to fixed ladders (such as those on utility towers, billboards, and other structures where the bottom of the fixed ladder is elevated to limit access), when two or more separate ladders are used to reach an elevated work area, the ladders shall be offset with a platform or landing between the ladders. (The requirements to have guardrail systems with toeboards for falling object and overhead protection on platforms and landings are set forth in subpart M of this part.) (11) Ladder components shall be surfaced so as to prevent injury to an employee from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing. (12) Wood ladders shall not be coated with any opaque covering, except for identification or warning labels which may be placed on one face only of a side rail. (13) The minimum perpendicular clearance between fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps, and any obstruction behind the ladder shall be 7 inches (18 cm), except in the case of an elevator pit ladder, for which a minimum perpendicular clearance of 4 1/2 (14) The minimum perpendicular clearance between the center line of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps, and any obstruction on the climbing side of the ladder shall be 30 inches (76 cm), except as provided in paragraph (a)(15) of this section. (15) When unavoidable obstructions are encountered, the minimum perpendicular clearance between the centerline of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps, and the obstruction on the climbing side of the ladder may be reduced to 24 inches (61 cm), provided that a deflection device is installed to guide employees around the obstruction. (16) Through fixed ladders at their point of access/egress shall have a step-across distance of not less than 7 inches (18 cm) nor more than 12 inches (30 cm) as measured from the centerline of the steps or rungs to the nearest edge of the landing area. If the normal step-across distance exceeds 12 inches (30 cm), a landing platform shall be provided to reduce the distance to the specified limit. (17) Fixed ladders without cages or wells shall have a clear width to the nearest permanent object of at least 15 inches (38 cm) on each side of the centerline of the ladder. (18) Fixed ladders shall be provided with cages, wells, ladder safety devices, or self-retracting lifelines where the length of climb is less than 24 feet (7.3 m) but the top of the ladder is at a distance greater than 24 feet (7.3 m) above lower levels. (19) Where the total length of a climb equals or exceeds 24 feet (7.3 m), fixed ladders shall be equipped with one of the following: (i) Ladder safety devices; or (ii) Self-retracting lifelines, and rest platforms at intervals not to exceed 150 feet (45.7 m); or (iii) A cage or well, and multiple ladder sections, each ladder section not to exceed 50 feet (15.2 m) in length. Ladder sections shall be offset from adjacent sections, and landing platforms shall be provided at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15.2 m). (20) Cages for fixed ladders shall conform to all of the following: (i) Horizontal bands shall be fastened to the side rails of rail ladders, or directly to the structure, building, or equipment for individual-rung ladders; (ii) Vertical bars shall be on the inside of the horizontal bands and shall be fastened to them; (iii) Cages shall extend not less than 27 inches (68 cm), or more than 30 inches (76 cm) from the centerline of the step or rung (excluding the flare at the bottom of the cage), and shall not be less than 27 inches (68 cm) in width; (iv) The inside of the cage shall be clear of projections; (v) Horizontal bands shall be spaced not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) on center vertically; (vi) Vertical bars shall be spaced at intervals not more than 9 1/2 (vii) The bottom of the cage shall be at a level not less than 7 feet (2.1 m) nor more than 8 feet (2.4 m) above the point of access to the bottom of the ladder. The bottom of the cage shall be flared not less than 4 inches (10 cm) all around within the distance between the bottom horizontal band and the next higher band; (viii) The top of the cage shall be a minimum of 42 inches (1.1 m) above the top of the platform, or the point of access at the top of the ladder, with provision for access to the platform or other point of access. (21) Wells for fixed ladders shall conform to all of the following: (i) They shall completely encircle the ladder; (ii) They shall be free of projections; (iii) Their inside face on the climbing side of the ladder shall extend not less than 27 inches (68 cm) nor more than 30 inches (76 cm) from the centerline of the step or rung; (iv) The inside clear width shall be at least 30 inches (76 cm); (v) The bottom of the wall on the access side shall start at a level not less than 7 feet (2.1 m) nor more than 8 feet (2.4 m) above the point of access to the bottom of the ladder. (22) Ladder safety devices, and related support systems, for fixed ladders shall conform to all of the following: (i) They shall be capable of withstanding without failure a drop test consisting of an 18-inch (41 cm) drop of a 500-pound (226 kg) weight; (ii) They shall permit the employee using the device to ascend or descend without continually having to hold, push or pull any part of the device, leaving both hands free for climbing; (iii) They shall be activated within 2 feet (.61 m) after a fall occurs, and limit the descending velocity of an employee to 7 feet/sec. (2.1 m/sec.) or less; (iv) The connection between the carrier or lifeline and the point of attachment to the body belt or harness shall not exceed 9 inches (23 cm) in length. (23) The mounting of ladder safety devices for fixed ladders shall conform to the following: (i) Mountings for rigid carriers shall be attached at each end of the carrier, with intermediate mountings, as necessary, spaced along the entire length of the carrier, to provide the strength necessary to stop employees' falls. (ii) Mountings for flexible carriers shall be attached at each end of the carrier. When the system is exposed to wind, cable guides for flexible carriers shall be installed at a minimum spacing of 25 feet (7.6 m) and maximum spacing of 40 feet (12.2 m) along the entire length of the carrier, to prevent wind damage to the system. (iii) The design and installation of mountings and cable guides shall not reduce the design strength of the ladder. (24) The side rails of through or side-step fixed ladders shall extend 42 inches (1.1 m) above the top of the access level or landing platform served by the ladder. For a parapet ladder, the access level shall be the roof if the parapet is cut to permit passage through the parapet; if the parapet is continuous, the access level shall be the top of the parapet. (25) For through-fixed-ladder extensions, the steps or rungs shall be omitted from the extension and the extension of the side rails shall be flared to provide not less than 24 inches (61 cm) nor more than 30 inches (76 cm) clearance between side rails. Where ladder safety devices are provided, the maximum clearance between side rails of the extensions shall not exceed 36 inches (91 cm). (26) For side-step fixed ladders, the side rails and the steps or rungs shall be continuous in the extension. (27) Individual-rung/step ladders, except those used where their access openings are covered with manhole covers or hatches, shall extend at least 42 inches (1.1 m) above an access level or landing platform either by the continuation of the rung spacings as horizontal grab bars or by providing vertical grab bars that shall have the same lateral spacing as the vertical legs of the rungs. (b) Use. (1) When portable ladders are used for access to an upper landing surface, the ladder side rails shall extend at least 3 feet (.9 m) above the upper landing surface to which the ladder is used to gain access; or, when such an extension is not possible because of the ladder's length, then the ladder shall be secured at its top to a rigid support that will not deflect, and a grasping device, such as a grabrail, shall be provided to assist employees in mounting and dismounting the ladder. In no case shall the extension be such that ladder deflection under a load would, by itself, cause the ladder to slip off its support. (2) Ladders shall be maintained free of oil, grease, and other slipping hazards. (3) Ladders shall not be loaded beyond the maximum intended load for which they were built, nor beyond their manufacturer's rated capacity. (4) Ladders shall be used only for the purpose for which they were designed. (5)(i) Non-self-supporting ladders shall be used at an angle such that the horizontal distance from the top support to the foot of the ladder is approximately one-quarter of the working length of the ladder (the distance along the ladder between the foot and the top support). (ii) Wood job-made ladders with spliced side rails shall be used at an angle such that the horizontal distance is one-eighth the working length of the ladder. (iii) Fixed ladders shall be used at a pitch no greater than 90 degrees from the horizontal, as measured to the back side of the ladder. (6) Ladders shall be used only on stable and level surfaces unless secured to prevent accidental displacement. (7) Ladders shall not be used on slippery surfaces unless secured or provided with slip-resistant feet to prevent accidental displacement. Slip-resistant feet shall not be used as a substitute for care in placing, lashing, or holding a ladder that is used upon slippery surfaces including, but not limited to, flat metal or concrete surfaces that are constructed so they cannot be prevented from becoming slippery. (8) Ladders placed in any location where they can be displaced by workplace activities or traffic, such as in passageways, doorways, or driveways, shall be secured to prevent accidental displacement, or a barricade shall be used to keep the activities or traffic away from the ladder. (9) The area around the top and bottom of ladders shall be kept clear. (10) The top of a non-self-supporting ladder shall be placed with the two rails supported equally unless it is equipped with a single support attachment. (11) Ladders shall not be moved, shifted, or extended while occupied. (12) Ladders shall have nonconductive siderails if they are used where the employee or the ladder could contact exposed energized electrical equipment, except as provided in § 1926.955(b) and (c) of this part. (13) The top or top step of a stepladder shall not be used as a step. (14) Cross-bracing on the rear section of stepladders shall not be used for climbing unless the ladders are designed and provided with steps for climbing on both front and rear sections. (15) Ladders shall be inspected by a competent person for visible defects on a periodic basis and after any occurrence that could affect their safe use. (16) Portable ladders with structural defects, such as, but not limited to, broken or missing rungs, cleats, or steps, broken or split rails, corroded components, or other faulty or defective components, shall either be immediately marked in a manner that readily identifies them as defective, or be tagged with “Do Not Use” or similar language, and shall be withdrawn from service until repaired. (17) Fixed ladders with structural defects, such as, but not limited to, broken or missing rungs, cleats, or steps, broken or split rails, or corroded components, shall be withdrawn from service until repaired. The requirement to withdraw a defective ladder from service is satisfied if the ladder is either: (i) Immediately tagged with “Do Not Use” or similar language, (ii) Marked in a manner that readily identifies it as defective; (iii) Or blocked (such as with a plywood attachment that spans several rungs). (18) Ladder repairs shall restore the ladder to a condition meeting its original design criteria, before the ladder is returned to use. (19) Single-rail ladders shall not be used. (20) When ascending or descending a ladder, the user shall face the ladder. (21) Each employee shall use at least one hand to grasp the ladder when progressing up and/or down the ladder. (22) An employee shall not carry any object or load that could cause the employee to lose balance and fall. [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23, 1991, as amended at 56 FR 41794, Aug. 23, 1991; 79 FR 20743, Apr. 11, 2014] §§ 1926.1054-1926.1059 [Reserved] § 1926.1060 Training requirements. The following training provisions clarify the requirements of § 1926.21(b)(2), regarding the hazards addressed in subpart X. (a) The employer shall provide a training program for each employee using ladders and stairways, as necessary. The program shall enable each employee to recognize hazards related to ladders and stairways, and shall train each employee in the procedures to be followed to minimize these hazards. (1) The employer shall ensure that each employee has been trained by a competent person in the following areas, as applicable: (i) The nature of fall hazards in the work area; (ii) The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, and disassembling the fall protection systems to be used; (iii) The proper construction, use, placement, and care in handling of all stairways and ladders; (iv) The maximum intended load-carrying capacities of ladders used; and (v) The standards contained in this subpart. (b) Retraining shall be provided for each employee as necessary so that the employee maintains the understanding and knowledge acquired through compliance with this section. Appendix A to Subpart X of Part 1926—Ladders This appendix serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers in complying with the ladder loading and strength requirements of § 1926.1053(a)(1). A ladder designed and built in accordance with the applicable national consensus standards, as set forth below, will be considered to meet the requirements of § 1926.1053(a)(1): • Manufactured portable wood ladders: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A14.1-1982—American National Standard for Ladders-Portable Wood-Safety Requirements. • Manufactured portable metal ladders: ANSI A14.2-1982—American National Standard for Ladders—Portable Metal-Safety Requirements. • Manufactured fixed ladders: ANSI A14.3-1984—American National Standard for Ladders-Fixed-Safety Requirements. • Job-made ladders: ANSI A14.4-1979—Safety Requirements for Job-Made Ladders. • Plastic ladders: ANSI A14.5-1982—American National Standard for Ladders-Portable Reinforced Plastic-Safety Requirements. Subpart Y—Diving Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (the Construction Safety Standards Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Sec. 41, Longshore and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act (33 U.S.C. 941); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017) or 5-2002 (67 FR 65008) as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Source: 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993, unless otherwise noted. General § 1926.1071 Scope and application. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.401 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1072 Definitions. Note: The provisions applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.402 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] Personnel Requirements § 1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.410 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] General Operations Procedures § 1926.1080 Safe practices manual. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.420 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.421 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1082 Procedures during dive. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.422 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1083 Post-dive procedures. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.423 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] Specific Operations Procedures § 1926.1084 SCUBA diving. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.424 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1085 Surface-supplied air diving. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.425 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.426 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1087 Liveboating. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.427 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] Equipment Procedures and Requirements § 1926.1090 Equipment. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.430 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] Recordkeeping § 1926.1091 Recordkeeping requirements. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.440 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] Appendix A to Subpart Y of Part 1926—Examples of Conditions Which May Restrict or Limit Exposure to Hyperbaric Conditions Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix A are identical to those set forth at appendix A to Subpart T of part 1910 of this chapter. [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] Appendix B to Subpart Y of Part 1926—Guidelines for Scientific Diving Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix B are identical to those set forth at appendix B to subpart T of part 1910 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous Substances Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3704; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; and Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31160), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912) as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. Section 1926.1102 not issued under 29 U.S.C. 655 or 29 CFR part 1911; also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553. § 1926.1100 [Reserved] § 1926.1101 Asbestos. (a) Scope and application. (1) Demolition or salvage of structures where asbestos is present; (2) Removal or encapsulation of materials containing asbestos; (3) Construction, alteration, repair, maintenance, or renovation of structures, substrates, or portions thereof, that contain asbestos; (4) Installation of products containing asbestos; (5) Asbestos spill/emergency cleanup; and (6) Transportation, disposal, storage, containment of and housekeeping activities involving asbestos or products containing asbestos, on the site or location at which construction activities are performed. (7) Coverage under this standard shall be based on the nature of the work operation involving asbestos exposure. (8) This section does not apply to asbestos-containing asphalt roof coatings, cements and mastics. (b) Definitions. Aggressive method Amended water Asbestos Asbestos-containing material (ACM), Assistant Secretary Authorized person Building/facility owner Certified Industrial Hygienist Class I asbestos work Class II asbestos work Class III asbestos work Class IV asbestos work Clean room Closely resemble Competent person Critical barrier Decontamination area Demolition Director Disturbance Employee exposure Equipment room change room Fiber Glovebag High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter Homogeneous area Industrial hygienist Intact Modification Negative Initial Exposure Assessment PACM Presumed Asbestos Containing Material Project Designer Regulated area Removal Renovation Repair Surfacing material Surfacing ACM Thermal system insulation (TSI) Thermal system insulation ACM (c) Permissible exposure limits (PELS) Time-weighted average limit (TWA). (2) Excursion limit. (d) Multi-employer worksites. (2) Asbestos hazards at a multi-employer work site shall be abated by the contractor who created or controls the source of asbestos contamination. For example, if there is a significant breach of an enclosure containing Class I work, the employer responsible for erecting the enclosure shall repair the breach immediately. (3) In addition, all employers of employees exposed to asbestos hazards shall comply with applicable protective provisions to protect their employees. For example, if employees working immediately adjacent to a Class I asbestos job are exposed to asbestos due to the inadequate containment of such job, their employer shall either remove the employees from the area until the enclosure breach is repaired; or perform an initial exposure assessment pursuant to (f) of this section. (4) All employers of employees working adjacent to regulated areas established by another employer on a multi-employer work-site, shall take steps on a daily basis to ascertain the integrity of the enclosure and/or the effectiveness of the control method relied on by the primary asbestos contractor to assure that asbestos fibers do not migrate to such adjacent areas. (5) All general contractors on a construction project which includes work covered by this standard shall be deemed to exercise general supervisory authority over the work covered by this standard, even though the general contractor is not qualified to serve as the asbestos “competent person” as defined by paragraph (b) of this section. As supervisor of the entire project, the general contractor shall ascertain whether the asbestos contractor is in compliance with this standard, and shall require such contractor to come into compliance with this standard when necessary. (e) Regulated areas. (2) Demarcation. (3) Access. (4) Respirators. (5) Prohibited activities. (6) Competent Persons. (f) Exposure assessments and monitoring General monitoring criteria. (ii) Determinations of employee exposure shall be made from breathing zone air samples that are representative of the 8-hour TWA and 30-minute short-term exposures of each employee. (iii) Representative 8-hour TWA employee exposure shall be determined on the basis of one or more samples representing full-shift exposure for employees in each work area. Representative 30-minute short-term employee exposures shall be determined on the basis of one or more samples representing 30 minute exposures associated with operations that are most likely to produce exposures above the excursion limit for employees in each work area. (2) Initial Exposure Assessment. (ii) Basis of Initial Exposure Assessment: Unless a negative exposure assessment has been made pursuant to paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, the initial exposure assessment shall, if feasible, be based on monitoring conducted pursuant to paragraph (f)(1)(iii) of this section. The assessment shall take into consideration both the monitoring results and all observations, information or calculations which indicate employee exposure to asbestos, including any previous monitoring conducted in the workplace, or of the operations of the employer which indicate the levels of airborne asbestos likely to be encountered on the job. For Class I asbestos work, until the employer conducts exposure monitoring and documents that employees on that job will not be exposed in excess of the PELs, or otherwise makes a negative exposure assessment pursuant to paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, the employer shall presume that employees are exposed in excess of the TWA and excursion limit. (iii) Negative Exposure Assessment: For any one specific asbestos job which will be performed by employees who have been trained in compliance with the standard, the employer may demonstrate that employee exposures will be below the PELs by data which conform to the following criteria; (A) Objective data demonstrating that the product or material containing asbestos minerals or the activity involving such product or material cannot release airborne fibers in concentrations exceeding the TWA and excursion limit under those work conditions having the greatest potential for releasing asbestos; or (B) Where the employer has monitored prior asbestos jobs for the PEL and the excursion limit within 12 months of the current or projected job, the monitoring and analysis were performed in compliance with the asbestos standard in effect; and the data were obtained during work operations conducted under workplace conditions “closely resembling” the processes, type of material, control methods, work practices, and environmental conditions used and prevailing in the employer's current operations, the operations were conducted by employees whose training and experience are no more extensive than that of employees performing the current job, and these data show that under the conditions prevailing and which will prevail in the current workplace there is a high degree of certainty that employee exposures will not exceed the TWA and excursion limit; or (C) The results of initial exposure monitoring of the current job made from breathing zone air samples that are representative of the 8-hour TWA and 30-minute short-term exposures of each employee covering operations which are most likely during the performance of the entire asbestos job to result in exposures over the PELs. (3) Periodic monitoring Class I and II operations. (ii) All operations under the standard other than Class I and II operations. The employer shall conduct periodic monitoring of all work where exposures are expected to exceed a PEL, at intervals sufficient to document the validity of the exposure prediction. (iii) Exception: When all employees required to be monitored daily are equipped with supplied-air respirators operated in the pressure demand mode, or other positive pressure mode, the employer may dispense with the daily monitoring required by this paragraph. However, employees performing Class I work using a control method which is not listed in paragraph (g)(4)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section or using a modification of a listed control method, shall continue to be monitored daily even if they are equipped with supplied-air respirators. (4) Termination of monitoring. (ii) Additional monitoring. Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (f) (2) and (3), and (f)(4) of this section, the employer shall institute the exposure monitoring required under paragraph (f)(3) of this section whenever there has been a change in process, control equipment, personnel or work practices that may result in new or additional exposures above the permissible exposure limit and/or excursion limit or when the employer has any reason to suspect that a change may result in new or additional exposures above the permissible exposure limit and/or excursion limit. Such additional monitoring is required regardless of whether a “negative exposure assessment” was previously produced for a specific job. (5) Employee notification of monitoring results. (6) Observation of monitoring. (ii) When observation of the monitoring of employee exposure to asbestos requires entry into an area where the use of protective clothing or equipment is required, the observer shall be provided with and be required to use such clothing and equipment and shall comply with all other applicable safety and health procedures. (g) Methods of compliance. (i) Vacuum cleaners equipped with HEPA filters to collect all debris and dust containing ACM and PACM, except as provided in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section in the case of roofing material. (ii) Wet methods, or wetting agents, to control employee exposures during asbestos handling, mixing, removal, cutting, application, and cleanup, except where employers demonstrate that the use of wet methods is infeasible due to for example, the creation of electrical hazards, equipment malfunction, and, in roofing, except as provided in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section; and (iii) Prompt clean-up and disposal of wastes and debris contaminated with asbestos in leak-tight containers except in roofing operations, where the procedures specified in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section apply. (2) In addition to the requirements of paragraph (g)(1) of this section, the employer shall use the following control methods to achieve compliance with the TWA permissible exposure limit and excursion limit prescribed by paragraph (c) of this section; (i) Local exhaust ventilation equipped with HEPA filter dust collection systems; (ii) Enclosure or isolation of processes producing asbestos dust; (iii) Ventilation of the regulated area to move contaminated air away from the breathing zone of employees and toward a filtration or collection device equipped with a HEPA filter; (iv) Use of other work practices and engineering controls that the Assistant Secretary can show to be feasible. (v) Wherever the feasible engineering and work practice controls described above are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit and/or excursion limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section, the employer shall use them to reduce employee exposure to the lowest levels attainable by these controls and shall supplement them by the use of respiratory protection that complies with the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section. (3) Prohibitions. (i) High-speed abrasive disc saws that are not equipped with point of cut ventilator or enclosures with HEPA filtered exhaust air. (ii) Compressed air used to remove asbestos, or materials containing asbestos, unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with an enclosed ventilation system designed to capture the dust cloud created by the compressed air. (iii) Dry sweeping, shoveling or other dry clean-up of dust and debris containing ACM and PACM. (iv) Employee rotation as a means of reducing employee exposure to asbestos. (4) Class I Requirements. (i) All Class I work, including the installation and operation of the control system shall be supervised by a competent person as defined in paragraph (b) of this section; (ii) For all Class I jobs involving the removal of more than 25 linear or 10 square feet of thermal system insulation or surfacing material; for all other Class I jobs, where the employer cannot produce a negative exposure assessment pursuant to paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, or where employees are working in areas adjacent to the regulated area, while the Class I work is being performed, the employer shall use one of the following methods to ensure that airborne asbestos does not migrate from the regulated area: (A) Critical barriers shall be placed over all the openings to the regulated area, except where activities are performed outdoors; or (B) The employer shall use another barrier or isolation method which prevents the migration of airborne asbestos from the regulated area, as verified by perimeter area surveillance during each work shift at each boundary of the regulated area, showing no visible asbestos dust; and perimeter area monitoring showing that clearance levels contained in 40 CFR part 763, subpt. E, of the EPA Asbestos in Schools Rule are met, or that perimeter area levels, measured by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) are no more than background levels representing the same area before the asbestos work began. The results of such monitoring shall be made known to the employer no later than 24 hours from the end of the work shift represented by such monitoring. Exception: For work completed outdoors where employees are not working in areas adjacent to the regulated areas, this paragraph (g)(4)(ii) is satisfied when the specific control methods in paragraph (g)(5) of this section are used. (iii) For all Class I jobs, HVAC systems shall be isolated in the regulated area by sealing with a double layer of 6 mil plastic or the equivalent; (iv) For all Class I jobs, impermeable dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces beneath all removal activity; (v) For all Class I jobs, all objects within the regulated area shall be covered with impermeable dropcloths or plastic sheeting which is secured by duct tape or an equivalent. (vi) For all Class I jobs where the employer cannot produce a negative exposure assessment, or where exposure monitoring shows that a PEL is exceeded, the employer shall ventilate the regulated area to move contaminated air away from the breathing zone of employees toward a HEPA filtration or collection device. (5) Specific control methods for Class I work. (i) Negative Pressure Enclosure (NPE) systems: NPE systems may be used where the configuration of the work area does not make the erection of the enclosure infeasible, with the following specifications and work practices. (A) Specifications: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 (B) Work Practices: ( 1 ( 2 (ii) Glove bag systems may be used to remove PACM and/or ACM from straight runs of piping and elbows and other connections with the following specifications and work practices: (A) Specifications: ( 1 ( 2 (B) Work Practices: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 ( 7 ( 8 ( 9 (iii) Negative Pressure Glove Bag Systems. (A) Specifications: (B) Work Practices: 1 4 ( 2 ( 3 (iv) Negative Pressure Glove Box Systems: Negative pressure glove boxes may be used to remove ACM or PACM from pipe runs with the following specifications and work practices. (A) Specifications: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 ( 6 ( 7 (B) Work practices: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (v) Water Spray Process System. (A) Specifications: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) Work Practices: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 (vi) A small walk-in enclosure which accommodates no more than two persons (mini-enclosure) may be used if the disturbance or removal can be completely contained by the enclosure with the following specifications and work practices. (A) Specifications: ( 1 ( 2 (B) Work practices: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (6) Alternative control methods for Class I work. (i) The control method shall enclose, contain or isolate the processes or source of airborne asbestos dust, or otherwise capture or redirect such dust before it enters the breathing zone of employees. (ii) A certified industrial hygienist or licensed professional engineer who is also qualified as a project designer as defined in paragraph (b) of this section, shall evaluate the work area, the projected work practices and the engineering controls and shall certify in writing that the planned control method is adequate to reduce direct and indirect employee exposure to below the PELs under worst-case conditions of use, and that the planned control method will prevent asbestos contamination outside the regulated area, as measured by clearance sampling which meets the requirements of EPA's Asbestos in Schools rule issued under AHERA, or perimeter monitoring which meets the criteria in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) of this section. (A) Where the TSI or surfacing material to be removed is 25 linear or 10 square feet or less , the evaluation required in paragraph (g)(6) of this section may be performed by a “competent person”, and may omit consideration of perimeter or clearance monitoring otherwise required. (B) The evaluation of employee exposure required in paragraph (g)(6) of this section, shall include and be based on sampling and analytical data representing employee exposure during the use of such method under worst-case conditions and by employees whose training and experience are equivalent to employees who are to perform the current job. (7) Work practices and engineering controls for Class II work. (ii) For all indoor Class II jobs, where the employer has not produced a negative exposure assessment pursuant to paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, or where during the job, changed conditions indicate there may be exposure above the PEL or where the employer does not remove the ACM in a substantially intact state, the employer shall use one of the following methods to ensure that airborne asbestos does not migrate from the regulated area; (A) Critical barriers shall be placed over all openings to the regulated area; or, (B) The employer shall use another barrier or isolation method which prevents the migration of airborne asbestos from the regulated area, as verified by perimeter area monitoring or clearance monitoring which meets the criteria set out in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) of this section. (C) Impermeable dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces beneath all removal activity; (iii) [Reserved] (iv) All Class II asbestos work shall be performed using the work practices and requirements set out above in paragraph (g)(1) (i) through (g)(1)(iii) of this section. (8) Additional Controls for Class II work. (i) For removing vinyl and asphalt flooring materials which contain ACM or for which in buildings constructed no later than 1980, the employer has not verified the absence of ACM pursuant to paragraph (g)(8)(i)(I) of this section. The employer shall ensure that employees comply with the following work practices and that employees are trained in these practices pursuant to paragraph (k)(9): (A) Flooring or its backing shall not be sanded. (B) Vacuums equipped with HEPA filter, disposable dust bag, and metal floor tool (no brush) shall be used to clean floors. (C) Resilient sheeting shall be removed by cutting with wetting of the snip point and wetting during delamination. Rip-up of resilient sheet floor material is prohibited. (D) All scraping of residual adhesive and/or backing shall be performed using wet methods. (E) Dry sweeping is prohibited. (F) Mechanical chipping is prohibited unless performed in a negative pressure enclosure which meets the requirements of paragraph (g)(5)(i) of this section. (G) Tiles shall be removed intact, unless the employer demonstrates that intact removal is not possible. (H) When tiles are heated and can be removed intact, wetting may be omitted. (I) Resilient flooring material including associated mastic and backing shall be assumed to be asbestos-containing unless an industrial hygienist determines that it is asbestos-free using recognized analytical techniques. (ii) For removing roofing material which contains ACM the employer shall ensure that the following work practices are followed: (A) Roofing material shall be removed in an intact state to the extent feasible. (B) Wet methods shall be used to remove roofing materials that are not intact, or that will be rendered not intact during removal, unless such wet methods are not feasible or will create safety hazards. (C) Cutting machines shall be continuously misted during use, unless a competent person determines that misting substantially decreases worker safety. (D) When removing built-up roofs with asbestos-containing roofing felts and an aggregate surface using a power roof cutter, all dust resulting from the cutting operation shall be collected by a HEPA dust collector, or shall be HEPA vacuumed by vacuuming along the cut line. When removing built-up roofs with asbestos-containing roofing felts and a smooth surface using a power roof cutter, the dust resulting from the cutting operation shall be collected either by a HEPA dust collector or HEPA vacuuming along the cut line, or by gently sweeping and then carefully and completely wiping up the still-wet dust and debris left along the cut line. The dust and debris shall be immediately bagged or placed in covered containers. (E) Asbestos-containing material that has been removed from a roof shall not be dropped or thrown to the ground. Unless the material is carried or passed to the ground by hand, it shall be lowered to the ground via covered, dust-tight chute, crane or hoist: ( 1 ( 2 (F) Upon being lowered, unwrapped material shall be transferred to a closed receptacle in such manner so as to preclude the dispersion of dust. (G) Roof level heating and ventilation air intake sources shall be isolated or the ventilation system shall be shut down. (H) Notwithstanding any other provision of this section, removal or repair of sections of intact roofing less than 25 square feet in area does not require use of wet methods or HEPA vacuuming as long as manual methods which do not render the material non-intact are used to remove the material and no visible dust is created by the removal method used. In determining whether a job involves less than 25 square feet, the employer shall include all removal and repair work performed on the same roof on the same day. (iii) When removing cementitious asbestos-containing siding and shingles or transite panels containing ACM on building exteriors (other than roofs, where paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section applies) the employer shall ensure that the following work practices are followed: (A) Cutting, abrading or breaking siding, shingles, or transite panels, shall be prohibited unless the employer can demonstrate that methods less likely to result in asbestos fiber release cannot be used. (B) Each panel or shingle shall be sprayed with amended water prior to removal. (C) Unwrapped or unbagged panels or shingles shall be immediately lowered to the ground via covered dust-tight chute, crane or hoist, or placed in an impervious waste bag or wrapped in plastic sheeting and lowered to the ground no later than the end of the work shift. (D) Nails shall be cut with flat, sharp instruments. (iv) When removing gaskets containing ACM, the employer shall ensure that the following work practices are followed: (A) If a gasket is visibly deteriorated and unlikely to be removed intact, removal shall be undertaken within a glovebag as described in paragraph (g)(5)(ii) of this section. (B) [Reserved] (C) The gasket shall be immediately placed in a disposal container. (D) Any scraping to remove residue must be performed wet. (v) When performing any other Class II removal of asbestos containing material for which specific controls have not been listed in paragraph (g)(8)(i) through (iv) of this section, the employer shall ensure that the following work practices are complied with. (A) The material shall be thoroughly wetted with amended water prior to and during its removal. (B) The material shall be removed in an intact state unless the employer demonstrates that intact removal is not possible. (C) Cutting, abrading or breaking the material shall be prohibited unless the employer can demonstrate that methods less likely to result in asbestos fiber release are not feasible. (D) Asbestos-containing material removed, shall be immediately bagged or wrapped, or kept wetted until transferred to a closed receptacle, no later than the end of the work shift. (vi) Alternative Work Practices and Controls. (A) The employer shall demonstrate by data representing employee exposure during the use of such method under conditions which closely resemble the conditions under which the method is to be used, that employee exposure will not exceed the PELs under any anticipated circumstances. (B) A competent person shall evaluate the work area, the projected work practices and the engineering controls, and shall certify in writing, that the different or modified controls are adequate to reduce direct and indirect employee exposure to below the PELs under all expected conditions of use and that the method meets the requirements of this standard. The evaluation shall include and be based on data representing employee exposure during the use of such method under conditions which closely resemble the conditions under which the method is to be used for the current job, and by employees whose training and experience are equivalent to employees who are to perform the current job. (9) Work Practices and Engineering Controls for Class III asbestos work. (i) The work shall be performed using wet methods. (ii) To the extent feasible, the work shall be performed using local exhaust ventilation. (iii) Where the disturbance involves drilling, cutting, abrading, sanding, chipping, breaking, or sawing of thermal system insulation or surfacing material, the employer shall use impermeable dropcloths, and shall isolate the operation using mini-enclosures or glove bag systems pursuant to paragraph (g)(5) of this section or another isolation method. (iv) Where the employer does not produce a “negative exposure assessment” for a job, or where monitoring results show the PEL has been exceeded, the employer shall contain the area using impermeable dropcloths and plastic barriers or their equivalent, or shall isolate the operation using a control system listed in and in compliance with paragraph (g)(5) of this section. (v) Employees performing Class III jobs, which involve the disturbance of thermal system insulation or surfacing material, or where the employer does not produce a “negative exposure assessment” or where monitoring results show a PEL has been exceeded, shall wear respirators which are selected, used and fitted pursuant to provisions of paragraph (h) of this section. (10) Class IV asbestos work. (i) Employees cleaning up debris and waste in a regulated area where respirators are required shall wear respirators which are selected, used and fitted pursuant to provisions of paragraph (h) of this section. (ii) Employers of employees who clean up waste and debris in, and employers in control of, areas where friable thermal system insulation or surfacing material is accessible, shall assume that such waste and debris contain asbestos. (11) Alternative methods of compliance for installation, removal, repair, and maintenance of certain roofing and pipeline coating materials. (i) Before work begins and as needed during the job, a competent person who is capable of identifying asbestos hazards in the workplace and selecting the appropriate control strategy for asbestos exposure, and who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate such hazards, shall conduct an inspection of the worksite and determine that the roofing material is intact and will likely remain intact. (ii) All employees performing work covered by this paragraph (g)(11) shall be trained in a training program that meets the requirements of paragraph (k)(9)(viii) of this section. (iii) The material shall not be sanded, abraded, or ground. Manual methods which do not render the material non-intact shall be used. (iv) Material that has been removed from a roof shall not be dropped or thrown to the ground. Unless the material is carried or passed to the ground by hand, it shall be lowered to the ground via covered, dust-tight chute, crane or hoist. All such material shall be removed from the roof as soon as is practicable, but in any event no later than the end of the work shift. (v) Where roofing products which have been labeled as containing asbestos pursuant to paragraph (k)(8) of this section are installed on non-residential roofs during operations covered by this paragraph (g)(11), the employer shall notify the building owner of the presence and location of such materials no later than the end of the job. (vi) All removal or disturbance of pipeline asphaltic wrap shall be performed using wet methods. (h) Respiratory protection General. (i) Class I asbestos work. (ii) Class II asbestos work when ACM is not removed in a substantially intact state. (iii) Class II and III asbestos work that is not performed using wet methods, except for removal of ACM from sloped roofs when a negative-exposure assessment has been conducted and ACM is removed in an intact state. (iv) Class II and III asbestos work for which a negative-exposure assessment has not been conducted. (v) Class III asbestos work when TSI or surfacing ACM or PACM is being disturbed. (vi) Class IV asbestos work performed within regulated areas where employees who are performing other work are required to use respirators. (vii) Work operations covered by this section for which employees are exposed above the TWA or excursion limit. (viii) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (ii) No employee shall be assigned to asbestos work that requires respirator use if, based on their most recent medical examination, the examining physician determines that the employee will be unable to function normally while using a respirator, or that the safety or health of the employee or other employees will be impaired by the employee's respirator use. Such employees must be assigned to another job or given the opportunity to transfer to a different position that they can perform. If such a transfer position is available, it must be with the same employer, in the same geographical area, and with the same seniority, status, rate of pay, and other job benefits the employee had just prior to such transfer. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134; however, employers must not select or use filtering facepiece respirators for use against asbestos fibers. (B) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators. (ii) Employers must provide an employee with tight-fitting, powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) instead of a negative pressure respirator selected according to paragraph (h)(3)(i)(A) of this standard when the employee chooses to use a PAPR and it provides adequate protection to the employee. (iii) Employers must provide employees with an air-purifying half mask respirator, other than a filtering facepiece respirator, whenever the employees perform: (A) Class II or Class III asbestos work for which no negative exposure assessment is available. (B) Class III asbestos work involving disturbance of TSI or surfacing ACM or PACM. (iv) Employers must provide employees with: (A) A tight-fitting powered air-purifying respirator or a full facepiece, supplied-air respirator operated in the pressure-demand mode and equipped with either HEPA egress cartridges or an auxiliary positive-pressure, self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) whenever the employees are in a regulated area performing Class I asbestos work for which a negative exposure assessment is not available and the exposure assessment indicates that the exposure level will be at or below 1 f/cc as an 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA). (B) A full facepiece supplied-air respirator operated in the pressure-demand mode and equipped with an auxiliary positive-pressure SCBA whenever the employees are in a regulated area performing Class I asbestos work for which a negative exposure assessment is not available and the exposure assessment indicates that the exposure level will be above 1 f/cc as an 8-hour TWA. (i) Protective clothing General. (2) Laundering. (ii) Any employer who gives contaminated clothing to another person for laundering shall inform such person of the requirement in paragraph (i)(2)(i) of this section to effectively prevent the release of airborne asbestos in excess of the TWA and excursion limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section. (3) Contaminated clothing. (4) Inspection of protective clothing. (ii) When rips or tears are detected while an employee is working, rips and tears shall be immediately mended, or the worksuit shall be immediately replaced. (j) Hygiene facilities and practices for employees. (i) Decontamination areas. (A) Equipment room. (B) Shower area. ( 1 ( 2 (C) Clean change room. (ii) Decontamination area entry procedures. (A) Enter the decontamination area through the clean room; (B) Remove and deposit street clothing within a locker provided for their use; and (C) Put on protective clothing and respiratory protection before leaving the clean room. (D) Before entering the regulated area, the employer shall ensure that employees pass through the equipment room. (iii) Decontamination area exit procedures. (A) Before leaving the regulated area, employees shall remove all gross contamination and debris from their protective clothing. (B) Employees shall remove their protective clothing in the equipment room and deposit the clothing in labeled impermeable bags or containers. (C) Employees shall not remove their respirators in the equipment room. (D) Employees shall shower prior to entering the clean room. (E) After showering, employees shall enter the clean room before changing into street clothes. (iv) Lunch Areas. (2) Requirements for Class I work involving less than 25 linear or 10 square feet of TSI or surfacing ACM and PACM, and for Class II and Class III asbestos work operations where exposures exceed a PEL or where there is no negative exposure assessment produced before the operation. (i) The employer shall establish an equipment room or area that is adjacent to the regulated area for the decontamination of employees and their equipment which is contaminated with asbestos which shall consist of an area covered by an impermeable drop cloth on the floor or horizontal working surface. (ii) The area must be of sufficient size as to accommodate cleaning of equipment and removing personal protective equipment without spreading contamination beyond the area (as determined by visible accumulations). (iii) Work clothing must be cleaned with a HEPA vacuum before it is removed. (iv) All equipment and surfaces of containers filled with ACM must be cleaned prior to removing them from the equipment room or area. (v) The employer shall ensure that employees enter and exit the regulated area through the equipment room or area. (3) Requirements for Class IV work. (4) Smoking in work areas. (k) Communication of hazards Hazard communication. (ii) The employer shall include asbestos in the program established to comply with the Hazard Communication Standard (HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The employer shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of asbestos and safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the provisions of HCS and paragraphs (k)(9) and (10) of this section. The employer shall provide information on at least the following hazards: Cancer and lung effects. (2) Duties of building and facility owners. (ii) Building and/or facility owners shall notify the following persons of the presence, location and quantity of ACM or PACM, at the work sites in their buildings and facilities. Notification either shall be in writing, or shall consist of a personal communication between the owner and the person to whom notification must be given or their authorized representatives: (A) Prospective employers applying or bidding for work whose employees reasonably can be expected to work in or adjacent to areas containing such material; (B) Employees of the owner who will work in or adjacent to areas containing such material: (C) On multi-employer worksites, all employers of employees who will be performing work within or adjacent to areas containing such materials; (D) Tenants who will occupy areas containing such material. (3) Duties of employers whose employees perform work subject to this standard in or adjacent to areas containing ACM and PACM. Building/facility owners whose employees perform such work shall comply with these provisions to the extent applicable. (i) Before work in areas containing ACM and PACM is begun; employers shall identify the presence, location, and quantity of ACM, and/or PACM therein pursuant to paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section. (ii) Before work under this standard is performed employers of employees who will perform such work shall inform the following persons of the location and quantity of ACM and/or PACM present in the area and the precautions to be taken to insure that airborne asbestos is confined to the area. (A) Owners of the building/facility; (B) Employees who will perform such work and employers of employees who work and/or will be working in adjacent areas. (iii) Within 10 days of the completion of such work, the employer whose employees have performed work subject to this standard, shall inform the building/facility owner and employers of employees who will be working in the area of the current location and quantity of PACM and/or ACM remaining in the area and final monitoring results, if any. (4) In addition to the above requirements, all employers who discover ACM and/or PACM on a worksite shall convey information concerning the presence, location and quantity of such newly discovered ACM and/or PACM to the owner and to other employers of employees working at the work site, within 24 hours of the discovery. (5) Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM. (i) At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (n) of this section. (ii) An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain more than 1% asbestos by the following: (A) Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 CFR part 763, subpart E) which demonstrates that the material is not ACM; or (B) Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. (iii) The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. (6) At the entrance to mechanical rooms/areas in which employees reasonably can be expected to enter and which contain ACM and/or PACM, the building owner shall post signs which identify the material which is present, its location, and appropriate work practices which, if followed, will ensure that ACM and/or PACM will not be disturbed. The employer shall ensure, to the extent feasible, that employees who come in contact with these signs can comprehend them. Means to ensure employee comprehension may include the use of foreign languages, pictographs, graphics, and awareness training. (7) Signs. (ii) (A) The warning signs required by paragraph (k)(7) of this section shall bear the following information. DANGER ASBESTOS MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (B) In addition, where the use of respirators and protective clothing is required in the regulated area under this section, the warning signs shall include the following: WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING IN THIS AREA (C) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (k)(7)(ii)(A) of this section: DANGER ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (D) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (k)(7)(ii)(B) of this section: RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA (iii) The employer shall ensure that employees working in and contiguous to regulated areas comprehend the warning signs required to be posted by paragraph (k)(7)(i) of this section. Means to ensure employee comprehension may include the use of foreign languages, pictographs and graphics. (8) Labels. (ii) The employer shall ensure that such labels comply with paragraphs (k) of this section. (iii) The employer shall ensure that labels of bags or containers of protective clothing and equipment, scrap, waste, and debris containing asbestos fibers bear the following information: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS DO NOT BREATHE DUST AVOID CREATING DUST (iv) (A) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on raw materials, mixtures or labels of bags or containers of protective clothing and equipment, scrap, waste, and debris containing asbestos fibers in lieu of the labeling requirements in paragraphs (k)(8)(ii) and (k)(8)(iii) of this section: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD (B) Labels shall also contain a warning statement against breathing asbestos fibers. (v) [Reserved] (vi) The provisions for labels required by paragraphs (k)(8)(i) through (k)(8)(iii) of this section do not apply where: (A) Asbestos fibers have been modified by a bonding agent, coating, binder, or other material, provided that the manufacturer can demonstrate that, during any reasonably foreseeable use, handling, storage, disposal, processing, or transportation, no airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers in excess of the permissible exposure limit and/or excursion limit will be released, or (B) Asbestos is present in a product in concentrations less than 1.0 percent. (vii) When a building owner or employer identifies previously installed PACM and/or ACM, labels or signs shall be affixed or posted so that employees will be notified of what materials contain PACM and/or ACM. The employer shall attach such labels in areas where they will clearly be noticed by employees who are likely to be exposed, such as at the entrance to mechanical room/areas. Signs required by paragraph (k)(6) of this section may be posted in lieu of labels so long as they contain information required for labelling. The employer shall ensure, to the extent feasible, that employees who come in contact with these signs or labels can comprehend them. Means to ensure employee comprehension may include the use of foreign languages, pictographs, graphics, and awareness training. (9) Employee Information and Training. (ii) Training shall be provided prior to or at the time of initial assignment and at least annually thereafter. (iii) Training for Class I operations and for Class II operations that require the use of critical barriers (or equivalent isolation methods) and/or negative pressure enclosures under this section shall be the equivalent in curriculum, training method and length to the EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) asbestos abatement workers training (40 CFR part 763, subpart E, appendix C). (iv) Training for other Class II work. (A) For work with asbestos containing roofing materials, flooring materials, siding materials, ceiling tiles, or transite panels, training shall include at a minimum all the elements included in paragraph (k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addition, the specific work practices and engineering controls set forth in paragraph (g) of this section which specifically relate to that category. Such course shall include “hands-on” training and shall take at least 8 hours. (B) An employee who works with more than one of the categories of material specified in paragraph (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this section shall receive training in the work practices applicable to each category of material that the employee removes and each removal method that the employee uses. (C) For Class II operations not involving the categories of material specified in paragraph (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this section, training shall be provided which shall include at a minimum all the elements included in paragraph (k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addition, the specific work practices and engineering controls set forth in paragraph (g) of this section which specifically relate to the category of material being removed, and shall include “hands-on” training in the work practices applicable to each category of material that the employee removes and each removal method that the employee uses. (v) Training for Class III employees shall be consistent with EPA requirements for training of local education agency maintenance and custodial staff as set forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2). Such a course shall also include “hands-on” training and shall take at least 16 hours. Exception: For Class III operations for which the competent person determines that the EPA curriculum does not adequately cover the training needed to perform that activity, training shall include as a minimum all the elements included in paragraph (k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addition, the specific work practices and engineering controls set forth in paragraph (g) of this section which specifically relate to that activity, and shall include “hands-on” training in the work practices applicable to each category of material that the employee disturbs. (vi) Training for employees performing Class IV operations shall be consistent with EPA requirements for training of local education agency maintenance and custodial staff as set forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(1). Such a course shall include available information concerning the locations of thermal system insulation and surfacing ACM/PACM, and asbestos-containing flooring material, or flooring material where the absence of asbestos has not yet been certified; and instruction in recognition of damage, deterioration, and delamination of asbestos containing building materials. Such course shall take at least 2 hours. (vii) Training for employees who are likely to be exposed in excess of the PEL and who are not otherwise required to be trained under paragraph (k)(9)(iii) through (vi) of this section, shall meet the requirements of paragraph (k)(9)(viii) of this section. (viii) The training program shall be conducted in a manner that the employee is able to understand. In addition to the content required by provisions in paragraphs (k)(9)(iii) through (vi) of this section, the employer shall ensure that each such employee is informed of the following: (A) Methods of recognizing asbestos, including the requirement in paragraph (k)(1) of this section to presume that certain building materials contain asbestos; (B) The health effects associated with asbestos exposure; (C) The relationship between smoking and asbestos in producing lung cancer; (D) The nature of operations that could result in exposure to asbestos, the importance of necessary protective controls to minimize exposure including, as applicable, engineering controls, work practices, respirators, housekeeping procedures, hygiene facilities, protective clothing, decontamination procedures, emergency procedures, and waste disposal procedures, and any necessary instruction in the use of these controls and procedures; where Class III and IV work will be or is performed, the contents of EPA 20T-2003, “Managing Asbestos In-Place” July 1990 or its equivalent in content; (E) The purpose, proper use, fitting instructions, and limitations of respirators as required by 29 CFR 1910.134; (F) The appropriate work practices for performing the asbestos job; (G) Medical surveillance program requirements; (H) The content of this standard including appendices; (I) The names, addresses and phone numbers of public health organizations which provide information, materials and/or conduct programs concerning smoking cessation. The employer may distribute the list of such organizations contained in appendix J to this section, to comply with this requirement; and (J) The requirements for posting signs and affixing labels and the meaning of the required legends for such signs and labels. (10) Access to training materials. (i) The employer shall make readily available to affected employees without cost, written materials relating to the employee training program, including a copy of this regulation. (ii) The employer shall provide to the Assistant Secretary and the Director, upon request, all information and training materials relating to the employee information and training program. (iii) The employer shall inform all employees concerning the availability of self-help smoking cessation program material. Upon employee request, the employer shall distribute such material, consisting of NIH Publication No, 89-1647, or equivalent self-help material, which is approved or published by a public health organization listed in appendix J to this section. (l) Housekeeping Vacuuming. (2) Waste disposal. (3) Care of asbestos-containing flooring material. (ii) Sanding of flooring material is prohibited. (iii) Stripping of finishes shall be conducted using low abrasion pads at speeds lower than 300 rpm and wet methods. (iv) Burnishing or dry buffing may be performed only on flooring which has sufficient finish so that the pad cannot contact the flooring material. (4) Waste and debris and accompanying dust in an area containing accessible thermal system insulation or surfacing ACM/PACM or visibly deteriorated ACM: (i) Shall not be dusted or swept dry, or vacuumed without using a HEPA filter; (ii) Shall be promptly cleaned up and disposed of in leak tight containers. (m) Medical surveillance— General Employees covered. (B) For employees otherwise required by this standard to wear a negative pressure respirator, employers shall ensure employees are physically able to perform the work and use the equipment. This determination shall be made under the supervision of a physician. (ii) Examination. (B) Persons other than such licensed physicians who administer the pulmonary function testing required by this section shall complete a training course in spirometry sponsored by an appropriate academic or professional institution. (2) Medical examinations and consultations Frequency. (A) Prior to assignment of the employee to an area where negative-pressure respirators are worn; (B) When the employee is assigned to an area where exposure to asbestos may be at or above the permissible exposure limit for 30 or more days per year, or engage in Class I, II, or III work for a combined total of 30 or more days per year, a medical examination must be given within 10 working days following the thirtieth day of exposure; (C) And at least annually thereafter. (D) If the examining physician determines that any of the examinations should be provided more frequently than specified, the employer shall provide such examinations to affected employees at the frequencies specified by the physician. (E) Exception: No medical examination is required of any employee if adequate records show that the employee has been examined in accordance with this paragraph within the past 1-year period. (ii) Content. (A) A medical and work history with special emphasis directed to the pulmonary, cardiovascular, and gastrointestinal systems. (B) On initial examination, the standardized questionnaire contained in part 1 of appendix D to this section, and, on annual examination, the abbreviated standardized questionnaire contained in part 2 of appendix D to this section. (C) A physical examination directed to the pulmonary and gastrointestinal systems, including a 14- by 17-inch or other reasonably-sized standard film or digital posterior-anterior chest X-ray to be administered at the discretion of the physician, and pulmonary function tests of forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume at one second (FEV 1 (D) Any other examinations or tests deemed necessary by the examining physician. (3) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this standard and Appendices D, E, and I to this section; (ii) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the employee's exposure; (iii) The employee's representative exposure level or anticipated exposure level; (iv) A description of any personal protective and respiratory equipment used or to be used; and (v) Information from previous medical examinations of the affected employee that is not otherwise available to the examining physician. (4) Physician's written opinion. (A) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions that would place the employee at an increased risk of material health impairment from exposure to asbestos; (B) Any recommended limitations on the employee or on the use of personal protective equipment such as respirators; and (C) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and of any medical conditions that may result from asbestos exposure. (D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the increased risk of lung cancer attributable to the combined effect of smoking and asbestos exposure. (ii) The employer shall instruct the physician not to reveal in the written opinion given to the employer specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure to asbestos. (iii) The employer shall provide a copy of the physician's written opinion to the affected employee within 30 days from its receipt. (n) Recordkeeping Objective data relied on pursuant to paragraph (f) to this section. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information: (A) The product qualifying for exemption; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol, results of testing, and/or analysis of the material for the release of asbestos; (D) A description of the operation exempted and how the data support the exemption; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exemption. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of the employer's reliance upon such objective data. (2) Exposure measurements. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement; (B) The operation involving exposure to asbestos that is being monitored; (C) Sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) Number, duration, and results of samples taken; (E) Type of protective devices worn, if any; and (F) Name and exposure of the employees whose exposures are represented. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least thirty (30) years, in accordance with § 1910.1020 of this chapter (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information: (A) The name of the employee; (B) A copy of the employee's medical examination results, including the medical history, questionnaire responses, results of any tests, and physician's recommendations. (C) Physician's written opinions; (D) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to asbestos; and (E) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by paragraph (m) of this section. (iii) The employer shall ensure that this record is maintained for the duration of employment plus thirty (30) years, in accordance with § 1910.1020 of this chapter. (4) Training records. (5) Data to Rebut PACM. (6) Records of required notifications. (7) Availability. (ii) The employer must comply with the requirements concerning availability of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020. (8) Transfer of records. (o) Competent person General. (2) Required inspections by the competent person. (3) Additional inspections. (i) On all worksites where employees are engaged in Class I or II asbestos work, the competent person designated in accordance with paragraph (e)(6) of this section shall perform or supervise the following duties, as applicable: (A) Set up the regulated area, enclosure, or other containment; (B) Ensure (by on-site inspection) the integrity of the enclosure or containment; (C) Set up procedures to control entry to and exit from the enclosure and/or area; (D) Supervise all employee exposure monitoring required by this section and ensure that it is conducted as required by paragraph (f) of this section; (E) Ensure that employees working within the enclosure and/or using glove bags wear respirators and protective clothing as required by paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section; (F) Ensure through on-site supervision, that employees set up, use, and remove engineering controls, use work practices and personal protective equipment in compliance with all requirements; (G) Ensure that employees use the hygiene facilities and observe the decontamination procedures specified in paragraph (j) of this section; (H) Ensure that through on-site inspection, engineering controls are functioning properly and employees are using proper work practices; and, (I) Ensure that notification requirement in paragraph (k) of this section are met. (ii) [Reserved] (4) Training for the competent person. (ii) For Class III and IV asbestos work, the competent person shall be trained in aspects of asbestos handling appropriate for the nature of the work, to include procedures for setting up glove bags and mini-enclosures, practices for reducing asbestos exposures, use of wet methods, the contents of this standard, and the identification of asbestos. Such training shall include successful completion of a course that is consistent with EPA requirements for training of local education agency maintenance and custodial staff as set forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2), or its equivalent in stringency, content and length. Competent persons for Class III and IV work, may also be trained pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (o)(4)(i) of this section. (p) Appendices. (2) Appendices B, F, H, I, J, and K to this section are informational and are not intended to create any additional obligations not otherwise imposed or to detract from any existing obligations. Appendix A to § 1926.1101—OSHA Reference Method—Mandatory This mandatory appendix specifies the procedure for analyzing air samples for asbestos and specifies quality control procedures that must be implemented by laboratories performing the analysis. The sampling and analytical methods described below represent the elements of the available monitoring methods (such as appendix B of this regulation, the most current version of the OSHA method ID-160, or the most current version of the NIOSH Method 7400). All employers who are required to conduct air monitoring under paragraph (f) of the standard are required to utilize analytical laboratories that use this procedure, or an equivalent method, for collecting and analyzing samples. Sampling and Analytical Procedure 1. The sampling medium for air samples shall be mixed cellulose ester filter membranes. These shall be designated by the manufacturer as suitable for asbestos counting. See below for rejection of blanks. 2. The preferred collection device shall be the 25-mm diameter cassette with an open-faced 50-mm electrically conductive extension cowl. The 37-mm cassette may be used if necessary but only if written justification for the need to use the 37-mm filter cassette accompanies the sample results in the employee's exposure monitoring record. Do not reuse or reload cassettes for asbestos sample collection. 3. An air flow rate between 0.5 liter/min and 2.5 liters/min shall be selected for the 25/mm cassette. If the 37-mm cassette is used, an air flow rate between 1 liter/min and 2.5 liters/min shall be selected. 4. Where possible, a sufficient air volume for each air sample shall be collected to yield between 100 and 1,300 fibers per square millimeter on the membrane filter. If a filter darkens in appearance or if loose dust is seen on the filter, a second sample shall be started. 5. Ship the samples in a rigid container with sufficient packing material to prevent dislodging the collected fibers. Packing material that has a high electrostatic charge on its surface (e.g., expanded polystyrene) cannot be used because such material can cause loss of fibers to the sides of the cassette. 6. Calibrate each personal sampling pump before and after use with a representative filter cassette installed between the pump and the calibration devices. 7. Personal samples shall be taken in the “breathing zone” of the employee (i.e., attached to or near the collar or lapel near the worker's face). 8. Fiber counts shall be made by positive phase contrast using a microscope with an 8 to 10× eyepiece and a 40 to 45× objective for a total magnification of approximately 400× and a numerical aperture of 0.65 to 0.75. The microscope shall also be fitted with a green or blue filter. 9. The microscope shall be fitted with a Walton-Beckett eyepiece graticule calibrated for a field diameter of 100 micrometers (±2 micrometers). 10. The phase-shift detection limit of the microscope shall be about 3 degrees measured using the HSE phase shift test slide as outlined below. a. Place the test slide on the microscope stage and center it under the phase objective. b. Bring the blocks of grooved lines into focus. Note: The slide consists of seven sets of grooved lines (ca. 20 grooves to each block) in descending order of visibility from sets 1 to 7, seven being the least visible. The requirements for asbestos counting are that the microscope optics must resolve the grooved lines in set 3 completely, although they may appear somewhat faint, and that the grooved lines in sets 6 and 7 must be invisible. Sets 4 and 5 must be at least partially visible but may vary slightly in visibility between microscopes. A microscope that fails to meet these requirements has either too low or too high a resolution to be used for asbestos counting. c. If the image deteriorates, clean and adjust the microscope optics. If the problem persists, cosult the microscope manufacturer. 11. Each set of samples taken will include 10% field blanks or a minimum of 2 field blanks. These blanks must come from the same lot as the filters used for sample collection. The field blank results shall be averaged and subtracted from the analytical results before reporting. A set consists of any sample or group of samples for which an evaluation for this standard must be made. Any samples represented by a field blank having a fiber count in excess of the detection limit of the method being used shall be rejected. 12. The samples shall be mounted by the acetone/triacetin method or a method with an equivalent index of refraction and similar clarity. 13. Observe the following counting rules. a. Count only fibers equal to or longer than 5 micrometers. Measure the length of curved fibers along the curve. b. In the absence of other information, count all particles as asbestos, that have a length-to-width ratio (aspect ratio) of 3:1 or greater. c. Fibers lying entirely within the boundary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the boundary once, having one end within the circle, shall receive the count of one half ( 1/2 d. Count bundles of fibers as one fiber unless individual fibers can be identified by observing both ends of an individual fiber. e. Count enough graticule fields to yield 100 fibers. Count a minimum of 20 fields; stop counting at 100 fields regardless of fiber count. 14. Blind recounts shall be conducted at the rate of 10 percent. Quality Control Procedures 1. Intralaboratory program. Each laboratory and/or each company with more than one microscopist counting slides shall establish a statistically designed quality assurance program involving blind recounts and comparisons between microscopists to monitor the variability of counting by each microscopist and between microscopists. In a company with more than one laboratory, the program shall include all laboratories, and shall also evaluate the laboratory-to-laboratory variability. 2a. Interlaboratory program. Each laboratory analyzing asbestos samples for compliance determination shall implement an interlaboratory quality assurance program that, as a minimum, includes participation of at least two other independent laboratories. Each laboratory shall participate in round robin testing at least once every 6 months with at least all the other laboratories in its interlaboratory quality assurance group. Each laboratory shall submit slides typical of its own workload for use in this program. The round robin shall be designed and results analyzed using appropriate statistical methodology. b. All laboratories should also participate in a national sample testing scheme such as the Proficiency Analytical Testing Program (PAT), or the Asbestos Registry sponsored by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA). 3. All individuals performing asbestos analysis must have taken the NIOSH course for sampling and evaluating airborne asbestos dust or an equivalent course. 4. When the use of different microscopes contributes to differences between counters and laboratories, the effect of the different microscope shall be evaluated and the microscope shall be replaced, as necessary. 5. Current results of these quality assurance programs shall be posted in each laboratory to keep the microscopists informed. Appendix B to § 1926.1101—Sampling and Analysis (Non-Mandatory) Matrix Air: OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits: Time Weighted Average 0.1 fiber/cc Excursion Level (30 minutes) 1.0 fiber/cc Collection Procedure: A known volume of air is drawn through a 25-mm diameter cassette containing a mixed-cellulose ester filter. The cassette must be equipped with an electrically conductive 50-mm extension cowl. The sampling time and rate are chosen to give a fiber density of between 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2 on the filter. Recommended Sampling Rate 0.5 to 5.0 liters/minute (L/min) Recommended Air Volumes: Minimum 25 L Maximum 2,400 L Analytical Procedure: A portion of the sample filter is cleared and prepared for asbestos fiber counting by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) at 400X. Commercial manufacturers and products mentioned in this method are for descriptive use only and do not constitute endorsements by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from other sources can be substituted. 1. Introduction This method describes the collection of airborne asbestos fibers using calibrated sampling pumps with mixed-cellulose ester (MCE) filters and analysis by phase contrast microscopy (PCM). Some terms used are unique to this method and are defined below: Asbestos: Chrysotile Mg 3 2 5 4 Crocidolite Na 2 3 2 + 2 3 + 8 22 2 Amosite (Mg,Fe) 7 8 22 2 Tremolite-actinolite Ca 2 5 8 22 2 Anthophyllite (Mg,Fe) 7 8 22 2 Asbestos Fiber: Aspect Ratio: Cleavage Fragments: Detection Limit: Differential Counting: Fiber: Field: Set: Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite: Walton-Beckett Graticule: 2 1.1. History Early surveys to determine asbestos exposures were conducted using impinger counts of total dust with the counts expressed as million particles per cubic foot. The British Asbestos Research Council recommended filter membrane counting in 1969. In July 1969, the Bureau of Occupational Safety and Health published a filter membrane method for counting asbestos fibers in the United States. This method was refined by NIOSH and published as P & CAM 239. On May 29, 1971, OSHA specified filter membrane sampling with phase contrast counting for evaluation of asbestos exposures at work sites in the United States. The use of this technique was again required by OSHA in 1986. Phase contrast microscopy has continued to be the method of choice for the measurement of occupational exposure to asbestos. 1.2. Principle Air is drawn through a MCE filter to capture airborne asbestos fibers. A wedge shaped portion of the filter is removed, placed on a glass microscope slide and made transparent. A measured area (field) is viewed by PCM. All the fibers meeting defined criteria for asbestos are counted and considered a measure of the airborne asbestos concentration. 1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages There are four main advantages of PCM over other methods: (1) The technique is specific for fibers. Phase contrast is a fiber counting technique which excludes non-fibrous particles from the analysis. (2) The technique is inexpensive and does not require specialized knowledge to carry out the analysis for total fiber counts. (3) The analysis is quick and can be performed on-site for rapid determination of air concentrations of asbestos fibers. (4) The technique has continuity with historical epidemiological studies so that estimates of expected disease can be inferred from long-term determinations of asbestos exposures. The main disadvantage of PCM is that it does not positively identify asbestos fibers. Other fibers which are not asbestos may be included in the count unless differential counting is performed. This requires a great deal of experience to adequately differentiate asbestos from non-asbestos fibers. Positive identification of asbestos must be performed by polarized light or electron microscopy techniques. A further disadvantage of PCM is that the smallest visible fibers are about 0.2 µm in diameter while the finest asbestos fibers may be as small as 0.02 µm in diameter. For some exposures, substantially more fibers may be present than are actually counted. 1.4. Workplace Exposure Asbestos is used by the construction industry in such products as shingles, floor tiles, asbestos cement, roofing felts, insulation and acoustical products. Non-construction uses include brakes, clutch facings, paper, paints, plastics, and fabrics. One of the most significant exposures in the workplace is the removal and encapsulation of asbestos in schools, public buildings, and homes. Many workers have the potential to be exposed to asbestos during these operations. About 95% of the asbestos in commercial use in the United States is chrysotile. Crocidolite and amosite make up most of the remainder. Anthophyllite and tremolite or actinolite are likely to be encountered as contaminants in various industrial products. 1.5. Physical Properties Asbestos fiber possesses a high tensile strength along its axis, is chemically inert, non-combustible, and heat resistant. It has a high electrical resistance and good sound absorbing properties. It can be weaved into cables, fabrics or other textiles, and also matted into asbestos papers, felts, or mats. 2. Range and Detection Limit 2.1. The ideal counting range on the filter is 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm 2 2.2. The detection limit for this method is 4.0 fibers per 100 fields or 5.5 fibers/mm 2 Lower Control Limit (95% Confidence) = AC—1.645(CV)(AC) Where: AC = Estimate of the airborne fiber concentration (fibers/cc) Setting the Lower Control Limit = 0 and solving for CV: 0 = AC—1.645(CV)(AC) CV = 0.61 This value was compared with CV vs. count curves. The count at which CV = 0.61 for Leidel-Busch counting statistics or for an OSHA Salt Lake Technical Center (OSHA-SLTC) CV curve (see appendix A for further information) was 4.4 fibers or 3.9 fibers per 100 fields, respectively. Although a lower detection limit of 4 fibers per 100 fields is supported by the OSHA-SLTC data, both data sets support the 4.5 fibers per 100 fields value. 3. Method Performance—Precision and Accuracy Precision is dependent upon the total number of fibers counted and the uniformity of the fiber distribution on the filter. A general rule is to count at least 20 and not more than 100 fields. The count is discontinued when 100 fibers are counted, provided that 20 fields have already been counted. Counting more than 100 fibers results in only a small gain in precision. As the total count drops below 10 fibers, an accelerated loss of precision is noted. At this time, there is no known method to determine the absolute accuracy of the asbestos analysis. Results of samples prepared through the Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) Program and analyzed by the OSHA-SLTC showed no significant bias when compared to PAT reference values. The PAT samples were analyzed from 1987 to 1989 (N = 36) and the concentration range was from 120 to 1,300 fibers/mm 2 4. Interferences Fibrous substances, if present, may interfere with asbestos analysis. Some common fibers are: fiberglass anhydrite plant fibers perlite veins gypsum some synthetic fibers membrane structures sponge spicules diatoms microorganisms wollastonite The use of electron microscopy or optical tests such as polarized light, and dispersion staining may be used to differentiate these materials from asbestos when necessary. 5. Sampling 5.1. Equipment 5.1.1. Notes: (a) DO NOT RE-USE CASSETTES. (b) Fully conductive cassettes are required to reduce fiber loss to the sides of the cassette due to electrostatic attraction. (c) Purchase filters which have been selected by the manufacturer for asbestos counting or analyze representative filters for fiber background before use. Discard the filter lot if more than 4 fibers/100 fields are found. (d) To decrease the possibility of contamination, the sampling system (filter-backup pad-cassette) for asbestos is usually preassembled by the manufacturer. (e) Other cassettes, such as the Bell-mouth, may be used within the limits of their validation. 5.1.2. 5.1.3. Each pump must be a battery operated, self-contained unit small enough to be placed on the monitored employee and not interfere with the work being performed. The pump must be capable of sampling at the collection rate for the required sampling time. 5.1.4. 5.1.5. Stopwatch and bubble tube/burette or electronic meter. 5.2. Sampling Procedure 5.2.1. 5.2.2. 5.2.3. 5.2.4. 5.2.5. Note: If sampling site calibration is not possible, environmental influences may affect the flow rate. The extent is dependent on the type of pump used. Consult with the pump manufacturer to determine dependence on environmental influences. If the pump is affected by temperature and pressure changes, correct the flow rate using the formula shown in the section “Sampling Pump Flow Rate Corrections” at the end of this appendix. 5.2.6. 5.2.7. 5.2.8. Environment Air Vol. (L) Asbestos removal operations (visible dust) 100. Asbestos removal operations (little dust) 240. Office environments 400 to 2,400. CAUTION: While sampling, observe the filter with a small flashlight. If there is a visible layer of dust on the filter, stop sampling, remove and seal the cassette, and replace with a new sampling assembly. The total dust loading should not exceed 1 mg. 5.2.9. 5.2.10. 5.2.11 5.3.1. 5.3.2. 5.3.3. 6. Analysis 6.1. Safety Precautions 6.1.1. 6.1.2. CAUTION: 6.2. Equipment 6.2.1. 6.2.2. 6.2.3. 6.2.4. 6.2.5. 6.2.6. 6.2.7. 6.2.8. 6.2.9. 6.2.10. 1/2 6.2.11. 6.2.12. 6.2.13. 6.2.14. 6.2.15. 6.3. Reagents 6.3.1. 6.3.2. 6.3.3. 6.4. Standard Preparation A way to prepare standard asbestos samples of known concentration has not been developed. It is possible to prepare replicate samples of nearly equal concentration. This has been performed through the PAT program. These asbestos samples are distributed by the AIHA to participating laboratories. Since only about one-fourth of a 25-mm sample membrane is required for an asbestos count, any PAT sample can serve as a “standard” for replicate counting. 6.5. Sample Mounting Note: See Safety Precautions in Section 6.1. before proceeding. The objective is to produce samples with a smooth (non-grainy) background in a medium with a refractive index of approximately 1.46. The technique below collapses the filter for easier focusing and produces permanent mounts which are useful for quality control and interlaboratory comparison. An aluminum block or similar device is required for sample preparation. 6.5.1. 6.5.2. 6.5.3. 6.5.4. 6.5.5. 6.5.6. 6.5.7. 6.5.8. 6.5.9. 6.6. Sample Analysis Completely align the microscope according to the manufacturer's instructions. Then, align the microscope using the following general alignment routine at the beginning of every counting session and more often if necessary. 6.6.1. Alignment (1) Clean all optical surfaces. Even a small amount of dirt can significantly degrade the image. (2) Rough focus the objective on a sample. (3) Close down the field iris so that it is visible in the field of view. Focus the image of the iris with the condenser focus. Center the image of the iris in the field of view. (4) Install the phase telescope and focus on the phase rings. Critically center the rings. Misalignment of the rings results in astigmatism which will degrade the image. (5) Place the phase-shift test slide on the microscope stage and focus on the lines. The analyst must see line set 3 and should see at least parts of 4 and 5 but, not see line set 6 or 6. A microscope/microscopist combination which does not pass this test may not be used. 6.6.2. Counting Fibers (1) Place the prepared sample slide on the mechanical stage of the microscope. Position the center of the wedge under the objective lens and focus upon the sample. (2) Start counting from one end of the wedge and progress along a radial line to the other end (count in either direction from perimeter to wedge tip). Select fields randomly, without looking into the eyepieces, by slightly advancing the slide in one direction with the mechanical stage control. (3) Continually scan over a range of focal planes (generally the upper 10 to 15 µm of the filter surface) with the fine focus control during each field count. Spend at least 5 to 15 seconds per field. (4) Most samples will contain asbestos fibers with fiber diameters less than 1 µm. Look carefully for faint fiber images. The small diameter fibers will be very hard to see. However, they are an important contribution to the total count. (5) Count only fibers equal to or longer than 5 µm. Measure the length of curved fibers along the curve. (6) Count fibers which have a length to width ratio of 3:1 or greater. (7) Count all the fibers in at least 20 fields. Continue counting until either 100 fibers are counted or 100 fields have been viewed; whichever occurs first. Count all the fibers in the final field. (8) Fibers lying entirely within the boundary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the boundary once, having one end within the circle shall receive a count of 1/2 (9) Count bundles of fibers as one fiber unless individual fibers can be clearly identified and each individual fiber is clearly not connected to another counted fiber. See Figure 1 for counting conventions. (10) Record the number of fibers in each field in a consistent way such that filter non-uniformity can be assessed. (11) Regularly check phase ring alignment. (12) When an agglomerate (mass of material) covers more than 25% of the field of view, reject the field and select another. Do not include it in the number of fields counted. (13) Perform a “blind recount” of 1 in every 10 filter wedges (slides). Re-label the slides using a person other than the original counter. 6.7. Fiber Identification As previously mentioned in Section 1.3., PCM does not provide positive confirmation of asbestos fibers. Alternate differential counting techniques should be used if discrimination is desirable. Differential counting may include primary discrimination based on morphology, polarized light analysis of fibers, or modification of PCM data by Scanning Electron or Transmission Electron Microscopy. A great deal of experience is required to routinely and correctly perform differential counting. It is discouraged unless it is legally necessary. Then, only if a fiber is obviously not asbestos should it be excluded from the count. Further discussion of this technique can be found in reference 8.10. If there is a question whether a fiber is asbestos or not, follow the rule: “WHEN IN DOUBT, COUNT.” 6.8. Analytical Recommendations—Quality Control System 6.8.1. 6.8.2. 6.8.3. 6.8.4. The analyses done by the counters to establish the slide bank may be used for an interim quality control program if the data are treated in a proper statistical fashion. 7. Calculations 7.1. Calculate the estimated airborne asbestos fiber concentration on the filter sample using the following formula: where: AC = Airborne fiber concentration FB = Total number of fibers greater than 5 µm counted FL = Total number of fields counted on the filter BFB = Total number of fibers greater than 5 µm counted in the blank BFL = Total number of fields counted on the blank ECA = Effective collecting area of filter (385 mm 2 FR = Pump flow rate (L/min) MFA = Microscope count field area (mm 2 2 T = Sample collection time (min) 1,000 = Conversion of L to cc Note: The collection area of a filter is seldom equal to 385 mm 2 Area = † 2 7.2. Short-Cut Calculation Since a given analyst always has the same interpupillary distance, the number of fields per filter for a particular analyst will remain constant for a given size filter. The field size for that analyst is constant (i.e. the analyst is using an assigned microscope and is not changing the reticle). For example, if the exposed area of the filter is always 385 mm 2 2 7.3. Recount Calculations As mentioned in step 13 of Section 6.6.2., a “blind recount” of 10% of the slides is performed. In all cases, differences will be observed between the first and second counts of the same filter wedge. Most of these differences will be due to chance alone, that is, due to the random variability (precision) of the count method. Statistical recount criteria enables one to decide whether observed differences can be explained due to chance alone or are probably due to systematic differences between analysts, microscopes, or other biasing factors. The following recount criterion is for a pair of counts that estimate AC in fibers/cc. The criterion is given at the type-I error level. That is, there is 5% maximum risk that we will reject a pair of counts for the reason that one might be biased, when the large observed difference is really due to chance. Reject a pair of counts if: Where: AC 1 AC 2 AC avg CV FB If a pair of counts are rejected by this criterion then, recount the rest of the filters in the submitted set. Apply the test and reject any other pairs failing the test. Rejection shall include a memo to the industrial hygienist stating that the sample failed a statistical test for homogeneity and the true air concentration may be significantly different than the reported value. 7.4. Reporting Results Report results to the industrial hygienist as fibers/cc. Use two significant figures. If multiple analyses are performed on a sample, an average of the results is to be reported unless any of the results can be rejected for cause. 8. References 8.1. Dreesen, W.C., et al., U.S. Public Health Service: A Study of Asbestosis in the Asbestos Textile Industry 8.2. Asbestos Research Council: The Measurement of Airborne Asbestos Dust by the Membrane Filter Method 8.3. Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, R.D., Brown, T.A., Equipment and Procedure for Mounting Millipore Filters and Counting Asbestos Fibers by Phase Contrast Microscopy, 8.4. NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, 8.5. Asbestos, 8.6. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite. Final Rule, Federal Register 8.7. Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite, 8.8. Criteria for a Recommended Standard—Occupational Exposure to Asbestos 8.9. Leidel, N.A., Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, R.D., Busch, K.A., USPHS/NIOSH Membrane Filter Method for Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Fibers 8.10. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Microscopy in Analysis of Asbestos and Quartz, Quality Control The OSHA asbestos regulations require each laboratory to establish a quality control program. The following is presented as an example of how the OSHA-SLTC constructed its internal CV curve as part of meeting this requirement. Data is from 395 samples collected during OSHA compliance inspections and analyzed from October 1980 through April 1986. Each sample was counted by 2 to 5 different counters independently of one another. The standard deviation and the CV statistic was calculated for each sample. This data was then plotted on a graph of CV vs. fibers/mm 2 CV = antilog 10 10 2 10 where: x = the number of fibers/mm 2 Application of least squares gave: A = 0.182205 B = 0.973343 C = 0.327499 Using these values, the equation becomes: CV = antilog 10 10 2 −0.973343(log 10 Sampling Pump Flow Rate Corrections This correction is used if a difference greater than 5% in ambient temperature and/or pressure is noted between calibration and sampling sites and the pump does not compensate for the differences. Where: Q act Q cal P cal P act T act T cal Walton-Beckett Graticule When ordering the Graticule for asbestos counting, specify the exact disc diameter needed to fit the ocular of the microscope and the diameter (mm) of the circular counting area. Instructions for measuring the dimensions necessary are listed: (1) Insert any available graticule into the focusing eyepiece and focus so that the graticule lines are sharp and clear. (2) Align the microscope. (3) Place a stage micrometer on the microscope object stage and focus the microscope on the graduated lines. (4) Measure the magnified grid length, PL (µm), using the stage micrometer. (5) Remove the graticule from the microscope and measure its actual grid length, AL (mm). This can be accomplished by using a mechanical stage fitted with verniers, or a jeweler's loupe with a direct reading scale. (6) Let D = 100 µm. Calculate the circle diameter, d c Example: If PL = 108 µm, AL = 2.93 mm and D = 100 µm, then, (7) Each eyepiece-objective-reticle combination on the microscope must be calibrated. Should any of the three be changed (by zoom adjustment, disassembly, replacement, etc.), the combination must be recalibrated. Calibration may change if interpupillary distance is changed. Measure the field diameter, D (acceptable range: 100 ±2 µm) with a stage micrometer upon receipt of the graticule from the manufacturer. Determine the field area (mm 2 Field Area = † 2 If D = 100 µm = 0.1 mm, then Field Area = † 2 2 The Graticule is available from: Graticules Ltd., Morley Road, Tonbridge TN9 IRN, Kent, England (Telephone 011-44-732-359061). Also available from PTR Optics Ltd., 145 Newton Street, Waltham, MA 02154 [telephone (617) 891-6000] or McCrone Accessories and Components, 2506 S. Michigan Ave., Chicago, IL 60616 [phone (312)-842-7100]. The graticule is custom made for each microscope. Counts for the Fibers in the Figure Structure No. Count Explanation 1 to 6 1 Single fibers all contained within the Circle. 7 1 2 Fiber crosses circle once. 8 0 Fiber too short. 9 2 Two crossing fibers. 10 0 Fiber outside graticule. 11 0 Fiber crosses graticule twice. 12 1 2 Although split, fiber only crosses once. Appendix C to § 1926.1101 [Reserved] Appendix E to § 1926.1101—Classification of Chest X-Rays—Mandatory (a) Chest X-rays shall be classified in accordance with the Guidelines for the use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses (revised edition 2011) (incorporated by reference, see § 1926.6), and recorded on a classification form following the format of the CDC/NIOSH (M) 2.8 form. As a minimum, the content within the bold lines of this form (items 1 through 4) shall be included. This form is not to be submitted to NIOSH. (b) All X-rays shall be classified only by a B-Reader, a board eligible/certified radiologist, or an experienced physician with known expertise in pneumoconioses. (c) Whenever classifying chest X-ray film, the physician shall have immediately available for reference a complete set of the ILO standard format radiographs provided for use with the Guidelines for the use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses (revised edition 2011). (d) Whenever classifying digitally-acquired chest X-rays, the physician shall have immediately available for reference a complete set of ILO standard digital chest radiographic images provided for use with the Guidelines for the Use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses (revised edition 2011). Classification of digitally-acquired chest X-rays shall be based on the viewing of images displayed as electronic copies and shall not be based on the viewing of hard copy printed transparencies of images. Appendix F to § 1926.1101—Work Practices and Engineering Controls for Class I Asbestos Operations (Non-Mandatory) This is a non-mandatory appendix to the asbestos standards for construction and for shipyards. It describes criteria and procedures for erecting and using negative pressure enclosures for Class I Asbestos Work, when NPEs are used as an allowable control method to comply with paragraph (g)(5)(i) of this section. Many small and variable details are involved in the erection of a negative pressure enclosure. OSHA and most participants in the rulemaking agreed that only the major, more performance oriented criteria should be made mandatory. These criteria are set out in paragraph (g) of this section. In addition, this appendix includes these mandatory specifications and procedures in its guidelines in order to make this appendix coherent and helpful. The mandatory nature of the criteria which appear in the regulatory text is not changed because they are included in this “non-mandatory” appendix. Similarly, the additional criteria and procedures included as guidelines in the appendix, do not become mandatory because mandatory criteria are also included in these comprehensive guidelines. In addition, none of the criteria, both mandatory and recommended, are meant to specify or imply the need for use of patented or licensed methods or equipment. Recommended specifications included in this attachment should not discourage the use of creative alternatives which can be shown to reliably achieve the objectives of negative-pressure enclosures. Requirements included in this appendix, cover general provisions to be followed in all asbestos jobs, provisions which must be followed for all Class I asbestos jobs, and provisions governing the construction and testing of negative pressure enclosures. The first category includes the requirement for use of wet methods, HEPA vacuums, and immediate bagging of waste; Class I work must conform to the following provisions: • oversight by competent person • use of critical barriers over all openings to work area • isolation of HVAC systems • use of impermeable dropcloths and coverage of all objects within regulated areas In addition, more specific requirements for NPEs include: • maintenance of −0.02 inches water gauge within enclosure • manometric measurements • air movement away from employees performing removal work • smoke testing or equivalent for detection of leaks and air direction • deactivation of electrical circuits, if not provided with ground-fault circuit interrupters. Planning the Project The standard requires that an exposure assessment be conducted before the asbestos job is begun [§ 1926.1101 (f)(1)]. Information needed for that assessment, includes data relating to prior similar jobs, as applied to the specific variables of the current job. The information needed to conduct the assessment will be useful in planning the project, and in complying with any reporting requirements under this standard, when significant changes are being made to a control system listed in the standard, [see also those of USEPA (40 CFR 61, subpart M). Thus, although the standard does not explicitly require the preparation of a written asbestos removal plan, the usual constituents of such a plan, i.e., a description of the enclosure, the equipment, and the procedures to be used throughout the project, must be determined before the enclosure can be erected. The following information should be included in the planning of the system: A physical description of the work area; A description of the approximate amount of material to be removed; A schedule for turning off and sealing existing ventilation systems; Personnel hygiene procedures; A description of personal protective equipment and clothing to be worn by employees; A description of the local exhaust ventilation systems to be used and how they are to be tested; A description of work practices to be observed by employees; An air monitoring plan; A description of the method to be used to transport waste material; and The location of the dump site. Materials and Equipment Necessary for Asbestos Removal Although individual asbestos removal projects vary in terms of the equipment required to accomplish the removal of the materials, some equipment and materials are common to most asbestos removal operations. Plastic sheeting used to protect horizontal surfaces, seal HVAC openings or to seal vertical openings and ceilings should have a minimum thickness of 6 mils. Tape or other adhesive used to attach plastic sheeting should be of sufficient adhesive strength to support the weight of the material plus all stresses encountered during the entire duration of the project without becoming detached from the surface. Other equipment and materials which should be available at the beginning of each project are: —HEPA Filtered Vacuum is essential for cleaning the work area after the asbestos has been removed. It should have a long hose capable of reaching out-of-the-way places, such as areas above ceiling tiles, behind pipes, etc. —Portable air ventilation systems installed to provide the negative air pressure and air removal from the enclosure must be equipped with a HEPA filter. The number and capacity of units required to ventilate an enclosure depend on the size of the area to be ventilated. The filters for these systems should be designed in such a manner that they can be replaced when the air flow volume is reduced by the build-up of dust in the filtration material. Pressure monitoring devices with alarms and strip chart recorders attached to each system to indicate the pressure differential and the loss due to dust buildup on the filter are recommended. —Water sprayers should be used to keep the asbestos material as saturated as possible during removal; the sprayers will provide a fine mist that minimizes the impact of the spray on the material. —Water used to saturate the asbestos containing material can be amended by adding at least 15 milliliters ( 1/4 —Backup power supplies are recommended, especially for ventilation systems. —Shower and bath water should be with mixed hot and cold water faucets. Water that has been used to clean personnel or equipment should either be filtered or be collected and discarded as asbestos waste. Soap and shampoo should be provided to aid in removing dust from the workers' skin and hair. —See paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section for appropriate respiratory protection and protective clothing. —See paragraph (k) of this section for required signs and labels. Preparing the Work Area Disabling HVAC Systems: The power to the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems that service the restricted area must be deactivated and locked off. All ducts, grills, access ports, windows and vents must be sealed off with two layers of plastic to prevent entrainment of contaminated air. Operating HVAC Systems in the Restricted Area: If components of a HVAC system located in the restricted area are connected to a system that will service another zone during the project, the portion of the duct in the restricted area must be sealed and pressurized. Necessary precautions include caulking the duct joints, covering all cracks and openings with two layers of sheeting, and pressurizing the duct throughout the duration of the project by restricting the return air flow. The power to the fan supplying the positive pressure should be locked “on” to prevent pressure loss. Sealing Elevators: If an elevator shaft is located in the restricted area, it should be either shut down or isolated by sealing with two layers of plastic sheeting. The sheeting should provide enough slack to accommodate the pressure changes in the shaft without breaking the air-tight seal. Removing Mobile Objects: All movable objects should be cleaned and removed from the work area before an enclosure is constructed unless moving the objects creates a hazard. Mobile objects will be assumed to be contaminated and should be either cleaned with amended water and a HEPA vacuum and then removed from the area or wrapped and then disposed of as hazardous waste. Cleaning and Sealing Surfaces: After cleaning with water and a HEPA vacuum, surfaces of stationary objects should be covered with two layers of plastic sheeting. The sheeting should be secured with duct tape or an equivalent method to provide a tight seal around the object. Bagging Waste: In addition to the requirement for immediate bagging of waste for disposal, it is further recommended that the waste material be double-bagged and sealed in plastic bags designed for asbestos disposal. The bags should be stored in a waste storage area that can be controlled by the workers conducting the removal. Filters removed from air handling units and rubbish removed from the area are to be bagged and handled as hazardous waste. Constructing the Enclosure The enclosure should be constructed to provide an air-tight seal around ducts and openings into existing ventilation systems and around penetrations for electrical conduits, telephone wires, water lines, drain pipes, etc. Enclosures should be both airtight and watertight except for those openings designed to provide entry and/or air flow control. Size: An enclosure should be the minimum volume to encompass all of the working surfaces yet allow unencumbered movement by the worker(s), provide unrestricted air flow past the worker(s), and ensure walking surfaces can be kept free of tripping hazards. Shape: The enclosure may be any shape that optimizes the flow of ventilation air past the worker(s). Structural Integrity: The walls, ceilings and floors must be supported in such a manner that portions of the enclosure will not fall down during normal use. Openings: It is not necessary that the structure be airtight; openings may be designed to direct air flow. Such openings should be located at a distance from active removal operations. They should be designed to draw air into the enclosure under all anticipated circumstances. In the event that negative pressure is lost, they should be fitted with either HEPA filters to trap dust or automatic trap doors that prevent dust from escaping the enclosure. Openings for exits should be controlled by an airlock or a vestibule. Barrier Supports: Frames should be constructed to support all unsupported spans of sheeting. Sheeting: Walls, barriers, ceilings, and floors should be lined with two layers of plastic sheeting having a thickness of at least 6 mil. Seams: Seams in the sheeting material should be minimized to reduce the possibilities of accidental rips and tears in the adhesive or connections. All seams in the sheeting should overlap, be staggered and not be located at corners or wall-to-floor joints. Areas Within an Enclosure: Each enclosure consists of a work area, a decontamination area, and waste storage area. The work area where the asbestos removal operations occur should be separated from both the waste storage area and the contamination control area by physical curtains, doors, and/or airflow patterns that force any airborne contamination back into the work area. See paragraph (j) of this section for requirements for hygiene facilities. During egress from the work area, each worker should step into the equipment room, clean tools and equipment, and remove gross contamination from clothing by wet cleaning and HEPA vacuuming. Before entering the shower area, foot coverings, head coverings, hand coverings, and coveralls are removed and placed in impervious bags for disposal or cleaning. Airline connections from airline respirators with HEPA disconnects and power cables from powered air-purifying respirators (PAPRs) will be disconnected just prior to entering the shower room. Establishing Negative Pressure Within the Enclosure Negative Pressure: Air is to be drawn into the enclosure under all anticipated conditions and exhausted through a HEPA filter for 24 hours a day during the entire duration of the project. Air Flow Tests: Air flow patterns will be checked before removal operations begin, at least once per operating shift and any time there is a question regarding the integrity of the enclosure. The primary test for air flow is to trace air currents with smoke tubes or other visual methods. Flow checks are made at each opening and at each doorway to demonstrate that air is being drawn into the enclosure and at each worker's position to show that air is being drawn away from the breathing zone. Monitoring Pressure Within the Enclosure: After the initial air flow patterns have been checked, the static pressure must be monitored within the enclosure. Monitoring may be made using manometers, pressure gauges, or combinations of these devices. It is recommended that they be attached to alarms and strip chart recorders at points identified by the design engineer. Corrective Actions: If the manometers or pressure gauges demonstrate a reduction in pressure differential below the required level, work should cease and the reason for the change investigated and appropriate changes made. The air flow patterns should be retested before work begins again. Pressure Differential: The design parameters for static pressure differentials between the inside and outside of enclosures typically range from 0.02 to 0.10 inches of water gauge, depending on conditions. All zones inside the enclosure must have less pressure than the ambient pressure outside of the enclosure (−0.02 inches water gauge differential). Design specifications for the differential vary according to the size, configuration, and shape of the enclosure as well as ambient and mechanical air pressure conditions around the enclosure. Air Flow Patterns: The flow of air past each worker shall be enhanced by positioning the intakes and exhaust ports to remove contaminated air from the worker's breathing zone, by positioning HEPA vacuum cleaners to draw air from the worker's breathing zone, by forcing relatively uncontaminated air past the worker toward an exhaust port, or by using a combination of methods to reduce the worker's exposure. Air Handling Unit Exhaust: The exhaust plume from air handling units should be located away from adjacent personnel and intakes for HVAC systems. Air Flow Volume: The air flow volume (cubic meters per minute) exhausted (removed) from the workplace must exceed the amount of makeup air supplied to the enclosure. The rate of air exhausted from the enclosure should be designed to maintain a negative pressure in the enclosure and air movement past each worker. The volume of air flow removed from the enclosure should replace the volume of the container at every 5 to 15 minutes. Air flow volume will need to be relatively high for large enclosures, enclosures with awkward shapes, enclosures with multiple openings, and operations employing several workers in the enclosure. Air Flow Velocity: At each opening, the air flow velocity must visibly “drag” air into the enclosure. The velocity of air flow within the enclosure must be adequate to remove airborne contamination from each worker's breathing zone without disturbing the asbestos-containing material on surfaces. Airlocks: Airlocks are mechanisms on doors and curtains that control the air flow patterns in the doorways. If air flow occurs, the patterns through doorways must be such that the air flows toward the inside of the enclosure. Sometimes vestibules, double doors, or double curtains are used to prevent air movement through the doorways. To use a vestibule, a worker enters a chamber by opening the door or curtain and then closing the entry before opening the exit door or curtain. Airlocks should be located between the equipment room and shower room, between the shower room and the clean room, and between the waste storage area and the outside of the enclosure. The air flow between adjacent rooms must be checked using smoke tubes or other visual tests to ensure the flow patterns draw air toward the work area without producing eddies. Monitoring for Airborne Concentrations In addition to the breathing zone samples taken as outlined in paragraph (f) of this section, samples of air should be taken to demonstrate the integrity of the enclosure, the cleanliness of the clean room and shower area, and the effectiveness of the HEPA filter. If the clean room is shown to be contaminated, the room must be relocated to an uncontaminated area. Samples taken near the exhaust of portable ventilation systems must be done with care. General Work Practices Preventing dust dispersion is the primary means of controlling the spread of asbestos within the enclosure. Whenever practical, the point of removal should be isolated, enclosed, covered, or shielded from the workers in the area. Waste asbestos containing materials must be bagged during or immediately after removal; the material must remain saturated until the waste container is sealed. Waste material with sharp points or corners must be placed in hard air-tight containers rather than bags. Whenever possible, large components should be sealed in plastic sheeting and removed intact. Bags or containers of waste will be moved to the waste holding area, washed, and wrapped in a bag with the appropriate labels. Cleaning the Work Area Surfaces within the work area should be kept free of visible dust and debris to the extent feasible. Whenever visible dust appears on surfaces, the surfaces within the enclosure must be cleaned by wiping with a wet sponge, brush, or cloth and then vacuumed with a HEPA vacuum. All surfaces within the enclosure should be cleaned before the exhaust ventilation system is deactivated and the enclosure is disassembled. An approved encapsulant may be sprayed onto areas after the visible dust has been removed. Appendix G to § 1926.1101 [Reserved] Appendix H to § 1926.1101—Substance Technical Information for Asbestos. Non-Mandatory I. Substance Identification A. Substance: “Asbestos” is the name of a class of magnesium-silicate minerals that occur in fibrous form. Minerals that are included in this group are chrysotile, crocidolite, amosite, anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos, and actinolite asbestos. B. Asbestos is and was used in the manufacture of heat-resistant clothing, automotive brake and clutch linings, and a variety of building materials including floor tiles, roofing felts, ceiling tiles, asbestos-cement pipe and sheet, and fire-resistant drywall. Asbestos is also present in pipe and boiler insulation materials and in sprayed-on materials located on beams, in crawlspaces, and between walls. C. The potential for an asbestos-containing product to release breathable fibers depends largely on its degree of friability. Friable means that the material can be crumbled with hand pressure and is therefore likely to emit fibers. The fibrous fluffy sprayed-on materials used for fireproofing, insulation, or sound proofing are considered to be friable, and they readily release airborne fibers if disturbed. Materials such as vinyl-asbestos floor tile or roofing felt are considered non-friable if intact and generally do not emit airborne fibers unless subjected to sanding, sawing and other aggressive operations. Asbestos-cement pipe or sheet can emit airborne fibers if the materials are cut or sawed, or if they are broken. D. Permissible exposure: Exposure to airborne asbestos fibers may not exceed 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter of air (0.1 f/cc) averaged over the 8-hour workday, and 1 fiber per cubic centimeter of air (1.0 f/cc) averaged over a 30 minute work period. II. Health Hazard Data A. Asbestos can cause disabling respiratory disease and various types of cancers if the fibers are inhaled. Inhaling or ingesting fibers from contaminated clothing or skin can also result in these diseases. The symptoms of these diseases generally do not appear for 20 or more years after initial exposure. B. Exposure to asbestos has been shown to cause lung cancer, mesothelioma, and cancer of the stomach and colon. Mesothelioma is a rare cancer of the thin membrane lining of the chest and abdomen. Symptoms of mesothelioma include shortness of breath, pain in the walls of the chest, and/or abdominal pain. III. Respirators and Protective Clothing A. Respirators: You are required to wear a respirator when performing tasks that result in asbestos exposure that exceeds the permissible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc and when performing certain designated operations. Air-purifying respirators equipped with a high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter can be used where airborne asbestos fiber concentrations do not exceed 1.0 f/cc; otherwise, more protective respirators such as air-supplied, positive-pressure, full facepiece respirators must be used. Disposable respirators or dust masks are not permitted to be used for asbestos work. For effective protection, respirators must fit your face and head snugly. Your employer is required to conduct a fit test when you are first assigned a respirator and every 6 months thereafter. Respirators should not be loosened or removed in work situations where their use is required. B. Protective Clothing: You are required to wear protective clothing in work areas where asbestos fiber concentrations exceed the permissible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc. IV. Disposal Procedures and Clean-up A. Wastes that are generated by processes where asbestos is present include: 1. Empty asbestos shipping containers. 2. Process wastes such as cuttings, trimmings, or reject materials. 3. Housekeeping waste from wet-sweeping or HEPA-vacuuming. 4. Asbestos fireproofing or insulating material that is removed from buildings. 5. Asbestos-containing building products removed during building renovation or demolition. 6. Contaminated disposable protective clothing. B. Empty shipping bags can be flattened under exhaust hoods and packed into airtight containers for disposal. Empty shipping drums are difficult to clean and should be sealed. C. Vacuum bags or disposable paper filters should not be cleaned, but should be sprayed with a fine water mist and placed into a labeled waste container. D. Process waste and housekeeping waste should be wetted with water or a mixture of water and surfactant prior to packaging in disposable containers. E. Asbestos-containing material that is removed from buildings must be disposed of in leak-tight 6-mil plastic bags, plastic-lined cardboard containers, or plastic-lined metal containers. These wastes, which are removed while wet, should be sealed in containers before they dry out to minimize the release of asbestos fibers during handling. V. Access to Information A. Each year, your employer is required to inform you of the information contained in this standard and appendices for asbestos. In addition, your employer must instruct you in the proper work practices for handling asbestos-containing materials, and the correct use of protective equipment. B. Your employer is required to determine whether you are being exposed to asbestos. Your employer must treat exposure to thermal system insulation and sprayed-on and troweled-on surfacing material as asbestos exposure, unless results of laboratory analysis show that the material does not contain asbestos. You or your representative has the right to observe employee measurements and to record the results obtained. Your employer is required to inform you of your exposure, and, if you are exposed above the permissible exposure limit, he or she is required to inform you of the actions that are being taken to reduce your exposure to within the permissible limit. C. Your employer is required to keep records of your exposures and medical examinations. These exposure records must be kept for at least thirty (30) years. Medical records must be kept for the period of your employment plus thirty (30) years. D. Your employer is required to release your exposure and medical records to your physician or designated representative upon your written request. Appendix I to § 1926.1101—Medical Surveillance Guidelines for Asbestos, Non-Mandatory I. Route of Entry Inhalation, ingestion. II. Toxicology Clinical evidence of the adverse effects associated with exposure to asbestos is present in the form of several well-conducted epidemiological studies of occupationally exposed workers, family contacts of workers, and persons living near asbestos mines. These studies have shown a definite association between exposure to asbestos and an increased incidence of lung cancer, pleural and peritoneal mesothelioma, gastrointestinal cancer, and asbestosis. The latter is a disabling fibrotic lung disease that is caused only by exposure to asbestos. Exposure to asbestos has also been associated with an increased incidence of esophageal, kidney, laryngeal, pharyngeal, and buccal cavity cancers. As with other known chronic occupational diseases, disease associated with asbestos generally appears about 20 years following the first occurrence of exposure: There are no known acute effects associated with exposure to asbestos. Epidemiological studies indicate that the risk of lung cancer among exposed workers who smoke cigarettes is greatly increased over the risk of lung cancer among non-exposed smokers or exposed nonsmokers. These studies suggest that cessation of smoking will reduce the risk of lung cancer for a person exposed to asbestos but will not reduce it to the same level of risk as that existing for an exposed worker who has never smoked. III. Signs and Symptoms of Exposure-Related Disease The signs and symptoms of lung cancer or gastrointestinal cancer induced by exposure to asbestos are not unique, except that a chest X-ray of an exposed patient with lung cancer may show pleural plaques, pleural calcification, or pleural fibrosis, and may also show asbestosis ( i.e., Asbestosis is pulmonary fibrosis caused by the accumulation of asbestos fibers in the lungs. Symptoms include shortness of breath, coughing, fatigue, and vague feelings of sickness. When the fibrosis worsens, shortness of breath occurs even at rest. The diagnosis of asbestosis is most commonly based on a history of exposure to asbestos, the presence of characteristic radiologic abnormalities, end-inspiratory crackles (rales), and other clinical features of fibrosing lung disease. Pleural plaques and thickening may be observed on chest X-rays. Asbestosis is often a progressive disease even in the absence of continued exposure, although this appears to be a highly individualized characteristic. In severe cases, death may be caused by respiratory or cardiac failure. IV. Surveillance and Preventive Considerations As noted above, exposure to asbestos has been linked to an increased risk of lung cancer, mesothelioma, gastrointestinal cancer, and asbestosis among occupationally exposed workers. Adequate screening tests to determine an employee's potential for developing serious chronic diseases, such as a cancer, from exposure to asbestos do not presently exist. However, some tests, particularly chest X-rays and pulmonary function tests, may indicate that an employee has been overexposed to asbestos increasing his or her risk of developing exposure related chronic diseases. It is important for the physician to become familiar with the operating conditions in which occupational exposure to asbestos is likely to occur. This is particularly important in evaluating medical and work histories and in conducting physical examinations. When an active employee has been identified as having been overexposed to asbestos measures taken by the employer to eliminate or mitigate further exposure should also lower the risk of serious long-term consequences. The employer is required to institute a medical surveillance program for all employees who are or will be exposed to asbestos at or above the permissible exposure limit (0.1 fiber per cubic centimeter of air). All examinations and procedures must be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician, at a reasonable time and place, and at no cost to the employee. Although broad latitude is given to the physician in prescribing specific tests to be included in the medical surveillance program, OSHA requires inclusion of the following elements in the routine examination: (i) Medical and work histories with special emphasis directed to symptoms of the respiratory system, cardiovascular system, and digestive tract. (ii) Completion of the respiratory disease questionnaire contained in appendix D. (iii) A physical examination including a chest X-ray and pulmonary function test that includes measurement of the employee's forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume at one second (FEV 1 (iv) Any laboratory or other test that the examining physician deems by sound medical practice to be necessary. The employer is required to make the prescribed tests available at least annually to those employees covered; more often than specified if recommended by the examining physician; and upon termination of employment. The employer is required to provide the physician with the following information: A copy of this standard and appendices; a description of the employee's duties as they relate to asbestos exposure; the employee's representative level of exposure to asbestos; a description of any personal protective and respiratory equipment used; and information from previous medical examinations of the affected employee that is not otherwise available to the physician. Making this information available to the physician will aid in the evaluation of the employee's health in relation to assigned duties and fitness to wear personal protective equipment, if required. The employer is required to obtain a written opinion from the examining physician containing the results of the medical examination; the physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions that would place the employee at an increased risk of exposure-related disease; any recommended limitations on the employee or on the use of personal protective equipment; and a statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and of any medical conditions related to asbestos exposure that require further explanation or treatment. This written opinion must not reveal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to exposure to asbestos, and a copy of the opinion must be provided to the affected employee. Appendix J to § 1926.1101—Smoking Cessation Program Information for Asbestos—Non-Mandatory The following organizations provide smoking cessation information. 1. The National Cancer Institute operates a toll-free Cancer Information Service (CIS) with trained personnel to help you. Call 1-800-4-CANCER * to reach the CIS office serving your area, or write: Office of Cancer Communications, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Building 31 Room 10A24, Bethesda, Maryland 20892. 2. American Cancer Society, 3340 Peachtree Road, N.E., Atlanta, Georgia 30026, (404) 320-3333 The American Cancer Society (ACS) is a voluntary organization composed of 58 divisions and 3,100 local units. Through “The Great American Smokeout” in November, the annual Cancer Crusade in April, and numerous educational materials, ACS helps people learn about the health hazards of smoking and become successful ex-smokers. 3. American Heart Association, 7320 Greenville Avenue, Dallas, Texas 75231, (214) 750-5300 The American Heart Association (AHA) is a voluntary organization with 130,000 members (physicians, scientists, and laypersons) in 55 state and regional groups. AHA produces a variety of publications and audiovisual materials about the effects of smoking on the heart. AHA also has developed a guidebook for incorporating a weight-control component into smoking cessation programs. 4. American Lung Association, 1740 Broadway, New York, New York 10019, (212) 245-8000 A voluntary organization of 7,500 members (physicians, nurses, and laypersons), the American Lung Association (ALA) conducts numerous public information programs about the health effects of smoking. ALA has 59 state and 85 local units. The organization actively supports legislation and information campaigns for non-smokers' rights and provides help for smokers who want to quit, for example, through “Freedom From Smoking,” a self-help smoking cessation program. 5. Office on Smoking and Health, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 5600 Fishers Lane, Park Building, Room 110, Rockville, Maryland 20857 The Office on Smoking and Health (OSH) is the Department of Health and Human Services' lead agency in smoking control. OSH has sponsored distribution of publications on smoking-related topics, such as free flyers on relapse after initial quitting, helping a friend or family member quit smoking, the health hazards of smoking, and the effects of parental smoking on teenagers. * In Hawaii, on Oahu call 524-1234 (call collect from neighboring islands), Spanish-speaking staff members are available during daytime hours to callers from the following areas: California, Florida, Georgia, Illinois, New Jersey (area code 201), New York, and Texas. Consult your local telephone directory for listings of local chapters. Appendix K to § 1926.1101—Polarized Light Microscopy of Asbestos (Non-Mandatory) Method number: ID-191 Matrix: Bulk Collection Procedure: Collect approximately 1 to 2 grams of each type of material and place into separate 20 mL scintillation vials. Analytical Procedure: A portion of each separate phase is analyzed by gross examination, phase-polar examination, and central stop dispersion microscopy. Commercial manufacturers and products mentioned in this method are for descriptive use only and do not constitute endorsements by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from other sources may be substituted. 1. Introduction This method describes the collection and analysis of asbestos bulk materials by light microscopy techniques including phase- polar illumination and central-stop dispersion microscopy. Some terms unique to asbestos analysis are defined below: Amphibole: Asbestos: Chrysotile Mg 3 2 5 4 Crocidolite (Riebeckite asbestos) Na 2 3 2 8 22 2 Cummingtonite-Grunerite asbestos (Amosite) (Mg,Fe) 7 8 22 2 Tremolite-Actinolite asbestos Ca 2 5 8 22 2 Anthophyllite asbestos (Mg,Fe) 7 8 22 2 Asbestos Fiber: Aspect Ratio: Brucite: 2. Central Stop Dispersion Staining (microscope): Cleavage Fragments: Differential Counting: Fiber: Phase Contrast: Phase Contrast Microscope: Phase-Polar Analysis: Phase-Polar Microscope: Sealing Encapsulant: Serpentine: 3 2 5 4 1.1. History Light microscopy has been used for well over 100 years for the determination of mineral species. This analysis is carried out using specialized polarizing microscopes as well as bright field microscopes. The identification of minerals is an on-going process with many new minerals described each year. The first recorded use of asbestos was in Finland about 2500 B.C. where the material was used in the mud wattle for the wooden huts the people lived in as well as strengthening for pottery. Adverse health aspects of the mineral were noted nearly 2000 years ago when Pliny the Younger wrote about the poor health of slaves in the asbestos mines. Although known to be injurious for centuries, the first modern references to its toxicity were by the British Labor Inspectorate when it banned asbestos dust from the workplace in 1898. Asbestosis cases were described in the literature after the turn of the century. Cancer was first suspected in the mid 1930's and a causal link to mesothelioma was made in 1965. Because of the public concern for worker and public safety with the use of this material, several different types of analysis were applied to the determination of asbestos content. Light microscopy requires a great deal of experience and craft. Attempts were made to apply less subjective methods to the analysis. X-ray diffraction was partially successful in determining the mineral types but was unable to separate out the fibrous portions from the non-fibrous portions. Also, the minimum detection limit for asbestos analysis by X-ray diffraction (XRD) is about 1%. Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA) was no more successful. These provide useful corroborating information when the presence of asbestos has been shown by microscopy; however, neither can determine the difference between fibrous and non-fibrous minerals when both habits are present. The same is true of Infrared Absorption (IR). When electron microscopy was applied to asbestos analysis, hundreds of fibers were discovered present too small to be visible in any light microscope. There are two different types of electron microscope used for asbestos analysis: Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) and Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM). Scanning Electron Microscopy is useful in identifying minerals. The SEM can provide two of the three pieces of information required to identify fibers by electron microscopy: morphology and chemistry. The third is structure as determined by Selected Area Electron Diffraction—SAED which is performed in the TEM. Although the resolution of the SEM is sufficient for very fine fibers to be seen, accuracy of chemical analysis that can be performed on the fibers varies with fiber diameter in fibers of less than 0.2 µm diameter. The TEM is a powerful tool to identify fibers too small to be resolved by light microscopy and should be used in conjunction with this method when necessary. The TEM can provide all three pieces of information required for fiber identification. Most fibers thicker than 1 µm can adequately be defined in the light microscope. The light microscope remains as the best instrument for the determination of mineral type. This is because the minerals under investigation were first described analytically with the light microscope. It is inexpensive and gives positive identification for most samples analyzed. Further, when optical techniques are inadequate, there is ample indication that alternative techniques should be used for complete identification of the sample. 1.2. Principle Minerals consist of atoms that may be arranged in random order or in a regular arrangement. Amorphous materials have atoms in random order while crystalline materials have long range order. Many materials are transparent to light, at least for small particles or for thin sections. The properties of these materials can be investigated by the effect that the material has on light passing through it. The six asbestos minerals are all crystalline with particular properties that have been identified and cataloged. These six minerals are anisotropic. They have a regular array of atoms, but the arrangement is not the same in all directions. Each major direction of the crystal presents a different regularity. Light photons travelling in each of these main directions will encounter different electrical neighborhoods, affecting the path and time of travel. The techniques outlined in this method use the fact that light traveling through fibers or crystals in different directions will behave differently, but predictably. The behavior of the light as it travels through a crystal can be measured and compared with known or determined values to identify the mineral species. Usually, Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) is performed with strain-free objectives on a bright-field microscope platform. This would limit the resolution of the microscope to about 0.4 µm. Because OSHA requires the counting and identification of fibers visible in phase contrast, the phase contrast platform is used to visualize the fibers with the polarizing elements added into the light path. Polarized light methods cannot identify fibers finer than about 1 µm in diameter even though they are visible. The finest fibers are usually identified by inference from the presence of larger, identifiable fiber bundles. When fibers are present, but not identifiable by light microscopy, use either SEM or TEM to determine the fiber identity. 1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages The advantages of light microcopy are: (a) Basic identification of the materials was first performed by light microscopy and gross analysis. This provides a large base of published information against which to check analysis and analytical technique. (b) The analysis is specific to fibers. The minerals present can exist in asbestiform, fibrous, prismatic, or massive varieties all at the same time. Therefore, bulk methods of analysis such as X-ray diffraction, IR analysis, DTA, etc. are inappropriate where the material is not known to be fibrous. (c) The analysis is quick, requires little preparation time, and can be performed on-site if a suitably equipped microscope is available. The disadvantages are: (a) Even using phase-polar illumination, not all the fibers present may be seen. This is a problem for very low asbestos concentrations where agglomerations or large bundles of fibers may not be present to allow identification by inference. (b) The method requires a great degree of sophistication on the part of the microscopist. An analyst is only as useful as his mental catalog of images. Therefore, a microscopist's accuracy is enhanced by experience. The mineralogical training of the analyst is very important. It is the basis on which subjective decisions are made. (c) The method uses only a tiny amount of material for analysis. This may lead to sampling bias and false results (high or low). This is especially true if the sample is severely inhomogeneous. (d) Fibers may be bound in a matrix and not distinguishable as fibers so identification cannot be made. 1.4. Method Performance 1.4.1. 1.4.2. 1.4.3. 1.5. Interferences Any material which is long, thin, and small enough to be viewed under the microscope can be considered an interference for asbestos. There are literally hundreds of interferences in workplaces. The techniques described in this method are normally sufficient to eliminate the interferences. An analyst's success in eliminating the interferences depends on proper training. Asbestos minerals belong to two mineral families: the serpentines and the amphiboles. In the serpentine family, the only common fibrous mineral is chrysotile. Occasionally, the mineral antigorite occurs in a fibril habit with morphology similar to the amphiboles. The amphibole minerals consist of a score of different minerals of which only five are regulated by federal standard: amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos and actinolite asbestos. These are the only amphibole minerals that have been commercially exploited for their fibrous properties; however, the rest can and do occur occasionally in asbestiform habit. In addition to the related mineral interferences, other minerals common in building material may present a problem for some microscopists: gypsum, anhydrite, brucite, quartz fibers, talc fibers or ribbons, wollastonite, perlite, attapulgite, etc. Other fibrous materials commonly present in workplaces are: fiberglass, mineral wool, ceramic wool, refractory ceramic fibers, kevlar, nomex, synthetic fibers, graphite or carbon fibers, cellulose (paper or wood) fibers, metal fibers, etc. Matrix embedding material can sometimes be a negative interference. The analyst may not be able to easily extract the fibers from the matrix in order to use the method. Where possible, remove the matrix before the analysis, taking careful note of the loss of weight. Some common matrix materials are: vinyl, rubber, tar, paint, plant fiber, cement, and epoxy. A further negative interference is that the asbestos fibers themselves may be either too small to be seen in Phase contrast Microscopy (PCM) or of a very low fibrous quality, having the appearance of plant fibers. The analyst's ability to deal with these materials increases with experience. 1.6. Uses and Occupational Exposure Asbestos is ubiquitous in the environment. More than 40% of the land area of the United States is composed of minerals which may contain asbestos. Fortunately, the actual formation of great amounts of asbestos is relatively rare. Nonetheless, there are locations in which environmental exposure can be severe such as in the Serpentine Hills of California. There are thousands of uses for asbestos in industry and the home. Asbestos abatement workers are the most current segment of the population to have occupational exposure to great amounts of asbestos. If the material is undisturbed, there is no exposure. Exposure occurs when the asbestos-containing material is abraded or otherwise disturbed during maintenance operations or some other activity. Approximately 95% of the asbestos in place in the United States is chrysotile. Amosite and crocidolite make up nearly all the difference. Tremolite and anthophyllite make up a very small percentage. Tremolite is found in extremely small amounts in certain chrysotile deposits. Actinolite exposure is probably greatest from environmental sources, but has been identified in vermiculite containing, sprayed-on insulating materials which may have been certified as asbestos-free. 1.7. Physical and Chemical Properties The nominal chemical compositions for the asbestos minerals were given in Section 1. Compared to cleavage fragments of the same minerals, asbestiform fibers possess a high tensile strength along the fiber axis. They are chemically inert, non-combustible, and heat resistant. Except for chrysotile, they are insoluble in Hydrochloric acid (HCl). Chrysotile is slightly soluble in HCl. Asbestos has high electrical resistance and good sound absorbing characteristics. It can be woven into cables, fabrics or other textiles, or matted into papers, felts, and mats. 1.8. Toxicology (This section is for Information Only and Should Not Be Taken as OSHA Policy) Possible physiologic results of respiratory exposure to asbestos are mesothelioma of the pleura or peritoneum, interstitial fibrosis, asbestosis, pneumoconiosis, or respiratory cancer. The possible consequences of asbestos exposure are detailed in the NIOSH Criteria Document or in the OSHA Asbestos Standards 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1915.1001. 2. Sampling Procedure 2.1. Equipment for sampling (a) Tube or cork borer sampling device (b) Knife (c) 20 mL scintillation vial or similar vial (d) Sealing encapsulant 2.2. Safety Precautions Asbestos is a known carcinogen. Take care when sampling. While in an asbestos-containing atmosphere, a properly selected and fit-tested respirator should be worn. Take samples in a manner to cause the least amount of dust. Follow these general guidelines: (a) Do not make unnecessary dust. (b) Take only a small amount (1 to 2 g). (c) Tightly close the sample container. (d) Use encapsulant to seal the spot where the sample was taken, if necessary. 2.3. Sampling Procedure Samples of any suspect material should be taken from an inconspicuous place. Where the material is to remain, seal the sampling wound with an encapsulant to eliminate the potential for exposure from the sample site. Microscopy requires only a few milligrams of material. The amount that will fill a 20 mL scintillation vial is more than adequate. Be sure to collect samples from all layers and phases of material. If possible, make separate samples of each different phase of the material. This will aid in determining the actual hazard. DO NOT USE ENVELOPES, PLASTIC OR PAPER BAGS OF ANY KIND TO COLLECT SAMPLES. If a cork-borer type sampler is available, push the tube through the material all the way, so that all layers of material are sampled. Some samplers are intended to be disposable. These should be capped and sent to the laboratory. If a non-disposable cork borer is used, empty the contents into a scintillation vial and send to the laboratory. Vigorously and completely clean the cork borer between samples. 2.4 Shipment Samples packed in glass vials must not touch or they might break in shipment. (a) Seal the samples with a sample seal over the end to guard against tampering and to identify the sample. (b) Package the bulk samples in separate packages from the air samples. They may cross-contaminate each other and will invalidate the results of the air samples. (c) Include identifying paperwork with (d) To maintain sample accountability, ship the samples by certified mail, overnight express, or hand carry them to the laboratory. 3. Analysis The analysis of asbestos samples can be divided into two major parts: sample preparation and microscopy. Because of the different asbestos uses that may be encountered by the analyst, each sample may need different preparation steps. The choices are outlined below. There are several different tests that are performed to identify the asbestos species and determine the percentage. They will be explained below. 3.1. Safety (a) Do not create unnecessary dust. Handle the samples in HEPA-filter equipped hoods. If samples are received in bags, envelopes or other inappropriate container, open them only in a hood having a face velocity at or greater than 100 fpm. Transfer a small amount to a scintillation vial and only handle the smaller amount. (b) Open samples in a hood, never in the open lab area. (c) Index of refraction oils can be toxic. Take care not to get this material on the skin. Wash immediately with soap and water if this happens. (d) Samples that have been heated in the muffle furnace or the drying oven may be hot. Handle them with tongs until they are cool enough to handle. (e) Some of the solvents used, such as THF (tetrahydrofuran), are toxic and should only be handled in an appropriate fume hood and according to instructions given in the Safety Data Sheet (SDS). 3.2. Equipment (a) Phase contrast microscope with 10x, 16x and 40x objectives, 10x wide-field eyepieces, G-22 Walton-Beckett graticule, Whipple disk, polarizer, analyzer and first order red or gypsum plate, 100 Watt illuminator, rotating position condenser with oversize phase rings, central stop dispersion objective, Kohler illumination and a rotating mechanical stage. (b) Stereo microscope with reflected light illumination, transmitted light illumination, polarizer, analyzer and first order red or gypsum plate, and rotating stage. (c) Negative pressure hood for the stereo microscope (d) Muffle furnace capable of 600 °C (e) Drying oven capable of 50-150 °C (f) Aluminum specimen pans (g) Tongs for handling samples in the furnace (h) High dispersion index of refraction oils (Special for dispersion staining.) n = 1.550 n = 1.585 n = 1.590 n = 1.605 n = 1.620 n = 1.670 n = 1.680 n = 1.690 (i) A set of index of refraction oils from about n = 1.350 to n = 2.000 in n = 0.005 increments. (Standard for Becke line analysis.) (j) Glass slides with painted or frosted ends 1 × 3 inches 1mm (thick, precleaned. (k) Cover Slips 22 × 22 mm, #1 1/2 (l) Paper clips or dissection needles (m) Hand grinder (n) Scalpel with both #10 and #11 blades (o) 0.1 molar HCl (p) Decalcifying solution (Baxter Scientific Products) Ethylenediaminetetraacetic Acid, Tetrasodium 0.7 g/l Sodium Potassium Tartrate 8.0 mg/liter Hydrochloric Acid 99.2 g/liter Sodium Tartrate 0.14 g/liter (q) Tetrahydrofuran (THF) (r) Hotplate capable of 60 °C (s) Balance (t) Hacksaw blade (u) Ruby mortar and pestle 3.3. Sample Pre-Preparation Sample preparation begins with pre-preparation which may include chemical reduction of the matrix, heating the sample to dryness or heating in the muffle furnace. The end result is a sample which has been reduced to a powder that is sufficiently fine to fit under the cover slip. Analyze different phases of samples separately, e.g., tile and the tile mastic should be analyzed separately as the mastic may contain asbestos while the tile may not. (a) Wet Samples Samples with a high water content will not give the proper dispersion colors and must be dried prior to sample mounting. Remove the lid of the scintillation vial, place the bottle in the drying oven and heat at 100 °C to dryness (usually about 2 h). Samples which are not submitted to the lab in glass must be removed and placed in glass vials or aluminum weighing pans before placing them in the drying oven. (b) Samples With Organic Interference—Muffle Furnace These may include samples with tar as a matrix, vinyl asbestos tile, or any other organic that can be reduced by heating. Remove the sample from the vial and weigh in a balance to determine the weight of the submitted portion. Place the sample in a muffle furnace at 500 °C for 1 to 2 h or until all obvious organic material has been removed. Retrieve, cool and weigh again to determine the weight loss on ignition. This is necessary to determine the asbestos content of the submitted sample, because the analyst will be looking at a reduced sample. Note: Heating above 600 °C will cause the sample to undergo a structural change which, given sufficient time, will convert the chrysotile to forsterite. Heating even at lower temperatures for 1 to 2 h may have a measurable effect on the optical properties of the minerals. If the analyst is unsure of what to expect, a sample of standard asbestos should be heated to the same temperature for the same length of time so that it can be examined for the proper interpretation. (c) Samples With Organic Interference—THF Vinyl asbestos tile is the most common material treated with this solvent, although, substances containing tar will sometimes yield to this treatment. Select a portion of the material and then grind it up if possible. Weigh the sample and place it in a test tube. Add sufficient THF to dissolve the organic matrix. This is usually about 4 to 5 mL. Remember, THF is highly flammable. (d) Samples With Carbonate Interference Carbonate material is often found on fibers and sometimes must be removed in order to perform dispersion microscopy. Weigh out a portion of the material and place it in a test tube. Add a sufficient amount of 0.1 M HCl or decalcifying solution in the tube to react all the carbonate as evidenced by gas formation; i.e., when the gas bubbles stop, add a little more solution. If no more gas forms, the reaction is complete. Filter the material out through a tared silver membrane, dry and weigh to determine the weight lost. 3.4. Sample Preparation Samples must be prepared so that accurate determination can be made of the asbestos type and amount present. The following steps are carried out in the low-flow hood (a low-flow hood has less than 50 fpm flow): (1) If the sample has large lumps, is hard, or cannot be made to lie under a cover slip, the grain size must be reduced. Place a small amount between two slides and grind the material between them or grind a small amount in a clean mortar and pestle. The choice of whether to use an alumina, ruby, or diamond mortar depends on the hardness of the material. Impact damage can alter the asbestos mineral if too much mechanical shock occurs. (Freezer mills can completely destroy the observable crystallinity of asbestos and should not be used). For some samples, a portion of material can be shaved off with a scalpel, ground off with a hand grinder or hack saw blade. The preparation tools should either be disposable or cleaned thoroughly. Use vigorous scrubbing to loosen the fibers during the washing. Rinse the implements with copious amounts of water and air-dry in a dust-free environment. (2) If the sample is powder or has been reduced as in (1) above, it is ready to mount. Place a glass slide on a piece of optical tissue and write the identification on the painted or frosted end. Place two drops of index of refraction medium n = 1.550 on the slide. (The medium n = 1.550 is chosen because it is the matching index for chrysotile. Dip the end of a clean paper-clip or dissecting needle into the droplet of refraction medium on the slide Treat at least two different areas of each phase in this fashion. Choose representative areas of the sample. It may be useful to select particular areas or fibers for analysis. This is useful to identify asbestos in severely inhomogeneous samples. When it is determined that amphiboles may be present, repeat the above process using the appropriate high-dispersion oils until an identification is made or all six asbestos minerals have been ruled out. Note that percent determination must be done in the index medium 1.550 because amphiboles tend to disappear in their matching mediums. 3.5. Analytical procedure Note: This method presumes some knowledge of mineralogy and optical petrography. The analysis consists of three parts: The determination of whether there is asbestos present, what type is present and the determination of how much is present. The general flow of the analysis is: (1) Gross examination. (2) Examination under polarized light on the stereo microscope. (3) Examination by phase-polar illumination on the compound phase microscope. (4) Determination of species by dispersion stain. Examination by Becke line analysis may also be used; however, this is usually more cumbersome for asbestos determination. (5) Difficult samples may need to be analyzed by SEM or TEM, or the results from those techniques combined with light microscopy for a definitive identification. Identification of a particle as asbestos requires that it be asbestiform. Description of particles should follow the suggestion of Campbell. (Figure 1) For the purpose of regulation, the mineral must be one of the six minerals covered and must be in the asbestos growth habit. Large specimen samples of asbestos generally have the gross appearance of wood. Fibers are easily parted from it. Asbestos fibers are very long compared with their widths. The fibers have a very high tensile strength as demonstrated by bending without breaking. Asbestos fibers exist in bundles that are easily parted, show longitudinal fine structure and may be tufted at the ends showing “bundle of sticks” morphology. In the microscope some of these properties may not be observable. Amphiboles do not always show striations along their length even when they are asbestos. Neither will they always show tufting. They generally do not show a curved nature except for very long fibers. Asbestos and asbestiform minerals are usually characterized in groups by extremely high aspect ratios (greater than 100:1). While aspect ratio analysis is useful for characterizing populations of fibers, it cannot be used to identify individual fibers of intermediate to short aspect ratio. Observation of many fibers is often necessary to determine whether a sample consists of “cleavage fragments” or of asbestos fibers. Most cleavage fragments of the asbestos minerals are easily distinguishable from true asbestos fibers. This is because true cleavage fragments usually have larger diameters than 1 µm. Internal structure of particles larger than this usually shows them to have no internal fibrillar structure. In addition, cleavage fragments of the monoclinic amphiboles show inclined extinction under crossed polars with no compensator. Asbestos fibers usually show extinction at zero degrees or ambiguous extinction if any at all. Morphologically, the larger cleavage fragments are obvious by their blunt or stepped ends showing prismatic habit. Also, they tend to be acicular rather than filiform. Where the particles are less than 1 µm in diameter and have an aspect ratio greater than or equal to 3:1, it is recommended that the sample be analyzed by SEM or TEM if there is any question whether the fibers are cleavage fragments or asbestiform particles. Care must be taken when analyzing by electron microscopy because the interferences are different from those in light microscopy and may structurally be very similar to asbestos. The classic interference is between anthophyllite and biopyribole or intermediate fiber. Use the same morphological clues for electron microscopy as are used for light microscopy, e.g. fibril splitting, internal longitudinal striation, fraying, curvature, etc. (1) Gross examination: Examine the sample, preferably in the glass vial. Determine the presence of any obvious fibrous component. Estimate a percentage based on previous experience and current observation. Determine whether any pre-preparation is necessary. Determine the number of phases present. This step may be carried out or augmented by observation at 6 to 40 × under a stereo microscope. (2) After performing any necessary pre-preparation, prepare slides of each phase as described above. Two preparations of the same phase in the same index medium can be made side-by-side on the same glass for convenience. Examine with the polarizing stereo microscope. Estimate the percentage of asbestos based on the amount of birefringent fiber present. (3) Examine the slides on the phase-polar microscopes at magnifications of 160 and 400 × . Note the morphology of the fibers. Long, thin, very straight fibers with little curvature are indicative of fibers from the amphibole family. Curved, wavy fibers are usually indicative of chrysotile. Estimate the percentage of asbestos on the phase-polar microscope under conditions of crossed polars and a gypsum plate. Fibers smaller than 1.0 µm in thickness must be identified by inference to the presence of larger, identifiable fibers and morphology. If no larger fibers are visible, electron microscopy should be performed. At this point, only a tentative identification can be made. Full identification must be made with dispersion microscopy. Details of the tests are included in the appendices. (4) Once fibers have been determined to be present, they must be identified. Adjust the microscope for dispersion mode and observe the fibers. The microscope has a rotating stage, one polarizing element, and a system for generating dark-field dispersion microscopy (see Section 4.6. of this appendix). Align a fiber with its length parallel to the polarizer and note the color of the Becke lines. Rotate the stage to bring the fiber length perpendicular to the polarizer and note the color. Repeat this process for every fiber or fiber bundle examined. The colors must be consistent with the colors generated by standard asbestos reference materials for a positive identification. In n = 1.550, amphiboles will generally show a yellow to straw-yellow color indicating that the fiber indices of refraction are higher than the liquid. If long, thin fibers are noted and the colors are yellow, prepare further slides as above in the suggested matching liquids listed below: Type of asbestos Index of refraction Chrysotile n = 1.550. Amosite n = 1.670 or 1.680. Crocidolite n = 1.690. Anthophyllite n = 1.605 and 1.620. Tremolite n = 1.605 and 1.620. Actinolite n = 1.620. Where more than one liquid is suggested, the first is preferred; however, in some cases this liquid will not give good dispersion color. Take care to avoid interferences in the other liquid; e.g., wollastonite in n = 1.620 will give the same colors as tremolite. In n = 1.605 wollastonite will appear yellow in all directions. Wollastonite may be determined under crossed polars as it will change from blue to yellow as it is rotated along its fiber axis by tapping on the cover slip. Asbestos minerals will not change in this way. Determination of the angle of extinction may, when present, aid in the determination of anthophyllite from tremolite. True asbestos fibers usually have 0° extinction or ambiguous extinction, while cleavage fragments have more definite extinction. Continue analysis until both preparations have been examined and all present species of asbestos are identified. If there are no fibers present, or there is less than 0.1% present, end the analysis with the minimum number of slides (2). (5) Some fibers have a coating on them which makes dispersion microscopy very difficult or impossible. Becke line analysis or electron microscopy may be performed in those cases. Determine the percentage by light microscopy. TEM analysis tends to overestimate the actual percentage present. (6) Percentage determination is an estimate of occluded area, tempered by gross observation. Gross observation information is used to make sure that the high magnification microscopy does not greatly over- or under- estimate the amount of fiber present. This part of the analysis requires a great deal of experience. Satisfactory models for asbestos content analysis have not yet been developed, although some models based on metallurgical grain-size determination have found some utility. Estimation is more easily handled in situations where the grain sizes visible at about 160 × are about the same and the sample is relatively homogeneous. View all of the area under the cover slip to make the percentage determination. View the fields while moving the stage, paying attention to the clumps of material. These are not usually the best areas to perform dispersion microscopy because of the interference from other materials. But, they are the areas most likely to represent the accurate percentage in the sample. Small amounts of asbestos require slower scanning and more frequent analysis of individual fields. Report the area occluded by asbestos as the concentration. This estimate does not generally take into consideration the difference in density of the different species present in the sample. For most samples this is adequate. Simulation studies with similar materials must be carried out to apply microvisual estimation for that purpose and is beyond the scope of this procedure. (7) Where successive concentrations have been made by chemical or physical means, the amount reported is the percentage of the material in the “as submitted” or original state. The percentage determined by microscopy is multiplied by the fractions remaining after pre-preparation steps to give the percentage in the original sample. For example: Step 1. 60% remains after heating at 550 °C for 1 h. Step 2. 30% of the residue of step 1 remains after dissolution of carbonate in 0.1 m HCl. Step 3. Microvisual estimation determines that 5% of the sample is chrysotile asbestos. The reported result is: R = (Microvisual result in percent) × (Fraction remaining after step 2) × (Fraction remaining of original sample after step 1) R = (5) × (.30) × (.60) = 0.9% (8) Report the percent and type of asbestos present. For samples where asbestos was identified, but is less than 1.0%, report “Asbestos present, less than 1.0%.” There must have been at least two observed fibers or fiber bundles in the two preparations to be reported as present. For samples where asbestos was not seen, report as “None Detected.” Auxiliary Information Because of the subjective nature of asbestos analysis, certain concepts and procedures need to be discussed in more depth. This information will help the analyst understand why some of the procedures are carried out the way they are. 4.1. Light Light is electromagnetic energy. It travels from its source in packets called quanta. It is instructive to consider light as a plane wave. The light has a direction of travel. Perpendicular to this and mutually perpendicular to each other, are two vector components. One is the magnetic vector and the other is the electric vector. We shall only be concerned with the electric vector. In this description, the interaction of the vector and the mineral will describe all the observable phenomena. From a light source such a microscope illuminator, light travels in all different direction from the filament. In any given direction away from the filament, the electric vector is perpendicular to the direction of travel of a light ray. While perpendicular, its orientation is random about the travel axis. If the electric vectors from all the light rays were lined up by passing the light through a filter that would only let light rays with electric vectors oriented in one direction pass, the light would then be POLARIZED. Polarized light interacts with matter in the direction of the electric vector. This is the polarization direction. Using this property it is possible to use polarized light to probe different materials and identify them by how they interact with light. The speed of light in a vacuum is a constant at about 2.99 × 10 8 4.2. Material Properties Materials are either amorphous or crystalline. The difference between these two descriptions depends on the positions of the atoms in them. The atoms in amorphous materials are randomly arranged with no long range order. An example of an amorphous material is glass. The atoms in crystalline materials, on the other hand, are in regular arrays and have long range order. Most of the atoms can be found in highly predictable locations. Examples of crystalline material are salt, gold, and the asbestos minerals. It is beyond the scope of this method to describe the different types of crystalline materials that can be found, or the full description of the classes into which they can fall. However, some general crystallography is provided below to give a foundation to the procedures described. With the exception of anthophyllite, all the asbestos minerals belong to the monoclinic crystal type. The unit cell is the basic repeating unit of the crystal and for monoclinic crystals can be described as having three unequal sides, two 90° angles and one angle not equal to 90°. The orthorhombic group, of which anthophyllite is a member has three unequal sides and three 90° angles. The unequal sides are a consequence of the complexity of fitting the different atoms into the unit cell. Although the atoms are in a regular array, that array is not symmetrical in all directions. There is long range order in the three major directions of the crystal. However, the order is different in each of the three directions. This has the effect that the index of refraction is different in each of the three directions. Using polarized light, we can investigate the index of refraction in each of the directions and identify the mineral or material under investigation. The indices α, β, and γ are used to identify the lowest, middle, and highest index of refraction respectively. The x direction, associated with α is called the fast axis. Conversely, the z direction is associated with γ and is the slow direction. Crocidolite has α along the fiber length making it “length-fast”. The remainder of the asbestos minerals have the γ axis along the fiber length. They are called “length-slow”. This orientation to fiber length is used to aid in the identification of asbestos. 4.3. Polarized Light Technique Polarized light microscopy as described in this section uses the phase-polar microscope described in Section 3.2. A phase contrast microscope is fitted with two polarizing elements, one below and one above the sample. The polarizers have their polarization directions at right angles to each other. Depending on the tests performed, there may be a compensator between these two polarizing elements. A compensator is a piece of mineral with known properties that “compensates” for some deficiency in the optical train. Light emerging from a polarizing element has its electric vector pointing in the polarization direction of the element. The light will not be subsequently transmitted through a second element set at a right angle to the first element. Unless the light is altered as it passes from one element to the other, there is no transmission of light. 4.4. Angle of Extinction Crystals which have different crystal regularity in two or three main directions are said to be anisotropic. They have a different index of refraction in each of the main directions. When such a crystal is inserted between the crossed polars, the field of view is no longer dark but shows the crystal in color. The color depends on the properties of the crystal. The light acts as if it travels through the crystal along the optical axes. If a crystal optical axis were lined up along one of the polarizing directions (either the polarizer or the analyzer) the light would appear to travel only in that direction, and it would blink out or go dark. The difference in degrees between the fiber direction and the angle at which it blinks out is called the angle of extinction. When this angle can be measured, it is useful in identifying the mineral. The procedure for measuring the angle of extinction is to first identify the polarization direction in the microscope. A commercial alignment slide can be used to establish the polarization directions or use anthophyllite or another suitable mineral. This mineral has a zero degree angle of extinction and will go dark to extinction as it aligns with the polarization directions. When a fiber of anthophyllite has gone to extinction, align the eyepiece reticle or graticule with the fiber so that there is a visual cue as to the direction of polarization in the field of view. Tape or otherwise secure the eyepiece in this position so it will not shift. After the polarization direction has been identified in the field of view, move the particle of interest to the center of the field of view and align it with the polarization direction. For fibers, align the fiber along this direction. Note the angular reading of the rotating stage. Looking at the particle, rotate the stage until the fiber goes dark or “blinks out”. Again note the reading of the stage. The difference in the first reading and the second is an angle of extinction. The angle measured may vary as the orientation of the fiber changes about its long axis. Tables of mineralogical data usually report the maximum angle of extinction. Asbestos forming minerals, when they exhibit an angle of extinction, usually do show an angle of extinction close to the reported maximum, or as appropriate depending on the substitution chemistry. 4.5. Crossed Polars with Compensator When the optical axes of a crystal are not lined up along one of the polarizing directions (either the polarizer or the analyzer) part of the light travels along one axis and part travels along the other visible axis. This is characteristic of birefringent materials. The color depends on the difference of the two visible indices of refraction and the thickness of the crystal. The maximum difference available is the difference between the α and the γ axes. This maximum difference is usually tabulated as the birefringence of the crystal. For this test, align the fiber at 45° to the polarization directions in order to maximize the contribution to each of the optical axes. The colors seen are called retardation colors. They arise from the recombination of light which has traveled through the two separate directions of the crystal. One of the rays is retarded behind the other since the light in that direction travels slower. On recombination, some of the colors which make up white light are enhanced by constructive interference and some are suppressed by destructive interference. The result is a color dependent on the difference between the indices and the thickness of the crystal. The proper colors, thicknesses, and retardations are shown on a Michel-Levy chart. The three items, retardation, thickness and birefringence are related by the following relationship: R = t(n γ α R = retardation, t = crystal thickness in µm, and n α,γ Examination of the equation for asbestos minerals reveals that the visible colors for almost all common asbestos minerals and fiber sizes are shades of gray and black. The eye is relatively poor at discriminating different shades of gray. It is very good at discriminating different colors. In order to compensate for the low retardation, a compensator is added to the light train between the polarization elements. The compensator used for this test is a gypsum plate of known thickness and birefringence. Such a compensator when oriented at 45° to the polarizer direction, provides a retardation of 530 nm of the 530 nm wavelength color. This enhances the red color and gives the background a characteristic red to red-magenta color. If this “full-wave” compensator is in place when the asbestos preparation is inserted into the light train, the colors seen on the fibers are quite different. Gypsum, like asbestos has a fast axis and a slow axis. When a fiber is aligned with its fast axis in the same direction as the fast axis of the gypsum plate, the ray vibrating in the slow direction is retarded by both the asbestos and the gypsum. This results in a higher retardation than would be present for either of the two minerals. The color seen is a second order blue. When the fiber is rotated 90° using the rotating stage, the slow direction of the fiber is now aligned with the fast direction of the gypsum and the fast direction of the fiber is aligned with the slow direction of the gypsum. Thus, one ray vibrates faster in the fast direction of the gypsum, and slower in the slow direction of the fiber; the other ray will vibrate slower in the slow direction of the gypsum and faster in the fast direction of the fiber. In this case, the effect is subtractive and the color seen is a first order yellow. As long as the fiber thickness does not add appreciably to the color, the same basic colors will be seen for all asbestos types except crocidolite. In crocidolite the colors will be weaker, may be in the opposite directions, and will be altered by the blue absorption color natural to crocidolite. Hundreds of other materials will give the same colors as asbestos, and therefore, this test is not definitive for asbestos. The test is useful in discriminating against fiberglass or other amorphous fibers such as some synthetic fibers. Certain synthetic fibers will show retardation colors different than asbestos; however, there are some forms of polyethylene and aramid which will show morphology and retardation colors similar to asbestos minerals. This test must be supplemented with a positive identification test when birefringent fibers are present which can not be excluded by morphology. This test is relatively ineffective for use on fibers less than 1 µm in diameter. For positive confirmation TEM or SEM should be used if no larger bundles or fibers are visible. 4.6. Dispersion Staining Dispersion microscopy or dispersion staining is the method of choice for the identification of asbestos in bulk materials. Becke line analysis is used by some laboratories and yields the same results as does dispersion staining for asbestos and can be used in lieu of dispersion staining. Dispersion staining is performed on the same platform as the phase-polar analysis with the analyzer and compensator removed. One polarizing element remains to define the direction of the light so that the different indices of refraction of the fibers may be separately determined. Dispersion microscopy is a dark-field technique when used for asbestos. Particles are imaged with scattered light. Light which is unscattered is blocked from reaching the eye either by the back field image mask in a McCrone objective or a back field image mask in the phase condenser. The most convenient method is to use the rotating phase condenser to move an oversized phase ring into place. The ideal size for this ring is for the central disk to be just larger than the objective entry aperture as viewed in the back focal plane. The larger the disk, the less scattered light reaches the eye. This will have the effect of diminishing the intensity of dispersion color and will shift the actual color seen. The colors seen vary even on microscopes from the same manufacturer. This is due to the different bands of wavelength exclusion by different mask sizes. The mask may either reside in the condenser or in the objective back focal plane. It is imperative that the analyst determine by experimentation with asbestos standards what the appropriate colors should be for each asbestos type. The colors depend also on the temperature of the preparation and the exact chemistry of the asbestos. Therefore, some slight differences from the standards should be allowed. This is not a serious problem for commercial asbestos uses. This technique is used for identification of the indices of refraction for fibers by recognition of color. There is no direct numerical readout of the index of refraction. Correlation of color to actual index of refraction is possible by referral to published conversion tables. This is not necessary for the analysis of asbestos. Recognition of appropriate colors along with the proper morphology are deemed sufficient to identify the commercial asbestos minerals. Other techniques including SEM, TEM, and XRD may be required to provide additional information in order to identify other types of asbestos. Make a preparation in the suspected matching high dispersion oil, e.g., n = 1.550 for chrysotile. Perform the preliminary tests to determine whether the fibers are birefringent or not. Take note of the morphological character. Wavy fibers are indicative of chrysotile while long, straight, thin, frayed fibers are indicative of amphibole asbestos. This can aid in the selection of the appropriate matching oil. The microscope is set up and the polarization direction is noted as in Section 4.4. Align a fiber with the polarization direction. Note the color. This is the color parallel to the polarizer. Then rotate the fiber rotating the stage 90° so that the polarization direction is across the fiber. This is the perpendicular position. Again note the color. Both colors must be consistent with standard asbestos minerals in the correct direction for a positive identification of asbestos. If only one of the colors is correct while the other is not, the identification is not positive. If the colors in both directions are bluish-white, the analyst has chosen a matching index oil which is higher than the correct matching oil, e.g. the analyst has used n = 1.620 where chrysotile is present. The next lower oil (Section 3.5.) should be used to prepare another specimen. If the color in both directions is yellow-white to straw-yellow-white, this indicates that the index of the oil is lower than the index of the fiber, e.g. the preparation is in n = 1.550 while anthophyllite is present. Select the next higher oil (Section 3.5.) and prepare another slide. Continue in this fashion until a positive identification of all asbestos species present has been made or all possible asbestos species have been ruled out by negative results in this test. Certain plant fibers can have similar dispersion colors as asbestos. Take care to note and evaluate the morphology of the fibers or remove the plant fibers in pre-preparation. Coating material on the fibers such as carbonate or vinyl may destroy the dispersion color. Usually, there will be some outcropping of fiber which will show the colors sufficient for identification. When this is not the case, treat the sample as described in Section 3.3. and then perform dispersion staining. Some samples will yield to Becke line analysis if they are coated or electron microscopy can be used for identification. 5. References 5.1. Crane, D.T., Asbestos in Air, 5.2. Ford, W.E., Dana's Textbook of Mineralogy; 5.3. Selikoff, I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and Disease, 5.4. Women Inspectors of Factories. 5.5. Selikoff,.I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and Disease, 5.6. Campbell, W.J., et al, Selected Silicate Minerals and Their Asbestiform Varieties, 5.7. Asbestos, 5.8. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants; Asbestos NESHAP Revision, Federal Register, 5.9. Ross, M. The Asbestos Minerals: Definitions, Description, Modes of Formation, Physical and Chemical Properties and Health Risk to the Mining Community, 5.10. Lilis, R., Fibrous Zeolites and Endemic Mesothelioma in Cappadocia, Turkey, J. Occ Medicine, 5.11. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos—1972, 5.12. Campbell,W.J., et al, Relationship of Mineral Habit to Size Characteristics for Tremolite Fragments and Fibers, 5.13. Mefford, D., DCM Laboratory, Denver, private communication, July 1987. 5.14. Deer, W.A., Howie, R.A., Zussman, J., Rock Forming Minerals, 5.15. Kerr, P.F., Optical Mineralogy; 5.16. Veblen, D.R. (Ed.), Amphiboles and Other Hydrous Pyriboles—Mineralogy, Reviews in Mineralogy, 5.17. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Microscopy in the Analysis of Asbestos 5.18. Polarized Light Microscopy, McCrone Research Institute, Chicago, 1976. 5.19. Asbestos Identification, McCrone Research Institute, G & G printers, Chicago, 1987. 5.20. McCrone, W.C., Calculation of Refractive Indices from Dispersion Staining Data, The Microscope, No 37, Chicago, 1989. 5.21. Levadie, B. (Ed.), Asbestos and Other Health Related Silicates, 5.22. Steel, E. and Wylie, A., Riordan, P.H. (Ed.), Mineralogical Characteristics of Asbestos, Geology of Asbestos Deposits, 5.23. Zussman, J., The Mineralogy of Asbestos, Asbestos: Properties, Applications and Hazards, [51 FR 22756, June 20, 1986] Editorial Note: For Federal Register www.govinfo.gov. § 1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpretation of term. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1002 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4-Nitrobiphenyl, etc.). Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1105 [Reserved] § 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1107 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidiene (and its salts). Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1110 Benzidine. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1112 Ethyleneimine. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1115 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1117 Vinyl chloride. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1017 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1018 of this chapter. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1124 Beryllium. (a) Scope and application. (2) This standard does not apply to articles, as defined in the Hazard Communication standard (HCS) (29 CFR 1910.1200(c)), that contain beryllium and that the employer does not process. (3) This standard does not apply to materials containing less than 0.1% beryllium by weight where the employer has objective data demonstrating that employee exposure to beryllium will remain below the action level as an 8-hour TWA under any foreseeable conditions. (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Airborne exposure airborne exposure to beryllium Assistant Secretary Beryllium lymphocyte proliferation test (BeLPT) Beryllium sensitization CBD diagnostic center Chronic beryllium disease (CBD) Competent person Confirmed positive Director Objective data Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) i.e., This standard (c) Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs) Time-weighted average (TWA) PEL. 3 (2) Short-term exposure limit (STEL). 3 (d) Exposure assessment General. (2) Performance option. (3) Scheduled monitoring option. (ii) The employer must perform initial monitoring to assess the short-term exposure from 15-minute personal breathing zone air samples measured in operations that are likely to produce airborne exposure above the STEL for each work shift, for each job classification, and in each work area. (iii) Where several employees perform the same tasks on the same shift and in the same work area, the employer may sample a representative fraction of these employees in order to meet the requirements of paragraph (d)(3). In representative sampling, the employer must sample the employee(s) expected to have the highest airborne exposure to beryllium. (iv) If initial monitoring indicates that airborne exposure is below the action level and at or below the STEL, the employer may discontinue monitoring for those employees whose airborne exposure is represented by such monitoring. (v) Where the most recent exposure monitoring indicates that airborne exposure is at or above the action level but at or below the TWA PEL, the employer must repeat such monitoring within six months of the most recent monitoring. (vi) Where the most recent exposure monitoring indicates that airborne exposure is above the TWA PEL, the employer must repeat such monitoring within three months of the most recent 8-hour TWA exposure monitoring. (vii) Where the most recent (non-initial) exposure monitoring indicates that airborne exposure is below the action level, the employer must repeat such monitoring within six months of the most recent monitoring until two consecutive measurements, taken 7 or more days apart, are below the action level, at which time the employer may discontinue 8-hour TWA exposure monitoring for those employees whose exposure is represented by such monitoring, except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(4) of this standard. (viii) Where the most recent exposure monitoring indicates that airborne exposure is above the STEL, the employer must repeat such monitoring within three months of the most recent short-term exposure monitoring until two consecutive measurements, taken 7 or more days apart, are below the STEL, at which time the employer may discontinue short-term exposure monitoring for those employees whose exposure is represented by such monitoring, except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(4) of this standard. (4) Reassessment of exposure. (5) Methods of sample analysis. (6) Employee notification of assessment results. (ii) Whenever an exposure assessment indicates that airborne exposure is above the TWA PEL or STEL, the employer must describe in the written notification the corrective action being taken to reduce airborne exposure to or below the exposure limit(s) exceeded where feasible corrective action exists but had not been implemented when the monitoring was conducted. (7) Observation of monitoring. (ii) When observation of monitoring requires entry into an area where the use of personal protective clothing or equipment (which may include respirators) is required, the employer must provide each observer with appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment at no cost to the observer. (iii) The employer must ensure that each observer follows all other applicable safety and health procedures. (e) Competent person. (1) Make frequent and regular inspections of job sites, materials, and equipment; (2) Implement the written exposure control plan under paragraph (f) of this standard; (3) Ensure that all employees use respiratory protection in accordance with paragraph (g) of this standard; and (4) Ensure that all employees use personal protective clothing and equipment in accordance with paragraph (h) of this standard. (f) Methods of compliance Written exposure control plan. (A) A list of operations and job titles reasonably expected to involve exposure to beryllium; (B) A list of engineering controls, work practices, and respiratory protection required by paragraph (f)(2) of this standard; (C) A list of personal protective clothing and equipment required by paragraph (h) of this standard; (D) Procedures used to restrict access to work areas when airborne exposures are, or can reasonably be expected to be, above the TWA PEL or STEL, to minimize the number of employees exposed to airborne beryllium and their level of exposure, including exposures generated by other employers or sole proprietors; (E) Procedures used to ensure the integrity of each containment used to minimize exposures to employees outside the containment; and (F) Procedures for removing, cleaning, and maintaining personal protective clothing and equipment in accordance with paragraph (h) of this standard. (ii) The employer must review and evaluate the effectiveness of each written exposure control plan at least annually and update it, as necessary, when: (A) Any change in production processes, materials, equipment, personnel, work practices, or control methods results, or can reasonably be expected to result, in new or additional airborne exposure to beryllium; (B) The employer is notified that an employee is eligible for medical removal in accordance with paragraph (l)(1) of this standard, referred for evaluation at a CBD diagnostic center, or shows signs or symptoms associated with exposure to beryllium; or (C) The employer has any reason to believe that new or additional airborne exposure is occurring or will occur. (iii) The employer must make a copy of the written exposure control plan accessible to each employee who is, or can reasonably be expected to be, exposed to airborne beryllium in accordance with OSHA's Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records (Records Access) standard (29 CFR 1910.1020(e)). (2) Engineering and work practice controls. (3) Prohibition of rotation. (g) Respiratory protection General. (i) During periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work practice controls where airborne exposure exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed, the TWA PEL or STEL; (ii) During operations, including maintenance and repair activities and non-routine tasks, when engineering and work practice controls are not feasible and airborne exposure exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed, the TWA PEL or STEL; (iii) During operations for which an employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work practice controls when such controls are not sufficient to reduce airborne exposure to or below the TWA PEL or STEL; and (iv) When an employee who is eligible for medical removal under paragraph (l)(1) chooses to remain in a job with airborne exposure at or above the action level, as permitted by paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this standard. (2) Respiratory protection program. (3) The employer must provide at no cost to the employee a powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) instead of a negative pressure respirator when: (i) Respiratory protection is required by this standard; (ii) An employee entitled to such respiratory protection requests a PAPR; and (iii) The PAPR provides adequate protection to the employee in accordance with paragraph (g)(2) of this standard. (h) Personal protective clothing and equipment Provision and use. (2) Removal of personal protective clothing and equipment. (ii) The employer must ensure that personal protective clothing and equipment required by this standard is not removed in a manner that disperses beryllium into the air, and is removed as specified in the written exposure control plan required by paragraph (f)(1) of this standard. (iii) The employer must ensure that no employee with reasonably expected exposure above the TWA PEL or STEL removes personal protective clothing and equipment required by this standard from the workplace unless it has been cleaned in accordance with paragraph (h)(3)(ii) of this standard. (3) Cleaning and replacement. (ii) The employer must ensure that beryllium is not removed from personal protective clothing and equipment required by this standard by blowing, shaking, or any other means that disperses beryllium into the air. (i) [Reserved] (j) Housekeeping. (2) The employer must not allow dry sweeping or brushing for cleaning up dust resulting from operations that cause, or can reasonably be expected to cause, airborne exposure above the TWA PEL or STEL unless methods that minimize the likelihood and level of airborne exposure are not safe or effective. (3) The employer must not allow the use of compressed air for cleaning where the use of compressed air causes, or can reasonably be expected to cause, airborne exposure above the TWA PEL or STEL. (4) Where employees use dry sweeping, brushing, or compressed air to clean, the employer must provide, and ensure that each employee uses, respiratory protection and personal protective clothing and equipment in accordance with paragraphs (g) and (h) of this standard. (5) The employer must ensure that cleaning equipment is handled and maintained in a manner that minimizes the likelihood and level of airborne exposure and the re-entrainment of airborne beryllium in the workplace. (k) Medical surveillance General. (A) Who is or is reasonably expected to be exposed at or above the action level for more than 30 days per year; (B) Who shows signs or symptoms of CBD or other beryllium-related health effects; or (C) Whose most recent written medical opinion required by paragraph (k)(6) or (k)(7) recommends periodic medical surveillance. (ii) The employer must ensure that all medical examinations and procedures required by this standard are performed by, or under the direction of, a licensed physician. (2) Frequency. (i) Within 30 days after determining that: (A) An employee meets the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(A), unless the employee has received a medical examination, provided in accordance with this standard, within the last two years; or (B) An employee meets the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(B) of this standard. (ii) At least every two years thereafter for each employee who continues to meet the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i)(A), (B), or (C) of this standard. (iii) At the termination of employment for each employee who meets any of the criteria of paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this standard at the time the employee's employment terminates, unless an examination has been provided in accordance with this standard during the six months prior to the date of termination. (3) Contents of examination. (ii) The employer must ensure that the employee is offered a medical examination that includes: (A) A medical and work history, with emphasis on past and present exposure to beryllium, smoking history, and any history of respiratory system dysfunction; (B) A physical examination with emphasis on the respiratory system; (C) A physical examination for skin rashes; (D) Pulmonary function tests, performed in accordance with the guidelines established by the American Thoracic Society including forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume in one second (FEV 1 (E) A standardized BeLPT or equivalent test, upon the first examination and at least every two years thereafter, unless the employee is confirmed positive. If the results of the BeLPT are other than normal, a follow-up BeLPT must be offered within 30 days, unless the employee has been confirmed positive. Samples must be analyzed in a laboratory certified under the College of American Pathologists/Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendments (CLIA) guidelines to perform the BeLPT. (F) A low dose computed tomography (LDCT) scan, when recommended by the PLHCP after considering the employee's history of exposure to beryllium along with other risk factors, such as smoking history, family medical history, sex, age, and presence of existing lung disease; and (G) Any other test deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. (4) Information provided to the PLHCP. (i) A description of the employee's former and current duties that relate to the employee's exposure to beryllium; (ii) The employee's former and current levels of airborne exposure; (iii) A description of any personal protective clothing and equipment, including respirators, used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used that personal protective clothing and equipment; and (iv) Information from records of employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the employee, currently within the control of the employer, after obtaining written consent from the employee. (5) Licensed physician's written medical report for the employee. (i) A statement indicating the results of the medical examination, including the licensed physician's opinion as to whether the employee has: (A) Any detected medical condition, such as CBD or beryllium sensitization ( i.e., (B) Any medical conditions related to airborne exposure that require further evaluation or treatment. (ii) Any recommendations on: (A) The employee's use of respirators, protective clothing, or equipment; or (B) Limitations on the employee's airborne exposure to beryllium. (iii) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD or if the licensed physician otherwise deems it appropriate, the written report must also contain a referral for an evaluation at a CBD diagnostic center. (iv) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD the written report must also contain a recommendation for continued periodic medical surveillance. (v) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD the written report must also contain a recommendation for medical removal from airborne exposure to beryllium, as described in paragraph (l). (6) Licensed physician's written medical opinion for the employer. (A) The date of the examination; (B) A statement that the examination has met the requirements of this standard; (C) Any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators, protective clothing, or equipment; and (D) A statement that the PLHCP has explained the results of the medical examination to the employee, including any tests conducted, any medical conditions related to airborne exposure that require further evaluation or treatment, and any special provisions for use of personal protective clothing or equipment; (ii) If the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion must also contain any recommended limitations on the employee's airborne exposure to beryllium. (iii) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD or if the licensed physician otherwise deems it appropriate, and the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion must also contain a referral for an evaluation at a CBD diagnostic center. (iv) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD and the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion must also contain a recommendation for continued periodic medical surveillance. (v) If the employee is confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD and the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion must also contain a recommendation for medical removal from airborne exposure to beryllium, as described in paragraph (l). (vi) The employer must ensure that each employee receives a copy of the written medical opinion described in paragraph (k)(6) of this standard within 45 days of any medical examination (including any follow-up BeLPT required under paragraph (k)(3)(ii)(E) of this standard) performed for that employee. (7) CBD diagnostic center. (A) The employer's receipt of a physician's written medical opinion to the employer that recommends referral to a CBD diagnostic center; or (B) The employee presenting to the employer a physician's written medical report indicating that the employee has been confirmed positive or diagnosed with CBD, or recommending referral to a CBD diagnostic center. (ii) The employer must ensure that, as part of the evaluation, the employee is offered any tests deemed appropriate by the examining physician at the CBD diagnostic center, such as pulmonary function testing (as outlined by the American Thoracic Society criteria), bronchoalveolar lavage (BAL), and transbronchial biopsy. If any of the tests deemed appropriate by the examining physician are not available at the CBD diagnostic center, they may be performed at another location that is mutually agreed upon by the employer and the employee. (iii) The employer must ensure that the employee receives a written medical report from the CBD diagnostic center that contains all the information required in paragraphs (k)(5)(i), (ii), (iv), and (v) of this standard and that the PLHCP explains the results of the examination to the employee within 30 days of the examination. (iv) The employer must obtain a written medical opinion from the CBD diagnostic center within 30 days of the medical examination. The written medical opinion must contain only the information in paragraph (k)(6)(i) of this standard, as applicable, unless the employee provides written authorization to release additional information. If the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion must also contain the information from paragraphs (k)(6)(ii), (iv), and (v), if applicable. (v) The employer must ensure that each employee receives a copy of the written medical opinion from the CBD diagnostic center described in paragraph (k)(7) of this standard within 30 days of any medical examination performed for that employee. (vi) After an employee has received the initial clinical evaluation at a CBD diagnostic center described in paragraph (k)(7)(i) of this standard, the employee may choose to have any subsequent medical examinations for which the employee is eligible under paragraph (k) of this standard performed at a CBD diagnostic center mutually agreed upon by the employer and the employee, and the employer must provide such examinations at no cost to the employee. (l) Medical removal. (i) The employee provides the employer with: (A) A written medical report indicating a confirmed positive finding or CBD diagnosis; or (B) A written medical report recommending removal from airborne exposure to beryllium in accordance with paragraph (k)(5)(v) or (k)(7)(ii) of this standard; or (ii) The employer receives a written medical opinion recommending removal from airborne exposure to beryllium in accordance with paragraph (k)(6)(v) or (k)(7)(iii) of this standard. (2) If an employee is eligible for medical removal, the employer must provide the employee with the employee's choice of: (i) Removal as described in paragraph (l)(3) of this standard; or (ii) Remaining in a job with airborne exposure at or above the action level, provided that the employer provides, and ensures that the employee uses, respiratory protection that complies with paragraph (g) of this standard whenever airborne exposures are at or above the action level. (3) If the employee chooses removal: (i) If a comparable job is available where airborne exposures to beryllium are below the action level, and the employee is qualified for that job or can be trained within one month, the employer must remove the employee to that job. The employer must maintain for six months from the time of removal the employee's base earnings, seniority, and other rights and benefits that existed at the time of removal. (ii) If comparable work is not available, the employer must maintain the employee's base earnings, seniority, and other rights and benefits that existed at the time of removal for six months or until such time that comparable work described in paragraph (l)(3)(i) becomes available, whichever comes first. (4) The employer's obligation to provide medical removal protection benefits to a removed employee shall be reduced to the extent that the employee receives compensation for earnings lost during the period of removal from a publicly or employer-funded compensation program, or receives income from another employer made possible by virtue of the employee's removal. (m) Communication of hazards General. (ii) Employers must include beryllium in the hazard communication program established to comply with the HCS. Employers must ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of beryllium and to safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the requirements of the HCS (29 CFR 1910.1200) and paragraph (m)(4) of this standard. (2) Employee information and training. (A) The employer must provide information and training in accordance with the HCS (29 CFR 1910.1200(h)); (B) The employer must provide initial training to each employee by the time of initial assignment; and (C) The employer must repeat the training required under this standard annually for each employee. (ii) The employer must ensure that each employee who is, or can reasonably be expected to be, exposed to airborne beryllium can demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the following: (A) The health hazards associated with exposure to beryllium, including the signs and symptoms of CBD; (B) The written exposure control plan, with emphasis on the specific nature of operations that could result in airborne exposure, especially airborne exposure above the TWA PEL or STEL; (C) The purpose, proper selection, fitting, proper use, and limitations of personal protective clothing and equipment, including respirators; (D) Measures employees can take to protect themselves from exposure to beryllium; (E) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program required by paragraph (k) of this standard including risks and benefits of each test to be offered; (F) The purpose and a description of the medical removal protection provided under paragraph (l) of this standard; (G) The contents of the standard; and (H) The employee's right of access to records under the Records Access standard (29 CFR 1910.1020). (iii) When a workplace change (such as modification of equipment, tasks, or procedures) results in new or increased airborne exposure that exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed, either the TWA PEL or the STEL, the employer must provide additional training to those employees affected by the change in airborne exposure. (iv) The employer must make a copy of this standard and its appendices readily available at no cost to each employee and designated employee representative(s). (n) Recordkeeping Air monitoring data. (ii) This record must include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement for each sample taken; (B) The task that is being monitored; (C) The sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) The number, duration, and results of samples taken; (E) The type of personal protective clothing and equipment, including respirators, worn by monitored employees at the time of monitoring; and (F) The name and job classification of each employee represented by the monitoring, indicating which employees were actually monitored. (iii) The employer must ensure that exposure records are maintained and made available in accordance with the Records Access standard (29 CFR 1910.1020). (2) Objective data. (ii) This record must include at least the following information: (A) The data relied upon; (B) The beryllium-containing material in question; (C) The source of the objective data; (D) A description of the process, task, or activity on which the objective data were based; and (E) Other data relevant to the process, task, activity, material, or airborne exposure on which the objective data were based. (iii) The employer must ensure that objective data are maintained and made available in accordance with the Records Access standard (29 CFR 1910.1020). (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record must include the following information about each employee: (A) Name and job classification; (B) A copy of all licensed physicians' written medical opinions for each employee; and (C) A copy of the information provided to the PLHCP as required by paragraph (k)(4) of this standard. (iii) The employer must ensure that medical records are maintained and made available in accordance with the Records Access standard (29 CFR 1910.1020). (4) Training. (ii) This record must be maintained for three years after the completion of training. (5) Access to records. (6) Transfer of records. (o) Dates Effective date. (2) Compliance dates. (ii) All other obligations of this standard commence and become enforceable on September 30, 2020. [82 FR 2751, Jan. 9, 2017, as amended at 84 FR 51400, Sept. 30, 2019; 85 FR 53997, Aug. 31, 2020; 86 FR 11120, Feb. 24, 2021] § 1926.1126 Chromium (VI). (a) Scope. (2) Exposures that occur in the application of pesticides regulated by the Environmental Protection Agency or another Federal government agency ( e.g. (3) Exposures to portland cement; or (4) Where the employer has objective data demonstrating that a material containing chromium or a specific process, operation, or activity involving chromium cannot release dusts, fumes, or mists of chromium (VI) in concentrations at or above 0.5 µgm/m 3 (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Assistant Secretary Chromium (VI) [hexavalent chromium or Cr(VI)] Director Emergency Employee exposure High-efficiency particulate air [HEPA] filter Historical monitoring data Objective data Physician or other licensed health care professional [PLHCP] i.e. This section (c) Permissible exposure limit (PEL). 3 (d) Exposure determination General. (2) Scheduled monitoring option. (ii) If initial monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level, the employer may discontinue monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring. (iii) If monitoring reveals employee exposures to be at or above the action level, the employer shall perform periodic monitoring at least every six months. (iv) If monitoring reveals employee exposures to be above the PEL, the employer shall perform periodic monitoring at least every three months. (v) If periodic monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level, and the result is confirmed by the result of another monitoring taken at least seven days later, the employer may discontinue the monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring. (vi) The employer shall perform additional monitoring when there has been any change in the production process, raw materials, equipment, personnel, work practices, or control methods that may result in new or additional exposures to chromium (VI), or when the employer has any reason to believe that new or additional exposures have occurred. (3) Performance-oriented option. (4) Employee notification of determination results. (ii) Whenever the exposure determination indicates that employee exposure is above the PEL, the employer shall describe in the written notification the corrective action being taken to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL. (5) Accuracy of measurement. (6) Observation of monitoring. (ii) When observation of monitoring requires entry into an area where the use of protective clothing or equipment is required, the employer shall provide the observer with clothing and equipment and shall assure that the observer uses such clothing and equipment and complies with all other applicable safety and health procedures. (e) Methods of compliance Engineering and work practice controls. (ii) Where the employer can demonstrate that a process or task does not result in any employee exposure to chromium (VI) above the PEL for 30 or more days per year (12 consecutive months), the requirement to implement engineering and work practice controls to achieve the PEL does not apply to that process or task. (2) Prohibition of rotation. (f) Respiratory protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work practice controls; (ii) Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activities, for which engineering and work practice controls are not feasible; (iii) Work operations for which an employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work practice controls and such controls are not sufficient to reduce exposures to or below the PEL; (iv) Work operations where employees are exposed above the PEL for fewer than 30 days per year, and the employer has elected not to implement engineering and work practice controls to achieve the PEL; or (v) Emergencies. (2) Respiratory protection program. (g) Protective work clothing and equipment Provision and use. (2) Removal and storage. (ii) The employer shall ensure that no employee removes chromium (VI)-contaminated protective clothing or equipment from the workplace, except for those employees whose job it is to launder, clean, maintain, or dispose of such clothing or equipment. (iii) When contaminated protective clothing or equipment is removed for laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or disposal, the employer shall ensure that it is stored and transported in sealed, impermeable bags or other closed, impermeable containers. (iv) The employer shall ensure that bags or containers of contaminated protective clothing or equipment that are removed from change rooms for laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or disposal shall be labeled in accordance with the requirements of the Hazard Communication Standard, § 1910.1200. (3) Cleaning and replacement. (ii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of chromium (VI) from protective clothing and equipment by blowing, shaking, or any other means that disperses chromium (VI) into the air or onto an employee's body. (iii) The employer shall inform any person who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment contaminated with chromium (VI) of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to chromium (VI) and that the clothing and equipment should be laundered or cleaned in a manner that minimizes skin or eye contact with chromium (VI) and effectively prevents the release of airborne chromium (VI) in excess of the PEL. (h) Hygiene areas and practices General. (2) Change rooms. (3) Washing facilities. (ii) The employer shall ensure that employees who have skin contact with chromium (VI) wash their hands and faces at the end of the work shift and prior to eating, drinking, smoking, chewing tobacco or gum, applying cosmetics, or using the toilet. (4) Eating and drinking areas. (ii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not enter eating and drinking areas with protective work clothing or equipment unless surface chromium (VI) has been removed from the clothing and equipment by methods that do not disperse chromium (VI) into the air or onto an employee's body. (5) Prohibited activities. (i) Medical surveillance General. (A) Who are or may be occupationally exposed to chromium (VI) at or above the action level for 30 or more days a year; (B) Experiencing signs or symptoms of the adverse health effects associated with chromium (VI) exposure; or (C) Exposed in an emergency. (ii) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures required by this section are performed by or under the supervision of a PLHCP. (2) Frequency. (i) Within 30 days after initial assignment, unless the employee has received a chromium (VI) related medical examination that meets the requirements of this paragraph within the last twelve months; (ii) Annually; (iii) Within 30 days after a PLHCP's written medical opinion recommends an additional examination; (iv) Whenever an employee shows signs or symptoms of the adverse health effects associated with chromium (VI) exposure; (v) Within 30 days after exposure during an emergency which results in an uncontrolled release of chromium (VI); or (vi) At the termination of employment, unless the last examination that satisfied the requirements of paragraph (i) of this section was less than six months prior to the date of termination. (3) Contents of examination. (i) A medical and work history, with emphasis on: past, present, and anticipated future exposure to chromium (VI); any history of respiratory system dysfunction; any history of asthma, dermatitis, skin ulceration, or nasal septum perforation; and smoking status and history; (ii) A physical examination of the skin and respiratory tract; and (iii) Any additional tests deemed appropriate by the examining PLHCP. (4) Information provided to the PLHCP. (i) A description of the affected employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to chromium (VI); (ii) The employee's former, current, and anticipated levels of occupational exposure to chromium (VI); (iii) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used that equipment; and (iv) Information from records of employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the affected employee, currently within the control of the employer. (5) PLHCP's written medical opinion. (A) The PLHCP's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from further exposure to chromium (VI); (B) Any recommended limitations upon the employee's exposure to chromium (VI) or upon the use of personal protective equipment such as respirators; (C) A statement that the PLHCP has explained to the employee the results of the medical examination, including any medical conditions related to chromium (VI) exposure that require further evaluation or treatment, and any special provisions for use of protective clothing or equipment. (ii) The PLHCP shall not reveal to the employer specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure to chromium (VI). (iii) The employer shall provide a copy of the PLHCP's written medical opinion to the examined employee within two weeks after receiving it. (j) Communication of chromium (VI) hazards to employees Hazard communication. (2) Employee information and training. (A) The contents of this section; and (B) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program required by paragraph (i) of this section. (ii) The employer shall make a copy of this section readily available without cost to all affected employees. (k) Recordkeeping Air monitoring data. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement for each sample taken; (B) The operation involving exposure to chromium (VI) that is being monitored; (C) Sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) Number, duration, and the results of samples taken; (E) Type of personal protective equipment, such as respirators worn; and (F) Name and job classification of all employees represented by the monitoring, indicating which employees were actually monitored. (iii) The employer shall ensure that exposure records are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (2) Historical monitoring data. (ii) The record shall include information that reflects the following conditions: (A) The data were collected using methods that meet the accuracy requirements of paragraph (d)(5) of this section; (B) The processes and work practices that were in use when the historical monitoring data were obtained are essentially the same as those to be used during the job for which exposure is being determined; (C) The characteristics of the chromium (VI) containing material being handled when the historical monitoring data were obtained are the same as those on the job for which exposure is being determined; (D) Environmental conditions prevailing when the historical monitoring data were obtained are the same as those on the job for which exposure is being determined; and (E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or employee exposures covered by the exception. (iii) The employer shall ensure that historical exposure records are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (3) Objective data. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The chromium containing material in question; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol and results of testing, or analysis of the material for the release of chromium (VI); (D) A description of the process, operation, or activity and how the data support the determination; and (E) Other data relevant to the process, operation, activity, material, or employee exposures. (iii) The employer shall ensure that objective data are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (4) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include the following information about the employee: (A) Name; (B) A copy of the PLHCP's written opinions; (C) A copy of the information provided to the PLHCP as required by paragraph (i)(4) of this section. (iii) The employer shall ensure that medical records are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (l) Dates. (2) For employers with 19 or fewer employees, all obligations of this section, except engineering controls required by paragraph (e) of this section, commence May 30, 2007. (3) For all employers, engineering controls required by paragraph (e) of this section shall be implemented no later than May 31, 2010. [71 FR 10382, Feb. 28, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 75589, Dec. 12, 2008; 75 FR 12686, Mar. 17, 2010; 77 FR 17895, Mar. 26, 2012] § 1926.1127 Cadmium. (a) Scope. (1) Wrecking, demolition or salvage of structures where cadmium or materials containing cadmium are present; (2) Use of cadmium containing-paints and cutting, brazing, burning, grinding or welding on surfaces that were painted with cadmium-containing paints; (3) Construction, alteration, repair, maintenance, or renovation of structures, substrates, or portions thereof, that contain cadmium, or materials containing cadmium; (4) Cadmium welding; cutting and welding cadmium-plated steel; brazing or welding with cadmium alloys; (5) Installation of products containing cadmium; (6) Electrical grounding with cadmium welding, or electrical work using cadmium-coated conduit; (7) Maintaining or retrofitting cadmium-coated equipment; (8) Cadmium contamination/emergency cleanup; and (9) Transportation, disposal, storage, or containment of cadmium or materials containing cadmium on the site or location at which construction activities are performed. (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Assistant Secretary Authorized person Competent person, Director Employee exposure Final medical determination High-efficiency Particulate Air [HEPA] filter Regulated area This section (c) Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL). 3 (d) Exposure Monitoring General. (ii) Where cadmium has been determined to be present in the workplace, and it has been determined that there is a possibility the employee's exposure will be at or above the action level, the competent person shall identify employees potentially exposed to cadmium at or above the action level. (iii) Determinations of employee exposure shall be made from breathing-zone air samples that reflect the monitored employee's regular, daily 8-hour TWA exposure to cadmium. (iv) Eight-hour TWA exposures shall be determined for each employee on the basis of one or more personal breathing-zone air samples reflecting full shift exposure on each shift, for each job classification, in each work area. Where several employees perform the same job tasks, in the same job classification, on the same shift, in the same work area, and the length, duration, and level of cadmium exposures are similar, an employer may sample a representative fraction of the employees instead of all employees in order to meet this requirement. In representative sampling, the employer shall sample the employee(s) expected to have the highest cadmium exposures. (2) Specific. (ii) In addition, if the employee periodically performs tasks that may expose the employee to a higher concentration of airborne cadmium, the employee shall be monitored while performing those tasks. (iii) Where the employer has objective data, as defined in paragraph (n)(2) of this section, demonstrating that employee exposure to cadmium will not exceed airborne concentrations at or above the action level under the expected conditions of processing, use, or handling, the employer may rely upon such data instead of implementing initial monitoring. (iv) Where a determination conducted under paragraphs (d)(1) or (d)(2) of this section is made that a potentially exposed employee is not exposed to airborne concentrations of cadmium at or above the action level, the employer shall make a written record of such determination. The record shall include at least the monitoring data developed under paragraphs (d)(2)(i)-(iii) of this section, where applicable, and shall also include the date of determination, and the name of each employee. (3) Monitoring frequency (periodic monitoring). (ii) If the initial monitoring or the periodic monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level and that result is confirmed by the results of another monitoring taken at least seven days later, the employer may discontinue the monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring. (4) Additional monitoring. (5) Employee notification of monitoring results. (ii) Wherever monitoring results indicate that employee exposure exceeds the PEL, the employer shall include in the written notice a statement that the PEL has been exceeded and a description of the corrective action being taken by the employer to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL. (6) Accuracy of measurement. (e) Regulated areas Establishment. (2) Demarcation. (3) Access. (4) Provision of respirators. (5) Prohibited activities. (f) Methods of compliance Compliance hierarchy. (ii) The requirement to implement engineering controls to achieve the PEL does not apply where the employer demonstrates the following: (A) The employee is only intermittently exposed; and (B) The employee is not exposed above the PEL on 30 or more days per year (12 consecutive months). (iii) Wherever engineering and work practice controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL, the employer nonetheless shall implement such controls to reduce exposures to the lowest levels achievable. The employer shall supplement such controls with respiratory protection that complies with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section and the PEL. (iv) The employer shall not use employee rotation as a method of compliance. (2) Specific operations Abrasive blasting. (ii) Heating cadmium and cadmium-containing materials. (3) Prohibitions. (ii) Materials containing cadmium shall not be applied by spray methods, if exposures are above the PEL, unless employees are protected with supplied-air respirators with full facepiece, hood, helmet, suit, operated in positive pressure mode and measures are instituted to limit overspray and prevent contamination of adjacent areas. (4) Mechanical ventilation. (ii) Measurements of the system's effectiveness in controlling exposure shall be made as necessary within five working days of any change in production, process, or control that might result in a significant increase in employee exposure to cadmium. (iii) Recirculation of air. If air from exhaust ventilation is recirculated into the workplace, the system shall have a high efficiency filter and be monitored to assure effectiveness. (iv) Procedures shall be developed and implemented to minimize employee exposure to cadmium when maintenance of ventilation systems and changing of filters is being conducted. (5) Compliance program. (ii) Written compliance programs shall be reviewed and updated as often and as promptly as necessary to reflect significant changes in the employer's compliance status or significant changes in the lowest air cadmium level that is technologically feasible. (iii) A competent person shall review the comprehensive compliance program initially and after each change. (iv) Written compliance programs shall be provided upon request for examination and copying to the Assistant Secretary, the Director, affected employees, and designated employee representatives. (g) Respirator protection General. (i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work-practice controls when employee exposures exceed the PEL. (ii) Maintenance and repair activities, and brief or intermittent work operations, for which employee exposures exceed the PEL and engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible or are not required. (iii) Work operations in the regulated areas specified in paragraph (e) of this section. (iv) Work operations for which the employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work-practice controls, and such controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the PEL. (v) Work operations for which an employee, who is exposed to cadmium at or above the action level, requests a respirator. (vi) Work operations for which engineering controls are not required by paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section to reduce employee exposures that exceed the PEL. (vii) Emergencies. (2) Respirator program. (ii) If an employee exhibits breathing difficulty during fit testing or respirator use, the employer must provide the employee with a medical examination in accordance with paragraph (l)(6)(ii) of this section to determine if the employee can use a respirator while performing the required duties. (iii) No employee must use a respirator when, based on their most recent medical examination, the examining physician determines that the employee will be unable to continue to function normally while using a respirator. If the physician determines the employee must be limited in, or removed from, their current job because of the employee's inability to use a respirator, the job limitation or removal must be conducted in accordance with paragraphs (l) (11) and (12) of this section. (3) Respirator selection. (A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134. (B) Provide employees with full facepiece respirators when they experience eye irritation. (C) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying respirators. (ii) The employer must provide a powered air-purifying respirator instead of a negative-pressure respirator when an employee entitled to a respirator chooses to use this type of respirator and such a respirator will provide adequate protection to the employee. (h) Emergency situations. (i) Protective work clothing and equipment Provision and use. (i) Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing; (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and boots or foot coverings; and (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or other appropriate protective equipment that complies with 29 CFR 1910.133. (2) Removal and storage. (ii) The employer shall assure that no employee takes cadmium-contaminated protective clothing or equipment from the workplace, except for employees authorized to do so for purposes of laundering, cleaning, maintaining, or disposing of cadmium-contaminated protective clothing and equipment at an appropriate location or facility away from the workplace. (iii) The employer shall assure that contaminated protective clothing and equipment, when removed for laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or disposal, is placed and stored in sealed, impermeable bags or other closed, impermeable containers that are designed to prevent dispersion of cadmium dust. (iv) The employer shall ensure that containers of contaminated protective clothing and equipment that are to be taken out of the change rooms or the workplace for laundering, cleaning, maintenance or disposal shall bear labels in accordance with paragraph (m)(3)(ii) of this section. (3) Cleaning, replacement, and disposal. (ii) The employer also is responsible for repairing or replacing required protective clothing and equipment as needed to maintain its effectiveness. When rips or tears are detected while an employee is working they shall be immediately mended, or the worksuit shall be immediately replaced. (iii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of cadmium from protective clothing and equipment by blowing, shaking, or any other means that disperses cadmium into the air. (iv) The employer shall assure that any laundering of contaminated clothing or cleaning of contaminated equipment in the workplace is done in a manner that prevents the release of airborne cadmium in excess of the permissible exposure limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section. (v) The employer shall inform any person who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment contaminated with cadmium of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to cadmium, and that the clothing and equipment should be laundered or cleaned in a manner to effectively prevent the release of airborne cadmium in excess of the PEL. (j) Hygiene areas and practices General. (2) Change rooms. (3) Showers and handwashing facilities. (ii) The employer shall assure that employees who are exposed to cadmium above the PEL wash their hands and faces prior to eating, drinking, smoking, chewing tobacco or gum, or applying cosmetics. (4) Lunchroom facilities. 3 (ii) The employer shall assure that employees do not enter lunchroom facilities with protective work clothing or equipment unless surface cadmium has been removed from the clothing and equipment by HEPA vacuuming or some other method that removes cadmium dust without dispersing it. (k) Housekeeping. (2) All spills and sudden releases of material containing cadmium shall be cleaned up as soon as possible. (3) Surfaces contaminated with cadmium shall, wherever possible, be cleaned by vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of cadmium becoming airborne. (4) HEPA-filtered vacuuming equipment or equally effective filtration methods shall be used for vacuuming. The equipment shall be used and emptied in a manner that minimizes the reentry of cadmium into the workplace. (5) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only where vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of cadmium becoming airborne have been tried and found not to be effective. (6) Compressed air shall not be used to remove cadmium from any surface unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with a ventilation system designed to capture the dust cloud created by the compressed air. (7) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, and containers, personal protective equipment and clothing contaminated with cadmium and consigned for disposal shall be collected and disposed of in sealed impermeable bags or other closed, impermeable containers. These bags and containers shall be labeled in accordance with paragraph (m)(3)(ii) of this section. (l) Medical Surveillance General Scope Currently exposed ( 1 ( 2 (B) Previously exposed. (ii) To determine an employee's fitness for using a respirator, the employer shall provide the limited medical examination specified in paragraph (l)(6) of this section. (iii) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures required by this section are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician, who has read and is familiar with the health effects section of appendix A to this section, the regulatory text of this section, the protocol for sample handling and lab selection in appendix F to this section, and the questionnaire of appendix D to this section. (iv) The employer shall provide the medical surveillance required by this section, including multiple physician review under paragraph (l)(13) of this section without cost to employees, and at a time and place that is reasonable and convenient to employees. (v) The employer shall assure that the collecting and handling of biological samples of cadmium in urine (CdU), cadmium in blood (CdB), and beta-2 microglobulin in urine (β 2 2 (2) Initial Examination. (ii) The initial medical examination shall include: (A) A detailed medical and work history, with emphasis on: Past, present, and anticipated future exposure to cadmium; any history of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, reproductive, and/or musculo-skeletal system dysfunction; current usage of medication with potential nephrotoxic side-effects; and smoking history and current status; and (B) Biological monitoring that includes the following tests: ( 1 ( 2 2 ( 3 (iii) Recent Examination: An initial examination is not required to be provided if adequate records show that the employee has been examined in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this section within the past 12 months. In that case, such records shall be maintained as part of the employee's medical record and the prior exam shall be treated as if it were an initial examination for the purposes of paragraphs (l)(3) and (4) of this section. (3) Actions triggered by initial biological monitoring. 2 (A) For employees who are subject to medical surveillance under paragraphs (l)(1)(i)(A) of this section because of current or anticipated exposure to cadmium, the employer shall provide the minimum level of periodic medical surveillance in accordance with the requirements in paragraph (l)(4)(i) of this section; and (B) For employees who are subject to medical surveillance under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(B) of this section because of prior but not current exposure, the employer shall provide biological monitoring for CdU, B 2 (ii) For all employees who are subject to medical surveillance under paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the results of the initial biological monitoring tests show the level of CdU to exceed 3 µg/g Cr, the level of β 2 (A) Within two weeks after receipt of biological monitoring results, reassess the employee's occupational exposure to cadmium as follows: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 ( 4 ( 5 (B) Within 30 days after the exposure reassessment, specified in paragraph (l)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, take reasonable steps to correct any deficiencies found in the reassessment that may be responsible for the employee's excess exposure to cadmium; and, (C) Within 90 days after receipt of biological monitoring results, provide a full medical examination to the employee in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. After completing the medical examination, the examining physician shall determine in a written medical opinion whether to medically remove the employee. If the physician determines that medical removal is not necessary, then until the employee's CdU level falls to or below 3 µg/g Cr, β 2 ( 1 ( 2 (iii) For all employees who are subject to medical surveillance under paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the results of the initial biological monitoring tests show the level of CdU to be in excess of 15 µg/g Cr, or the level of CdB to be in excess of 15 µg/lwb, or the level of β 2 2 2 (A) Periodically reassess the employee's occupational exposure to cadmium; (B) Provide biological monitoring in accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section on a quarterly basis; and (C) Provide semiannual medical examinations in accordance with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. (iv) For all employees to whom medical surveillance is provided, beginning on January 1, 1999, and in lieu of paragraph (l)(3)(iii) of this section, whenever the results of initial biological monitoring tests show the employee's CdU level to be in excess of 7 µg/g Cr, or β 2 2 2 (A) Periodically reassess the employee's occupational exposure to cadmium; (B) Provide biological monitoring in accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section on a quarterly basis; and (C) Provide semiannual medical examinations in accordance with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. (4) Periodic medical surveillance. (ii) The periodic medical examination shall include: (A) A detailed medical and work history, or update thereof, with emphasis on: Past, present and anticipated future exposure to cadmium; smoking history and current status; reproductive history; current use of medications with potential nephrotoxic side-effects; any history of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, and/or musculo-skeletal system dysfunction; and as part of the medical and work history, for employees who wear respirators, questions 3-11 and 25-32 in appendix D to this section; (B) A complete physical examination with emphasis on: blood pressure, the respiratory system, and the urinary system; (C) A 14 inch by 17 inch or other reasonably-sized standard film or digital posterior-anterior chest X-ray (after the initial X-ray, the frequency of chest X-rays is to be determined by the examining physician); (D) Pulmonary function tests, including forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume at 1 second (FEV1); (E) Biological monitoring, as required in paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section; (F) Blood analysis, in addition to the analysis required under paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including blood urea nitrogen, complete blood count, and serum creatinine; (G) Urinalysis, in addition to the analysis required under paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including the determination of albumin, glucose, and total and low molecular weight proteins; (H) For males over 40 years old, prostate palpation, or other at least as effective diagnostic test(s), and; (I) Any additional tests or procedures deemed appropriate by the examining physician. (iii) Periodic biological monitoring shall be provided in accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section. (iv) If the results of periodic biological monitoring or the results of biological monitoring performed as part of the periodic medical examination show the level of the employee's CdU, β 2 (v) For previously exposed employees under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(B) of this section: (A) If the employee's levels of CdU did not exceed 3 µg/g Cr, CdB did not exceed 5 µg/lwb, and β 2 (B) If the initial biological monitoring results for CdU, CdB, or β 2 2 2 (C) However, if the results of the follow-up tests specified in paragraph (l)(4)(v)(A) or (B) of this section indicate that the level of the employee's CdU, β 2 (vi) A routine, biennial medical examination is not required to be provided in accordance with paragraphs (l)(3)(i) and (l)(4) of this section if adequate medical records show that the employee has been examined in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section within the past 12 months. In that case, such records shall be maintained by the employer as part of the employee's medical record, and the next routine, periodic medical examination shall be made available to the employee within two years of the previous examination. (5) Actions triggered by medical examinations. (A) Periodically reassess: The employee's work practices and personal hygiene; the employee's respirator use, if any; the employee's smoking history and status; the respiratory protection program; the hygiene facilities; the maintenance and effectiveness of the relevant engineering controls; and take all reasonable steps to correct the deficiencies found in the reassessment that may be responsible for the employee's excess exposure to cadmium. (B) Provide semi-annual medical reexaminations to evaluate the abnormal clinical sign(s) of cadmium toxicity until the results are normal or the employee is medically removed; and (C) Where the results of tests for total proteins in urine are abnormal, provide a more detailed medical evaluation of the toxic effects of cadmium on the employee's renal system. (6) Examination for respirator use. (A) A detailed medical and work history, or update thereof, with emphasis on: past exposure to cadmium; smoking history and current status; any history of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, and/or musculo-skeletal system dysfunction; a description of the job for which the respirator is required; and questions 3-11 and 25-32 in appendix D; (B) A blood pressure test; (C) Biological monitoring of the employee's levels of CdU, CdB and β 2 (D) Any other test or precedure that the examining physician deems appropriate. (ii) After reviewing all the information obtained from the medical examination required in paragraph (l)(6)(i) of this section, the physician shall determine whether the employee is fit to wear a respirator. (iii) Whenever an employee has exhibited difficulty in breathing during a respirator fit test or during use of a respirator, the employer, as soon as possible, shall provide the employee with a periodic medical examination in accordance with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section to determine the employee's fitness to wear a respirator. (iv) Where the results of the examination required under paragraphs (l)(6)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section are abnormal, medical limitation or prohibition of respirator use shall be considered. If the employee is allowed to wear a respirator, the employee's ability to continue to do so shall be periodically evaluated by a physician. (7) Emergency Examinations. (ii) The examination shall include the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii), of this section, with emphasis on the respiratory system, other organ systems considered appropriate by the examining physician, and symptoms of acute overexposure, as identified in paragraphs II(B)(1)-(2) and IV of appendix A of this section. (8) Termination of employment examination. (ii) In addition, if the employer has discontinued all periodic medical surveillance under paragraph (l)(4)(v) of this section, no termination of employment medical examination is required. (9) Information provided to the physician. (i) A copy of this standard and appendices; (ii) A description of the affected employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to cadmium; (iii) The employee's former, current, and anticipated future levels of occupational exposure to cadmium; (iv) A description of any personal protective equipment, including respirators, used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used that equipment; and (v) Relevant results of previous biological monitoring and medical examinations. (10) Physician's written medical opinion. (A) The physician's diagnosis for the employee; (B) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from further exposure to cadmium, including any indications of potential cadmium toxicity; (C) The results of any biological or other testing or related evaluations that directly assess the employee's absorption of cadmium; (D) Any recommended removal from, or limitation on the activities or duties of the employee or on the employee's use of personal protective equipment, such as respirators; (E) A statement that the physician has clearly and carefully explained to the employee the results of the medical examination, including all biological monitoring results and any medical conditions related to cadmium exposure that require further evaluation or treatment, and any limitation on the employee's diet or use of medications. (ii) The employer shall promptly obtain a copy of the results of any biological monitoring provided by an employer to an employee independently of a medical examination under paragraphs (l)(2) and (l)(4) of this section, and, in lieu of a written medical opinion, an explanation sheet explaining those results. (iii) The employer shall instruct the physician not to reveal orally or in the written medical opinion given to the employer specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposure to cadmium. (11) Medical Removal Protection (MRP) General. (B) The employer shall medically remove an employee in accordance with paragraph (l)(11) of this section regardless of whether at the time of removal a job is available into which the removed employee may be transferred. (C) Whenever an employee is medically removed under paragraph (l)(11) of this section, the employer shall transfer the removed employee to a job where the exposure to cadmium is within the permissible levels specified in that paragraph as soon as one becomes available. (D) For any employee who is medically removed under the provisions of paragraph (l)(11)(i) of this section, the employer shall provide follow-up medical examinations semi-annually until, in a written medical opinion, the examining physician determines that either the employee may be returned to his/her former job status or the employee must be permanently removed from excess cadmium exposure. (E) The employer may not return an employee who has been medically removed for any reason to his/her former job status until a physician determines in a written medical opinion that continued medical removal is no longer necessary to protect the employee's health. (ii) Where an employee is found unfit to wear a respirator under paragraph (l)(6)(ii) of this section, the employer shall remove the employee from work where exposure to cadmium is above the PEL. (iii) Where removal is based upon any reason other than the employee's inability to wear a respirator, the employer shall remove the employee from work where exposure to cadmium is at or above the action level. (iv) Except as specified in paragraph (l)(11)(v) of this section, no employee who was removed because his/her level of CdU, CdB and/or β 2 2 (v) However, when in the examining physician's opinion continued exposure to cadmium will not pose an increased risk to the employee's health and there are special circumstances that make continued medical removal an inappropriate remedy, the physician shall fully discuss these matters with the employee, and then in a written determination may return a worker to his/her former job status despite what would otherwise be unacceptably high biological monitoring results. Thereafter and until such time as the employee's biological monitoring results have decreased to levels where he/she could have been returned to his/her former job status, the returned employee shall continue medical surveillance as if he/she were still on medical removal. Until such time, the employee is no longer subject to mandatory medical removal. Subsequent questions regarding the employee's medical removal shall be decided solely by a final medical determination. (vi) Where an employer, although not required by this section to do so, removes an employee from exposure to cadmium or otherwise places limitations on an employee due to the effects of cadmium exposure on the employee's medical condition, the employer shall provide the same medical removal protection benefits to that employee under paragraph (l)(12) of this section as would have been provided had the removal been required under paragraph (l)(11) of this section. (12) Medical removal protection benefits. (ii) For purposes of this section, the requirement that the employer provide medical removal protection benefits means that the employer shall maintain the total normal earnings, seniority, and all other employee rights and benefits of the removed employee, including the employee's right to his/her former job status, as if the employee had not been removed from the employee's job or otherwise medically limited. (iii) Where, after 18 months on medical removal because of elevated biological monitoring results, the employee's monitoring results have not declined to a low enough level to permit the employee to be returned to his/her former job status: (A) The employer shall make available to the employee a medical examination pursuant to this section in order to obtain a final medical determination as to whether the employee may be returned to his/her former job status or must be permanently removed from excess cadmium exposure; and (B) The employer shall assure that the final medical determination indicates whether the employee may be returned to his/her former job status and what steps, if any, should be taken to protect the employee's health; (iv) The employer may condition the provision of medical removal protection benefits upon the employee's participation in medical surveillance provided in accordance with this section. (13) Multiple physician review. (A) Review any findings, determinations, or recommendations of the initial physician; and (B) Conduct such examinations, consultations, and laboratory tests as the second physician deems necessary to facilitate this review. (ii) The employer shall promptly notify an employee of the right to seek a second medical opinion after each occasion that an initial physician provided by the employer conducts a medical examination or consultation pursuant to this section. The employer may condition its participation in, and payment for, multiple physician review upon the employee doing the following within fifteen (15) days after receipt of this notice, or receipt of the initial physician's written opinion, whichever is later: (A) Informing the employer that he or she intends to seek a medical opinion; and (B) Initiating steps to make an appointment with a second physician. (iii) If the findings, determinations, or recommendations of the second physician differ from those of the initial physician, then the employer and the employee shall assure that efforts are made for the two physicians to resolve any disagreement. (iv) If the two physicians have been unable to quickly resolve their disagreement, then the employer and the employee, through their respective physicians, shall designate a third physician to: (A) Review any findings, determinations, or recommendations of the other two physicians; and (B) Conduct such examinations, consultations, laboratory tests, and discussions with the other two physicians as the third physician deems necessary to resolve the disagreement among them. (v) The employer shall act consistently with the findings, determinations, and recommendations of the third physician, unless the employer and the employee reach an agreement that is consistent with the recommendations of at least one of the other two physicians. (14) Alternate physician determination. (15) Information the employer must provide the employee. (ii) The employer shall provide the employee with a copy of the employee's biological monitoring results and an explanation sheet explaining the results within five working days after receipt thereof. (iii) Within 30 days after a request by an employee, the employer shall provide the employee with the information the employer is required to provide the examining physician under paragraph (l)(9) of this section. (16) Reporting. Reporting Guidelines for Occupational Injuries and Illnesses. (m) Communication of cadmium hazards to employees Hazard communication. (2) Warning signs. (ii) Warning signs required by paragraph (m)(2)(i) of this section shall bear the following legend: DANGER CADMIUM MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AND KIDNEYS WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN THIS AREA AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY (iii) The employer shall ensure that signs required by this paragraph (m)(2) are illuminated, cleaned, and maintained as necessary so that the legend is readily visible. (iv) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in lieu of that specified in paragraph (m)(2)(ii) of this section: DANGER CADMIUM CANCER HAZARD CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS REQUIRED IN THIS AREA (3) Warning labels. (ii) The warning labels for containers of cadmium-contaminated protective clothing, equipment, waste, scrap, or debris shall include at least the following information: DANGER CONTAINS CADMIUM MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AND KIDNEYS AVOID CREATING DUST (iii) Where feasible, installed cadmium products shall have a visible label or other indication that cadmium is present. (iv) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following information on shipping and storage containers containing cadmium, cadmium compounds, or cadmium-contaminated clothing, equipment, waste, scrap, or debris in lieu of the labeling requirements specified in paragraphs (m)(3)(i) and (m)(3)(ii) of this section: DANGER CONTAINS CADMIUM CANCER HAZARD AVOID CREATING DUST CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE (4) Employee information and training. (ii) Training shall be provided prior to or at the time of initial assignment to a job involving potential exposure to cadmium and at least annually thereafter. (iii) The employer shall make the training program understandable to the employee and shall assure that each employee is informed of the following: (A) The health hazards associated with cadmium exposure, with special attention to the information incorporated in appendix A to this section; (B) The quantity, location, manner of use, release, and storage of cadmium in the workplace and the specific nature of operations that could result in exposure to cadmium, especially exposures above the PEL; (C) The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job assignment; (D) The measures employees can take to protect themselves from exposure to cadmium, including modification of such habits as smoking and personal hygiene, and specific procedures the employer has implemented to protect employees from exposure to cadmium such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and the provision of personal protective equipment; (E) The purpose, proper selection, fitting, proper use, and limitations of respirators and protective clothing; (F) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program required by paragraph (l) of this section; (G) The contents of this section and its appendices, and, (H) The employee's rights of access to records under § 1926.33(g) (1) and (2). (iv) Additional access to information and training program and materials. (A) The employer shall make a copy of this section and its appendices readily available to all affected employees and shall provide a copy without cost if requested. (B) Upon request, the employer shall provide to the Assistant Secretary or the Director all materials relating to the employee information and the training program. (5) Multi-employer workplace. (n) Recordkeeping Exposure monitoring. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The monitoring date, shift, duration, air volume, and results in terms of an 8-hour TWA of each sample taken, and if cadmium is not detected, the detection level; (B) The name and job classification of all employees monitored and of all other employees whose exposures the monitoring result is intended to represent, including, where applicable, a description of how it was determined that the employee's monitoring result could be taken to represent other employee's exposures; (C) A description of the sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; (D) The type of respiratory protective device, if any, worn by the monitored employee and by any other employee whose exposure the monitoring result is intended to represent; (E) A notation of any other conditions that might have affected the monitoring results. (F) Any exposure monitoring or objective data that were used and the levels. (iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least thirty (30) years, in accordance with § 1910.1020 of this chapter. (iv) The employer shall also provide a copy of the results of an employee's air monitoring prescribed in paragraph (d) of this section to an industry trade association and to the employee's union, if any, or, if either of such associations or unions do not exist, to another comparable organization that is competent to maintain such records and is reasonably accessible to employers and employees in the industry. (2) Objective data for exemption from requirement for initial monitoring. (ii) The employer shall maintain the record for at least 30 years of the objective data relied upon. (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include at least the following information about the employee: (A) Name and description of duties; (B) A copy of the physician's written opinions and of the explanation sheets for biological monitoring results; (C) A copy of the medical history, and the results of any physical examination and all test results that are required to be provided by this section, including biological tests, X-rays, pulmonary function tests, etc., or that have been obtained to further evaluate any condition that might be related to cadmium exposure; (D) The employee's medical symptoms that might be related to exposure to cadmium; and (E) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by paragraph (l)(9) of this section. (iii) The employer shall assure that this record is maintained for the duration of employment plus thirty (30) years, in accordance with § 1910.1020 of this chapter. (iv) At the employee's request, the employer shall promptly provide a copy of the employee's medical record, or update as appropriate, to a medical doctor or a union specified by the employee. (4) Availability. (ii) Within 15 days after a request, the employer shall make an employee's medical records required to be kept by paragraph (n)(3) of this section available for examination and copying to the subject employee, to designated representatives, to anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee, and after the employee's death or incapacitation, to the employee's family members. (o) Observation of monitoring Employee observation. (2) Observation procedures. (p) [Reserved] (q) Appendices. Appendix A to § 1926.1127—Substance Safety Data Sheet Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix A are identical to those set forth in appendix A to § 1910.1027 of this chapter. Appendix B to § 1926.1127—Substance Technical Guidelines for Cadmium Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix B are identical to those set forth in appendix B to § 1910.1027 of this chapter. Appendix C to § 1926.1127 [Reserved] Appendix D to § 1926.1127—Occupational Health History Interview With Reference to Cadmium Exposure Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix D are identical to those set forth in appendix D to § 1910.1027 of this chapter. Appendix E to § 1926.1127—Cadmium in Workplace Atmospheres Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix E are identical to those set forth in appendix E to § 1910.1027 of this chapter. Appendix F to § 1926.1127—Nonmandatory Protocol for Biological Monitoring Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this appendix F are identical to those set forth in appendix F to § 1910.1027 of this chapter. [57 FR 42452, Sept. 14, 1992, as amended at 57 FR 49272, Oct. 30, 1992; 58 FR 21787, Apr. 23, 1993. Redesignated and amended at 59 FR 215, Jan. 3, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR 31433, 31434, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1298, Jan. 8, 1998; 70 FR 1144, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16675, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50192, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75589, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33612, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17895, Mar. 26, 2012; 84 FR 21597, May 14, 2019; 85 FR 8746, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1926.1128 Benzene. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1028 of this chapter. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1129 [Reserved] § 1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1044 of this chapter. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1145 Acrylonitrile. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1045 of this chapter. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1147 Ethylene oxide. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1047 of this chapter. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1148 Formaldehyde. Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this section are identical to those set forth at § 1910.1048 of this chapter. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996] § 1926.1152 Methylene chloride. Note: The requirements applicable to construction employment under this section are identical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1910.1052. [62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997] § 1926.1153 Respirable crystalline silica. (a) Scope and application. 3 (b) Definitions. Action level 3 Assistant Secretary Director Competent person Employee exposure High-efficiency particulate air [HEPA] filter Objective data Physician or other licensed health care professional [PLHCP] i.e. Respirable crystalline silica Specialist This section (c) Specified exposure control methods. Table 1—Specified Exposure Control Methods When Working With Materials Containing Crystalline Silica Equipment/task Engineering and work practice control methods Required respiratory protection and minimum assigned protection factor (APF) ≤4 hours/shift >4 hours/shift (i) Stationary masonry saws Use saw equipped with integrated water delivery system that continuously feeds water to the blade None None. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions (ii) Handheld power saws (any blade diameter) Use saw equipped with integrated water delivery system that continuously feeds water to the blade Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions: —When used outdoors None APF 10. —When used indoors or in an enclosed area APF 10 APF 10. (iii) Handheld power saws for cutting fiber-cement board (with blade diameter of 8 inches or less) For tasks performed outdoors only: Dust collector must provide the air flow recommended by the tool manufacturer, or greater, and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency (iv) Walk-behind saws Use saw equipped with integrated water delivery system that continuously feeds water to the blade Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions: —When used outdoors None None. —When used indoors or in an enclosed area APF 10 APF 10. (v) Drivable saws For tasks performed outdoors only: Use saw equipped with integrated water delivery system that continuously feeds water to the blade None None. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions (vi) Rig-mounted core saws or drills Use tool equipped with integrated water delivery system that supplies water to cutting surface None None. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions (vii) Handheld and stand-mounted drills (including impact and rotary hammer drills) Use drill equipped with commercially available shroud or cowling with dust collection system None None. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions Dust collector must provide the air flow recommended by the tool manufacturer, or greater, and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a filter-cleaning mechanism Use a HEPA-filtered vacuum when cleaning holes (viii) Dowel drilling rigs for concrete For tasks performed outdoors only: Use shroud around drill bit with a dust collection system. Dust collector must have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a filter-cleaning mechanism APF 10 APF 10. Use a HEPA-filtered vacuum when cleaning holes (ix) Vehicle-mounted drilling rigs for rock and concrete Use dust collection system with close capture hood or shroud around drill bit with a low-flow water spray to wet the dust at the discharge point from the dust collector None None. OR Operate from within an enclosed cab and use water for dust suppression on drill bit None None. (x) Jackhammers and handheld powered chipping tools Use tool with water delivery system that supplies a continuous stream or spray of water at the point of impact: —When used outdoors None APF 10. —When used indoors or in an enclosed area APF 10 APF 10. OR Use tool equipped with commercially available shroud and dust collection system Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions Dust collector must provide the air flow recommended by the tool manufacturer, or greater, and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a filter-cleaning mechanism: —When used outdoors None APF 10. —When used indoors or in an enclosed area APF 10 APF 10. (xi) Handheld grinders for mortar removal ( i.e. Use grinder equipped with commercially available shroud and dust collection system APF 10 APF 25. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions Dust collector must provide 25 cubic feet per minute (cfm) or greater of airflow per inch of wheel diameter and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a cyclonic pre-separator or filter-cleaning mechanism (xii) Handheld grinders for uses other than mortar removal For tasks performed outdoors only: None None. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions OR Use grinder equipped with commercially available shroud and dust collection system Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions Dust collector must provide 25 cubic feet per minute (cfm) or greater of airflow per inch of wheel diameter and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a cyclonic pre-separator or filter-cleaning mechanism: —When used outdoors None None. —When used indoors or in an enclosed area None APF 10. (xiii) Walk-behind milling machines and floor grinders Use machine equipped with integrated water delivery system that continuously feeds water to the cutting surface None None. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions OR Use machine equipped with dust collection system recommended by the manufacturer None None. Operate and maintain tool in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions Dust collector must provide the air flow recommended by the manufacturer, or greater, and have a filter with 99% or greater efficiency and a filter-cleaning mechanism When used indoors or in an enclosed area, use a HEPA-filtered vacuum to remove loose dust in between passes (xiv) Small drivable milling machines (less than half-lane) Use a machine equipped with supplemental water sprays designed to suppress dust. Water must be combined with a surfactant None None. Operate and maintain machine to minimize dust emissions (xv) Large drivable milling machines (half-lane and larger) For cuts of any depth on asphalt only: None None. Operate and maintain machine to minimize dust emissions For cuts of four inches in depth or less on any substrate: Use machine equipped with exhaust ventilation on drum enclosure and supplemental water sprays designed to suppress dust None None. Operate and maintain machine to minimize dust emissions OR Use a machine equipped with supplemental water spray designed to suppress dust. Water must be combined with a surfactant None None. Operate and maintain machine to minimize dust emissions (xvi) Crushing machines Use equipment designed to deliver water spray or mist for dust suppression at crusher and other points where dust is generated ( e.g. None None. Operate and maintain machine in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize dust emissions Use a ventilated booth that provides fresh, climate-controlled air to the operator, or a remote control station (xvii) Heavy equipment and utility vehicles used to abrade or fracture silica-containing materials ( e.g. Operate equipment from within an enclosed cab None None. (xviii) Heavy equipment and utility vehicles for tasks such as grading and excavating but not including: Demolishing, abrading, or fracturing silica-containing materials Apply water and/or dust suppressants as necessary to minimize dust emissions None None. When the equipment operator is the only employee engaged in the task, operate equipment from within an enclosed cab None None. (2) When implementing the control measures specified in Table 1, each employer shall: (i) For tasks performed indoors or in enclosed areas, provide a means of exhaust as needed to minimize the accumulation of visible airborne dust; (ii) For tasks performed using wet methods, apply water at flow rates sufficient to minimize release of visible dust; (iii) For measures implemented that include an enclosed cab or booth, ensure that the enclosed cab or booth: (A) Is maintained as free as practicable from settled dust; (B) Has door seals and closing mechanisms that work properly; (C) Has gaskets and seals that are in good condition and working properly; (D) Is under positive pressure maintained through continuous delivery of fresh air; (E) Has intake air that is filtered through a filter that is 95% efficient in the 0.3-10.0 µm range ( e.g. (F) Has heating and cooling capabilities. (3) Where an employee performs more than one task on Table 1 during the course of a shift, and the total duration of all tasks combined is more than four hours, the required respiratory protection for each task is the respiratory protection specified for more than four hours per shift. If the total duration of all tasks on Table 1 combined is less than four hours, the required respiratory protection for each task is the respiratory protection specified for less than four hours per shift. (d) Alternative exposure control methods. (1) Permissible exposure limit (PEL). 3 (2) Exposure assessment General. (ii) Performance option. (iii) Scheduled monitoring option. (B) If initial monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level, the employer may discontinue monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring. (C) Where the most recent exposure monitoring indicates that employee exposures are at or above the action level but at or below the PEL, the employer shall repeat such monitoring within six months of the most recent monitoring. (D) Where the most recent exposure monitoring indicates that employee exposures are above the PEL, the employer shall repeat such monitoring within three months of the most recent monitoring. (E) Where the most recent (non-initial) exposure monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level, the employer shall repeat such monitoring within six months of the most recent monitoring until two consecutive measurements, taken seven or more days apart, are below the action level, at which time the employer may discontinue monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring, except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(2)(iv) of this section. (iv) Reassessment of exposures. (v) Methods of sample analysis. (vi) Employee notification of assessment results. (B) Whenever an exposure assessment indicates that employee exposure is above the PEL, the employer shall describe in the written notification the corrective action being taken to reduce employee exposure to or below the PEL. (vii) Observation of monitoring. (B) When observation of monitoring requires entry into an area where the use of protective clothing or equipment is required for any workplace hazard, the employer shall provide the observer with protective clothing and equipment at no cost and shall ensure that the observer uses such clothing and equipment. (3) Methods of compliance Engineering and work practice controls. (ii) Abrasive blasting. (e) Respiratory protection General. (i) Where specified by Table 1 of paragraph (c) of this section; or (ii) For tasks not listed in Table 1, or where the employer does not fully and properly implement the engineering controls, work practices, and respiratory protection described in Table 1: (A) Where exposures exceed the PEL during periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering and work practice controls; (B) Where exposures exceed the PEL during tasks, such as certain maintenance and repair tasks, for which engineering and work practice controls are not feasible; and (C) During tasks for which an employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work practice controls and such controls are not sufficient to reduce exposures to or below the PEL. (2) Respiratory protection program. (3) Specified exposure control methods. (f) Housekeeping. (2) The employer shall not allow compressed air to be used to clean clothing or surfaces where such activity could contribute to employee exposure to respirable crystalline silica unless: (i) The compressed air is used in conjunction with a ventilation system that effectively captures the dust cloud created by the compressed air; or (ii) No alternative method is feasible. (g) Written exposure control plan. (i) A description of the tasks in the workplace that involve exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (ii) A description of the engineering controls, work practices, and respiratory protection used to limit employee exposure to respirable crystalline silica for each task; (iii) A description of the housekeeping measures used to limit employee exposure to respirable crystalline silica; and (iv) A description of the procedures used to restrict access to work areas, when necessary, to minimize the number of employees exposed to respirable crystalline silica and their level of exposure, including exposures generated by other employers or sole proprietors. (2) The employer shall review and evaluate the effectiveness of the written exposure control plan at least annually and update it as necessary. (3) The employer shall make the written exposure control plan readily available for examination and copying, upon request, to each employee covered by this section, their designated representatives, the Assistant Secretary and the Director. (4) The employer shall designate a competent person to make frequent and regular inspections of job sites, materials, and equipment to implement the written exposure control plan. (h) Medical surveillance General. (ii) The employer shall ensure that all medical examinations and procedures required by this section are performed by a PLHCP as defined in paragraph (b) of this section. (2) Initial examination. (i) A medical and work history, with emphasis on: Past, present, and anticipated exposure to respirable crystalline silica, dust, and other agents affecting the respiratory system; any history of respiratory system dysfunction, including signs and symptoms of respiratory disease ( e.g. (ii) A physical examination with special emphasis on the respiratory system; (iii) A chest X-ray (a single posteroanterior radiographic projection or radiograph of the chest at full inspiration recorded on either film (no less than 14 x 17 inches and no more than 16 x 17 inches) or digital radiography systems), interpreted and classified according to the International Labour Office (ILO) International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses by a NIOSH-certified B Reader; (iv) A pulmonary function test to include forced vital capacity (FVC) and forced expiratory volume in one second (FEV 1 1 (v) Testing for latent tuberculosis infection; and (vi) Any other tests deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. (3) Periodic examinations. (4) Information provided to the PLHCP. (i) A description of the employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (ii) The employee's former, current, and anticipated levels of occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (iii) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used or will use that equipment; and (iv) Information from records of employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the employee and currently within the control of the employer. (5) PLHCP's written medical report for the employee. (i) A statement indicating the results of the medical examination, including any medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to respirable crystalline silica and any medical conditions that require further evaluation or treatment; (ii) Any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators; (iii) Any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica; and (iv) A statement that the employee should be examined by a specialist (pursuant to paragraph (h)(7) of this section) if the chest X-ray provided in accordance with this section is classified as 1/0 or higher by the B Reader, or if referral to a specialist is otherwise deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. (6) PLHCP's written medical opinion for the employer. (A) The date of the examination; (B) A statement that the examination has met the requirements of this section; and (C) Any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators. (ii) If the employee provides written authorization, the written opinion shall also contain either or both of the following: (A) Any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (B) A statement that the employee should be examined by a specialist (pursuant to paragraph (h)(7) of this section) if the chest X-ray provided in accordance with this section is classified as 1/0 or higher by the B Reader, or if referral to a specialist is otherwise deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. (iii) The employer shall ensure that each employee receives a copy of the written medical opinion described in paragraph (h)(6)(i) and (ii) of this section within 30 days of each medical examination performed. (7) Additional examinations. (ii) The employer shall ensure that the examining specialist is provided with all of the information that the employer is obligated to provide to the PLHCP in accordance with paragraph (h)(4) of this section. (iii) The employer shall ensure that the specialist explains to the employee the results of the medical examination and provides each employee with a written medical report within 30 days of the examination. The written report shall meet the requirements of paragraph (h)(5) (except paragraph (h)(5)(iv)) of this section. (iv) The employer shall obtain a written opinion from the specialist within 30 days of the medical examination. The written opinion shall meet the requirements of paragraph (h)(6) (except paragraph (h)(6)(i)(B) and (ii)(B)) of this section. (i) Communication of respirable crystalline silica hazards to employees Hazard communication. (2) Employee information and training. (A) The health hazards associated with exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (B) Specific tasks in the workplace that could result in exposure to respirable crystalline silica; (C) Specific measures the employer has implemented to protect employees from exposure to respirable crystalline silica, including engineering controls, work practices, and respirators to be used; (D) The contents of this section; (E) The identity of the competent person designated by the employer in accordance with paragraph (g)(4) of this section; and (F) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program required by paragraph (h) of this section. (ii) The employer shall make a copy of this section readily available without cost to each employee covered by this section. (j) Recordkeeping Air monitoring data. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The date of measurement for each sample taken; (B) The task monitored; (C) Sampling and analytical methods used; (D) Number, duration, and results of samples taken; (E) Identity of the laboratory that performed the analysis; (F) Type of personal protective equipment, such as respirators, worn by the employees monitored; and (G) Name and job classification of all employees represented by the monitoring, indicating which employees were actually monitored. (iii) The employer shall ensure that exposure records are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (2) Objective data. (ii) This record shall include at least the following information: (A) The crystalline silica-containing material in question; (B) The source of the objective data; (C) The testing protocol and results of testing; (D) A description of the process, task, or activity on which the objective data were based; and (E) Other data relevant to the process, task, activity, material, or exposures on which the objective data were based. (iii) The employer shall ensure that objective data are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (3) Medical surveillance. (ii) The record shall include the following information about the employee: (A) Name; (B) A copy of the PLHCPs' and specialists' written medical opinions; and (C) A copy of the information provided to the PLHCPs and specialists. (iii) The employer shall ensure that medical records are maintained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. (k) Dates. (2) All obligations of this section, except requirements for methods of sample analysis in paragraph (d)(2)(v), shall commence June 23, 2017. (3) Requirements for methods of sample analysis in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section commence June 23, 2018. Appendix A to § 1926.1153—Methods of Sample Analysis This This appendix specifies the procedures for analyzing air samples for respirable crystalline silica, as well as the quality control procedures that employers must ensure that laboratories use when performing an analysis required under 29 CFR 1926.1153 (d)(2)(v). Employers must ensure that such a laboratory: 1. Evaluates all samples using the procedures specified in one of the following analytical methods: OSHA ID-142; NMAM 7500; NMAM 7602; NMAM 7603; MSHA P-2; or MSHA P-7; 2. Is accredited to ANS/ISO/IEC Standard 17025:2005 with respect to crystalline silica analyses by a body that is compliant with ISO/IEC Standard 17011:2004 for implementation of quality assessment programs; 3. Uses the most current National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) or NIST traceable standards for instrument calibration or instrument calibration verification; 4. Implements an internal quality control (QC) program that evaluates analytical uncertainty and provides employers with estimates of sampling and analytical error; 5. Characterizes the sample material by identifying polymorphs of respirable crystalline silica present, identifies the presence of any interfering compounds that might affect the analysis, and makes any corrections necessary in order to obtain accurate sample analysis; and 6. Analyzes quantitatively for crystalline silica only after confirming that the sample matrix is free of uncorrectable analytical interferences, corrects for analytical interferences, and uses a method that meets the following performance specifications: 6.1 6.2 6.3 Appendix B to § 1926.1153—Medical Surveillance Guidelines Introduction The purpose of this Appendix is to provide medical information and recommendations to aid physicians and other licensed health care professionals (PLHCPs) regarding compliance with the medical surveillance provisions of the respirable crystalline silica standard (29 CFR 1926.1153). Appendix B is for informational and guidance purposes only and none of the statements in Appendix B should be construed as imposing a mandatory requirement on employers that is not otherwise imposed by the standard. Medical screening and surveillance allow for early identification of exposure-related health effects in individual employee and groups of employees, so that actions can be taken to both avoid further exposure and prevent or address adverse health outcomes. Silica-related diseases can be fatal, encompass a variety of target organs, and may have public health consequences when considering the increased risk of a latent tuberculosis (TB) infection becoming active. Thus, medical surveillance of silica-exposed employees requires that PLHCPs have a thorough knowledge of silica-related health effects. This Appendix is divided into seven sections. Section 1 reviews silica-related diseases, medical responses, and public health responses. Section 2 outlines the components of the medical surveillance program for employees exposed to silica. Section 3 describes the roles and responsibilities of the PLHCP implementing the program and of other medical specialists and public health professionals. Section 4 provides a discussion of considerations, including confidentiality. Section 5 provides a list of additional resources and Section 6 lists references. Section 7 provides sample forms for the written medical report for the employee, the written medical opinion for the employer and the written authorization. 1. Recognition of Silica-Related Diseases 1.1. Overview. 2 et al. Silicosis is an irreversible, often disabling, and sometimes fatal fibrotic lung disease. Progression of silicosis can occur despite removal from further exposure. Diagnosis of silicosis requires a history of exposure to silica and radiologic findings characteristic of silica exposure. Three different presentations of silicosis (chronic, accelerated, and acute) have been defined. Accelerated and acute silicosis are much less common than chronic silicosis. However, it is critical to recognize all cases of accelerated and acute silicosis because these are life-threatening illnesses and because they are caused by substantial overexposures to respirable crystalline silica. Although any case of silicosis indicates a breakdown in prevention, a case of acute or accelerated silicosis implies current high exposure and a very marked breakdown in prevention. In addition to silicosis, employees exposed to respirable crystalline silica, especially those with accelerated or acute silicosis, are at increased risks of contracting active TB and other infections (ATS 1997; Rees and Murray 2007). Exposure to respirable crystalline silica also increases an employee's risk of developing lung cancer, and the higher the cumulative exposure, the higher the risk (Steenland et al. 1.2. Chronic Silicosis. 1.2.1. Symptoms—shortness of breath and cough, although employees may not notice any symptoms early in the disease. Constitutional symptoms, such as fever, loss of appetite and fatigue, may indicate other diseases associated with silica exposure, such as TB infection or lung cancer. Employees with these symptoms should immediately receive further evaluation and treatment. 1.2.2. Physical Examination—may be normal or disclose dry rales or rhonchi on lung auscultation. 1.2.3. Spirometry—may be normal or may show only a mild restrictive or obstructive pattern. 1.2.4. Chest X-ray—classic findings are small, rounded opacities in the upper lung fields bilaterally. However, small irregular opacities and opacities in other lung areas can also occur. Rarely, “eggshell calcifications” in the hilar and mediastinal lymph nodes are seen. 1.2.5. Clinical Course—chronic silicosis in most cases is a slowly progressive disease. Under the respirable crystalline silica standard, the PLHCP is to recommend that employees with a 1/0 category X-ray be referred to an American Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine. The PLHCP and/or Specialist should counsel employees regarding work practices and personal habits that could affect employees' respiratory health. 1.3. Accelerated Silicosis. 1.3.1. Symptoms—shortness of breath, cough, and sometimes sputum production. Employees with exposure to respirable crystalline silica, and especially those with accelerated silicosis, are at high risk for activation of TB infections, atypical mycobacterial infections, and fungal superinfections. Constitutional symptoms, such as fever, weight loss, hemoptysis (coughing up blood), and fatigue may herald one of these infections or the onset of lung cancer. 1.3.2. Physical Examination—rales, rhonchi, or other abnormal lung findings in relation to illnesses present. Clubbing of the digits, signs of heart failure, and cor pulmonale may be present in severe lung disease. 1.3.3. Spirometry—restrictive or mixed restrictive/obstructive pattern. 1.3.4. Chest X-ray—small rounded and/or irregular opacities bilaterally. Large opacities and lung abscesses may indicate infections, lung cancer, or progression to complicated silicosis, also termed progressive massive fibrosis. 1.3.5. Clinical Course—accelerated silicosis has a rapid, severe course. Under the respirable crystalline silica standard, the PLHCP can recommend referral to a Board Certified Specialist in either Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine, as deemed appropriate, and referral to a Specialist is recommended whenever the diagnosis of accelerated silicosis is being considered. 1.4. Acute Silicosis. 1.4.1. Symptoms—sudden, progressive, and severe shortness of breath. Constitutional symptoms are frequently present and include fever, weight loss, fatigue, productive cough, hemoptysis (coughing up blood), and pleuritic chest pain. 1.4.2. Physical Examination—dyspnea at rest, cyanosis, decreased breath sounds, inspiratory rales, clubbing of the digits, and fever. 1.4.3. Spirometry—restrictive or mixed restrictive/obstructive pattern. 1.4.4. Chest X-ray—diffuse haziness of the lungs bilaterally early in the disease. As the disease progresses, the “ground glass” appearance of interstitial fibrosis will appear. 1.4.5. Clinical Course—employees with acute silicosis are at especially high risk of TB activation, nontuberculous mycobacterial infections, and fungal superinfections. Acute silicosis is immediately life-threatening. The employee should be urgently referred to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine for evaluation and treatment. Although any case of silicosis indicates a breakdown in prevention, a case of acute or accelerated silicosis implies a profoundly high level of silica exposure and may mean that other employees are currently exposed to dangerous levels of silica. 1.5. COPD. See et al. 1.6. Renal and Immune System. et al. 1.7. TB and Other Infections. See Mycobacterium avium-intracellulare Mycobacterium kansaii. 1.8. Lung Cancer. et al. 2. Medical Surveillance PLHCPs who manage silica medical surveillance programs should have a thorough understanding of the many silica-related diseases and health effects outlined in Section 1 of this Appendix. At each clinical encounter, the PLHCP should consider silica-related health outcomes, with particular vigilance for acute and accelerated silicosis. In this Section, the required components of medical surveillance under the respirable crystalline silica standard are reviewed, along with additional guidance and recommendations for PLHCPs performing medical surveillance examinations for silica-exposed employees. 2.1. History. 2.1.1. The respirable crystalline silica standard requires the following: A medical and work history, with emphasis on: Past, present, and anticipated exposure to respirable crystalline silica, dust, and other agents affecting the respiratory system; any history of respiratory system dysfunction, including signs and symptoms of respiratory disease ( e.g. 2.1.2. Further, the employer must provide the PLHCP with the following information: 2.1.2.1. A description of the employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; 2.1.2.2. The employee's former, current, and anticipated levels of occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; 2.1.2.3. A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used or will use that equipment; and 2.1.2.4. Information from records of employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the employee and currently within the control of the employer. 2.1.3. Additional guidance and recommendations: A history is particularly important both in the initial evaluation and in periodic examinations. Information on past and current medical conditions (particularly a history of kidney disease, cardiac disease, connective tissue disease, and other immune diseases), medications, hospitalizations and surgeries may uncover health risks, such as immune suppression, that could put an employee at increased health risk from exposure to silica. This information is important when counseling the employee on risks and safe work practices related to silica exposure. 2.2. Physical Examination. 2.2.1. The respirable crystalline silica standard requires the following: A physical examination, with special emphasis on the respiratory system. The physical examination must be performed at the initial examination and every three years thereafter. 2.2.2. Additional guidance and recommendations: Elements of the physical examination that can assist the PHLCP include: An examination of the cardiac system, an extremity examination (for clubbing, cyanosis, edema, or joint abnormalities), and an examination of other pertinent organ systems identified during the history. 2.3. TB Testing. 2.3.1. The respirable crystalline silica standard requires the following: Baseline testing for TB on initial examination. 2.3.2. Additional guidance and recommendations: 2.3.2.1. Current CDC guidelines ( See 2.3.2.2. PLHCPs may use alternative TB tests, such as interferon-γ release assays (IGRAs), if sensitivity and specificity are comparable to TST (Mazurek et al. et al. 2.3.2.3. The silica standard allows the PLHCP to order additional tests or test at a greater frequency than required by the standard, if deemed appropriate. Therefore, PLHCPs might perform periodic ( e.g. See 2.3.2.4. Employees with positive TB tests and those with indeterminate test results should be referred to the appropriate agency or specialist, depending on the test results and clinical picture. Agencies, such as local public health departments, or specialists, such as a pulmonary or infectious disease specialist, may be the appropriate referral. Active TB is a nationally notifiable disease. PLHCPs should be aware of the reporting requirements for their region. All States have TB Control Offices that can be contacted for further information. ( See 2.3.2.5. The following public health principles are key to TB control in the U.S. (ATS-CDC-IDSA 2005): (1) (2) (3) (4) 2.4. Pulmonary Function Testing. 2.4.1. The respirable crystalline silica standard requires the following: Pulmonary function testing must be performed on the initial examination and every three years thereafter. The required pulmonary function test is spirometry and must include forced vital capacity (FVC), forced expiratory volume in one second (FEV 1 1 2.4.2. Additional guidance and recommendations: Spirometry provides information about individual respiratory status and can be used to track an employee's respiratory status over time or as a surveillance tool to follow individual and group respiratory function. For quality results, the ATS and the American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine (ACOEM) recommend use of the third National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES III) values, and ATS publishes recommendations for spirometry equipment (Miller et al. et al. Spirometry Testing in Occupational Health Programs: Best Practices for Healthcare Professionals See 2.5. Chest X-ray. 2.5.1. The respirable crystalline silica standard requires the following: A single posteroanterior (PA) radiographic projection or radiograph of the chest at full inspiration recorded on either film (no less than 14 x 17 inches and no more than 16 x 17 inches) or digital radiography systems. A chest X-ray must be performed on the initial examination and every three years thereafter. The chest X-ray must be interpreted and classified according to the International Labour Office (ILO) International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses by a NIOSH-certified B Reader. Chest radiography is necessary to diagnose silicosis, monitor the progression of silicosis, and identify associated conditions such as TB. If the B reading indicates small opacities in a profusion of 1/0 or higher, the employee is to receive a recommendation for referral to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine. 2.5.2. Additional guidance and recommendations: Medical imaging has largely transitioned from conventional film-based radiography to digital radiography systems. The ILO Guidelines for the Classification of Pneumoconioses has historically provided film-based chest radiography as a referent standard for comparison to individual exams. However, in 2011, the ILO revised the guidelines to include a digital set of referent standards that were derived from the prior film-based standards. To assist in assuring that digitally-acquired radiographs are at least as safe and effective as film radiographs, NIOSH has prepared guidelines, based upon accepted contemporary professional recommendations ( See et al. et al. See 2.6. Other Testing. e.g. 3. Roles and Responsibilities 3.1. PLHCP. i.e. Once the medical surveillance examination is completed, the employer must ensure that the PLHCP explains to the employee the results of the medical examination and provides the employee with a written medical report within 30 days of the examination. The written medical report must contain a statement indicating the results of the medical examination, including any medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to respirable crystalline silica and any medical conditions that require further evaluation or treatment. In addition, the PLHCP's written medical report must include any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators, any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica, and a statement that the employee should be examined by a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational medicine if the chest X-ray is classified as 1/0 or higher by the B Reader, or if referral to a Specialist is otherwise deemed appropriate by the PLHCP. The PLHCP should discuss all findings and test results and any recommendations regarding the employee's health, worksite safety and health practices, and medical referrals for further evaluation, if indicated. In addition, it is suggested that the PLHCP offer to provide the employee with a complete copy of their examination and test results, as some employees may want this information for their own records or to provide to their personal physician or a future PLHCP. Employees are entitled to access their medical records. Under the respirable crystalline silica standard, the employer must ensure that the PLHCP provides the employer with a written medical opinion within 30 days of the employee examination, and that the employee also gets a copy of the written medical opinion for the employer within 30 days. The PLHCP may choose to directly provide the employee a copy of the written medical opinion. This can be particularly helpful to employees, such as construction employees, who may change employers frequently. The written medical opinion can be used by the employee as proof of up-to-date medical surveillance. The following lists the elements of the written medical report for the employee and written medical opinion for the employer. (Sample forms for the written medical report for the employee, the written medical opinion for the employer, and the written authorization are provided in Section 7 of this Appendix.) 3.1.1. The written medical report for the employee must include the following information: 3.1.1.1. A statement indicating the results of the medical examination, including any medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to respirable crystalline silica and any medical conditions that require further evaluation or treatment; 3.1.1.2. Any recommended limitations upon the employee's use of a respirator; 3.1.1.3. Any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica; and 3.1.1.4. A statement that the employee should be examined by a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine, where the standard requires or where the PLHCP has determined such a referral is necessary. The standard requires referral to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine for a chest X-ray B reading indicating small opacities in a profusion of 1/0 or higher, or if the PHLCP determines that referral to a Specialist is necessary for other silica-related findings. 3.1.2. The PLHCP's written medical opinion for the employer must include only the following information: 3.1.2.1. The date of the examination; 3.1.2.2. A statement that the examination has met the requirements of this section; and 3.1.2.3. Any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators. 3.1.2.4. If the employee provides the PLHCP with written authorization, the written opinion for the employer shall also contain either or both of the following: (1) (2) 3.1.2.5. In addition to the above referral for abnormal chest X-ray, the PLHCP may refer an employee to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine for other findings of concern during the medical surveillance examination if these findings are potentially related to silica exposure. 3.1.2.6. Although the respirable crystalline silica standard requires the employer to ensure that the PLHCP explains the results of the medical examination to the employee, the standard does not mandate how this should be done. The written medical opinion for the employer could contain a statement that the PLHCP has explained the results of the medical examination to the employee. 3.2. Medical Specialists. 3.2.1. The employer must provide the following information to the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine: 3.2.1.1. A description of the employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; 3.2.1.2. The employee's former, current, and anticipated levels of occupational exposure to respirable crystalline silica; 3.2.1.3. A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used or will use that equipment; and 3.2.1.4. Information from records of employment-related medical examinations previously provided to the employee and currently within the control of the employer. 3.2.2. The PLHCP should make certain that, with written authorization from the employee, the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine has any other pertinent medical and occupational information necessary for the specialist's evaluation of the employee's condition. 3.2.3. Once the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine has evaluated the employee, the employer must ensure that the Specialist explains to the employee the results of the medical examination and provides the employee with a written medical report within 30 days of the examination. The employer must also ensure that the Specialist provides the employer with a written medical opinion within 30 days of the employee examination. (Sample forms for the written medical report for the employee, the written medical opinion for the employer and the written authorization are provided in Section 7 of this Appendix.) 3.2.4. The Specialist's written medical report for the employee must include the following information: 3.2.4.1. A statement indicating the results of the medical examination, including any medical condition(s) that would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to respirable crystalline silica and any medical conditions that require further evaluation or treatment; 3.2.4.2. Any recommended limitations upon the employee's use of a respirator; and 3.2.4.3. Any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica. 3.2.5. The Specialist's written medical opinion for the employer must include the following information: 3.2.5.1. The date of the examination; and 3.2.5.2. Any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators. 3.2.5.3. If the employee provides the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine with written authorization, the written medical opinion for the employer shall also contain any recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica. 3.2.5.4. Although the respirable crystalline silica standard requires the employer to ensure that the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine explains the results of the medical examination to the employee, the standard does not mandate how this should be done. The written medical opinion for the employer could contain a statement that the Specialist has explained the results of the medical examination to the employee. 3.2.6. After evaluating the employee, the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine should provide feedback to the PLHCP as appropriate, depending on the reason for the referral. OSHA believes that because the PLHCP has the primary relationship with the employer and employee, the Specialist may want to communicate his or her findings to the PLHCP and have the PLHCP simply update the original medical report for the employee and medical opinion for the employer. This is permitted under the standard, so long as all requirements and time deadlines are met. 3.3. Public Health Professionals. See 4. Confidentiality and Other Considerations The information that is provided from the PLHCP to the employee and employer under the medical surveillance section of OSHA's respirable crystalline silica standard differs from that of medical surveillance requirements in previous OSHA standards. The standard requires two separate written communications, a written medical report for the employee and a written medical opinion for the employer. The confidentiality requirements for the written medical opinion are more stringent than in past standards. For example, the information the PLHCP can (and must) include in his or her written medical opinion for the employer is limited to: The date of the examination, a statement that the examination has met the requirements of this section, and any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators. If the employee provides written authorization for the disclosure of any limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica, then the PLHCP can (and must) include that information in the written medical opinion for the employer as well. Likewise, with the employee's written authorization, the PLHCP can (and must) disclose the PLHCP's referral recommendation (if any) as part of the written medical opinion for the employer. However, the opinion to the employer must not include information regarding recommended limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica or any referral recommendations without the employee's written authorization. The standard also places limitations on the information that the Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine can provide to the employer without the employee's written authorization. The Specialist's written medical opinion for the employer, like the PLHCP's opinion, is limited to (and must contain): The date of the examination and any recommended limitations on the employee's use of respirators. If the employee provides written authorization, the written medical opinion can (and must) also contain any limitations on the employee's exposure to respirable crystalline silica. The PLHCP should discuss the implication of signing or not signing the authorization with the employee (in a manner and language that he or she understands) so that the employee can make an informed decision regarding the written authorization and its consequences. The discussion should include the risk of ongoing silica exposure, personal risk factors, risk of disease progression, and possible health and economic consequences. For instance, written authorization is required for a PLHCP to advise an employer that an employee should be referred to a Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine for evaluation of an abnormal chest X-ray (B-reading 1/0 or greater). If an employee does not sign an authorization, then the employer will not know and cannot facilitate the referral to a Specialist and is not required to pay for the Specialist's examination. In the rare case where an employee is diagnosed with acute or accelerated silicosis, co-workers are likely to be at significant risk of developing those diseases as a result of inadequate controls in the workplace. In this case, the PLHCP and/or Specialist should explain this concern to the affected employee and make a determined effort to obtain written authorization from the employee so that the PLHCP and/or Specialist can contact the employer. Finally, without written authorization from the employee, the PLHCP and/or Board Certified Specialist in Pulmonary Disease or Occupational Medicine cannot provide feedback to an employer regarding control of workplace silica exposure, at least in relation to an individual employee. However, the regulation does not prohibit a PLHCP and/or Specialist from providing an employer with general recommendations regarding exposure controls and prevention programs in relation to silica exposure and silica-related illnesses, based on the information that the PLHCP receives from the employer such as employees' duties and exposure levels. Recommendations may include increased frequency of medical surveillance examinations, additional medical surveillance components, engineering and work practice controls, exposure monitoring and personal protective equipment. For instance, more frequent medical surveillance examinations may be a recommendation to employers for employees who do abrasive blasting with silica because of the high exposures associated with that operation. ACOEM's Code of Ethics and discussion is a good resource to guide PLHCPs regarding the issues discussed in this section ( See 5. Resources 5.1. American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine (ACOEM): ACOEM Code of Ethics. Accessed at: http://www.acoem.org/codeofconduct.aspx Raymond, L.W. and Wintermeyer, S. (2006) ACOEM evidenced-based statement on medical surveillance of silica-exposed workers: Medical surveillance of workers exposed to crystalline silica. J Occup Environ Med 5.2. Center for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) Tuberculosis Web page: http://www.cdc.gov/tb/default.htm State TB Control Offices Web page: http://www.cdc.gov/tb/links/tboffices.htm Tuberculosis Laws and Policies Web page: http://www.cdc.gov/tb/programs/laws/default.htm CDC. (2013). Latent Tuberculosis Infection: A Guide for Primary Health Care Providers. Accessed at: http://www.cdc.gov/tb/publications/ltbi/pdf/targetedltbi.pdf 5.3. International Labour Organization International Labour Office (ILO). (2011) Guidelines for the use of the ILO International Classification of Radiographs of Pneumoconioses, Revised edition 2011. Occupational Safety and Health Series No. 22: http://www.ilo.org/safework/info/publications/WCMS_168260/lang-en/index.htm 5.4. National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) NIOSH B Reader Program Web page. (Information on interpretation of X-rays for silicosis and a list of certified B-readers). Accessed at: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/chestradiography/breader-info.html NIOSH Guideline (2011). Application of Digital Radiography for the Detection and Classification of Pneumoconiosis. NIOSH publication number 2011-198. Accessed at: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/2011-198/ NIOSH Hazard Review (2002), Health Effects of Occupational Exposure to Respirable Crystalline Silica. NIOSH publication number 2002-129: Accessed at http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/2002-129/ NIOSH Health Hazard Evaluations Programs. (Information on the NIOSH Health Hazard Evaluation (HHE) program, how to request an HHE and how to look up an HHE report). Accessed at: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/hhe/ 5.5. National Industrial Sand Association: Occupational Health Program for Exposure to Crystalline Silica in the Industrial Sand Industry. National Industrial Sand Association, 2nd ed. 2010. Can be ordered at: http://www.sand.org/silica-occupational-health-program 5.6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Contacting OSHA: http://www.osha.gov/html/Feed_Back.html OSHA's Clinicians Web page. (OSHA resources, regulations and links to help clinicians navigate OSHA's Web site and aid clinicians in caring for workers.) Accessed at: http://www.osha.gov/dts/oom/clinicians/index.html OSHA's Safety and Health Topics Web page on Silica. Accessed at: http://www.osha.gov/dsg/topics/silicacrystalline/index.html OSHA (2013). Spirometry Testing in Occupational Health Programs: Best Practices for Healthcare Professionals. (OSHA 3637-03 2013). Accessed at: http://www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3637.pdf OSHA/NIOSH (2011). Spirometry: OSHA/NIOSH Spirometry InfoSheet (OSHA 3415-1-11). (Provides guidance to employers). Accessed at http://www.osha.gov/Publications/osha3415.pdf OSHA/NIOSH (2011) Spirometry: OSHA/NIOSH Spirometry Worker Info. (OSHA 3418-3-11). Accessed at http://www.osha.gov/Publications/osha3418.pdf 5.7. Other Steenland, K. and Ward E. (2014). Silica: A lung carcinogen. CA Cancer J Clin 6. References American Thoracic Society (ATS). Medical Section of the American Lung Association (1997). Adverse effects of crystalline silica exposure. Am J Respir Crit Care Med American Thoracic Society (ATS), Centers for Disease Control (CDC), Infectious Diseases Society of America (IDSA) (2005). Controlling Tuberculosis in the United States. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report (MMWR) http://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/rr5412a1.htm Brown, T. (2009). Silica exposure, smoking, silicosis and lung cancer—complex interactions. Occupational Medicine Halldin, C.N., Petsonk, E.L., and Laney, A.S. (2014). Validation of the International Labour Office digitized standard images for recognition and classification of radiographs of pneumoconiosis. Acad Radiol International Agency for Research on Cancer. (2012). Monographs on the evaluation of carcinogenic risks to humans: Arsenic, Metals, Fibers, and Dusts Silica Dust, Crystalline, in the Form of Quartz or Cristobalite. A Review of Human Carcinogens. Volume 100 C. Geneva, Switzerland: World Health Organization. Jalloul, A.S. and Banks D.E. (2007). Chapter 23. The health effects of silica exposure. In: Rom, W.N. and Markowitz, S.B. (Eds). Environmental and Occupational Medicine, 4th edition. Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins, Philadelphia, 365-387. Kramer, M.R., Blanc, P.D., Fireman, E., Amital, A., Guber, A., Rahman, N.A., and Shitrit, D. (2012). Artifical stone silicosis: Disease resurgence among artificial stone workers. Chest Laney, A.S., Petsonk, E.L., and Attfield, M.D. (2011). Intramodality and intermodality comparisons of storage phosphor computed radiography and conventional film-screen radiography in the recognition of small pneumonconiotic opacities. Chest Liu, Y., Steenland, K., Rong, Y., Hnizdo, E., Huang, X., Zhang, H., Shi, T., Sun, Y., Wu, T., and Chen, W. (2013). Exposure-response analysis and risk assessment for lung cancer in relationship to silica exposure: A 44-year cohort study of 34,018 workers. Am J Epi Liu, Y., Rong, Y., Steenland, K., Christiani, D.C., Huang, X., Wu, T., and Chen, W. (2014). Long-term exposure to crystalline silica and risk of heart disease mortality. Epidemiology Mazurek, G.H., Jereb, J., Vernon, A., LoBue, P., Goldberg, S., Castro, K. (2010). Updated guidelines for using interferon gamma release assays to detect Mycobacterium tuberculosis infection—United States. Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report (MMWR) Miller, M.R., Hankinson, J., Brusasco, V., Burgos, F., Casaburi, R., Coates, A., Crapo, R., Enright, P., van der Grinten, C.P., Gustafsson, P., Jensen, R., Johnson, D.C., MacIntyre, N., McKay, R., Navajas, D., Pedersen, O.F., Pellegrino, R., Viegi, G., and Wanger, J. (2005). American Thoracic Society/European Respiratory Society (ATS/ERS) Task Force: Standardisation of Spirometry. Eur Respir J National Toxicology Program (NTP) (2014). Report on Carcinogens, Thirteenth Edition. Silica, Crystalline (respirable Size). Research Triangle Park, NC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service. http://ntp.niehs.nih.gov/ntp/roc/content/profiles/silica.pdf Occupational Safety and Health Administration/National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA/NIOSH) (2012). Hazard Alert. Worker exposure to silica during hydraulic fracturing. Occupational Safety and Health Administration/National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA/NIOSH) (2015). Hazard alert. Worker exposure to silica during countertop manufacturing, finishing, and installation. (OSHA-HA-3768-2015). Redlich, C.A., Tarlo, S.M., Hankinson, J.L., Townsend, M.C, Eschenbacher, W.L., Von Essen, S.G., Sigsgaard, T., Weissman, D.N. (2014). Official American Thoracic Society technical standards: Spirometry in the occupational setting. Am J Respir Crit Care Med Rees, D. and Murray, J. (2007). Silica, silicosis and tuberculosis. Int J Tuberc Lung Dis Shtraichman, O., Blanc, P.D., Ollech, J.E., Fridel, L., Fuks, L., Fireman, E., and Kramer, M.R. (2015). Outbreak of autoimmune disease in silicosis linked to artificial stone. Occup Med Slater, M.L., Welland, G., Pai, M., Parsonnet, J., and Banaei, N. (2013). Challenges with QuantiFERON-TB gold assay for large-scale, routine screening of U.S. healthcare workers. Am J Respir Crit Care Med, Steenland, K., Mannetje, A., Boffetta, P., Stayner, L., Attfield, M., Chen, J., Dosemeci, M., DeKlerk, N., Hnizdo, E., Koskela, R., and Checkoway, H. (2001). International Agency for Research on Cancer. Pooled exposure-response analyses and risk assessment for lung cancer in 10 cohorts of silica-exposed workers: An IARC multicentre study. Cancer Causes Control, Steenland, K. and Ward E. (2014). Silica: A lung carcinogen. CA Cancer J Clin, Townsend, M.C. ACOEM Guidance Statement. (2011). Spirometry in the occupational health setting—2011 Update. J Occup Environ Med, 7. Sample Forms Three sample forms are provided. The first is a sample written medical report for the employee. The second is a sample written medical opinion for the employer. And the third is a sample written authorization form that employees sign to clarify what information the employee is authorizing to be released to the employer. [81 FR 16876, Mar. 25, 2016] Subpart AA—Confined Spaces in Construction Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; Source: 80 FR 25518, May 4, 2015, unless otherwise noted. § 1926.1200 [Reserved] § 1926.1201 Scope. (a) This standard sets forth requirements for practices and procedures to protect employees engaged in construction activities at a worksite with one or more confined spaces, subject to the exceptions in paragraph (b) of this section. Note to paragraph ( a Examples of locations where confined spaces may occur include, but are not limited to, the following: Bins; boilers; pits (such as elevator, escalator, pump, valve or other equipment); manholes (such as sewer, storm drain, electrical, communication, or other utility); tanks (such as fuel, chemical, water, or other liquid, solid or gas); incinerators; scrubbers; concrete pier columns; sewers; transformer vaults; heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC) ducts; storm drains; water mains; precast concrete and other pre-formed manhole units; drilled shafts; enclosed beams; vessels; digesters; lift stations; cesspools; silos; air receivers; sludge gates; air preheaters; step up transformers; turbines; chillers; bag houses; and/or mixers/reactors. (b) Exceptions. (1) Construction work regulated by subpart P of this part (Excavations). (2) Construction work regulated by subpart S of this part (Underground Construction, Caissons, Cofferdams and Compressed Air). (3) Construction work regulated by subpart Y of this part (Diving). (c) Where this standard applies and there is a provision that addresses a confined space hazard in another applicable OSHA standard, the employer must comply with both that requirement and the applicable provisions of this standard. § 1926.1202 Definitions. The following terms are defined for the purposes of this subpart only: Acceptable entry conditions Attendant Authorized entrant Barrier Blanking blinding Competent person Confined space (1) Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter it; (2) Has limited or restricted means for entry and exit; and (3) Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy. Control Controlling Contractor Note to the definition of “Controlling Contractor”. If the controlling contractor owns or manages the property, then it is both a controlling employer and a host employer. Double block and bleed Early-warning system Emergency Engulfment Entry Entry Employer Note to the definition of “Entry Employer”. An employer cannot avoid the duties of the standard merely by refusing to decide whether its employees will enter a permit space, and OSHA will consider the failure to so decide to be an implicit decision to allow employees to enter those spaces if they are working in the proximity of the space. Entry permit Entry rescue Entry supervisor Note to the definition of “Entry supervisor” An entry supervisor also may serve as an attendant or as an authorized entrant, as long as that person is trained and equipped as required by this standard for each role he or she fills. Also, the duties of entry supervisor may be passed from one individual to another during the course of an entry operation. Hazard Hazardous atmosphere (1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its lower flammable limit (LFL); (2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its LFL; Note to paragraph (2) of the definition of “Hazardous atmosphere”. This concentration may be approximated as a condition in which the combustible dust obscures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 meters) or less. (3) Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent; (4) Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a permissible exposure limit is published in subpart D of this part (Occupational Health and Environmental Control), or in subpart Z of this part (Toxic and Hazardous Substances), and which could result in employee exposure in excess of its dose or permissible exposure limit; Note to paragraph (4) of the definition of “Hazardous atmosphere”. An atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not capable of causing death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its health effects is not covered by this definition. (5) Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life or health. Note to paragraph (5) of the definition of “Hazardous atmosphere”. For air contaminants for which OSHA has not determined a dose or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information, such as Safety Data Sheets that comply with the Hazard Communication Standard, § 1926.59, published information, and internal documents can provide guidance in establishing acceptable atmospheric conditions. Host employer Note to the definition of “Host employer”. If the owner of the property on which the construction activity occurs has contracted with an entity for the general management of that property, and has transferred to that entity the information specified in § 1926.1203(h)(1), OSHA will treat the contracted management entity as the host employer for as long as that entity manages the property. Otherwise, OSHA will treat the owner of the property as the host employer. In no case will there be more than one host employer. Hot work Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) Note to the definition of “Immediately dangerous to life or health”. Some materials—hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for example—may produce immediate transient effects that, even if severe, may pass without medical attention, but are followed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12-72 hours after exposure. The victim “feels normal” after recovery from transient effects until collapse. Such materials in hazardous quantities are considered to be “immediately” dangerous to life or health. Inerting Note to the definition of “Intering”. This procedure produces an IDLH oxygen-deficient atmosphere. Isolate or isolation Limited or restricted means for entry or exit Line breaking Lockout Lower flammable limit or lower explosive limit Monitor monitoring Non-entry rescue Non-permit confined space Oxygen deficient atmosphere Oxygen enriched atmosphere Permit-required confined space (1) Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere; (2) Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant; (3) Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross-section; or (4) Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard. Permit-required confined space program Physical hazard Prohibited condition Qualified person Representative permit space Rescue Rescue service Retrieval system Serious physical damage Tagout (1) Placement of a tagout device on a circuit or equipment that has been deenergized, in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the circuit or equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed; and (2) The employer ensures that: (i) Tagout provides equivalent protection to lockout; or (ii) That lockout is infeasible and the employer has relieved, disconnected, restrained and otherwise rendered safe stored (residual) energy. Test or testing Note to the definition of “Test or testing”. Testing enables employers both to devise and implement adequate control measures for the protection of authorized entrants and to determine if acceptable entry conditions are present immediately prior to, and during, entry. Ventilate ventilation § 1926.1203 General requirements. (a) Before it begins work at a worksite, each employer must ensure that a competent person identifies all confined spaces in which one or more of the employees it directs may work, and identifies each space that is a permit space, through consideration and evaluation of the elements of that space, including testing as necessary. (b) If the workplace contains one or more permit spaces, the employer who identifies, or who receives notice of, a permit space must: (1) Inform exposed employees by posting danger signs or by any other equally effective means, of the existence and location of, and the danger posed by, each permit space; and Note to paragraph ( b A sign reading “DANGER—PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT ENTER” or using other similar language would satisfy the requirement for a sign. (2) Inform, in a timely manner and in a manner other than posting, its employees' authorized representatives and the controlling contractor of the existence and location of, and the danger posed by, each permit space. (c) Each employer who identifies, or receives notice of, a permit space and has not authorized employees it directs to work in that space must take effective measures to prevent those employees from entering that permit space, in addition to complying with all other applicable requirements of this standard. (d) If any employer decides that employees it directs will enter a permit space, that employer must have a written permit space program that complies with § 1926.1204 implemented at the construction site. The written program must be made available prior to and during entry operations for inspection by employees and their authorized representatives. (e) An employer may use the alternate procedures specified in paragraph (e)(2) of this section for entering a permit space only under the conditions set forth in paragraph (e)(1) of this section. (1) An employer whose employees enter a permit space need not comply with §§ 1926.1204 through 1206 and §§ 1926.1208 through 1211, provided that all of the following conditions are met: (i) The employer can demonstrate that all physical hazards in the space are eliminated or isolated through engineering controls so that the only hazard posed by the permit space is an actual or potential hazardous atmosphere; (ii) The employer can demonstrate that continuous forced air ventilation alone is sufficient to maintain that permit space safe for entry, and that, in the event the ventilation system stops working, entrants can exit the space safely; (iii) The employer develops monitoring and inspection data that supports the demonstrations required by paragraphs (e)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section; (iv) If an initial entry of the permit space is necessary to obtain the data required by paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section, the entry is performed in compliance with §§ 1926.1204 through 1926.1211; (v) The determinations and supporting data required by paragraphs (e)(1)(i), (ii), and (iii) of this section are documented by the employer and are made available to each employee who enters the permit space under the terms of paragraph (e) of this section or to that employee's authorized representative; and (vi) Entry into the permit space under the terms of paragraph (e)(1) of this section is performed in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (e)(2) of this section. Note to paragraph ( e See paragraph (g) of this section for reclassification of a permit space after all hazards within the space have been eliminated. (2) The following requirements apply to entry into permit spaces that meet the conditions set forth in paragraph (e)(1) of this section: (i) Any conditions making it unsafe to remove an entrance cover must be eliminated before the cover is removed. (ii) When entrance covers are removed, the opening must be immediately guarded by a railing, temporary cover, or other temporary barrier that will prevent an accidental fall through the opening and that will protect each employee working in the space from foreign objects entering the space. (iii) Before an employee enters the space, the internal atmosphere must be tested, with a calibrated direct-reading instrument, for oxygen content, for flammable gases and vapors, and for potential toxic air contaminants, in that order. Any employee who enters the space, or that employee's authorized representative, must be provided an opportunity to observe the pre-entry testing required by this paragraph. (iv) No hazardous atmosphere is permitted within the space whenever any employee is inside the space. (v) Continuous forced air ventilation must be used, as follows: (A) An employee must not enter the space until the forced air ventilation has eliminated any hazardous atmosphere; (B) The forced air ventilation must be so directed as to ventilate the immediate areas where an employee is or will be present within the space and must continue until all employees have left the space; (C) The air supply for the forced air ventilation must be from a clean source and must not increase the hazards in the space. (vi) The atmosphere within the space must be continuously monitored unless the entry employer can demonstrate that equipment for continuous monitoring is not commercially available or periodic monitoring is sufficient. If continuous monitoring is used, the employer must ensure that the monitoring equipment has an alarm that will notify all entrants if a specified atmospheric threshold is achieved, or that an employee will check the monitor with sufficient frequency to ensure that entrants have adequate time to escape. If continuous monitoring is not used, periodic monitoring is required. All monitoring must ensure that the continuous forced air ventilation is preventing the accumulation of a hazardous atmosphere. Any employee who enters the space, or that employee's authorized representative, must be provided with an opportunity to observe the testing required by this paragraph (e)(2)(vi). (vii) If a hazard is detected during entry: (A) Each employee must leave the space immediately; (B) The space must be evaluated to determine how the hazard developed; and (C) The employer must implement measures to protect employees from the hazard before any subsequent entry takes place. (viii) The employer must ensure a safe method of entering and exiting the space. If a hoisting system is used, it must be designed and manufactured for personnel hoisting; however, a job-made hoisting system is permissible if it is approved for personnel hoisting by a registered professional engineer, in writing, prior to use. (ix) The employer must verify that the space is safe for entry and that the pre-entry measures required by paragraph (e)(2) of this section have been taken, through a written certification that contains the date, the location of the space, and the signature of the person providing the certification. The certification must be made before entry and must be made available to each employee entering the space or to that employee's authorized representative. (f) When there are changes in the use or configuration of a non-permit confined space that might increase the hazards to entrants, or some indication that the initial evaluation of the space may not have been adequate, each entry employer must have a competent person reevaluate that space and, if necessary, reclassify it as a permit-required confined space. (g) A space classified by an employer as a permit-required confined space may only be reclassified as a non-permit confined space when a competent person determines that all of the applicable requirements in paragraphs (g)(1) through (4) of this section have been met: (1) If the permit space poses no actual or potential atmospheric hazards and if all hazards within the space are eliminated or isolated without entry into the space (unless the employer can demonstrate that doing so without entry is infeasible), the permit space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space for as long as the non-atmospheric hazards remain eliminated or isolated; (2) The entry employer must eliminate or isolate the hazards without entering the space, unless it can demonstrate that this is infeasible. If it is necessary to enter the permit space to eliminate or isolate hazards, such entry must be performed under §§ 1926.1204 through 1926.1211. If testing and inspection during that entry demonstrate that the hazards within the permit space have been eliminated or isolated, the permit space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space for as long as the hazards remain eliminated or isolated; Note to paragraph ( g Control of atmospheric hazards through forced air ventilation does not constitute elimination or isolation of the hazards. Paragraph (e) of this section covers permit space entry where the employer can demonstrate that forced air ventilation alone will control all hazards in the space. (3) The entry employer must document the basis for determining that all hazards in a permit space have been eliminated or isolated, through a certification that contains the date, the location of the space, and the signature of the person making the determination. The certification must be made available to each employee entering the space or to that employee's authorized representative; and (4) If hazards arise within a permit space that has been reclassified as a non-permit space under paragraph (g) of this section, each employee in the space must exit the space. The entry employer must then reevaluate the space and reclassify it as a permit space as appropriate in accordance with all other applicable provisions of this standard. (h) Permit space entry communication and coordination. (i) The location of each known permit space; (ii) The hazards or potential hazards in each space or the reason it is a permit space; and (iii) Any precautions that the host employer or any previous controlling contractor or entry employer implemented for the protection of employees in the permit space. (2) Before entry operations begin, the controlling contractor must: (i) Obtain the host employer's information about the permit space hazards and previous entry operations; and (ii) Provide the following information to each entity entering a permit space and any other entity at the worksite whose activities could foreseeably result in a hazard in the permit space: (A) The information received from the host employer; (B) Any additional information the controlling contractor has about the subjects listed in paragraph (h)(1) of this section; and (C) The precautions that the host employer, controlling contractor, or other entry employers implemented for the protection of employees in the permit spaces. (3) Before entry operations begin, each entry employer must: (i) Obtain all of the controlling contractor's information regarding permit space hazards and entry operations; and (ii) Inform the controlling contractor of the permit space program that the entry employer will follow, including any hazards likely to be confronted or created in each permit space. (4) The controlling contractor and entry employer(s) must coordinate entry operations when: (i) More than one entity performs permit space entry at the same time; or (ii) Permit space entry is performed at the same time that any activities that could foreseeably result in a hazard in the permit space are performed. (5) After entry operations: (i) The controlling contractor must debrief each entity that entered a permit space regarding the permit space program followed and any hazards confronted or created in the permit space(s) during entry operations; (ii) The entry employer must inform the controlling contractor in a timely manner of the permit space program followed and of any hazards confronted or created in the permit space(s) during entry operations; and (iii) The controlling contractor must apprise the host employer of the information exchanged with the entry entities pursuant to this subparagraph. Note to paragraph ( h Unless a host employer or controlling contractor has or will have employees in a confined space, it is not required to enter any confined space to collect the information specified in this paragraph (h). (i) If there is no controlling contractor present at the worksite, the requirements for, and role of, controlling contactors in this section must be fulfilled by the host employer or other employer who arranges to have employees of another employer perform work that involves permit space entry. § 1926.1204 Permit-required confined space program. Each entry employer must: (a) Implement the measures necessary to prevent unauthorized entry; (b) Identify and evaluate the hazards of permit spaces before employees enter them; (c) Develop and implement the means, procedures, and practices necessary for safe permit space entry operations, including, but not limited to, the following: (1) Specifying acceptable entry conditions; (2) Providing each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative with the opportunity to observe any monitoring or testing of permit spaces; (3) Isolating the permit space and physical hazard(s) within the space; (4) Purging, inerting, flushing, or ventilating the permit space as necessary to eliminate or control atmospheric hazards; Note to paragraph ( c When an employer is unable to reduce the atmosphere below 10 percent LFL, the employer may only enter if the employer inerts the space so as to render the entire atmosphere in the space non-combustible, and the employees use PPE to address any other atmospheric hazards (such as oxygen deficiency), and the employer eliminates or isolates all physical hazards in the space. (5) Determining that, in the event the ventilation system stops working, the monitoring procedures will detect an increase in atmospheric hazard levels in sufficient time for the entrants to safely exit the permit space; (6) Providing pedestrian, vehicle, or other barriers as necessary to protect entrants from external hazards; (7) Verifying that conditions in the permit space are acceptable for entry throughout the duration of an authorized entry, and ensuring that employees are not allowed to enter into, or remain in, a permit space with a hazardous atmosphere unless the employer can demonstrate that personal protective equipment (PPE) will provide effective protection for each employee in the permit space and provides the appropriate PPE to each employee; and (8) Eliminating any conditions (for example, high pressure) that could make it unsafe to remove an entrance cover. (d) Provide the following equipment (specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through (9) of this section) at no cost to each employee, maintain that equipment properly, and ensure that each employee uses that equipment properly: (1) Testing and monitoring equipment needed to comply with paragraph (e) of this section; (2) Ventilating equipment needed to obtain acceptable entry conditions; (3) Communications equipment necessary for compliance with §§ 1926.1208(c) and 1926.1209(e), including any necessary electronic communication equipment for attendants assessing entrants' status in multiple spaces; (4) Personal protective equipment insofar as feasible engineering and work-practice controls do not adequately protect employees; Note to paragraph ( d The requirements of subpart E of this part and other PPE requirements continue to apply to the use of PPE in a permit space. For example, if employees use respirators, then the respirator requirements in § 1926.103 (Respiratory protection) must be met. (5) Lighting equipment that meets the minimum illumination requirements in § 1926.56, that is approved for the ignitable or combustible properties of the specific gas, vapor, dust, or fiber that will be present, and that is sufficient to enable employees to see well enough to work safely and to exit the space quickly in an emergency; (6) Barriers and shields as required by paragraph (c)(4) of this section; (7) Equipment, such as ladders, needed for safe ingress and egress by authorized entrants; (8) Rescue and emergency equipment needed to comply with paragraph (i) of this section, except to the extent that the equipment is provided by rescue services; and (9) Any other equipment necessary for safe entry into, safe exit from, and rescue from, permit spaces. (e) Evaluate permit space conditions in accordance with the following paragraphs (e)(1) through (6) of this section when entry operations are conducted: (1) Test conditions in the permit space to determine if acceptable entry conditions exist before changes to the space's natural ventilation are made, and before entry is authorized to begin, except that, if an employer demonstrates that isolation of the space is infeasible because the space is large or is part of a continuous system (such as a sewer), the employer must: (i) Perform pre-entry testing to the extent feasible before entry is authorized; and, (ii) If entry is authorized, continuously monitor entry conditions in the areas where authorized entrants are working, except that employers may use periodic monitoring in accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section for monitoring an atmospheric hazard if they can demonstrate that equipment for continuously monitoring that hazard is not commercially available; (iii) Provide an early-warning system that continuously monitors for non-isolated engulfment hazards. The system must alert authorized entrants and attendants in sufficient time for the authorized entrants to safely exit the space. (2) Continuously monitor atmospheric hazards unless the employer can demonstrate that the equipment for continuously monitoring a hazard is not commercially available or that periodic monitoring is of sufficient frequency to ensure that the atmospheric hazard is being controlled at safe levels. If continuous monitoring is not used, periodic monitoring is required with sufficient frequency to ensure that acceptable entry conditions are being maintained during the course of entry operations; (3) When testing for atmospheric hazards, test first for oxygen, then for combustible gases and vapors, and then for toxic gases and vapors; (4) Provide each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative an opportunity to observe the pre-entry and any subsequent testing or monitoring of permit spaces; (5) Reevaluate the permit space in the presence of any authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative who requests that the employer conduct such reevaluation because there is some indication that the evaluation of that space may not have been adequate; and (6) Immediately provide each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized representative with the results of any testing conducted in accordance with this section. (f) Provide at least one attendant outside the permit space into which entry is authorized for the duration of entry operations: (1) Attendants may be assigned to more than one permit space provided the duties described in § 1926.1209 can be effectively performed for each permit space. (2) Attendants may be stationed at any location outside the permit space as long as the duties described in § 1926.1209 can be effectively performed for each permit space to which the attendant is assigned. (g) If multiple spaces are to be assigned to a single attendant, include in the permit program the means and procedures to enable the attendant to respond to an emergency affecting one or more of those permit spaces without distraction from the attendant's responsibilities under § 1926.1209; (h) Designate each person who is to have an active role (as, for example, authorized entrants, attendants, entry supervisors, or persons who test or monitor the atmosphere in a permit space) in entry operations, identify the duties of each such employee, and provide each such employee with the training required by § 1926.1207; (i) Develop and implement procedures for summoning rescue and emergency services (including procedures for summoning emergency assistance in the event of a failed non-entry rescue), for rescuing entrants from permit spaces, for providing necessary emergency services to rescued employees, and for preventing unauthorized personnel from attempting a rescue; (j) Develop and implement a system for the preparation, issuance, use, and cancellation of entry permits as required by this standard, including the safe termination of entry operations under both planned and emergency conditions; (k) Develop and implement procedures to coordinate entry operations, in consultation with the controlling contractor, when employees of more than one employer are working simultaneously in a permit space or elsewhere on the worksite where their activities could, either alone or in conjunction with the activities within a permit space, foreseeably result in a hazard within the confined space, so that employees of one employer do not endanger the employees of any other employer; (l) Develop and implement procedures (such as closing off a permit space and canceling the permit) necessary for concluding the entry after entry operations have been completed; (m) Review entry operations when the measures taken under the permit space program may not protect employees and revise the program to correct deficiencies found to exist before subsequent entries are authorized; and Note to paragraph ( m Examples of circumstances requiring the review of the permit space program include, but are not limited to: Any unauthorized entry of a permit space, the detection of a permit space hazard not covered by the permit, the detection of a condition prohibited by the permit, the occurrence of an injury or near-miss during entry, a change in the use or configuration of a permit space, and employee complaints about the effectiveness of the program. (n) Review the permit space program, using the canceled permits retained under § 1926.1205(f), within 1 year after each entry and revise the program as necessary to ensure that employees participating in entry operations are protected from permit space hazards. Note to paragraph ( n Employers may perform a single annual review covering all entries performed during a 12-month period. If no entry is performed during a 12-month period, no review is necessary. § 1926.1205 Permitting process. (a) Before entry is authorized, each entry employer must document the completion of measures required by § 1926.1204(c) by preparing an entry permit. (b) Before entry begins, the entry supervisor identified on the permit must sign the entry permit to authorize entry. (c) The completed permit must be made available at the time of entry to all authorized entrants or their authorized representatives, by posting it at the entry portal or by any other equally effective means, so that the entrants can confirm that pre-entry preparations have been completed. (d) The duration of the permit may not exceed the time required to complete the assigned task or job identified on the permit in accordance with § 1926.1206(b). (e) The entry supervisor must terminate entry and take the following action when any of the following apply: (1) Cancel the entry permit when the entry operations covered by the entry permit have been completed; or (2) Suspend or cancel the entry permit and fully reassess the space before allowing reentry when a condition that is not allowed under the entry permit arises in or near the permit space and that condition is temporary in nature and does not change the configuration of the space or create any new hazards within it; and (3) Cancel the entry permit when a condition that is not allowed under the entry permit arises in or near the permit space and that condition is not covered by paragraph (e)(2) of this section. (f) The entry employer must retain each canceled entry permit for at least 1 year to facilitate the review of the permit-required confined space program required by § 1926.1204(n). Any problems encountered during an entry operation must be noted on the pertinent permit so that appropriate revisions to the permit space program can be made. § 1926.1206 Entry permit. The entry permit that documents compliance with this section and authorizes entry to a permit space must identify: (a) The permit space to be entered; (b) The purpose of the entry; (c) The date and the authorized duration of the entry permit; (d) The authorized entrants within the permit space, by name or by such other means (for example, through the use of rosters or tracking systems) as will enable the attendant to determine quickly and accurately, for the duration of the permit, which authorized entrants are inside the permit space; Note to paragraph ( d This requirement may be met by inserting a reference on the entry permit as to the means used, such as a roster or tracking system, to keep track of the authorized entrants within the permit space. (e) Means of detecting an increase in atmospheric hazard levels in the event the ventilation system stops working; (f) Each person, by name, currently serving as an attendant; (g) The individual, by name, currently serving as entry supervisor, and the signature or initials of each entry supervisor who authorizes entry; (h) The hazards of the permit space to be entered; (i) The measures used to isolate the permit space and to eliminate or control permit space hazards before entry; Note to paragraph ( i Those measures can include, but are not limited to, the lockout or tagging of equipment and procedures for purging, inerting, ventilating, and flushing permit spaces. (j) The acceptable entry conditions; (k) The results of tests and monitoring performed under § 1926.1204(e), accompanied by the names or initials of the testers and by an indication of when the tests were performed; (l) The rescue and emergency services that can be summoned and the means (such as the equipment to use and the numbers to call) for summoning those services; (m) The communication procedures used by authorized entrants and attendants to maintain contact during the entry; (n) Equipment, such as personal protective equipment, testing equipment, communications equipment, alarm systems, and rescue equipment, to be provided for compliance with this standard; (o) Any other information necessary, given the circumstances of the particular confined space, to ensure employee safety; and (p) Any additional permits, such as for hot work, that have been issued to authorize work in the permit space. § 1926.1207 Training. (a) The employer must provide training to each employee whose work is regulated by this standard, at no cost to the employee, and ensure that the employee possesses the understanding, knowledge, and skills necessary for the safe performance of the duties assigned under this standard. This training must result in an understanding of the hazards in the permit space and the methods used to isolate, control or in other ways protect employees from these hazards, and for those employees not authorized to perform entry rescues, in the dangers of attempting such rescues. (b) Training required by this section must be provided to each affected employee: (1) In both a language and vocabulary that the employee can understand; (2) Before the employee is first assigned duties under this standard; (3) Before there is a change in assigned duties; (4) Whenever there is a change in permit space entry operations that presents a hazard about which an employee has not previously been trained; and (5) Whenever there is any evidence of a deviation from the permit space entry procedures required by § 1926.1204(c) or there are inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of these procedures. (c) The training must establish employee proficiency in the duties required by this standard and must introduce new or revised procedures, as necessary, for compliance with this standard. (d) The employer must maintain training records to show that the training required by paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section has been accomplished. The training records must contain each employee's name, the name of the trainers, and the dates of training. The documentation must be available for inspection by employees and their authorized representatives, for the period of time the employee is employed by that employer. § 1926.1208 Duties of authorized entrants. The entry employer must ensure that all authorized entrants: (a) Are familiar with and understand the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure; (b) Properly use equipment as required by § 1926.1204(d); (c) Communicate with the attendant as necessary to enable the attendant to assess entrant status and to enable the attendant to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space as required by § 1926.1209(f); (d) Alert the attendant whenever: (1) There is any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation; or (2) The entrant detects a prohibited condition; and (e) Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever: (1) An order to evacuate is given by the attendant or the entry supervisor; (2) There is any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation; (3) The entrant detects a prohibited condition; or (4) An evacuation alarm is activated. § 1926.1209 Duties of attendants. The entry employer must ensure that each attendant: (a) Is familiar with and understands the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure; (b) Is aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized entrants; (c) Continuously maintains an accurate count of authorized entrants in the permit space and ensures that the means used to identify authorized entrants under § 1926.1206(d) accurately identifies who is in the permit space; (d) Remains outside the permit space during entry operations until relieved by another attendant; Note to paragraph ( d Once an attendant has been relieved by another attendant, the relieved attendant may enter a permit space to attempt a rescue when the employer's permit space program allows attendant entry for rescue and the attendant has been trained and equipped for rescue operations as required by § 1926.1211(a). (e) Communicates with authorized entrants as necessary to assess entrant status and to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space under § 1926.1208(e); (f) Assesses activities and conditions inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe for entrants to remain in the space and orders the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit space immediately under any of the following conditions: (1) If there is a prohibited condition; (2) If the behavioral effects of hazard exposure are apparent in an authorized entrant; (3) If there is a situation outside the space that could endanger the authorized entrants; or (4) If the attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all the duties required under this section; (g) Summons rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant determines that authorized entrants may need assistance to escape from permit space hazards; (h) Takes the following actions when unauthorized persons approach or enter a permit space while entry is underway: (1) Warns the unauthorized persons that they must stay away from the permit space; (2) Advises the unauthorized persons that they must exit immediately if they have entered the permit space; and (3) Informs the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if unauthorized persons have entered the permit space; (i) Performs non-entry rescues as specified by the employer's rescue procedure; and (j) Performs no duties that might interfere with the attendant's primary duty to assess and protect the authorized entrants. § 1926.1210 Duties of entry supervisors. The entry employer must ensure that each entry supervisor: (a) Is familiar with and understands the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure; (b) Verifies, by checking that the appropriate entries have been made on the permit, that all tests specified by the permit have been conducted and that all procedures and equipment specified by the permit are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to begin; (c) Terminates the entry and cancels or suspends the permit as required by § 1926.1205(e); (d) Verifies that rescue services are available and that the means for summoning them are operable, and that the employer will be notified as soon as the services become unavailable; (e) Removes unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the permit space during entry operations; and (f) Determines, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is transferred, and at intervals dictated by the hazards and operations performed within the space, that entry operations remain consistent with terms of the entry permit and that acceptable entry conditions are maintained. § 1926.1211 Rescue and emergency services. (a) An employer who designates rescue and emergency services, pursuant to § 1926.1204(i), must: (1) Evaluate a prospective rescuer's ability to respond to a rescue summons in a timely manner, considering the hazard(s) identified; Note to paragraph ( a What will be considered timely will vary according to the specific hazards involved in each entry. For example, § 1926.103 (Respiratory protection) requires that employers provide a standby person or persons capable of immediate action to rescue employee(s) wearing respiratory protection while in work areas defined as IDLH atmospheres. (2) Evaluate a prospective rescue service's ability, in terms of proficiency with rescue-related tasks and equipment, to function appropriately while rescuing entrants from the particular permit space or types of permit spaces identified; (3) Select a rescue team or service from those evaluated that: (i) Has the capability to reach the victim(s) within a time frame that is appropriate for the permit space hazard(s) identified; (ii) Is equipped for, and proficient in, performing the needed rescue services; (iii) Agrees to notify the employer immediately in the event that the rescue service becomes unavailable; (4) Inform each rescue team or service of the hazards they may confront when called on to perform rescue at the site; and (5) Provide the rescue team or service selected with access to all permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary so that the rescue team or service can develop appropriate rescue plans and practice rescue operations. (b) An employer whose employees have been designated to provide permit space rescue and/or emergency services must take the following measures and provide all equipment and training at no cost to those employees: (1) Provide each affected employee with the personal protective equipment (PPE) needed to conduct permit space rescues safely and train each affected employee so the employee is proficient in the use of that PPE; (2) Train each affected employee to perform assigned rescue duties. The employer must ensure that such employees successfully complete the training required and establish proficiency as authorized entrants, as provided by §§ 1926.1207 and 1926.1208; (3) Train each affected employee in basic first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). The employer must ensure that at least one member of the rescue team or service holding a current certification in basic first aid and CPR is available; and (4) Ensure that affected employees practice making permit space rescues before attempting an actual rescue, and at least once every 12 months, by means of simulated rescue operations in which they remove dummies, manikins, or actual persons from the actual permit spaces or from representative permit spaces, except practice rescue is not required where the affected employees properly performed a rescue operation during the last 12 months in the same permit space the authorized entrant will enter, or in a similar permit space. Representative permit spaces must, with respect to opening size, configuration, and accessibility, simulate the types of permit spaces from which rescue is to be performed. (c) Non-entry rescue is required unless the retrieval equipment would increase the overall risk of entry or would not contribute to the rescue of the entrant. The employer must designate an entry rescue service whenever non-entry rescue is not selected. Whenever non-entry rescue is selected, the entry employer must ensure that retrieval systems or methods are used whenever an authorized entrant enters a permit space, and must confirm, prior to entry, that emergency assistance would be available in the event that non-entry rescue fails. Retrieval systems must meet the following requirements: (1) Each authorized entrant must use a chest or full body harness, with a retrieval line attached at the center of the entrant's back near shoulder level, above the entrant's head, or at another point which the employer can establish presents a profile small enough for the successful removal of the entrant. Wristlets or anklets may be used in lieu of the chest or full body harness if the employer can demonstrate that the use of a chest or full body harness is infeasible or creates a greater hazard and that the use of wristlets or anklets is the safest and most effective alternative. (2) The other end of the retrieval line must be attached to a mechanical device or fixed point outside the permit space in such a manner that rescue can begin as soon as the rescuer becomes aware that rescue is necessary. A mechanical device must be available to retrieve personnel from vertical type permit spaces more than 5 feet (1.52 meters) deep. (3) Equipment that is unsuitable for retrieval must not be used, including, but not limited to, retrieval lines that have a reasonable probability of becoming entangled with the retrieval lines used by other authorized entrants, or retrieval lines that will not work due to the internal configuration of the permit space. (d) If an injured entrant is exposed to a substance for which a Safety Data Sheet (SDS) or other similar written information is required to be kept at the worksite, that SDS or written information must be made available to the medical facility treating the exposed entrant. § 1926.1212 Employee participation. (a) Employers must consult with affected employees and their authorized representatives on the development and implementation of all aspects of the permit space program required by § 1926.1203. (b) Employers must make available to each affected employee and his/her authorized representatives all information required to be developed by this standard. § 1926.1213 Provision of documents to Secretary. For each document required to be retained in this standard, the retaining employer must make the document available on request to the Secretary of Labor or the Secretary's designee. Subpart BB [Reserved] Subpart CC—Cranes and Derricks in Construction Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701 et seq.; Source: 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, unless otherwise noted. § 1926.1400 Scope. (a) This standard applies to power-operated equipment, when used in construction, that can hoist, lower and horizontally move a suspended load. Such equipment includes, but is not limited to: Articulating cranes (such as knuckle-boom cranes); crawler cranes; floating cranes; cranes on barges; locomotive cranes; mobile cranes (such as wheel-mounted, rough-terrain, all-terrain, commercial truck-mounted, and boom truck cranes); multi-purpose machines when configured to hoist and lower (by means of a winch or hook) and horizontally move a suspended load; industrial cranes (such as carry-deck cranes); dedicated pile drivers; service/mechanic trucks with a hoisting device; a crane on a monorail; tower cranes (such as a fixed jib, i.e., (b) Attachments. (c) Exclusions. (1) Machinery included in paragraph (a) of this section while it has been converted or adapted for a non-hoisting/lifting use. Such conversions/adaptations include, but are not limited to, power shovels, excavators and concrete pumps. (2) Power shovels, excavators, wheel loaders, backhoes, loader backhoes, track loaders. This machinery is also excluded when used with chains, slings or other rigging to lift suspended loads. (3) Automotive wreckers and tow trucks when used to clear wrecks and haul vehicles. (4) Digger derricks when used for augering holes for poles carrying electric or telecommunication lines, placing and removing the poles, and for handling associated materials for installation on, or removal from, the poles, or when used for any other work subject to subpart V of this part. To be eligible for this exclusion, digger-derrick use in work subject to subpart V of this part must comply with all of the provisions of that subpart, and digger-derrick use in construction work for telecommunication service (as defined at § 1910.268(s)(40)) must comply with all of the provisions of § 1910.268. (5) Machinery originally designed as vehicle-mounted aerial devices (for lifting personnel) and self-propelled elevating work platforms. (6) Telescopic/hydraulic gantry systems. (7) Stacker cranes. (8) Powered industrial trucks (forklifts), except when configured to hoist and lower (by means of a winch or hook) and horizontally move a suspended load. (9) Mechanic's truck with a hoisting device when used in activities related to equipment maintenance and repair. (10) Machinery that hoists by using a come-a-long or chainfall. (11) Dedicated drilling rigs. (12) Gin poles when used for the erection of communication towers. (13) Tree trimming and tree removal work. (14) Anchor handling or dredge-related operations with a vessel or barge using an affixed A-frame. (15) Roustabouts. (16) Helicopter cranes. (17) Material delivery. (i) Articulating/knuckle-boom truck cranes that deliver material to a construction site when used to transfer materials from the truck crane to the ground, without arranging the materials in a particular sequence for hoisting. (ii) Articulating/knuckle-boom truck cranes that deliver material to a construction site when the crane is used to transfer building supply sheet goods or building supply packaged materials from the truck crane onto a structure, using a fork/cradle at the end of the boom, but only when the truck crane is equipped with a properly functioning automatic overload prevention device. Such sheet goods or packaged materials include, but are not limited to: Sheets of sheet rock, sheets of plywood, bags of cement, sheets or packages of roofing shingles, and rolls of roofing felt. (iii) This exclusion does not apply when: (A) The articulating/knuckle-boom crane is used to hold, support or stabilize the material to facilitate a construction activity, such as holding material in place while it is attached to the structure; (B) The material being handled by the articulating/knuckle-boom crane is a prefabricated component. Such prefabricated components include, but are not limited to: Precast concrete members or panels, roof trusses (wooden, cold-formed metal, steel, or other material), prefabricated building sections such as, but not limited to: Floor panels, wall panels, roof panels, roof structures, or similar items; (C) The material being handled by the crane is a structural steel member (for example, steel joists, beams, columns, steel decking (bundled or unbundled) or a component of a systems-engineered metal building (as defined in 29 CFR 1926 subpart R). (D) The activity is not specifically excluded under § 1400(c)(17)(i) and (ii). (18) Flash-butt welding trucks. flash-butt welding truck roadway maintenance machine (d) All sections of this subpart CC apply to the equipment covered by this standard unless specified otherwise. (e) The duties of controlling entities under this subpart include, but are not limited to, the duties specified in §§ 1926.1402(c), 1926.1402(e) and 1926.1424(b). (f) Where provisions of this standard direct an operator, crewmember, or other employee to take certain actions, the employer must establish, effectively communicate to the relevant persons, and enforce, work rules to ensure compliance with such provisions. (g) For work covered by subpart V of this part, compliance with § 1926.959 is deemed compliance with §§ 1926.1407 through 1926.1411. (h) Section 1926.1402 does not apply to cranes designed for use on railroad tracks, when used on railroad tracks that are part of the general railroad system of transportation that is regulated pursuant to the Federal Railroad Administration under 49 CFR part 213, and that comply with applicable Federal Railroad Administration requirements. See [75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 78 FR 32116, May 29, 2013; 79 FR 20743, Apr. 11, 2014; 85 FR 57122, Sept. 15, 2020] § 1926.1401 Definitions. A/D director (Assembly/Disassembly director) Articulating crane Assembly/Disassembly Assist crane Attachments Audible signal Blocking Boatswain's chair Bogie Boom (equipment other than tower crane) Boom (tower cranes): i.e., Boom angle indicator Boom hoist limiting device Boom length indicator Boom stop Boom suspension system Builder Center of gravity: Certified welder Climbing Come-a-long Competent person Controlled load lowering Controlling entity Counterweight Crane/derrick Crawler crane Crossover points Dedicated channel Dedicated pile-driver Dedicated spotter (power lines): Directly under the load Dismantling Drum rotation indicator Electrical contact Employer-made equipment Encroachment Equipment Equipment criteria Fall protection equipment Fall restraint system Fall zone Flange points Floating cranes/derricks For example Free fall (of the load line) Free surface effect Hoist Hoisting Include/including Insulating link/device Jib stop Land crane/derrick List Load Load moment (or rated capacity) indicator i.e., Load moment (or rated capacity) limiter i.e., e.g., e.g., Locomotive crane Luffing jib limiting device Marine hoisted personnel transfer device Marine worksite Mobile crane Moving point-to-point Multi-purpose machine Nationally recognized accrediting agency Nonconductive Operational aids Operational controls Operator Overhead and gantry cranes Paragraph Pendants Personal fall arrest system Portal crane Power lines Procedures Proximity alarm Qualified evaluator (not a third party) Qualified evaluator (third party) Qualified person Qualified rigger Range control limit device Range control warning device Rated capacity Rated capacity indicator: See Rated capacity limiter: See Repetitive pickup points Running wire rope Runway Section Sideboom crane Special hazard warnings Stability (flotation device) Standard Method Such as Superstructure: See Tagline Tender Tilt up or tilt down operation Tower crane Travel bogie (tower cranes) Trim Two blocking Unavailable procedures Upperstructure: See Upperworks Up to Wire rope § 1926.1402 Ground conditions. (a) Definitions. (2) “Supporting materials” means blocking, mats, cribbing, marsh buggies (in marshes/wetlands), or similar supporting materials or devices. (b) The equipment must not be assembled or used unless ground conditions are firm, drained, and graded to a sufficient extent so that, in conjunction (if necessary) with the use of supporting materials, the equipment manufacturer's specifications for adequate support and degree of level of the equipment are met. The requirement for the ground to be drained does not apply to marshes/wetlands. (c) The controlling entity must: (1) Ensure that ground preparations necessary to meet the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section are provided. (2) Inform the user of the equipment and the operator of the location of hazards beneath the equipment set-up area (such as voids, tanks, utilities) if those hazards are identified in documents (such as site drawings, as-built drawings, and soil analyses) that are in the possession of the controlling entity (whether at the site or off-site) or the hazards are otherwise known to that controlling entity. (d) If there is no controlling entity for the project, the requirement in paragraph (c)(1) of this section must be met by the employer that has authority at the site to make or arrange for ground preparations needed to meet paragraph (b) of this section. (e) If the A/D director or the operator determines that ground conditions do not meet the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, that person's employer must have a discussion with the controlling entity regarding the ground preparations that are needed so that, with the use of suitable supporting materials/devices (if necessary), the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section can be met. (f) This section does not apply to cranes designed for use on railroad tracks when used on railroad tracks that are part of the general railroad system of transportation that is regulated pursuant to the Federal Railroad Administration under 49 CFR part 213 and that comply with applicable Federal Railroad Administration requirements. § 1926.1403 Assembly/Disassembly—selection of manufacturer or employer procedures. When assembling or disassembling equipment (or attachments), the employer must comply with all applicable manufacturer prohibitions and must comply with either: (a) Manufacturer procedures applicable to assembly and disassembly, or (b) Employer procedures for assembly and disassembly. Employer procedures may be used only where the employer can demonstrate that the procedures used meet the requirements in § 1926.1406. Note: The employer must follow manufacturer procedures when an employer uses synthetic slings during assembly or disassembly rigging. ( See § 1926.1404 Assembly/Disassembly—general requirements (applies to all assembly and disassembly operations). (a) Supervision—competent-qualified person. (2) Where the assembly/disassembly is being performed by only one person, that person must meet the criteria for both a competent person and a qualified person. For purposes of this standard, that person is considered the A/D director. (b) Knowledge of procedures. (c) Review of procedures. (d) Crew instructions. (i) Their tasks. (ii) The hazards associated with their tasks. (iii) The hazardous positions/locations that they need to avoid. (2) During assembly/disassembly operations, before a crew member takes on a different task, or when adding new personnel during the operations, the requirements in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (d)(1)(iii) of this section must be met. (e) Protecting assembly/disassembly crew members out of operator view. (2) Where the operator knows that a crew member went to a location covered by paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the operator must not move any part of the equipment (or load) until the operator is informed in accordance with a pre-arranged system of communication that the crew member is in a safe position. (f) Working under the boom, jib or other components. (2) Exception. See (g) Capacity limits. (h) Addressing specific hazards. (1) Site and ground bearing conditions. see (2) Blocking material. (3) Proper location of blocking. (i) Protect the structural integrity of the equipment, and (ii) Prevent dangerous movement and collapse. (4) Verifying assist crane loads. (5) Boom and jib pick points. (6) Center of gravity. (ii) Where there is insufficient information to accurately identify the center of gravity, measures designed to prevent unintended dangerous movement resulting from an inaccurate identification of the center of gravity must be used. ( See (7) Stability upon pin removal. (8) Snagging. (9) Struck by counterweights. (10) Boom hoist brake failure. (11) Loss of backward stability. (12) Wind speed and weather. (i) [Reserved] (j) Cantilevered boom sections. (k) Weight of components. (l) [Reserved] (m) Components and configuration. (i) Manufacturer instructions, prohibitions, limitations, and specifications. Where these are unavailable, a registered professional engineer familiar with the type of equipment involved must approve, in writing, the selection and configuration of components; or (ii) Approved modifications that meet the requirements of § 1926.1434 (Equipment modifications). (2) Post-assembly inspection. see (n) [Reserved] (o) Shipping pins. (p) Pile driving. (q) Outriggers and stabilizers. (1) The outriggers or stabilizers must be either fully extended or, if manufacturer procedures permit, deployed as specified in the load chart. (2) The outriggers must be set to remove the equipment weight from the wheels, except for locomotive cranes ( see (3) When outrigger floats are used, they must be attached to the outriggers. When stabilizer floats are used, they must be attached to the stabilizers. (4) Each outrigger or stabilizer must be visible to the operator or to a signal person during extension and setting. (5) Outrigger and stabilizer blocking must: (i) Meet the requirements in paragraphs (h)(2) and (h)(3) of this section. (ii) Be placed only under the outrigger or stabilizer float/pad of the jack or, where the outrigger or stabilizer is designed without a jack, under the outer bearing surface of the extended outrigger or stabilizer beam. (6) For locomotive cranes, when using outriggers or stabilizers to handle loads, the manufacturer's procedures must be followed. When lifting loads without using outriggers or stabilizers, the manufacturer's procedures must be met regarding truck wedges or screws. (r) Rigging. (1) The rigging work is done by a qualified rigger. (2) Synthetic slings are protected from: Abrasive, sharp or acute edges, and configurations that could cause a reduction of the sling's rated capacity, such as distortion or localized compression. Note: Requirements for the protection of wire rope slings are contained in 29 CFR 1926.251(c)(9). (3) When synthetic slings are used, the synthetic sling manufacturer's instructions, limitations, specifications and recommendations must be followed. § 1926.1405 Disassembly—additional requirements for dismantling of booms and jibs (applies to both the use of manufacturer procedures and employer procedures). Dismantling (including dismantling for changing the length of) booms and jibs. (a) None of the pins in the pendants are to be removed (partly or completely) when the pendants are in tension. (b) None of the pins (top or bottom) on boom sections located between the pendant attachment points and the crane/derrick body are to be removed (partly or completely) when the pendants are in tension. (c) None of the pins (top or bottom) on boom sections located between the uppermost boom section and the crane/derrick body are to be removed (partly or completely) when the boom is being supported by the uppermost boom section resting on the ground (or other support). (d) None of the top pins on boom sections located on the cantilevered portion of the boom being removed (the portion being removed ahead of the pendant attachment points) are to be removed (partly or completely) until the cantilevered section to be removed is fully supported. § 1926.1406 Assembly/Disassembly—employer procedures—general requirements. (a) When using employer procedures instead of manufacturer procedures for assembly/disassembly, the employer must ensure that the procedures: (1) Prevent unintended dangerous movement, and prevent collapse, of any part of the equipment. (2) Provide adequate support and stability of all parts of the equipment. (3) Position employees involved in the assembly/disassembly operation so that their exposure to unintended movement or collapse of part or all of the equipment is minimized. (b) Qualified person. § 1926.1407 Power line safety (up to 350 kV)—assembly and disassembly. (a) Before assembling or disassembling equipment, the employer must determine if any part of the equipment, load line, or load (including rigging and lifting accessories) could get, in the direction or area of assembly/disassembly, closer than 20 feet to a power line during the assembly/disassembly process. If so, the employer must meet the requirements in Option (1), Option (2), or Option (3) of this section, as follows: (1) Option (1)—Deenergize and ground. (2) Option (2) 20 foot clearance. (3) Option (3) Table A clearance. see (ii) Determine if any part of the equipment, load line, or load (including rigging and lifting accessories), could get closer than the minimum clearance distance to the power line permitted under Table A ( see (b) Preventing encroachment/electrocution. (1) Conduct a planning meeting with the Assembly/Disassembly director (A/D director), operator, assembly/disassembly crew and the other workers who will be in the assembly/disassembly area to review the location of the power line(s) and the steps that will be implemented to prevent encroachment/electrocution. (2) If tag lines are used, they must be nonconductive. (3) At least one of the following additional measures must be in place. The measure selected from this list must be effective in preventing encroachment. The additional measures are: (i) Use a dedicated spotter who is in continuous contact with the equipment operator. The dedicated spotter must: (A) Be equipped with a visual aid to assist in identifying the minimum clearance distance. Examples of a visual aid include, but are not limited to: A clearly visible line painted on the ground; a clearly visible line of stanchions; a set of clearly visible line-of-sight landmarks (such as a fence post behind the dedicated spotter and a building corner ahead of the dedicated spotter). (B) Be positioned to effectively gauge the clearance distance. (C) Where necessary, use equipment that enables the dedicated spotter to communicate directly with the operator. (D) Give timely information to the operator so that the required clearance distance can be maintained. (ii) A proximity alarm set to give the operator sufficient warning to prevent encroachment. (iii) A device that automatically warns the operator when to stop movement, such as a range control warning device. Such a device must be set to give the operator sufficient warning to prevent encroachment. (iv) A device that automatically limits range of movement, set to prevent encroachment. (v) An elevated warning line, barricade, or line of signs, in view of the operator, equipped with flags or similar high-visibility markings. (c) Assembly/disassembly below power lines prohibited. (d) Assembly/disassembly inside Table A clearance prohibited. see (e) Voltage information. (f) Power lines presumed energized. (g) Posting of electrocution warnings. § 1926.1408 Power line safety (up to 350 kV)—equipment operations. (a) Hazard assessments and precautions inside the work zone. (1) Identify the work zone by either: (i) Demarcating boundaries (such as with flags, or a device such as a range limit device or range control warning device) and prohibiting the operator from operating the equipment past those boundaries, or (ii) Defining the work zone as the area 360 degrees around the equipment, up to the equipment's maximum working radius. (2) Determine if any part of the equipment, load line or load (including rigging and lifting accessories), if operated up to the equipment's maximum working radius in the work zone, could get closer than 20 feet to a power line. If so, the employer must meet the requirements in Option (1), Option (2), or Option (3) of this section, as follows: (i) Option (1)—Deenergize and ground. (ii) Option (2) 20 foot clearance. (iii) Option (3) Table A clearance. see (B) Determine if any part of the equipment, load line or load (including rigging and lifting accessories), while operating up to the equipment's maximum working radius in the work zone, could get closer than the minimum approach distance of the power line permitted under Table A ( see (b) Preventing encroachment/electrocution. (1) Conduct a planning meeting with the operator and the other workers who will be in the area of the equipment or load to review the location of the power line(s), and the steps that will be implemented to prevent encroachment/electrocution. (2) If tag lines are used, they must be non-conductive. (3) Erect and maintain an elevated warning line, barricade, or line of signs, in view of the operator, equipped with flags or similar high-visibility markings, at 20 feet from the power line (if using Option (2) of this section) or at the minimum approach distance under Table A ( see (4) Implement at least one of the following measures: (i) A proximity alarm set to give the operator sufficient warning to prevent encroachment. (ii) A dedicated spotter who is in continuous contact with the operator. Where this measure is selected, the dedicated spotter must: (A) Be equipped with a visual aid to assist in identifying the minimum clearance distance. Examples of a visual aid include, but are not limited to: A clearly visible line painted on the ground; a clearly visible line of stanchions; a set of clearly visible line-of-sight landmarks (such as a fence post behind the dedicated spotter and a building corner ahead of the dedicated spotter). (B) Be positioned to effectively gauge the clearance distance. (C) Where necessary, use equipment that enables the dedicated spotter to communicate directly with the operator. (D) Give timely information to the operator so that the required clearance distance can be maintained. (iii) A device that automatically warns the operator when to stop movement, such as a range control warning device. Such a device must be set to give the operator sufficient warning to prevent encroachment. (iv) A device that automatically limits range of movement, set to prevent encroachment. (v) An insulating link/device, as defined in § 1926.1401, installed at a point between the end of the load line (or below) and the load. (5) The requirements of paragraph (b)(4) of this section do not apply to work covered by subpart V of this part. (c) Voltage information. (d) Operations below power lines. (2) Exceptions. (i) The work is covered by subpart V of this part. (ii) For equipment with non-extensible booms: The uppermost part of the equipment, with the boom at true vertical, would be more than 20 feet below the plane of the power line or more than the Table A of this section minimum clearance distance below the plane of the power line. (iii) For equipment with articulating or extensible booms: The uppermost part of the equipment, with the boom in the fully extended position, at true vertical, would be more than 20 feet below the plane of the power line or more than the Table A of this section minimum clearance distance below the plane of the power line. (iv) The employer demonstrates that compliance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section is infeasible and meets the requirements of § 1926.1410. (e) Power lines presumed energized. (f) When working near transmitter/communication towers where the equipment is close enough for an electrical charge to be induced in the equipment or materials being handled, the transmitter must be deenergized or the following precautions must be taken: (1) The equipment must be provided with an electrical ground. (2) If tag lines are used, they must be non-conductive. (g) Training. (i) The procedures to be followed in the event of electrical contact with a power line. Such training must include: (A) Information regarding the danger of electrocution from the operator simultaneously touching the equipment and the ground. (B) The importance to the operator's safety of remaining inside the cab except where there is an imminent danger of fire, explosion, or other emergency that necessitates leaving the cab. (C) The safest means of evacuating from equipment that may be energized. (D) The danger of the potentially energized zone around the equipment (step potential). (E) The need for crew in the area to avoid approaching or touching the equipment and the load. (F) Safe clearance distance from power lines. (ii) Power lines are presumed to be energized unless the utility owner/operator confirms that the power line has been and continues to be deenergized and visibly grounded at the worksite. (iii) Power lines are presumed to be uninsulated unless the utility owner/operator or a registered engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electrical power transmission and distribution confirms that a line is insulated. (iv) The limitations of an insulating link/device, proximity alarm, and range control (and similar) device, if used. (v) The procedures to be followed to properly ground equipment and the limitations of grounding. (2) Employees working as dedicated spotters must be trained to enable them to effectively perform their task, including training on the applicable requirements of this section. (3) Training under this section must be administered in accordance with § 1926.1430(g). (h) Devices originally designed by the manufacturer for use as: A safety device ( see Table A—Minimum Clearance Distances Voltage Minimum clearance distance up to 50 10 over 50 to 200 15 over 200 to 350 20 over 350 to 500 25 over 500 to 750 35 over 750 to 1,000 45 over 1,000 (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electrical power transmission and distribution). Note: § 1926.1409 Power line safety (over 350 kV). The requirements of §§ 1926.1407 and 1926.1408 apply to power lines over 350 kV except: (a) For power lines at or below 1000 kV, wherever the distance “20 feet” is specified, the distance “50 feet” must be substituted; and (b) For power lines over 1000 kV, the minimum clearance distance must be established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electrical power transmission and distribution. § 1926.1410 Power line safety (all voltages)—equipment operations closer than the Table A zone. Equipment operations in which any part of the equipment, load line, or load (including rigging and lifting accessories) is closer than the minimum approach distance under Table A of § 1926.1408 to an energized power line is prohibited, except where the employer demonstrates that all of the following requirements are met: (a) The employer determines that it is infeasible to do the work without breaching the minimum approach distance under Table A of § 1926.1408. (b) The employer determines that, after consultation with the utility owner/operator, it is infeasible to deenergize and ground the power line or relocate the power line. (c) Minimum clearance distance. (2) Paragraph (c)(1) of this section does not apply to work covered by subpart V of this part; instead, for such work, the minimum approach distances established by the employer under § 1926.960(c)(1)(i) apply. (d) A planning meeting with the employer and utility owner/operator (or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electrical power transmission and distribution) is held to determine the procedures that will be followed to prevent electrical contact and electrocution. At a minimum these procedures must include: (1) If the power line is equipped with a device that automatically reenergizes the circuit in the event of a power line contact, before the work begins, the automatic reclosing feature of the circuit interrupting device must be made inoperative if the design of the device permits. (2) A dedicated spotter who is in continuous contact with the operator. The dedicated spotter must: (i) Be equipped with a visual aid to assist in identifying the minimum clearance distance. Examples of a visual aid include, but are not limited to: A line painted on the ground; a clearly visible line of stanchions; a set of clearly visible line-of-sight landmarks (such as a fence post behind the dedicated spotter and a building corner ahead of the dedicated spotter). (ii) Be positioned to effectively gauge the clearance distance. (iii) Where necessary, use equipment that enables the dedicated spotter to communicate directly with the operator. (iv) Give timely information to the operator so that the required clearance distance can be maintained. (3) An elevated warning line, or barricade (not attached to the crane), in view of the operator (either directly or through video equipment), equipped with flags or similar high-visibility markings, to prevent electrical contact. However, this provision does not apply to work covered by subpart V of this part. (4) Insulating link/device. (ii) Paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section does not apply to work covered by subpart V of this part. (iii) [Reserved] (iv) Until November 8, 2011, the following procedure may be substituted for the requirement in paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section: All employees, excluding equipment operators located on the equipment, who may come in contact with the equipment, the load line, or the load must be insulated or guarded from the equipment, the load line, and the load. Insulating gloves rated for the voltage involved are adequate insulation for the purposes of this paragraph. (v) Until November 8, 2013, the following procedure may be substituted for the requirement in (d)(4)(i) of this section: (A) The employer must use a link/device manufactured on or before November 8, 2011, that meets the definition of an insulating link/device, except that it has not been approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory, and that is maintained and used in accordance with manufacturer requirements and recommendations, and is installed at a point between the end of the load line (or below) and the load; and (B) All employees, excluding equipment operators located on the equipment, who may come in contact with the equipment, the load line, or the load must be insulated or guarded from the equipment, the load line, and the load through an additional means other than the device described in paragraph (d)(4)(v)(A) of this section. Insulating gloves rated for the voltage involved are adequate additional means of protection for the purposes of this paragraph. (5) Nonconductive rigging if the rigging may be within the Table A of § 1926.1408 distance during the operation. (6) If the equipment is equipped with a device that automatically limits range of movement, it must be used and set to prevent any part of the equipment, load line, or load (including rigging and lifting accessories) from breaching the minimum approach distance established under paragraph (c) of this section. (7) If a tag line is used, it must be of the nonconductive type. (8) Barricades forming a perimeter at least 10 feet away from the equipment to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering the work area. In areas where obstacles prevent the barricade from being at least 10 feet away, the barricade must be as far from the equipment as feasible. (9) Workers other than the operator must be prohibited from touching the load line above the insulating link/device and crane. Operators remotely operating the equipment from the ground must use either wireless controls that isolate the operator from the equipment or insulating mats that insulate the operator from the ground. (10) Only personnel essential to the operation are permitted to be in the area of the crane and load. (11) The equipment must be properly grounded. (12) Insulating line hose or cover-up must be installed by the utility owner/operator except where such devices are unavailable for the line voltages involved. (e) The procedures developed to comply with paragraph (d) of this section are documented and immediately available on-site. (f) The equipment user and utility owner/operator (or registered professional engineer) meet with the equipment operator and the other workers who will be in the area of the equipment or load to review the procedures that will be implemented to prevent breaching the minimum approach distance established in paragraph (c) of this section and prevent electrocution. (g) The procedures developed to comply with paragraph (d) of this section are implemented. (h) The utility owner/operator (or registered professional engineer) and all employers of employees involved in the work must identify one person who will direct the implementation of the procedures. The person identified in accordance with this paragraph must direct the implementation of the procedures and must have the authority to stop work at any time to ensure safety. (i) [Reserved] (j) If a problem occurs implementing the procedures being used to comply with paragraph (d) of this section, or indicating that those procedures are inadequate to prevent electrocution, the employer must safely stop operations and either develop new procedures to comply with paragraph (d) of this section or have the utility owner/operator deenergize and visibly ground or relocate the power line before resuming work. (k) Devices originally designed by the manufacturer for use as a safety device ( see (l) [Reserved] (m) The employer must train each operator and crew member assigned to work with the equipment in accordance with § 1926.1408(g). [75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 79 FR 20743, Apr. 11, 2014] § 1926.1411 Power line safety—while traveling under or near power lines with no load. (a) This section establishes procedures and criteria that must be met for equipment traveling under or near a power line on a construction site with no load. Equipment traveling on a construction site with a load is governed by § 1926.1408, § 1926.1409 or § 1926.1410, whichever is appropriate, and § 1926.1417(u). (b) The employer must ensure that: (1) The boom/mast and boom/mast support system are lowered sufficiently to meet the requirements of this paragraph. (2) The clearances specified in Table T of this section are maintained. (3) The effects of speed and terrain on equipment movement (including movement of the boom/mast) are considered so that those effects do not cause the minimum clearance distances specified in Table T of this section to be breached. (4) Dedicated spotter. (i) Be positioned to effectively gauge the clearance distance. (ii) Where necessary, use equipment that enables the dedicated spotter to communicate directly with the operator. (iii) Give timely information to the operator so that the required clearance distance can be maintained. (5) Additional precautions for traveling in poor visibility. (i) The power lines are illuminated or another means of identifying the location of the lines is used. (ii) A safe path of travel is identified and used. Table T—Minimum Clearance Distances While Traveling With No Load Voltage While traveling—minimum clearance distance up to 0.75 4 over .75 to 50 6 over 50 to 345 10 over 345 to 750 16 Over 750 to 1,000 20 Over 1,000 (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electrical power transmission and distribution). § 1926.1412 Inspections. (a) Modified equipment. (i) The inspection must assure that the modifications or additions have been done in accordance with the approval obtained pursuant to § 1926.1434 (Equipment modifications). (ii) The inspection must include functional testing of the equipment. (2) Equipment must not be used until an inspection under this paragraph demonstrates that the requirements of paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section have been met. (b) Repaired/adjusted equipment. (i) The qualified person must determine if the repair/adjustment meets manufacturer equipment criteria (where applicable and available). (ii) Where manufacturer equipment criteria are unavailable or inapplicable, the qualified person must: (A) Determine if a registered professional engineer (RPE) is needed to develop criteria for the repair/adjustment. If an RPE is not needed, the employer must ensure that the criteria are developed by the qualified person. If an RPE is needed, the employer must ensure that they are developed by an RPE. (B) Determine if the repair/adjustment meets the criteria developed in accordance with paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(A) of this section. (iii) The inspection must include functional testing of the repaired/adjusted parts and other components that may be affected by the repair/adjustment. (4) Equipment must not be used until an inspection under this paragraph demonstrates that the repair/adjustment meets the requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section (or, where applicable, paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section). (c) Post-assembly. (2) Where manufacturer equipment criteria are unavailable, a qualified person must: (i) Determine if a registered professional engineer (RPE) familiar with the type of equipment involved is needed to develop criteria for the equipment configuration. If an RPE is not needed, the employer must ensure that the criteria are developed by the qualified person. If an RPE is needed, the employer must ensure that they are developed by an RPE. (ii) Determine if the equipment meets the criteria developed in accordance with paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section. (3) Equipment must not be used until an inspection under this paragraph demonstrates that the equipment is configured in accordance with the applicable criteria. (d) Each shift. (i) Control mechanisms for maladjustments interfering with proper operation. (ii) Control and drive mechanisms for apparent excessive wear of components and contamination by lubricants, water or other foreign matter. (iii) Air, hydraulic, and other pressurized lines for deterioration or leakage, particularly those which flex in normal operation. (iv) Hydraulic system for proper fluid level. (v) Hooks and latches for deformation, cracks, excessive wear, or damage such as from chemicals or heat. (vi) Wire rope reeving for compliance with the manufacturer's specifications. (vii) Wire rope, in accordance with § 1926.1413(a). (viii) Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of apparent excessive deterioration, dirt or moisture accumulation. (ix) Tires (when in use) for proper inflation and condition. (x) Ground conditions around the equipment for proper support, including ground settling under and around outriggers/stabilizers and supporting foundations, ground water accumulation, or similar conditions. This paragraph does not apply to the inspection of ground conditions for railroad tracks and their underlying support when the railroad tracks are part of the general railroad system of transportation that is regulated pursuant to the Federal Railroad Administration under 49 CFR part 213. (xi) The equipment for level position within the tolerances specified by the equipment manufacturer's recommendations, both before each shift and after each move and setup. (xii) Operator cab windows for significant cracks, breaks, or other deficiencies that would hamper the operator's view. (xiii) Rails, rail stops, rail clamps and supporting surfaces when the equipment has rail traveling. This paragraph does not apply to the inspection of rails, rail stops, rail clamps and supporting surfaces when the railroad tracks are part of the general railroad system of transportation that is regulated pursuant to the Federal Railroad Administration under 49 CFR part 213. (xiv) Safety devices and operational aids for proper operation. (2) If any deficiency in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (xiii) of this section (or in additional inspection items required to be checked for specific types of equipment in accordance with other sections of this standard) is identified, an immediate determination must be made by the competent person as to whether the deficiency constitutes a safety hazard. If the deficiency is determined to constitute a safety hazard, the equipment must be taken out of service until it has been corrected. See (3) If any deficiency in paragraph (d)(1)(xiv) of this section (safety devices/operational aids) is identified, the action specified in §§ 1926.1415 and 1926.1416 must be taken prior to using the equipment. (e) Monthly. (2) Equipment must not be used until an inspection under this paragraph demonstrates that no corrective action under paragraphs (d)(2) and (3) of this section is required. (3) Documentation. (A) The items checked and the results of the inspection. (B) The name and signature of the person who conducted the inspection and the date. (ii) This document must be retained for a minimum of three months. (f) Annual/comprehensive. (2) In addition, at least every 12 months, the equipment must be inspected by a qualified person. Disassembly is required, as necessary, to complete the inspection. The equipment must be inspected for all of the following: (i) Equipment structure (including the boom and, if equipped, the jib): (A) Structural members: Deformed, cracked, or significantly corroded. (B) Bolts, rivets and other fasteners: loose, failed or significantly corroded. (C) Welds for cracks. (ii) Sheaves and drums for cracks or significant wear. (iii) Parts such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, rollers and locking devices for distortion, cracks or significant wear. (iv) Brake and clutch system parts, linings, pawls and ratchets for excessive wear. (v) Safety devices and operational aids for proper operation (including significant inaccuracies). (vi) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or other power plants for safety-related problems (such as leaking exhaust and emergency shut-down feature) and conditions, and proper operation. (vii) Chains and chain drive sprockets for excessive wear of sprockets and excessive chain stretch. (viii) Travel steering, brakes, and locking devices, for proper operation. (ix) Tires for damage or excessive wear. (x) Hydraulic, pneumatic and other pressurized hoses, fittings and tubing, as follows: (A) Flexible hose or its junction with the fittings for indications of leaks. (B) Threaded or clamped joints for leaks. (C) Outer covering of the hose for blistering, abnormal deformation or other signs of failure/impending failure. (D) Outer surface of a hose, rigid tube, or fitting for indications of excessive abrasion or scrubbing. (xi) Hydraulic and pneumatic pumps and motors, as follows: (A) Performance indicators: Unusual noises or vibration, low operating speed, excessive heating of the fluid, low pressure. (B) Loose bolts or fasteners. (C) Shaft seals and joints between pump sections for leaks. (xii) Hydraulic and pneumatic valves, as follows: (A) Spools: Sticking, improper return to neutral, and leaks. (B) Leaks. (C) Valve housing cracks. (D) Relief valves: Failure to reach correct pressure (if there is a manufacturer procedure for checking pressure, it must be followed). (xiii) Hydraulic and pneumatic cylinders, as follows: (A) Drifting caused by fluid leaking across the piston. (B) Rod seals and welded joints for leaks. (C) Cylinder rods for scores, nicks, or dents. (D) Case (barrel) for significant dents. (E) Rod eyes and connecting joints: Loose or deformed. (xiv) Outrigger or stabilizer pads/floats for excessive wear or cracks. (xv) Slider pads for excessive wear or cracks. (xvi) Electrical components and wiring for cracked or split insulation and loose or corroded terminations. (xvii) Warning labels and decals originally supplied with the equipment by the manufacturer or otherwise required under this standard: Missing or unreadable. (xviii) Originally equipped operator seat (or equivalent): Missing. (xix) Operator seat: Unserviceable. (xx) Originally equipped steps, ladders, handrails, guards: Missing. (xxi) Steps, ladders, handrails, guards: In unusable/unsafe condition. (3) This inspection must include functional testing to determine that the equipment as configured in the inspection is functioning properly. (4) If any deficiency is identified, an immediate determination must be made by the qualified person as to whether the deficiency constitutes a safety hazard or, though not yet a safety hazard, needs to be monitored in the monthly inspections. (5) If the qualified person determines that a deficiency is a safety hazard, the equipment must be taken out of service until it has been corrected, except when temporary alternative measures are implemented as specified in § 1926.1416(d) or § 1926.1435(e). See (6) If the qualified person determines that, though not presently a safety hazard, the deficiency needs to be monitored, the employer must ensure that the deficiency is checked in the monthly inspections. (7) Documentation of annual/comprehensive inspection. (i) The items checked and the results of the inspection. (ii) The name and signature of the person who conducted the inspection and the date. (g) Severe service. (1) Inspect the equipment for structural damage to determine if the equipment can continue to be used safely. (2) In light of the use/conditions determine whether any items/conditions listed in paragraph (f) of this section need to be inspected; if so, the qualified person must inspect those items/conditions. (3) If a deficiency is found, the employer must follow the requirements in paragraphs (f)(4) through (6) of this section. (h) Equipment not in regular use. (i) [Reserved] (j) Any part of a manufacturer's procedures regarding inspections that relate to safe operation (such as to a safety device or operational aid, critical part of a control system, power plant, braking system, load-sustaining structural components, load hook, or in-use operating mechanism) that is more comprehensive or has a more frequent schedule of inspection than the requirements of this section must be followed. (k) All documents produced under this section must be available, during the applicable document retention period, to all persons who conduct inspections under this section. § 1926.1413 Wire rope—inspection. (a) Shift inspection. (2) Apparent deficiencies Category I. (A) Significant distortion of the wire rope structure such as kinking, crushing, unstranding, birdcaging, signs of core failure or steel core protrusion between the outer strands. (B) Significant corrosion. (C) Electric arc damage (from a source other than power lines) or heat damage. (D) Improperly applied end connections. (E) Significantly corroded, cracked, bent, or worn end connections (such as from severe service). (ii) Category II. (A) Visible broken wires, as follows: ( 1 ( 2 ( 3 (B) A diameter reduction of more than 5% from nominal diameter. (iii) Category III. (A) In rotation resistant wire rope, core protrusion or other distortion indicating core failure. (B) Prior electrical contact with a power line. (C) A broken strand. (3) Critical review items. (i) Rotation resistant wire rope in use. (ii) Wire rope being used for boom hoists and luffing hoists, particularly at reverse bends. (iii) Wire rope at flange points, crossover points and repetitive pickup points on drums. (iv) Wire rope at or near terminal ends. (v) Wire rope in contact with saddles, equalizer sheaves or other sheaves where rope travel is limited. (4) Removal from service. see (A) The wire rope is replaced ( see (B) If the deficiency is localized, the problem is corrected by severing the wire rope in two; the undamaged portion may continue to be used. Joining lengths of wire rope by splicing is prohibited. If a rope is shortened under this paragraph, the employer must ensure that the drum will still have two wraps of wire when the load and/or boom is in its lowest position. (ii) If a deficiency in Category II ( see (A) The employer complies with the wire rope manufacturer's established criterion for removal from service or a different criterion that the wire rope manufacturer has approved in writing for that specific wire rope ( see (B) The wire rope is replaced ( see (C) If the deficiency is localized, the problem is corrected by severing the wire rope in two; the undamaged portion may continue to be used. Joining lengths of wire rope by splicing is prohibited. If a rope is shortened under this paragraph, the employer must ensure that the drum will still have two wraps of wire when the load and/or boom is in its lowest position. (iii) If a deficiency in Category III is identified, operations involving use of the wire rope in question must be prohibited until: (A) The wire rope is replaced ( see (B) If the deficiency (other than power line contact) is localized, the problem is corrected by severing the wire rope in two; the undamaged portion may continue to be used. Joining lengths of wire rope by splicing is prohibited. Repair of wire rope that contacted an energized power line is also prohibited. If a rope is shortened under this paragraph, the employer must ensure that the drum will still have two wraps of wire when the load and/or boom is in its lowest position. (iv) Where a wire rope is required to be removed from service under this section, either the equipment (as a whole) or the hoist with that wire rope must be tagged-out, in accordance with § 1926.1417(f)(1), until the wire rope is repaired or replaced. (b) Monthly inspection. (2) The inspection must include any deficiencies that the qualified person who conducts the annual inspection determines under paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section must be monitored. (3) Wire ropes on equipment must not be used until an inspection under this paragraph demonstrates that no corrective action under paragraph (a)(4) of this section is required. (4) The inspection must be documented according to § 1926.1412(e)(3) (monthly inspection documentation). (c) Annual/comprehensive. (2) In addition, at least every 12 months, the wire ropes in use on equipment must be inspected by a qualified person, as follows: (i) The inspection must be for deficiencies of the types listed in paragraph (a)(2) of this section. (ii) The inspection must be complete and thorough, covering the surface of the entire length of the wire ropes, with particular attention given to all of the following: (A) Critical review items listed in paragraph (a)(3) of this section. (B) Those sections that are normally hidden during shift and monthly inspections. (C) Wire rope subject to reverse bends. (D) Wire rope passing over sheaves. (iii) Exception: (3) If a deficiency is identified, an immediate determination must be made by the qualified person as to whether the deficiency constitutes a safety hazard. (i) If the deficiency is determined to constitute a safety hazard, operations involving use of the wire rope in question must be prohibited until: (A) The wire rope is replaced ( see (B) If the deficiency is localized, the problem is corrected by severing the wire rope in two; the undamaged portion may continue to be used. Joining lengths of wire rope by splicing is prohibited. If a rope is shortened under this paragraph, the employer must ensure that the drum will still have two wraps of wire when the load and/or boom is in its lowest position. (ii) If the qualified person determines that, though not presently a safety hazard, the deficiency needs to be monitored, the employer must ensure that the deficiency is checked in the monthly inspections. (4) The inspection must be documented according to § 1926.1412(f)(7) (annual/comprehensive inspection documentation). (d) Rope lubricants that are of the type that hinder inspection must not be used. (e) All documents produced under this section must be available, during the applicable document retention period, to all persons who conduct inspections under this section. § 1926.1414 Wire rope—selection and installation criteria. (a) Original equipment wire rope and replacement wire rope must be selected and installed in accordance with the requirements of this section. Selection of replacement wire rope must be in accordance with the recommendations of the wire rope manufacturer, the equipment manufacturer, or a qualified person. (b) Wire rope design criteria: (1) Option (1). see (2) Option (2). (c) Wire rope must be compatible with the safe functioning of the equipment. (d) Boom hoist reeving. (2) Rotation resistant ropes must be used for boom hoist reeving only where the requirements of paragraph (e)(4)(ii) of this section are met. (e) Rotation resistant ropes Definitions Type I rotation resistant wire rope (“Type I”). (ii) Type II rotation resistant wire rope (“Type II”). (iii) Type III rotation resistant wire rope (“Type III”). (2) Requirements. (ii) Rotation resistant ropes (including Types I, II and III) must have an operating design factor of no less than 3.5. (iii) Type I must have an operating design factor of no less than 5, except where the wire rope manufacturer and the equipment manufacturer approves the design factor, in writing. (iv) Types II and III must have an operating design factor of no less than 5, except where the requirements of paragraph (e)(3) of this section are met. (3) When Types II and III with an operating design factor of less than 5 are used (for non-duty cycle, non-repetitive lifts), the following requirements must be met for each lifting operation: (i) A qualified person must inspect the rope in accordance with § 1926.1413(a). The rope must be used only if the qualified person determines that there are no deficiencies constituting a hazard. In making this determination, more than one broken wire in any one rope lay must be considered a hazard. (ii) Operations must be conducted in such a manner and at such speeds as to minimize dynamic effects. (iii) Each lift made under § 1926.1414(e)(3) must be recorded in the monthly and annual inspection documents. Such prior uses must be considered by the qualified person in determining whether to use the rope again. (4) Additional requirements for rotation resistant ropes for boom hoist reeving. (ii) Rotation resistant ropes may be used as boom hoist reeving when load hoists are used as boom hoists for attachments such as luffing attachments or boom and mast attachment systems. Under these conditions, all of the following requirements must be met: (A) The drum must provide a first layer rope pitch diameter of not less than 18 times the nominal diameter of the rope used. (B) The requirements in § 1926.1426(a) (irrespective of the date of manufacture of the equipment), and § 1926.1426(b). (C) The requirements in ASME B30.5-2004 sections 5-1.3.2(a), (a)(2) through (a)(4), (b) and (d) (incorporated by reference, see (D) All sheaves used in the boom hoist reeving system must have a rope pitch diameter of not less than 18 times the nominal diameter of the rope used. (E) The operating design factor for the boom hoist reeving system must be not less than five. (F) The operating design factor for these ropes must be the total minimum breaking force of all parts of rope in the system divided by the load imposed on the rope system when supporting the static weights of the structure and the load within the equipment's rated capacity. (G) When provided, a power-controlled lowering system must be capable of handling rated capacities and speeds as specified by the manufacturer. (f) Wire rope clips used in conjunction with wedge sockets must be attached to the unloaded dead end of the rope only, except that the use of devices specifically designed for dead-ending rope in a wedge socket is permitted. (g) Socketing must be done in the manner specified by the manufacturer of the wire rope or fitting. (h) Prior to cutting a wire rope, seizings must be placed on each side of the point to be cut. The length and number of seizings must be in accordance with the wire rope manufacturer's instructions. § 1926.1415 Safety devices. (a) Safety devices. (1) Crane level indicator. (ii) If a built-in crane level indicator is not working properly, it must be tagged-out or removed. If a removable crane level indicator is not working properly, it must be removed. (iii) This requirement does not apply to portal cranes, derricks, floating cranes/derricks and land cranes/derricks on barges, pontoons, vessels or other means of flotation. (2) Boom stops, except for derricks and hydraulic booms. (3) Jib stops (if a jib is attached), except for derricks. (4) Equipment with foot pedal brakes must have locks. (5) Hydraulic outrigger jacks and hydraulic stabilizer jacks must have an integral holding device/check valve. (6) Equipment on rails must have rail clamps and rail stops, except for portal cranes. (7) Horn. (ii) If a built-in horn is not working properly, it must be tagged-out or removed. If a removable horn is not working properly, it must be removed. (b) Proper operation required. See § 1926.1416 Operational aids. (a) The devices listed in this section (“listed operational aids”) are required on all equipment covered by this subpart, unless otherwise specified. (1) The requirements in paragraphs (e)(1), (e)(2), and (e)(3) of this section do not apply to articulating cranes. (2) The requirements in paragraphs (d)(3), (e)(1), and (e)(4) of this section apply only to those digger derricks manufactured after November 8, 2011. (b) Operations must not begin unless the listed operational aids are in proper working order, except where an operational aid is being repaired the employer uses the specified temporary alternative measures. The time periods permitted for repairing defective operational aids are specified in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section. More protective alternative measures specified by the crane/derrick manufacturer, if any, must be followed. (c) If a listed operational aid stops working properly during operations, the operator must safely stop operations until the temporary alternative measures are implemented or the device is again working properly. If a replacement part is no longer available, the use of a substitute device that performs the same type of function is permitted and is not considered a modification under § 1926.1434. (d) Category I operational aids and alternative measures. Exception: See (1) Boom hoist limiting device. Temporary alternative measures (use at least one). (A) Use a boom angle indicator. (B) Clearly mark the boom hoist cable (so that it can easily be seen by the operator) at a point that will give the operator sufficient time to stop the hoist to keep the boom within the minimum allowable radius. In addition, install mirrors or remote video cameras and displays if necessary for the operator to see the mark. (C) Clearly mark the boom hoist cable (so that it can easily be seen by a spotter) at a point that will give the spotter sufficient time to signal the operator and have the operator stop the hoist to keep the boom within the minimum allowable radius. (ii) If the equipment was manufactured on or before December 16, 1969, and is not equipped with a boom hoist limiting device, at least one of the measures in paragraphs (d)(1)(i)(A) through (C) of this section must be used. (2) Luffing jib limiting device. (3) Anti two-blocking device. Temporary alternative measures: (ii) Lattice boom cranes. (B) Lattice boom cranes and derricks manufactured after November 8, 2011 must be equipped with a device which automatically prevents damage and load failure from contact between the load block, overhaul ball, or similar component, and the boom tip (or fixed upper block or similar component). The device(s) must prevent such damage/failure at all points where two-blocking could occur. (C) Exception. (D) Temporary alternative measures. (iii) Articulating cranes manufactured after December 31, 1999, that are equipped with a load hoist must be equipped with a device that automatically prevents damage from contact between the load block, overhaul ball, or similar component, and the boom tip (or fixed upper block or similar component). The device must prevent such damage at all points where two-blocking could occur. Temporary alternative measures: (e) Category II operational aids and alternative measures. Exception: See (1) Boom angle or radius indicator. Temporary alternative measures: (2) Jib angle indicator if the equipment has a luffing jib. Temporary alternative measures: (3) Boom length indicator if the equipment has a telescopic boom, except where the rated capacity is independent of the boom length. Temporary alternative measures. (i) Mark the boom with measured marks to calculate boom length, (ii) Calculate boom length from boom angle and radius measurements, (iii) Measure the boom with a measuring device. (4) Load weighing and similar devices. Temporary alternative measures: (ii) Articulating cranes manufactured after November 8, 2011 must have at least one of the following: automatic overload prevention device, load weighing device, load moment (or rated capacity) indicator, or load moment (rated capacity) limiter. Temporary alternative measures: (5) The following devices are required on equipment manufactured after November 8, 2011: (i) Outrigger/stabilizer position (horizontal beam extension) sensor/monitor if the equipment has outriggers or stabilizers. Temporary alternative measures: (ii) Hoist drum rotation indicator if the equipment has a hoist drum not visible from the operator's station. Temporary alternative measures: § 1926.1417 Operation. (a) The employer must comply with all manufacturer procedures applicable to the operational functions of equipment, including its use with attachments. (b) Unavailable operation procedures. (2) Procedures for the operational controls must be developed by a qualified person. (3) Procedures related to the capacity of the equipment must be developed and signed by a registered professional engineer familiar with the equipment. (c) Accessibility of procedures. (2) Where rated capacities are available in the cab only in electronic form: In the event of a failure which makes the rated capacities inaccessible, the operator must immediately cease operations or follow safe shut-down procedures until the rated capacities (in electronic or other form) are available. (d) The operator must not engage in any practice or activity that diverts his/her attention while actually engaged in operating the equipment, such as the use of cellular phones (other than when used for signal communications). (e) Leaving the equipment unattended. (i) The operator remains adjacent to the equipment and is not engaged in any other duties. (ii) The load is to be held suspended for a period of time exceeding normal lifting operations. (iii) The competent person determines that it is safe to do so and implements measures necessary to restrain the boom hoist and telescoping, load, swing, and outrigger or stabilizer functions. (iv) Barricades or caution lines, and notices, are erected to prevent all employees from entering the fall zone. No employees, including those listed in §§ 1926.1425(b)(1) through (3), § 1926.1425(d) or § 1926.1425(e), are permitted in the fall zone. (2) The provisions in § 1926.1417(e)(1) do not apply to working gear (such as slings, spreader bars, ladders, and welding machines) where the weight of the working gear is negligible relative to the lifting capacity of the equipment as positioned, and the working gear is suspended over an area other than an entrance or exit. (f) Tag-out Tagging out of service equipment/functions. (2) Response to “do not operate”/tag-out signs. (A) No one is servicing, working on, or otherwise in a dangerous position on the machine. (B) The equipment has been repaired and is working properly. (ii) If there is a warning (tag-out or maintenance/do not operate) sign on any other switch or control, the operator must not activate that switch or control until the sign has been removed by a person authorized to remove it, or until the operator has verified that the requirements in paragraphs (f)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section have been met. (g) Before starting the engine, the operator must verify that all controls are in the proper starting position and that all personnel are in the clear. (h) Storm warning. (i) [Reserved] (j) If equipment adjustments or repairs are necessary: (1) The operator must, in writing, promptly inform the person designated by the employer to receive such information and, where there are successive shifts, to the next operator; and (2) The employer must notify all affected employees, at the beginning of each shift, of the necessary adjustments or repairs and all alternative measures. (k) Safety devices and operational aids must not be used as a substitute for the exercise of professional judgment by the operator. (l) [Reserved] (m) If the competent person determines that there is a slack rope condition requiring re-spooling of the rope, it must be verified (before starting to lift) that the rope is seated on the drum and in the sheaves as the slack is removed. (n) The competent person must adjust the equipment and/or operations to address the effect of wind, ice, and snow on equipment stability and rated capacity. (o) Compliance with rated capacity. (2) The operator must not be required to operate the equipment in a manner that would violate paragraph (o)(1) of this section. (3) Load weight. (i) The weight of the load must be determined from a source recognized by the industry (such as the load's manufacturer), or by a calculation method recognized by the industry (such as calculating a steel beam from measured dimensions and a known per foot weight), or by other equally reliable means. In addition, when requested by the operator, this information must be provided to the operator prior to the lift; or (ii) The operator must begin hoisting the load to determine, using a load weighing device, load moment indicator, rated capacity indicator, or rated capacity limiter, if it exceeds 75 percent of the maximum rated capacity at the longest radius that will be used during the lift operation. If it does, the operator must not proceed with the lift until he/she verifies the weight of the load in accordance with paragraph (o)(3)(i) of this section. (p) The boom or other parts of the equipment must not contact any obstruction. (q) The equipment must not be used to drag or pull loads sideways. (r) On wheel-mounted equipment, no loads must be lifted over the front area, except as permitted by the manufacturer. (s) The operator must test the brakes each time a load that is 90% or more of the maximum line pull is handled by lifting the load a few inches and applying the brakes. In duty cycle and repetitive lifts where each lift is 90% or more of the maximum line pull, this requirement applies to the first lift but not to successive lifts. (t) Neither the load nor the boom must be lowered below the point where less than two full wraps of rope remain on their respective drums. (u) Traveling with a load. (2) Where traveling with a load, the employer must ensure that: (i) A competent person supervises the operation, determines if it is necessary to reduce rated capacity, and makes determinations regarding load position, boom location, ground support, travel route, overhead obstructions, and speed of movement necessary to ensure safety. (ii) The determinations of the competent person required in paragraph (u)(2)(i) of this section are implemented. (iii) For equipment with tires, tire pressure specified by the manufacturer is maintained. (v) Rotational speed of the equipment must be such that the load does not swing out beyond the radius at which it can be controlled. (w) A tag or restraint line must be used if necessary to prevent rotation of the load that would be hazardous. (x) The brakes must be adjusted in accordance with manufacturer procedures to prevent unintended movement. (y) The operator must obey a stop (or emergency stop) signal, irrespective of who gives it. (z) Swinging locomotive cranes. (aa) Counterweight/ballast. (i) Equipment must not be operated without the counterweight or ballast in place as specified by the manufacturer. (ii) The maximum counterweight or ballast specified by the manufacturer for the equipment must not be exceeded. (2) Counterweight/ballast requirements for tower cranes are specified in § 1926.1435(b)(8). § 1926.1418 Authority to stop operation. Whenever there is a concern as to safety, the operator must have the authority to stop and refuse to handle loads until a qualified person has determined that safety has been assured. § 1926.1419 Signals—general requirements. (a) A signal person must be provided in each of the following situations: (1) The point of operation, meaning the load travel or the area near or at load placement, is not in full view of the operator. (2) When the equipment is traveling, the view in the direction of travel is obstructed. (3) Due to site specific safety concerns, either the operator or the person handling the load determines that it is necessary. (b) Types of signals. (c) Hand signals. see Exception: (2) Non-standard hand signals. (d) New signals. (1) The new signals provide at least equally effective communication as voice, audible, or Standard Method hand signals, or (2) The new signals comply with a national consensus standard that provides at least equally effective communication as voice, audible, or Standard Method hand signals. (e) Suitability. etc. (f) During operations requiring signals, the ability to transmit signals between the operator and signal person must be maintained. If that ability is interrupted at any time, the operator must safely stop operations requiring signals until it is reestablished and a proper signal is given and understood. (g) If the operator becomes aware of a safety problem and needs to communicate with the signal person, the operator must safely stop operations. Operations must not resume until the operator and signal person agree that the problem has been resolved. (h) Only one person may give signals to a crane/derrick at a time, except in circumstances covered by paragraph (j) of this section. (i) [Reserved] (j) Anyone who becomes aware of a safety problem must alert the operator or signal person by giving the stop or emergency stop signal. ( Note: (k) All directions given to the operator by the signal person must be given from the operator's direction perspective. (l) [Reserved] (m) Communication with multiple cranes/derricks. (1) for each signal, prior to giving the function/direction, the signal person must identify the crane/derrick the signal is for, or (2) must use an equally effective method of identifying which crane/derrick the signal is for. § 1926.1420 Signals—radio, telephone or other electronic transmission of signals. (a) The device(s) used to transmit signals must be tested on site before beginning operations to ensure that the signal transmission is effective, clear, and reliable. (b) Signal transmission must be through a dedicated channel, except: (1) Multiple cranes/derricks and one or more signal persons may share a dedicated channel for the purpose of coordinating operations. (2) Where a crane is being operated on or adjacent to railroad tracks, and the actions of the crane operator need to be coordinated with the movement of other equipment or trains on the same or adjacent tracks. (c) The operator's reception of signals must be by a hands-free system. § 1926.1421 Signals—voice signals—additional requirements. (a) Prior to beginning operations, the operator, signal person and lift director (if there is one), must contact each other and agree on the voice signals that will be used. Once the voice signals are agreed upon, these workers need not meet again to discuss voice signals unless another worker is added or substituted, there is confusion about the voice signals, or a voice signal is to be changed. (b) Each voice signal must contain the following three elements, given in the following order: function (such as hoist, boom, etc. (c) The operator, signal person and lift director (if there is one), must be able to effectively communicate in the language used. § 1926.1422 Signals—hand signal chart. Hand signal charts must be either posted on the equipment or conspicuously posted in the vicinity of the hoisting operations. § 1926.1423 Fall protection. (a) Application. (2) Paragraphs (c)(1), (c)(2), (d), (g), (j) and (k) of this section apply to all equipment covered by this subpart. (3) Paragraphs (c)(4) and (h) of this section apply only to tower cranes. (b) Boom walkways. (2) Boom walkway criteria. (ii) Guardrails, railings and other permanent fall protection attachments along walkways are: (A) Not required. (B) Prohibited on booms supported by pendant ropes or bars if the guardrails/railings/attachments could be snagged by the ropes or bars. (C) Prohibited if of the removable type (designed to be installed and removed each time the boom is assembled/disassembled). (D) Where not prohibited, guardrails or railings may be of any height up to, but not more than, 45 inches. (c) Steps, handholds, ladders, grabrails, guardrails and railings. (2) The employer must maintain in good condition originally-equipped steps, handholds, ladders and guardrails/railings/grabrails. (3) Equipment manufactured after November 8, 2011 must be equipped so as to provide safe access and egress between the ground and the operator work station(s), including the forward and rear positions, by the provision of devices such as steps, handholds, ladders, and guardrails/railings/grabrails. These devices must meet the following criteria: (i) Steps, handholds, ladders and guardrails/railings/grabrails must meet the criteria of SAE J185 (May 2003) (incorporated by reference, see see (ii) Walking/stepping surfaces, except for crawler treads, must have slip-resistant features/properties (such as diamond plate metal, strategically placed grip tape, expanded metal, or slip-resistant paint). (4) Tower cranes manufactured after November 8, 2011 must be equipped so as to provide safe access and egress between the ground and the cab, machinery platforms, and tower (mast), by the provision of devices such as steps, handholds, ladders, and guardrails/railings/grabrails. These devices must meet the following criteria: (i) Steps, handholds, ladders, and guardrails/railings/grabrails must meet the criteria of ISO 11660-1:2008(E) (incorporated by reference, see see see (ii) Walking/stepping surfaces must have slip-resistant features/properties (such as diamond plate metal, strategically placed grip tape, expanded metal, or slip-resistant paint). (d) Personal fall arrest and fall restraint systems. (e) For non-assembly/disassembly work, the employer must provide and ensure the use of fall protection equipment for employees who are on a walking/working surface with an unprotected side or edge more than 6 feet above a lower level as follows: (1) When moving point-to-point: (i) On non-lattice booms (whether horizontal or not horizontal). (ii) On lattice booms that are not horizontal. (iii) On horizontal lattice booms where the fall distance is 15 feet or more. (2) While at a work station on any part of the equipment (including the boom, of any type), except when the employee is at or near draw-works (when the equipment is running), in the cab, or on the deck. (f) For assembly/disassembly work, the employer must provide and ensure the use of fall protection equipment for employees who are on a walking/working surface with an unprotected side or edge more than 15 feet above a lower level, except when the employee is at or near draw-works (when the equipment is running), in the cab, or on the deck. (g) Anchorage criteria. (2) Anchorages for personal fall arrest and positioning device systems. (ii) Positioning device systems must be anchored to any apparently substantial part of the equipment unless a competent person, from a visual inspection, without an engineering analysis, would conclude that the criteria in § 1926.502(e)(2) would not be met. (iii) Attachable anchor devices (portable anchor devices that are attached to the equipment) must meet the anchorage criteria in § 1926.502(d)(15) for personal fall arrest systems and § 1926.502(e)(2) for positioning device systems. (3) Anchorages for fall restraint systems. (h) Tower cranes. (2) For erecting, climbing, and dismantling work, the employer must provide and ensure the use of fall protection equipment for employees who are on a walking/working surface with an unprotected side or edge more than 15 feet above a lower level. (i) [Reserved] (j) Anchoring to the load line. (1) A qualified person has determined that the set-up and rated capacity of the crane/derrick (including the hook, load line and rigging) meets or exceeds the requirements in § 1926.502(d)(15). (2) The equipment operator must be at the work site and informed that the equipment is being used for this purpose. (3) No load is suspended from the load line when the personal fall arrest system is anchored to the crane/derrick's hook (or other part of the load line). (k) Training. (1) the requirements in this subpart that address fall protection. (2) the applicable requirements in §§ 1926.500 and 1926.502. § 1926.1424 Work area control. (a) Swing radius hazards. (i) Striking and injuring an employee; or (ii) Pinching/crushing an employee against another part of the equipment or another object. (2) To prevent employees from entering these hazard areas, the employer must: (i) Train each employee assigned to work on or near the equipment (“authorized personnel”) in how to recognize struck-by and pinch/crush hazard areas posed by the rotating superstructure. (ii) Erect and maintain control lines, warning lines, railings or similar barriers to mark the boundaries of the hazard areas. Exception: (3) Protecting employees in the hazard area. (ii) Where the operator knows that an employee went to a location covered by paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the operator must not rotate the superstructure until the operator is informed in accordance with a pre-arranged system of communication that the employee is in a safe position. (b) Where any part of a crane/derrick is within the working radius of another crane/derrick, the controlling entity must institute a system to coordinate operations. If there is no controlling entity, the employer (if there is only one employer operating the multiple pieces of equipment), or employers, must institute such a system. § 1926.1425 Keeping clear of the load. (a) Where available, hoisting routes that minimize the exposure of employees to hoisted loads must be used, to the extent consistent with public safety. (b) While the operator is not moving a suspended load, no employee must be within the fall zone, except for employees: (1) Engaged in hooking, unhooking or guiding a load; (2) Engaged in the initial attachment of the load to a component or structure; or (3) Operating a concrete hopper or concrete bucket. (c) When employees are engaged in hooking, unhooking, or guiding the load, or in the initial connection of a load to a component or structure and are within the fall zone, all of the following criteria must be met: (1) The materials being hoisted must be rigged to prevent unintentional displacement. (2) Hooks with self-closing latches or their equivalent must be used. Exception: (3) The materials must be rigged by a qualified rigger. (d) Receiving a load. (e) During a tilt-up or tilt-down operation: (1) No employee must be directly under the load. (2) Only employees essential to the operation are permitted in the fall zone (but not directly under the load). An employee is essential to the operation if the employee is conducting one of the following operations and the employer can demonstrate it is infeasible for the employee to perform that operation from outside the fall zone: (1) Physically guide the load; (2) closely monitor and give instructions regarding the load's movement; or (3) either detach it from or initially attach it to another component or structure (such as, but not limited to, making an initial connection or installing bracing). Note: Boom free fall is prohibited when an employee is in the fall zone of the boom or load, and load line free fall is prohibited when an employee is directly under the load; see § 1926.1426 Free fall and controlled load lowering. (a) Boom free fall prohibitions. (i) An employee is in the fall zone of the boom or load. (ii) An employee is being hoisted. (iii) The load or boom is directly over a power line, or over any part of the area extending the Table A of § 1926.1408 clearance distance to each side of the power line; or any part of the area extending the Table A clearance distance to each side of the power line is within the radius of vertical travel of the boom or the load. (iv) The load is over a shaft, except where there are no employees in the shaft. (v) The load is over a cofferdam, except where there are no employees in the fall zone of the boom or the load. (vi) Lifting operations are taking place in a refinery or tank farm. (2) The use of equipment in which the boom is designed to free fall (live boom) is permitted only where none of the circumstances listed in paragraph (a)(1) of this section are present and: (i) The equipment was manufactured prior to October 31, 1984; or (ii) The equipment is a floating crane/derrick or a land crane/derrick on a vessel/flotation device. (b) Preventing boom free fall. (1) Friction drums must have: (i) A friction clutch and, in addition, a braking device, to allow for controlled boom lowering. (ii) A secondary braking or locking device, which is manually or automatically engaged, to back-up the primary brake while the boom is held (such as a secondary friction brake or a ratchet and pawl device). (2) Hydraulic drums must have an integrally mounted holding device or internal static brake to prevent boom hoist movement in the event of hydraulic failure. (3) Neither clutches nor hydraulic motors must be considered brake or locking devices for purposes of this subpart. (4) Hydraulic boom cylinders must have an integrally mounted holding device. (c) Preventing uncontrolled retraction. (d) Load line free fall. (1) An employee is directly under the load. (2) An employee is being hoisted. (3) The load is directly over a power line, or over any part of the area extending the Table A of § 1926.1408 clearance distance to each side of the power line; or any part of the area extending the Table A of § 1926.1408 clearance distance to each side of the power line is within the radius of vertical travel of the load. (4) The load is over a shaft. (5) The load is over a cofferdam, except where there are no employees in the fall zone of the load. § 1926.1427 Operator training, certification, and evaluation. (a) General requirements for operators. (1) Operation during training. (2) Exceptions. (3) Qualification by the U.S. military. (ii) A qualification under this paragraph is: (A) Not portable: Such a qualification meets the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section only where the operator is employed by (and operating the equipment for) the employer that issued the qualification. (B) Valid for the period of time stipulated by the issuing entity. (b) Operator training. (1) The employer must provide instruction on the knowledge and skills listed in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of this section to the operator-in-training. (2) The operator-in-training must be continuously monitored on site by a trainer while operating equipment. (3) The employer may only assign tasks within the operator-in-training's ability. However, except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(v) of this section, the operator-in-training shall not operate the equipment in any of the following circumstances unless certified in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section: (i) If any part of the equipment, load line, or load (including rigging and lifting accessories), if operated up to the equipment's maximum working radius in the work zone (see § 1926.1408(a)(1)), could get within 20 feet of a power line that is up to 350 kV, or within 50 feet of a power line that is over 350 kV. (ii) If the equipment is used to hoist personnel. (iii) In multiple-equipment lifts. (iv) If the equipment is used over a shaft, cofferdam, or in a tank farm. (v) In multiple-lift rigging operations, except where the operator's trainer determines that the operator-in-training's skills are sufficient for this high-skill work. (4) The employer must ensure that an operator-in-training is monitored as follows when operating equipment covered by this subpart: (i) While operating the equipment, the operator-in-training must be continuously monitored by an individual (“operator's trainer”) who meets all of the following requirements: (A) The operator's trainer is an employee or agent of the operator-in-training's employer. (B) The operator's trainer has the knowledge, training, and experience necessary to direct the operator-in-training on the equipment in use. (ii) While monitoring the operator-in-training, the operator's trainer performs no tasks that detract from the trainer's ability to monitor the operator-in-training. (iii) For equipment other than tower cranes: The operator's trainer and the operator-in-training must be in direct line of sight of each other. In addition, they must communicate verbally or by hand signals. For tower cranes: The operator's trainer and the operator-in-training must be in direct communication with each other. (iv) The operator-in-training must be monitored by the operator's trainer at all times, except for short breaks where all of the following are met: (A) The break lasts no longer than 15 minutes and there is no more than one break per hour. (B) Immediately prior to the break the operator's trainer informs the operator-in-training of the specific tasks that the operator-in-training is to perform and limitations to which he/she must adhere during the operator trainer's break. (C) The specific tasks that the operator-in-training will perform during the operator trainer's break are within the operator-in-training's abilities. (5) Retraining. (c) Operator certification and licensing. (1) Licensing. (i) The requirements for obtaining the license include an assessment, by written and practical tests, of the operator applicant regarding, at a minimum, the knowledge and skills listed in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of this section. (ii) The testing meets industry-recognized criteria for written testing materials, practical examinations, test administration, grading, facilities/equipment, and personnel. (iii) The government authority that oversees the licensing department/office has determined that the requirements in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section have been met. (iv) The licensing department/office has testing procedures for re-licensing designed to ensure that the operator continues to meet the technical knowledge and skills requirements in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of this section. (v) For the purposes of compliance with this section, a license is valid for the period of time stipulated by the licensing department/office, but no longer than 5 years. (2) Certification. (3) No cost to employees. (4) Provision of testing and training. (d) Certification by an accredited crane operator testing organization. (i) Be accredited by a nationally recognized accrediting agency based on that agency's determination that industry-recognized criteria for written testing materials, practical examinations, test administration, grading, facilities/equipment, and personnel have been met. (ii) Administer written and practical tests that: (A) Assess the operator applicant regarding, at a minimum, the knowledge and skills listed in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of this section. (B) Provide certification based on equipment type, or type and capacity. (iii) Have procedures for operators to re-apply and be re-tested in the event an operator applicant fails a test or is decertified. (iv) Have testing procedures for re-certification designed to ensure that the operator continues to meet the technical knowledge and skills requirements in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of this section. (v) Have its accreditation reviewed by the nationally recognized accrediting agency at least every 3 years. (2) If no accredited testing agency offers certification examinations for a particular type of equipment, an operator will be deemed to have complied with the certification requirements of this section for that equipment if the operator has been certified for the type that is most similar to that equipment and for which a certification examination is available. The operator's certificate must state the type of equipment for which the operator is certified. (3) A certification issued under this option is portable among employers who are required to have operators certified under this option. (4) A certification issued under this paragraph is valid for 5 years. (e) Audited employer program. (1) Testing. (i) Developed by an accredited crane operator testing organization (see paragraph (d) of this section); or (ii) Approved by an auditor in accordance with the following requirements: (A) The auditor is certified to evaluate such tests by an accredited crane operator testing organization (see paragraph (d) of this section). (B) The auditor is not an employee of the employer. (C) The approval must be based on the auditor's determination that the written and practical tests meet nationally recognized test development criteria and are valid and reliable in assessing the operator applicants regarding, at a minimum, the knowledge and skills listed in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of this section. (D) The audit must be conducted in accordance with nationally recognized auditing standards. (2) Administration of tests. (ii) The auditor must be certified to evaluate the administration of the written and practical tests by an accredited crane operator testing organization (see paragraph (d) of this section). (iii) The auditor must not be an employee of the employer. (iv) The audit must be conducted in accordance with nationally recognized auditing standards. (3) Timing of audit. (4) Requalification. (5) Deficiencies. (i) No operator is qualified until the auditor confirms that the deficiency has been corrected. (ii) The program is audited again within 180 days of the confirmation that the deficiency was corrected. (iii) The auditor files a documented report of the deficiency to the appropriate Regional Office of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration within 15 days of the auditor's determination that there is a deficiency. (iv) Records of the audits of the employer's program are maintained by the auditor for 3 years and are made available by the auditor to the Secretary of Labor or the Secretary's designated representative upon request. (6) Audited-program certificates. (i) Not portable: Such a certification meets the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section only where the operator is employed by (and operating the equipment for) the employer that issued the certification. (ii) Valid for 5 years. (f) Evaluation. (i) The skills and knowledge, as well as the ability to recognize and avert risk, necessary to operate the equipment safely, including those specific to the safety devices, operational aids, software, and the size and configuration of the equipment. Size and configuration includes, but is not limited to, lifting capacity, boom length, attachments, luffing jib, and counterweight set-up. (ii) The ability to perform the hoisting activities required for assigned work, including, if applicable, blind lifts, personnel hoisting, and multi-crane lifts. (2) For operators employed prior to December 10, 2018, the employer may rely on its previous assessments of the operator in lieu of conducting a new evaluation of that operator's existing knowledge and skills. (3) The definition of “qualified” in § 1926.32 does not apply to paragraph (f)(1) of this section: Possession of a certificate or degree cannot, by itself, cause a person to be qualified for purposes of paragraph (f)(1). (4) The evaluation required under paragraph (f)(1) of this section must be conducted by an individual who has the knowledge, training, and experience necessary to assess equipment operators. (5) The evaluator must be an employee or agent of the employer. Employers that assign evaluations to an agent retain the duty to ensure that the requirements in paragraph (f) are satisfied. Once the evaluation is completed successfully, the employer may allow the operator to operate other equipment that the employer can demonstrate does not require substantially different skills, knowledge, or ability to recognize and avert risk to operate. (6) The employer must document the completion of the evaluation. This document must provide: The operator's name; the evaluator's name and signature; the date; and the make, model, and configuration of equipment used in the evaluation. The employer must make the document available at the worksite while the operator is employed by the employer. For operators assessed per paragraph (f)(2) of this section, the documentation must reflect the date of the employer's determination of the operator's abilities and the make, model and configuration of equipment on which the operator has previously demonstrated competency. (7) When an employer is required to provide an operator with retraining under paragraph (b)(5) of this section, the employer must re-evaluate the operator with respect to the subject of the retraining. (g) [Reserved] (h) Language and literacy requirements. (i) Passes a written demonstration of literacy relevant to the work. (ii) Demonstrates the ability to use the type of written manufacturer procedures applicable to the class/type of equipment for which the candidate is seeking certification. (2) Tests under this section may be administered in any language the operator candidate understands, and the operator's certification documentation must note the language in which the test was given. The operator is only permitted to operate equipment that is furnished with materials required by this subpart, such as operations manuals and load charts, that are written in the language of the certification. (i) [Reserved] (j) Certification criteria. (1) A determination through a written test that: (i) The individual knows the information necessary for safe operation of the specific type of equipment the individual will operate, including all of the following: (A) The controls and operational/performance characteristics. (B) Use of, and the ability to calculate (manually or with a calculator), load/capacity information on a variety of configurations of the equipment. (C) Procedures for preventing and responding to power line contact. (D) Technical knowledge of the subject matter criteria listed in appendix C of this subpart applicable to the specific type of equipment the individual will operate. Use of the appendix C criteria meets the requirements of this provision. (E) Technical knowledge applicable to the suitability of the supporting ground and surface to handle expected loads, site hazards, and site access. (F) This subpart, including applicable incorporated materials. (ii) The individual is able to read and locate relevant information in the equipment manual and other materials containing information referred to in paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this section. (2) A determination through a practical test that the individual has the skills necessary for safe operation of the equipment, including the following: (i) Ability to recognize, from visual and auditory observation, the items listed in § 1926.1412(d) (shift inspection). (ii) Operational and maneuvering skills. (iii) Application of load chart information. (iv) Application of safe shut-down and securing procedures. (k) Effective dates. (2) The evaluation and documentation requirements in paragraphs (a) and (f) are effective on February 7, 2019. [83 FR 56244, Nov. 9, 2018] § 1926.1428 Signal person qualifications. (a) The employer of the signal person must ensure that each signal person meets the Qualification Requirements (paragraph (c) of this section) prior to giving any signals. This requirement must be met by using either Option (1) or Option (2) of this section. (1) Option (1)—Third party qualified evaluator. see see (2) Option (2)—Employer's qualified evaluator. see see (3) The employer must make the documentation for whichever option is used available at the site while the signal person is employed by the employer. The documentation must specify each type of signaling ( e.g. etc. (b) If subsequent actions by the signal person indicate that the individual does not meet the Qualification Requirements ( see (c) Qualification Requirements. (1) Know and understand the type of signals used. If hand signals are used, the signal person must know and understand the Standard Method for hand signals. (2) Be competent in the application of the type of signals used. (3) Have a basic understanding of equipment operation and limitations, including the crane dynamics involved in swinging and stopping loads and boom deflection from hoisting loads. (4) Know and understand the relevant requirements of §§ 1926.1419 through 1926.1422 and 1926.1428. (5) Demonstrate that he/she meets the requirements in paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section through an oral or written test, and through a practical test. § 1926.1429 Qualifications of maintenance & repair employees. (a) Maintenance, inspection and repair personnel are permitted to operate the equipment only where all of the following requirements are met: (1) The operation is limited to those functions necessary to perform maintenance, inspect the equipment, or verify its performance. (2) The personnel either: (i) Operate the equipment under the direct supervision of an operator who meets the requirements of § 1926.1427 (Operator qualification and certification); or (ii) Are familiar with the operation, limitations, characteristics and hazards associated with the type of equipment. (b) Maintenance and repair personnel must meet the definition of a qualified person with respect to the equipment and maintenance/repair tasks performed. § 1926.1430 Training. The employer must provide training as follows: (a) Overhead powerlines. (b) Signal persons. (c) Operators. (2) The employer must train each operator covered under the exception of § 1926.1427(a)(2) on the safe operation of the equipment the operator will be using. (3) The employer must train each operator of the equipment covered by this subpart in the following practices: (i) On friction equipment, whenever moving a boom off a support, first raise the boom a short distance (sufficient to take the load of the boom) to determine if the boom hoist brake needs to be adjusted. On other types of equipment with a boom, the same practice is applicable, except that typically there is no means of adjusting the brake; if the brake does not hold, a repair is necessary. See (ii) Where available, the manufacturer's emergency procedures for halting unintended equipment movement. (d) Competent persons and qualified persons. (e) Crush/pinch points. (f) Tag-out. (g) Training administration. (2) The employer must provide refresher training in relevant topics for each employee when, based on the conduct of the employee or an evaluation of the employee's knowledge, there is an indication that retraining is necessary. (3) Whenever training is required under subpart CC, the employer must provide the training at no cost to the employee. [75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 83 FR 56247, Nov. 9, 2018] § 1926.1431 Hoisting personnel. The requirements of this section are supplemental to the other requirements in this subpart and apply when one or more employees are hoisted. (a) The use of equipment to hoist employees is prohibited except where the employer demonstrates that the erection, use, and dismantling of conventional means of reaching the work area, such as a personnel hoist, ladder, stairway, aerial lift, elevating work platform, or scaffold, would be more hazardous, or is not possible because of the project's structural design or worksite conditions. This paragraph does not apply to work covered by subpart R (Steel Erection) of this part and also does not apply to routine personnel access to an underground worksite via shaft as covered by § 1926.800 (Underground Construction) of this part. (b) Use of personnel platform. (2) Exceptions: (i) Into and out of drill shafts that are up to and including 8 feet in diameter ( see (ii) In pile driving operations ( see (iii) Solely for transfer to or from a marine worksite in a marine-hoisted personnel transfer device ( see (iv) In storage-tank (steel or concrete), shaft and chimney operations ( see (c) Equipment set-up. (2) Equipment with outriggers or stabilizers must have them all extended and locked. The amount of extension must be the same for all outriggers and stabilizers and in accordance with manufacturer procedures and load charts. (d) Equipment criteria Capacity: Use of suspended personnel platforms. (2) Capacity: Use of boom-attached personnel platforms. (3) Capacity: Hoisting personnel without a personnel platform. (4) When the occupied personnel platform is in a stationary working position, the load and boom hoist brakes, swing brakes, and operator actuated secondary braking and locking features (such as pawls or dogs) or automatic secondary brakes must be engaged. (5) Devices. (A) A boom angle indicator, readily visible to the operator, and (B) A boom hoist limiting device. (ii) Articulating cranes must be equipped with a properly functioning automatic overload protection device. (iii) Equipment with a luffing jib must be equipped with: (A) A jib angle indicator, readily visible to the operator, and. (B) A jib hoist limiting device. (iv) Equipment with telescoping booms must be equipped with a device to indicate the boom's extended length clearly to the operator, or must have measuring marks on the boom. (v) Anti two-block. Exception: (vi) Controlled load lowering. Note: Free fall of the load line hoist is prohibited ( see see (vii) Proper operation required. See (6) Direct attachment of a personnel platform to a luffing jib is prohibited. (e) Personnel platform criteria. (2) The system used to connect the personnel platform to the equipment must allow the platform to remain within 10 degrees of level, regardless of boom angle. (3) The suspension system must be designed to minimize tipping of the platform due to movement of employees occupying the platform. (4) The personnel platform itself (excluding the guardrail system and personal fall arrest system anchorages), must be capable of supporting, without failure, its own weight and at least five times the maximum intended load. (5) All welding of the personnel platform and its components must be performed by a certified welder familiar with the weld grades, types and material specified in the platform design. (6) The personnel platform must be equipped with a guardrail system which meets the requirements of subpart M of this part, and must be enclosed at least from the toeboard to mid-rail with either solid construction material or expanded metal having openings no greater than 1/2 (7) A grab rail must be installed inside the entire perimeter of the personnel platform except for access gates/doors. (8) Access gates/doors. (i) Not swing outward. If due to the size of the personnel platform, such as a 1-person platform, it is infeasible for the door to swing inward and allow safe entry for the platform occupant, then the access gate/door may swing outward. (ii) Be equipped with a device that prevents accidental opening. (9) Headroom must be sufficient to allow employees to stand upright in the platform. (10) In addition to the use of hard hats, employees must be protected by overhead protection on the personnel platform when employees are exposed to falling objects. The platform overhead protection must not obscure the view of the operator or platform occupants (such as wire mesh that has up to 1/2 (11) All edges exposed to employee contact must be smooth enough to prevent injury. (12) The weight of the platform and its rated capacity must be conspicuously posted on the platform with a plate or other permanent marking. (f) Personnel platform loading. (2) Use. (ii) Exception: (3) Materials and tools must be: (i) Secured to prevent displacement. (ii) Evenly distributed within the confines of the platform while it is suspended. (4) The number of employees occupying the personnel platform must not exceed the maximum number the platform was designed to hold or the number required to perform the work, whichever is less. (g) Attachment and rigging Hooks and other detachable devices. (A) Of a type that can be closed and locked, eliminating the throat opening. (B) Closed and locked when attached. (ii) Shackles used in place of hooks must be of the alloy anchor type, with either: (A) A bolt, nut and retaining pin, in place; or (B) Of the screw type, with the screw pin secured from accidental removal. (iii) Where other detachable devices are used, they must be of the type that can be closed and locked to the same extent as the devices addressed in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section. Such devices must be closed and locked when attached. (2) Rope bridle. see (3) Rigging hardware (including wire rope, shackles, rings, master links, and other rigging hardware) and hooks must be capable of supporting, without failure, at least five times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to that component. Where rotation resistant rope is used, the slings must be capable of supporting without failure at least ten times the maximum intended load. (4) Eyes in wire rope slings must be fabricated with thimbles. (5) Bridles and associated rigging for suspending the personnel platform must be used only for the platform and the necessary employees, their tools and materials necessary to do their work. The bridles and associated rigging must not have been used for any purpose other than hoisting personnel. (h) Trial lift and inspection. (2) The trial lift must be performed immediately prior to each shift in which personnel will be hoisted. In addition, the trial lift must be repeated prior to hoisting employees in each of the following circumstances: (i) The equipment is moved and set up in a new location or returned to a previously used location. (ii) The lift route is changed, unless the competent person determines that the new route presents no new factors affecting safety. (3) The competent person must determine that: (i) Safety devices and operational aids required by this section are activated and functioning properly. Other safety devices and operational aids must meet the requirements of §§ 1926.1415 and 1926.1416. (ii) Nothing interferes with the equipment or the personnel platform in the course of the trial lift. (iii) The lift will not exceed 50 percent of the equipment's rated capacity at any time during the lift. (iv) The load radius to be used during the lift has been accurately determined. (4) Immediately after the trial lift, the competent person must: (i) Conduct a visual inspection of the equipment, base support or ground, and personnel platform, to determine whether the trial lift has exposed any defect or problem or produced any adverse effect. (ii) Confirm that, upon the completion of the trial lift process, the test weight has been removed. (5) Immediately prior to each lift: (i) The platform must be hoisted a few inches with the personnel and materials/tools on board and inspected by a competent person to ensure that it is secure and properly balanced. (ii) The following conditions must be determined by a competent person to exist before the lift of personnel proceeds: (A) Hoist ropes must be free of deficiencies in accordance with § 1926.1413(a). (B) Multiple part lines must not be twisted around each other. (C) The primary attachment must be centered over the platform. (D) If the load rope is slack, the hoisting system must be inspected to ensure that all ropes are properly seated on drums and in sheaves. (6) Any condition found during the trial lift and subsequent inspection(s) that fails to meet a requirement of this standard or otherwise creates a safety hazard must be corrected before hoisting personnel. ( See (i) [Reserved] (j) Proof testing. (2) The platform must be lowered by controlled load lowering, braked, and held in a suspended position for a minimum of five minutes with the test load evenly distributed on the platform. (3) After proof testing, a competent person must inspect the platform and rigging to determine if the test has been passed. If any deficiencies are found that pose a safety hazard, the platform and rigging must not be used to hoist personnel unless the deficiencies are corrected, the test is repeated, and a competent person determines that the test has been passed. ( See (4) Personnel hoisting must not be conducted until the competent person determines that the platform and rigging have successfully passed the proof test. (k) Work practices. (2) Platform occupants must: (i) Keep all parts of the body inside the platform during raising, lowering, and horizontal movement. This provision does not apply to an occupant of the platform when necessary to position the platform or while performing the duties of a signal person. (ii) Not stand, sit on, or work from the top or intermediate rail or toeboard, or use any other means/device to raise their working height. (iii) Not pull the platform out of plumb in relation to the hoisting equipment. (3) Before employees exit or enter a hoisted personnel platform that is not landed, the platform must be secured to the structure where the work is to be performed, unless the employer can demonstrate that securing to the structure would create a greater hazard. (4) If the platform is tied to the structure, the operator must not move the platform until the operator receives confirmation that it is freely suspended. (5) Tag lines must be used when necessary to control the platform. (6) Platforms without controls. (7) Platforms with controls. (i) The occupant using the controls in the platform must be a qualified person with respect to their use, including the safe limitations of the equipment and hazards associated with its operation. (ii) The equipment operator must be at a set of equipment controls that include boom and swing functions of the equipment, and must be on site and in view of the equipment. (iii) The platform operating manual must be in the platform or on the equipment. (8) Environmental conditions Wind. (ii) Other weather and environmental conditions. (9) Employees being hoisted must remain in direct communication with the signal person (where used), or the operator. (10) Fall protection. (ii) The fall arrest system, including the attachment point (anchorage) used to comply with paragraph (i) of this section, must meet the requirements in § 1926.502. (11) Other load lines. (ii) Factory-produced boom-mounted personnel platforms that incorporate a winch as original equipment. (12) Traveling—equipment other than derricks. (A) Equipment that travels on fixed rails; or (B) Where the employer demonstrates that there is no less hazardous way to perform the work. (C) This exception does not apply to rubber-tired equipment. (ii) Where employees are hoisted while the equipment is traveling, all of the following criteria must be met: (A) Equipment travel must be restricted to a fixed track or runway. (B) Where a runway is used, it must be a firm, level surface designed, prepared and designated as a path of travel for the weight and configuration of the equipment being used to lift and travel with the personnel platform. An existing surface may be used as long as it meets these criteria. (C) Equipment travel must be limited to boom length. (D) The boom must be parallel to the direction of travel, except where it is safer to do otherwise. (E) A complete trial run must be performed to test the route of travel before employees are allowed to occupy the platform. This trial run can be performed at the same time as the trial lift required by paragraph (h) of this section which tests the lift route. (13) Traveling—derricks. (l) [Reserved] (m) Pre-lift meeting. (1) Held to review the applicable requirements of this section and the procedures that will be followed. (2) Attended by the equipment operator, signal person (if used for the lift), employees to be hoisted, and the person responsible for the task to be performed. (3) Held prior to the trial lift at each new work location, and must be repeated for any employees newly assigned to the operation. (n) Hoisting personnel near power lines. (o) Hoisting personnel in drill shafts. (1) The employee must be in either a personnel platform or on a boatswain's chair. (2) If using a personnel platform, paragraphs (a) through (n) of this section apply. (3) If using a boatswain's chair: (i) The following paragraphs of this section apply: (a), (c), (d)(1), (d)(3), (d)(4), (e)(1), (e)(2), (e)(3), (f)(1), (f)(2)(i), (f)(3)(i), (g), (h), (k)(1), (k)(6), (k)(8), (k)(9), (k)(11)(i), (m), (n). Where the terms “personnel platform” or “platform” are used in these paragraphs, substitute them with “boatswain's chair.” (ii) A signal person must be stationed at the shaft opening. (iii) The employee must be hoisted in a slow, controlled descent and ascent. (iv) The employee must use personal fall protection equipment, including a full body harness, attached independent of the crane/derrick. (v) The fall protection equipment must meet the applicable requirements in § 1926.502. (vi) The boatswain's chair itself (excluding the personal fall arrest system anchorages), must be capable of supporting, without failure, its own weight and at least five times the maximum intended load. (vii) No more than one person must be hoisted at a time. (p) Hoisting personnel for pile driving operations. (1) The employee must be in a personnel platform or boatswain's chair. (2) For lattice boom cranes: Clearly mark the cable (so that it can easily be seen by the operator) at a point that will give the operator sufficient time to stop the hoist to prevent two-blocking, or use a spotter who is in direct communication with the operator to inform the operator when this point is reached. For telescopic boom cranes: Clearly mark the cable (so that it can be easily seen by the operator) at a point that will give the operator sufficient time to stop the hoist to prevent two-blocking, and use a spotter who is in direct communication with the operator to inform the operator when this point is reached. (3) If using a personnel platform, paragraphs (b) through (n) of this section apply. (4) If using a boatswain's chair: (i) The following paragraphs of this section apply: (a), (c), (d)(1), (d)(3), (d)(4), (e)(1), (e)(2), (e)(3), (f)(1), (f)(2)(i), (f)(3)(i), (g), (h), (j), (k)(1), (k)(6), (k)(8), (k)(9), (k)(11)(i), (m), and (n). Where the terms “personnel platform” or “platform” are used in these paragraphs, substitute them with “boatswains chair.” (ii) The employee must be hoisted in a slow, controlled descent and ascent. (iii) The employee must use personal fall protection equipment, including a full body harness, independently attached to the lower load block or overhaul ball. (iv) The fall protection equipment must meet the applicable requirements in § 1926.502. (v) The boatswain's chair itself (excluding the personal fall arrest system anchorages), must be capable of supporting, without failure, its own weight and at least five times the maximum intended load. (vi) No more than one person must be hoisted at a time. (q) [Reserved] (r) Hoisting personnel for marine transfer. (1) The employee must be in either a personnel platform or a marine-hoisted personnel transfer device. (2) If using a personnel platform, paragraphs (a) through (n) of this section apply. (3) If using a marine-hoisted personnel transfer device: (i) The following paragraphs of this section apply: (a), (c)(2), (d)(1), (d)(3), (d)(4), (e)(1) through (5), (e)(12), (f)(1), (g), (h), (j), (k)(1), (k)(8), (k)(9), (k)(10)(ii), (k)(11)(i), (k)(12), (m), and (n). Where the terms “personnel platform” or “platform” are used in these paragraphs, substitute them with “marine-hoisted personnel transfer device.” (ii) The transfer device must be used only for transferring workers. (iii) The number of workers occupying the transfer device must not exceed the maximum number it was designed to hold. (iv) Each employee must wear a U.S. Coast Guard personal flotation device approved for industrial use. (s) Hoisting personnel for storage-tank (steel or concrete), shaft and chimney operations. (1) The employee must be in a personnel platform except when the employer can demonstrate that use of a personnel platform is infeasible; in such a case, a boatswain's chair must be used. (2) If using a personnel platform, paragraphs (a) through (n) of this section apply. (3) If using a boatswain's chair: (i) The following paragraphs of this section apply: (a), (c), (d)(1), (d)(3), (d)(4), (e)(1), (e)(2), (e)(3), (f)(1), (f)(2)(i), (f)(3)(i), (g), (h), (k)(1), (k)(6), (k)(8), (k)(9), (k)(11)(i), (m), (n). Where the terms “personnel platform” or “platform” are used in these paragraphs, substitute them with “boatswains chair.” (ii) The employee must be hoisted in a slow, controlled descent and ascent. (iii) The employee must use personal fall protection equipment, including a full body harness, attached independent of the crane/derrick. When there is no adequate structure for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment as required in § 1926.502(d)(15), the attachment must be to the lower load block or overhaul ball. (iv) The fall protection equipment must meet the applicable requirements in § 1926.502. (v) The boatswain's chair itself (excluding the personal fall arrest system anchorages), must be capable of supporting, without failure, its own weight and at least five times the maximum intended load. (vi) No more than one person must be hoisted at a time. [75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 85 FR 8746, Feb. 18, 2020] § 1926.1432 Multiple-crane/derrick lifts—supplemental requirements. (a) Plan development. (1) The plan must be developed by a qualified person. (2) The plan must be designed to ensure that the requirements of this subpart are met. (3) Where the qualified person determines that engineering expertise is needed for the planning, the employer must ensure that it is provided. (b) Plan implementation. (2) The lift director must review the plan in a meeting with all workers who will be involved with the operation. § 1926.1433 Design, construction and testing. The following requirements apply to equipment that has a manufacturer-rated hoisting/lifting capacity of more than 2,000 pounds. (a) Crawler, truck and locomotive cranes manufactured prior to November 8, 2010 must meet the applicable requirements for design, construction, and testing as prescribed in ANSI B30.5-1968 (incorporated by reference, see see (b) Mobile (including crawler and truck) and locomotive cranes manufactured on or after November 8, 2010 must meet the following portions of ASME B30.5-2004 (incorporated by reference, see (1) In section 5-1.1.1 (“Load Ratings—Where Stability Governs Lifting Performance”), paragraphs (a)-(d) (including subparagraphs). (2) In section 5-1.1.2 (“Load Ratings—Where Structural Competence Governs Lifting Performance”), paragraph (b). (3) Section 5-1.2 (“Stability (Backward and Forward)”). (4) In section 5-1.3.1 (“Boom Hoist Mechanism”), paragraphs (a), (b)(1) and (b)(2), except that when using rotation resistant rope, § 1926.1414(c)(4)(ii)(A) applies. (5) In section 5-1.3.2 (“Load Hoist Mechanism”), paragraphs (a)(2) through (a)(4) (including subparagraphs), (b) (including subparagraphs), (c) (first sentence only) and (d). (6) Section 5-1.3.3 (“Telescoping Boom”). (7) Section 5-1.4 (“Swing Mechanism”). (8) In section 5-1.5 (“Crane Travel”), all provisions except 5-1.5.3(d). (9) In section 5-1.6 (“Controls”), all provisions except 5-1.6.1 (c). (10) Section 5-1.7.4 (“Sheaves”). (11) Section 5-1.7.5 (“Sheave sizes”). (12) In section 5-1.9.1 (“Booms”), paragraph (f). (13) Section 5-1.9.3 (“Outriggers”). (14) Section 5-1.9.4 (“Locomotive Crane Equipment”). (15) Section 5-1.9.7 (“Clutch and Brake Protection”). (16) In section 5-1.9.11 (“Miscellaneous equipment”), paragraphs (a), (c), (e), and (f). (c) Prototype testing: mobile (including crawler and truck) and locomotive cranes manufactured on or after November 8, 2010 must meet the prototype testing requirements in Test Option A or Test Option B of this section. Tower cranes manufactured on or after November 8, 2010 must meet the prototype testing requirements in BS EN 14439:2006 (incorporated by reference, see Note: Prototype testing of crawler, locomotive and truck cranes manufactured prior to November 8, 2010 must conform to paragraph (a) of this section. (1) Test Option A. see see (ii) The following applies to equipment with pendant supported lattice booms: All the tests listed in SAE J987 (Jun. 2003) Table 1 (incorporated by reference, see see (2) Test Option B. see (i) The following applies to equipment with cantilevered booms (such as hydraulic boom cranes): The analysis methodology (computer modeling) must demonstrate that all load cases listed in SAE J1063 (Nov. 1993) (incorporated by reference, see (ii) The following applies to equipment with pendant supported lattice booms: The analysis methodology (computer modeling) must demonstrate that all load cases listed in SAE J987 (Jun. 2003) (incorporated by reference, see (iii) Analysis verification. see see (d) All equipment covered by this subpart must meet the following requirements: (1) Rated capacity and related information. see (i) A complete range of the manufacturer's equipment rated capacities, as follows: (A) At all manufacturer approved operating radii, boom angles, work areas, boom lengths and configurations, jib lengths and angles (or offset). (B) Alternate ratings for use and nonuse of option equipment which affects rated capacities, such as outriggers, stabilizers, and extra counterweights. (ii) A work area chart for which capacities are listed in the load chart. ( Note: (iii) The work area figure and load chart must clearly indicate the areas where no load is to be handled. (iv) Recommended reeving for the hoist lines must be shown. (v) Recommended parts of hoist reeving, size, and type of wire rope for various equipment loads. (vi) Recommended boom hoist reeving diagram, where applicable; size, type and length of wire rope. (vii) Tire pressure (where applicable). (viii) Caution or warnings relative to limitations on equipment and operating procedures, including an indication of the least stable direction. (ix) Position of the gantry and requirements for intermediate boom suspension (where applicable). (x) Instructions for boom erection and conditions under which the boom, or boom and jib combinations, may be raised or lowered. (xi) Whether the hoist holding mechanism is automatically or manually controlled, whether free fall is available, or any combination of these. (xii) The maximum telescopic travel length of each boom telescopic section. (xiii) Whether sections are telescoped manually or with power. (xiv) The sequence and procedure for extending and retracting the telescopic boom section. (xv) Maximum loads permitted during the boom extending operation, and any limiting conditions or cautions. (xvi) Hydraulic relief valve settings specified by the manufacturer. (2) Load hooks (including latched and unlatched types), ball assemblies and load blocks must be of sufficient weight to overhaul the line from the highest hook position for boom or boom and jib lengths and the number of parts of the line in use. (3) Hook and ball assemblies and load blocks must be marked with their rated capacity and weight. (4) Latching hooks. (ii) Hooks without latches, or with latches removed or disabled, must not be used unless: (A) A qualified person has determined that it is safer to hoist and place the load without latches (or with the latches removed/tied-back). (B) Routes for the loads are pre-planned to ensure that no employee is required to work in the fall zone except for employees necessary for the hooking or unhooking of the load. (iii) The latch must close the throat opening and be designed to retain slings or other lifting devices/accessories in the hook when the rigging apparatus is slack. (5) Posted warnings. (6) An accessible fire extinguisher must be on the equipment. (7) Cabs. (i) Cabs must be designed with a form of adjustable ventilation and method for clearing the windshield for maintaining visibility and air circulation. Examples of means for adjustable ventilation include air conditioner or window that can be opened (for ventilation and air circulation); examples of means for maintaining visibility include heater (for preventing windshield icing), defroster, fan, windshield wiper. (ii) Cab doors (swinging, sliding) must be designed to prevent inadvertent opening or closing while traveling or operating the machine. Swinging doors adjacent to the operator must open outward. Sliding operator doors must open rearward. (iii) Windows. (A) The cab must have windows in front and on both sides of the operator. Forward vertical visibility must be sufficient to give the operator a view of the boom point at all times. (B) Windows may have sections designed to be opened or readily removed. Windows with sections designed to be opened must be designed so that they can be secured to prevent inadvertent closure. (C) Windows must be of safety glass or material with similar optical and safety properties, that introduce no visible distortion or otherwise obscure visibility that interferes with the safe operation of the equipment. (iv) A clear passageway must be provided from the operator's station to an exit door on the operator's side. (v) Areas of the cab roof that serve as a workstation for rigging, maintenance or other equipment-related tasks must be capable of supporting 250 pounds without permanent distortion. (8) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, chains, and other parts or components that reciprocate, rotate or otherwise move must be guarded where contact by employees (except for maintenance and repair employees) is possible in the performance of normal duties. (9) All exhaust pipes, turbochargers, and charge air coolers must be insulated or guarded where contact by employees (except for maintenance and repair employees) is possible in the performance of normal duties. (10) Hydraulic and pneumatic lines must be protected from damage to the extent feasible. (11) The equipment must be designed so that exhaust fumes are not discharged in the cab and are discharged in a direction away from the operator. (12) Friction mechanisms. (i) Of a size and thermal capacity sufficient to control all rated loads with the minimum recommended reeving. (ii) Adjustable to permit compensation for lining wear to maintain proper operation. (13) Hydraulic load hoists. (e) The employer's obligations under paragraphs (a) through (c) and (d)(7) through (13) of this section are met where the equipment has not changed (except in accordance with § 1926.1434 (Equipment modifications)) and it can refer to documentation from the manufacturer showing that the equipment has been designed, constructed and tested in accordance with those paragraphs. § 1926.1434 Equipment modifications. (a) Modifications or additions which affect the capacity or safe operation of the equipment are prohibited except where the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), or (a)(5) of this section are met. (1) Manufacturer review and approval. (ii) The load charts, procedures, instruction manuals and instruction plates/tags/decals are modified as necessary to accord with the modification/addition. (iii) The original safety factor of the equipment is not reduced. (2) Manufacturer refusal to review request. (i) A registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to the equipment involved: (A) Approves the modification/addition and specifies the equipment configurations to which that approval applies, and (B) Modifies load charts, procedures, instruction manuals and instruction plates/tags/decals as necessary to accord with the modification/addition. (ii) The original safety factor of the equipment is not reduced. (3) Unavailable manufacturer. (4) Manufacturer does not complete the review within 120 days of the request. (5) Multiple manufacturers of equipment designed for use on marine work sites. (b) Modifications or additions which affect the capacity or safe operation of the equipment are prohibited where the manufacturer, after a review of the technical safety merits of the proposed modification/addition, rejects the proposal and explains the reasons for the rejection in a written response. If the manufacturer rejects the proposal but does not explain the reasons for the rejection in writing, the employer may treat this as a manufacturer refusal to review the request under paragraph (a)(2) of this section. (c) The provisions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply to modifications made or approved by the U.S. military. § 1926.1435 Tower cranes. (a) This section contains supplemental requirements for tower cranes; all sections of this subpart apply to tower cranes unless specified otherwise. (b) Erecting, climbing and dismantling. (2) Dangerous areas (self-erecting tower cranes). (3) Foundations and structural supports. (4) Addressing specific hazards. (i) Foundations and structural supports. (ii) Loss of backward stability. (iii) Wind speed. (5) Plumb tolerance. (6) Multiple tower crane jobsites. (7) Climbing procedures. (i) Comply with all manufacturer prohibitions. (ii) Have a registered professional engineer verify that the host structure is strong enough to sustain the forces imposed through the braces, brace anchorages and supporting floors. (8) Counterweight/ballast. (ii) The maximum counterweight and/or ballast specified by the manufacturer or registered professional engineer familiar with the equipment must not be exceeded. (c) Signs. (d) Safety devices. (2) The following safety devices are required on all tower cranes unless otherwise specified: (i) Boom stops on luffing boom type tower cranes. (ii) Jib stops on luffing boom type tower cranes if equipped with a jib attachment. (iii) Travel rail end stops at both ends of travel rail. (iv) Travel rail clamps on all travel bogies. (v) Integrally mounted check valves on all load supporting hydraulic cylinders. (vi) Hydraulic system pressure limiting device. (vii) The following brakes, which must automatically set in the event of pressure loss or power failure, are required: (A) A hoist brake on all hoists. (B) Swing brake. (C) Trolley brake. (D) Rail travel brake. (viii) Deadman control or forced neutral return control (hand) levers. (ix) Emergency stop switch at the operator's station. (x) Trolley end stops must be provided at both ends of travel of the trolley. (3) Proper operation required. See (e) Operational aids. (2) The devices listed in this section (“operational aids”) are required on all tower cranes covered by this subpart, unless otherwise specified. (3) Operations must not begin unless the operational aids are in proper working order, except where the employer meets the specified temporary alternative measures. More protective alternative measures specified by the tower crane manufacturer, if any, must be followed. See (4) If an operational aid stops working properly during operations, the operator must safely stop operations until the temporary alternative measures are implemented or the device is again working properly. If a replacement part is no longer available, the use of a substitute device that performs the same type of function is permitted and is not considered a modification under § 1926.1434. (5) Category I operational aids and alternative measures. Exception: (i) Trolley travel limiting device. Temporary alternative measures: (A) Option A. (B) Option B. (ii) Boom hoist limiting device. Temporary alternative measures: (iii) Anti two-blocking device. Temporary alternative measures: (iv) Hoist drum lower limiting device. Temporary alternative measures: (v) Load moment limiting device. Temporary alternative measures: (vi) Hoist line pull limiting device. Temporary alternative measures: (vii) Rail travel limiting device. Temporary alternative measures: (viii) Boom hoist drum positive locking device and control. Temporary alternative measures: (6) Category II operational aids and alternative measures. Exception: (i) Boom angle or hook radius indicator. (A) Luffing boom tower cranes must have a boom angle indicator readable from the operator's station. (B) Hammerhead tower cranes manufactured after November 8, 2011 must have a hook radius indicator readable from the operator's station. (C) Temporary alternative measures: (ii) Trolley travel deceleration device. Temporary alternative measure: (iii) Boom hoist deceleration device. Temporary alternative measure: (iv) Load hoist deceleration device. Temporary alternative measure: (v) Wind speed indicator. Temporary alternative measures: (vi) Load indicating device. Temporary alternative measures: (f) Inspections. (2) Pre-erection inspection. (i) The qualified person must pay particular attention to components that will be difficult to inspect thoroughly during shift inspections. (ii) If the qualified person determines that a component is damaged or worn to the extent that it would create a safety hazard if used on the crane, that component must not be erected on the crane unless it is repaired and, upon reinspection by the qualified person, found to no longer create a safety hazard. (iii) If the qualified person determines that, though not presently a safety hazard, the component needs to be monitored, the employer must ensure that the component is checked in the monthly inspections. Any such determination must be documented, and the documentation must be available to any individual who conducts a monthly inspection. (3) Post-erection inspection. (i) A load test using certified weights, or scaled weights using a certified scale with a current certificate of calibration, must be conducted after each erection. (ii) The load test must be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions when available. Where these instructions are unavailable, the test must be conducted in accordance with written load test procedures developed by a registered professional engineer familiar with the type of equipment involved. (4) Monthly. (i) Tower (mast) bolts and other structural bolts (for loose or dislodged condition) from the base of the tower crane up or, if the crane is tied to or braced by the structure, those above the upper-most brace support. (ii) The upper-most tie-in, braces, floor supports and floor wedges where the tower crane is supported by the structure, for loose or dislodged components. (5) Annual. § 1926.1436 Derricks. (a) This section contains supplemental requirements for derricks, whether temporarily or permanently mounted; all sections of this subpart apply to derricks unless specified otherwise. A derrick is powered equipment consisting of a mast or equivalent member that is held at or near the end by guys or braces, with or without a boom, and its hoisting mechanism. The mast/equivalent member and/or the load is moved by the hoisting mechanism (typically base-mounted) and operating ropes. Derricks include: A-frame, basket, breast, Chicago boom, gin pole (except gin poles used for erection of communication towers), guy, shearleg, stiffleg, and variations of such equipment. (b) Operation—procedures. (2) Load chart contents. (i) Rated capacity at corresponding ranges of boom angle or operating radii. (ii) Specific lengths of components to which the rated capacities apply. (iii) Required parts for hoist reeving. (iv) Size and construction of rope must be included on the load chart or in the operating manual. (3) Load chart location Permanent installations. (ii) Non-permanent installations. (c) Construction General requirements. (ii) Welding of load sustaining members must conform to recommended practices in ANSI/AWS D14.3-94 (incorporated by reference, see see (2) Guy derricks. (ii) Guy derricks must not be used unless the employer has the following guy information from the manufacturer or a qualified person, when not available from the manufacturer: (A) The number of guys. (B) The spacing around the mast. (C) The size, grade, and construction of rope to be used for each guy. (iii) For guy derricks manufactured after December 18, 1970, in addition to the information required in paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, the employer must have the following guy information from the manufacturer or a qualified person, when not available from the manufacturer: (A) The amount of initial sag or tension. (B) The amount of tension in guy line rope at anchor. (iv) The mast base must permit the mast to rotate freely with allowance for slight tilting of the mast caused by guy slack. (v) The mast cap must: (A) Permit the mast to rotate freely. (B) Withstand tilting and cramping caused by the guy loads. (C) Be secured to the mast to prevent disengagement during erection. (D) Be provided with means for attaching guy ropes. (3) Stiffleg derricks. (ii) The stifflegs must be capable of withstanding the loads imposed at any point of operation within the load chart range. (iii) The mast base must: (A) Permit the mast to rotate freely (when necessary). (B) Permit deflection of the mast without binding. (iv) The mast must be prevented from lifting out of its socket when the mast is in tension. (v) The stiffleg connecting member at the top of the mast must: (A) Permit the mast to rotate freely (when necessary). (B) Withstand the loads imposed by the action of the stifflegs. (C) Be secured so as to oppose separating forces. (4) Gin pole derricks. Exception: (ii) The base of the gin pole must permit movement of the pole (when necessary). (iii) The gin pole must be anchored at the base against horizontal forces (when such forces are present). (5) Chicago boom derricks. (i) Permit the derrick to swing at all permitted operating radii and mounting heights between fittings. (ii) Accommodate attachment to the upright member of the host structure. (iii) Withstand the forces applied when configured and operated in accordance with the manufacturer's/builder's procedures and within its rated capacity. (iv) Prevent the boom or topping lift from lifting out under tensile forces. (d) Anchoring and guying. (2) Guy derricks. (ii) The guys must be secured to the ground or other firm anchorage. (iii) The anchorage and guying must be designed to withstand maximum horizontal and vertical forces encountered when operating within rated capacity with the particular guy slope and spacing specified for the application. (3) Stiffleg derricks. (ii) The mast base and stifflegs must be designed to withstand maximum horizontal and vertical forces encountered when operating within rated capacity with the particular stiffleg spacing and slope specified for the application. (e) Swingers and hoists. (2) Hoists. see (A) Sections 7-1.1 (“Load ratings and markings”). (B) Section 7-1.2 (“Construction”), except: 7-1.2.13 (“Operator's cab”); 7-1.2.15 (“Fire extinguishers”). (C) Section 7-1.3 (“Installation”). (D) Applicable terms in section 7-0.2 (“Definitions”). (ii) Load tests for new hoists. (iii) Repaired or modified hoists. (iv) Load test procedure. (A) The test load must be hoisted a vertical distance to assure that the load is supported by the hoist and held by the hoist brake(s). (B) The test load must be lowered, stopped and held with the brake(s). (C) The hoist must not be used unless a competent person determines that the test has been passed. (f) Operational aids. (2) Boom angle aid. (i) The boom hoist cable must be marked with caution and stop marks. The stop marks must correspond to maximum and minimum allowable boom angles. The caution and stop marks must be in view of the operator, or a spotter who is in direct communication with the operator; or (ii) An electronic or other device that signals the operator in time to prevent the boom from moving past its maximum and minimum angles, or automatically prevents such movement, is used. (3) Load weight/capacity devices. Temporary alternative measures: See (ii) A load weight/capacity device that is not working properly must be repaired no later than 30 days after the deficiency occurs. Exception: (g) Post-assembly approval and testing—new or reinstalled derricks Anchorages. (ii) If using a rock or hairpin anchorage, the qualified person must determine if any special testing of the anchorage is needed. If so, it must be tested accordingly. (2) Functional test. (i) Lifting and lowering the hook(s) through the full range of hook travel. (ii) Raising and lowering the boom through the full range of boom travel. (iii) Swinging in each direction through the full range of swing. (iv) Actuating the anti two-block and boom hoist limit devices (if provided). (v) Actuating locking, limiting and indicating devices (if provided). (3) Load test. (i) Test loads must be at least 100% and no more than 110% of the rated capacity, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer or qualified person, but in no event must the test load be less than the maximum anticipated load. (ii) The test must consist of: (A) Hoisting the test load a few inches and holding to verify that the load is supported by the derrick and held by the hoist brake(s). (B) Swinging the derrick, if applicable, the full range of its swing, at the maximum allowable working radius for the test load. (C) Booming the derrick up and down within the allowable working radius for the test load. (D) Lowering, stopping and holding the load with the brake(s). (iii) The derrick must not be used unless the competent person determines that the test has been passed. (4) Documentation. (h) Load testing repaired or modified derricks. (i) [Reserved] (j) Power failure procedures. (1) Setting all brakes or locking devices. (2) Moving all clutch and other power controls to the off position. (k) Use of winch heads. (2) While a winch head is being used, the operator must be within reach of the power unit control lever. (l) [Reserved] (m) Securing the boom. (2) When taken out of service for 30 days or more, the boom must be secured by one of the following methods: (i) Laid down. (ii) Secured to a stationary member, as nearly under the head as possible, by attachment of a sling to the load block. (iii) For guy derricks, lifted to a vertical position and secured to the mast. (iv) For stiffleg derricks, secured against the stiffleg. (n) The process of jumping the derrick must be supervised by the A/D director. (o) Derrick operations must be supervised by a competent person. (p) Inspections. (1) Daily: (2) Annual. (ii) Foundation supports for continued ability to sustain the imposed loads. (q) Qualification and training. § 1926.1437 Floating cranes/derricks and land cranes/derricks on barges. (a) This section contains supplemental requirements for floating cranes/derricks and land cranes/derricks on barges, pontoons, vessels or other means of flotation ( i.e., (b) General requirements. (c) Work area control. (2) The employer must either: (i) Erect and maintain control lines, warning lines, railings or similar barriers to mark the boundaries of the hazard areas; or (ii) Clearly mark the hazard areas by a combination of warning signs (such as, “Danger—Swing/Crush Zone”) and high visibility markings on the equipment that identify the hazard areas. In addition, the employer must train each employee to understand what these markings signify. (d) Keeping clear of the load. (e) Additional safety devices. (1) Barge, pontoon, vessel or other means of flotation list and trim device. The safety device must be located in the cab or, when there is no cab, at the operator's station. (2) Positive equipment house lock. (3) Wind speed and direction indicator. (f) Operational aids. (2) Section 1926.1416(e)(4) (Load weighing and similar devices) does not apply to dragline, clamshell (grapple), magnet, drop ball, container handling, concrete bucket, and pile driving work performed under this section. (g) Accessibility of procedures applicable to equipment operation. (1) Rated capacities (load charts) are posted at the operator's station. If the operator's station is moveable (such as with pendant-controlled equipment), the load charts are posted on the equipment. (2) Procedures applicable to the operation of the equipment (other than load charts), recommended operating speeds, special hazard warnings, instructions and operators manual, must be readily available on board the vessel/flotation device. (h) Inspections. (1) Shift. (2) Monthly. (i) The means used to secure/attach the equipment to the vessel/flotation device is in proper condition, including inspection for wear, corrosion, and, when applicable, insufficient tension. (ii) The vessel/flotation device is not taking on water. (iii) The deckload is properly secured. (iv) The vessel/flotation device is watertight based on the condition of the chain lockers, storage, fuel compartments, and hatches. (v) The firefighting and lifesaving equipment is in place and functional. (3) The shift and monthly inspections are conducted by a competent person, and: (i) If any deficiency is identified, an immediate determination is made by a qualified person whether the deficiency constitutes a hazard. (ii) If the deficiency is determined to constitute a hazard, the vessel/flotation device is removed from service until the deficiency has been corrected. (4) Annual: external vessel/flotation device inspection. (i) The external portion of the barge, pontoons, vessel or other means of flotation used is inspected annually by a qualified person who has expertise with respect to vessels/flotation devices and that the inspection includes the following items: (A) The items identified in paragraphs (h)(1) ( Shift Monthly (B) Cleats, bitts, chocks, fenders, capstans, ladders, and stanchions, for significant corrosion, wear, deterioration, or deformation that could impair the function of these items. (C) External evidence of leaks and structural damage; evidence of leaks and damage below the waterline may be determined through internal inspection of the vessel/flotation device. (D) Four-corner draft readings. (E) Firefighting equipment for serviceability. (ii) Rescue skiffs, lifelines, work vests, life preservers and ring buoys are inspected for proper condition. (iii) If any deficiency is identified, an immediate determination is made by the qualified person whether the deficiency constitutes a hazard or, though not yet a hazard, needs to be monitored in the monthly inspections. (A) If the qualified person determines that the deficiency constitutes a hazard, the vessel/flotation device is removed from service until it has been corrected. See (B) If the qualified person determines that, though not presently a hazard, the deficiency needs to be monitored, the deficiency is checked in the monthly inspections. (5) Four-year: internal vessel/flotation device inspection. (i) A marine engineer, marine architect, licensed surveyor, or other qualified person who has expertise with respect to vessels/flotation devices surveys the internal portion of the barge, pontoons, vessel, or other means of flotation. (ii) If the surveyor identifies a deficiency, an immediate determination is made by the surveyor as to whether the deficiency constitutes a hazard or, though not yet a hazard, needs to be monitored in the monthly or annual inspections, as appropriate. (A) If the surveyor determines that the deficiency constitutes a hazard, the vessel/flotation device is removed from service until it has been corrected. (B) If the surveyor determines that, though not presently a hazard, the deficiency needs to be monitored, the deficiency is checked in the monthly or annual inspections, as appropriate. (6) Documentation. (i) [Reserved] (j) Working with a diver. (1) If a crane/derrick is used to get a diver into and out of the water, it must not be used for any other purpose until the diver is back on board. When used for more than one diver, it must not be used for any other purpose until all divers are back on board. (2) The operator must remain at the controls of the crane/derrick at all times. (3) In addition to the requirements in §§ 1926.1419 through 1926.1422 (Signals), either: (i) A clear line of sight must be maintained between the operator and tender; or (ii) The signals between the operator and tender must be transmitted electronically. (4) The means used to secure the crane/derrick to the vessel/flotation device ( see (k) Manufacturer's specifications and limitations. (2) The employer must ensure that the manufacturer's specifications and limitations with respect to environmental, operational, and in-transit loads for a barge, pontoon, vessel, or other means of flotation are not exceeded or violated. (3) When the manufacturer's specifications and limitations are unavailable, the employer must ensure that the specifications and limitations established by a qualified person with respect to environmental, operational and in-transit loads for the barge, pontoons, vessel, or other means of flotation are not exceeded or violated. (l) [Reserved] (m) Floating cranes/derricks. (1) Load charts. (ii) The employer must ensure that load charts take into consideration a minimum wind speed of 40 miles per hour. (2) The employer must ensure that the requirements for maximum allowable list and maximum allowable trim as specified in Table M1 of this section are met. Table M1 Rated capacity Maximum allowable list Maximum allowable trim Equipment designed for marine use by permanent attachment (other than derricks): 25 tons or less 5 5 Over 25 tons 7 7 Derricks designed for marine use by permanent attachment: Any rated capacity 10 10 (3) The employer must ensure that the equipment is stable under the conditions specified in Tables M2 and M3 of this section. ( Note Table M2 Operated at Wind speed Minimum freeboard Rated capacity 60 2 Rated capacity plus 25% 60 1 High boom, no load 60 2 Table M3 Operated at Wind speed For backward stability of the boom: High boom, no load, full back list (least stable condition) 90 mph. (4) If the equipment is employer-made, it must not be used unless the employer has documents demonstrating that the load charts and applicable parameters for use meet the requirements of paragraphs (m)(1) through (3) of this section. Such documents must be signed by a registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to the design of this type of equipment (including the means of flotation). (5) The employer must ensure that the barge, pontoons, vessel or other means of flotation used: (i) Are structurally sufficient to withstand the static and dynamic loads of the crane/derrick when operating at the crane/derrick's maximum rated capacity with all planned and actual deck loads and ballasted compartments. (ii) Have a subdivided hull with one or more longitudinal watertight bulkheads for reducing the free-surface effect. (iii) Have access to void compartments to allow for inspection and pumping. (n) Land cranes/derricks. (1) The rated capacity of the equipment (including but not limited to modification of load charts) applicable for use on land is reduced to: (i) Account for increased loading from list, trim, wave action, and wind. (ii) Be applicable to a specified location(s) on the specific barge, pontoons, vessel or other means of flotation that will be used, under the environmental conditions expected and encountered. (iii) The conditions required in paragraphs (n)(3) and (n)(4) of this section are met. (2) The rated capacity modification required in paragraph (n)(1) of this section is performed by the equipment manufacturer, or a qualified person who has expertise with respect to both land crane/derrick capacity and the stability of vessels/flotation devices. (3) For list and trim. (i) The maximum allowable list and the maximum allowable trim for the barge, pontoon, vessel or other means of flotation must not exceed the amount necessary to ensure that the conditions in paragraph (n)(4) of this section are met. In addition, the maximum allowable list and the maximum allowable trim does not exceed the least of the following: 5 degrees, the amount specified by the crane/derrick manufacturer, or, when, an amount is not so specified, the amount specified by the qualified person. (ii) The maximum allowable list and the maximum allowable trim for the land crane/derrick does not exceed the amount specified by the crane/derrick manufacturer, or, when, an amount is not so specified, the amount specified by the qualified person. (4) For the following conditions: (i) All deck surfaces of the barge, pontoons, vessel or other means of flotation used are above water. (ii) The entire bottom area of the barge, pontoons, vessel or other means of flotation used is submerged. (5) Physical attachment, corralling, rails system and centerline cable system meet the requirements in Option (1), Option (2), Option (3), or Option (4) of this section, and that whichever option is used also meets the requirements of paragraph (n)(5)(v) of this section. (i) Option (1)—Physical attachment. (ii) Option (2)—Corralling. i.e., (iii) Option (3)—Rails. (iv) Option (4)—Centerline cable system. (A) The wire rope and attachments are of sufficient size and strength to support the side load of crane/derrick. (B) The wire rope is attached physically to the vessel/flotation device. (C) The wire rope is attached to the crane/derrick by appropriate attachment methods (such as shackles or sheaves) on the undercarriage, and that the method used will allow the crew to secure the crane/derrick from movement during operation and to move the crane/derrick longitudinally along the vessel/flotation device for repositioning. (D) Means are installed to prevent the crane/derrick from passing the forward or aft end of the wire rope attachments. (E) The crane/derrick is secured from movement during operation. (v) The systems/means used to comply with Option (1), Option (2), Option (3), or Option (4) of this section are designed by a marine engineer, registered professional engineer familiar with floating crane/derrick design, or qualified person familiar with floating crane/derrick design. (6) Exception. (i) A marine engineer or registered professional engineer familiar with floating crane/derrick design develops and signs a written plan for the use of the mobile auxiliary crane. (ii) The plan is designed so that the applicable requirements of this section are met despite the position, travel, operation, and lack of physical attachment (or corralling, use of rails or cable system) of the mobile auxiliary crane. (iii) The plan specifies the areas of the deck where the mobile auxiliary crane is permitted to be positioned, travel, and operate, and the parameters and limitations of such movements and operation. (iv) The deck is marked to identify the permitted areas for positioning, travel, and operation. (v) The plan specifies the dynamic and environmental conditions that must be present for use of the plan. (vi) If the dynamic and environmental conditions in paragraph (n)(6)(v) of this section are exceeded, the mobile auxiliary crane is attached physically or corralled in accordance with Option (1), Option (2) or Option (4) of paragraph (n)(5) of this section. (7) The barge, pontoons, vessel or other means of flotation used: (i) Are structurally sufficient to withstand the static and dynamic loads of the crane/derrick when operating at the crane/derrick's maximum rated capacity with all anticipated deck loads and ballasted compartments. (ii) Have a subdivided hull with one or more longitudinal watertight bulkheads for reducing the free surface effect. (iii) Have access to void compartments to allow for inspection and pumping. § 1926.1438 Overhead & gantry cranes. (a) Permanently installed overhead and gantry cranes. (b) Overhead and gantry cranes that are not permanently installed in a facility. (2) The following requirements apply to equipment identified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section: (i) Sections 1926.1400 through 1926.1414; §§ 1926.1417 through 1926.1425; § 1926.1426(d), §§ 1926.1427 through 1926.1434; §§ 1926.1437, 1926.1439, and 1926.1441. (ii) The following portions of § 1910.179: (A) Paragraphs (b)(5),(6),(7); (e)(1),(3),(5),(6); (f)(1),(4); (g); (h)(1),(3); (k); and (n) of § 1910.179. (B) The definitions in § 1910.179(a) except for “hoist” and “load.” For those words, the definitions in § 1926.1401 apply. (C) Section 1910.179(b)(2), but only where the equipment identified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section (§ 1926.1438) was manufactured before September 19, 2001. (iii) For equipment manufactured on or after September 19, 2001, the following sections of ASME B30.2-2005 (incorporated by reference, see § 1926.1439 Dedicated pile drivers. (a) The provisions of subpart CC apply to dedicated pile drivers, except as specified in this section. (b) Section 1926.1416(d)(3) (Anti two-blocking device) does not apply. (c) Section 1926.1416(e)(4) (Load weighing and similar devices) applies only to dedicated pile drivers manufactured after November 8, 2011. (d) In § 1926.1433, only §§ 1926.1433(d) and (e) apply to dedicated pile drivers. § 1926.1440 Sideboom cranes. (a) The provisions of this standard apply, except § 1926.1402 (Ground conditions), § 1926.1415 (Safety devices), § 1926.1416 (Operational aids), and § 1926.1427 (Operator qualification and certification). (b) Section 1926.1426 (Free fall and controlled load lowering) applies, except § 1926.1426(a)(2)(i). Sideboom cranes in which the boom is designed to free fall (live boom) are permitted only if manufactured prior to November 8, 2010. (c) Sideboom cranes mounted on wheel or crawler tractors must meet all of the following requirements of ASME B30.14-2004 (incorporated by reference, see (1) Section 14-1.1 (“Load Ratings”). (2) Section 14-1.3 (“Side Boom Tractor Travel”). (3) Section 14-1.5 (“Ropes and Reeving Accessories”). (4) Section 14-1.7.1 (“Booms”). (5) Section 14-1.7.2 (“General Requirements—Exhaust Gases”). (6) Section 14-1.7.3 (“General Requirements—Stabilizers (Wheel-Type Side Boom Tractors)”). (7) Section 14-1.7.4 (“General Requirements—Welded Construction”). (8) Section 14-1.7.6 (“General Requirements—Clutch and Brake Protection”). (9) Section 14-2.2.2 (“Testing—Rated Load Test”), except that it applies only to equipment that has been altered or modified. (10) In section 14-3.1.2 (“Operator Qualifications”), paragraph (a), except the phrase “When required by law.” (11) In section 14-3.1.3 (“Operating Practices”), paragraphs (e), (f)(1)-(f)(4), (f)(6), (f)(7), (h), and (i). (12) In section 14-3.2.3 (“Moving the Load”), paragraphs (j), (l), and (m). § 1926.1441 Equipment with a rated hoisting/lifting capacity of 2,000 pounds or less. The following paragraphs of this section specify requirements for employers using equipment with a maximum rated hoisting/lifting capacity of 2,000 pounds or less. (a) The employer using this equipment must comply with the following provisions of this subpart: § 1926.1400 (Scope); § 1926.1401 (Definitions); § 1926.1402 (Ground conditions); § 1926.1403 (Assembly/disassembly—selection of manufacturer or employer procedures); § 1926.1406 (Assembly/disassembly—employer procedures); §§ 1926.1407 through 1926.1411 (Power line safety); § 1926.1412(c) ( Post-assembly (b) Assembly/disassembly. (2) Components and configuration. (i) The selection of components, and the configuration of the equipment, that affect the capacity or safe operation of the equipment complies with either the: (A) Manufacturer instructions, recommendations, limitations, and specifications. When these documents and information are unavailable, a registered professional engineer familiar with the type of equipment involved must approve, in writing, the selection and configuration of components; or (B) Approved modifications that meet the requirements of § 1926.1434 (Equipment modifications). (ii) Post-assembly inspection. see (3) Manufacturer prohibitions. (c) Operation—procedures. (2) Unavailable operation procedures. (i) When the manufacturer's procedures are unavailable, develop, and ensure compliance with, all procedures necessary for the safe operation of the equipment and attachments. (ii) Ensure that procedures for the operational controls are developed by a qualified person. (iii) Ensure that procedures related to the capacity of the equipment are developed and signed by a registered professional engineer familiar with the equipment. (3) Accessibility. (i) The load chart is available to the operator at the control station; (ii) Procedures applicable to the operation of the equipment, recommended operating speeds, special hazard warnings, instructions, and operator's manual are readily available for use by the operator. (iii) When rated capacities are available at the control station only in electronic form and a failure occurs that makes the rated capacities inaccessible, the operator immediately ceases operations or follows safe shut-down procedures until the rated capacities (in electronic or other form) are available. (d) Safety devices and operational aids. (2) Anti two-blocking. (e) Operator qualifications. (f) Signal person qualifications. (g) [Reserved] (h) Inspections. (i) [Reserved] (j) Hoisting personnel. (k) Design. § 1926.1442 Railroad roadway maintenance machines. (a) General rule. (b) Exceptions Operator certification, training, and evaluation. (2) Rail clamps, rail stops, and work-area controls. (ii) The requirement for rail stops in § 1926.1415(a)(6) does not apply; and (iii) The work-area controls specified by § 1926.1424(a)(2) do not apply. (3) Out-of-level work. (4) Dragging a load sideways. (5) Boom-hoist limiting device. (6) Manufacturer guidance for modifications covered by § 1926.1434. (7) Other manufacturer guidance. [85 FR 57122, Sept. 15, 2020] § 1926.1443 Severability. Should a court of competent jurisdiction hold any provision(s) of subpart CC to be invalid, such action shall not affect any other provision of the subpart. [75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010. Redesignated at 85 FR 57122, Sept. 15, 2020] Appendix A to Subpart CC of Part 1926—Standard Hand Signals Appendix B to Subpart CC of Part 1926—Assembly/Disassembly: Sample Procedures for Minimizing the Risk of Unintended Dangerous Boom Movement 1. Section 1926.1404(f)(1) provides that when pins (or similar devices) are being removed, employees must not be under the boom, jib, or other components, except where the requirements of § 1926.1404(f)(2) are met. The exception in § 1926.1404(f)(2) applies when the employer demonstrates that site constraints require one or more employees to be under the boom, jib, or other components when pins (or similar devices) are being removed. In such a situation, the A/D director must implement procedures that minimize the risk of unintended dangerous movement and minimize the duration and extent of exposure under the boom. The following scenario is an example of how the exception applies: A boom cannot be disassembled on the ground because of aboveground piping (as might be found, for example, in an oil refinery) that precludes lowering the boom to the ground. The boom must therefore be disassembled in the air, and the employees who remove the pins must perform that work from an aerial lift whose base is positioned on one side (the near side) of the boom. To gain access to the pins on the far side, the aerial lift basket must move under the boom, since, due to lack of room, the aerial lift cannot be repositioned on the far side. Due to lack of room, the aerial lift cannot be repositioned on the far side, so the aerial basket must move under the boom to gain access to the pins on the far side. To minimize the risk of unintended dangerous movement while the pins are removed, the A/D director uses an assist crane that is rigged to support the boom section that is being detached, using particular care to ensure that the section end that is near the employee(s) removing the pins is well supported. The duration and extent of exposure is minimized by removing the far side pins first, moving the aerial lift basket as soon as possible to the near side so that the employees are no longer under the boom, and then removing the near side pins. 2. Section 1926.1404(h)(6)(i) provides that, during assembly/disassembly, the center of gravity of the load must be identified if that is necessary for the method used for maintaining stability. Section 1926.1404(h)(6)(ii) states that, where there is insufficient information to accurately identify the center of gravity, measures designed to prevent unintended dangerous movement resulting from an inaccurate identification of the center of gravity must be used. An example of the application of § 1926.1404(h)(6)(ii) is as follows: The boom is assembled by lowering boom sections sequentially into place using an assist crane. The A/D director's plan is to keep the boom sections stable while they are lowered into place by attaching the assist crane hoist line above the center of gravity of each section. However, in assembling the non-symmetrical top section of the boom, the A/D director is not able to determine where to attach the assist crane hoist line so that it is above the center of gravity. In this situation, before raising the section, all personnel are kept clear of the section and the section is first raised a few inches to determine whether it tips when raised (if it did tip, it would indicate it is not rigged over the center of gravity). If this occurs, the hoist line is repositioned and the procedure repeated (with employees kept clear of the section while it is raised) until the A/D director determines that it is rigged over the center of gravity and can be moved into place without dangerous movement. Appendix C to Subpart CC of Part 1926—Operator Certification: Written Examination: Technical Knowledge Criteria This appendix contains information for employers, accredited testing organizations, auditors and government entities developing criteria for a written examination to test an individual's technical knowledge relating to the operation of cranes. (a) General technical information. (1) The functions and limitations of the crane and attachments. (2) Wire rope: (i) Background information necessary to understand the inspection and removal from service criteria in § 1926.1413 and § 1926.1414. (ii) Capacity and when multi-part rope is needed. (iii) Relationship between line pull and safe working load. (iv) How to determine the manufacturer's recommended rope for the crane. (3) Rigging devices and their use, such as: (i) Slings. (ii) Spreaders. (iii) Lifting beams. (iv) Wire rope fittings, such as clips, shackles and wedge sockets. (v) Saddles (softeners). (vi) Clamps (beams). (4) The technical limitations of protective measures against electrical hazards: (i) Grounding. (ii) Proximity warning devices. (iii) Insulated links. (iv) Boom cages. (v) Proximity to electric power lines, radii, and microwave structures. (5) The effects of load share and load transfer in multi-crane lifts. (6) Basic crane terms. (7) The basics of machine power flow systems. (i) Mechanical. (ii) Electrical. (iii) Pneumatic. (iv) Hydraulic. (v) Combination. (8) The significance of the instruments and gauge readings. (9) The effects of thermal expansion and contraction in hydraulic cylinders. (10) Background information necessary to understand the requirements of pre-operation and inspection. (11) How to use the safety devices and operational aids required under § 1926.1415 and § 1926.1416. (12) The difference between duty-cycle and lifting operations. (13) How to calculate net capacity for every possible configuration of the equipment using the manufacturer's load chart. (14) How to use manufacturer-approved attachments and their effect on the equipment. (15) How to obtain dimensions, weight, and center of gravity of the load. (16) The effects of dynamic loading from: (i) Wind. (ii) Stopping and starting. (iii) Impact loading. (iv) Moving with the load. (17) The effect of side loading. (18) The principles of backward stability. (b) Site information. (1) How to identify the suitability of the supporting ground/surface to support the expected loads of the operation. Elements include: (i) Weaknesses below the surface (such as voids, tanks, loose fill). (ii) Weaknesses on the surface (such as retaining walls, slopes, excavations, depressions). (2) Proper use of mats, blocking/cribbing, outriggers, stabilizers, or crawlers. (3) Identification of site hazards such as power lines, piping, and traffic. (4) How to review operation plans with supervisors and other workers (such as the signal person), including how to determine working height, boom length, load radius, and travel clearance. (5) How to determine if there is adequate room for extension of crawlers or outriggers/stabilizers and counterweights. (c) Operations. (1) How to pick, carry, swing and place the load smoothly and safely on rubber tires and on outriggers/stabilizers or crawlers (where applicable). (2) How to communicate at the site with supervisors, the crew and the signal person. (3) Proper procedures and methods of reeving wire ropes and methods of reeving multiple-part lines and selecting the proper load block and/or ball. (4) How to react to changes in conditions that affect the safe operation of the equipment. (5) How to shut down and secure the equipment properly when leaving it unattended. (6) Know how to apply the manufacturer's specifications for operating in various weather conditions, and understand how environmental conditions affect the safe operation of the equipment. (7) How to properly level the equipment. (8) How to verify the weight of the load and rigging prior to initiating the lift. (9) How to determine where the load is to be picked up and placed and how to verify the radii. (10) Know basic rigging procedures. (11) How to carry out the shift inspection required in this subpart. (12) Know that the following operations require specific procedures and skill levels: (i) Multi-crane lifts. (ii) Hoisting personnel. (iii) Clamshell/dragline operations. (iv) Pile driving and extracting. (v) Concrete operations, including poured-in-place and tilt-up. (vi) Demolition operations. (vii) Operations on water. (viii) Magnet operations. (ix) Multi-drum operations. (13) Know the proper procedures for operating safely under the following conditions: (i) Traveling with suspended loads. (ii) Approaching a two-block condition. (iii) Operating near power lines. (iv) Hoisting personnel. (v) Using other than full outrigger/crawler or stabilizer extensions. (vi) Lifting loads from beneath the surface of the water. (vii) Using various approved counterweight configurations. (viii) Handling loads out of the operator's vision (“operating in the blind”). (ix) Using electronic communication systems for signal communication. (14) Know the proper procedures for load control and the use of hand-held tag lines. (15) Know the emergency response procedure for: (i) Fires. (ii) Power line contact. (iii) Loss of stability. (iv) Control malfunction. (v) Two-blocking. (vi) Overload. (vii) Carrier or travel malfunction. (16) Know how to properly use outriggers and stabilizers in accordance with manufacturer specifications. (d) Use of load charts. (1) Know the terminology necessary to use load charts. (2) Know how to ensure that the load chart is the appropriate chart for the equipment in its particular configuration and application. (3) Know how to use load charts. This includes knowing: (i) The operational limitations of load charts and footnotes. (ii) How to relate the chart to the configuration of the crane, crawlers, or outriggers/stabilizers extended or retracted, jib erected or offset, and various counterweight configurations. (iii) The difference between structural capacity and capacity limited by stability. (iv) What is included in capacity ratings. (v) The range diagram and its relationship to the load chart. (vi) The work area chart and its relationship to the load chart. (vii) Where to find and how to use the “parts-of-line” information. (4) Know how to use the load chart together with the load indicators and/or load moment devices. Appendix A to Part 1926—Designations for General Industry Standards Incorporated Into Body of Construction Standards New Designations for General Industry Standards Incorporated Into Body of Construction Standards 1926 Designations for Applicable 1910 Standards New § no. and/or para. Source § no. and/or para. 1926.20 (c) 1910.5 (a) [Do.] (d) [Do.] (c) [Do.] (e) [Do.] (d) 1926.32(g) 1910.12(b) 1926.33 1910.20 1926.34 (a) 1910.36(b)(4) [Do.] (b) 1910.37 (q)(1) [Do.] (c) [Do.] (k)(2) 1926.35 1910.38(a) 1926.50(g) 1910.151(c) 1926.51(a)(6) 1910.141(a)(2)(v) [Do.] (d)(2) [Do.] (h) [Do.] (f) (2)-(4) [Do.] (d) (1)-(3) [Do.] (g) [Do.] (g)(2) [Do.] (h) [Do.] (a)(5) [Do.] (i) [Do.] (e) 1926.53 (c)-(r) 1910.96 1926.57 (f)-(i) 1910.94 1926.64 1910.119 1926.65 1910.120 1926.66 (a) 1910.107 (a) [Do.] (b) [Do.] (b) (1)-(10) [Do.] (c)-(d) [Do.] (c)-(d) [Do.] (e)-(g) [Do.] (h)-(j) 1926.95 1910.132 1926.96 1910.136 1926.97 (a)-(e) 1910.156(e) [Do.] (f)-(h) [Do.] Subpt. L App. E 1926.98 1910.156(f) 1926.102(a) (6) 1910.133(a) (2) [Do.] (7) [Do.] (4) [Do.] (8) [Do.] (5) 1926.103 (d) 1910.134 (a) [Do.] (e) [Do.] (b) [Do.] (f)-(i) [Do.] (d)-(g) 1926.150(c)(1) (xi) 1910.157 (g)(1) [Do.] (xii) [Do.] (g)(2) [Do.] (xiii) [Do.] (c)(4) [Do.] (xiv) [Do.] (e)(3) 1926.152 (b)(5) 1910.107(e)(2) [Do.] (h) 1910.106(j) [Do.] (i) [Do.] (b) [Do.] (j) [Do.] (c) [Do.] (k) (1)-(3) [Do.] (g)(4) [Do.] (k)(4) [Do.] (a)(22) 1926.153(a) (3) 1910.110(a)(4) [Do.] (m) (1) [Do.] (d)(1) [Do.] (2) [Do.] (d)(2) [Do.] (3) [Do.] (d)(7)(vii) [Do.] (4) [Do.] (d)(7)(viii) [Do.] (n) [Do.] (b)(5)(iii) [Do.] (o) [Do.] (d)(10) 1926.156 1910.160 1926.157 1910.162 1926.158 1910.164 1926.159 1910.165 1926.200(c)(3) 1910.145(d)(4) 1926.250(c) 1910.176(c) [Do.] (d) (1)-(4) 1910.30(a) (1), (2), (4) and (5) 1926.251(a)(5) 1910.184(a) [Do.] (a)(6) [Do.] (d) [Do.] (b)(6)(i)-(ii) [Do.] (e)(3)(i)-(ii) [Do.] (c)(6)-(7) [Do.] (c) (2)-(3) [Do.] (c)(8) [Do.] (c)(5) [Do.] (c)(9) [Do.] (c)(7) [Do.] (c)(10)-(12) [Do.] (c)(10)-(12) [Do.] (c)(13)-(15) [Do.](f) (2)-(4) [Do.] (d)(3)-(6) [Do.] (h) (2)-(5) [Do.] (e)(3)-(5) [Do.] (i) (2)-(4) [Do.] (e)(6)-(7) [Do.] (i) (6)-(7) [Do.] (e)(8) [Do.] (i)(9) 1926.300(b) (3) 1910.212(a)(1) [Do.] (4) [Do.] (a)(3) [Do.] (5) [Do.] (a)(5) [Do.] (6) [Do.] (b) [Do.] (7) 1910.215(b)(9) [Do.] (8) and (9) [Do.] (b) (3) and (4) 1926.302(b)(10) 1910.244(b) 1926.303(b)(2) 1910.215(a) (2) [Do.] (e) [Do.] (4) 1926.304 (g) 1910.213(h)(1) [Do.] (h) [Do.] (d)(1) [Do.] (i) [Do.] (c)(1) 1926.305(d)(1) 1910.244(a)(2) (iii)-(viii) 1926.306 1910.169 1926.307 1910.219 1926.350(a) (10) 1910.253(b) (4)(iii) [Do.] (11) [Do.] (2)(ii) [Do.] (12) 1910.101(b) 1926.353(b)(3) 1910.252(b)(4)(iv) 1926.416 (a)(4) 1910.333(c)(2) [Do.] (f) (1) [Do.] (c)(10) [Do.] (2) 1910.334(a)(1) [Do.] (3) [Do.] (a)(2)(iii) [Do.] (4) [Do.] (a)(5) [Do.] (5)-(6) [Do.] (b) (1)-(2) [Do.] (7)-(9) [Do.] (c) (1)-(3) [Do.] (10) [Do.] (d) 1926.417(d) 1910.333(b)(2) 1926.451(a) (22) 1910.28(a) (15) [Do.] (23) [Do.] (18) [Do.] (24) [Do.] (20) 1926.453 (a) 1910.29(a) [Do.] (b) [Do.] (c) 1926.600(a)(7) 1910.176(f) 1926.602(c)(1) (vii) 1910.178(m) (3) [Do.] (viii) [Do.] (12) 1926.900 (s) 1910.109 (g)(2)(ii) [Do.] (t) [Do.] (h)(3)(ii) 1926.905(u) [Do.] (e)(3)(iii) 1926.914(aa) [Do.] (a)(12) 1926.1050(b) 1910.21(g)(9) 1926.1071 1910.401 1926.1072 1910.402 1926.1076 1910.410 1926.1080 1910.420 1926.1081 1910.421 1926.1082 1910.422 1926.1083 1910.423 1926.1084 1910.424 1926.1085 1910.425 1926.1086 1910.426 1926.1087 1910.427 1926.1090 1910.430 1926.1091 1910.440 1926.1092 1910.441 1926.1102 1910.1002 1926.1103 1910.1003 1926.1104 1910.1004 1926.1105 1910.1005 1926.1106 1910.1006 1926.1107 1910.1007 1926.1108 1910.1008 1926.1109 1910.1009 1926.1110 1910.1010 1926.1111 1910.1011 1926.1112 1910.1012 1926.1113 1910.1013 1926.1114 1910.1014 1926.1115 1910.1015 1926.1116 1910.1016 1926.1117 1910.1017 1926.1118 1910.1018 1926.1128 1910.1028 1926.1129 1910.1029 1926.1144 1910.1044 1926.1145 1910.1045 1926.1147 1910.1047 1926.1148 1910.1048 [58 FR 35305, June 30, 1993, as amended at 61 FR 9255, Mar. 7, 1996; 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010]

Related documents

• 50 CFR Part 600 — Magnuson-Stevens Act Provisions#512148
• 50 CFR Part 622 — Fisheries of the Caribbean, Gulf of America, and South Atlantic#512149
• 50 CFR Part 635 — Atlantic Highly Migratory Species#512150
• 50 CFR Part 648 — Fisheries of the Northeastern United States#512151
• 50 CFR Part 660 — Fisheries off West Coast States#512152